PC 2109 .06 CojSy 1 ^\-/'m^lmy m m LIBRARY OF CON^GRESS. I lux IDs I' ^^^ EI) STATES OF AMERICA.^ J. V. DOUVILLE'S SPEAKING FRENCH GRAMMAR, FORMING A SKUIES OF SIXTY EXPLANATORY LESSONS, WITH COLLOQUIAL ESSAYS, PARTICULARLY CALCULATED TO RENDER THE EASY TO ENGLISH PERSONS; TO WHICH IS ADDED A COMPREHENSIVE AND CLASSIFIED VOCABULARY, WITH A COLLECTION OF FAMILIAR PHRASES, AND VARIOUS MODELS OF NOTES, BILLS OF EXCHANGE, AND RECEIl'TS ; AND ALSO TWO TABLES OF THE RESPECTIVE VALUE OF THE FRENCH AND F.Nr.r.l«:M coiiss. THE FIFTH EDITION, CORRECTED AND ENLARGED. By J. V. D O U V I L L E, A.M.. PROFESSOR OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. LONDON: PUBLISHED FOR THE AUTHOR, BY SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO stationers' hall court. PARIS: BY A. AND W. GALIGNANI AND CO., RUE vivienne ; AND BY THE AUTHOR, RUE NEUVE DU MONT-THABOR, No. 10 1835. -fC a- 10^ ENTERED AT STATIONERS' HALL. London :— Printed by William Clowes and Sons, Duke Street, Stamford Street. ADVERTISEMENT TO THE THIRD EDITION, In preparing this Edition of the Speaking French Grammar for the press, the Author has spared no pains in his endeavours to give the work the greatest possible degree of perfection : every part of it has undergone a complete revision ; many of the rules and observations have been simplified and condensed, so as to render them more distinct and easy of recollection, while much additional and useful matter has been introduced. Notwithstanding these additions and improvements, the work has been compressed into a single octavo volume of a mo- derate size, printed with an entirely new and superior type, and is offered at a price, not only much below that of the former editions, but, with reference to its size and contents, lower than that of other books of a similar description. The rapid sale of two large impressions of this work, each within eighteen months from the date of publication, may be appealed to as some criterion of the public judgment in its favour. Truly grateful for such flattering success, the Author indulges a hope that the present Edition will be found much improved, and still more worthy of the liberal patronage by which the work has been distinguished. London, Blay 20, 1828. ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FOURTH EDITION, The increasing demand for the Speaking French Grammar (a work particularly calculated to render the speaking of French easy to English persons), is a very flattering proof that this new production is judged to answer the purpose of its peculiar adaptation. Truly grate- ful for such an encouraging patronage, the Author has endeavoured to bring this Edition still nearer to perfection. In order to accom- iv ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FIFTH EDITION. plish this, he has added at the end of the volume the respective value of the French and English coins, which will prove eminently useful, more especially to travellers, who are frequently at a loss on this most important point. This, among other improvements, will, no doubt, tend to ensure a continuation of the favour and approbation of the public. The Key to the essays of the third edition of this work will equally well serve for those of the fourth ; and, if properly tised as a book of reference, will greatly facilitate the progress of the pupil. The Author begs to suggest that, after an attentive perusal of the rules, the best means to acquire the necessary facility in pronouncing the essays is to read them several times aloud in French, before attempt- ing to write them. London, Jpril2Q, 1831. ADVERTISEMENT TO THE FIFTH EDITION. The new and useful additions with which the present Edition of the Speaking French Grammar is enriched will greatly contribute to ren- der it still more deserving the liberal patronage by which it has been hitherto distinguished. The whole of the work has been most care- fully revised by the Author, and he flatters himself that it will be found the best companion which a person desirous of learning the French language can possibly have. Those, in particular, who are deprived of the assistance of a master, will highly appreciate it, as, by following the plan recommended in the Key, they will be enabled to acquire a thorough knowledge of the language by themselves. Paris, Jmte 25, 1835. Rue Naive du Mont-Thabor, No. 10. PREFACE. The extensive use of the French language has given it such intrinsic value that a knowledge of it has long been considered indispensably necessary. The exposition of its elementary principles has conse- quently engaged more general investigation in England than, perhaps^ any other tongue, either ancient or modern. But the practical part of the language, though by far the most essential to an English student, has yet unfortunately been more or less neglected by all writers upon this subject. It is therefore from a conviction of there being ample room for improvement in this particular, that the present work has been undertaken. The Author's principal object has bccu lo render the speaking of French as easy of attainment to English persons in England, as if they studied in France. In order to accomphsh this great desidera- tum, he has particularly applied himself, in the composition of the contents of this Grammar, to arrange them so as to enable the pupil to store his mind with useful expressions, at the same time that he imbibes just notions of the philology of the language ; for, unless a learner be early habituated to conversation, and properly grounded in the principles of the language, he will never be able to converse with a native of France. The work is divided into four parts, and, in the arrangement of the materials, every thing belonging to the same head has been classed under one article, by which plan the trouble frequently experienced in referring to several places for information on the same subject is obviated. Ti PREFACE. The first part is appropriated to the orthography of the language, and contains instructions on pronunciation. The modern orthography, being in accordance with the decisions of the French Academy, has been adopted, and the remarks on pronunciation are in conformity with the present practice of the fashionable circles in Paris. The second and third parts, which treat of Etymology and Syntax^ are divided into fifty-nine lessons, embracing all the rules of the French Accidence and Syntax, with Colloquial Essays in illustration of the rules. Etymology being necessarily the foundation of that perfect acquaintance with the language which every well-educated person ought to possess, particular attention has been bestowed upon it. The difficulties usually attending this part of Grammar have, it is hoped, been considerably diminished by the explanatory system intro- duced throughout the work, and by the vaiious modifications of each class of words being displayed in simple sentences, in order to impress them more firmly on the student's memory. The nature of the French verbs is also exhibited in a new and perspicuous manner ; but much must be left to the good sense of the pupil, guided by the skill of his master, to form such combinations as are in consonance with his own ideas for the expression of hio wants, emotions, or passions. In doing this, his progress will be greatly facilitated, if the teacher asks him questions of familiar discourse, and requires him to translate them into French. These questions may be partly formed by introducing the personal pronouns in conjunction with a verb, as — T have had the pleasure to see your sister, fed eu le plaisir de voir Mile, voire sceur. Have you spoken to her? lui avez-vous parle? No, I have not spoken to her, non, je ne lui ai pas parle. Has not Mr. D* * spoken to her ? M. D** 7ie lui a-t-il point parle ? Yes, he has spoken to her, oui, il lui a parle ; and so on through all the simple and compound tenses^ taking care to introduce by degrees the use of the subjunctive mood, and varying the sentences from the affirmative to the negative and interrogative forms of the verb. Without this practice, the utmost proficiency in conjugating the verbs will scarcely be of any avail for speaking French ; but, by adopting it, and a similar exercise on the PREFACE. vii other parts of speech, due attention being paid by the teacher to a correct pronunciation, a pupil may acquire the language with as much facility, purity, and elegance of expression, as if he studied it in Paris. It should also be observed that the verbs being gradually introduced into the essays, and being absolutely necessary for speaking French, the pupil must begin to learn them from the first lesson. The essays throughout these two divisions of the Grammar form an important and distinguishing feature of the work. They are chiefly composed of phrases and passages used in ordinary discourse, and may be considered as a repertory for conversation. By construing them into French, according to the method recommended in the Key, the student is kept in constant practice, and gradually becomes acquainted with a considerable number of familiar and idiomatic sen- tences, and with those variations and delicacies of expression which so frequently occur in the polite circles in the capital of France. A strict adherence to this plan will enable him, not only to acquire a thorough knowledge of the rules of the language, but also to sustain his part in conversation with persons of intelligence and fashion, and to appre- ciate the beauties of French authors and form a just conception of the merit of their compositions. The fourth part comprises, as the sixtieth lesson, a treatise on French Prosody and Versification, exemplified by quotations from eminent authors; — also three essays (in French) on grammatical analysis; — a comprehensive and classified Vocabulary of words most generally used in conversation ; — a collection of familiar sentences, arranged under distinct heads ; — numerous models of notes and letters, with some forms of bills of exchange, promissory notes, receipts, &c. ; — and for the use of such English persons as are only slightly acquainted with French, but who, on their visit to the French metropolis, may be de- sirous to make themselves understood, a collection has been made, in the form of dialogue, of the phrases, directions, observations, &c. that commonly occur in a journey from Calais to Paris, and on the return. How far the Author has succeeded in his endeavours to facilitate the speaking of French to English persons will be for the public to CONTENTS. Lesson XI. Plural of Adjectives and Participles adjectively used. . 46 Lesson XII. Degrees of Comparison in Adjectives 47 Lesson XIII. Of Numeral Adjectives . 52 Of the Cardinal Numbers ib. Examples of the Cardinal Numbers with the Word/oi*, time , ... 56 Lesson XIV. Of the Ordinal Numbers ih. Examples of the Ordinal Numbers with the Word fois, time 57 Lesson XV. Of Pronouns , 60 Of the Personal Pronouns ib. Of the Personal Pronouns which fill the Place of the Nominative or Subject of the Verb 61 Lesson XVI. Of the Personal Pronouns 7ne, thee, him, her, it, us, ye or you, and thevi, which are used as Objects of the Verb . 63 Lesson XVII. Of Adjective Pronouns 67 Of the Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns 68 Of the Relative Possessive Pronouns 69 Lesson XVIII. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns 71 Lesson XIX. Of the Relative Pronouns 74 Repetition of the Relative Pronouns 78 Lesson XX. Of the Indefinite Pronouns 80 Lesson XXL Of Verbs - 85 Of Number and Persons in Verbs 86 Of Moods and the Tenses or Times ibM87 Of Conjugations ',.... ib. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb afOjV, affirmatively . 88 Cases in which the Imperfect and Preterit Definite of the Indicative are used in French 89, 90 & 91 Conjugation of the Verb avoir, negatively . . . . 93 & 94 Conjugatiuii of the same interrogatively 97 Conjugation of the same interrogatively and negatively . 99 Conjugation of y ovozV, to be there 102 Conjugation of the Auxiliaiy Verb eti^e, to Be ... 104 Of the Regular Conjugations ". . 107 First Conjugation: par/er, to Speak, with its additional Tenses 26. and 108 Particular Observations on the Verbs which terminate in the Present of the Infinitive Mood in ayer, eyer, oyer, uyer, &c 112 Second Conjugation: _^njV, to finish • 114 Third Conjugation : r^-cew/r, to I'eceive . . . 118 & 119 Fourth Conjugation : entendre, to hear, to understand, . 122 Manner of finding the different Tenses and Persons of Regular Verbs from the knowledge of the Infinitive . 127 Of Reflective Verbs 130 First Conjugation of Reflective Verbs: se fromener, to walk 131 Second Conjugation of Reflective Verbs: se rejouir, to rejoice 135 Third Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : s'apercevoir, to perceive 139 Fourth Conjugation of Reflective Verbs: se rendre, to surrender 143 Of Reflective Unipersonal Verbs ....... 147 CONTENTS. XI Page Conjugatiou of the Reflective Unipersonal Verb se ve7idi'e, to sell 148 • A list of Verbs wlii<:h, though not admitting in English the Pronouns one^s se/f, myse/f, thyself^ &c. are never- theless Reflective in French 150 Of Irregular and Defective Verbs 152 Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation: — aller, to go; s'en alter ^ to go away, &c ih. Observations on etre^ alle, &c. often incorrectly used in- stead of avoir, ete, &c 155 Conjugation of the Reflective Verb s'cn aller, to go away . 156 Conjugation of e/?iv^ypr, to send 159 Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjugation . . . .160 Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation 174 Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation .... 180 Of Unipersonal Verbs 198 Unipersonal T^erbs of the First Conjugation .... ih,. Unipersonal Verbs of the Second and Third Conjuga- tions 199 & 200 Unipersonal Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation . . , 202 Lesson XXII. Of Negations and Interrogations 203 Distinction betAveen pas and point ih. Lesson XXIII. Cases in which ne is used before a Verb in French without ;3«s or/jom^ after it , . 207 Lesson XXIV. Of Interrogations 210 Lesson XXV. Of Adverbs . ._ 214 Place of Adverbs in the Sentence ib. Lesson XXVI. Of Prepositions 216 Of the Place and Repetition of Prepositions .... 219 Lesson XXVII. Of Conjunctions 222 What Tenses must be used after si, (if, whether) . , . ih. Of Interjections 224 Lesson XXVIII. Of the French Idioms 226 Cases in wbich the different Tenses of the Verb to be are expressed in French by those oi avoir ih. Lesson XXIX. Cases in which the Tenses of to be are expressed in French by those of y aro?;- 228 Lesson XXX. Cases in which the Tenses of the Verbs to he and to do are expressed in French by those of the Verbs faire, se porter, and en etre 230 Lesson XXXI. Cases in which the different Tenses of the Verb to be, being preceded by it, are expressed in French by il est, il etcdt, il sera, &c. and by c'est, c^etait, ce sera, &c 232 Lesson XXXII. Avoir mal — a, an, a la, a f, or aux 235 Lesson XXXIII. Of the Verb must, expressed in French by ilfaid,ilfaUait, il fatfdra, SiC 236 Lesson XXXIV. Of the Defective Verbs may, will, would, can, shall, should, could, might and ought 239 PART III.— SYNTAX. Lesson XXXV. Of Syntax Cases in which the Article is used in French 242 ib xu CONTENTS. Lesson XXXVI. Lesson XXXVII. Lesson XXXVIII. Lesson XXXIX. Lesson XL. Lesson XLI. Lesson XLII. Lesson XLIII. Lesson XLIV. Lesson XLV. Lesson XLVI. Lesson XLVII. Lesson XLVIII. Lesson XLIX, Lesson L. Lesson LI. Lesson LII. Lesson LIII. Lesson LIV. Lesson LV. Lesson LVI. Lesson LVII. Lesson LVIII. Lesson LIX. Page Cases in which there is no Article used in French . . 247 Continuation of the Cases in which there is no Article used in French 252 Of substantives # . . 256 Of the Possessive Case and Compound Words , . . 257 Of Adjectives and Participles adjectively used . . . 260 Agreement of Adjectives, and Participles adjectively used, with their respective Substantives in French . , . ib. Of the Place of Adjectives 264 Observations on some Adjectives which have a different Meaning, according as they precede or follow their re- spective Substantives ih. Of the Government of Adjectives 267 A List of Adjectives which govern «, or au, a la, a /', or aifoe, before the succeeding word which depends on them ih. A List of Adjectives which govern de, or du, de la, de l\ or des^ before the next word depending on them • , . ib. General Observations on several Adjectives and Participles which, according to the sense in which they are used, govern different Prepositions before their Object . . 268 Of the Adjectives of Dimension high, wide, broad, &c., , 273 Of Comparatives 275 Observations on the Pronouns lid, elle, and eux . , . 277 Of the Supplementary Pronouns /e, /a, /', /es .... 279 Oi the 'Pvonouus myse/f, ihyse/f, himself, herself, &ic. . . 281 General Order in which the Pronouns come before the Verb or its Auxiliary in French 283 Repetition of the Personal Pronouns 288 Particular Observations on the Possessive Pronouns mi/, thy, his, her, our, your, their, and mine, thine, his, hers,8cc. . 290 & 291 Cases in which its is expressed in French by son, sa, ses, and en 294 Particular Observations on the Demonstrative Pronouns. 296 Particular Observations on the Relative Pronouns . . 302 Of the Indefinite Pronouns 306 Of Verbs and of the Subject or Nominative of the Verb . 322 Of the Verb's agreement with its Nominative or Subject, ib. Place of the Subject or Nominative of the Verb . . . 326 OftheObjector Regimen of Verbs 329 When de ov par is to be used after Passive Verbs . . . 330 Place of the Object or Regimen of Verbs, when it is a Noun or a Verb 33] Of the different Prepositions which the Verbs govern . 335 Cases in which the Preposition pour or afn de is used before a Verb in the Present of the Infinitive Mood in French 353 Of the Subjunctive and the Cases in which it is required . 355 What Tenses of the Subjunctive must be used * . . 362 Of the Present Participle and Verbal Adjective . . , 366 Of the Past Participle and the Cases in which it is de- clinable and indeclinable . « . « . t . # • 370 CONTENTS. xiii PART IV.— PROSODY. Page Lesson LX. Of Prosody 378 Of Accent ib. Of Quantity, and General Rules on Quantity . . ib. & 379 A List of French Homomjmes 380 Of Emphasis, Pauses, and Tones 381 & 382 Of French Versification , ib. Of the Number of Syllables in Verses ib. Of Caesura and Hemistic 384 OfRhjTne ib. Difference between rich and sufficient Rhymes . . . 385 Arrangement of the Rhymes together 386 Of the expressions which canuot be admitted into Poetry 387 Of the Syllables which cannot enter into a Verse, or — of the Hiatus and E/inion 388 Of Licences allowed in French Poetry ib. Of the Transpositions of Words ...,.., ib. Of the Letters which can be dropped in some Words . 389 Of the Expressions belonging to Poetry ib. Of Verses belonging to the difFerent sorts of Poetry . . ib. Of Stanzas and Idyls 390 & 391 OfFables, Epigrams, and Madi-igals . . . . . .392 Of Impromptus, Enigmas, Inscriptions, Epigraphs, Epi- taphs, Distichs, Acrostics, Sonnets, and Rondeaux 393, 394, & 395 Manner of reading French Poetry 396 Manner of composing French Verses ,,,,., ib. Of Grammatical Analysis 398 A Vocabulary 402 A List of some of the ancient and modern Names of the most remarkable Nations, Empires, Kingdoms, Pro- vinces, Towns, Mountains, Islands, Straits, Rivers, &c. that are not spelt alike in French and English . . . 426 A List of Adjectives and Participles 430 A List of Verbs 442 A List of Adverbs and Adverbial Expressions .... 464 A List of Prepositions 470 A List of Conjunctions ^ . . . 472 Familiar Sentences 473 A Journey from Calais to Paris 485 Models of Notes and Cards of Invitation, Ceremony, and Thanks 489 Forms of Bills of Exchange and Promissory Notes . , 492 Models of Receipts 493 Tables of the respective value of the French and English Coins 494 1. A Table of the value of French sot/s and centimes, with reference to English pence and half-pence, up to 1 franc ib. 2. A Table of the value of French/ra«cs, with reference to English pence and shillings, up to 1 pound .... 495 Recommendations of " The Speaking French Grammar and Introductory Book to (lit to-' 496 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. General Observations on the Sounds of the Letters. ARTICLE L Of the Vowels. In the different gradations of sound, which vowels produce in different words, and which can only be learnt by practice, two general ones are distinguished : the slender sound, as given in the alphabet, and a longer one, which, though generally marked with the circumflex accent, is in several words not so distinguished, and must, consequently, be acquired by practice^ Examples of the Sounds of the Vowels. 1. A is short as in dmdieur ;... and long as in age. 2. I is short as in tiire ; and long.,. as in sire. 3. O is short as in oracle; ...and long as in ofer. 4. U is short as in Utile; and long as in .f.ule. The letter e has three sensibly different sounds : the open or long, the acute, and the obtuse or short. The open or long is in some words marked with the grave, and in others with the circumflex accent : as — succes, meme ; bu.t, in many other words, it has no such cha- racteristic : thus — chef. The cases, therefore, in which e is so pronounced, can only be knoAvn by use and observation. The acute sound is marked with the acute accent : thus — veriie, premedite. The obtuse or short e, being but faintly heard when pronounced, has no mark or accent : as in homme, je redemande ; &c. Of the Nasal Sounds. "When the vowels a, e, i, a, u, come before the consonants m and n, they form nasal sounds : this, however, only occurs when m and n are at the end of words, or when, being in the body of a word, they are followed by any other consonant than m or « ; for two m's or two n's, in several instances, have no nasal sound, although in some others they retain it, as in ennui, ennuyer, emmener, in which m and n, though followed by another m and n, preserve their nasal sound. M and n, at the end of foreign words, have no nasal sound, although they may be preceded by a vowel: thus Jerusalem, amen, are pronounced with the natural sound of m and n. The termination ent, in the third person plural of verbs, has no nasal sound : thus — ils aiment, ils parltrent, are pronounced — il or i zaime, il parlere, and not ilzaiman, ilpaltran. A, e, i, 0, u, admitting various combinations before m and n, form different nasal sounds, of which the following are the principal ones. They are pronounced as follows : Am an as in ambassadeur. Aim ein as in .faim. Em en as in embrasser. Im ein as in imbecile. j Om...,. on as in ombre. Um eun.... as in humble. An an as in ancien. Ain ein as in pain. Ean an as in Jean. En an as in ennui. OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. Ein pin Eon .... on Icn . .. , . ien On Un un as m ..s€t?i. as in ajeun. as in pigeon. as in /e mien. on as in oncie. as in .., difunt. ' Of Diphthongs. A diphthong is the union of two or more vowels in the same syllable, which, when pronounced, convey to the ear a double sound, although they be uttered with a single emission of the voice, as in the word Dieu, in which the sounds of i and eu are distinctly heard. Tire follov/ing are the principal diphthongs : Eoi as in viUageo is. la as in diacre, diable. le as in pied. le as in lumitre. leu as in Dieu. lo as in pioche. Oi as in lui. Ouai as in ouais! Oue as in ouest. Oin as in soin. Ouin as in baragouin. Ouan as in , louange. Oui as in Louis. Ui as in i ltd. Uai as in suaire. Observe. — A diphthong must not be confounded with the union of two or more vowels in the same syllable, producing a single sound : as — a/, ae, aie, au, eai, ei, eg, ao, eau, eo, ie, eu, oeit, and ue, in the following words : 1. Ai, in the preterite and future of verbs, is pronounced like e acute : thus— /'aj, je chantai,je lirai, are pronounced — j^;je chant e, je /irt. Ai is also sounded like t open : — 1. In the terminations of the imperfect and con- ditional of verbs: as — favais,faimais,jedirais. 2. In the words ^rt^/a«v, Ecossais, Francais, Gro'cn/andais, Hol/andais, Ir/andais, Lyonnais, Poiojiais., and some others. 3, In the middle of words : as — maitre,tnaison, 8cq.', ^ which are pronounced as if they were spelt j\ives, j'aimes, je dires, Anglts, Ecossts, Frances, Gro'cnlandts, Holandts, Ir/andes, Lyonnes, Polonts, metre, meson, &c. In faisant and the first syllables oi faisais, faisait, faisions, faisiez, faisaient, at takes the sound of e obtuse or short: as — fesant,fcsais, &c. ; but it is pronounced like a in douairiere : thus — douariere. 2. Aie, eai, ei, in the words haie, demangeaison, seigneur, and some others, are pronounced like e open: thus — he, demanjezon, segneur. 3. Ae iu Ca'cn (ville) is pronounced as if Caen were spelt without e: thus— Can. 4. Ao in pcutn, paonne, faon, Laon, (ville,) is pronounced as if there were no o in these words: thus — pan, pane, fan, Lan ; but in Aoid, Aoriste, Saone, taon, (poisson,) alone is sounded, the a being mute: as — ou, oriste, sone, ton; but in aoit/^, par- ticiple of the verb aouter, to ripen, both a and o are pronoimced. 5. Au and eau, at the end of words, are sounded like o long : thus — aloyau, bateau, are pronounced aloyo, baio. 6. Ie is pronounced like /, and ue like u, in the different tenses and persons of the verbs which end in ier and uer in the present of the infinitive: thus— ^e prie, je prierai,je prierais, andje remue,je remiierai,je remuerais, are pronounced — je pri, je prirat,je prirais ; andjV remu,je remurai,je reniurais ; Sec. 7. Eu is sounded like u, in j^eus, iu eus, il eut; nous eumes, vous eiiies, ils eurent ; B 2 4 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. quefeusse, &c ; but it retains its natural sound eu, in Europe, Euridice, Eucharislie, heureux. heureusc, St. Eustache. 8. CE takes the sound of ew, in soeia-, mceurs, ceuf. 9. Geo, geo, geure, without any accent over the e after g, are pronounced— yfl,yo, jure. — II jugea ; Georges, geolier, gageure, must therefore be pronounced — il juja, Jorge, jblier,gujure. ARTICLE IL Of Consonants. As Consonants do not always have the same pronunciation as that which is marked in the alphabet;, the pupil's attention is directed to the following obser- vations. B. B preserves its natural sound h, except at the end of the words plomb and a plomb, in which it is not heard. If it be doubled in a word, only one is pro- nounced: as — abbe, sahbat — -pvononnced abe, saba. C, besides its natural sound k, has the sound of s, in the beginning and middle of words, before e or i: thus — ceci, cela, are pronounced sesi, «e/a. C is likewise sounded s, before a, a, and u, when a cedilla is placed under it : a.s— facade, garcon, recu, — pronounced — fasade, garson, resu. C is pronounced gue, in second, secondemenf, seconder: thus — segon, segondma??, sego?ider. "When c comes before q in the middle of words, it is not sounded : acqutrir is, therefore, pronounced aqueri?'. When c is doubled in the middle of words, only one is pronounced, if e or i does not immediately follow : thus — accabler, accomplir, accuser, are pronounced — acabler, acompHr, acuser ; but if c be doubled before e or /, the first c takes the sound of ^, and the second that of s: thus — accident, acces, &c., are pronounced aksidan, akses. C is mute in arsenic, broc,croc, cierc, echecs, (jeu,) esiomac, pore, i/xbac, these words being pronounced — arseyii, bra, cro, cler, eche, estoma, por, iaba ; but c retains the sound k, in — avec, bee, tehee, (perte,) and also in done in the beginning of a sen- tence, or in the middle of it, when coming before a vowel or an h mute, or even before a consonant, if a strong passion be expressed: as — voire ptre est dans /a misere, dofic vous devez f aider ; — voire ami est done arrive? — jusques a quund prelen- drez-vous dona me dicier des lois ? &c. which are pronounced — votre pere est dans la misere, donk vous devez P aider; — votrami est donkuni;e; — j usque za quand priten- drez-vous donk me dicier des lois? — In other cases, c is not heard in done: as allons done nous promener i quand viendrez-vous done? — pronounced — a//o/7s don nous pro- mener ; quand viendrez-vous Aon? D. D has its natural sound d, in the beginning of words, as also in the middle, when it comes before a consonant : — as dame, admission. If d be doubled in a word, only one d is pronounced : except in addition, reddi- iion, and adduction, in which both are heard. When an adjective terminates with d, and is used before a substantive, which begins with a vowel or h mute, d is pronounced like t, and joined to it in pronun- OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 5 elation: as — tai grand acteur ; un grcijid homme ; which are pronounced tin gran- Vacleur ; un gran-i' omm. D, at the end of the third person singular of the present of the indicative of verhs, is also pronounced t, hefore the pronouns il, eUe, or on, and is joined to them in pronunciation: as — entend-il? coudelle bien ? repond-on ainsi? pronounced— enten-til? cou-tel/e bien? ?-cpon'fon ainsi ? At the end of the proper names, David, Jond, Obed ; as also in siid, (a point of the compass,) d preserves its natural sound d. In other cases, d is usually silent at the end of words : as — quand viendrez-vous ? pronounced — kan viendrez-vou ? F. F generally preserves its natural sound/, in the heginning and middle of words, as also at the end, when they are used hy themselves in the singular numher : as — feu, conjiance, boeuf, (xuf, neuf; hut it is silent in the plurals boeufs, oeufs, neufs, these words heing pronounced boeH, cei'i, neu. F in neuf (noun of number) takes the sound of v, when new/ occurs hefore a sub- tjiantive which begins with a vowel or h mute: ';3s — nevf ans, neuf hommes, — pro- nounced neu-van, neu-vomm ; but, when neuf covaes before a word beginning with a consonant or h aspirated, the / is mute: thus — iieuf chevaux is pronounced neu- ^ skevo. Fis always mute in clef, cerf, tteuf: these words being pronounced cl6, cer, tteu, whether in the singular or plural. When / is doubled in the middle of words, only one is pronounced : thus— officier, offrir, affaiblir, are pronounced ojicie, ofrir, afaiblir. G. G is sounded gue, in the beginning and middle of words, when followed by the vowels a, 0, u, or the consonants d, h, L m, r : as in gateau, gosier, aigu, Mugdebourg, glorieux, augmenter, agrtable ; but, in gangrene, it is pronounced k, thus — kangrene. When it comes before e or i, it takes the accidental sound y.- thus — gelie, gibier, are pronounced je!te,jifner. When g is followed by n in the middle of words, it has the liquid sound gn : as in — agneau, assignation, assigner, compagnie, compagnon, signer, &c. ; but in impregna- tion, stagflation, and a few others, — g and n retain their natural sound gue. and « ; thus — impreg -nation, stag-nation, &c. Signet is pronounced sinet. If g be doubled in a word, only one g is heard : except in snggtrer, and in any other word, in which the second g is followed by e marked vnt\\ an acute accent, thus — (e), in which case the first g is pronounced ^we, and the second^; thus — sugjerer. G is always mute in coing, poing, t tang, faubourg, kareng, legs, doigt, vingt, seing, by whatever word they may be followed. G, at the end of the foreign names Jgag, Dotg, retains its natural sound gue. — In bourg, it is pronounced k, thus — bourk. G final is mute in all other words followed by a word beginning mth a conso- nant or h aspirated: thus — rung noble is pronounced ran noble; but g final is sounded like k on the next word, when this begins with a vowel or h mute : as — rang honorable ; suer sang et eau ; which are pronounced ran-konorable ; suer san- k^-eau. H. H is pronounced with its natural aspirated sound he, at the beginning of words, except in the following and their derivatives, iu which it is mute. Habile, Haleine, Heberger, Heliotrope, Habit, Hamegon, Hebete, Hematologic, Habiter, Harmonie, Hecatombe, Hemisphere, Habitude, Hebdomadaire, Hegire, Hemistiche, OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. Hemorrhagie, Herbe, Herbage, Heresie, Heriter, Hennite,, Hermi'ie Heroine, Heroique, Heroisme, Hesitet, Heterodoxe, Heterogene, Heure, Heureux, Hexagone, Hexametre, Hier, Hieroglyphe, Hiroiidelle, Histoire, Histrion, Hiver, Holocauste, Home lie, Homicide, Hommage, Homo gene, Homme, Honnete, Honneur, Hopital, Horizon, Horloge, Horreur, Horrible, Horoscope, Hospice, Hospitalier, Hostie, Hostilite, Hote, Hotel, Hotellerie, Hotesse, Huile, Hiiissier, Huitre, Htimain, e. Humble, Humecter, Humeur, Humidite, Humilite, Hyacinthe, Hydre, Hydromel, Hydropisie, Hydrophobie, Hymen, Hymne, Hyperbole, Hypocrisie, Hypothese, Hypotheque. H is likewise mute, at the beginning of proper names of towns, countries, &c. ; except in Holkmde, Hongrie, Haincmt, Hambourg, and a few others, in which it is fully pronounced h: but in the sentences — de la toile (P Hollande ; du fromage d'Hollande ; eau de la reine d' Hongrie ; the h is not pronounced. Ch must be sounded like sh in English: thus — chapeau, cheval, chose, chute, are pronounced shapo, sheval, shoze, shufe. Ch, at the end of words, is not, however, usuall)'' heard : thus — almanach is pro- nounced almana. J. and K. J and ^always have their natural sound^e and k. L. L generally preserves its natural sound /, in the beginning, middle, and at the end of words : as — le^-on, par/er,fL When I is doubled in the middle of words, and is preceded by any other vowel than I, oiil)^ one / is sounded : thus — colltge, collation^ collationner, (repas,) &c. — are pronounced colege, colacion, colacioiie ; but Apollon, allusion, allegorie, belligerant, belliqueux, collahoraieur, constellation, elltbore,foUiculaire, galUcan, gallicisme, oscilla- tion, palladium, rebellion, sollicifer, syllogis^ne^ tahdlion, collation, collationner (to collate), collegial, and their derivatives, are pronounced with the full sound of both the /'s. When / is doubled and preceded by i in the middle of words, as in— bataille, boii- teille, file, angnillc, paille, pillage, &c., it has a liquid sound, much resembling that of double / in the English word brilliant, or of gl in seraglio : except Gille, ville, mille, with their derivatives, and all words beginning with ill: as illtgitime, illustre, illusion, &c., in which the two /'s have their natural sound /. A single /, at the end of words, has likewise a liquid sound, when it is preceded by i : as in peril, ccueil, orgueil, travail, sommeil, soleil, &c. : except baril, chenil, coutil, cul, fournil, fusil, gril, nombril, outil, persil, soul, sourcil, in iwhich / is not sounded, Fil, nil, and mil, (noun of number,) and almost all adjectives ending with il, must likewise be excepted, as the / is pronounced with its natural sound /. M. il/ always preserves its natural sound w, in the beginning of words, as in — mer, mener. In the middle of words, m has the nasal sound of n, when it is preceded by a vowel and followed by a consonant : as — compte, compter, prompt — which are pro- nounced conte, confer, pron. When 7n occurs at the end of a word, and is preceded by a vowel, it takes the sound of n: thus — nom, pronom, faim, parfum, are pronounced non, pronon,fein^ OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 7 parfun. At the end of foreign names, m retains its natural sound m : as in Priam, Amsterdam, Rotterdam, &c. ; but Adam and Absalom are pronounced Adan, Absalon. When m is doubled in the middle of Avords, only one m is sounded, which takes its natural sound m : thus — commode, commis, commissaire, grammaire, grammairien, are pronounced comode, comis, comisaire, gramaire, gramatrien ; but Amman, Em- manuel, commensurable, commemoration, grammatical, commotion, commuer, and their derivatives, as also all words beginning with i^nm : as immense, imm^diatement, must he excepted, as the two w's preserve each their natural sound m, N. iV usually has the sound of n, in the beginning and middle of words, when it is followed by a vowel: as in — nourrice, mener, &c. ; but enivrer, eriorgueillir, and their derivatives, must be excepted, these being pronounced as if spelt with two w's, the first having the nasal sound, and the second the natural one n : thus — an- nivrer, an-norgueillir. When n is doubled in the middle of words, only one n is pronounced, which retains its natural sound n ; but the first syllable of the word becomes short: as — anneaii, annte, innocence ; pronounced — ono, ante, inocence. From this rule, must be excepted ennui, ennwjer, ennoblir, in which the two 7«'s are sounded, the first with the nasal sound, and the second with the natural one : thus — an-nui, an-nuyer, an- noblir. In annales, annexes, inne, innove, innome, Cincinnatus, Linnte, Porsenna, both the «'s retain their natural sound n. Solennel, hennir, hennissement, are pronounced solanel, hanir, hanisseman. N, followed in a word by any other consonant than n, always has a nasal sound : as in encre, ingredient, &c. N final, preceded by a vowel, is always pronounced with the nasal sound, in a word which is either used by itself, or which comes before another word begin- ning with a consonant oxh aspirated: as \\\ passion, ambition, nation c^lebre, , 8cc. In foreign words, it is pronounced with its natural sound n : as in — Amen, Eden, Hymen, &c. But when n comes at the end of a word, before another word beginning with a vowel or h mute, it is necessary, besides its being pronounced with its nasal sound, that another n should be added in pronunciation to the beginning of the next word, in all the following cases: — 1. At the end of adjectives immediately followed by their respective substan- tives: thus — ancien ami, bon homme, are pronounced ancien-nami, bo7x-n\mm ; but n, at the end of adjectives which are followed by any other word than their respec- tive substantives, as likewise at the end of all substantives, is pronounced with its nasal sound only, without the additional n to the next word, even when this begins with a vowel or A mute : thus — passion aveugle ; cela est certain el indubitable, are pronounced with the nasal sound only; and not passion-navei/gle ; cela est certain- net indubitable. 2. After the possessive pronouns mo?/, ^?/, son: as — man ame ; mon intime ami; pronounced mo-name, mo-ninti-mami. 3. At the end of un, coming before a substantive or an adjective, which it par- ticularises : — as uti /lonifne, un ancien ami, pronounced un-v^omm, un-nancien-nami ; but n in im, before any other word, is pronounced with its nasal sound only : as — il y en cut un assez hardi ; and not il y en eut un-nassez hardi. 4. In on, coming before a verb affirmatively used: as on aime, on honorcra, ^XO' nounced on-nai?)7, on-n'onorera; but, in interrogative sentences, on coming after the verb or its auxiliary, has merely its nasal sound : as — a-t-on eu soin de lui ? and not a-t-on-nu soin de lui ? 5. In en, followed by a word with which it is immediately connected by the sense : as — e?i Italic; en uti moment ; je li'en ai point; &c. — pronounced en-7iitalie, en-nun moman,je n\n-iCai poin ; but if en be not strictly connected with the next word, the nasal sound only should then be used: as — donnez-vi^en un peu ; and not — donnez- « OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. Tf^ en-nun pen ; liecause we can make a little pause after en, Avhich shows that it is not inseparably connected Anth un jieu. 6. After bieii and rien, when immediately followed by either an adjective, a verb, or an adverb, which they modify : as — bien ulilement^ hien honorable, bien a propos, bien ecrire, rien a dire, —pronounced bien-nuli/man, bien-n^o7iorable, bien-nd propos, bien-ntcrire, rien-na dire, &c. But when bieji and 7'ien are followed by some other word, or when they are used substantively, they are pronounced with the nasal sound only, jvithout the addi- tional 71 to the next Avord: as — il parlait hien et a propos ; ce bie7i est a moi ; ce rien a des attraits ; le bien et le mnl ; and not — il parlait bxen-net a propos; ce bien-nestd moi ^ ce rien-n'a de-zatlraits ; le bien-ne-l mal. P. P generally has its natural sound p, in the beginning and middle of words, as in — peuple, Septembre, accepter ; but it is not pronounced in iapteme, Baptiste,baptiser, baptistaire, sept, exempt, compte, C07npter, dompter, prompt, and their derivatives : these words being pronounced as if they were spelt baieme, Batiste, batiser, batistairg, set, exan, conte, confer, donter, pro7i ; and in general p is not pronounced in the majority of words in wlrich it comes between two consonants: except in coniempteur, exe7nption, redemption, rtdemptevr, in which it is sounded. When p is doubled in the middle of words, there is generally only one pro- nounced : thus — opporter, appeJer, are pronounced aporter, apeler. P final is mute at the en.l of these words : — camp, champ, drap, strop, loup, and in a few others ; but it is pronounced in cap, and the proper names Alep, Gap, Jalep. Pis likewise pronounced in leaiicoup and trop, when these words are immediately followed by another word beginning with a vowel or h mute, in which case p is joined to the next word in pronunciation: as — im coup inatlendu; il aitne beaucoup a Jouer ; — pronounced U7i cou-pinatendu, il airne beaiicou-pajouer; but if beaucoup and trop come before a word beginning with a consonant or h aspirated, or if they be used at the end of a sentence, or by themselves, p is not then pronounced : as— fen ai beat/coup trop — which is pronounced— ;;'e« ai beaucou tro. Ph is sounded like/; — thus philosophe, phrase, are pronounced//oso/,/rase. Q preserves its natural sound k, in the beginning and middle of words : as in quenouille^ acquirir, — pronounced kenonille, aktrir. Qu is pronounced cou, in equateiir and quaker ; cu, in equitation, Quvite-Curce, Qiiintilien ; and k, in qualif cation, Quasimodo, quadrille: thus — ecouateur, couaker^ tcuitacion, Cuintilien, Cuinte-Curce, kaliJicacio7%, Kasimodo, kadrille. Q final is not usually sounded in cinq, before a word beginning with a consonant or h aspirated : as — cinq gardens, cinq cavaliers, — pronounced with the nasal sound oi n,i\\\xs—cein garsons, cei7i cavaliers; but q in cinq retains its natural sound k before a substantive or an adjective beginning with a vowel or h mute, and is joined to it in pronunciation; as — cinq ans, cinq hommes, — pronounced cein-kuns, cein-k^omm. Q is also pronounced k, in ci7iq, used either by itself or at the end of a sen- tence, or before any other word than a substantive or an adjective, whether it begins with a vowel, an h mute or aspirated, or a consonant: as— /rois et deux font cinq ; les cinq pour cent; &c. — pronounced ti-oi zet deux font ceink ; les ceink pour ce7i. Q is mute, in coqWInde, — this word being pronounced co-d/Inde; but, q is sounded k in coq, in any other case. R. R always retains its natural sound r, in the beginning and middle of words, as in — regie, Ma7'di. OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 9 When r is doubled in the middle of words, only one r is sounded, and the pre- ceding vowel is lengthened: thus — parrain, marraiue^ carrusse, guerre, tonnerre,Je pourrai, je pourrais, kc. are pronounced — par ain, moraine, edrosse, guere, toner e,je pourai, je pourais, &c. But the two ?-'s are pronounced in aberration, erreitr, errer, errone, ahkorrer ; and in the future and conditional of the verbs acqutrir, courir mourir, namely — j'acquerrai, facqiierrais ; je courrai, je cotirrais ; je mourrai, je viourrais \ &c. as also in the greatest part of words beginning by irr ; as — irregulier^ irraisonnabfe, irreligieur, irritation, irrevocable, irrefragable, &c. R final is pronounced: 1. — in the monosyllables cher, fer, mer, or, sieur, &.c. 2.— at the termination of polysyllables ending in er, when er is immediately pre- ceded by /, m, or v : as — amer, enfer, hirer, &c. — 3. in the words cuiller, cancer, and in proper names : as, Jupiter, &c. R is likemse pronounced at the termination of the infinitive of all verbs of the second conjugation : as—Jlnir, partir, soriir, &c. It is also sounded at the end of any other word in ir or eur : as — p/aisir, loisir, repentir, bonheur, honneur, siffleur, &c. But r is not sounded: 1. — in Monsieur, which is pronounced Mocleu. 2. — at the end of polysyllables in ier : as — ojfficier, teinturier, parlicitlier, singufier, ejitier, &c. 3. — at the end of polysyllables in er, when er is not immediately preceded byy^ m, or v : as — danger, berger, &c. ; which words are pronounced — officie, tein- turie, pariiculie, singulie, entie, danje, berje, 8ic. R is also mute in the termination of the present of the infinitive of verbs of the first conjugation, when they are used either by themselves, or at the end of a sentence, or before words beginning with a consonant or h aspirated : as, dites- lui de danser ; je li'ai pas ose lui parler de cela ; pronounced dites-lui-d danst ; je n'ai pas ose lui par le-d cela \ but if these verbs come before words beginning with a vowel or A mute, the final r is slightly pronounced on them; thus — ainvr a danser ; folutrer et rire ; s^aiyiuser a lire; are pronounced — aime-rci-danse ; folatre- re rire : s'amuse-rii lire. S generally retains its natural sound s, in the beginning of words : as in semnine, soleil, statue, scorpion, &C. It is likewise pronounced s, in the middle of words, when it is preceded or followed by a consonant: as in absolu, converser^ conseil, lorsque, puisque, &c. ; but in Asdrubal, Alsace, Alsacien, halsaminc, balsamique, lalsamite, presbgfere, transiger, iy-ansaction, transition, transit, iransitif, intransitif, trunsitoire, and the words in which it comes between two vowels : as in htsiter, misere, rose, &c. it is sounded z: thus — Azdrubal, Alzace, Alzacien, heziter, mizere, roze, &c. S is, however, sounded s, in the following words, although coming between two vowels : as — desuetude, monosyllabe, monosyllabique, parasol, polysyllabe, pr6- seance, pr^supposer, presupposition, vraisemblance ; iwus gisons, ils gisent, il gisait, gisant. ^Mien * is doubled in the middle of words, only one s is heard, which is pro- nounced with its natural sound *, but very acute: thus — bossu, bissexlil, desstche, desservir, essai, essieu, missel, messeant, passer, poisson, &c. — are pronounced — bo-su, bi-sextil, dt-seche, de-servir, e-sai, e-sieu, mi-sel, me-sean, pd-se, poi-son, &c. S, at the end of words, is not generally sounded, when these occur either by themselves or at the end of a sentence, or also before other words beginning with a consonant or h aspirated: thus — les grandes villes, is pronounced — le gran-d ville. But s is sounded z in the monosyllables mes, ies, $es, nos, vos, leurs, les, ils, when they are immediately followed by a word beginning with a vowel or [A mute : as — mes amis, vos intentions, ils aiment, &c. — pronounced — me-zaml, v6- zintencion, il or i-zaime. It is likewise sounded z, at the end of adjectives immediately followed by their B 5 10 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. respective substantives, if these begin with a vowel or h mute : as — Ie& grands hommes; les bonnes ceuvres ; les grandes actions; — pronounced — It gran-z'omm, le bonne-zoeuvi'e, le gi'ande-zactions. But, at the end of substantives, followed by their respective adjectives beginning with a vowel or h mute, it is optional either to pronounce s with the sound z, or to omit it : thus — des personnes habites, may- be pronounced — des perso7i}i-zabile, or des fersonn-abile. h has likewise the same sound z, at the termination of the different tenses of verbs, when these come before a word beginning with a vowel or h mvite : thus — dis a monfrtre de venir, is pronounced di-za mon frere de venir. In gens, Jesus, lis, pi'us-que-parfait^ plus-pttition, and also in tons and plus taken substantively: as — tous pensent^ je dis phis, bien plus^ Sees preserves its natural sound */ but it is silent in Jtsus-Christ, le sens commun,Jleur de lis, and in plus and ious, followed by a v/ord depending on them, if this begins with a consonant or h aspirated: as — ious les hommes; donnez-moi un pen plus de pain ; — pronounced — tou le-z'omm ; donnez-moi un pen plu-d pain. iS is also pronounced s, in Atlas, anus, aloes, as, calus, en sus, foetus, iris, moeurs, prospectus, lapis, laps, locatis, (cheval de louage,) vis, vasistas, and in the words — Bacchus, blocus, Chorus, Cresus, Delos, Gil-Bias, gratis, Pallas, Vetius ; but it is mute in Judas, Mathias, Thomas, Jacques, aud in the words avis, des que, divers, OS, remords, tamis, tandis que, irepas, and a few others. T. T always preserves its natural sound t, in the beginning of Avords : as in — tenez, tkntbres. In the middle of words, it is also generally pronounced i, when followed by % : as in — amitie, chantier, entier, moitie, piiie, modestie, parlie, maintien, soutien, tien, tienne, nous portions, nous mettions, &c. ; but it is pronounced ce : 1. in prophetie, ineptie, inertie, tninutie. 2. in words terminating with atie : as — dtviocratie, pri- matie. 3. in words ending in tial, tiel, tion: as — partial, essentiel, nation, &c. with all their derivatives. 4. in proper names in tien or tienne: as — Diocletien, Gratien, Ftnitien, Fenitienne, &c. 5. in the words satiete, insatiable, initier, balbutier, patient, with their derivatives. T followed by i is, however, pronounced t, in words ending in tial or tion, if t be preceded by s or x : as — bastion, bestial, mixtion. When / is doubled in the middle of words, only one t is sounded : except in atticisms, attique, guttural, pittoresque, in which both the i's are pronounced : thus — at-ticisme, at-tique, gut-tural, pit-tor esque. T final is not generally pronounced, at the end of words wliich are used either by themselves or at the end of a sentence, or before words beginning with a con- so«ant or h aspirated: as — qui vient ? — il lui dit d^y aller ; &c. — pronounced — qui vien ? — il lui di d''y aller. But /, at the end of words which are followed by other words beginning with a vowel or h mute, and Avith Avliich they are inseparably connected by the sense, is pronounced and joined to them in pronunciation : as — un savant homme ; je suis tout a vous ; s'il vient a pleuvoir, — pronounced — un savan-fomm ; je suis tou-ta vous ; sHl vien-ta pleuvoir. If, however, t, terminating the tense of a verb, be preceded by r, it is not sounded, though followed by a vowel or an h mute, in the beginning of the succeeding word, on account of the harsh sound which would thus result from it : as — il part aujourd'' hui ; il court a bride abattue ; il s^endort a r ombre; — pronounced — il parau- jourd'hui ; il con-ra bride abattue; Il s'endo-ra f ombre ; and not — il par-taujourd' hui ; il coiir-ta bride abattue ; il s'' endor-ta V ombre. T\% likewise mute at the end of some substantives followed by their respec- tive adjectives, although these begin with a vowel or h mute, on account of the disagreeable sound which would result from the use of it ; and, in^general, / is silent at the end of words, whenever the harmony of the sound requires it : thus OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 11 — un gout honible ; tin tort incroyable }- are pronounced — tm gou-orrible ; un iorincroy' able ; and not — un gou-t'orrible, tin tor-iincroyable. T is not pronounced in viugt, used either by itself or at the end of a sentence, or before a word beginning with a consonant or h aspirated. It is also mute in vingf, from eighty to ninety-nine inclusively, as also in cent, used by itself or before a con- sonant: thus — nous etions vingt ; vingt soldats ; quatre-vingt-onze honimes ; cent; cent chevatijp; &c., are pronounced — nou-zttion vein; vein-so/dd ; quatre-veiit-on-zomm ; cen ; cen-shevo ; but / is sounded in vingt and cent, immediately followed by a word beginning with a vowel or h mute, and also in the numbers from twenty to thirty, thirty io forty, forty to fifty, fifty to sixty, sixty to seventy-nine inclusively: as — vingt abricots, vingt-deux hommei, &c. — j)XOno\xncQ(\. vein-tabrico, veint-deuzomm, &c.; but # is silent in cent before un, une, huit, and onze. Tis likewise mute in sept and huit, followed by a word beginning with a consonant or A aspirated : as — sept chemises ; huit houppela?ides ; — pronounced — s6-shemJz ; hui- koupeland ; but it is sounded in sept and huit, when these numbers come before a word beginning with a vow-el or h mute, or w^hen they are used by themselves or at the end of a sentence, or, again, for expressing the date of Jthe month, in which latter case the t is even sounded before a consonant: as — sept ecus ; huit hommes ; ils etaient sept ou huit ; le sept de Juin ; le huit Sept^.mbre ; — pronounced — se-ttcu; hui- fomm ; ilzetaient st-tou huit ; le set de Juin ; le huit Septembre ; &c. Tis always mute in the conjunction et, and in the words vent and pont^ whether followed by a word beginning with a vowel, an h mute, or a consonant: as — lui et ^lle ; le vent est haut ; le pout est-il fini9 — pronounced — lui-t-elle ; le ven-e-ho ; le pon-e-til fini ? and not — lui e-telle ; le ven-test haut ; le pon-tes-tilfini ? T is likewise usually mute, at the end of the termination enf, in the third person plural of verbs, even when followed by a vowel or h mute, if the verb be used affir- matively or negatively ; but it is pronounced, if the verb be employed interrogatively before a word beginning with a vowel or h mute : as — ils aiment a parler ; ils ne vien- nent pas aujourd^hui ; pronounced — il or i-zaim-u parler ; il ne vienn pah-zaiijourd/-hui ; but — lui parlireni-ils ? aimetit-ils a Jouer ? &c., must be pronounced lui parler-til ? aim-til a jouer ? &c. Tis not pronounced in Jesus-Christ, although it is in Christ, used without Jesus. It is likewise mute in aspect^ circonspect, respect., the final c only being heard ; but it is always pronounced in abject, accessit, brut^ chut, contact, correct, dot, direct, deficit, est (east), fat, granit, exact, incorrect, indirect, infect, indult, lest, luth, net, preterit, rapt, subit, suspect, strict, tacet, tact, toast, transit, vivat, zenith, zist, zest. \. V always has its natural sound — v. WvA not reckoned in the letters of the French alphabet, as it is to be found in French only in foreign names of persons, places, or things, in the beginning of which it usually takes the soxind of v : as in H'estphalie, Walbon, Wallone, Wirtem- berg, Warwick, Washington, — pronounced — Festphalie, Falbon, Valone, Virtemberg., Varvik, Vazington. In tvhist and wktsky, w is pronounced ou: thus — ouist, ouiski. Wy in the middle and at the end of words, varies in its pronunciation : thus— Neivton is pronounced Neuton; Warwick, Varvik; and Laiv, Lasse. X. X has the following different sounds :— ^ Ks ouCs as in extreme. ^ Gz as in Xavier, exemple. Ss as in Bruxelles, Auxerre. C as in.... excellent. Z as in..., deuxieme. 12 OF THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. When X comes at the heginning of a word, (which is only the case in a few foreign names,) it is pronounced cs or ks : except in Xavier, Xtnophon, Ximtnes, le Xante, Xantippe, and Xerxes, in which it is sounded gz : thus — Gzavier, Gzenophon, Gzimines, (which is also pronounced Chimenes,) le Gzanfe, Gzantippe, Gzersesse. X is likewise pronoimced ks or cs, in the middle of words, before a c guttural and one of the three vowels a, o, n ; or when it is followed by any other conso- nant than h, whatever may be the vowel following: as — excuse, excommtmit, expe- dient, inexpugnable, — pronounced — eks-cuse, eks-comunie, eks-pedian, ineks-pugnable ; but if c be followed by e or i, x must then be sounded like c only : as — execs, exciter, exception, &c., which are pronounced — ec-ces, ec-citer, ec-ception. X is also sounded cs, in the middle of words, between two vowels, if the word does not begin by e or in : as — axe, Alexandre, luxe, maxime, sexe, pronounced ac-se, Alec-sandre, hic-se, mac-sime, sec-se. Soixanie, and its derivatives, must however be excepted, as likewise Bruxelles^ Auxerre, Auxerrois, Auxonne, in which ir is sounded like doubles; thiis — soissante, Brusselles, Aussere, Ausstrrois, Amsone. — Sixieme, deuxieme, dixieme, are pronounced sizieme, deuzieme, dizieme. But when x occurs between two vowels, and the first letter of the word is e, or when the word begins by in, x is then sounded ^2;; in this case, if there be an h after x, it is not pronounced : thus — examen, exorbitant, exkeredation, exkiber, exer- cice, inexorable, are pronounced — eg-zamen, eg-zorbitan, eg-ztr6dacion, eg-ziber, eg- zercice, ineg-zorable, X is not generally sounded, at the end of words, used either by themselves or at the end of a sentence, or before words beginning with a consonant or h aspirated: as — tu peux le /aire; veux-tu y aller 9 &c. — pronounced tu peu-l faire ; veu-tu y aller 9 &c. The numbers six and dix must be excepted, as in them x is sounded like double s, when these words are used either by themselves or at the end of a sentence, although X is not pronounced when they come before a consonant or h aspirated : as — donnez-m^ en six; gardez-lui-en dix; six tables ; &c. — pronounced donnez-m^en siss; gardez-lui-en diss; si-tables; &c. X final is otherwise sounded z, before words beginning with a vowel or h mute, and is joined to them in pronunciation: thus — aux amis; aux hommes; chevnux alertcs; heureux epoux; je veux y aller ; tu peux ecrire ; deux ans ; six aunes ; dix hommes; are pronounced — d-zami ; o-zomm; shevo-zakrte ; heureu-ze'pou ; je veu-zy aller; tu peu-zecrire; deu-zan; si-zaune; di-zomm. X is likewise sounded s, in dix-huit, dix-neuf: — thus — dizuit, dizneuf. X is sounded cs or ks, at the end of proper names: as — Palafox, Fairfax, Styx, Sec. — pronounced — Palafocs, Fairfacs, Sties. It is also sounded cs, at the end of these words, — borax, index, lynx, sphinx, prefix: thus — boracs,indecs, lines, sphincs, prtjxcs: except Aix, which is pronounced Ai$. Y. • yis sounded i, either when it forms a word of itself, or when it comes before a vowel in the beginning of a syllable: as— II y a, yet/x, yacht, &c.— pronounced Jl-i-a, ieu, iak. yhas likewise the sound of i, between two consonants: a.s— acolyte, mystere, style, physique, &c.— pronounced acolite, mistere, stile, phisique ; but it is sounded like two «'s between two vowels : as — moyen, payer, nous employons, vous cssayez, pronounced — moi-ien, pai-ier, nous emploi-ion, vous essai-iez. In Pays, the y is also sounded like two t's : thus — Pai-'i. Z. Z always has its natural sound z, in the beginning and middle of words : as— zephyr, amazone. , , ., 1 4. It is usually mute, at the end of words which are used by thettiselves or at OF ACCENTS. 13 the end of a sentence, or before a consonant or an h aspirated: as — vous par/ez (If. moi ; vous chantez trts-bien ; &c. — pronounced — vous par/t-d mot; vovs chafttt trts-bien. But z, at the end of the second persons pkiral of the tenses of verbs, occurring before words beginning with a vowel or an h mute, is pronounced with its natural sound z, and joined to them in pronunciation : as — vous aimez a me tourmenter — pronounced — vous aime-zd-m totermente. Lastly, z is sounded s, at the end of foreign proper names : thus — Alvarez, Cortez, JRodez, Suez, &c,, are pronounced — Alvares, Cortes, Rodts, Sues, &c. ARTICLE III. Of Accents. There are three accents in the French language, called the acute, the grave, and the circumflex. The acute accent is drawn from the right hand to the left, thus— (0. It is only- used over e, to which it gives an acute sound, much resembling that of a in English, as in the words — vtritt, proctde, prc'medite. The grave accent is drawn from the left hand to the right, as follows — Q), and when placed over c, as in — pere, mere, gives it an open sound, much like that in the word there. The circumflex accent is formed like v reversed, thus — ('^), and gives a long sound to the voAvel over which it is placed, as in the words — Cine, fete, gite, dome, flute. 1 . Of the Acute Accent. The acute accent is used in French over every e which, either forming a syllable of itself or terminating one, has the sound of a in English : as in the words — e'tt, v^rite, procede, premtdite, probitt, &c. The acute accent is likewise used on the e of the last syllable of these words in the plural, though followed by s ; as — des pro- cedts, &c. The acute accent is also used on the last e but one in the last syllable of words ending with double e, Avhether they are in the singular or plural : as — armte, armees. It is likewise used on the final e of the past participle of all verbs of the first conjugation, with this observation, that, should the participle be employed in its feminine, either singular or plural, the accent is to preserve the same place as in the singular or plural masculine: thus— o/we, omie'e/ aiines, aimees. Lastly, the acute accent is used over the final e of the first person singular of the present of the indicative in all verbs of the first conjugation, when used inter- rogatively ; and also in those of the second, likewise used interrogatively, but which, when used j)ositively, end in e mute : as — aime-je? donne-js ? ouvre-j'e? (from the verbs aimer, donner, oiwrir.) 2. Of the Grave Accent. The grave accent is used in French : — 1 . Over every e which terminates a syllable, if followed b}^ a consonant and an e mute in the same word : as — yoe/e, mere, frere, maniere, jarretiere, ils parltrent, modele ; but words ending in ege must be excepted, as the e followed by ^e takes the acute accent: thus — sacrilege, sortilege, &c. 2. Over the e in the last syllable of substantives ending in es in the singular : as — proces, succes, dtces ; and also generally over thee of the last syllable of adverbs and prepositions ending in the same manner : as — aupres, apres, des, expres^ pres, tres, &.C. But the monosyllables ces, les, mcs, tes, ses, and the compound article des, must be excepted, as they never take the grave accent. 14 OF THE CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT, APOSTROPHE, &c. 3. Over the preposition a, to distinguish it from the third person singular of the present of the indicative of the verh avoir, — il a ; and from a taken substantively : as — a Paris; — il a ; — il ne salt ni A ni B. 4. Over /a, adverb, to distinguish it from /a, article or pronovm: as — allez-ld ; — la vertu et la science ; — aimez-la. 5. Over oil, adverb or pronoun, to distinguish it from ou, conjunction: as — oii allez-voiis ? — la place ou voi/s aspire z ; — vous ou mot. 6. Over des, preposition or conjunction, to distinguish it from des, article : as — des qitej''aiirai de l' argent, j"" acheterai des litres, 7. Over des in des-lors. It is worthy of remark, that when the syllable des is used at the commencement of words, it takes the acute accent, if it be followed by a vowel or an h mute ; but if it is followed by a consonant it takes no accent : as — dtsastre, dtshonneur, despote. 3. Of the Circumflex Accent. The circumflex accent is used in French over vowels which have a long sound, as in the following cases : — 1. Over a followed by ch, or by t pronounced with its natural sound t, as in — fdcheuoc, Idche, tdche, bdtir, chateau, gateau, &c, but never when t has the sound s, as in nation, &c. 2. Over e in the termination eme, as — mime, hapteme ; but the ordinal numbers— deuxiiine, troisihne, Sec, always take the grave accent. 3. Over i in all the tenses of the verbs in aitre and oitre, in which e comes before as — i I par ait, il croit, &c., from the verbs paraitre, croitre. 4. Over o before the finals le, me, ne : as — pole, role, dome, fantbme, trbne, zone, Sec, and also in — le nbtre, le vbtre, Sic, relative possessive pronouns, to distinguish them from the conjunctive nofre and votre, which are pronounced short. 5. Over u in the adjective siir, to distinguish it from sur, preposition: as — je suis svir qi/e r argent est sur la table. 6. Over u in mur (ripe), to distinguish it from miir (wall). 7. Over 2i in rf«, participle of devoir, to distinguish it from du, compound article ; but this takes place only in the singular masculine, as there can be no mistake in the feminine singular, or in the plural of either gender. 8. Over v in tu, the participle of the verb taire, that it may be distinguished from tu (thou), personal pronoun ; but still only in the singular masculine, for the same reason as for du. 9. Over u in cru, participle of croitre, either in the masculine or feminine, singu- lar or plural, to distinguish it from cru, the participle of croire. 10. Over the last vowel of the last syllable bvit one in the first and second per- sons plural of the preterite definite of the indicative, in all verbs : as — nous aimdmes, vous aimdtes ; nous finhnes, voiis finites ; nous resumes, vous realties; nous vendtmes, vons vendites ; &c, 11. Over the last vowel of the third person singular of the imperfect of the sub- junctive: as — qi/'ilfut; qu^ileut', qi/il aimdt ; qi^ilfimt; qu'il re^ut ; qu^il vendit. Note. — The circumflex accent is also used over several words quoted in the large octavo Grammar, but which cannot be explained by any general rules. 4. Of the Apostrophe, The apostrophe has the form of a comma, thus — (') ; it is placed above the level of the line, as — /'. It denotes the suppression of the vowels a, e, or t, in the mono- syllables le, la, je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que, and si, when these occur before another word beginning with a vowel or h mute; as — Vame, Pamour, Vhomme,j^ai, instead of la ame, le amour, le homme, je ai. OF THE HYPHEN, CEDILLA, &c. 15 iS suffers the same elision : 1. in. jusque, before a, au, aux, and ici : a.s—yusqii'd Paris ; jusqu'cu ciel ; jusqi^aax tines ; jusqu'ici. 2. In pi/isqi/e and qtioique^ before i/, Us, die, elks, on, vn, and tine ; and sometimes before words with which they are immediately connected: as — "pmsqi^il le veut ; quoiqi/'il dise ; pifisqiMinsi est. 3. In qiielqzie,'beiove tin or tine: as — quelquhin, qtielqihme ; and also in g?/e/ gz/iV soit, quelle qi^elle soit ; but in no other case. 4. In presque, in the compound word presqn^ile. But e and a do not suffer elision in ce, de, le. In, que, before otn, hint, kuitaine, hiiititme, onze, and onziime ; neither do they suffer elision in ce, de, le, la, que, when these words are used after a verb in the imperative mood, although the next word may begin with a vowel or an h mute; neither is a ever elided in la, adverb: thvis we write and pronounce — le out et le nun; le huit on le onze du mois ; le onziime; de huit qu'ils ttuietit ; — menez-le a Paris; ira-t-il la avec voiis? and not Fotii; Phuit ; Cunzs ; Vonzitme ; d' huit qu'ils ttaient ; menez-P -a Paris ; ira-t-il P avec vous 9 Observe. — / suffers elision in the conjunction si (if), before il and Us, but never before elle or elles, nor any other word whatever ; thus we write and pronounce — il ira sHl veut ; — sHls viennent ; but — si elle veut ; si elles viennent, and not s'e//e veut ; s'elles viennent, 2. Of the Hyphen. The hyphen, in French {tivet or trait iPunion), is a short horizontal line, drawn in this manner — (-), which is used: — 1. Alter a verb followed by one of the pronouns jiV, tu, il, elle ; nous, vous, Us, elles ; le,la, les ; mot, toi, Itn, leur, y, en, ce, on: as — dis-moi ; dtpechez-vous ; yiattons-nous- en ; Sec. ; in which case if the verb be used interrogatively, and end with a vowel in the third person singular, a / is put between the verb and the pronoun, Avith a hyphen on each side of it : as — viendra-t-il? — parle-t-on 9 2. Between the pronouns moi, toi, notis, vous, lui, elle, eiix, elles, and the word meme, which sometimes follows them : as — moi-mime, toi-meme, &c. 3. Between wor<;s so joined that they make but one: as — arc-en-ciel, cure-dent, peut-etre, vis-d-vis, c'est-d-dit e. 4. Between the nouns of number which are joined together : thus — dix-sept, dix- hmt, dix-neuf, &c., to quatre-viuyt-dix-neuf, inclusively; but vingt et un, trente et un, quarunte et un^ dnquante et un, soixante et un, and soixatite et onze, are excepted. 5. Between tbe monosyllables ci and Id, and the. woi'd which precedes or ibllows them, when they are connected together: as— celui-ci, celui-ld; cet homme-ci, cette femme-ld ; ci-dessus, ci-dessous ; Id-haut, Id-bas ; &c. 6- Of the Cedilla. The cedilla is a little mark made n.early like a comma, thus — (^,) ; it is placed under c ibllowed by a, o, or u, when c must be sounded like s : as — gar^on, le^on, re^u, which are pronounced g arson, lesim, resu. When c has the sound of s in the termination of the present of the infinitive of a verb, it preserves it throughout all its tenses and persons, and a cedilla is required under it whenever it is followed by a, o, or n : as — commencer, je commen^ais ; con- cevoir,je congus. 7. Of the Diuresis, Parenthesis ^ Quotations , and Abbreviations. 1. The diceresis, in French (dierese or trema), is a double dot, like this — (••)> put over the vowels t, V, and u, to denote, when they are not of the same syllable as the vowel preceninir them, that they ^are to be pronounced separately from it: as in the words — dieul, a'i, Antmous, Esau, faience, Fa'iencier, herdique, hair, la'ique, Mdise, Noel, naif, pa'ien, — pronounced — a-'ieul, ha-ir, Mo-'is€,pa-ien, &c. 16 OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 2. The parenthesis is made thus (), and is tised to enclose a particular phrase, or an occasional sentence, interposed in the middle of the principal one : as — Je crois aussi (soit dit sans vous deplaire) Que femme prude, en sa vertu severe, Pent en public faire beau coup de hien, Mais en secret souvent ne valoir rien. Voi.T. La Prude, act. i. sc. 4. Great use was formerly made of the parenthesis; hut it is now nearly superseded hy the employment of commas in its stead. 3. Tlie quotation consists of two inverted commas, thus (") — placed at the begin- nino- of a recital or passage, quoted from another author, and repeated at the begin- ning of every line to the end, with two other commas thus, ("), in their natural position, at the end : as — Je songeais cette nuit qvie, de mal consume, Cote a cote d'un pauvre on m'avait inhume, Et que n'en \^ouvant pas soufRir le voisinage. En mort de qualiteje lui tins ce langage: " Retire-toi, coquin ! va pourrir loin d'ici ; " II ne t'appartient pas de m'approcher ainsi." " Coquin, (ce me dit-il, d'une arrogance extreme,) '' Va chercher tes coquins ailleurs, coquin toi-meme! " Ici tous sont egaux : je ne te dois plus rien ; " Je suis sur mon fumier, comme toi sur le tien." 4. The abbreviatiotis are words usually shortened and represented by capital let- ters. The following are the most common ; M. or Mr for Monsieur. M""^ for Madame. M"^ for Mademoiselle, MM for Messieurs. S. M for Sa Majestt. S. M. -Imp for Sa Alajeste Impiriale. S. M. T. C for Sa Mujestt Trts-Chrtiienne, S. M. C for Sa Majestt Catholique. S. M. B for Sa Majestt Britannique. S. M. S for Sa Majestc Sutdoise. \ S. A for Son Altesse. - \ S. A.R for Son Altesse Roy ale. \ S.A.I for Son Altesse Impiriale. j S. A. E for Son Altesse EleitoraJe. \ S. Ex for Son Excellence. | S.Emi for Son Eminence. \ S. S for Sa Saintete. j M^ for Monseigneur. i J. C for Jesus-Christ. N.S for Notre-Seigneur. j N. S. J. C for Notre-Seigneur-Msus-Christ. i M<^ for Marchand. \ Mde for Marchande. ! Negt for Ntgociant. 8. Of Capital Letters. .; Capital letters are letters larger than the others, and of a different form : such are j those at the top of this page. i Capital letters are used in the beginning of the first word of every complete sen- • OF PUNCTUATION. 17 tence, in prose and poetry, and also of every line in poetry ; and after a period or note of interrogation. Phrases of direct address, as — Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle, Sec, are always begun with a capital ; and, in letter-writing, the address, as well as the body of the letter and each part of the subscription at the end, begins with a capital : thus — 1. The address: — Monsieur, Monsieur Douville, Rue Neuve du Mont-Thabor, No. 10, a Paris. 2. The body of the letter :— Mo7isi€ur, J'ai appris avec plaisir que vous avez publie nne nouvelle edilio7i de voire Grammaire. 3. Tlie subscription : — J'«j Vhonneur d'etre, Monsieur, Voire tres-humble el tres-obtissant Serviteur, M. T-**. It is also proper to begin the following words with a capital, in whatever part of the sentence they may occur : 1. All appellations of the Deity: an — Grand Dieu / Eire Supreme! &c. 2. Proper names of persons, heathen gods and goddesses, kingdoms, provinces, towns, places, streets, mountains, rivers, ships, &c.: as— Napoleon, Cesar, Ciceron, Jean-Jacques Rousseau, Jupiter, Venus, la France, la Nor?nandie, Paris, Saint-Denis, rue Neuve-des- Petit s-Champs, les ^Ipes, la Loire, &c. 3. The names of the days of the week and of the months: as^—Dimafiche, Lundi, Mardi, &c. ; Janvier, Ftvrier, Mars, &c. 4. Substantives and adjectives derived from proper names: as — La Henriade ; la langue Italienne ; a la Frangaise. 5. The first word of every direct quotation : as — // me dit : " Personne que moi,'^ &c, 6. The principal words in the titles of books, and single letters used for abbre- viations: as — Ai/as Historique Chronologique, &c., par M. De A. Le Sage. Note. — It is the custom in English to write the pronoun /with a capital letter; but in French no distinction of this sort is made with the corresponding word je, which is never writteii with a capital, except at the beginning of a sentence or the commencement of a quotation : as — " Mais, Madame, je pensais que vous,'' and not Je, &c. 9. Of Punctuation. Punctuation is the act of distinguishing or terminating each part of a sentence by stops or pauses, according to its sense or connexion with the whole. There are six principal stops made use of for punctviation in English and French, which are distinguished by the following names and figures : — 1. the comma ( , ) I^a virgule. 2. the semicolon ( ; ) Le point et la virgule. 3. the colon ( : ) Les deux points. 4. the period, or full stop ( . ) Le point. 5. the note of interrogation ,..( ? ) Le point d'inlerrogation. 6. the note of admiration ( ! ) Le poitit d' admiration. The comma is used to separate either the portions of a complete sentence, or the different members of simple sentences, when each is closely united, either in sense or grammatical construction : as — Chez mot, lui dtt-il, Madame, ce Ji'est ni moi ni ma 18 GREEK AND ROMAN PROPER NAMES. femme qui commande, c'est la raison. — lis conviennent tous qu^en effet sa beautc, son air, son regard, le caracttre de pudeur et d" innocence empreint siir son visage avail quelqtce chose (fangchque. Le sort fait les parens, le choix fait les amis. Dei.ille. The semicolon separates the parts of a compound sentence, which are less depend- ent upon each other than those divided by commas ; it is also used after several passages, divided by commas, when their import is summed up : as — Le bal, la comedie, la promenade ; voila les amusemens da rnonde. Tous les jours je t'attends ; tu reviens tous les jours. Racine. The coloji is employed in a similar manner to the semicolon, but when the sense is more complete ; it is also used at a part where the subject might be finished, but beyond which it is prolonged by some additional observation : as — La fourmi n'est pas pretense : C'est la son moindre defaut. La Fontaine. The period marks the termination of the subject, or the completion of each com- pound sentence, when each is independent : as — Mon unique chagrin est de par ait re ingrat, et de n^avoir pas meme Pesperance que mon oncle soil detrompe. S'il est possible, il le sera, lui dis-je. Mais il nCa defendu de vous nommer a Itii ; et je connais son caracttre : il faut Vattendre et ne pas le heurter. The 7to{e of interrogation is used at the end of interrogative sentences, unless they be only expressed as quotations: as — Que voulez-vouz? — Les Tyriens me demandaient pourquoi je pleurals. Tire note of admiration is used after interjections and phrases of surprise, joy, grief, &c. : as — Ah ! ah ! le petit drole ; Dieu ! quel exemple vous choisissiez .' 10. Woi^ds that are spelt alike in English and French. 1. The most part of substantives and adjectives which end in English with any of these seven syllables, ble, ce, de, ent, ge, ion, and ne, are spelt alike in French. The only diilerence consists in the pronunciation and in the accents which some of them require in French : as — English and Freuch. English, French. 1 ble fable, fable. 2 ce evidence, evidence. 3 de prelude, prelude. 4 ent diligent, diligent. 5 ge age,... dge. 6 ion nation, nation. 7 ne machine, machine. 2, Most nouns ending in English with ary, ory, cy, ty, ous, our, and or, become French by changing these terminations, as follows : — 1 ary into aire j as, military, militatre. 2 ory into oire ; as, glory, gloire. 3 cy into ce ; as, clemency, clemence. 4 ty into te ; as, humanity, ... humanite. 5 ous into enx J as, dangerous,... dangereux. 6. ourOYor into eur; as, favour, faveur. 11. Difference in the spelling of the Greek and Roman 'proper Names in English and French. 1. Tlie Greek and Roman proper names of men, ending in English with a, are spelt alike in French: as — Agrippa, Caligula, Dolabella, Nerva. 2. The proper names of women and goddesses, ending in English with a, become A GENERAL VIEW OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 19 French by changing the final a into e mnte: as — Cleopatra, Cleopatre ; Matilda, Matilde ; Agrippina, Jgr-ippine ; Diana, Diane. 3. The greater part of proper names, ending in English with as, become French by changing as into e mute: as — Eneas, Ente ; Mecenas, Mece/ie ; Pji:hagoras, Pythagore. 4. Proper names, ending in English with es, become French by changing that final into e mute : as — Demosthenes, Demosthene ; Ulysses, Ulysse ; Socrates, Soc7'ale. 5. Proper names, ending in English with o, become French by changing o into on : as — Cicero, Cicefon ; Cato, Colon ; Dido, Didon / Scipio, Scipion. 6. Proper names, ending in English with us or ius, are usually spelt alike in French, when they consist of two syllables only : as — Brutus, Brutus ; Cyrus, Cyrus; Venus, Finns ; &c. But if they be composed of three or more syllables, they sometimes become French by changing its or ius into e mute : as — Camillus, Camille ; Esculapius, Esculape ; Orpheus, Orphee. 7. Most proper names, ending in English with al or is, are the same in both languages : as — Annibal, Asdrubal, Juvenal, Scsostris. 8. Most proper names, ending in English with ander, become French by changing ander into andre : as — Alexander, Alexandre ; Lysander, Lysandre. PART THE SECOND. ETYMOLOGY. A general View of the Parts of Speech. The second part of Grammar is Etymology, which treats of the different sorts of words, their various modifications, and their derivation. There are in French nine sorts of words, or parts of speech, namely: — the article, the substantive, the adjective, the pronoun, the verb,ih.Q adverb, the preposition, the conjunction, and the inteijection. 1. The article is a word prefixed to substantives, to point them out, and to show hoAv far their signification extends : as — un honnne, a man ; une femme, a woman ; le rot, the king. 2. The substantive is the name of any person, or thing, that exists or of which we have some notion : as — Alexandre, iVlexander ; soled, sun ; Londres, London ; vertu, virtue. 3. The adjective is a word added to a substantive to express its quality or manner of being: as — U7ie belle femme, a fine woman; une grande ville, a large town. 4. The pronoun is a word used instead of a noun, to avoid the too frequent repe- tition of the same word : as — mon ami est arrive ; il m'a apporte de bienjolies chose s : my friend is arrived ; he has brought me some very pretty things. 5. The verb is a word of which the principal use is to express affirmation, or to signify to be, to do, or to suffer : as — je snis, I am ; j'aime, I love ; je suis aime, I am loved. 6. The adverb is a part of speech joined to a verb, an adjective, and sometimes to another adverb, to express some quality or circumstance respecting it : as — il /)cir/e 6<>//, he speaks well; un fart ban homme, a very good man; il ecrit Ires-cor- rectement, he writes very correctly. 20 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.— OF THE ARTICLES. 7. Prepositions serve to connect Avovds with one another, and to show the relation between them : as — il alia de Londres a Paris, he went from London to Paris. // vit de rapine, he lives on plunder. 8. A conjunction is a part of speech chiefly used to connect sentences, so as, out of two or more sentences, to make but one ; it sometimes connects only words : as— voMs et lui, vous etes heureux, you and he are happy; le plaisir et la peifie, pleasure and pain. 9. Interjections are words thrown in between the parts of a sentence, to express the passions or emotions of the speaker: as — del I Oh, heavens I — Que vous etes aimable ! how amiable you are ! I shall now proceed to treat of the different sorts of words just enumerated, and their various modifications, omitting however to notice their derivation, as it would involve explanations much too diffuse for the limits of this work. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. LESSON I. Of the Article, The article is a little w&rd which is prefixed to substantives to point them out, and show the extent of their signification. To facilitate the study of French to beginners, I have divided the article into indefinite, definite, and partitive. The indefinite article is a or an, un, une ; the definite the, le, la, l', les; the partitive some or any, du, de la, de l", des; which are subject to the following variations. 1. Exam]ples of the Indefinite Article. * Before a noun m. Before a noun /. whatever its initial whatever its initial may be. may be. A or an, vn, une. Of or from a or an, - cVun, tVune. At or to a or an, a un, a une. 2. Examples of the Definite Article. Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun m. sing, be- /. sing, be- in. or/, sing. pi. of either ginning with a ginning with a beginning with gender, what- consonant or consonant or a u. or /t mute. ever its initial 1i aspirated. h aspirated. may be. The, le, la, F, les. Of or from the, du, de la, de /', des. At or to the, av, a la, a I', aux 3. Examples of the Partitive Article, Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun fn.sing.be- /. sing, be- w. or/, sing. pi. of either ginning with a ginning with beginning with gender, what- conionant or a consonant or a w. or A mnte. ever its initial h aspirated. h aspirated. may be. Some or any, du, de la, de 1% des. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.— OF THE ARTICLES. 21 * ISote. — In the first seven essaj^s, the gender and number of substantives will be found marked, in order that the pupil may use the necessary articles. — m. at the end of a word, will, therefore, denote a noun or substantive masculine ; /. a noun feminine ; m. v. or nt. h. a noun masculine, beginning with a vowel or h mute ; m. fl. a noim masculine plural ; f. pi. a noun feminine plural ; m. or /. sing, a noun masculine or feminine singular. But in the succeeding ones these marks, if used, will further signify that, if the word going before be not of the gender and number indicated by them, it must be put in that gender and number. The adjectives which precede their respective substantives in English, but Avhich should come after them in French, as well as the construction of those sentences which might be found too difficult for beginners, are marked in the following essays with figures before the French words. Care must, therefore, be taken to place the words which are marked with the figure 1 before those which are marked with the figure 2, and so on with the words to which the succeeding figures are prefixed. This assistance will be continued, until the pupil is considered sufficiently acquainted Avith the necessary rules on those subjects. Throughout the essays, the English words which are not to be expressed in French are marked with an asterisk (*) after them ; and those which are spelt the same in French as in English have a dash, thus , under them. When several English words are found included within a parenthesis, ( ) they must be translated by the French words only which are placed under them. Whenever a word has been employed more than once in the same essay, its equivalent in French is not repeated, in order that the pupil may the better recol- lect it; and, in general, the French of all words easy to remember will be found gradually omitted, as the pupil advances in the essays. ESSAY I. A man. A woman. — Of a man. — Of a woman. — To a man. — To a woman homme m. femmef. — A friend. — From a friend. — To a friend. — The park. — Of the park. — To the ami m. pare m. park. — From the park. — A fine day. A week. A month. — A novel. — beau m. jour m. semaine f. inois m. romanm. A history. A cart. The waiter. Of the Avaiter. To the waiter. The histoire f.. charretie f. gar<^on m. mistress of the house. — Of the mistress of the house. — To the mistress of mailresse f. 7vaisonf. the house. Tire coaches. The carts. To the country. From the voiluresf.pl. charreltesf.pl. campagtie f. country. — The soul. — Of the soul. — To the soul. — The ladies. — Of the ladies. — ame f. v. dames f. pi. To the ladies. — ^The men. Of the men. — To the men. — The women. — hommes m. pi. femmes f pi. To the women. From the women. Some bread. — Some butter. — Some beer. — pain m. beurre m. biere f Some water. — Some wine. — Some ham. Some eggs. Some vegetables. eauf. V. vin in. jainbon m. ccufs m. pi. legumes m. pi. 22 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.— OF THE PERSONAL LESSON IL Of the Personal Pronouns. Personal pronouns are words used instead of the names of persons or things. They serve either for the nominative or object of the verb. Those which fill the place of the nominative of the verb are : — I, je, and f before a vowel or h mute ; thou, tu ; he, il ; she, elle ; it, il and elle ; we, nous ; ye or you, vous ; they, ils^ m. pi. and elles, f. pi. The pronouns which are employed for the object of the verb, are : — me, me, and sometimes moi ; thee, te, and sometimes toi ; him or it, le^ lui, y, and en ; her, /a, lui, y, and en ; us, nous ; ye and you, vous ; them, les, leur, eux, elles, and en ; as will be hereafter explained. Me, te, le, la, are spelt in* f P before a word beginning with a vowel or h mute. Of the Possessive Pronouns. Possessive pronouns express the possession or property of any thing. They are divided into conjunctive and relative. They are called con- junctive when they immediately precede a substantive, and relative when they refer to one. The conjunctive admit of any preposition before them ; and, in the following examples, they are exemplified with de, in the sense of of or from, in English ; — and a, for at or to. The relative, on the contrary, are always preceded by le, la, les, the ; du, de la, des, of or from the ; and au, a la, aux, at or to the, like a substantive, as may be seen hereafter. Both the conjunctive and relative possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the substantives to which they refer. 1. Examjoles of the Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. FIRST PERSON. singular. Plural. Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun Before a noun m. beginning /. l)eginning in. or/, sing. pi. of either with a conso- with a conso- beginning with gender, what- nant or h nant or h a vowel or h ever its initial aspirated. aspirated. mute. may be. My, Mon, ma, mon. mes. Of or from my_, De mon, de ma, de mon, de mes. At or to my, A mon, a ma, a mon. a mes. Our, Notre, notre, notre, nos. Of or from our. De notre, de notre, de notre. de nos. At or to our. A noire, a notre, SECOND PERSON a notre. a nos. Singular. Mas. Fem. Before a noun m. or/. sing, beginning with a vowel or h mute. Before a noun plural. Thy, Ton, ta. ton. tes. Of or from thy. De (on, de ta. de ton. de tes. At or to thy. A ion, a ta, a ion. a tes. Your, Fotre, votre. votre, vos. Of or from your. De votre, de votre. de votre. de vos. At or to your. A votre, a votre. a votre a vos. AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 23 THIRD PERSON. Singular. Jiefore a noun m. ox f. sing, beainning with a Before a nouu Mas. Fern. vowel or h mute. plural His, her, or its. Son, i-a, son. ses. Of or from his, 1 ^^ her, or its, 3 ' de sa, de son. de ses. At or to liis, her, 1 ;^ • ■ r yt son, or its, J a sa, a son. a ses. Their, Leur, leur, leur, leurs. Of or from their, De leur, de leiir, de leur, de leurs. At or to their, A leur, a leur, a leur. a leurs. 2. Examples of the Relative Possessive Pronouns. FIRST PERSON. Singtdar. Plural. Mas. Fera. Mas. Pern. Mine, Le mien, la mienne ; les miens, les miennes. Of or from mine. Du mien, de la mienne ; des miens, des miennes. At or to mine. Au mien, a la mienne ; aux miens. aux miennes Ours, Le noire, la noire ; les notres. les nofres. Of or from ours. Du noire, de la noire ; des notres. des ?i6ires. At or to ours, Au noire, a la not re ; aux nblres, aux no I res. SECOND PERSON. Singular. Plural. ' Mas. Fem. Mas. Fem. Thine, Le iien, la ttenne ; les liens, les iiennes. Of or from thine. Du tien. de la tienne ; des tiens. des iiennes. At or to thine. Au tien, a la tienne ; aux liens, aux iiennes. Yours, Le voire. la voire ; les voires. les voires. Of or from yours. Du voire, de la voire ; des voires, des voires. At or to yours. Au voire. u la voire ; THIRD PERSON aux voires, aux voires. Singular, Plural. Mas. Fem, Mas. Fem. His, hers, or its. Le sien. la sienne ; les siens, les siennes. Of or from his, "i hers, or its, J > Du sien. de la sienne ; des siens. des siennes. At or to his, hers, "i or its, < ' Au sien. a la sienne ; aux sienSy aux siennes. Theirs, Le leur. la leur ; les leurs. les leurs. Of or from theirs. Du leur, de la leur ; des leurs, des leurs. At or to theirs. Au leur, a la leur ; aux leurs, aux leurs. Note. — It is necessary to observe that, when parents address their children, and frequently little children their parents, either in a familiar conversation, or in an epistolary correspondence ; or when a man and his wife, a brother and sistei", or intimate friends, either speak or correspond together, as also when somebody is upbraided in a contemptuous manner, it is customary to use, in French, the verbs and the pronouns in the second person singular : as — Maman, vsux-tu venir avec moi ? Mamma, will you come with me ^ 24 INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.--OF THE ESSAY 11. My father. — Of my father. — To my father. — From my son. — To my brother. — ^To pere m. jils m. frere m. his sister. — His niece. — To her cousin. — Thy wife. — Of thy wife. — To thy wife. sceur f. niece f. cousin m. femme f. — From thy wife. — Her husband. — From her husband. — To her husband. — His 7nari m. daughters. — To his daughters. From her friend. — :-To her nephew. — Their Jltles f. pL ami 771. V. ncveu m. uncle. Our aunt. Your godfather and godmother. His mother-in- oncle m. v. tante f. parrairi vi. et voire marraine f. belle-mere f. law. — Her father-in-law. — Thy grandfather. — My grandmother. — Your hand- beau-pere m. grand-ptre m. grand' -mere f. mou- kerchief. His cravat. Her money. To her money. — Their garden. To choir m. cravate f. argent m. v. jar din m. their garden. From their house. To their orchard. — My relations. Your muiso7if. verger m. parens m. pi. neighbours. His acquaintances. Her birds. Our servants. Your voisinsm.pl. connuissancesf.pl. 0iseaux7n.pl. servantesf.pl. masters. To their children. Your temper, and hers. My pic- maitres 7n. pi. enfans m. pi. dispontion f sing. ia- tures, yours and theirs. — Her carriage and ours. — His house and mine. — bleauxm.pl. voilure f. My books and yours. livres m. pi. LESSON III. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns. The demonstrative pronouns are words which we use to point out the persons or things spoken of: they are — this, that; these, those; ce, cet^ cette, ces ; celui, cclle ; ceux, celles ; ceci, cela. The demonstrative pronouns, this, that, these, those, being the same in English, whether they precede a substantive or refer to one, offer no difficulty ; but being translated into French very differently in the one case from what they are in the other, I shall divide them into conjunc- tive and relative. The conjunctive are : — ce, cet, cette, this, that ; ces, these or those ; which always precede the substantive which they particularise, and can never be used without it. The relative are : — celui, celle, this, that; ceux, celles, these, those; which, usually referring to a noun ex- pressed before, can never be prefixed to any. Both the conjunctive and relative demonstrative pronouns agree, in French, in gender and number with their respective substantives, and retain the same place in the sentence which this, that, these, those, occupy in English. They never admit of any article before them, in either language, although they may be preceded by a preposition, or united by a conjunction. In the fol- DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 25 lowing examples, they are exemplified witli the prepositions de and a ; but any other preposition may be used instead, according as the sense may require it. ARTICLE I. Of the Conjunctive Demonstrative Pronouns. Whenever this, that, these, those, immediately precede a substantive or noun in English, as — that man, they are expressed, in French, by — ce, cet, cette, ces, as follows : — Singular. Before a noun m. Before a noun Before a noun f. sing. beginning with a n-!. beginning beginning either with a consonant or h with a vowel consonant, a vowel, or . aspirated. or h mute. an h mute or aspirated. This or that, by:- Ce, cef, cette. Of or from this or that, by:- Dece, de cet, de cette. At or to this or that, by:- A ce, Mas a cet, Plural. a cette. Fern. These or those, by:— Ces, ces. ces. Of or from these or those by:- De ces, de ces. de ces. At or to these or those, by:- A ces, ARTICLE II a ces. a ces. Of the Relative Demonstrative Pronouns. 1. Whenever this, that, these, ^/lo^e, instead of immediately preceding a substantive or noun in English, refer to one, which is usually the case when they are followed either by the preposition of, or by one of the relative pronouns who, ivhom, that, or which, as — this goxon and that of your sister y they are expressed in French in the following manner : — Singi/lar. Mas. Fem. Tliis or that, by:- Celui, celle. Of or from this or that, by:_ De cehii, de celle. At or to this or that. by:- A celui, Mas. Plural. a celle. Fem. These or those, by:- Ceux, celles. Of or from these or those, by:- De ceux, de celles. At or to these or those, by:- A ceux. a celles. 2. Whenever two or more persons or things being mentioned, this or these is used to point out the nearest to the person who speaks, and that or those the most remote from the person who speaks, as — which of these two watches ivill you have ? this is silver, and that is gold ; they are thus rendered in French : — Singular. This, Of or from this, At or to this, Mas. Fem, by:- Celui-ci, celle-ci. by:- De celui-ci. de celle-ci by:— A celui-ci. a celle-ci. c INTROI )UCTC ►RY LESSONS.— OF THE Plural. Mas. Fem. These, by : — Ceiix-ci, celles-ci. Of or from these, ty :— De ceux-ci, de celles-ci At or to these, by : — A ceux-ci, Singular. a celles-ci. Mas. Fem. .That, hy — Celui-la, celle-la. Of or from that. by. — De cehd-la, de celle-la. At or to that, by: — A celui-la, Plural. a celle-la. Mas. Fem. Those, by: — eux-la, celles-la. Of or from those. by: — ■ De ceux-la^ de celles-la. At or to those. by: — A ceux-la, a celles-la. 3. Whenever this or that is used in English in pointing at anything, without naming what it is, as — give me this or that ; this is then con- strued into French by ceci., with reference to the nearest object alluded to, and that by cela., with reference to the most remote object spoken of. They are both masculine singular, and have no plural, as : — This, Of or from this, At or to this, Mas. Ceci. De ceci. A ceci. Singular. That, Of or from that. At or to that. Mas. Cela. De cela. A cela. ESSAY III. This picture. ^That gold. «This night. These oranges. This book. — tableau m. orm.v. nuit f. f-'pl- livre m. Of this bird. To this bird. From that man. To that river. mseau m. v. homme m. h. riviere f. From that house. — To these laurels. From these laurels. To this day. maison f. lauriers m. pi. jour m. At that hour. From that moment. To these ladies. From those heuref. Des ; gentlemen. ^To these houses. messieurs m. pi. maisons f. pi. Ptolemy. This gown and that of your sister. - robe f. soeur f. Ptolomee mind esprit m. v. daughter. jillef. The state ttat m. V. two horses : deux chevaux apricots : and those of the body.- dames f. pi. The system of Copernicus and that of systeme m. Copernic et The disorders of the maladies f. pi. -These bracelets and those of his m. pi. corps m. of Switzerland is preferable to that of Italy.—— la Suisse est preferable Vltalie -The climate climat m. of France is very different from that of England. — (There are) la est tres-difftrent V Angleterre Voild this is four years old,* and that five. ^There are some a quatre ans cinq. these are ripe, and those (are not). Give me this or that. — abricots m. pi. sont murs ne le sont pas Donnez-moi Keep that for yourself. 1 (was speaking) of this and not of that Gardez potir voua-meme parlais nan pat RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 21 LESSON IV. Of the Relative Pronouns. The relative pronouns are such as relate in general to some word or phrase going before, which is thence called the antecedent, and which they immediatel)' follow, agreeing with it in gender and number : they are — qui, que, lequel, dont, in the sense of ivho, whom, that, ivhich, of whom or of which, in English : as, — La dame qui vient d'entrer, the lady who has just gone in ; &c. When the relative pronouns qui, lequel, quel, who, which, or what, are used to ask questions, they are called interrogatives, and relate to some word or phrase, that is not antecedent, but subsequent, and which is specified in the answer : as, — Qui est Id ? Mademoiselle voire soeur ; Who is there ? Your sister. The following examples show the different constructions to which the relative pronouns, and the interrogatives quel ? and quoi 1 (what?) are subject. 1. Whenever the relative pronouns loho, whom, that, which, &c., are used in English with reference to some word or phrase going before, they are expressed in French as follows : — • I\Ias. and Fern., Sing, and Plural. :— Qui. : — Dont. : — A qui. : — Que, for the direct object of a verb. : — De qui. Note. — Qui and que are used with reference to persons and things of whichsoever gender and number. 2. Whenever loho or whom is used to ask a question, it is expressed in French : — Who, which or that, by Of whom or of which, by To whom or to which, by Whom, that or which, by From whom, by Who ? by Of whom ? by To whom ? by Whom ? by From whom ? by — Qui ? or Qui esi-ce-qui ? — De qui ? Qui? De qui ? 3. When which is followed by the preposition of, and used to ask which person or thing out of several, or when, without being followed by the preposition of, it is used relatively to a noun going before, it is expressed in French in the following manner : — Singular. Plural. Mas. Fem. Mas, Fern. Which, by: — Lequel, laquelle ; Jesquels, lesquelles. Of or from vyhich, by: — Duquel, de laquelle ; desquels, desquelles. At or to which, by: — Auquel, a laquelle ; auxquels, aaxquelles. 4. What, used by way of interrogation, immediately before a sub- stantive, or before a tense of the verb to he, followed by a substantive or noun in English, as — what street is it ? what is her name ? is ex- pressed in French : — c 2 28 OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Singular. Plural. Mas. Fein. Mas. Fern. : — Quel f quelle ? quels ? quell es ? : — JDe quel? de quelle 9 de quels ? de qvelles? : — A quel? a quelle? a quels? a quelles? 5. When what is used either as an exclamation or interrogation, or after a preposition, it is expressed in French thus : — What ? by Of or from v/hat ? by At or to what ? by What ! by Of or froni what ? by At or to what P by What ? by Quoi! and quoi de! before an adjective. Be quoi ? A quoi ? Que? for the direct object of a verb, and quoi after a preposition. ESSAY IV. The man who speaks. — The young lady who dances. — The woman whom I parle demoiselle f. danse know. — The pens which I have. The master of whom you (complain). connais plumesf.pl. maitre m. vous plaignez — The horses of which he has spoken (to me). — The person from chevauxm.pl. ^ ^parU ^rrC personne f. whom we have received that news. The young man whom you love. — ^The recti nouvelle f. jeune aimez children who are obedient. — The gentlemen to whom I write. Who enfans m. pi. sont obeissans messieurs m. pi. tcris is there ? Of whom do* you speak ? Whom do* you call ? What does* est la ^ ^parlez- ^ ^appelez- he do .^ — Whom shall" I believe.^ — Which of these two books.? ^ ^fait- ^ ^croirai- m. sing. deux livres m. pi. Of which of your sisters do you speak ? ~ To which of these f. sing. soeurs f. pi. f. sing. houses do" you go ? Who is that tall young man ? What road maisons f. pi. ^ ^allez- est grand chemin m. has he taken ? — What book do* you read ? — What street (is it) ? What pris livre m. ^ ^lisez- rue f. est-ce day have they fixed ? What are their motives ? To what church jour m. jixt sont motifs m. pi. tglise f (does he go) ? — What ! — Of what do" you accuse him ? — What are* you thinking va-t-il ^ ^accusez- V ^ 4 ^pensez- of ? — In what have I neglected to fulfil my duty ? What do* you say '^ ^a En ntgligt de remplir devoir m. ^ ^dites- Note. — The above articles and pronouns are fully explained in the following lessons. LESSON V. Of the Indefinite Article^ un, une, a or an. General Rule. — When several substantives follow each other in a sentence, and are used in an individual sense, the indefinite article un or une is used before each of them in French, according to its respec- OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 29 tive gender ; although a or an, in a series of substantives, be frequently put before the first only in English, and understood before those which succeed : as, — a father, mother, and child, uii pere, U7ie mere, et un enfant. When a or an is preceded by one of the prepositions of or from, at or to ; of or from is expressed by (cV) before un or une, and at or to by «, as in the following examples : — A book, Lfn livre. A young lady, Une demoiselle. Of or from a book, />'wj livre. Of or from a young lady, Dhme demoiselle. At or to a book, A un livre. At or to a young lady, A une demoiselle. ESSAY V. It is necessary to observe that the abbreviations imp, pret. def. and pret. indef. which are used in the following essays, serve to denote that the succeeding verbs are to be put, in French, either in the imperfect, preterit definite, or preterit indefinite of the indicative, according as each abbreviation indicates. A boy. A girl. — A (chamber-maid). A maid of honour. — Tlie look garcon m. jille f. femme de chambre f. fd!e f. dChonneur regard m. of an amiable child. The door of a house. 1 have written to a friend. — '^aimable ^enfant m. portef. maison f. tcrit ami m. He has not spoken to a lady. — She has a good pear. — You have a fine apricot. — parlc dame f. bonne poire f. bel abricot m.. They had a garden, a park, and a river. I shall have a horse. Will ijnp. jardin m. parcm. et riviere f. cheval m. you have a carriage ? — We shall not have a new phaeton. — I should have had voiture f. nouveau phaiton m. a blue coat. — Would you have had a watch ? — Had she not a pair of %leu ^ habit m. montre f. imp. paire f. de (silk stockings), and a pair of (new shoes) ? — We had a good dinner. — bus de soie souliers neufs pret def. diner rn. Had they not a good supper P — I have received a letter from a charming pret. def. soi/per m. re<^u lettre f. churmante young lady. Give me a glass of water. Bring me a kniff, a demoiselle f. Donnez-moi verre m. d'eati Apportez-moi couteau m. fork, and a spoon. Take a glass of wine. — (Will you take) a bit of fourchette f. cuiller f. Prenez vin Voulez-vous pen m, cheese ? 1 have taken a cup of tea and a cup of coffee. Mr. S * * * fromage pris tasse f. the caft M. S * * * (has sent vis) a chest of oranges. — We have received this fruit from a friend. nous a envuyt caissef. ce ami m. LESSON VI. Of the Definite Article. The definite article may be divided into simple and compound. The simple article is le, la, les, the. The compound du, des, of or from the, and an, aux, at or to the. Du, des, and au, anx, are formed 30 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. by a contraction of the prepositions de and a with the simple article le and les. Le is used before a substantive masculine singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; /', before a noun, either masculine or feminine singular, beginning with a vowel or h mute; and les, before plural nouns of both genders, whatever their initial may be. Du and au are used, instead of de le and a le, before substantives masculine singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; and des and aux, in the place of de les and a les, before plural nouns, either masculine or feminine, beginning with a vowel, a consonant, or h mute. La, de la, a la, must always be used before a substantive feminine singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated; and /', de V , and a V, before nouns singular, either masculine or feminine, beginning with a vowel or A mute. When a substantive is preceded by the adjective tout or tons, neither the contracted article dn or des, nor au or aux, being used before it, in such a case, the preposition de or a must be placed before tout or ious^ with le or les, according to the sense, before the substantive, as follows : Singular. Plural. Every body, Tout le monde. All men, Tons les hommes. Of or from everj'' body, De font le monde. Of or from all men. ^QtousX^^hommes. At or to every body, A tout le monde. At or to all men, A tons les hommes. Observe. — When of ox from, or at or to, occurs before proper names of persons or places, or before a pronoun or an adverb, or also some- times before the names of countries after the verbs Venir and Revenir, and some others implying going from a country to another, of or from is expressed in French by de, or d' if the word begins with a vowel or h mute, and at or to by h ; but never by du, de la, de V, or des, nor au, a la, a V, or aux, except in the cases mentioned in the Syntax : as, — from Paris to London, de Paris a Londres, and not du Paris au Londres. That belongs to William or to Peter, cela appartient k Guil- laume ou k Pierre ; and not — au Guillaume ou au Pierre. I come from France, je viens de France ; and not — de la France. General Rule. — The definite article, either simple or compound, is mostly used in French before every substantive, taken in a general or particular sense, and agrees with it in gender and number, whether it be used in English or not : as, — the gentleman, lady, and boy are gone, LE monsieur, la dame, et le garpon sont partis. Vice is odious, le vice est odieux. Ladies are amiable, les dames sont aimahles. Note. — Although the definite article be frequently omitted after the prepositions of or from and at or to occurring between two or more substantives following and depending on each other in English, it is usually expressed in French, except in the cases mentioned in the Syntax : as, — the love of glory, V amour de la gloire ; and not P amour de gloire. I vrent to market with her, j^allai au marche avec elle; and not a marche. OF THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 31 ESSAY VI. The father, mother, and children. The love of glory. The fear of pere m. mere f. enfansm.pl. amour m. v. gloire f. crainte f. shame. The prattling of girls. The malice of the boys. The four hontef. habilm. Jillesf.pl. /. garconsm.pl. quatre seasons of the year. 1 have spoken to (Mr. D.'s sister). (Were you saisonsf.pl. anntef.v. parle la soeur de 31. D'^^*''^ Ne par- not speaking) to the child ? Honour forbids it. — ^Have you given my liez-vous pas enfant m. v. Honneurm.h. ^dtfend^le donne letter to the man ? The hope of success. — ^The lily is the emblem lettre f. homme vi. h. espoir m. v. succesm. lism. embleme m. v. of virginity, innocence, purity, and candour. — I prefer spring to summer, virginite f. f. v. puretc f. candeurf prtfere printemps m, ^ttm.v. autumn, and winter. ^The east, the west, the north, and the south, are atitomne m. v. hiver m. h. est m. v. ouest m. v. nord m. siid m. the four cardinal points. 1 have been dazzled by the rays of the sim. ^cardinanx ^ m.pl. eblotii par rayonsm.pl. so lei I m. (1 shall go) to the village this evening. — Will you come with me to the market ? — J'irai ' * m. ^ .^soir m. Voulez- venir avec moi marcht m. We went together to the country. The fear of death and the love of glory alldmes ensemble campagtie f. mort f. amour m. v. are natural to all men. Cut the string in two. — Take this to the naturels hommesm.pl. Cotipez cor de f. en deux Portez ceci women. Send that to the men. 1 come from France and Italy. femmesf.pl. Envoyez cela hommes m. pi. viens • Italie f, v. He (will return) from Spain in two months. — That belongs to John or to reviendra Espagne f. v. en mois appartient Jean ou Peter. From Paris to Amsterdam. He (is the laughing-stock of) every Pierre • sert de jouet a body. — She told everybody of* it. — ^They gave some to all the children. ''^dit ^a * ^ le '■^donnerent ^ en LESSON VII. Of the Partitive Article. The partitive article is some or any, which is expressed in French by du, before a substantive masculine singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; by de la, before a substantive feminine singular, like- wise beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; by de l\ before a sub- stantive, either masculine or feminine singular, beginning with a vowel or /i mute ; and by des, before a substantive plural, of either gender, and whatever its initial may be. General Rule. — Whenever we wish to express a portion or part of one or more things, we use in French the partitive article du^ de la, de l\ or des, before the thing or each of the things alluded to, according 32 OF THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. to its gender or number, whether some or any be expressed or under- stood in Enghsh : as, — we had some soup, meat, and vegetables, nous eumes du potage, de la viande^ et des legumes. When an adjective or a participle precedes the thing or things of which we express a portion or part, as — give me some good wine^ the preposition de is then used in French before the adjective or participle, if it begins with a consonant or h aspirated, and d\ if it begins with a vowel or h mute, whatever its gender or number may be*, instead of du, de la, de V, or des : as, — give me some good wine, donnez-moi de hon vin, and not du hon vin. It must be particularly attended to, that it is only when a substantive is taken in a partitive sense, that de or d' is used instead of du, de la, de r, or des, before the adjective or participle preceding it; for, should a substantive be used in a particular, determinate sense, the article du, de la, de V, or des, must then be employed before the adjective or participle preceding it : as, — Thomas, bring me some of the good wine which I bought yesterday, Thomas, apportez-moi du bon vin que j^achetai hier^ and not de hon vin, &c. In this case, and any similar one, the article always answers to of the, expressed or understood in English, and not to some or any. Observe. — When some or any does not precede a substantive, but comes by itself after a verb, referring to something which has been men- tioned before, it is expressed in French by en, which is put before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, except when the verb is in the imperative affirmatively used, in which case en is placed after it : as, — have you any apples ? yes, I have some ; avez-vous des pommes ? oui,j'en ai. Go and offer some to the lady and gentleman, allez en offrir a madame et a monsieur. Give me some, donnez-m'en. Should some or any be understood in any such sentence in English, en must likewise be expressed in French. En is also used in French before a verb which has a noun of number or an indeterminate pronoun, referring to something mentioned before, for its object : as, — How many children has he ? He has only one now, but he has had two ; Comhien denfans a-t-il? II n'en a qu'un a pre- sent, mais il en a eu deux. En serves also in French, with verbs governing de^ to recall the idea of anything that has been mentioned before, whether its equi- valent be expressed in English or not : as, — I am glad of it, y'en suis hien-aise ; because etre hien-aise governs de ; but this belongs to the pronouns. Hence or from thence, used after a verb, by which the coming from some place mentioned is expressed, is also construed into French by en, which is placed before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — I come from thence, /en viens. — In this case, en is an adverb. OF SUBSTANTIVES. 33 ESSAY VII. Give me some bread and butter. Have you any (roast-meat) ? No ; Dojtnez-moi pain m. beurre m. rati m. but we have some (very nice boiled meat). — (Do you choose) fat or mais excellent bouilH Vonlez-vous gras vi. ou lean ? A little of both, (if you please). — If you have any cheese, n%aigre m. peu Pun et de f autre s'il vous plait Si fromagem. bring (me some). — We have some apples, oranges, and lemons. — (There apportez-men poinmesf.pl. f-P^- citrons m. pi. voi- are) some raspberries and strawberries. — Put some oil and vinegar la framhoisesf.pl. fraisesf.pl. mettez hidlef.h. vinaigre m into the salad. Eat some vegetables. Will you have* any sauce ? — dans salade f. mangez legumes m. pL Voulez-vous f (Shall I help you to) some fish.'* Help the* gentleman to some Cham- Vous offrirai-je poisson m. Versez '^monsieur ^a ^ 2 pagne. Have you offered any (to the lady) .'' Yes ; but she prefers some m. offert a madame prefer e water. Will you take some tea ? — Yes ; I will take some with pleasure. eaufv. Voulez-vous prendre them. prendrui avec plaisir (Help yourself to) some sugar and milk. — We had some fine peaches and Prenez sucre m. lait m. imp. belles peches apricots this year. They sell good ink, good pens, and good beauT abricots annee f vendent bonne encre bonnes phtmes ban paper. France produces wine, oranges, and olives. 1 have brought you papier f produit via m. fp^' — /• P-- ^Je ^ai ^apporte Hoiis some* of the fine cloth you (asked me for). — You have some beautiful beau drop m. que rn'aviez demande superbe (grapes), will you give me some.'' — If you want any, buy some. (Did raisin m. sing. ^donner ^m'en voulez achetez-en La the woman bring) any cream ? — No ; she (could not) get any. — I should be femme a-t-elle apporte creme f. n^ a pas pu troia-er ^ ^serais obliged to* you, if you could procure me some. — Have you a gun? — No; I ^oblige ^ pouviez '^procurer ^m'en fusil ?«. ^ imp. had two very good ones* formerly ; but I have none now. — (Are you going) to 2 * ^tres-bons ^autrefois n'en point a present allez-vous the park ? — No ; we (are coming from it.) pare m. h'enons ^en LESSON VIII. Of Substantives or Nouns. A substantive or noun is the name of a person or animal, and in general of anything that we either see, touch, or feel, or that is the object of any of our senses, or of which we have some idea or notion : as — Georges, George ; table, table ; soleil, sun ; vice, vice ; Londres, London ; &c. c 5 34 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. Two things are to be considered in substantives, the gender and imtnber. 1. The gender. — Gender is the distinction of sexes. There are only- two genders in French, the masculine and the feminine. Whatever is neuter in English must therefore belong to either the one or the other of these two genders in French. All substantives, commonly used with reference to men or male ani- mals alone, and also to those objects to which we fancifully attribute the qualities of the male, are masculine: as, — Alexandre, Alexander; lion, lion ; vainqueur, conqueror ; juge, judge ; genie, genius ; &c. The feminine belongs to women and all animals of the female kind, as likewise to all objects to which we attribute feminine qualities : as, — Josephine, Josephine ; lune, moon ; terre, earth ; &c. As there are a great many names of inanim-ate things, the genders of which could never be ascertained from the above explanation, I have laid down the following general rule and exceptions, which will be found of great practical utility. General Rule. — Nouns ending with a consonant, or with a, i, o, w, er aiso with e accented, not preceded by t, are generally masculine : as, — combat, fight ; opera, opera ; ouhli, oblivion ; echo, echo ; chapeau, hat ; cafe, coffee ; &c. : whereas those which end with e mute, or with e or ie accented, preceded by t, are feminine : as, — pomme, apple ; bonte, good- ness ; amitie, friendship ; &c. EXCEPTIONS. 1. Exceptions to Nouns ending with a Consonant, Nouns, the terminations of which are either ion or aison, are femi- nine : as, — nation, nation ; demangeaison, itching : except bastion, bastion; champion, champion; croupion, rump; lampion, a small lamp ; million, million ; pion, pawn ; talion, retaliation ; septentrion, north ; scorpion, scorpion ; which are masculine. The following nouns ending either with a consonant or with i or u are also feminine. water. making, ceremony. hunger. favour. end. flower. flower-de-luce. faith. time. plentifuhiess. forest. ant. garrison. bird-lime. cure. halter. Aprts-midi, afternoon. Eau, Brebis, sheep. Fagon, Boisson, drink, beverage. Faim, Bru, daughter-in-law. Faveur, Chair, flesh. Fin, Chaleur, heat. Fleur, Chanson, song. Fleur de h's, Chauve-souris, bat Foi, Chanx, lime. Fois, Clef, key. Foison, Conr, yard;, court. Foret, Croix, cross. Fourmi, Cuiller, spoon. Garnison, Cvisson, baking. Gltt, Bent, tooth. Gutrison, Dot, portion, dowry. Hart, GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 35 Legorty lesson. Peau, skin. Loi, law. Perdrix, partridge. Main, hand. Plupart, most part. Mam an, mamma. Poix, pitch. Mer, sea. Rancon, ransom. Merci, mercy. Soeur, sister. Mcetirs, manners, morals. Soif, thirst. Moisson, harvest. Souris, mouse. Mort, death. Toi'son, fleece. Motisson, monsoon. Toussaint, All Saints' Day. Nef, nave, body of a Tour, tower. church. Toitx, cough. Noix, nnt. Trahison, treason. Nuit, night. Tjibu, tribe. Paix, peace. Tumeur, swelling. Pdmoison, swoon. Fertu, virtue. Part, part. Vis, screw. Prison, prison. Voir, voice. There are also several substantives in eur, denoting properties, qua- lities, and dimensions, which are feminine: as, — laideur, ugliness; lenteur, slowness ; hauteur ^ haughtiness, height ; epaisseur, thickness ; grosseur, bigness; longueur, length ; largeur, breadth; &c. 2. Exceptions to Nouns ending with e mute. Nouns ending in age, age, ege, ege, ige, uge, uple, able, acle, aire, altre, etre, itre, ire, aire, asme, aume, erne, isme, iste, ome, ume, oire, ordre, and oxe, are generally masculine: as, — mariage, marriage; obstacle, obstacle ; privilege, privilege ; salaire, salary ; &c. : except affaire, business ; cage, cage ; chair e, pulpit ; creme, cream ; cire, wax ; decrottoire, shoebrush ; ecritoire, inkhorn ; etable, stable ; fable, fable; fenetre, vdndow; foire, fair; gloire, glory; grammaire, grammar; guetre, gaiter ; histoire, history; huitre, oyster; image, image; mdchoire, jaw ; memoire, memory ; mitre, mitre; nage, swimming ; nageoire, fin ; paire, pair; page, page; passoire, cullender; paume, palm; poire, pear ; rdcloire, strickle ; rage, rage ; satire, satire ; table, table ; tige, the body of a tree ; epitre, epistle ; victoire, victory ; vitre, a pane of glass ; liste, list ; batiste, cambric ; and a few others, which are feminine. The following ending with e mute are likewise masculine : — Abyme, abyss. Arbmte, shrub. ^cre. acre. Architeete, architect. Acte, act. Article, article. Adverbe, adverb. Artifice, artifice. Adulttre, adultery. Artiste, artist. Ane, ass. Asthme, asthma. Aigle, eagle. Asyle, asylum. Ange, angel. Astre, star. Angle, angle. Athte, atheist. Antre, den, cave. Augiire, augury. Antagoniste, antagonist. Auspice, auspice. Antidote, antidote. Axe, axis. Arbre, tree. Benefice, benefice, benefit. 36 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. Beurre, Bitume, Blame, Bourgogne (vin). Bronze, Buste, Cable, Cadavre, Cadre, C a lice, Calme, Camphre, Capitaine, Caprice, Caracttre, Carrosse, Casse-noisette, Casque, Catalogue, Centime, Centre, Cercle, Champagne (vin), Change, Chanvre, Chcipitre, Charme, Chausse-pied, Chef-d^oeuvre, Chtvrefeiulle, Onffre, Chimiste, Cidre, Cimeticre, Cirque, Cloitre, Cache, Cache d^ecai. Code, CodfCillej Coffre, Colasse, Commerce, Compte, ■ Conci/e, Concomhre, Conte, Cantrasfe, Convive, Costume, Cvude, Covvercle, Crane, Crepe, Crtpuscule, Crib^e, CrimCi "butter. bitumen. blame. burgundy. bronze. bust. cable. corpse. frame. chalice. calm. camphor, captain. whim, character. coach. nut-cracker. helmet. catalogue. centime. centre. circle. champagne. change, exchange. hemp. chapter, charm. shoeing-horn. master-piece. honey-suckle. cypher. chymist. cider. churchyard. circus. cloister. stage-coach, waggon passage-boat. code. codicil. trunk. colossus. trade. account. council. cucumber. tale, story. contrast. guest. costume. elbow. lid. skull. crape, twilight, sieve. Crocodile, Culte, Ctibe, Cygne, Cylindre, Danube, Dtlire, Dtluge, Demerile, Derriere, Dtsastre, Desordre, Diable, Dialogue, Diametre, Dilemme, Diocese, Disciple, Divorce, Dogme, Domaine, Domicile, Doute, Dogue, Drame, Droguiste, Ebtniste, Ecclesiastique, Edifice, Eloge, Em,pire, Emetique, Empldtre, Episode, Equilibre, , Escompte, Espace, Evangile, Exerctce, Exempley Faite, Faste, Fiacre, Flegme, Fleuve, Faie, Frontispive, Genie, Gendre, Genre, Germe, Geste, Gite, Glaive, Globe, Globule, crocodile. worship. cube. swan. cylinder. Danube. delirium. deluge, flood. demerit. back. disaster. disorder, devil. dialogue. diameter. dilemma. diocese. disciple. divorce. dogma. domain. dwelling-house, a bode, doubt, dog. drama, druggist, cabinet-maker, ecclesiastic, building, eulogy, praise, empire, emetic, plaster, episode, equilibrium, discount, space, gospel, exercise, example, top, pinnacle, pageantry, pomp, hackney-coach, phlegm, large river, liver. frontispiece, genius, son-in-law. gender, bud, shoot, gesture, action, dwelling, abode, sword, globe, globule. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 31 Golfe, gtilf. Modele, model. Goiiffre, gulf, pit, abyss, degree. Monarque, monarch. Grade, Monasthe, monastery. Groupe, group. Monde, world. Guide, guide. Monopole, monopoly. Havre, harbour, haven. Monstre, monster. Homicide, homicide, man- Moule, mould. slaughter. Multiplicande, multiplicand. Homme, man. Murmure, murmur. Hospice, asylum. Musee, museum. Hote, host, landlord. Navire, ship. Hymm^e, Hymen. IStgoce, trade, commerce. Incendie, conflagration, fire. Nvmbre, number. Insecte, insect. Office, office, business, part. Jnlerprete, interpreter. Oncle, uncle. Interrtgne, interregnum. Ongle, nail. Jntervalie, interval. Opprobre, opprobrium. Isthme, isthmus. Orcheitre, orchestra. Jeune, fast, fasting. Ordre, order. Juge, judge. Or/tvre, goldsmith. Jurisconmlte, jurisconsult. Organe, organ. Labyrinthe, labyrinth. Facte, pact, compact. La'ique, layman. Panache, plume. Ltgume, vegetable. Pantomime, pantomime. Lihelle, libel. Pape, pope. Libraire, bookseller. Parachute, parachute. Lievre, hare. Parapluie, umbrella. Linge, linen. Parjure, perjury. Livre, book. Parricide, parricide. Lustre, lustre, gloss. Participe, jarticiple. Luxe, luxury. Parterre, ; lower-garden, pit. Madere (vin). madeira. Patrirnoine, patrimony. Maire, mayor. Peigne, comb. Maitre, master. Peintre, painter. Male, male. Pine, Dolt of a lock. Manque, want. Peuple, people. Manifeste, manifesto. Philosophe, philosopher. Mnrbre, marble. Phmomme, phenomenon. Martyre, martyrdom. Piege, snare. Massacre, massacre. Pilate, pilot. Masque, mask. Pldtre, plaster. Mausolte, mausoleum. PoUe, stove. Melange, medley. Pot me. poem. ! Membre, member. Poivre, pepper. Mt moire. bill. Pole, pole. Mensonge, lie. Porte-m ouch ettes, snufFer-stand. Messie, Messiah. Porte-lettre, letter-case. Mercure, mercury. Porte-voix, speaking-trumpet. Mtrite, merit. Portique, portico. Merle, black-bird. Paste, post, place. Mtteore, meteor. Pouce, thumb. Meuble, piece of furniture. Pricepte, precept. Meurtre, murder. Precipice, precipice. Mille, mile. Prejudice, pre udice, detriment. Ministre, minister. Prelude, prelude. Ministere, ministry. Prestige, prestige. j Mystere, mystery. Prttexte, pretext, pretence. 38 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. Pretre, Principe, Prodige, Prophete, Proverhe, Pupitre, Regime, Regne, Reldche, Remede, Reproche, Repti'e, Reste, Reve, Rhone, Rhume, Risque, Role, Sable, Sabre, Sacrifice, Sanchmire, Scan dale, Sceptre, Schistfie, Sen/pule, Seig/e, Sepulcre, Service, Sexe, Siecie, Siege, Signe, Silence, Singe, Site, Somme, Songe, Soi^e, priest. principle. prodigy. prophet. proverb. desk. regime. reign. relaxation. remedy. reproach. reptile. remainder. dream. Rhone. cold. risk. part, roll. ' sand. sabre. sacrifice. sanctuary. scandal. sceptre. schism. scruple. rye. sepulchre. service. sex. age, century, seat. sign. silence. ape. site, situation. sleep, nap. dream. breath. Soufre, Spectre, Squelette, Style, Subside, Sucre, Supplice, Symbole, Synonyme, Telescope, Temple, Terme, Texte, Theme, Tigre, Tire-botte, Tonnerre, Triangle, Triomphe, Trone, Trophee, Tropique, Trouble, Tube, Tumult €, Ulcere, Vase, Vacarme, Vaudeville, Ventre, Verbe, Verre, Vestibule, Vice, Vinaigre, Voile, Volume, Zele, Z6phyre, brimstone, sulphur. spectre, ghost. skeleton. style. subsidy, aid. sugar. torment. symbol. synonyme. telescope. temple. limit, term, bound. text. theme. tiger.^ boot-jack. thunder. triangle. triumph. throne. trophy. tropic. trouble. tube, pipe. tumult. ulcer. vase. uproar. vaudeville, ballad. belly. verb. glass. vestibule. vice. vinegar. veil. volume. zeal. zephyr. The cardinal numbers quatre, onze, douze, treize, quatorze^ quinze, seize, trente, quarante, cinquante, soixante, are also masculine. The ordinal, deuxieme, troisieme, &c., are likewise masculine, unless they precede a substantive feminine, in which case they are feminine. 3. Exceptions to Nouns ending with e accented preceded by t. The following nouns ending with e accented, preceded by t, are masculine : — benedicite, a prayer before meals ; comite, committee ; comte, county ; cote, side ; depute, deputy ; ete, summer ; pate, pie ; traite, treaty. Particular Observations. The following remarks on the genders of some particular substantives will be found highly useful, although the gender of some of them may be ascertained from the above general rule and exceptions. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 39 1. All substantives commonly used with reference to men alone, or male animals, are, as before said, masculine, whatever their terminations maybe : as — usurpateur, usurper ; vainqueur, conqueror; juge, judge ; whereas all those usually attributable to women, or female animals, are feminine, although their terminations may be masculine. 2. The names of days, months and seasons, are masculine: as — Dimanche dernier ., on Sunday last. Fevrier prochain, next February. Le printemps, the spring ; un He pluvieux, a wet summer ; un hel automne, a fine autumn ; un hirer froid., a cold winter. 3. When mi, middle, is used before the name of a month, it forms with it a compound word, which is feminine : as — la rai- Juin, the mid- dle of June ; la mi-Aout, the middle of August ; &c. 4. The names of mountains are masculine : as — le Mont-blanc, Mount-blanc ; le Vesuve, Vesuvius ; &c. ; but les Alpes, the Alps ; les Pyrenees, the Pyrenees ; les Cordilleres, the Cordilleras ; les Vosges, the Vosges, are feminine. 5. Words denoting the language of a country are masculine : as — le Fran^aiSf French ; le Hollandais, Dutch ; &c. 6. The names of metals, half-metals, minerals and colours, are mas- culine : as — Par, gold ; P argent, silver ; le platine, platina ; le cuivrey copper ; Petain, pewter ; le rouge, red ; le vert, green ; &c. 7. The names of trees and shrubs are masculine: as — chene, oak; hetre, beech-tree : but auhepine, white thorn ; epine, thorn ; ronce, bramble ; yeuse, holm-oak ; vigne, vine ; are feminine. 8. The infinitives of verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, and even sentences taken substantively, are masculine : as — le manger, eating ; le boire, drinking ; le bon et le mauvais, good and bad ; un car, a for ; un si, an if; un qu^en dira-t-on, a — what will they say. 9. Words compounded of a substantive and a verb are usually mas- culine, although the substantive itself may be feminine : as — tire- botte, boot-jack; casse -noisette, nut-cracker; &c. : but garde-robe, wardrobe, is feminine. N.B. For further explanations on the genders of substantives, see the octavo edition, in 2 vol., page 10, and following. ESSAY VIII. Tlie French and English have had a terrible sea-fight, — Have Francois m. pi. Anglais m. pi. combat naval you been to the play this winter ? No ; but I (am going) this evening to the comedie hiver vais soir opera. — We have some very nice brandy, (will you have any) ? Yes, (give opera excellente eau-de-vie en voulez-vous donnez- me some, if you please.) (I want) a new hat. We all went in nien s'il voiis plait 11 niefaut ^nettf ^ehapeau ^toiis ^alldmes dans a boat. — Do- you sell coffee ? — No ; we (only sell) tea. — He had a fine bateau ^vous Hendez cafe ne vendons que du the imp. beau 40 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. horse. — She has not a very sonorous voice. (It was) a forgetfulness. cheval "^fort ^sonore ^voix Cctait oubli Give me an apple and a pear. — Lend her a needle. — Goodness is the hasis Donnez-moi pomme poire Pretez-lui aigniUe Bontt base of her character. — My sister is gone out. — The French nation is very powerful. caractere soeur sortie ^Francaise ^ irts-puissante — A had /, pickpocket ; />-?/, fool; hihou, owl; licou, halter; verroy, bolt ; troii, hole ; folloAV the general rule, taking s for the plural. 4. The greater part of nouns ending in al or ail in the singular, be- come plural by changing al or ail into aux : as — cheval, horse ; che- vaux, horses ; travail, work ; travaux, works. Eventail, fan, follows the general rule, taking * for the plural : thus — eventai/s, fans. G'e/, heaven ; oei/,e\e; make in the plural — cieux, heavens; year, eyes: but the plural dels is used to denote the shades of a picture or the tops of beds : as, — les dels de ce tableau sont admirabl^s, the shades of that picture are beautiful. Les dels de ces lits so?if de toiite beai/te, the tops of these beds are magnificent. The plural dels is likewise used, when we speak of the sky under which a country lies : as — V Italie est sot/s un des plus beaux dels de /' Europe, Italy is under one of the finest skies in Europe. 42 OF NUMBER IN SUBSTANTIVES. A'ieul, grandfather, makes dieuls in the pkiral, when we speak of our paternal and maternal grandfathers : as — mes deux dieuls out rempli les premxtres charges, my two grandfathers have filled the highest situations. But if we wish to denote those from whom our grandfathers descended, and all those who have preceded them, flVe^^/ makes then dieux in the plural : as — nos diei/x, our ancestors. Ancetres, ancestors ; catacombes, catacombs ; ciseai/x, scissars ; entrai/les, bowels ; funtrailles, funeral ; hardes, clothes ; mceurs, morals ; mouchettes, snuffers ; muni- tions, ammunition ; ttnebres, darkness ; vivres, provisions, victuals, have no singular. PLURAL OF COMPOUND WORDS. General Rule. — Compound words which are united I)y a hyphen, either do or do not admit the mark of the plural, according as the sense or nature of each word, taken separately, expresses the singular or the plural. The only words which can never take the mark of the plural in com- pound words, are the verb, the preposition, and the adverb : as — des porte-mouchettes, snuffer-stands ; des avant-coureurs, fore-runners, &c. Words also composed of Latin or foreign words do not generally take the mark of the plural : thus we write — des forte-piano, as un forte- piano ; des auto-da-fe, as un auto-da-fe. We also write des in-douze, des in-dix-huit, &c., as un in-douze, un in-dix-huit, &c. N.B. See the octavo edition, in 2 vol., for a list of compound words ; as, likewise, for those substantives and expressions which have no plural, and for those which have no singular. ESSAY IX. The pupil not having yet seen the rules for the formation of the plural of adjectives, it has been thought advisable, in the following essay, to give the adjectives in the plural, in order that they may agree with their respective substantives which are to be put in that number. His daughters are young and handsome. — Tlie flowers of these gardens are fille jeunes belles jieiir jardin almost withered. The kings of France and England have magnificent presqiie Jlttnes Angleterre ^magnijiques palaces. These lilies belong to my little sisters. — All these nuts are ^palais lis appartiennent petites sceur Toutes noix bad. Children (are fond of play.) — (Are there) any apartments to let ? She mauvaises Enfant aiment djouer Ya-t-il appartement a louer has had a* tooth-ache all the night. — These two bridges are the finest in ^aux '"^dents ^mal toute mat pont plus beaux de Europe. — (Do you not hear) the singing of birds ? — Their voices are not very /' ■ — N''entendez-vous point chant oiseau voix fort sweet. — His sister's jewels are beautiful. — The gods of the pagans were donees ^De'^sa^soei/r^lesmjou superbes dieu pdiens imp. despicable. What delightful spots ! — (Does she not sell) (ladies') hats ? mtpt'isables Quels '^charmans ^lieu Ne vend-elle pas ^de ^dames ^chapeau — No. — Send me some cabbages and turnips. — (Are there) (a great many) Nun Envoyez-moi chou navel Ya-t-il beaucoup de OF ADJECTIVES. 43 pickpockets in Paris ? — No ; (not so many) as in London. — (Tliere are) more jilou a fas aidant qu' a Londres If 1/ (^ jo/w« de fools than wise men. — They had two English horses. Have you seen the fou que de sages imp. '-^Anglais ^ cheval vu wild beasts ? — He offered some fans to the ladies. — I have (a pain) (in my) ^sauvages ^bete prtsenta eientail dame mal aux eyes. — Italy is under one of the finest skies in Europe. — My two grandfathers ceil lialie sous plus beaux ciel de P tiieul have filled the highest situations. — Posterity will admire the victories of these rempli premieres charge Postcrite admirera victoire generals. Where are the estates of your parents ? (Are not these) the genera/ Oil terre parent Ne sont-ce pas la playthings of our children ? — Have you seen the catacombs ? — Give me my joujou enfant catacombe Donnez-moi scissars. — (Her funeral was performed) (the day before yesterday.) — His morals ciseaux On hnjit sesfitntraiUes avant-hier moeurs are corrupt. Have you not got* the snuffers ? — Your brothers have been corrompues mouchettes frere very imprudent. — He has several pretty pictures. Are provisions dear ia tres-imprudens plusieurs Jo/is tableau ^sonf-ils^les-vivres*chers dans that country.? (Were there) any handsome ladies? Tell him to bring jmgs Yavait-il de belles dame Dites-lui de '^apporter me two small knives and two small forks. ^m' petits couteau petites fourchette LESSON X. Of Adjectives and Participles Adjectively used. An adjective, or a participle adjectively used, is a word wliicli we add to a substantive to express its quality or manner of being. Now, as substantives are either masculine or feminine, singular or plural, it follows that adjectives or participles adjectively used, referring to them, must take the same gender and number to express, with cor- rectness, their different properties. Adjectives may express the quality or manner of being of substan- tives to a greater or less extent : which produces the degrees of com- parison. Three things are therefore to be considered in adjectives : — the gen- der, number, and degrees of comparison or signification. 1. Of the Gender of Adjectives and Participles Adjectively used ; — OTy Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives and Participles Adjec- tively used. * General Rule. — Adjectives and participles adjectively used, ending in the masculine singular with a consonant, or any other vowel than e mute, usually become feminine by the addition of e mute to their termi- nation 'y whereas those which end with e mute are alike in both gen- 44 OF THE GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. ders : as — grand^ m. sing, grande, f. sing, great. Polly m. sing, polie, f. sing, polite. Aime, m. sing, aimee, f. sing, loved. Sage, m. sing. sage, f. sing, wise ; &c. We must except : — 1. Adjectives ending in / in the masculine sin- gular, the feminine of which is formed b)- changing / into 2;e : as — neuf, m. neuve, f. new, 2. Adjectives ending in eux, in the masculine singular, which become feminine by changing eux into euse : as — heureux, m. heiireuse, f. happy. — Vieux, old, makes vleille in the feminine. 3. Adjectives ending with any of the ten following terminations : — ais, as, et, el, eil, ien, on, os, ot, ul, of which the feminine is formed by doubling the final consonant, and adding e mute to it : as — epais, epaisse, thick ; gras, grasse, fat; sujet, sujette, subject ; cruel, cruelle, cruel; pareil, pareille, like; ancien, ancienne, ancient; bon, bonne, good ; gros, grosse, big ; sot, sotte, foolish ; nul, nulle, nul. Mativais, however, makes mmivaise m the feminme. Complet, complete ; discret, discreet ; dtvot, devout ; indhcret, indiscreet ; inquiet, uneasy; i/zcowjo/e^, incomplete ; jore/, ready ; replet, replete; secret, secret; likewise follow the general rule in the formation of their feminine : that is, they merely take an e rnxrte, without doubling their last consonant ; but they require a grave accent over the e which precedes the t in their termination : as, complet, complete ; discret, discrete ; &c. ; pret must be excepted, as it preserves the same circumflex accent which it has in the masculine : thus — pret, prSte. 4. The following adjectives, of which the feminine is quite irregularly formed : — Beau, belle, Benin, htnigne, Blanc, blanche, Caduc, caduque, Doux, douce. Faux, fausse, Favori, favorite, Fou, folk, Frais, fr'iiche, - Franc, franche, Genti', g entitle, Grec, Grecque, Observe. — Beau, nouveau, fou, mou, vieux, are changed into bel, nouvel, fol, mol, vieil, when coming before a substantive masculine which begins with a vowel or h mute : as — un bel homme, a fine man ; un NOUVEL acteur, a new actor ; un vieil habit, an old coat ; &c. It is by adding le to this last termination that their feminine is formed : thus — bel, belle ; nouvel, nouvelle ; &c. Remark.; — Several words ending in e^/r, whether adjectives or substantives, have a peculiar termination in the feminine : thus — accusateur, accuser, makes accusa- trice ; acteur, actor, actrice ; buveur, drinker, buveuse ; chanteur, singer, cantatrice, when meaning a v/oman celebrated in the art of singing, and chanteuse, any woman who can sing ; ewpereur, emperor, imperatrice ; impecteur, overseer, inspectrice ; instituteur, inatitutov, institutrice j pecheur, sinner, pecheresse ; protecteur, protector, proiecirice ; &c. fine. Jaloux, jalouse. jealous. benign. Jumeau, Jumelle, twin. white. Long, tongue, long. decayed. Matin, malign e,' mischievous sweet. Mou, •molle. soft. false. Nouvenii, naivelle, new. favourite. Public, publique, public. fooHsh. Roiix, rousse. reddish. fresh. Sec, seche, drv. frank. Tiers, tierce. third. pretty. Traitre, traitresse, traitor. Greek. Turc, Turque, Turkish. OF THE GENDER OF ADJECTIVES. 45 But anieriein\ anterior ; infe'rieur, inferior ; vmjei-r, of age ; meilleur, better ; mineur, under age ; supcrieur, superior, and a few others, quoted in the octavo edition, in 2 vol., follow the general rule in the formation of their feminine, that is to say, merely take an e mute : as — antcrteur, anttrieure ; ynajeur, vuijeure ; meilleur, meiVeure ; &c. PLACE AND AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES ADJECTIVELY USED. General Rule. — Adjectives, and participles adjectively used, gene- rally follow their respective substantives in French, and agree with them in gender and number : as — a sensible woman, une femme sen- sible ; a well written letter, une lettre bien ecrite. The twenty-two following : — ancien, ancient; aucun, none, not any; beau^ fine; bon, good; cher, dear; digne, worthy; grand, great; gros, big; habile, clew ev ; jeune, young; joli, pretty; mauvais, bad; me- chant, ^Yicked; meilleur, better ; moindre, least; nouveau, new ; petit^ little; saint, h.o\\ ; ^ew/, alone; vieux and vieil, old; vilain, ugly; triste, sad ; or their feminine, must however be excepted, as they usually precede their res])ective substantives, when used in immediate conjunc- tion with them ; but still agreeing in gender and number with them : as — une ancienne coutinne, an old custom; un beau cheval, a fine horse ; une Joi^iEjille, a pretty girl ; &c. Tiie articles, the demonstrative, the possessive and indefinite pronouns, as likewise the numerical adjectives, precede also their respective sub- stantives : as — les hommes, the men ; cette maison, this house ; votre livre, your book; le dixieme regiment, the tenth regiment ; &c. ESSAY X. His wife is tall and handsome. — Their house is too small. — That church femme grand beau maison trap petit ey/ise is badly built. — My sister was beloved by him. — ^That woman has been very mal bad soeur imp. cheri cle iui femme tres- imprudent. — Was she not faithful to* him ? — This apple is not ripe imprudent ^Ne imp? ^ ^pas ^Jidile ^lui pomme ^mitr enough. The meat is cold. The road (in the) north of that country is ^aisez viandi' froid route du nord paijs bad, unsafe, and very dangerous over the steep mountains. (Will the vunaais peu si'ir dangerenx snr escarptes montagne La porte door be) open ? — I have (read) a very entertaining story. Is that gown sera-t-elle ouvert In amiisant histoire '^Est-elle ^ ^rohe new P His sister is not very active ; but she is Avell-informed, polite, and neuf socur fort actif inais '^bien instruit ^affab/e ^ sensible. Mrs. F*" has been very unfortunate. Is she not virtuous .^ She * Mme. F'''" ma/heureux vertueux has always been deceitful and jealous. — That cow is not very fat. — This law is totijoiirs trompeur j'ulonx vache gras loi cruel and barbarous. (It is) an ancient custom. — (She is) a drunkard. Miss cruel barbare C'est ancien coutume Cest buveur Mile. O * * was a beautiful actress, and a sweet singer : she had, above imp. ^charmant ^uctrice delicieux cantatrice imp. sur- 46 OF THE PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. all, a most benevolent disposition. — We have (seen) a very fine woman, (with) tout ^la ^plus '^beniii '^l humeur vu beau qui avait a white scarf on*. — Your cousin will be a very good singer — The rose is my blaric echarpe cousine bon chanteur favourite flower. (Is) this water fresh P It is not very clean. These favori fleur ^Est-elle ^ ^eau '^frais elle clair oranges are not sweet. That (young lady) is so foolish. This news is false. • doux demoiselle sot nouvelle faux — I shall write a very long letter to* you. — (There is) a new fashion (every ^ ^tcrirai ^ ^ ^ "^lettre ^ Jl par ait nouveau mode tous les year). — (It is) the public opinion. — She had an old woman with her. — lie ans C'est public imp. vieux avec elle always wears an old coat. (He is) a very clever young man. The paint will ^ ^porte habit Cent habi'e jeune homme peinture soon be dry. — (It was) a mere evasion. — Is she not attentive i* These old %ientbt ^ sec C'etait ^pur '^dl'faite attentif vieux clothes (are good for nothing.) hardesf.pl. ne sont bonnes a rien LESSON XL 2. Plural of Adjectives and Participles Adjectivehj used. General Rule. — The plural of adjectives and participles adjectively used, of whichsoever gender, is generally formed like that of substan- tives, by the addition of s to the singular : as — grand, m. sing, grands, m. pi. grande, f. sing, grandes, f. pi. great. Poll, m. sing, polls, m. pi. polie, f. sing, polies, f. pi. polite. Aime, m. sing, aimes, m. pi. aimee, f. sing, aimees, f. pi. loved ; &c. This rule admits of no excep- tion, with respect to the formation of the feminine plural of adjectives; but, in forming the masculine plural, the following anomalies must be attended to. 1. Adjectives ending in s or x in the masculine singular, do not change their termination in the masculine plural : as — heureux, m. sing. heureux, m. pi. happy ; gras, m. sing, gras, m. pi. fat. 2. Adjectives which end in ant or ent in the masculine singular, have their masculine plural formed by changing the final t into s, when they consist of more than one syllable, whereas the t is retained and s is added to it, when they consist of one syllable only : as — reconnaissant, reconnaissans, grateful ; diligent, diligens, diligent ; lent, lents, slow. Tout, all, makes tous in the masculine plural, and toutes in the femi- nine plural. 3. Adjectives which are terminated with au in the masculine singu- lar, take X for their masculine plural : as — heau, beaux, fine ; nouveau, nouveaux, new. 4. Some adjectives ending in al in the masculine singular, become masculine plural by changing al into aux : as — egal, egaux, equal ; general, generaux, general. OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 47 Observe. — ^To form the feminine plural of tlie above adjectives, or of any other belonging to the same general rule and exceptions, it is necessary to find, first, their feminine singular, and then to add s to it, according to the general rule : as — heureux, m. sing, heureuse^ f. sing. heureuses, f. pi. Gi'as, m. sing, grasse^ f. sing, grasses, f. pi. Prudent, m. &mg. prudente, f. sing. prudenteSy f. pi. Tout, m. sing. ,toute,f. sing, toutes, f. pi. Beau, m. sing, belle, f. sing, belles, f. pi. Egal, m. sing, egale, f. sing, egales, f. pi. &c. ESSAY XI. For the future, the verbs, which the pupil will find in the present of the infinitive mood in French, must be put in the same tense and per- son as the English verbs to which they correspond. He has great talents. — Her friends will be^ glad to see her. Young men de talent ami bien-aise de ^voir ^la Jetme gens (incur) great expenses. — These ladies are so graceful that they are admired by font de depense dnme si gracieitx qti' admirer de everybody. — Your brothers have been very fortunate, and your sisters extremely heuretix extremement unfortunate. — Those women are cruel and revengeful. — Are your pupils very malheureux femme vindicatif ^Sont-ils ^ '^tleve diligent ? — No ; they are extremely lazy. My servants are not so slow as puresseux domesiiqiie si lent que yours. — All our sheep are very fat. — (Are these) all your children .'* — No ; I have brebis tres-gras Sont-ce-la two pretty little girls in the country. His horses are not so fine as mine. — We joli Jille a campngne si que have (seen) the two new operas. Are the general officers (assembled ?) vu nouveau '^Sont-ils^ '^oQlcier assembles All men are equal after death. — The two handsome ladies, who came yesterday les aprts la mort beau dame qui vinrent hier to* see us, are dead. — (There are) red and grey partridges. — '^voir ^nous mort ^11 y a ^des ^rouge ^ ^des "^perdrix ^gris ^perdrix All these filberts are bad. These stories (are not at all) entertaining. — aveline mauvais histoire ne sont point du tout amusant Have they (bought) the five white houses (which I mentioned to you) the other day? achete blanc maison dont je vous parlai outre — These tables are not new. neuf LESSON XII. 3. Of the Degrees of Signification or Comparison in Adjectives and Participles Adjective ly used. There are commonly reckoned three degrees of comparison in adjec- tives and participles adjectively used ; — the positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 48 OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 1. The positive, which is improperly termed a degree of comparison, is nothing but the adjective or participle itself, merely expressing the quality or manner of being of the substantive, to which it refers, without any increase or decrease by a comparison with any other object : as — un enfant sage et studieux, a wise and studious youth. 2. The comparative is the adjective or participle which, preceded by one of the words plus, more; moins, less or not so; aussi, as; and followed by que, than or as, expresses a comparison, in a degree of superiority, inferiority, or equality, between two or more objects : as — il est plus estime que son frere, he is more esteemed than his brother, Elle est moins instruite que sa sceur, she is not so clever as her sister. II est aussi grand que vous, he is as tall as you. These three degrees of comparison are also expressed by plus de, moins de, or autant de, before a substantive, and que after it ; or que de, if another substantive, denoting a quantity or number, succeeds ; and by autant with a verb and que after it : as — lis ont plus de noix que nous, they have more nuts than we. // a moins de pratiques que son voisin, he has less customers than his neighbour. Elle a autant de tableaux que de livres, she has as many pictures as books. 3Ir. C*** est autant estime que Mr. T*** est hdi, Mr. C*** is as much esteemed as Mr. T*** is hated. We may likewise express a comparison in a degree of inferiority, by using the verb in the negative in French as in English, and placing si before tlie next adjective or participle and que after it, or autant de before a substantive with que or que de, according as the sense implies, after it : as — elle n^est pas si instruite que sa sceur, she is not so clever as her sister. II n'a pas autant de pratiques que son voisin, he has not so many customers as his neighbour ; &c. The following words express a comparison of themselves, without the help of any other word: — 1. meilleur, better, which is the comparative of bon, good, and le meilleur, the best, its superlative: as — le vin est meilleur que Peau, wine is better than water, and r\ot plus bon. We, however, say : — il n^est plus bon a rien, he is no longer good for any thing ; but, in this case, plus is not a comparative, but a negative ad- verb. 2. Pire, worse, the comparative of mauvais, bad ; and le pire, the worst, its superlative. 3. Moindre, less, the comparative oi petit, little, and le moindre, the least, its superlative : as — cette colonne est moindre que Pautre, this column is less than the other. 4. Mieux, better, the comparative of bien, well, and le mieux, the best, its super- lative. 5. Pis, worse, the comparative of mal, badly, and le pis, the worst, its superlative. 6. Moins, less, the comparative of feu, little, and le moins, the least, its superlative. Observe. — Meilleur and mieux, being expressed by the same word, better, in English, offer some difficulty to beginners, who are frequently at a loss which to use in French. The difficulty will disappear, by con- sidering that, whenever better is an adjective in English, it is always OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 49 expressed by mellleur in French, and by mieux, when it is an adverb : as, — this pear is better than yours, cette poire est meilleure que la voire, because better is an adjective ; but — I like him better than his brother, je ralme mieux que son frere^ because better is an adverb. The following rule may be inferred from the above general obser- vations. General Rule. — 1. Whenever an adjective is used in the compara- tive in English, with the syllable er at its termination, it is expressed in French by its corresponding adjective, with plus ^before it, and when than follows, it is construed by que : as, — meat is dearer than bread, la viancle est plus chere que le j^ciin. 2. When more or less occurs either before an adjective, a participle, or a substantive, or even is used by itself in English, more is construed into French by plus, and less by moins, before an adjective or a participle; and by — plus de, and mollis de, before a substantive expressing a quantity. The conjunction than which follows is ren- dered into French by cjue, before an adjective, a participle, a pro- noun or an adverb, or even before a substantive which does not denote a quantity; but it is expressed by que de before a substantive denoting a quantity, and by de only before a noun of number : as, — London is larger than Paris, Londrcs est plus grand que Paris. He has more prudence than you, il a plus de p)rudence que vous. We have more plums than apples, nous avons plus de prunes que de pommes. This young lady is more than twenty, cette demoiselle a plus de vingt ans. The preposition above, used in the sense of more thnn, is likewise expressed hy plus de : as, — she is not above four years old, elle 7i^a /5rt.splus de qualrc ans. 3. When as, as much, as many, and so, so much, so many, are used in English to denote a comparison of equality between tvvo or more per- sons or things, as is expressed in French by aussi, before an adjective or a participle; as much, by autant, with a verb ; as much or as many, by aidant de, before a substantive ; so, by si, before an adjective or a par- ticiple; so much, by taut, with a verb ; and so much, so many, by tant de, before a substantive : as or that, which follows, is construed by que, before an adjective, a participle, a pronoun or an adverb, or even before a substantive which does not denote a quantity, but by que de before a substantive denoting a quantity : as — he is as tall and clever as his brother, il est aussi grand et aussi habile que son frere. She is not so handsome as her niece, elle n^est pas si belle que sa niece. I like her as much as her sister, je Paime autant que sa sceur. They have as much money and as many playthings as you, ils ont autant d.^ argent et autant de jouj'oux que vous. I have not so many friends as you, je n'ai pas autant d^amis que vous. She is so foolish that I will not speak to her, elle est si sotie que je ne veux pas lui parler. I hate them so much that . . . . Jc les hais tant que .... She has not so much beauty nor so many fine things as ... . Elle n^a pas tant de beaute ni tant de belles choses que. . . .' 50 OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 4. The suferlailve is the adjective or participle expressing the quahty or manner of benig of the substantive in a very high, or in the highest degree ; and, also, in a very low, or in the lowest degree : as — the wisest man; the least loise of all. From this definition, it may be inferred that there are two sorts of superlatives, — the superlative relative, and the superlative absolute. The superlative relative, as the term implies, always expresses a com- parison with some other thing, and requires de or f/i/, des or de la, before it, if a noun, and que if a verb, as in the following examples : — he is the most beloved of all, il est le plus aimb de tous. She is the most amiable young lady that I know, c'est la demoiselle la plus aimahle que/e connaisse. In any such case, the verb is usually°put in the subjunctive mood. The superlative absolute never expresses a comparison with or rela- tion to any other thing, but merely increases or lessens to the highest or lowest degree the quality of the substantive. It is formed by placing, according to the import of the sentence, one of the words — ires, fort, hien, very ; injiniv.ient, infinitely ; extremement, extremely ; before the adjective or participle : as, — elles sont trhs-belles, they are very hand- some. II fid infiniment mal repu, he was extremely ill received. General Rule. — When an adjective or a participle is used in the superlative degree in English, either Avith st or est at its termination, or when the adverb most or least, preceded by the article the, occurs before an adjective or a participle, as — the tallest and most clever of the hoys ; she is the least lazy of the girls ; the adjective or participle is construed into French by its corresponding adjective or participle, preceded by flus, in the sense of most, and by moins, in the sense oi least ; and one of the articles le, la, les, du, de la, des, or au, a la, aux, according to the import of the sentence, is prefixed to plus or moins, to correspond with tlie in English ; and when that either follows or is implied, it is expressed by que : as, — the tallest and most clever of the boys, le plus grand et le plus habile des gar pons. She is the least lazy of the girls, c^est la moins paresseuse des Jilles, Observe. — If the adjective or participle in the superlative precedes the substantive which it qualifies in French, — as le plus grand homme de rarmie Frangaise, the greatest man in the French army; there is no article used before the substantive; but if the substantive precedes the adjective or participle in the superlative, both take the definite article, le, la, or les : as, — c''est Vhomme le p/^^s maladroit que je connaisse, he is the most awkward man I know. Plus and moins, and le plus and le moins, are repeated in French before every adjective or participle which they qualify; and every adjec- tive or participle, either in the comparative or superlative, agrees in gender and number with its respective substantive : as, — Russia is more powerful and more independent than Sweden, la Russie est plus puis- sante et plus independante que la Suede. OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON IN ADJECTIVES. 51 ESSAY XII. The simplicity of nature is more pleasing than all the embellishments of art. — simpticltt agreable tons embellissement P — The English navy is more powerful than you (think). — Miss S*** would be Anglais marine puissant ne croyez iW^ much more esteemed, if she v/ere less proud of her beauty. — Tlie rose is not heaucoup eitime ttait f.er sa beaidc ■ • less beairtiful than the tulip, but the tulip is more gaudy. — Is he less subject to beau tulipe brillant sujet the (head- ache) than he was ? — I am older than you. — Mr. S'*''*''' (is) more mal de iete imp. «' dgi a than sixty. 1 (did not think he was) above fifty. The consumption soixante ans ne crogais pas qui! ent cinqt;ante ans consommation, of wheat in London is not more than six millions and* seventy-nine thousand hit a mille bushels a year. England has more than two hundred men of war. — That boisseau par Angleterre cents vaisaeau guerre country has never less than eighteen thousand sailors. — I (shoidd think there fogs ii' jamais matelot croirais qu''il ri'g were not) less than twelve hundred (people) at the ball (last night). Your avait pas cents personnes bed hier an soir mother is not so old as she looks. — Paris is not so populous nor so la.rge as vieux I e par ait peuple grand London, — The Thames is much deeper than the Seine. — Your daughter (will Londres Tamise proton d y///e ne never be) so tall as you. — We shall not have so many plums this year as we ieraj(i?nais grand aufant de (had) the last; but I think we shall have more apples. This en eumes annte dernitre crois que de pomme young gentleman is as much esteemed as his brother is despised, Tliis jeune fno?isieur estimer frtre mipriser champagne is not better than mine. These children are worse than you enfant ne think. — He speaks much better than he v/rites. — Is that peach better than penser parler n^tcrit '^ed-elle'^ '^peche the other ?— The public buildings in Paris are the finest (in the) world. — You aid re edifice a bean dn monde will give this wreath of pearls to the most amiable and the most clever (of the) donner par are perle aimable habile des three. — Though this young lady is the handsomest and the most accomplished Quoique demoiselle sc>it beau accompli (I ever saw), I can assure you that she is not my best friend. — Ignorant que faie jamais vue puis ^assurer^ cons qu^ meilleur amie Ignorant men* arc more conceited than others. — You make greater progress than I rain les autre faites de grand progrts je «' should have thought. — China is the largest empire in the world. — I think Chine grand crois que Napoleon one of the most absolute princes who (ever reigned). — The most Napoleon 6tait absolu prince aient jamais regnc learned men are not always the most virtuous. — The Alps are very high savant homme ton jours veriueux Alpe^f.pL hunt D 2 52 OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. and very steep. — The st^-le of Fenelon escarps. Fenelon London is the richest city in Europe riche ville de P ; very rich and very harmonious. riche harmonieiix -God is infinitely merciful. Gold in/tniment inistricordieifx O?- is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile, and the heaviest of all pi^r piicieiix ~— — — pesant metals. mtial LESSON XIIL Of the Numeral Adjectives. Numeral adjectives are either cardinal or ordinal : cardinal, as, — w?z, iine^ one; deux, two ; trois, three, &c. ordinal; as, — premier, -premiere, first; second, seconde, deuxieme, second; iroisieme, third; &c. The first are called cardinal, because they are the root of the ordinal, which are formed from them. 1. EXAMPLES OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 1 One, 2 Two, 3 Three, 4 Four, 5 Five, 6 Six, 7 Seven, 8 Eight, 9 Kine, 10 Ten, 11 Eleven, 12 Twelve, 13 Thirteen, 14 Fourteen, 15 Fifteen, 16 Sixteen, 17 Seventeen, 18 Eighteen, 19 Nineteen, 20 Twenty, 21 Twenty- one, 22 Twentv-two, 23 Twenty-three, 24 Twentv-four, 25 T went V- five 26 Twenty-six, 27 Twentv-seven, 28 TwentV-eight, 29 Twenty. nine, 30 Thirtv, 31 Tlairty-one, 32 Thirtv-two, 33 Tliirty-three, 34 Thirty-four, 35 Thirty-five, vn, m. line, f. deux. irois. quatre. cuiq. six. sept. hiiit. iieiif. dix. onze. dovxe. ireize. qiiatorze. qvinze. seize. dix-sept. dix-huit. dix-neiif, tingt. v'ugt et im. vuigt-deux. lingt-trois. vingt-quatre. vingt-cinq. vingt-six. vingt-sept. vitigt-hidt. vingt-nevf. trente. trente et mi. trenie-dei'X. trente-trois. trente-'{iiatre. t rente-cinq. 36 Thirty-six, 37 Thirty-seven, 38 Thirty-eight, 39 Thirtv- nine, 40 Forty, 41 Forty-one, 42 Forty-two, 43 Forty-three, 44 Forty-four, 45 Forty-five, 46 Forty-six, 47 Fortv-seven, 48 Forty-eight, 49 Fortv-nine, 50 Fiftv, 51 Fiftv-one, 52 Fifty-two, 53 Fifty-three, 54 Fifty- four, oo Fifty-five, 55 Fifty-six, 57 Fifty-seven, 58 Fifty-eight, 59 Fiftj'-nine, 60 Sixty, 61 Sixt)--one, 62 Sixty-two, 63 Sixty-three, 64 Sixtj'-four, 65 Sixty-five, 66 Sixty-six, 67 Sixty-seven, 68 Sixty-eight, 69 Sixty-nine, 70 Seventy, irente-six. trente-sept. trente-huit. trente-neuf. quarante. quarante et un. qua ranterdeux. quarcode-trois. quarante-qiiatre. quar ante-cinq. quarante-six. quaranie-sept. quarante-huit. quaranie-nevf. cinquanle. cinquante et t/n. cinqt/ante-deux. c'nquanfe-frois. cinq uante-q uatre. cinq uan fe-cinq. cinqimnfe-six. cinquante-sept. cinquante-huit. cinquante-neuf. soixante. soixante et un. soixante-deux. soixante-trois. soixante-qiiatre. soixante-cinq. soixanfe-six. soixarite-sept. soixante-huit. soixante-neuf. soixante-dix. OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 53 71 Seventy-one, soixante el onze. 105 A hundred and 72 Seventy-two, soixante-douze. five. 73 Seventy-three. , mxante-treize. 106 A hundred and 74 Seventy-four, soixante-q vatorze. six. 75 Seventy-five, soixante-qninze. 107 A hundred and 76 Seventy-six, soixante-fieize. seven. 77 Seventy-seven , soixante-dixsept. 108 A hundred and 78 Seventy-eight, , soixante-dix-hmt. eight, 79 Seventv-nine, soixante-dix-neiff. 109 A hundred and 80 Eighty, quotre-iingt. nine. 81 Eightj'-one, quatre-vuigt-i/n. 110 A hundred and 82 Eighty-two, q f mi re-ring t-deitx. ten, 83 EightV-thrce, qnatre-vingt-trois. 111 A hundred and 84 Eighty-four, qi/atre-viiigt-qualre. eleven, 85 Eighty-five, qiiotre-iingt-cin q . 112 A hundred and 86 Eighty-six, qnafre-vingt-six. twelve. 87 Eighty-seven, q natre-vingt-sept. 113 A hundred and 8S Eighty-eight, quatre-vingt-hui/. thirteen. 89 Eighty-nine, q uaire-iingt-nenf. 114 A hundred and 90 Ninety, quatre-vingt-dix. fourteen. 91 Ninety-one, q u afre-vingt-onze. 115 A hundred and 92 Ninety-two, q uatre-vmgt-doKze . fifteen. 93 Ninety-three, q natre-vingt-treize. 116 A hundred and 94 Ninet}--four, qimire-vingt-qimtorze . sixteen. \)5 Ninety-five, qncdre-vingt-quinze. 1 1 7 A hundred and 96 Ninety-six, quatre-vingt-setze'. seventeen, 97 Ninety-seven, qiiafre-vingt-dix-sept. 118 A hundred and 98 Ninety-eight, qtiutre-vingt-dix-huit. eighteen, 99 Ninetj--nine, qnatre-vingt-dix-nenf. 119 A hundred and 100 A hundred. cent. nineteen. 101 A hundred and cent un. 120 A hundred and one. twenty. 102 A hundred and ce«/ deux. 121 A hundred and two, twenty-one. 103 A hundred and cent trots. 1 22 A hundred and three. twenty-two. 104 A hundred and four, I cent qnatre. 1000 A thousand, cent cinq, cent six. cent sept, cent hat. cent neuf. cent dix. cent onze. cent doi/ze. cent treize. cent qimtorze. cent quinze. cent seize, cent dix-sept. cent dix-huif. cent d'x-neuf. cent vingt. cent vingt et u?i. cent vingt-deux. mille. It is obvious, from tlie above examples, that the word a or one., by "svhieh the numbers hundred and ihousand are preceded in English, and the conjunction and^ by which they are usually followed, are left out in French : whereas et is used to join the numbers vingt, trente, quarante, cinquantc, soLvante, with un or line, and also soixante with onze^ although and be not expressed in English. The larger number must always take the precedence in French, whe- ther the smaller be used the first in English or not : as, — vingt-quatre, twenty-four or four and twenty, and not quatre et vingt. When the word thousand is used in mentioning a year or epoch, it is expressed in French by jnil, mth one / only : in other cicum stances, it is spelled with lie — mille, which never takes an s, except when it is used for the English word mile, in the plural : as, — in the year one 54 OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. thousand eight hundred and thirty,* Pan, ou en, mil huit cent trente. Two thousand men, deux mille hommes. It is four miles from here, il y a quatre niilles cPici. Vingt and cent take an s, either when they occur immediately before a substantive plural, or when they refer to one understood, provided they - be preceded by another number multiplying them : as, — six hundred men, six cents hommes; eighty gentlemen, quatre-Ymgts, messieurs. We are only eighty now, but we shall soon be two hundred, nous ne sommes que quatre-xingts a present, mats nous serons hientot deux CENTS, namely personnes. But we should say, — Nous etions cent, and not cents, we were a hundred; because, in this case, only one hundred is mentioned. When quatre-vingt and cent are used in quoting a year, or when they are immediately followed by another number, they then never take an s : ex. — in the year seven hundred and eighty. Pan, ou en, sept cent QUATRE-viNGT. Three hundred and eighty-two pounds, trois cent QUATRE-viiNGT-DEUx Uvrcs Sterling. Million takes an s in the plural : deux millions, two millions. Un is changed into une^ when referring to a substantive feminine singular : une houteille, a bottle. It is the only cardinal number which undergoes such a change. The other numbers serve both for the mas- culine and feminine genders. Observe. — "When after any tense of the unipersonal verb to be there, a noun of number comes before a substantive followed by a participle : as — there were one thousand men killed, — be is elegantly used before the participle, and repeated before every other participle which maj'' succeed, if any other number be added, likewise followed by a participle ; as — there were one thousand men killed, and eight hiui- dred v/ounded, il y eui mille hommes de tii6s, et hint cents de blesses ; but if there is no substantive expressed after the noun of number, the pronoun en is then vised instead before the verb y avoir, and de is always employed before the adjective or participle : as — there were two hundred wounded, and fifty killed, il y en etd deux cents de blesses, et cinquanle de ti(ts. In this case and any similar one, there is always a reference to something mentioned before or implied. ESSAY XIII. The infantry amounts to one hundred and twenty-six men. He owes us infanterie se monter doit one thousand four hundred and fifty-six pounds. (How many) days have livre sterling Combien de ^ you been detained there ? One hundred. — How many guns have they ordered ? ^ ■* ^dttenu ^y fusil commandts About a thousand. Napoleon went to Russia in the year one thousand a peu pres alia en Russie eight hundred and thirteen, and (Lewis the Eighteenth) returned to France in Louis dix-huit revint en * When the preposition in, by which the substantive year is preceded, in men- tioning a date, is expressed by en, the substantive, the year, is then left out ; but when the year is expressed by fan, e7i is omitted. OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 55 the year one thousand eight hundred and fifteen. — George (the Fourth) quaire prel. def. was crowned in the year one thousand eight hundred and twenty, or one thou- coitro7iner sand eight hundred and twenty-one. — Tlie army consists of two hundred and armte consister fifty thousand four hundred and twenty-five men. — We lost in that hattle three perd'wies batci/le hundred and twenty-eight pieces of artillery. — Kow many miles (do they reckon piece artillerie compte-t-on it) (from here) to the Tower ? Sixty-one or sixty-two. — I received j-esterday five d'^ici rcius thousand six hundred and forty-six pounds eight shillings and eleven pence. — schelling We (sat down) to table eight-and-twenty people, at the last dinner ; but we ttiom 4 5 2 1 "^personnes ^dernier '^diner (shall not amount to more) than fifteen at the next. Will you lend me a lie serous pas plus de prochain yjrcter^me hundred and twenty-one pounds sixteen shillings ? I would v.'ith all my heart, /e ferais de if I could; but I have paid, this morning, two hundred and eighty-one pounds ie poKvais payer which I owed, and I have not one shilling left. Ninety-one pounds and nine devais de reste pounds are one hundred pounds. Sixty-one shillings and nine sliillings are font font three pounds ten shillings. — We have now three hundred beautiful frigates, a present ^superhe '^frigate and tv/o hundred (line-of-battle-shipS;) ready (to sail). — (Tliere will be) a liun- vaisseaux de ligne pret a f aire voile li y aura dred and twenty ladies; but I do* not think (there will be) more than eighty crois quil y ait de gentlemen. We mustered six hundred and eighty, at the last ball ; but we messieurs * ^ttions ''7 8 i 2 s^^,/ (shall not muster) more than three hundred at the next. — How many ladies ne serous pas de (will there be) ? A hundred. Only a hundred ! (How is that ?) You have y aura-t-il D^oii vie/it cela invited four hundred. 1 (will give you) a receipt for eighty-one pounds, if invite vais vous douner reru you like. (Did you not give him) eight hundred pounds twelve shillings? votdez Ne lid dofindtes-vous point Ko ; he (only wanted) six hundred. — Tliat celebrated actor died in 7i^en avail hesoin que de "^ctlthre ^ mourut the year one thousand seven hundred and eighty. This man is worth two ridie de millions sterling. — (There were) ninety-five men killed and thirty-two wounded 11 y eut in the two first battles ; whereas there were nine hundred killed and seven hundred bataille mais wounded in the last. 56 OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. EXAMPLES OF THE CARDINAL NUMBERS used loith the word fois, time. Particular attention must be paid that, whenever the word time is used with a noun of number in English, it must be construed into French hy fois, and never by temps : as, — six or seven times, six ou sept foisy and not — six ou sept temps. Fois, being feminine, requires un to be changed into une, whenever used with it : as — unefois, once ; vingt et unefois, twenty-one times; &c. Once^ Twice, Three times. Four times. Five times. Six times, Seven times. Eight times. Nine times, Ten times. Eleven times. Twelve times. Thirteen times, Fourteen times, Fifteen times. Sixteen times. Seventeen times, Eighteen times, Nineteen times. Twenty times, Twenty-one times, &c. Thirty times, Thirty-one times, &c. Forty times. Forty-one times, &e. Fifty times. line fois. deitjc foh. trois fois. quatre fois. cituj fois. six fois. sept fois. hint fois. neuf fois. dixfois. on ze fois. douze fois. treize fois. qucdorze fois. quinzefois. seize fois. dix-sept fois. dix-huit fois. dix-nenffois. vingt fois. vingt et une fois, &:c. i rente fois. trente et une fois, qucifan.'efois. quarante et une fo\ cinqu ante fois. Fifty-one times, &c. Sixty times, Sixty-one times, &c. Seventy times, Seventy-one times, &c. Eighty times. Eighty-one times, &c. Ninety times. cinquanle et une fois, soixanie fois. soixante et une fois, soixan (e-dixfois. soixante et on ze fois, quatre-vingis fois. qiiatre-vingt-une fois, 8^c. q uatre-vingt-dix fois. q uatre-vingt-onze fois, 8^c. cent fois. cent une fois. and so on, without expressing which follows it. Ninety-one times, &c. A hundred times, A hundred and one times, A hundred and two cent deux fois. times, A hundred and three cent trois fois. times, A hundred and four cent quatre fois. times, A hundred and five cerit cinq fois. times, A hundred and six cent six fois. times, A thousand times, mill e fois, which precedes hundred, and and LESSON XIV. 2. OF THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. The ordinal numbers are formed by adding ihne to the terminations of the cardinal that end with a consonant : as, — huit, huitieme : except neuf, which is changed into neuvieme, and cinq into cinquicme. Those which are terminated with e mute take ieme in its stead : as, — quatre, quatrieme. After vingt, trente, quarante, cinquante, soixante, and quatre-vingt, the French do not use premier and second, as the English do first and second after twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, and eighty, but OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 57 they employ unieme and d euxieme : thns, — vingt et unieme, twenty- first ; vingt-deuxiemc, twenty-second ; trente et unieme^ thirt\--first ; trente-deuxieme,i\\\xty -second J quar ante et unieme, forty-first; qua- rante-deuxieme, forty-second; cinquante et unieme, fifty-first; cin- quante-deuxieme, fifty-second; soixante et unieme, sixty-first; solxante- deuxieme, sixty-second ; &c. The ordinal numbers take the mark of the plural when they refer to a noun plural : as, — les premiers essais, the first essays. EXAMPLES OF THE First, !!■• Second, 2f Tliird, 3f Fourth, 4? Fifth, 5? Sixth, 6^ Seventh, 7? Eighth, 8? Ninth, 9? Tenth, W Eleventh, 1 1^ Twelfth, 12t Thirteenth, 13? Fourteenth, 14? Fifteenth, 15? Sixteenth, 16? Seventeenth, 1 7? Eighteenth, 18? Nineteenth, 19? Twentieth, 20? Twenty-first, 21? Twenty-second, &c. 22? Thirtieth, 30? Thirty-first, 31? ThirtV-second, &c. 32? Fortieth, 40? Forty-first, 41? Forty-second, &c. 42? Fiftieth, 50? Fifty-first, 51? Fifty-second. &c. 52? Sixtieth, 60? Sixty-first, 61? Sixtv-second, &c. 62? Seventieth, 70? Seventj--first, &c. 71? Eightieth. 80? Eighty-first. 81? Eighty-second, &c. 82? Ninetieth, 90? Ninety-first, &c. 91? Hundredth, 100? Hundred and first, 101? Hundred and second, &c 1 02? Thousandth, &c. 1000? ORDINAL NUMBERS. M, F. M. & F. P;® premie/', premiere, wiieme. 2de or 2^'^« second, seconde, deuxitme. troiiieme. quatritme. cinquitme. sixitme. septitme. htdtitme. ?ieiaieme. dixieme. onzitme. doi/zieme. treizleme. qiiatorzitme. qtiinzitme. set zitme. dix-septiPme. dix-hidtitme. dix-neiaitme. vinglitme. vingt et tmitme. vingt-deiixicme, S^'C. trentihtie. trente et lontme. trente-dei/xiime, 8^'c. qitaranlitme. qiiarante el unit me. qi/arante-denxitme, S^c, cinqnanlitme. cinquante et unit me. cinq uante-deuxitme, 8^-c. soixantitme. soixante et unitme. soixcuite-deuxieme, 8fC. soi^ante-dixit m e. soixante et onzitme, 4'C. quatre-vingtitme. quatre-vingt-unitme, quatre-vingt-deuxitme, 8fC. quatre-vingt-dixitme. quatre-vingt-<)nzieme, 8fC. centitme. cent imieme. cent deuxitme, 8fc. millitme, 8fc, D 5 58 OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. Observe. — The ordinal numbers, which are used in English with the article the after the names of sovereigns, whom they serve to demonstrate or specify, are expressed in French by the cardinal, leaving out the article : except, however, the first, which 'must be construed by the ordinal premier, but still without the article : as, — George the fourth, Georges quatre. Lewis the first, Louis premier. Charles the second, Charles deux ou second ; as for second either may be used. When the ordinal numbers are used to express a date, they are like- wise rendered into French by the cardinal : except still the first, which must be construed, as above, by the ordinal premier ; but, in this case, the definite article le is required before the number expressing the date ; and both the article and number precede the month mentioned in French, although they sometimes follow^ it in English : as, — the 4th of May, le 4 Mai. June the 10th, le 10 Juin. The 2nd of August, le 2 Aout. The 1st of September, le V Septemhre : as if it were in English, — the^ four Mai/ ; the ten June; the two August ; the first September. De may also be used before the month in French : as, — le 4 de Mai ; le 10 de Juin; le 2 d^Aoid ; le F' de Septembre ; &c. If the day of the week be mentioned with that of the month in a date: as, — Monday, 10 or the lOth ; Tuesday, 12 or the 12//i; Wednesday, 14 or the 14:th ; &c., the noun of number expressing the date ought then to follow the day in French as in English, but w^ithout using any article in French : as, — Monday, 10 or the 10th ; Lundi, 10. Tuesday," 12 or the 12th, Mardi, 12. Wednesday, 14 or the 14th j Merer edi, 14 : &c. The preposition on, which is used in English before the clays of both the week and the month, when any particular day or date is mentioned, is not expressed in French : as, — I shall write to them on Monday, je leur ecrirai Lundi. He will come on the 15th*of August, il viendra le 15 cVAoid; &c., as if it were in English : — / shall lurite to them Monday ; he will come the IS August. Noie. — The adverbs of number are formed by adding ment to the ordinal numbers which end in H'we ; as — qimirihne, fourth; qiiairiemement, fourthly; ci7iqmtme,^ii\i, cinqmtmement, fifthly; &c.; but ment is added to the feminine terminations of premier and second : as — premier, m. premiei^e, f. first ; premitrement, firsts adv. ; second, m. seconde, f. second ; secondement, secondly, adv. EXAMPLES OF THE ORDINAL NUJVIBERS used with the word fois, time. When the ordinal numbers are used with the word fois, they are preceded in French by the definite article la, in the sense of the, in English : as, — The first time, la fremiere fois. The second time, la seconde ou la deuxieme fois. The third time, la timsitme fois. The fourth time, la qvatrihne fois. Tire fifth time, la cinqtdtme fois. The sixth time, la sixitme fois. OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 59 The seventh time, The eighth time, The ninth time, The tenth time, The eleventh time. The twelfth time. The thirteenth time, The fourteenth time. The fifteenth time, The sixteenth time. The seventeenth time. The eighteenth time. The nineteenth time. The twentieth time. The tw^enty-first time, Tlie tAventy-second time, &c. The thirtieth time, Tlie thirty-first time, Tlie thirty-second time, &c. The fortieth time. The forty-first time. The forty-second time, &c. The fiftieth time. The fifty-first time. The fiftj'-second time, &c. The sixtieth time. Tire sixty-first time, The sixty-second time, &c. The seventieth time, Tlie seventy-first time, &c. The eightieth time. The eighty-first time, Tlie eighty-second time, &c. Tlie ninetieth time, The ninety-first time, &c. The hundredth time, Tlie thousandth time, &c. la septieme fuis. la huititme fois. la neiivitmefois. la dixitmefois. la onzitme foix. la douzitme fuis. la Ireizihne fois. la quatorzieme fois. la qinnzitme fois. la seizitme fois. la dix-septitme fois. la dix-huitieme fois. la dix-neiivitme fois. la vingtihne fois. la vinjt el iinihne fois. la vingt-deuxihne fois, ^c. la treiitieme fois. la trente et i/nieme fois. la trente-deuxitme fois, 8fc. la qiiGraniitmefois. la quarante et unit me fois. la qiiarante-deuxitme fois, 8^'c, la ci/i'ii;aiititt)ie fois. la ci/iqitante et unitme fois. la ci)iqnante-deuxihne fuis, 4*c. la soixanti tine fois. la soixonte et itnieme fois. la soixante-deuxitme fois, 8fc. la so'xafife-dixie/ne fois. la soixante et onzieme fois, S^'C. la q aatre-v > ngiitm e fois. la quatre-vingt-unihne fois. la quatre-vinjt-deuxitme fois, (^v la quat )'e-vinjt-dixieme fois. la qiiaire-vingt-onzieme fois, S^'c. la centiemefois. la mi I lit me fois, S;c. First, on the contrary, au co?itntire heneficent. bienfuisant —(Did you see) Charles the ESSAY XIV. George the Tliird was good, peaceable and beneficent. Napoleon the imp. bo)i pacifqiie was warlike and ambitious. mp. guerrier amhitieux Avez-vous vu Tenth at the review this morning ? — I wrote to your brother in Ireland, on revue ^T ten vis '^ 7 s ^en^^Irlande ^^a that subject, on the ninth of June; but he answered me, on the twentieth of 12 ^hiijet 12 3 4 1,^^^-^ 6 ^repondit 7 2 3 4 July, that he (intended) to set out for Paris on the first of August, if his ^ avait intention de partir affairs (allowed him.) Your letter of the tenth of April reached us on affaire le lid permeitaient the fifteenth of May.— Mai called, I pret. def. passer imp. ~est^ -She came twice yesterday vint 2 ^hier parvenue but, th was absent ; and the second time I first time she was so engaged imp. occupe 60 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. that I (could not) speak (to her.) They go there eleven or twelve times que ne pus pas lui ^vont ^y (in the course of the) year. — He sends us the papers five or six times a week. — par an ^envoie ^ papier par (How many) times have you been there ? — A hundred times. — (This is) the Combien de 2 3 4 1^ Foici twenty-first or twenty-second letter that I have received to-day. The person aie re^ue axijourd^kid personne who has just knocked at the door (looks) extremely ill. She (has been here) frapper porle a Pair malade est venue at least fifty times, (without ever being able) t6* speak (to you). Well ! cm moins sans jamais pouvoir ^ ^vous Eh bien tell her that, if she (will call again), on Friday next, I shall be very happy diteS'ltd que veut revenir prochain bien-uise to see her. 1 have done that a thousand limes. (Has not any body been devoir ^ la fait N^esl-il venu personne me here for me to-day) ? — Yes ; (there are) two or three gentlemen (waiting for* demander attjourdlmi il y a messieurs qia ^altendent you) in the (drawing-room.) Where does* his mother live ? In Oxford ^vous sa^on Ou, "^ ^ ^demeurer Dans street, No. 72 or 73, 1 beg your pardon, (it is) in Parliament-street, "^demander ^vous c'eit No. 90. — (Does not jrour cousin live) at''' No. 31, Cheapside ? — No; it is in Voire cousine ne demeure-t-eUe pus ^ ^ ^ King-street, No. 12. — li you (will go) to No. 41, Strand, you (will see) voulez aller ^au ^ * ^ verrez some one who wishes to speak to* yoM. — We have lived fifteen years in the quelqihin desirer de ^ ^vous City, and one and twenty at the (West end) of the town. My father comes Cite (lUcst xient (every morning) to town, and returns in* the evening to the country, after tous les matins il retourner soir campagne aprts (having) paid seven or eight visits, Avhich he (never fails to make.) London, avoir fa>t visiie ne manque jamais de rendre September 12th, 1827.— Tuesday, 24th.— Come on Friday or Saturday. LESSON XV. Of Pronouns. There are four kinds of pronouns : namely, — the persojial, the adjec- tive^ the relative^ and the indefinite. 1. Of the Personal Pronouns. Personal pronouns are words which we use instead of the names of persons or things, to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same. They are used in French, as in English, for the nominative or object of the verb. By nominative or subject of the verb is understood the person or thing of which anything is affirmed or denied: as, — V enfant dort, the child OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 61 sleeps: and by object, the person or thing on which the action expressed by the verb either directly or indirectly falls : directly, that is, without the help of a preposition: as, — J''aime Louise, I love Louisa; in this sentence, Louise is immediately affected by the verb aime, without the medium of any preposition : indirectly, that is, with the help of a prepo- sition : as, — j''ai farle ^ voire soeur,! have spoken to your sister; voire soeur is here affected by the participle i)arle with the help of the preposition a. \. Of the Personal Pronouns which fill the place of the Nominative or subject of the Verb. /, thou, he, she, it, we, ye or you, and they, are the eight personal pronouns which fill the place of the nominative of the verb. / is expressed in French byjV, or J' before a vowel or h mute; thou,- hy tu; he, by il; she, by elle; it, by il or elle ; we, by nous ; ye or you, by vous ; they, by its or elles. Je is used for the first person singular of both genders ; tu, for the second singular, likewise of both genders; il, for the third person sin- gular masculine, and elle for the third feminine; nous, for the first person plural of both genders ; vous, for the second person, either sin- gular or plural, likewise of both genders; ils, for the third plural mas- culine, and elles for the third feminine. Je, tu, il, elle, represent the singular, and nous, vous, its, elles, the plural ; but vous is likewise singular when it refers to one person only. Gender affects the pronouns of the third persons singular and plural only : as, — il, elle ; its, elles. II and ils are masculine, and elle and elles feminine. The pronouns of the first and second persons are either masculine or feminine, according as the person or persons whom they represent is or are masculine or feminine. General Rule — 1. When a verb is used affirmatively or negatively, and has one of the personal pronouns,/^, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils or elles, for its nominative, the pronoun usually precedes the verb ; but if the verb be used interrogatively, the pronoun follows it : as, — I speak, je parle ; he does not speak, il ne parle pas ; do you speak? parlez' vous ? do you not speak ? ne parlez-vovs pas ? 2. When the words of somebody are quoted, the pronoun, which serves as nominative to the verb, is placed after the verb: as, — /'y con sens, dit-il, 1 consent to it, said he. Particular Observations. — The pronouns /, thon, he, they, besides being construed by je, tu, il, ils or elles, are also expressed by moi, toi, lui, eux : 1. When they come after each other in a series or kind of enumera- tion : as, — /, thou, he, they, &c.; moi, toi, lui, eux. 2. When they are joined either together or to another pronoun or noun, or even to a part of a sentence, by a conjunction : as, — he and /, LUI et woi, and not il tt je. They and my son, eux et mon fils, and 62 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. not Us et monjils. Neither they nor you, ni eux ni vous, and not ni ils ni vous ; &c. 3. When they are preceded by one of the expressions : — it is, it was, it will he, it would he, or any similar one, either in the affirmative, negative, or interrogative form of the verb : as, — it is thou, c^est toi, and not tu ; it was not he, ce netait pas lui, and not il ; was it they ? ctaient-ce eux? and not ils ; &c. ; or when they are used in answer to a question : as, — who has done that? I ; qui a fait cela? ftioi, and not je, &c. Or, again, when they occur by themselves, either by way of exclamation or interrogation : as, — I ! moi ! 4. When they are used either by themselves after the conjunction than (que) , in a comparative sentence, or when they come before the word alone (seul or seuls) ; as, also, when they precede or follow one of the relative pronouns who, ivhom, that or which {qui, que), and are em- ployed in a determinate sense : as, — she is younger than I, elle est plus jeune que moi. and not que je. They alone were speaking, eux seuls parlaient, and not ils seuls. Was it he who was singing ? etait-ce lui qui chantait ? and not il. They whom I loved so much, eux que faimais tant, and not ils. 5. When they are employed to denote a contrast or opposition between two parts of a sentence : as, — you think so, and I think differently, vous etes de cet avis, et moi je pense differ emment : in any such case, moi, toi, lui, eux, must be followed by their corresponding pronouns je, tu, il, ils, as in the sentence just quoted. Moi and je, lui and //, and eux and ils, are also, sometimes, con- jointly used before a verb; or je, il or ils, before, with moi, lui or eux, after it, in a familiar style. The same are also used to impart more energy to the sentence, and express astonishment or surprise, in the sense of /, he, and they, in English : as, — I have said so ! moi ! j^ai dit cela ! or, j''ai dit cela, moi ! He has done that ! lui ! il a fait cela ! or, il a fait cela, lui ! Finally ; — moi, lui, and eux, are used before a verb in the present of the infinitive, for /, he, and thry^ before the conditional in English, to denote also astonishment or surprise : as, — I would betray my best friend ! — moi ! trahir le meilleur de mes amis ! He would be guilty of cowardice ! — lui ! jaire U7ie lachete ; or, faire une lachete, lui ! as if it were in English : — / to betray the best of my friends ! He to be guilty of cowardice ! or, to be guilty of cowardice, he ! ESSAY XV. You speak too fast. — He reads very well. — She does* not dance well. — Tliey trop vUe tit ires-bien danser (will come), if the weather (permit.) — Is she handsome ? — Does* it rain ? — viendront temps le pervwt beau Hi ^pleut- Yes ; it has (heen raining) all the morning. — I think (it will he) fine weather phi malinte crois g?/il/eru beau to-day. (Are you going) to the play this evening ? — No ; I (am going) into aujouj'd^hui Allez-vous ^ ^ ^coviidie ^ hoi?- vais a OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 63 the country. — If you do* (not come) and* spend the day with me, I shall campagne ne venez pas passer joiirnee ne never* ask you again. — Have you finished your letter ? — No ; not yet. "■^mviter ^ ^pltis fadr leltre pas encore '^Ne Has he not sent you your coat ? — Yes ; I (have just received it.) (How ^ ■* ^poinl ^envoyer ^ habit viens de le recevoir Com- much) did it cost you? — Six guineas and (a half.) — Does* she sell gloves? — bien ^a-t-il ^coide ^ gtdnte demie ^ ^vendre gant Has she hreakfasted ? — Do* you speak French ? — At what o'clock do* they dine ? dtjeuner par/er qvelle heiire diner At five. What o'clock is it now ? (Half past three.") Pray, a prtient Trois heures et demie ^Je voiis prie which is the way to go to the Park? — He and your sister were there. — You ^qi/el ^ chemin pour alter pare ^ ^y and I (will go) together. They and your daughter (went) to the English nous irons ensemble alltrent ^ * ^Anglais Opera yesterday evening. (Is it) he who was (so much) offended? * ^hier '^au soir Est-ce imp. si fdtht (Was it) they who knocked at the door ? — No j it was I. — Tlieir brother Etaient-ce imp. frupper porte c' imp. Leur is taller than I ; but he is not so strong as I. He alone can do that. (It grand si fort seul pent fair e Ce will be) neither he nor I. — That lady maintains that this proposition is true, ?ie sera ni ni dame souli'ent que • vrai and I pretend the contrary. You tell me she is dead, and he says it prtlemb'e conlraire '-^di'es ^ qu' morte dit que cela is not so*. — We (will take) a walk, this evening, you, your mother irons f aire tour de promenade soir and I. — I said so ! — He (will do) that ! — I do* not believe it. — I would reveal ai dit cela fera ~crois ^le rtvtler the secret of my friend ! No ; never. — Who was speaking (to you ?) He or jainaii imp. ^ ^vous Mrs. W***. You like the town, and I like the country. (Look at) that ikT"'^. aimer ville Regardez magnificent building ; it unites gracefulness with beauty, and elegance with mugnifique edifice riu)iir grace a elegance a simplicity. — (Tliere is) a fine pear-tree ; it blossoms every spring, yet it simpliciit Voila poirier feurir tous les p7-intemps cependant seldom produces any fruit. ^^rarement ^produit du LESSON XVL Of the Personal Pronouns me, thee, him, her, it, us, ye or you, and them, which are used as objects of the Verb. General Rule. — Whenever any one of the above pronouns is governed by a verb in English, without the intervention of a prepo- sition, either expressed or understood, me is rendered into French by me ; thee, by te ; him or it, by le ; her or it, by la; us, by ?ious ; ye or 64 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. you, by vous ; and them, by les ; provided the French corresponding verb, of which the pronoun is to be the object, requires no preposition : me, te, nous, vous, le, la or les, is then placed before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — he loves me, il m'aime ; I have followed you, je vous ai suivi ; he esteems her, il Vestime ; we have seen them, nous les avons vus. When, on the contrary, any one of the above pronouns is governed by a verb, through the medium of the preposition to, expressed or implied in English, and the corresponding verb in French requires a, me is again construed into French by me ; thee, by ie ; us, by nous ; ye or you, by vous ; but him and her are rendered by lui ; and them is expressed by leur, with reference to persons or animate objects, and it or them by y, with reference to inanimate things, leaving out the prepo- sition : me, te, nous, vous, lui, leur and y, are, as above, placed before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — she has written to us, elle nous a ecrit. He told me to go there, for he told to me, il me dit d''y aller. We have sent her some money, nous lui avons envoye de Pargent. I shall speak to them, je leur parlerai. Have you thought of it ? y avez-vous pense ? 31 e or — at or to me, occurring after a verb, affirmatively used, in the second person singular or plural of the imperative, is expressed in French by 77ioi, and placed after the verb : as, — tell me, dis or dites -moi ; speak to me, parle or parlez-moi. But me or — at or to me, following a verb, negatively used, in the second person singular or plural of the imperative, is expressed by me, and placed before the verb, as in the other tenses : as, — do not speak to me, ne me parle pas, or ne me parlez pas. When me or — at or to me is used with the third person singular or plural of the imperative of a verb, affirmatively or negatively used, both me and at or to me are usually construed into French by me, and placed before the verb : as, — let him or them pay me, qu'^il me paie, or qu'ils me paient. Let her not look at me, qu'elle ne me regarde pas. Le, la, les, lui, leur, nous, y and en, being employed with a verb, in the second person singular, or in the first and second persons plural of the imperative, affirmatively used, are placed after it, whereas they pre- cede it, as in the other tenses, if the verb be used negatively : — as, follow him, her or them, suis-le, la or les ; let us write to him, to her or to them, ecrivons-lui or leur; take some, prenez-en ; do not lose it, ne le perds or ?ie le perdez pas; do not speak to him, to her, or to them, ne lui or ne leur p)arle pas ; do not think of it, n'y pensez pas ; do not eat any, 7i'en mangez pas, &c. ; but if the verb be in the third person singular or plural, whether affirmatively or negatively used, le, la, les, lui, leur, nous, y and en, always precede it : as, — let her take it, qu'elle le prenne ; let her not answer him, qu^elle ne lui reponde pas. Observe. — Whenever two or more pronouns are governed by a verb, they are placed in the following order before the verb in a simple tense. OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 65 and before the auxiliary in a compound one : 1. me, te, se, nous, vous, precede le, la, les, en and y. 2. lui, leur, precede y and en. 3. le, la^ les, precede lui and leur. 4. y precedes en ; as it is pointed out in the syntax, where all the possible combinations of the personal pronouns occurring with a verb, are exemplified in affirmative, negative, and in- terrogative sentences. Cases in which to me is expressed in French by a moi ; to thee, by A TGI ; to him, by A lui ; to her, by a elle ; to us, by A nous ; to ye or you, by A vous ; to them, by A eux or A elles, and placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the participle in a com- pound one. 1. When they are governed by an English verb which, being a reflective one in French, requires a after it, whatever may be the preposition used in English : as, — she applied to me, elle s\idressa A moi ; because s\idressa is a reflective verb which governs A. 2. When they depend on any of the following verbs which require a after them in French : — to go, aller ; to have business with, avoir affaire; to have consideration for, avoir egard ; to have recourse to, avoir recours ; to run, courir ; to be, to belong, etre ; to appeal to, en appeler ; to pay attention, faire attention; to mind, prendre garde ; to think, penser ; and to come, renin as, — I have some business with you, y'a/ affaire A vous; we shall have recourse to them, nous aurons recours A eux, &c. 3. To me, to thee, to him, to her, to us, to you and to tliem, are also expressed in French by a moi, a toi, a lui, a elle, a nous, a vous, a eux or a elles, when they depend on any other verb than those just enumerated, provided it governs a in French, and the pronouns are joined either together or to a noun by a conjunction : as, — I shall speak to you and to him, je vous parlerai A vous et A lui. It was to the lady, and not to you, I was speaking, c^eiait a madame, et non pas a vous qiie je parlals. If me, thee, him, her, us, ye, you or them, should be governed by a verb requiring de, in French, instead of a, whether it be a reflective one or not, me should then be expressed by de moi ; thee, by de toi ; him, by DE LUI ; her, by d'elle ; us, by de nous ; ye or you, by de vous ; them, by d'eux or d'elles, and placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one : as, — I was laughing at him, je me moquais de lui. She does not pity me, elle n^a pas pitie de moi ; because the verbs se moquer and avoir pitie govern de. It is necessary to observe that him, her or them, referring to persons, and it or them, to things, that have been mentioned before, are also, when depending on a verb which governs de, expressed in French by en, which is put before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, except when the verb is in the imperative affirma- 66 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. tively used, in which case en follows it in the second person singular, and in the first and second persons plural, whereas en precedes it if it be used negatively : in any case, de and the preposition which may be governed by the English verb, are left out : as, — I am not satisfied with him, her, or them, ye n'en suis pas content ; he is glad of it, il en est hien-aise ; I wonder at it, je m'en etonne ; she is very sorry for it, elle en est hien fdchee ; complain of it, plaignez-vous-en ; &c. ; because the verbs etre content, etre hien-aise, etre f ache, s^ Homier emdse plai7idre govern de. En is of great use in the French language, and is generally employed to recall the idea of anything that may have been said before, and in many instances is used for its. .Me, thee, him, her, us, ye, you, or the?n, coming after a preposition, in any other circumstance than the cases which have been mentioned, must be expressed in French by — moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux or elles, and placed after the preposition : as, — this is for me and that for thee; ceci est pour moi et cela pour toi. Le, la, les, are always articles when they are used for the, before a noun : as, — the brother and sister, le frere et la soeur ; but they are pronouns when they are governed by a verb, and stand for him, her, it or them: as,— I have it or them,ye Vai ox je les ai. For any further explanations on the Pronouns, see the Syntax. ESSAY XVI. Have you seen Charles the Tenth ? Yes, I have seen him several times ; vti plusieurs fois hut I have never spoken to him. — I know them very well by sight. — Do"''' you ne jamais farler connais de vue believe her ? — Neglect the pleasures of life : the pains which follow them crorjez- Nigliger -plaisir vie peine sidvent en prove their vanity. — Jupiter, vexed that Saturn laid snares for* him, took prouver la vaniti irrile que Saturne tendit jnege lid prit up* arms against him, drove him out* of his kingdom^ and arme contre pret. def. chasser royaume pret. def. compelled him to quit heaven. — Do* you admire her ? Yes, and I love her forcer a quitter del admirer aimer with all my heart. To please her, (you must never) flatter her. 1 de tout coeur Pour plaire lui il ne f aid jamais (shall write) to you, in two or three days. Do* you not see him tcrirai dans ^Ne ^ Hoyez- ^point ^ sometimes ? Yes ; I frequently meet him at the Exchange.— Prosperity ^quelquef'jis ^ "friquemment ^rencontrer ^ a Bourse Prosptrite gets us friends, and adversity tries them.— Have you thought (of it) ?— No ; fait adversity eprouver penser y I have quite forgotten it.— Think of it for Sunday next.— — Do* not tout-a-fait oublier pour Dimanche prochain ^«' think (of it) (any more). When truth appears in all its brightness, (no a ^^ ^plus Quand vtrite parait dans eclat per- OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 6t body can) resist it. — Tell me the truth. — Do* not tell her that you have Sonne ne pent rtsister y Dites- que seen me. — Do* not speak to me. — Your dogs are hungry and thirsty, give chien ont faim soif donner them something* to eat and drink. — I shall apply to you. — Do* not a manger a hoire s'adresser trust him. — She came to me, and asked me to go vAih. her. — You sefier vint pret. def. prier f/' ^ ^ne never think of me. — He has some* business mth you "We shall have ^jamais 'Spenser d affaire recourse to her, if we want any thing. — (It is) to you and me. — recours avoir hesoin de quelque chose Cest They appealed to me. — He never pays attention (to it). — I forgive both you and her, because I hope you will behave better pardonner el d parce que esptrer que se conduire mieux in future. — Will you do that for me ? — It depends upon you to merit her d I'aveyiir faire dtpend de de mtriier esteem. — I do* not pity them. — She has recourse to them. — Come and* esiime avoir pihe d' Venez speak to me. — Go and* dress yourself. — Answer me. — Go to him. — "\Vrite Allez haUUer vous Rtpondre Ecrivez' to her. — Forgive them. — Listen to* me. — Lend us that book; I (cannot), Pardonner Ecouter Preter livre ne saurais (I must) return it to day. Tliat belongs to you or to your sister. — il faut que je rende aujourd^ hui vous appartient ou It was not to you, it was to the* gentleman, I was speaking. — Ce imp. c' imp. monsieur que imp. (Has he complained) of me .'' — We were laughing at him. — I wonder at it. S''€St-il p/aint imp. se moquer de s'ttonner — Are you glad of it ? — No ; I am very sorry for it. — Life is a gift of God ; bioi-aise bien facht don to* destroy it is a crime. — Keep this for* me, I shall want it. — (Tliere is) disposer en Garder ^ ^7noi avoir besoin en voi/d 3'our book, we do* not want it. — Pisistratus said of a drunken man, who had Pisislrate dit ivre avait spoken against him : — I am no more angry with him than (I should be with ne pas plus fachk c '" ' '- .■■—'.- a blind man v^-ho would have run) against me. tin aveuijle qui se serait jetc LESSON XVII. 'Of Adjective Pronouns. Adjective pronouns are of a mixed nature, participating the properties both of pronouns and adjectives. They may be subdivided into two kinds, — the possessive and the demonstrative. 68 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. ] . Of the Possessive Pronouns. Possessive pronouns are words which we use to express the possession or property of anything. They are divided into conjunctive and relative, as before explained. The conjunctive possessive pronouns are: — mon, ma, mes, ray; ton, ta, tes, thy ; son, sa, ses, his, her, or its ; notre, nos, our ; voire, vos, your; and leur, leurs, their. These pronouns are called conjunctive, because they always precede the substantives of which they express the possession : as, — mon chapeau, my hat. The relative possessive pronouns are : — le mien, lamienne, les miens, les miennes, mine; le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine; le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his, hers, or its ; le notre, la notre, les notres, ours; le votre, lavotre, les votres, yours; and le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. They are so termed relative, because they are never prefixed to any substantive, but always refer to one : as, — mon livre et le votre, my book and yours. PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONJUNCTIVE AND RELATIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 1. On the Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. General Rule. — The conjunctive possessive pronouns mon, ma, mes ; ton, ta, tes ; son, sa, ses ; &c., are usually employed in French before the name of everything of which we express the possession, and agree with it in gender and number; although my, thy, his, her, its, &c., never vary in English, and are, when referring to several nouns follow- ing each other in a sentence, usually put before the first, and understood before those which succeed: as, — my father, mother, and sisters are gone into the country, mon pere, ma mere, et mes soeurs sont alles a la campagne. The relative possessive pronouns le mien, la mienne, les aniens, les miennes, &c., likewise agree with their respective substantives in French : as, — your sister and mine, voire sceur et la mienne. Her friends and mine, ses amis et les miens. The two possessive pronouns son and sa always agree in gender with the thing possessed, in French, and not with the possessor, as his, her, and its do in English : as, — he loves his wife, il aime sa femme, and not son femme. She has lost her property, elle a perdu son hien, and not sa bien ; &c. ; always making them agree with the following noun. Mon, ton, son, are used in French instead of ma, ta, sa, before nouns feminine singular, beginning with a vowel or h mute, in order to avoid the harsh sound which would otherwise result from the meeting of two vowels : as, — mon oreille, my ear, instead of ma oreille. Ton epee, thy sword, instead of ta epee. Son hianeur, his temper, instead of sa humeur ; but notre, votre, leur, are indifferently employed before a noun masculine or feminine singular, either beginning with a vowel, a OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 69 consonant, or h mute : as, — notre ami^ our friend ; yotre horloge^ your clock ; &c. Lem\ their, must not be confounded with leur, to them; the former being a possessive conjunctive pronoun which is prefixed to substan- tives, and takes an s in the plural : as, — leurs enfans, their children ; whereas the latter is a personal pronoun which goes before a verb, and never takes an s : as, — // leur parla de vous, he spoke to them of you. Noire and votre are pronounced short, when conjunctive pronouns, but when they are relative they are pronounced long, taking besides a circumflex accent over the o : as, — 7iot)-e maison est neuvej la votre ne Vest pas, our house is new, yours is not. One of the conjunctive possessive pronouns ?non, ma, mes, is used in French before the name or names of such of our friends or relations as we address, although my be not generally employed in such a case in English: as, — How do you do, father? Comment vous portez-vous, MON pere? — Adieu, children, adieu, mes enfans. AVhen inquiring about or speaking of persons for whom we feel some respect or consideration, and with whom we are not upon terms of inti- macy, one of the qualifications. Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle, or Messieurs, Mcsdames, Mesdemoiselles, according as we speak of one or several, is used before the possessive pronoun voire or vos, which precedes the name of the person or persons mentioned, although there be no equivalent expression made use of in English : as, — -present my compliments to your mother, presentez vies compliniens a madame votre mere. Give my kind regards to your sisters, dites hien des choses aimahles de ma part a mesdemoiselles vos soeurs. But friends, broiJiers, sisters, inquiring about or speaking of each other : parents speaking of their children, and children of their parents, will never use these preliminaries : as, for instance, — a friend inquiring after the health of his friend's sister, will say : — comment se porte ta soeur? how is your sister? and not comment se porte mademoiselle ta soeur ? Neither are these preliminaries used when speaking of or inquiring about servants, ivorkmen, or any other such persons who may be con- sidered as inferior: for instance, — when inquiring after the health of a gardener, we must say : — comment se porte Jacques ? how is James ? and not, comment se porte Monsieur Jacques? One's, employed in a general and indefinite sense for his, is expressed in French by one of the possessive pronouns, son, sa, ses, according to the gender and number of the substantive following : as, — one must live according to one's income, ilfaut vivre suivant son revenu. 2. ON THE RELATIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. General Rule. — When any one of the relative possessive pronouns mine, thine J his, hers, ours,2jours, theirs, is preceded by the preposition 70 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. of and placed after the substantive to which it relates in English : as, — a friend of mine ; a hook of yours ; a countryman of his ; it is ex- pressed in French by its corresponding conjunctive possessive pronoun mes^ tes, ses, nos, vos, or leurs^ before which the preposition de is used : — mes^ tes^ ses, nos, vos, or leurs, is immediately prefixed to the sub- stantive to which it refers, and ihe substantive is put in the plural : as, — a friend of mine, un de mes amis ; a book of yours, un de vos livres ; a countryman of his, un de ses compatriotes ; as if it were in English, — one of my friends, one of your books, 8^c. But mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, coming after any tense of the verb to he, employed in the sense of to helong : as, — this coat IS mine ; that music is yours ; are usually expressed in French by a moi, a toi, a lui, a elle, a nous, a vous, a eux or a elles, and placed similarly to mine, thine, his, &c. in English : as, — this coat is mine, cet hahit est a moi. That music is yours, cette musique est a vous. The word own, which is sometimes used after the possessive pronouns my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, to give more energy to the expres- sion, is rendered into French by the adjective propre : as, — I heard it with my own ears, je Pai entendu de mes propres oreilles. I saw it with my own eyes, je Pai vu de mes propres yeux. ESSAY XVII. My father, mother, and sisters loved him tenderly. — His wife is very soeitr imp. aimer tendrement femme ugly. — I have spoken to her husband. — Her hope is ill grounded. — Her son /aid jjurler man esperance mal fonde Jlls is not very learned. — (How old is) his (mother-in-law) .'' — His wit, his talents, savant Quel age a helle-mtre espnt talent his honesty, and his good nature, (make him admired) hy every body. — My homieiete naturel ^font Ve coyisiderer de principles, my taste for study, and my love of retirement, have made me choose principe goid pour fetnde amour retraite fait ckoisir a retired life. — If you wish (to keep) my friendship and protection, relirci vie dtkirer que je vous comerve amitie. do* not speak ill of me. — He has received these presents from my uncle and mal recevoir oncle aunt. — (Shall I send) ihis pheasant to your friend.? — Has she lost all her de tante E7iverrai-je fuisaii ami perdu , property.? — We expect a letter from our correspondent to-morrow^ — Have you bien attendre correq)onda?it demain not yet (heard) from your amiable cousin ? — All their projects have encore recu de nouvelles aimahle cousine jirojet (failed.) — Is* your (grand-father) still living ? — Yes ; but my grand-mother is tchoue grand-ptre '^encore ^vit-il grand'-mere dead. — (Come), friends, let us fly to glory. — How do* you do, children? — mort Allans amis voler gloire Comment se porter enfant Give my love to your sisters. — Is your mother (at home) ? — No ; but Faites amities '^Est-elle ^ ^ ^y OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 71 my father (is), and he will be very glad to see you. Do* your nieces y est bien-aise de voir niece learn French ? — One cannot always satisfy one's wishes. — My npprennent-elles le On ne pent pas safisfaire desir horse and yours are very had, hut I think mine is a little better than yours. mauvais crois que peu meilleur que (Is it) her temper or yours that hinders you from living well together ? Esi-ce humeurf. qui empecher de hivre -^ ensemble If (it be) yours, it is easy for* you to remedy it, by (keeping a check) cest il '^ ^ ^ ^d'' apporter remtde ^y en qyrenant upon yourself; if it be hers, redouble your attention, complaisance, and sur vous-meme redouhler d'' de • de good behaviour; it is very seldom that this method (proves unsuccessful.) — All hons proctdts il rare que may en lie rtussisse pas the pictures are arrived from Italy, except yours, hers, and mine, which we tableau arriver Itnlie excepte que expect to-morrov7. — We know what are your amusements in town, whereas attemlojis savons quels amusement a la ville au lieu you (are quite ignorant) of ours in the country; but I assure you that ours que n'ntez nulle idee a campagne mais are infinitely superior to yours. — Tliey have (returned) us our music, where injiniment prtferables rendu musique ou is theirs ? Our field is cultivated, theirs (is not.) Her morals are correct, chainp culiiver fie Pest pas inceurs bon theirs are corrupt. My books are new, his are old. — Take this to my sonj corrompu livre veuf vieux Porter and that to yours. — — You may send these pistols to their country pouvez envoyer pistolet ^de ^campagne house, if you like, but (not) to mine. — She has learnt her lesson, and he ^maison voulez uon pas appris le^on lui il has not learnt his. — He has found a cravat of yours among his. A cravat of irouver cravate parmi mine, you say? show it (to me). 1 (saw) a countryman of }-ours ^ ^difes- montrer moi ai ru '"^ ^compatriote ^ •* yesterday. — This money is mine. — (That is) a trick of his. — Will you take this ^hier argent Voda tour porter watch to your sister ? I think it is hers. — Whose great coat is this .'* It is my montre crois que c' Vt '^qui ^surtout ^ * C a (brother's.) I thought it was yours. No ; it is not mine. — Did you really frtre croyais que c' ce Avez- rcellement hear that ? Yes : I heard it with my own ears. — I tell you that I entendu ''^ai entendu V de oreille dis que saw it with my own eyes. ^ai vu V de LESSON XVIII. 2. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns. The demonstrative pronouns are words which we use to pomt out the person or thing spoken of, as previously explained. 72 OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. It must be recollected that this^ that, these, those, are expressed in Frencli by — ce, cet, cette, ces, when they come immediately before the substantives which they particularise : as, — this gentleman, ce monsieur ; that bird, cet oiseau ; that man, cet homme ; this lady, cette dame; these young ladies, ces demoiselles ; those children, ces enfans ; of those men, de ces hommes ; &c. ; always using ce before a noun mascu- line singular, beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; and cet before a noun likewise masculine singular, but beginning with a vowel or h mute. Cette, on the contrary, is always required before a noun feminine singular, whether it begins with a vowel, an h mute, or a consonant ; and ces before a noun plural, whatever its initial or gender may be. But this, that, these, those, are expressed in French by celui, celle, ceux, celles, when, instead of immediately preceding a substantive, they refer to one ; this is generally the case, when they are followed either by the preposition of in English, or by one of the relative pronouns ivho, whom, that or lohich : as, — the term of life is short, that of beauty is still more so, le temps de la vie est court, celui de la heaute Vest encore davantage. Madame, I bring you your gown, and that of your daughter, Madame, je vous apporte voire robe, et celle de votre Jille. Lend me that which you bought yesterday, p)retez-moi celui que vous ache- tdtes hier ; speaking of a parasol. Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, this and these, are used to denote, among two or several objects or things, the nearest to the person who speaks; and ce/w2-/a, celle-ld, ceux-ld or celles-ld, to point out the most remote object : as, — which of these two horses would you advise me to buy? /Au is four years old, and that five; lequel de ces deux chevaux me conseilleriez-vous d^acheter? cei^ui-ci a quatre ans, et celui-lA cinq. Ceci and cela are used in the sense of this and that, not joined to any noun nor referring to any, but taken in an indefinite collective sense, when we either mention or point at some thing, without specifying what it is by its own name. They have no plural, and are used only in the singular, both for the masculine and feminine gender. Ceci refers to the nearest object or thing to the person who speaks, and cela to the most remote object : as, — what does tliis mean ? que veui dire ceci ? what did you do that for? pourquoi avez-vous fait cela ? Give this to the lady, donnez ceci a madame. Bring me that, apportez-moi cela. General Rule. — The demonstrative pronouns, ce, eel, cette, ces ; de ce, de cet, de cette, de ces ; and a ce, a cet, a cette, a ces, are used in French before every substantive which they serve to demonstrate, and agree with it in gender and number, although, when several substantives follow each other in a sentence in English, this, that, these, those, be frequently used before the first substantive only, and understood before those which succeed : as, — see how this man, woman, and child are playing together ! voyez comme get homme, cette femme, et cet enfant jouent ensemble! OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 73 The relative demonstrative pronouns celui^ celle^ ceux, celles^ like- wise agree in gender and number with their respective substantives in French : as, — ce parapluie et celui de voire sosuVj this umbrella and that of your sister. The following lines of Racine beautifully exemplify the repetition of the demoa- strative pronouns ce, cet, cette and ces. De cette nuit, Phenice, as-tu vu la splendeur ? Tes yeux ne sont-ils pas tout pleins de sa grandeur ? Ces flambeaux, ce bucher, cette nuit enflammee, Ces aigles, ces faisceaux, ce peuple, cette armee, Cette foule de rois, ces consuls, ce senat, Qui tous de mon amant empruntaient leur eclat; Cette pourpre, cet or, que rehaussait sa gloire, Et ces lauriers encor temoins de sa victoire. (Rac. Btnnicey 1, 5.) ESSAY XVIII. This portrait is (beautiful.) — The term of life is short, that of beauty is still cle toute heaiitc temps vie court beautc ^ '^encore more so. — These peaches are not so ripe as those which I %ien davantage V -peche missi miir que pret. def. bought yesterday. — We gave the money to that man. — Look at* the acheter hier pret, def. donner argent Regarder beak of that bird. — (Is it) far from that house to the river ?— (Such a) happiness bee oiseau Y a-t-illoin rivitre Uu pareil honheur is infinitely superior to that which one can enjoy in this world. — infinhnent au-dessus de dont on peat j'ouir dans monde The climate of England is not comparable to that of Switzerland. — This climat P la Sinsse hatred, long restrained, broke forth, and was the unhappy hcdne long-temps contetm pret. def. ec/ater pret. def. ^malheweitx cause of those dreadful events. "Wliat gowni shall I lend her ? — That which ^ ^terrible "^ivtnement Quelle robe preter liu you showed Miss 8*** last week. — I have just bought these two pret. def. montrer a dernier acheter silk umbrellas: this costs me twenty-four shillings, and that thirty. — Do* Ve ^soie ^pa)-apluie couie me schelling not mention that to (any body).— If she does that, she will repent it.—, parler de personne Si fait '^s ^repentir ^en Is this good to eat ? That is very bad to drink.— Take this (to the) "^Est-il ^ a manger mmivuis a boire Porter a lady, and keep that for yourself.— What (is the meaning of) this .? — See madame garder pour vous Que veut dire Voyez how these men and women are playing together ! — You (ought not to trust) <^^'^ jouer ensemble ne devries pas vous fier a, those who are interested in (deceiving you).— He may tell these stories to interesse a -tromper ^vous pent conter histoire those who will listen to* him. voudro7it bien "^ecoider V 74 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. LESSON XIX. Of the Relative Pronouns. ' The nature of the relative pronouns having been already explained, and their different variations exemplified, the object of this article is to point out the mode of using them. The relative pronouns are (as shown in the beginning of this Grammar), qui, que, lequel, dont, who, whom, that, which, of whom or which. General Rule. — Whenever the relative pronouns ivho, whom^ that or which, are used in an English sentence, which is not interrogative, and refer to a substantive expressed before : as, — the young lady who sings; the children who are amiable; the gentlemen wb.om I have seen ; &c. ; who, that and ivhich, are expressed in French by qui, for the nominative of the following verb, and whom, that or ivhich, by que, for its direct object; both qui and que are used with reference to persons and things of whichsoever gender and number, and are imme- diately placed after the noun to which they relate : as, — the young lady who sings, la demoiselle qui chante. The children who are amiable, les enfans qui sont aimahles. The gentlemen whom I have seen, les mes- sieurs qvEJ'ai vus. But who, employed interrogatively for the nominative of the following verb : as, — ivho is there ? who has done that ? is construed into French by qui or qui est-ce qui : as, — who is there ? qui est la ? or qui est-ce qui est Id? — who has done that? qui a fait cela? or qui est-ce qui a' fait cela ? Whom, likewise used in an interrogative manner for the object of the succeeding verb : as, — whom do you call ? ivhom do you speak to ? from whom liave you received that news ? is also expressed by qui, but never by qui est-ce qui, or que: as, — whom do you call? qui appelez-vous ? and not qui est-ce qui or que appelfz-vous ? — whom do you speak to ? a qui parlez-vous ? and not a qui est-ce qui, &c., from whom have you received that news ? de qui avez-vous regu cette nou- velle ? and not de qui est-ce qui, &c. Whose, employed in an interrogative manner before a substantive followed by a tense of the verb to he, signifying either to belong to or whose turn it is to do anything : as, — whose book is this ? whose turn is it to speak ? is expressed in French by a qui, before the correspond- ing tense of the verb etre : as, — whose book is this? a qui est ce livre ? Whose turn is it to speak ? a qui est-ce a parler ? Which, followed by the preposition of, and used to ask which person or thing out of several, or when, without being followed by of, it is used relatively to a noun going before : as, — which of your sisters ? — to which of these flowers do you give the preference ? — from which of your brothers have you heard ? &c. — is expressed in French by lequel, laquelle, lesquels or lesquelles ; duquel, de laquelle, desquels or OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. '75 desquelles ; auquel, a laquelle, auxquels or auxquelles : as, — which of your sisters ? laquelle de vos sosurs ? to which of these flowers do you give the preference ? a laquelle de ces fleurs donnez-vous la pre- ference? from which of your brothers have you heard ? duquel de lyos freres avez-vous regu des nouvelles ? Which, followed by the preposition o/, as in the above sentences, is also sometimes expressed by quel est celui de or quelle est celle de^ before the substantive following, with one of the relative pronouns qui, que or dont, &c., before the next verb, according as the relative pronoun stands for its nominative, or its direct or indirect object : as, — which of your brothers has done that ? quel est celui de vos freres qui a fait cela? which of these ladies do you like best, quelle est celle de ces dames que vous aimez le mieux ? When lohat, coming before a substantive, or before a tense of the verb to be, followed by a substantive, is used either by way of interro- gation, or to express satisfaction, pleasure, or astonishment : as, — what lesson have you learnt ? — lohat pleasure ! what are her motives ? it is expressed in French by quel, quelle, quels or quelles : as, — what lesson have you learnt? quelle legon avez-vous apprise ? what pleasure ! quel plaisir ! what are her motives ? quels sont ses motifs 1 What, followed by a or an, either immediately before a substantive alone, or before an adjective followed by a substantive, and used also to express pleasure, satisfaction, or astonishment, is likewise exjDressed by quel ! quelle ! quels ! or quelles ! and a or an is left out : as, — What a rogue! quel coquin! What a fine lady! quelle belle dame ! But what, used immediately before a verb, in the beginning of an interrogative sentence, in the sense of what thing ? as, — what does he say ? what are you doing there ? is construed into French by que? or qu'est-ce que ? with this difference that, should ^if Quelque, quelques ; J qttelconqties. Quelqhe, quelques, before a substantive, with qzic before the following verb, which is put in the subjunctive mood; and, also, quel que, quelle que, quels que, quelle^ que, in two words, before a tense of the verl) etre, which is likewise put iu the subjunctive mood. Quelque and tout, indeclinable, before an adjective, or a participle, with que before the next verb> which is put in the subjunctive mood after quelque, and in the indicative after tout. Quelque chose que; quoi que ce soif que; quoi que ;- with the succeeding verb iu the subjunctive mood, if depending on these words. Tout, toute ; tous, toutes. •■ Tout le, toute la ; tous les, toutes ies. Le tout. E 5 82 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. All that, 1 yr^^^^ ^^ ^^- ^^^^ ^^ ^^_ Every thing that, j ^ ^ Another, Uti autre, tine autre. Others, Les autres ; and autrui after a preposition. Each other, \L\m P autre, Ptme P autre ; les tins, les autres, les One another, J tmes les autres. Uun et P autre, Pune et P autre ; les uns el les autres, Both, One and another^ [ les vnes et les autres ; tous les deux, toutes les deux ; and tous deux, toides deux. ^mi on Pautre, Pmie ou P autre ; les uns ou les autres, les vnes ou les autres. Ni Pun ni Pautre, ?ii Pune ni Pautre ; ni les mis fii les autres, ni les unes ni les autres. Either, f Neither, | General Rule. — Whenever the pronouns one, ive, you, they, and people, are used in an indeterminate sense, as in these sentences, — one says ; people say ; they say ; we are not alivays happy ; one is not always young and handsome ; they fought like desperate men ; &c., they are expressed in French by on, which always requires the verb of which it is the nominative, in the third person singular of the active voice, and the adjective or participle which may refer to it, (viz. to on,') in the singular masculine, if reference be made to men, and in the feminine singular, if to women ; but in the plural, either masculine or feminine, according to the sense, if including an idea of plurality : as, — one says, people say, they say, on dit ; we are not always happy, on n'est pas toujours heureux ; one is not always young and handsome, on n'est pas toujours jeune et jolie ; they fought like desperate men, on se battit en desesperes. This pronoun is likewise used to express all inde- finite and general expressions of reports : such as, — it is said, it is reported, on dit ; and all passive and indeterminate phrases : as, — I was told of it yesterday, on me le dit hier ; he has been informed of it, on le lui a mande. When one is not employed in an indefinite sense, but is used by way of distinction, as when, speaking of two boxes, we say : — in one you will find books, and in the other money ; — it is expressed in French by run or rune, according to the gender ; and they, referring to a substan- tive or pronoun plural going before, by ils or elles, according as the sub- stantive or pronoun is masculine or feminine. We is also expressed by nous, and you by vous, when not taken in an indefinite sense : as, — you will receive two boxes : in one you will find books, and in the other money, vous recevrez deux holies : dans Vune vous trouverez des livres, et dans Pautre de r argent. I have invited them, but they will not come, je les ai invites, mats ils ne veulent pas venir. We shall go, nous irons ; &c. Whenever also a verb, being used in the passive voice, is not taken in an indeterminate sense, but is followed by the preposition hy and a substantive particularising it: as, — / was told hy Mrs. L*** that ; OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 83 he was attacked by four thieves ; she was run over by a cart or horse ; &c., the pronoun on cannot be used, but the verb is sometimes expressed by changing the passive voice into the active, using the substantive following for its nominative, and leaving out the preposition by ; and, sometimes, the passive voice is used in French as in English, if the verb and sense will admit of it : as, — I was told by Mrs. L**** that , Madaine L*** me dit que He was attacked by four thieves, il fut attaque par quatre voleurs. She was run over by a cart or horse, une charrette ou un cheval lui passa sur te corps ; &c. Observe. — Von is used instead of on, after et, si, ou, to avoid the harsh sound which would result from the meeting of these words with on; thus we say — et Von, si Von, ou Von ; and not et on, si on, ou on : as, — SI l'on faisaii la paix, j'irais en France, if peace were to be made, I should go to France, and not si on faisait ; &c. Von is also employed in lieu of on, after que, if the next word begins with c or q, for the like purpose of avoiding the harsh sound which would result from the meeting of que with on in this case : as, — ce que l'on conpoit bien s'exprime clairement ; and not ce qu'on conpoit bien, &c. But on must always be used after et, si, ou, que, when the succeeding word is one of the pronouns le, la, les, lui, leur, or any other word with which Pon would form a disagreeable sound : as, — on le lui a dit, he has been told of it ; and not l'on le lui a dit. On is in general to be preferred to Von ; and on must be used at the beginning of either a whole sentence or of a part of it : as, — on aime une femme aimable, on la cherit, on Vadore, we love an amiable w^oman,we cherish and adore her ; and not l'on aime une femme aimable, l'on la cherit, l'on Padore. On and Poji can only be used for the nominative of the verb : they precede it in affirmative and negative sentences ; but in an interrogative sentence, o)i alone can be used for the nominative of the verb, and it is placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the auxiliary in a com- pound one ; and when the verb ends with a vowel in the third person singular, a t. with a hyphen on each side of it, is put between the verb and on : as, — que fera-t-on? what will be done. On or ron is generally repeated in French before every verb of which it is the nominative, although the expression equivalent to it in English may, when several verbs follow each other in a sentence, be used before the first only, and understood before those v\^hich succeed. The con- junction a?icl, which is used before the last verb in such a case in English, is elegantly suppressed in French : as — people love their children, caress and often spoil them, on aime ses enfans, on les car esse, on les gate souvent. Aucun, nul, ni Pun ni Pautre, pas un, or their feminine aucune, nulle, ni Pune ni Pautre, pas une, as also personne and rien, require ne before the verbs of which they are the nominatives or objects, and the adjectives or participles which refer to them are put in the masculine 84 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. singular, if reference be made to men, and in the feminine singular, if to women : as, — I say nothing, je ne dls rien ; nobody told you so, per- Sonne ne vous a dit cela ; &c., always putting the verb in the third per- son singular, if any one of these pronouns be its nominative. For further explanations on this subject, see the Syntax, on the article of Indefinite Pronouns. ESSAY XX. Is one well attended there ? Yes; very well. — One is always better (at ^Est^ ■* her-vi ^y ires-bien mieux chez home) than elsewhere. — You will receive two parcels : in one you will find a soi qi^ ailleurs recevoir paquet hill of exchange, and in the other two (hank-notes.)— 1 have heen told by iettre change billets de bunque Mr. L** that your mother is much better. — My father was attacked by &e 'porter beaucoi/p mieux attaquer par four thieves, in returning home, ' last night. — His sister was unfortunately en retourner chez lid hier au soir malheureusement hit by a mad dog. Do* they talk of peace ? People attribute the mordiie enrage chien parler paix attribuer invention of gunpowder to Berthold Sherward of Friburg. They say ^a canon ^poudre ■ Fribourg dit that the French will not succeed in Spain. — It is reported that the Spaniards Fran^ais reussir en Espagne Espagnoi have won the last battle. — I was* told (of it) yesterday. — (What news gagner dernier bataille me dit le Que dit-on. is there) ? None.— (Is it thought) that Marshal N** (will be) acquitted ? No ; denouveau Rien Croit-on Martchal N*"^ soit acquit ter people think that he will be condemned to death. — If peace were to be made, C7'oit condamner a mort I should go to France. — We learn better what we understand, than what we en apprend ce que comprend que (do not). Do that, or (you will be punished). — She has been* informed ne comprend pas Faites Von vous punira Lui mander (of it) Bring your papers, and they will be* examined. False reports le Apporfer on les examiner *Faux ^uruit are* often circulated. W'hat do* they say in England of the Spanish 2 '^fait^cou7'ir Que en Angleterre '^d'' Espagne war ? (I shall have some fruit sent) from the country. — W^e love an amiable ^guerre On nUenverra du fruit campagne woman, we cherish and* adore her. — Somebody told me so. — W'ell ! whoever chair adorer ^ ^a dit '^ '^f Eh bien I ^ told you so was wrong.— Has any body written (to him)?— Every body *a dit '^ V avaii tort ^A-t-il ^ *tcrit Vui believes it.— Nobody (came here) to-day.— We have seen none of his friends. croit le * ^ir^n'estS'enu ami She knows nothing. — Every one has his own* manner of (thinking and acting.) sait maniere penser et d'agir Every country has its laws and customs. — No man is free from error. — Chaque pays loi ses usage exempt erreur OF VERBS. 85 (There was not) a single lady. — Tlie same thing does* not please at all times. — // rCy avait pas seid dame chose plait en temps Many people say so. — He does nothing. — \Vlien we apply ourselves to several ^disent Ve fait on s'appliquer a sciences at once, we seldom succeed in any. Such or such a* thing. a lafais ^rarement ^riushir dans auciin chose Whatsoever merit he may have, he will never succeed. "Whatever ■nitrite sub.pr. ser\'ices you have rendered me, I have been thankful (for them). '— stib.pret. rendus ^ ^ * '^reconnaissant ^e« "Whatever your birth and elevation may be, you ought not to* ^ ^ ^naissance ^ ^votre iltvaiion sub. pr. -elre devoir despise any body. However foolish fashions may be, people follow mtpriser per^onne ^ ^ou *mode sub.pr. "^etre suit them Whatever may happen, give me notice (of it). All the Qiioi qti' siib.pr. ar river donner in^ ^avis ^en ladies were so well (dressed). — Were all their friends there ? — All that imp. mises ^Etaient-ils i 2 a 4^ she saj^s is not true. — Do* not speak ill of others. — (Another) would dit vrai mul nuUe autre personne not have behaved in that manner. They will both come. Either se comporter de manicre "■^tuus les deux ^vieudront * of* you* can render me that service. — Neither of* them* knows ^vous ^pouvez rendre service ^ ^ils ^ne havent what to* do. *qu€ '^faire LESSON XXI. Of Verbs. Verbs are words by which we denote the actions or state of persons or things ; or, again, verbs are words the principal use of ivhich is to signify ajfirmation. Verbs change their forms to agree with their nommatives. Particular attention must, therefore, be paid, when a verb is to be used, to ascertain the number and person of its nominative, that the verb may be made to agree with it. There are five kinds of verbs, namely : — the active^ the passive, the neuter, the reflective, and the unipersonal. Active verbs express an action which an agent, called the nominative or subject, performs on an object or regimen, without the help of a pre- position : as, — Pierre ainie Sophie, Peter loves Sophia. Passive verbs are those of which the nominative or subject is affected, in some particular manner, by an agent : as, — Louise estaimee de Paul, Louisa is loved by Paul. Neuter verbs are of two kinds in French : 1. Those the nominative of which performs an action that either is or can be directed towards an object or term with the help of a preposition : as, — il nuit a ma repuia- 86 OF VERBS. Hon, he injures my reputation. 2. Those which express an action per- formed by their nominative, but which action cannot be directed towards an object, or, in other w^ords, — those which express the state, situation, or manner of being or existence of their nominative or subject : as, — je dors, I sleep ; j^existe, I exist. Reflective verbs express an action that falls on their nominative or subject, which is then represented in its function as object, by one of the governed personal pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous : as, — je me flatte, I flatter myself; tu te fiattes, thou flatterest thyself, &c. Unipersonal verbs, otherwise called impersonal, are verbs which are only used in the third persons singular of their different tenses : as, — ^7 7j a, there is ; il faut, it is necessary ; il importe, it is of importance. Defective verbs are not included in the division of yerhs just given, as they are only those in which certain tenses or persons, not admitted by use, are wanting. Of Number and Persons in Verbs, There are two numbers in verbs as in nouns : the singular and the plural. The singular, when a single person or thing performs the action expressed by the verb : as, — I sing, ye chayite ; thou walkest, tu marches; &c. The plural, when two or more persons or things concur in the same action: as, — we sing, nous chantons ; they sleep, Us dorment. In each number there are three persons : the first, the second, and the third. The first is the person who speaks ; the second, the person spoken to ; and the third, the person spoken of. There are three pronouns to represent these three persons : — I, je ; thou, tu ; he, she, or it, il or elle, for the singular ; we, nous ; ye or you, vous ; they, ils or elles, for the plural; but vous is likewise used for the singular, when referring to one person only, as before explained. All substantives, either common or proper, are of the third person. Observe. — A word is always ascertained to be a verb, when one of the above pronouns can be prefixed to it. Lire is, therefore, a verb ; because we can say : — je lis, tu lis, il ou elle lit, &c. Of Moods. We call moods the different manners of using a verb, in order to express the different affections of our mind, or the various ways in which an action is performed or suffered. A verb may be used in five different manners, namely, — in an indefi- nite, positive, conditional, imperative, and subordinate manner ; which constitute five moods in verbs, called — the infinitive, the indicative, the conditional, the imperative, and the subjunctive. The infinitive is so termed because it expresses a thing or action in an indefinite manner, without any reference to number or person : as, — • parler, to speak ; finir, to finish ; recevoir, to receive. The indicative affirms in a direct, positive, and absolute manner : as, — je connais ces dames, I know these ladies. OF VERBS. 87 The conditional denotes that a thing or action, either would take or would have taken place, depending on a condition : as, — je vous ren- dials service, si je le pouvais, I would render you service, if I could. II serait venu, sHl avail fait beau temps, he would have come, if it had been fine weather. The imperative is used for commanding, exhorting, entreating, or permitting : as, — venez ici, que je vous parle, come here, that I may speak to you. The subjunctive represents a thing under a condition, motive, wish, or supposition, and is dependent on a conjunction : as, — quoiqu'il pleuve, je veux qv'^ils viennent, though it rain, I wish them to come. Of the Tenses or Times. Tenses are the distinctions of time, or, in other words, the different forms which a verb assumes to express the present, past, or future. Tenses may be divided into simple and compound. The simple tenses are those which consist of a single verb : as, — ecrire, to write; j^ecris, I write. The compound consist of two or more verbs, being formed with the different tenses of either the verb avoir, to have, or etre, to be, and the past participle of another verb : as, — j^ai parle a M. C**; I have spoken to Mr. C**. There are six tenses in the infinitive mood : — the present, the pre- terit, the present participle, the present participle compound, the past participle, and the participle future. The indicative has eight tenses : — the present, the imperfect, the pre- terit definite, the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior definite, the pluperfect, the future simple, and the future anterior. The conditional has two : — the present and the past. The imperative has only one tense, which is tiihtr present or future. The subjunctive has four tenses : — the present, the Imperfect, the preterit, ?indi the pluperfect. For a full explanation of the use of the tenses, see page 10 and fol- lowing, in the large octavo Grammar, in two volumes; but for the cases in which the imperfect, and the preterit definite and the indefinite are used, refer to the observations under the tenses of the verb avoir, in this Grammar, pages 89, 90, and 91. Of Conjugations. The act of repeating or writing all the moods, tenses and persons of a verb, according to their regular combination or arrangement, is called conjugating that verb. The verbs which undergo the same variations in all their tenses and persons are said to belong to the same class or conjugation; that is, to be conjugated alike. All the verbs of the French language end, in the present of the infini- tive mood, in one of these four manners : — er, ir, oir, or re : as, — -parler. 88 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. to speak; jinir, to finish ; recevoir, to receive; and entendre, to hear; which constitute four general conjugations, distinguished from each other by their respective termination in the present of the infinitive ; and called the first, the second, the third, and the fourth conjugation. The verbs which follow through all their tenses and persons the varia- tions of the verb, which is given as a model of its conjugation, are called regular ; whereas those that differ in their variations from the given model are irregular. The verbs a?;oi>, to have, and eire, to be, are irregular ; and they are exemplified the first only on account of being much used in the formation of the compound tenses of other verbs. 1. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir, to have, affirmatively. Avoir is an auxiliary verb, when it is used in forming the compound tenses of other verbs : s.s,—j^aijoue, I have played. In other cases, it is an active verb : as, — il a de Vargent, he has money. The pupil is particularly recommended to write, from memory, each of the verbs separately, after having learnt it ; at least, the two auxiliaries avoir and etre ; the four models of the regular conjugations, and the models of reflective verbs ; as also aller, to go, and s'^en aller, to go away. He will thereby acquire a surprising readiness, not only in spelling the verbs, but in using them ; as there is, perhaps, no better remembrancer than the eye. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses, Compound Tenses, PRESENT. PRETERIT. To have, Avoir. To have had. Avoir eu. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PRESENT PART. COMPOUND. Having, Ah'cmt.'-^ Having had, Ayant eu. PAST PARTICIPLE. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Had, Ell, eue ; eiis, cues Being about to have, Devant avoir. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I have, JVu.t I have had, J^ai eu. * Though we write ayant, we pronounce ai-ian, as if it were in English, a-ianj. The same is to be observed in all words in which y is used instead of two i's. f We write fed and pronounceye. CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 89 Thou hast, Tu as.* He has. She has, E//e a. We have, Noiis avons. You have, ^Fbusavez. They have, //* or Elles out. Tl'iOu hast had, Tu as eu. He has had, // a eu. She has had, Elle a eu. We have had. Nous avons eu. You have had, Fous avez eu. They have had, I/s or E/les out eu. IMPERFECT. I had, XTavais.^ Thou hadst, Tu avais. PLUPERFECT. I had had, J'avais eu. Thou hadst had, Tu avais eu. * The second person singular of every tense, except in the imperative mood, is ter- minated with *, in all verbs. The wevhsvou/oi)', pouvoir,va^ou; and prera/oir, however, are excepted, as their first and second persons singular of the present of the indica- tive take an a: at their terminations : as — vouloir,je veux, tu veux ; poucoir.je peux, or hetie):,Je puis, fu peux ; vuloir,je vaux, tu vaux ; prtvaloir,je pi'n'aux, tu privaux. f The second person plural of every tense, in all verbs, is terminated with s or z : it is terminated with z, when the e, which immediately precedes, is pronounced with the sound of a short in English, and with * when the e is not pronounced at all : as — vous avez, vous aimez ; vous eutes, vous ai mates, vous re(^xdes, &c. Observe. — The preterit indefinite is generally employed in French,- whether the preterit or compound of the present be used in English, Avhen we speak of some action or thing that has been done, or has happened, in a time which is not yet completely over : the time is considered as not being completely over, in French, when one of the demonstrative pronouns ce, cct, cette, ces, this, that, these, those, either is or can be used before it : as — he paid us this morning, il nous a payes ce matin. I have seen him this week, this month, this year, y^ /'ai vu cette semaine, ce mois, cette annee, &c.: in these sentences, the preterit imh'fnite is used, because ce matin, cette semaine, ce mois, cette annte, are considered as parts of a time which is not entirely elapsed. The preterit indefinite is also used, in French, when mention is made of an action or thing which has taken place in a time that is not specified, although quite past; in this case, the compound of the present is- likewise employed in English: as — he has travelled much, il a heaitcoup voyage. I have seen him once, jiV Pai vu unefois. X J' avais is pronounced /ai-e*, as if it were in English — Tahvay. § Cases in which the Imperfect is used in French. General Rule. — The imperfect is used, in French, to represent the actions, inclinations, or qualifications ; — the character, condition, or situation of persons and things, at some particular time which is past, whether it be specified or not : as, — when I was taking an airing j^esterday, I saw a very fine lady, whose features, complexion, and dress, united all the graces of Venus, and whose hair, flowing in wavy ringlets down her shoulders, was tied with a beautiful riband ; comme je me •pTomenaiis hier,je vis une charmante dame, dont les traits, le teint, /7ja6iV, reunissaient toutes les graces de Fenus, et dont les longs cheveux, qui descendaient en boucles ondoyantes sur ses epaules, etaient attaches avec un superbe ruban. 90 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. He had, He had had, // avail. II avait eu. She had, She had had, Elle avait. Rile avait eu. We had, We had had, Noiis avians. Nous avians eu. You had. You had had, Vous aviez. Fous aviez eu. They had. They had had, lis or Elles avaient. lis or Elles avaient eu. The imperfect \s also used: 1st, in mentioning the habits, customs and manners, "whether of private individuals or of nations : as — his father went every day to the play, son pere allait tous /g-s jours a la comedie. We played at cards every evening, wo?/« jouions aux cartes tous les soirs. Running, swimming, hunting, were the favourite diversions of the ancient Romans, whilst the women and the old men were intrusted with the domestic affairs ; la course, la nage, la chasse etaient les amusemens favoris des anciens Romains, tandis que les femmes et les vieillards etaient charges des sains du menage. 2. In describing the character of nations, whether ancient or modern, or of per- sons that are dead, though in some cases the preterit definite and the indefinite are also used : as — the Romans were very powerful, les Romains etaient tres-puissans. Napoleon was a great general, Napoleon etSiit un g7'and general. 3. In giving the character or describing the qualifications of persons who are still living ; and, in this case, if a vague and undetermined period of time be expressed, the preterit indefinite may also be used : as — this lady was very beautiful in her youth, cette dame etait trts-belle dans sajeunesse ; or, a ete trts-belle, Sec. 4. When the present participle of a verb is or can be used with was or were, in English, instead of the preterit : as — while they endeavoured to. . . . ; that is, — while they were endeavouring, ta7idis qu''ils iiichaieni de, &c. 5. To denote things or actions which are often repeated : as — she was always in such a hurry, elle etait toujours si pressee. 6. The imperfect is likewise used to express any circumstance which happened to take place at the same time when an accident, fact, event, or action, occurred. The verb denoting the fact, event, action, or accident, in the second part of the sentence, is put in the preterit definite, if we allude to a thing which happened in a time now quite elapsed; and, in the indefinite, if the time be not yet quite elapsed. The imper- fect expresses then a present with respect to something past : as — je passais qvand vous tombdtes, I was passing by as you fell ; alluding to a time quite past ; but je passais quand vous etes tomht, I was passing by when you fell, refers to a time that is not yet quite elapsed ; to-day, for instance. . The sentence frequently begins by the fact, event, action, or accident, and finishes by the circumstance which took place at the same time : as — il m^appela lorsque je passaxs, he called me as I was passing by. If we wish to express two circumstances which happened to take place at the same time, they must be both put in the imperfect : as — vous dansiez lorscpie je chun- iais, you were dancing when I was singing. Lorsque j'' etais a la campagne,je me pro- menais tous les jours, when I was in the country, I took a walk every day. Finally. — The imperfect is sometimes used after «, (if,) to denote a condition or supposition : as — si je cotinaissais vas intentions, je les executerais, if I knew your intentions, I would fulfil them. // ne serait pas si miserable, s'il faisait plus d'' atten- tion a ses affaires, he would not be so miserable, if he paid more attention to his business. CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 91 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. I had^ I had had, */'«/*.f feus eu. Thou hadst. Thou hadst had, Tu eits. Tu eus eu. He had. He had had, // eid. II eut eu. She had, She had had, El/e eut. Elfe eut eu. We had, " We had had. Nous eum€S.\ Nous eumes\ eu. You had. You had had, Fbus elites. Fous eutes eu. They had. They had had, lis or Elles eurent. lis or Elles eurent eu. FUTURE SIMPLE. FUTURE ANTERIOR, I shall have, I shall have had, J^amrti.^ J^aurai eu. Thou wilt have, Thou wilt have had, Tu auras. Tu auras eu. He will have, He will have had, // aura. II aura eu. * Cases in which the Preterit Dejinite is used in French. Gene R AT, Rule. — The preterit definite is used in French to express real definite facts or actions of short duration, and entirely done with, finished, completely over, and that in a time past, at the distance at least of a day from the time in which we speak : as — he fell dead yesterday, il tornba mort hier. The verb tomba mort is in the preterit definite, because it expresses an action of short duration, which is done with, finished, completely over, and which took place in a time quite elapsed. This tense is particularly employed in narrations, whether historical or of daily events. Observe. — The definite and indefinite preterits are sometimes indifferently used, in familiar conversation, especially when we speak of common events, in the general occurrences of life, though the time may be specified and entirely elapsed : as — I supped with him lavSt night, ye soupai oxfai soupe hier an soir avec lui. f Teus is pronounced J'^<. ;j: A circumflex accent (') is required over the last vowel of the last syllable but one, in the first and second persons plural of the definite and anterior definite pre- terits of the indicative, in all verbs, as above. ^ The following manners of expression being very much used, require particular attention : they are formed with the present or imperfect of the verb devoir, in French, and the present or imperfect of the verb to be, in English, followed, in either language, by the infinitive of a verb. 1. I am to have, 2. I was to have, Je dois avoir. Je devais avoir. Thou art to have. Thou wast to have, Tu dois avoir. Tu devais avoir. He is to have. He was to have, // doit avoir. II devaii avoir. 92 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. She will have, El/e aura. We shall have, Noi/s aurons. You will have, Vous aurez. They will have, J Is or Elks auront. PRESENT. I should have, J^aiiruis. Thou wouldst have, Tu aurais. He would have, // aurait. She v/ould have, El7e aurait. We should have. Nous aurions. You would have, Vbus auriez. They would have, lis or Elles auraient. She will have had, Elle aura eu. We shall have had. Nous aurons eu. You will have had, Vous aurez eu. They will have had, //* or Elles auront eu. CONDITIONAL MOOD. I should have had, J''aurais eu.''- Thou v/ouldst have had, Tu aurais eu. He would have had, // aurait eu. She would have had, Elle aurait eu. We should have had. Nous aurions eu. You would have had, Vous auriez eu. They wovdd have had, lis or Elles auraient eu. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. No First Person in the Singular. Have (thou), Aie. Let him have, Quil ait.\ She is to have, She was to have, Elle doit avoir. Elle devait avoir. We are to have. We were to have, Noiis devons avoir. Nous devious avoir. You are to have. You were to have, Vous devez avoir. Vous deiiez avoir. They were to have, lis or Elles devaient avoir. * There are cases in which we also use feusse eu, tu cusses eu, il or elle exit eu ; nous eussions eu, vous eussiez eu, ils or elles eussent eu, for the conditional past. A circumflex accent is then required over the u, which precedes the t, in the third per- son singular. f We write quHl ait, and not qu^il aie, (as also qum soit, and not qu^il soie, in the third persons singular of the imperative and of the present of the subjunctive of the verb etre ;) but these are exceptions to the general rule, which requires the third person singular of the imperative, and that of the present of the subjunctive, to be terminated with e mute, in all verbs. They are to have, Ils or Elles doivent avoir. CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 93 Let her have. Let us have, Have (ye o?- you), Let them have. Qu'elle ait. Ayons. Ayez. Quails or Qiiel/es aient SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. That I have or may have, Quej ^aie. That thou mayst have, Qi^e til (ties. That he may have, Qu'i/ ait. Tliat she may have, Qit'elle ait. That we may have. Que nous ayons. That you may have, Que vans ayez. That they may have, Qu'ils or Qu^elles aient. PRETERIT. That I may have had, Quej ^aie eu. That thou mayst have had. Que tu aies eu. That he may have had, Qu^i/ ait eu. That she may have had, Qi^elle ait eu. That we may have had. Que nous ayons eu. That you may have had, Que vous ayez eu. That they may have had, Quails or Qi^elles aient eu. [M PERFECT. That I might have, Que j^eusse. Thai thou mightst have, Que tu eusses. That he might have, Qu'il eiit:'^ Tliat she might have, Qu'elle eut. That we might have. Que nous eussions. Tliat you might have, Q^/evous eussiez. That they might have, Qu^i/s or Qitelles eussent. PLUPERFECT. That I might have had, Quej^eusse eu. That thou mightst have had. Que tu eusses eu. That he might have had, Qu'i/ eut * eu. That she might have had, Qit'elle eut eu. That we might have had. Que nous eussions eu. That you might have had. Que vous eussiez eu. That they might have had, Qii'ils or Qu'elles eussent eu. 2. Conjugation of Avoir, to have, negatively. A verb is used negatively when the word not is employed with it in English. Not is expressed in French by ne pas : both these words pre- cede the verb in the present of the infinitive ; but, in any other tense, either simple or compound, ne, or n\ if the verb begins with a vowel or A mute, is placed before the verb in a simple tense, and j9a-s after it; * A circumflex accent {") is required over the last vowel which comes before the final /, in the third person singular of the imperfect and of the pluperfect of the sub- junctive, in all verbs. 94 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. and ne or 7i' before the auxiliary in a compound one, with pas after it, that is to say, between the auxiliary and the participle, as may be seen in the following example. If any pronoun should occur as the object of the verb, it must be placed between ne and the verb in a simple tense, and between ne and the auxiliary in a compound one. Not is also expressed by ne point with a verb, as may be seen on the subject of the negations. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Not to have, Ne pas avoir. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Not having, Nayant pas. PAST PARTICIPLE. Had, Ei<, eue : ens, eues. Compound Tenses. PRETERIT. Not to have had, N avoir pas eu. PRESENT PART. COMPOUND. Not having had, Nayant pas eu. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Not being about to have, Ne (levant pas avoir. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I have not, Je tHai pas. Thou hast not, Tu n^as pas. He has not, // «'rt pas. She has not, Elle n^a pas. We have not. Nous navons pas. Yo\i have not^ Vous rHavez pas. They have not, lis or Elles ri^ont pas. IMPERFECT. I had not, Je n^avais pas. Thou hadst not, Tu n^avais pas. He had not, // n^ avail pas. She had not, Elle if avail pas. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I have not had, Je n'ai pas eu. Thou hast not had. Tit n'as pas eu. He has not had, // r^a pas eu. She has not had, Elle ?«'a pas eu. We have not had. Nous n''avons pas eu. You have not had, Vous n'avez pas eu. They have not had, lis or Elles riont pas eu. PLUPERFECT. I had not had, Je n^avais pas eu. Thou hadst not had, Tti ri'avais pas eu. He had not had, // ti' avail pas eu. She had not had, Elle 7t' avail pas eu. CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 95 We had not, Nous n' avians pas. You had not, P'oi/s n^aviez pas. They had not, lis or Elfes n'' aval en f pas. PRETERIT DEFINITE. I had not, Je 7i'eus pas. Thou hadst not, Tu ?i'eus pas. He had not, // n''eid pas. She had not, E/le rCeiit pas. We had not. Nous li'eames pas. You had not, P^ous iCeutes pas. They had not, lis or Elles n^eurent pus. FUTURE SIMPLE. I shall not have, */e )iau)'ai pas. Thou wilt not have, Tu ti' auras pas. He will not have, // ytaura pas. She will not have, Elle rCaura pas. We had not had, Noiis n' avians pas eu. > You had not had, Vous n^avisz pas eu. They had not had, lis or Elles n^avaient pas eu. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. I had not had, ^ Je 7i^eus pas eu. Thou hadst not had, Tu ii'eus pas eu. He had not had, // n^eut pas eu. She had not had, Elle n'eut pas eu. We had not had, Nous 71^ e limes pas eu. You had not had, Fous 71' elites pas eu. They had not had, lis or Elles 7i^eut'ent pas eu. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall not have had, Je n''au7'ai pas eu. Thou wilt not have had, Tu 7i'au)'as pas eu. He will not have had, // 71 aura pas eu. She will not have had, Elle /i\iura pas eu. * 1. I am not to have, Je 7ie dois pas avoir. Thou art not to have, Tu 7ie dois pas avoir. He is not to have, // ne doil pas avoir. She is not to have, Elle 7ie doit pas avoir. We are not to have, Nous ne devo7is pas avoir. Ye or you are not to have, Foits 7ie devez pas avoir. They are not to have, lis or Elles ne doivent vas avoir. * 2. 1 was not to have, Je ne devais pas avoir. Thou wast not to have, Tu 7ie devai'i pas avoir. He was not to have, // ne devait pas avoir. She was not to have, Elle ne devait pas avoir. We were not to have. Nous 7ie devions pas avoir. Ye or you were not to have, fous 7ie deviez pas avoir. They were not to have, lis or Elles ne devaient pas avoir ^ 96 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. We shall not have, NoziS n^ain'ons pas. You Avill not have, Vmis rHaurez pas. They will not have, lis or Elles n'auront pas. We shall not have had, Nous ri'aurons pas eu. You will not have had, Vovs n^aurez pas eu. They will not have had, Ih or Elles iCauront pas eu. PRESENT. I should not have, Je rHaurah pas. Thou wouldst not have, Tu ri'aurais pas. He would not have, // n^aurait pas. She would not have, Elle ii'aurait pas. We should not have. Nous navrions pas. You would not have, Fbus nauriez pas. They wovdd not have, J/s or El^es ?i'auraient pas CONDITIONAL MOOD. PAST. I should not have had, Je ii'aurais pas eu. Thou wouldst not have had, Tu Ii'aurais pas eu. He would not have had, // n^oiti'ait pas eu. She would not have had, Elle n'aurait pas eu. We should not have had, Noi/s 7tauno7is pas eu. You would not have had, Vous iCauriez pas eu. They would not have had. Us or Elles i{ auraient pas eu. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. Have not (thou). Let him not have. Let her n(»t have. Let us not have, Have not (ye or you), Let them not have. Naie pas. Qu'il 71'ait pas. Qu'elle n^axt pas. Nayo7iS pas. N'ayez pas. QuHls or Qu' elles 7i^aieht pas. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. That I have not or may not have. Que je fi'aie pas. That thou mayst not have, Qtfe tu n'aies pas. That he may not have, Qu''il 71'ait pas. That she may not have, Qii^elle 71^ ait pas. That we may not have. Que nous i^aijons pas. That you may not have. Que vous Tt'ayez pas. That they may not have, QuHls or Qu^ elles n'aieut pas. PRETERIT. That I may not have had, Queje 7i'aie pas eu. That thou mayst not have had, Que. tu n'aies pas eu. That he may not have had, Qu'il 72^ ait pas eu. That she may not have had, Qu'elle 71'ait pas eu. That we may not have had. Que nous n^ayons pas eu. That you may not have had, Q^,'e vous 7i^ayez pas eu. That they may not have had, Qii'ils or Qu elles 7i\iie7U pas eu. CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 97 IMPERFECT. That I might not have, Queje ti'euitse pas. That thou mightst not have, Que tu n^eusses pas. That he might not have, QWii rCeut pas. That she might not have, Qu'elle rHexd pas. That we might not have. Que nous ii^eussions pas. That you might not have. Que voiis n'eussiez pas. That they might not have. Quails or Qu'elles rCeussent pas. PLUPERFECT. That I might not hare had, Queje n'eusse pas eu. "That thou mightst not have had. Que tu Ti^eusses pas eu. That he might not have had, Quil ?i'eut pas eu. That she might not have had, Qi^elle 71! exit pas eu. That we might not have had. Que nous n'eussions pas eu. That you might not have had. Que vous Ti' eussiez pas eu. That they might not have had, Quails or Qiielles rCeussent pas eu. 3. Conjugation of Avoir, to have, interrogatively. To use a verb interrogatively, or to ask questions, it is necessary to place the pronoun which serves as nominative to the verb, after the verb in a simple tense, and after the auxiliary in a compound one. Both the verb and pronoun are united by a hyphen in French, and when a verb ends with a vowel in the third person singular of any of its tenses, a t, with a hyphen on each side of it, is put between the verb and the pro- noun, in order to avoid the harsh sound which would otherwise result from the meeting of two vowels. A verb can only be used interroga- tively, and interrogatively and negatively, in French, in the different tenses of the indicative and conditional moods, as shown hereafter. INDICATIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. H-.ye I, Ai-je ? Hast thou, As-tu ? Has he, A-t-il ? Has she, A-t-eUe ? Have Ave, Avons-nous ? Have you, Avez-vous ? Have they, Ont-ils or Ont-el/es ? Compound Tenses. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. Have I had, Ai-je eu ? Hast thou had, As-iu eu ? Has he had, A-t-il eu ? Has she had, A-t-elle eu ? Have we had, Avons-nous eu ? Have you had, Avez^mis eu ? Have they had, 07it-ils or Ont-elles eu ? 98 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. IMPERFECT. Had I, Avcds-je ? Hadst thou, Avais-tii ? Had he, Avait-il ? Had she, Avcdt-elle 9 Had we, Avions-nous f " Had you, Aviezrvoits ? • Had they, Avcdent-ils or Avment-eiles ? PRETERIT DEFINITE. Had I, Eus-Je ? Hadst thou, Etis-iu ? Had he, Etfi-d/ ? Had she, Eut-elle ? Had we, Eumes-nous ? Had you, Eutes-vous ? Had they, Eurent-ils or Eurent-elles 9 FUTURE SIMPLE. Shall I have, '^Aurcd-je ? PLUPERFECT. Had I had, Avcds-je eu ? Hadst thou had, Avais-tu eu f Had he had, Avait-il eu ? Had she had, Avait-elle eu 9 Had we had, Avio/is-nous eu? Had you had, Aviez-vous eu 9 Had they had, Avcdent-ils eu or Avcdent-elles eu 9 PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. Had I had, Eus-je eu 9 Hadst thou had, Eus-tu eu 9 Had he had, Eut-il eu ? Had she had, Eut-elle eu 9 Had we had, Eumes-nous eu 9 Had you had, Eutes-vouz eu ? Had they had, Eurent-ils eu or Eurent-elles eu 9 FUTURE ANTERIOR. Shall I have had, Aurcd-je eu ? * ] . Am I to have, Dois-je avoir ? - Art thou to have, Dois-tu avoir 9 Is he to have, Doit-il avoir 9 Is she to have, Doit-elle avoir 9 Are we to have, Devons-not/s avoir 9 Are ye or you to have, Devez-vous avoir 9 Are they to have, DoivenUils or elles avoir 9 2. Was I to have, Devais-je avoir 9 Wast thou to have, Devais-tu avoir 9 Was he to have, Devait-il avoir 9 Was she to have, Devait-elle avoir 9 Were we to have, Devions-nous avoir 9 Were ye or you to hare, Deviez-vous avoir 9 Were they to have, Devaient-ih or eil€» avoir f CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 99 Wilt thou have, Auras-tu ? Will he have, Aura-t-il ? Will she have, Aura-t-elle ? Shall we have, Atirom-nous ? Will you have, Aurez-voiis ? Will they have, Auront-ils or Auront-elles ? Wilt thou have had , Auras-tu eu ? Will he have had, Aura-t-il eu ? Will she have had, Aura-t-elle eu 9 Shall we have had, Aurotvi-Twm eu ? Will you have had, Aurez-vous eu ? Will they have had, Auront-ils eu or Auront-elles eu 9 CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT, PAST. Should I have, Aurais-je ? Wouldst thou have, Aurais-iu ? Would he have, Aitrait-il ? , Would she have, Aurait-elle ? Should we have, Aur ions-nous ? Would you have, Auriez-vous ? Would they have, Auraietii-ils or Auraient-elles ? Should I have had, Aurais-je eu ? Wouldst thou have had^- Aurais-tu eu ? Would he have had, Aurait-il eu ? Would she have had, Aurait-elle eu ? Should we have had^ Au7'iofis-7ious eu ? Would you have had, Auriez-vous eu ? Would they have had, Auraient-ils eu or Auraient-elles eu ? 4. Conjugation of Avoir, to have, interrogatively and negatively. When a verb is used interrogatively and negatively in French, the same method is followed as when it is used interrogatively, except that ne or ti' is placed before the verb in a simple tense, with pas after it, and ne or n' before the auxiliary in a compound one, with pas after it, that is, between the auxiliary and the participle. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. Have I not, N'ai-Je pas ? Hast thou not, N^as-tu pas ? Has he not, N'a-t-ilpasf INDICATIVE MOOD. Compound Tenses. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. Have I not had, N^ai-je pas eu ? Hast thou not had, A 'as-/2/ pas eu f Has he not had, N^a-t-il pas eu? F 2 100 CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HA.VE. Has she not, N^a-t-elle pas ? Have we not, N'avons-nous pas ? Have you not, N^avez-vous pas ? Have they not, N'ont-ils pas or N'ont-elles pas'? IMPERFECT. Had I not, ISPavais-je pas ? Hadst thou not, N'avais-tu pas f Had he not, N'avait-il pas ? Had she not, N^avdt-elle pas ? Had we not, JVavions-noi/s pas ? Had you not, N'aviez-vous pas ? Had they not, N^avaient-ils pas or N'avaient- elles pas f TRETERIT DEFINITE. Had I not, N^eus-Je pas ? Hadst thou not, N^eus-tu pas ? Had he not, N'eut-il pas ? Had she not, JVetd-elle pas ? Had we not,' N'eumes-nous pas ? Had you not, N^edtesoom pas 9 Had they not, N^eurent-ils pas or N'eLrent-eiles pas ? FUTURE SIMPLE. Shall I not have, * IS^aurai-je pas ? Has she not had, N''a-t'e?/e pas eii ? Have we not had, N'avoiis-nous pas eu ? Have you not had, N'avcz-vous pas eu ? Have they not had, N^ont-ils pas eu or N'ont-elles pas eu? PLUPERFECT. Had I not had, N^avais-j'e j}o.s eu ? Hadst thou not had, N^avais-tu pas eu? Had he not had, N^avcdt-il pas eu 2- Had she not had, N^avait-elle pas eu ? Had we not had, N'av{ons-7wus pas eu ? Had you not had, N'aviez-vous pas eu ? Had they not had, N'avaient-ils pas eu or N'avaient- ellespas eu ? PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. Had I not had, N'eus-je pas eu ? Hadst thou not had, ■ N^eus-tu pas eu f Had he not had, N'eift-il pas eu? Had she not had, N'euf-e/^e pas eu ? Had we not had, N''eumes-nous pas eu ? Had you not had, N'eutes-vous pas eu ? Had they not had, N"* eure7it-ils pas eu or N^eurent- elles pas e« ? FUTURE ANTERIOR. Shall I not have had, N^aurai-je pas eu ? 1. Am I not to have, Ne dois-je pas avoir ? 2. Was I not to have, Ne clevais-je pas avoh^ ? CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE. 101 Wilt thou not have, ^^ auras- f upas? Will he not have, N'aura-t-il pas f Will she not have, N'aui-a-t-elle pas ? Shall we not have, N'aurons-7ious pas ? Will you not have, N'aurez-vous pas ? Will they not have, N''auront-ils pas or N^au?'oni- elles pas ? Wilt thou not have had, N^auras-tu pas eu ? Will he not have had, N'aura-t-il pas eu ? Will she not have had, ^aura-t-elle pas eu ? Shall we not have had, N'aurons-iious pas eu f Will you not have had, N'aarez-vous pas eu ? Will they not have had, N^oitront-ils pas eu or N'auront' elles pas eu ? CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. PAST. Should I not have, JVaurais-Je pas ? Wouldst thou not have, N^aurais-fu pas ? Would he not have, N'aurait-il pas ? Would she not have, Naurait-elle pas ? Should we not have, JVoioions-nous pas ? Would you not have, N' auriez-vous pas f Would they not have, N'auraient-ils pas or N'a-uraieat- elles pas ? Should I not have had, N'aurais-je pas eu ? Wouldst thou not have had, N' aurais-tu pas eu ? Would he not have had, JSPdurait-il pas eu ? Would she not have had, Wauraxt-elle pas eu ? Should we not have had, N^oid-'mis-nous pas eu f Would you not have had, N' auriez-vous pas eu ? Would they not have had, N'auraient-ils pas eu or N'^ parle. They had spoken or been speaking, lis or £//es avaient parlk. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. I had spoken, J'eus parlk. Thou hadst spoken, Tu eus parlk. He had spoken, // eut parlk. She had spoken, Elle eut parlk. We had spoken. Nous eumes parlk. You had spoken, Vous eutes parlk. They had spoken, lis or Elles eurent parlk. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have spoken, J'aurai parlk. Thou wilt have spoken, Tu auras parlk. * 1. I am to speak, Je dots parler. Thou art to speak, Tu dots parler. He is to speak, // doit parler. She is to speak, Elle doit parler. We are to speak. Nous devons parler. You are to speak, Fous devez parler. They are to speak, lis or Elles doivent parler. 2. I was to speak, Je devais parler. Thou wast to speak, Tu devais parler. He was to speak, // devait parler. She was to speak, Elle devait parler. We were to speak. Nous devious parler. You were to speak, Fous deviez parler. They were to speak, Jls or Elles devaient parler. 110 FIRST CONJUGATION: PARLER, TO SPEAK. He will speak, // parleva. She will speak, El/e parlexa. We shall speak, Nozts par iex OTIS. You will speak, Fbzis par/erez. They will speak, Jh or E//es parlexoni. He will have spoken, // aura parle. She will have spoken, £l/e aura parlk. We shall have spoken. Nous aurons parlk. You will have spoken, Vous aurez parlk. They will have spoken. Us or Elles onront parlk. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. I should speak, Je parlerais. Thou wouldst speak, Tu parlerais. He would speak, II parlevsiii. She would speak, Eile parleva.ii. We should speak. Nous parlerions. You would speak, Foifs parleriez. They would speak, Us or Elles joar/eraient. PAST. I should have spoken, J\mrais or J^eiisse parle. Thou wouldst have spoken, Tu aurais or Tu eusses parlk. He would have spoken, // aurait or // eut parle. She would have spoken, Elle aurait or Elle cut parlk. We should have spoken, Nous atirions or Nous eussions parlk. You would have spoken, P'ous aunez or Fmis eussiez parlk. They would have spoken, lis or Elles auraiejit or lis or Elles eussent parlk. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT Speak (thou), Let him speak, Let her speak. Let us speak, Speak (ye or you). Let them speak. OR FUTURE. Parle. QuHl parle. QiCelle parle. Par Ions. Parlez. Quails or Qu' elles patient SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. That I may speak, Que je parle. That thou mayst speak. Que tu paries. That he may speak, QuHl parle. That she may speak, Qu^elle parle. That we may speak, Qi(€ nous parl'xoxis. PRETERIT. That I may have spoken, Quej^aie parlk. That thou mayst have spoken, Que tu aies pay-Ik. That he may have spoken, Qu''il ait parlk. That she may have spoken, Qii'elle ait parlk. That we may have spoken. Que no/Its ayons parlk. FIRST CONJUGATION: PARLER, TO SPEAK. Ill That you may speak. Que vous par /iez. That they may speak, Qu'ils or Qif'elles parl^ni. IMPERFECT. That I might speak. Que je parlsisse. That thou mightst speak, Qi/e tu par^asses. That he might speak, Qu^il pariat. That she might speak, Qu'e//e parikt. That we might speak. Que nous ;)ar/assions. That you might speak. Que vous /jor/assiez. That they might speak, Quails or Qu^e/les parlassent. That you may have spoken. Que vous ayez par/e. That they may have spoken, QuHis or Qu'ei/es cdent parlk. PLUPERFECT. That I might have spoken. Que j'eusse parle. That thou mightst have spoken, Que tu eusses par/e. That he might have spoken, Qu'il eut parlk. That she might have spoken, Qu'e/le eut par/e. That we might have spoken. Que nous eusiions par/e. That you might have spoken, Que vous eussiez par/e. That they might have spoken, Qu'i/s or Qu^e//es eussent parle. The two following additional tenses, which may be termed fast just elapsed, and past elapsed before another thing or action took place, require particular attention. 1. The past just e/apsed is used to denote a thing or action which has just been done ; it is Englished hy the present of the indicative of the verb to fiave, with the adverb ji'm*/, and the past participle of another verb : as — I have just spo/ien ; she has just read; &c. 2. The past e/apsed before anot/ier thing or action too/t p/ace, denotes that a thing or action had just been done when another took place: it is formed in English by the imperfect of the verh^ have, Avith the advexh just, and, as above, the past participle of another verb : as — Ihadjustspo/ien; f/iou hadst just spo/ien ; &c. Have just is expressed in French by the present of the indicative of the verb venir, and had just by the imperfect of the same verb ; de is put immediately after the person of the verb venir which is used, and the succeeding past participle is placed in the present of the infinitive, as follows : — 2. PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE, been speaking, 1. PAST JUST ELAPSED. I have just spoken or been speaking, Je viens de par/er. Thou hast just spoken or been speaking, Tu viens de par/er. He has just spoken or been speaking, // vient de par/er. She has just spoken or been speaking, El/e vient de par/er. We have just spoken or been speaking. Nous venous de par/er. You have just spoken or been speaking, Vous venez de par/er. I had just spoken or Je venais de par/er. Thou hadst just spoken or been speaking, Tu venais de par/er. He had just spoken or been speaking, // venait de par/er. She had just spoken or been speaking, E//e venait de parler. We had just spoken or been speaking. Nous venions de par/er. You had just spoken or been speaking, Fous veniez de par/er. They have just spoken or been speaking. They had just spoken or been speaking, I/s or E//es viennent de par/er. J/s or Elles venaient de par/er. 112 OBSERVATIONS ON THE VERBS ENDING Particular Observations on the Verbs which end in the Present of the Infinitive in — ayer, eyer, oyer, uyer, cer, e'er, ger, ier, eler, eter and uer. 1 . Verbs in ayer, eyer, oyer and uyer : as, — payer, to pay ; grasseyer, to lisp ; nettoyer, to clean ; essuyer, to wipe ; &c. The y of the termination of the present of the infinitive mood in these verbs is changed into i, in the tenses in which y would occur before e, es,OY entmwto.. This takes place, 1. In the three persons singular, and in the third person plural, of the present of the indicative : as, — payer, je paie, iu paies, il ou elle paie, lis ou elles paient : 2. In all the persons of both the future and conditional simple : as, — je paierai, tu paieras, &c., and Je paierais, tu paierais, &c. 3. In the second and third persons singular, and in the third plural of the imperative : as, — paie, qu'il ou qu^elle paie, quails ou qu^elles paient. 4. In the three persons lingular, and in the third plural of the present of the subjunctive : as, — que je paie, que tu paies, qu^il ou qu'elle paie, quails ou qu* elles paient ; and not — je paye, tu payes, &c. But the y is preserved before any other termination than e, es, or ent mute : as, — nous payons, vous payez, &c. In the above verbs, and in all those of which the present participle ends in yant: as, — croire, croyant ; voir, voyant ; fuir, fuyant ; s'^asseoir, s^asseyant; &c., both a y and an z are required in the two first persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and of the present of the subjunctive : as, — nous payions, vous payiez ; nous croyions, vous croyiez ; que nous payions, que vous payiez ; que nous croyions, que vous croyiez ; &c. What has just been said with reference to the verb payer is applicable to the verbs grasseyer, nettoyer, essuyer, and, in general, to all those which are terminated, in the present of the infinitive mood, with eyer, oyer, and uyer. 2. In verbs in cer : as, — commencer, to begin, &c. — a cedilla is required under the c in those tenses in which it occurs before a or o, in order to preserve its soft pronunciation of s : as, — commenpant ; nous commenpons ; &c. 3. In verbs in eer : as, — agreer, to accept of; &c. — an e only is used in the tenses in which the first letter of the different terminations is either a, o or i : as, — agrean^, nous agreo^i^-, vous SigTtiez, &c. ; but when the first letter is not one of these three vowels, the two e's of the infini- tive are preserved : as j^agreerais, tu agreerais ; &c. The past parti- ciple is spelt with three e's, in the feminine : thus, — agreee. 4. In verbs in ger : as, — manger, to eat ; &c. — the e of the infinitive is kept after g in the tenses in which g would be followed by a or o, in order to preserve its soft pronunciation of/: as, — mangeant ; nous mangeons ; &c., and not — mangant, nous mangons. m—AYER, EVER, OYER, UYER, &c. 113 5. In verbs in ier : as, — prier, to pray; etudier, to study, &c. — two i's must be used in the two first persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and of the present of the subjunctive ; that is, the i which immediately precedes the termination er in the present of the infinitive, and that belonging to the plural terminations — ions, iez, of the imper- fect of the indicative and of the present of the subjunctive : as, — nous priionSj vous priiez ; que nous etudiionSy que vous etudiiez ; &c. 6. In verbs in eler and eter : as, — appeler, to call ; jeter, to throw ; &c- — the / and the t are generally doubled before e, es, or cnt mute : as, — j'appelle, tu appelles, il ou elle appelle. Us ou elles appellent ; — je Jette, tu jettes,il ou clle jette. Us on elles jettent ; &c. But these letters are not doubled before any other termination : thus we write — nous appelonSj vous appelez, &c., and nous jetons^ vous jetez, &c. The following verbs : — bouri'eler, to torment, to rack ; congeler, to congeal : deceler, to detect ; degeler, to thaw : geler, to freeze ; har- celer, to teaze, to torment ; peler, to peal ; rec'eler, to secrete ; regeler, to freeze again ; achetet\ to buy; colleter, to collar; coqueter, to coquet; decolletei\ to make bare, to uncover the neck ; etiqueter, to ticket ; suracheter, to overbuy ; trompeter, to trumpet ; must however be ex- cepted from the above rule, as, instead of doubling the / or t in the tenses in which these letters come before e, es, or ent mute, a grave accent is used over the e which precedes them : as, — U gele^ it freezes ; U gelera, it will freeze ; U degelc, it thaws ; U degelera, it will thaw ; j'achete, I buy; tu achetes, il ou clle achete ; Us ou elles achetent ; &c., and not il gelle, il degelle, j'achette, tu achettes, &c. In verbs ending in ecer, emer, ener, ever, evrer : as, — depdcer, to carve ; semer, to sow ; mener, to take, to lead ; achever, to finish ; sewer y to wean ; a grave accent is likewise used over the e which pre- cedes c, m, n, or r, before e, es, or ent mute, instead of doubling these consonants : as, — je mene, tu mmes, il mene. Us ou elles menent ; je meneraiy tu meneras, &c. ; je menerais, tu rnenerais, &c. ; and not je menne, tu mennes, &c. Verbs ending in ebrer ; as celebrer, to celebrate ; ecer, as rapiecer, to piece ; echer, as lecher, to lick ; eder, as posseder, to possess ; egler, as regler, to regulate ; egner, as regner, to reign ; egrer, as reintegrer, to reintegrate ; eguer, as alleguer, to allege ; eler, as reveler, to reveal ; emer, as blasphemer, to blaspheme ; e7ier, as aliener, to alienate ; equer, as hypothequer, to mortgage ; erer, as esperer, to hope ; ete?', as inquieter, to make uneasy ; etrer, as penetrer, to penetrate ; have their acute accent which precedes the first consonant of the last syllable in the infinitive, changed into a grave one, before e, es, or ent mute : as, — esperer, j^espere, tu esperes, il espere. Us ou elles esperent ; j^esps- rerai, tu esperer as, &c. ; j^ esperer ais, tu esperer ais, &c. ; que j^ espere, que tu esperes, &c. 7. In verbs in ouer and uer : as, — jouer, to play; contribuer, to contribute, &c. — a diaeresis is required over the i, in the terminations of 114 SECOND CONJUGATIOI^f : FINIR, TO FINISH. the two first persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and of the present of the subjunctive : as, — nous jouions, vous jou'iez ; que nous contrihuions, que vous contribu'iez. The neuter verb puer, to stink, is only used in the present of the infinitive, as likewise in the present, imperfect and future of the indica- tive, and in the conditional : as, — puer, je pue, tu pues, il pue. Us ou elles puent ; &c. A diaeresis ( " ) is required over the e, in the verb arguer, in the tenses in which e is mute : as, — j^ argue, tu argues, il argue, Us ou elles arguent ; j^arguerai, tu argueras, &c. ; j^arguerais, tu ar- guerais, &c. When, in verbs of the first conjugation, the termination er of the present of the infinitive is preceded by another vowel, as in the verbs prier, to pray ; jouer, to play; avouer, to confess; &c., the e of the termination may be preserved or suppressed, in poetry, in the future and conditional ; if it be suppressed, a circumflex accent is put over the vowel preceding it : as, — je jouer ai o\i jour ai ; j^ avouer ai ou avourai ; j^arguerai ou argurai ; j^appuierais ou apputrais ; je prier ais ou prirais ; &c. The unipersonal verbs, — hruiner, to drizzle; degeler, to thaw; eclair er, to lighten ; geler, to freeze ; greler, to hail ; importer, to matter ; neiger, to snow ; resulter, to result ; tonner, to thunder ; &c., though only used in the third persons singular of their different tenses, take, in those persons, precisely the same terminations as parler does. Second Conjugation : Finir, to finish. All verbs ending in ir, in the present of the infinitive mood, and issant in the present participle, are regular, and conjugated precisely after the same manner as finir. Every other verb, of which the present participle does not end in issant, although terminated with ir, in the present of the infinitive mood, is irregular, and will be found exemplified under the article of irregular verbs. The changes which the regular verbs of this conjugation undergo in their different tenses and persons, fall on the last letter r only ; the other letters remain the same ; but the i, by which r is preceded in the present of the infinitive mood, will be found printed in roman letters in the fol- lowing verb finir^ as it occurs in every tense and person in all the regular verbs of this conjugation, either as a part of the termination or immediately before it. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. C&mpovnd Tenses. PRESENT. PRETERIT. To finish, To have finished, Finix. Avoir Jin\. SECOND CONJUGATION: FINIR, TO FINISH. 115 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Finishing, jR'«issant. PAST PARTICIPLE. Finished, Fin\, ie ; is, ies. PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. Having finished, Ayanijxra. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Being about to finish, Devant jxnxt. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I finish, do finish, or am finishing, Je jiHVA. Thou finishest, dost finish, or art finishing, 7?//ms. He finishes, does finish, or is finishing, ///«it. She finishes, does finish, or is finishing, EUeJirni. We finish, do finish, or are finish- ,ing, A'oz^^nissons. You finish, do finish, or are finishing, Vous JiH\%%Qx. They finish, do finish, or are finishing. Us or El/es JiriissQnt. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I have finished, J^aijini. Thou hast finished, Tu asjini. He has finished, II a Jim. She has finished, Elle afni. We have finished, Nous avo?isJim. You have finished, Fbiis avezjini. They have finished, I/s or E//es ontjini. IMPERFECT. I was finishing, / PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Being about to receive, Devant rfcevoir. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I receive, do receive, or am re- ceiving, Je ?*efois. Thou receivest, dost receive, or art receiving, Tu refois. He receives, does receive, or is re- ceiving, II regoii. She receives, does receive, or is re- ceiving, Elle regoii. We receive, do receive, or are re- ceiving. Nous recevons. You receive, do receive, or are re- ceiving, Vous ?'ecevez. They receive, do receive, or are re- ceiving, lis or Elles ?-efoivent. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I have received', J^ai regu. Thou hast received, Tu as i-egu. He has received, // a regxi. She has received, Elle a regu. We have received, Noi/s avons regw. You have received, Fous avez regu. They have received, Jls or Elles ont regn. IMPERFECT. I was receiving, Je reeevais. Thou wast receiving, Tu ?-ecevais. He was receiving, // recevait She was receiving, Elle recevait. We were receiving, Nous reeevions. PLUPERFECT. I had received, J^avais regn. Thou hadst received, Tu avais regn. He had received, // avail reg\i4 She had received, Elle avaif regn. We had received, Nous avians regn. 120 THIRD CONJUGATION: RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. You were receiving, Fous ?*eceviez. They were receiving, lis or Elles recevaient. You had received, Fous aviez regu. They had received, lis or E//es avaient regn. PRETERIT DEFINITE. I received, Je regus. Thou receivedst, Tu regus. He received, // regut. She received, E//e regui. We received, Nous regvimes. You received, /-OMS refutes. They received, lis or jE//es r^purent. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE I had received, J^evs regu. Thou hadst received, Tu eus regu. He had received, // eut regu . She had received, E//e eut reg\x. We had received, Nous eumes regu.. You had received, Fotis eutes regu. They had received, I/s or E//es eurent regu. FUTURE SIMPLE. *I shall receive, Je recevrai. Thou wilt receive, Tu recevras. He will receive, // r of the present -of the i, for the past participle ; is, for the present of the indicative ; issais, for the imperfect ; is, for the preterit definite ; irai, for the future ; i?'ais, for the conditional ; is, for the imperative ; isse, for the present of the subjunctive ; and isse, for the imperfect : as, — finir, Unissanf, fin/, je fin/s, je Q.nissais, je finjs, je finirai, je ^ntrois, finis, que je finisse, que j e finisse. Third Conjugation : Recevoir, to receive. In verbs of the third conjugation, the termination evoir of the present of the infinitive is changed into evant, for the present participle; z/, for the past participle; ois, for the present of the indicative ; evais, for the imperfect ; m, for the preterit definite; evrai, for the fatnve ; evrais, for the conditional; ois, for the imperative; oive, for the present of the subjunctive ; and t/sse, for the imperfect : as, — vecevoir, vecevanf, le^i/, je recozs. je recevais, JQ re^/^, ]e xecevrai, je xecevrais, xecois, que je reqoive, que je recf/sse. 128 HOW TO FIND THE PERSONS IN THE TENSES. Fourth Conjugation : Entendre, to hear. In verbs of the fourth conjugation, the termination dre of the present of the infinitive is changed into dant, for the present participle ; di/, for the past participle ; ds, for the present of the indicative ; dais, for the imperfect ; dis, for the preterit definite ; drai, for the future ; drais, for the conditional ; <^*, for the imperative ; de, for the present of the subjunctive ; and disse, for the imperfect : as, — entenri^re, entendant, entendu, j'entenc^, yentendais, yeniendis, j'entenc^m, j'entenc^rais, entencfc, que j'entenc^e, que j'entenc^me. When the first person singular of every tense is thus found, the others may be ascertained in the following manner : — PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. Singular, 1 . When the first person singular of the present of the indicative is terminated withe mute: a,s,—jepar/€; an* is added for the second, and the third is like the first : thus — je par/e, iu paries, il parle. 2. When the first person singular ends with s: as, — je finis, je regois ; the second is like the first, and the s is changed into t for the third: thus, — je finis, fu finis, il finit ; je regois, tu regois, il regoit. 3. When the first person singular is terminated with ds : as, — j^entends; the second is like the first, and the s is left out for the third : thus, — fentends, tu entends, il entend. Plural. The three persons plural of the present of the indicative are always terminated, in regular verbs, — 1. With om, ez, ent, in those of the first conjugation: as, — nous parlons, vous parlez, ils parlew/. 2. With issons, issez, issent, in those of the second: as, — nous ^nissons, vous finmez, ils fmissent. 3. With evons, evez, oivent, in those of the third: as, — nous XQzevom, vous rec«;e2, ils xe^oivent. 4. With dons, dez, dent, in those of the fourth: as, — nous entenrfo;?^, vous entenrfe;t, ils entenz, ils ^niQXidaient. PRETERIT DEFINITE OF THE INDICATIVE. This tense ends, in all regular verbs, — 1. With ai, as, a, dmes, dtes, eretit, in those of the first conjugation : as,— je parlot, tu parl«5, il parla / nous parldme*, vous parla^w, ils parlere«/. \ HOW TO FIND THE PERSONS IN THE TENSES. 129 2. With is, is, it, imes, ties, irent, in those of the second : as,— je fin^>, tu fin/s, il ^nit ; nous ^nimes, vous Unites, ils finiVew/. 3. With us, us, ut, umes, utes, urent, in those of the third : as, — ^je xQgus, tu regus, il rea/t ; nous xequmes, vous xequtes, ils XQ^rent. 4. With dis, dts, dit, dimes, dites, dirent, in those of the fourth: as, — j'entenc/w, tu enten^As, il QxiiQwdilj nous eni^ndimes, vous eniQwdites, ils entene«/. FUTURE OF THE INDICATIVE. The future of the indicative ends, in all regular verbs, — 1. With erai, eras, em, erons, erez, eront, in those of the first conjugation: as, — je parleroi, tu parlercw, il parle/'a; nous parlerow*, vous parlere^, ils -^axleront. 2. With ii-ai, ii'as, ira, irons, irez, iront, in those of the second : as, — ^je finr/-a/, tu fimra*, il finj'ra; nous fimVows, vous ^wirez, ils ^wiront. 3. With evrai, e.vras, evra, evrons, evrez, evront, in those of the third : as, — ^je XQcevrai, tu xQcev7'as, il xecevra ; nous xecevrons, vous xecevrez, ils xQcevront. 4. With drui, dras, dra, drons, drez, dront, in those of the fourth: as, — j' enten- dreti, tu entenr^ra*, il entenc/ra; nous entenrfron*, vous QviiQudrez, ils entenc/ro/i/. CONDITIONAL PRESENT. This tense is always terminated, in all regular verbs, — 1. With erais, erais, erait, erions, eriez, eraient, in those of the first conjugation: as, — je TpsLxlerais, tu parlera/s, il parleraiV; nous parlen'ow*, vous parlener, ils ■pa.x\eraient. 2. With irais, irais, irait, irions, iriez, iraieiif, in those of the second : as, — je finiVazs, tu finirais, il fin?>ai/; nous finmo;?*, vous ^niriez, ils dniraie/it. 3. With evrais, evrais, evrait, evrions, evi-iez, evraient, in those of the third : as, — ^je XQCevrms, tu recei-ms, il xQcevrait ; nous xecevriotts, vous xQzevriez, ils rece- vruient. 4. With drais, drais, drail, drions, driez, draient, in those of the fourth : as, — j'entenc/rai*, tu entenc/ra/s, il entent/rai'/ ; nous entenc/rj'o/i«, vous eniQwdriez, ils en- iQXidraient. IMPERATIVE. The terminations of this mood are : — 1. E, e, ons, ez, e?d, in all regular verbs of the first conjugation: as, — parlg, qu'il parle; parlon*, parley, qvi'ils parl^Mf. 2. Is, isse, issons, issez, issent, in those of the second: as, — fine's, qu'il fintsse; Gnissons, finmez, qu'ils Unissent. 3. Ois, oive^ econs, evez, oivent, in those of the third: as, — xegois, qu'il xec^oive ; lecevons, xecevez, qu'ils xec^oivenf. 4. Ds, de, dons, dez, dent, in those of the fourth: as, — entenr/s, qu'il entente; eniexidons, entcndez, qu'ils eniendent. PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. This tense is terminated, in all regular verbs, — 1. With e, es, e, ions, iez, ent, in those of the first conjugation : as, — que je parle, que tu parW, qu'il parle; que nous parh'ow*, que vous parhVz, qu'ils parlew^ 2. With isse, isses, isse, issions, issiez, issent, in those of the second : as, — que je finme, que tu finmes, qu'il finisse ; que nous &nissions, que vous ^nissiez, qu'ils ^nissent. 3. With oive, oives, oive, evions, eviez, oivent, in those of the third: as, — que je regojve, que tu recoiVw, qu'il xQcpive ; que nous xecevions, que vous receive*, qu'ils xe^oivent. o G 5 130 OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 4. With de^ des, de, dions, diez, dent, in those of the fourth : as, — que j'entenrf^, que tu entente*, qu'il entent/e; que uous enteurfions, que vous entenrfjVz, qu'ils GrAendent. IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. This tense has the four following terminations : — 1. Asse, asses, at, assions, assiez, assent, in the regular verbs of the first conjugation: as, — que je parlasse, que tu parlasses, qu'il pariah y que nous parlassi'ows, que vous l^axlassiez, qu'ils ^oxXassent. 2. Isse, isses, it, issions, issiez, issent, in those of the second : as, — que je finme, que tu ^nisses, qu'il ^mt ; que nous fin^ss^o^w, que vous ^nissiez, qu'ils ^nissent. 3. Usse, usses, ut, ussions, nssiez, ussent, in those of the third : as, — que je reQwsse, que tu regusses, c^u^il xeqiit ; que nous xe^ussions, que vous xegiissiez, qu'ils regussent. 4. Disse, disses, dit, dissions, dissiez, dissent, in those of the fourth : as, — que j'enten- disse, que tu enten^mes> qu'il Qniendit ; que nous QniQuxdissiom, que vous Qxiiendissiez, qu'ils Qniexidissent. As it would lead into explanations much too long and diffuse to give the terminations of the different tenses and persons of the irregular verbs, the learner must pay particular attention to their various models which are given hereafter. Of Reflective Verbs. Reflective verbs have not conjugations peculiar to themselves ; they admit precisely the same variations throughout all their tenses and persons as the verbs of the respective conjugations to which they belong. The pronoun se or s\ by which these verbs are preceded in the pre- sent of the infinitive mood and in its compound, in French, and also in the present participle and in its compound, must be changed, in those tenses, into the different objective personal pronouns representing the person or persons speaking or spoken to, according to the sense of the sentence : as, — to rise, to get up, se lever ; I have just got up, je viens de me lever ; thou hast just got up, tu viens de te lever ; he or she has just got up, il ou elle vient de se lever ; we have just got up, nous venons de nous lever ; you have just got up, vous venez de vous lever ; they have just got up, ils ou elles viennent de se lever. In the different tenses of the indicative, as likewise in those of the ■ conditional and of the subjunctive, se or s^ is changed into je me, tu te, il ou elle se ; nous nous, vous vous, ils ou elles se, in the sense of myself, thyself, himself, herself or itself; ourselves, yourselves and themselves, either expressed or implied in English : as, — Je me flatte, I flatter myself; tu te flattes, thou flatterest thyself; &c. In the imperative, when the verb is used affirmatively, se or s^ is changed as follows : ex. — se lever, to rise ; leve-toi, rise thou ; qu^il ou qu'elle se leve, let him or her rise ; /eyon^-Nous, let us rise ; levez- vous, rise ye or you ; quHls ou qu^ elles se levent, let them rise. But, when the verb is used negatively, se or 5' admits of the following FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 131 changes : — ne te leve pas, do not rise or rise not thou, qu'*il ou qu*elle ne se leve pas, let him or her not rise ; ne nous levons pas, let us not rise ; ne vous levez pas, do not rise or rise not ye or you ; quHls ou qw'elles ne se levent pas, let them not rise. The compound tenses of reflective verbs are formed by the addition of their past participle to the simple tenses of etre, with the pronouns je me, tu te, il ou elle se, nous nous, vous vous. Us ou elles se. These tenses are Englished by the corresponding ones of to have. The past participle of those verbs agrees in gender and number with its direct object, when this is represented by one of the personal pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous, which precede it ; as, — elle s^est beaucoup negligeE, she has neglected herself much ; nous nous sommes promenes ce maim, we have taken a walk this morning. When reflective verbs are used either in the affirmative, negative or interrogative, or also in the interrogative and negative form, the pro- nouns me, te, se, nous vous, must precede the verb in the simple tenses, and the auxiliary in the compound ones, except in the imperative mood, as exemplified above : as, — Je me promene, tu te promenes, il ou elle se promene ; nous nous promenons, vous vous promenez. Us ou elles se promenent ; je me suis promene, tu Ves promene, &c. — je ne me pro- mene pas, tu ne te promenes pas, &c. — je ne me suis pas promene, tu ne fes pas promene, &c. — me promenai$-je ? te promenais-tu ? &c. — ne me promenais-je pas 1 ne te promenais-tu pas ? &c. — ne m'etais-je pas promene 1 ne Vetais-tu pas pi^omene ? &c. First Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : Se promener, to loalk. Every reflective verb of this conjugation follows the same variations as — se promener. The three following : — aller, to go ; envoyer, to send ; and renvoyer, to send back ; if employed in a reflective way, are excepted : they require the same pronouns and in the same order as — se promener ; but, being irregular verbs, they are liable to the variations of their own conjugations, as exemplified hereafter under the article of irregular verbs. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses, Compound Tenses. PRESENT. PRETERIT. To walk, To have walked, Se promenQX. S'etre promenk, ou ee. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUXD. Walking, Having walked, Se promemwi. S'ttant promene, ou de. PAST PARTICIPLE. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Walked, Being about to walk, Promene, ee ; es, ees. Devant se promenex. 132 FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I walk, do walk, or am walking, Je me promene. Thou walkest, dost walk, or art walking, Tu te promenes. He walks, does walk, or is walking, // se promene. She walks, does walk, or is walking, El/e se promene. We walk, do walk, or are walking, iVo?/* nous promenons. You walk, do walk, or are walking, Fims voi/s promenez. They walk, do walk, or are walking, lis ou E/les se promenent. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I have walked or been walking, Je me suis promene, ou ee. Thou hast walked or been walking, Tu t'es promene, ou ee. He has walked or been walking, II s' est promene. She has walked or been walking, Elle s''€st promenee. We have walked or been walking. Nous Tious somines promenes, ou ees. You have walked or been ■w^alking, Vous vous etes promenes, ou ees. They have walked or been walking, lis se sont promenes ou Elles se sont pro- menees. IMPERFECT. I was walking, Je me promenais. Thou wast walking, Tu te promenais. He was walking, // se prome?mit. She was walking, E/le se promenaii. We were walking, Nous nous promenions. You were walking, Fbus vous promeniez. They were walking, lis ou Elles se promenaievit. PLUPERFECT. I had walked or been walking, Je m'etais promene, ou ee. Thou hadst walked or been walking, Tu fitais promene, ou ee. He had walked or been walking, // s'etait promene. She had walked or been walking, Elle s'ttcdt promenee. We had walked or been walking, ISous nous ttions promenes, ou ees. You had walked or been walking, Vous vous etiez promenes, ou ees. They had walked or been walking, lis s'etaient promenes ou Elles s'ttaient promenees. PRETERIT DEFINITE. I walked, Je me promenax. Thou walkedst, Tu te promenas. He walked, // se promena.. She walked, Elle se promena. We walked, Nous nous promenaxnes. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. I had walked, Je me fus promene, ou ee. Thou hadst walked, Tu te fus promene, ou ee. He had walked, // se fut promene. She had walked, Elle se Jut promenee. We had walked. Nous rums fumes promenes ^ oti ees FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 133 You walked, Fous vous promenaies. They walked, lis ou Ei/es se promenexent. FUTURE SIMPLE. I shall walk, *Je me promtnerai. Thou wilt walk, Tu te promenersLS. He will walk, // se promenera. She will walk, E/le se promenera. We shall walk, Nous nous promeneions. You will walk, Vous vous promenevez. They will walk, lis ou E//es se vromeneront. You had walked, Fous vous fates promenes, ou ees. They had walked, lis se furent promems ou Elles se furent promenk^^. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have walked, Je me serai promenkj ou ee. Thou wilt have walked, Tu te seras promene, ou ee. He will have walked, // se sera prome?iL She will have walked, Elle se sera p?-ovjenee. We shall have walked. Nous nous sei'ons promeuks, ou ees. You will have walked, Fous vous serez promenes, ou ees. They will have walked, lis se seront promenk% ou Elles se seront p7'otnenees. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. I should walk, Je me promener ais. Thou wouldst walk, Tu te promenevais. He would walk, // se promaierait. PAST. I should have walked, Je me serais ou Je me fusse pronien^^ ou ee. Thou wouldst have walked, Tu te serais ou Tu te fusses promen^, ou ee. He would have walked, Jl se serait ou Jl se fut prwnend. 1. 1 am to walk, Je dois me promener. Thou art to walk, Tu dois te promener. He is to walk, // doit se promener. She is to walk, Elle doit se promener. We are to walk, Nous devons nous promener. Ye or you are to walk, Fous devez vous promener. They are to walk, //4' ou Elles doivent se promener. * 2. 1 was to walk, Je devais me promener. Thou wast to walk, Tu dfvais te promener. He was to walk, // dfvait se promener. She was to walk, Elle devait se promener. We were to walk. Nous devious nous promener. Ye or you were to walk, Fous deviez vous promener. They were to walk, Jls ou Elles devaient se promener. 134 FIRST CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERES. She would walk, Elle se promrnQxaJii. We should walk, Nous nous promenerions. You would walk, Fbus vous promenQXXQZ. They would walk, lis ou Elles se promenex aient. She would have walked, El/e se serait ou Elle sefutpromenQQ, We should have walked, Nous nous serions ou Nous nous fus- sions pi'07nenes, ou ees. You would have walked, Vous vous seriez ou Vous vous fiissiez promeneSy ou ees. They would have walked, lis se seraient ou lis se fussent pro- menQ^, ou Elles se seraient ou Elles se fussent p7'ome7iees. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. 1. Affirmatively. Walk (thou), Promtne-toi. Let him walk, Qu^il se promene. Let her walk. Quelle se promene. Let us walk, Prome?ions-not(s. Walk (ye or you), Pt-oTnenez-vot/s. Let them walk, Qtt'ils ou Qic'elles se promhient. 2. Negatively. Do not walk or walk not (thou), Let him not walk. Let her not walk. Let us not walk, Do not walk or walk not (ye or you), Let them not walk, Ne te promene pas. Qu''il ne se promene pas. Qi/elle ne se promene pas. Ne nons promenoxis pas. Ne vous promenez pas. Qu'ils ou Qu' elles ne se promenent pas. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PRETERIT. That I may walk. Que je ?ne promene. That thou mayst walk, Que tu te promenes. That he may walk, Qii'il se promene. That she may walk, Qu'elle se promene. That we may walk. Que 710US nous promenio'os. That you may walk, Que vous vous pronieniez. That they may walk, Qt/Hs ou Qi^ elles se promenent. That I may have walked. Que Je me sois promene, ou ee. That thou mayst have walked. Que tu te sois promene, ou ee. That he may have walked, Qi^il se soit promene. Tha»t she may have walked, Qu'elle se soit promenee. That we may have walked, Que nous nous soyons promenes, ou ees. That you may have walked, Que vous vous soyez promenes, ou ees. That they may have walked, Qu'ils se soient pi'omenes ou Qu^ elles se soient p?'07?ienees. SECOND CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 135 IMPERFECT. That I might walk, Que je nie pfomenSLSse. That thou mightst walk, Que tu te prmnensLSses. That he might walk, Qu'il se promen^i. That she might walk, Qi^elle se pt'omendt. That we might walk, Que nous nous pro7nena.ssions. That you might walk, Que vous vous p7'omena.%^iQZ. That they might walk, Qi/ils ou Qitelles se pro/«e;?assent. PLUPERFECT. That I might have walked, Que je v\e fusse promenk, ou ee. That thou mighst have walked, Que tu te fusses promene, ou ee. That he might have walked, QuHl se flit promenL That she might have walked, Qu'elle se fiit promeneQ. That we might have walked, Que nous nous fussiom p7^ome>teS) ou ees. That you might have walked. Que vous vous fussiez promenes, ou ees. That they might have walked, Qi/ils se fussetit pro/nenes ou Qu'elles se fussent prometitQS. ADDITIONAL TENSES. PAST JUST ELAPSED. I have just heen walking, Je viens de me promener. Thou hast just been walking, Tu viens de te promener. He has just been walking, // vient de se promener. She has just been walking, E/le vient de se pi'omener. We have just been walking. Nous venons de nous promener. You have just been walking, Vous venez de vous promener. They have just been walking, lis ou Elles vienne?it de se profmener. PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. I had j ust been walking, Je venais de me promener. Thou hadst j ust been walking, Tu venais de te prouiener. He had just been walking, // venait de se promener. She had just been walking, El/e venait de se promener. We had just been walking, Nous venions de jious promener. You had just been walking, P'ous veniez de vous promener. They had just been walking, I/s ou E//es vencdent de se promener. Second Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : Se rejouir, to rejoice. Conjugate after the following manner every reflective regular verb of this conjugation. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. To rejoice, Se rejouiv. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Rejoicing, Se r^owissant. Compound Tenses. PRETERIT. To have rejoiced, S''etre rejoui, ou ie. PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. Having rejoiced, S'Hant rtjoui, ou ie. 136 SECOND CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. PAST PARTICIPLE. Rejoiced, Rejoui, ie ; is, ies. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Being about to rejoice, Devant se rejauxx. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. I rejoice, do rejoice, or am rejoicing, Je me rejouis. Thou rejoicest, dost rejoice, or art rejoicing, Tu te rejoins. He rejoices, does rejoice, or is rejoicing, // se rejouit. She rejoices, does rejoice, or is rejoicing, El/e se rtjouit. We rejoice, do rejoice, or are rejoicing, I^otfs nous rc^'owissons. You rejoice, do rejoice, or are rejoicing, Vous vous rejouissez. Tliey rejoice, do rejoice, or are rejoicing, I/s ou E^les se rejouisseut. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I have rejoiced or been rejoicing, Je me szfis rejoui, ou ie. Thou hast rejoiced or been rejoicing, Tu fes rejoui, ou ie. He has rejoiced or been rejoicing, // s'est rejoui. She has rejoiced or been rejoicing, Eiie s'est rejouie. We have rejoiced or been rejoicing, Nous nous sommes rejouis, ou ies. You have rejoiced or been rejoicing, Fbus vous etes rejouis, ou ies. They have rejoiced or been rejoicing, lis se sont rejoui?, ou Elks se sont rejouies. IMPERFECT. I was rejoicing, Je me re/owissais. Thou wast rejoicing, Tu te re/o«issais. He was rejoicing, 1/ se rejouissait. She was rejoicing, Elle se re/owissait. We were rejoicing. Nous nous rerf urent. FUTURE SIMPLE. * I shall perceive, Je m'apercevTa.i. Thou wilt perceive, Tu fapercevias. He will perceive, // s'aperceyra. She will perceive, El/e s" apercesxQ.. We shall perceive, Nous nous apercewons. You will perceive, Fbus vous apercevrez. They will perceive, JIs ou Elles s'apercevxont. We had perceived. Nous nous fumes apergus, ou ues. You had perceived, Fous vous futes apergus, ou ues. They had perceived, lis sefurent apergns ou Elles se furent apergues. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have perceived, Je Tne serai apergn, ou ue. Thou wilt have perceived, Tu ie seras aper^u, ou ue. He will have perceived, // se sera apergu. She Avill have perceived, Elle se sera apergue. We shall have perceived, Nous 710US serons apergns, ou ues. You will have perceived, Fbtis vous serez apergus, ou ueg. They will have perceived, lis se seront apergxxs ou Elles se seroni apergues. PRESENT. CONDITIONAL MOOD. I should perceive, Je ni'apercevxa.is. Thou wouldst perceive, Tu /'o/jcrcevrais. PAST. I should have perceived, Je me serais ou Je me fusse apergu, ou ue. Thou wouldst have perceived, Tu te serais ou Tu te fusses aperfu, ou ue. * 1. I am to perceive, Je dois m'apercevoir. Thou art to perceive, Tu dois fapercevoir. He is to perceive, JL doit s'apercevoir. She is to perceive, Elle doit s' apercevoir. We are to perceive, Nous devons nous apercevoir. Ye or you are to perceive, Vous devez vous apercevoir. They are to perceive, lis ou Elles doivent s' apercevoir. 2. I was to perceive, Je devais 7n apercevoir. Thou wast to perceive, Tu devais f apercevoir. He was to perceive, // devait s' apercevoir. She was to perceive, Elle devait s' apercevoir. We were to perceive. Nous devions nous apercevoir. Ye or you were to perceive, Fous deviez vans apercevoir. They were to perceive, lis ou Elles devaiaU s' apercevoir 142 THIRD CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. He would perceive, 11 s' apercQV xaii. She would perceive, Elle s apercewxahi. We should perceive, Nous nous c^ercevrions. You would perceive, Vous vous apercevriez. They would perceive, lis ou El/es 5'a/9ercevraient. He would have perceived, // se serait apergu. She would have perceived, EUe se serait apergne. We should have perceived. Nous nous serious ou Nous nousfiissions apergxxs, ou ues. You would have perceived, Vous vous seriez ou Vous votes fussiez apergus, ou ues. They would have perceived, 1/s se seraient ou I/s se fussent apergus, ou Elles se seraie7it ou Elles se fus- sent ajoerpues. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. 1. Affirmatively. Perceive (thou), Let him perceive. Let her perceive, Let us perceive. Perceive (ye or you). Let them perceive. Perceive not (thou). Let him not perceive, Let her not perceive, Let VIS not perceive. Perceive not (ye or you). Let them not perceive, Apergoi^-toi. Qiiil sapergo\VQ. Qiielle i aperg(m%. Apercevons-nous. Apercevez-^ous. QuHls ou Qu' elles s'a/jerpoivent. 2. Negatively. Ne fapergois pas. Qu'il ne s''apergo\ve pas. Quelle ne s^apergoivQ pas. Ne nous apercevons pas. Ne vous cfjoercevez pas. Quils ou Qu' elles ne s" apeJ'goivQni pas. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. That I may perceive, Que je m'apergoive. That thou mayst perceive. Que tu fapergoives. That he may perceive, Qu'il s'apergoive. That she may perceive, Quelle s'apergoive. That we may perceive. Que nous nous ajoercevions. That you may perceive. Que vous vous uperceviez. That they may perceive, QuHls ou Qu^elles s'apergovfQxA. PRETERIT. That I may have perceived, Queje me sois apergu, ou ue. That thou mayst have perceived, Que tu te sois apergu, ou ue. That he may have perceived, Qiiil se soit apergu. That she may have_ perceived, Qu'elle se soit aperguQ. That we may have perceived. Que nous ?ious soyons apergns, ou ues. That you may have perceived. Que vous vous soyez apergns, on ues. That they may have perceived, Qu''ils se soient apergus ou Qu' elles se soient ope/'fues. FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 143 IMPERFECT. That I might perceive, Que je tti'apet'gusse. That thou mightst perceive, Que tu f apergusses. That he might perceive, Qu'il s'opergut. That she might perceive, Qu'e//e s'apergnt. That we might perceive, Que nous nous apergussions. That you might perceive. Que vous vous a/^erpussiez. That they might perceive, Qu^i/s ou Qu'eHes s'apergiisseni. PLUPERFECT. That I might have perceived. Que je me fusse apergvi, ou ue. That thou mightst have perceived, Que tu te fusses apergn, ou ue. That he might have perceived, Qt/il se fut apergu. That she might have perceived, Qtcelle se fut apergue. That we might have perceived, Que nous nous fussions apergus, ou ues. That you mdght have perceived, Que vous vous fussiez apergus, ou ues. That they might have perceived, Qu'i/s se fusseni upergns ou Queiles se fussent apergues. ADDITIONAL TENSES. PAST JUST ELAPSED. PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. I had just perceived, Je vaiais de m'apercevoir. Thou hadst just perceived, Tu venais de fapercevoir. He had just perceived, II venait de s^ apercevoir. She had just perceived, ''apercevoir. Elle venait de I have just perceived, Je viens de fn' apercevoir. Tliou hast just perceived, Tu viens de (apercevoir. He has just perceived, II vient de s' apercevoir . She has just perceived, Elle vient de s' apercevoir . We have just perceived, Nous venons de nous apercevoir. You have just perceived, P7)us venez de vous apercevoir. They have j ust perceived, lis ou Elles viennent de s apercevoir. If any otlier regular verb of the third conjugation should be used reflectively, it must follow the example which has just been given. We had just perceived. Nous venions de nous apercevoir. You had just perceived, Fous veniez de vous apercevoir. They had just perceived, lis ou E/les venaient de s' apercevoir . Fourth Conjugation of Reflective Verbs : Se rendre,* to surrender. Every reflective regular verb of this conjugation follows the same variations as — se rendre. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. To surrender, Se rewdre. INFINITIVE MOOD. Compound Tenses. PRETERIT. To have surrendered, S'etre re«du, ou due. "'■' This verb signifies also, to repair, to go to, to lead to. 144 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Surrendering, Se rewdant. PAST PARTICIPLE. Surrendered, Rendu, due ; dus, dues. PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. Having surrendered, S'etant rendu, mi due. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Being about to surrender, Devant se rendxe. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I surrender, do surrender, or am surren- I have surrendered. Je me rends. [dering, Thou surrenderest, dost surrender, or art Tu te rends. [surrendering, He surrenders, does surrender, or is sur- i/ se rend. [rendering. She surrenders, does surrender, or is sur- Elle se rend. [rendering, "We surrender, do surrender, or are sur- Nous nous rendons. [rendering. You surrender, do surrender, or are sur- Fous vous rewdez. [rendering, They surrender, do surrender, or are sur- Ils ou Elles se rendent. [rendering, IMPERFECT. I was surrendering, Je me rendais. Thou vrast surrendering, Tu te re«dais. He was surrendering, // se rendait. She was surrendering, Elle se rewdait. We were surrendering, ' Nous nous rcndions. You were surrendering, Fous vous rendiez. They were surrendering, lis ou E//«s se r^ndaient. Je me suis rendu, ou due. Thou hast surrendered, Tu fes rendu, ou due. He has surrendered, // s'est rendu. She has surrendered, Elle s'est r^ndue. We have surrendered, Nous noi/s sommes rendus, ou dues. You have surrendered, Vous vous etes rendus, ou dvies. They have surrendered, lis se sont rendus ou Elles se sont rewdues. PLUPERFECT. I had surrendered, Je m^etais re7idu, ou due. Thou hadst surrendered, Tu t'etais rendu, ou due. He had surrendered, // s'etait r«7idu. She had surrendered, Elle s'etait r endue. We had surrendered, Nous nous etions rendus, ou dues. You had surrendered, Vous vous etiez rendus, ou dues. They had surrendered, lis s'etaient rendus ou Elles s'etaient residues. PRETERIT DEFINITE. I surrendered, Je me rendis. Thou surreuderedst, Tti te rendis. He surrendered, II se rendit. She surrendered, Elle se rewdit. PRETERIT ANTKRIOR DEFINITE. I had surrendered, Je me fits rendu, ou due. Thou hadst surrendered, Tu te fus rendu, ou due. He had surrendered, II se fut raidu. She had surrendered, Elle se fut residue. FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. 145 We surrendered. Nous nous rewdimes. You surrendered, Fous vous rendites. They surrrendered, I/s ou E//es se re«dirent. FUTURE SIMPLE. I shall surrender, *Je me re«drai. Thou wilt surrender, Tu te 7-e/«dras. He will surrender, // se renCixm. She will surrender, Elle se ?'e?jdra. We shall surrender. Nous twus 7'endxons. Yoii will surrender, P^ous vous re/?drez. They will surrender, lis ou Elles se 7T«dront. CON PRESENT. I should surrender, Je me r^wdrais. Thou wouldst surrender, Tu te rertdrais. He would surrender, // se ?'e//drait. She would surrender, Elle se rez/drait. We had surrendered. Nous nous fumes rend\i%, ou dues. You had surrendered, Vous vous futes rendns, ou dues. They had surrendered, lis se furent rertdus ou Elles se furent rendu.es. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have surrendered, Je me serai rendu, ou due. Thou wilt have surrendered, Tu te seras ?e«du, ou due. He will have surrendered, // se sera rendu. She will have surrendered, Elle se sera re/idue. We shall have surrendered. Nous nous serous rendus, oii dues. You will have surrendered, Vous vous serez re/idus, ou dues. They will have surrendered, lis se seroni re/idus ou Elles se seront r endues. DITIONAL MOOD. PAST. I shoidd have surrendered, Je me serais ou Je me fusse re«du, ou due. Thou wouldst have surrendered, Tu te serais ou Tu te fusses rendu, ou due. He would have surrendered, Jl se serait ou II sefi'it rendu. She would have surrendered, Elle se serait ou Elle se ftd rendue. I am to surrender, Je dois me rendre. Thou art to surrender, Tu dois te rendre. He is to surrender, II doit se rendre. She is to surrender, Elle doit se rendre. We are to surrender. Nous devons nous rendre. Ye or you are to surrender, Vous devez vous rendr-e. They are to surrender, lis ou Elles doivent se rendre. I was to surrender, Je devais me rendre. Thou wast to surrender, Tu devais te rendre. He was to surrender, // devait se rendre. She was to surrender, Elle devait se rendre. We were to surrender, Nous devious nous rendre. Ye or you were to surrender^, Vous deviez vous rendre. They were to surrender, lis ou Elles devaient se rendre. 146 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. We should surrender, Nous nous ?-e«drions. You would surrender, Vous vous rendriez. They would surrender, I/s on Elles se rewdraient. We should have surrendered, Nous nous serions ou Nous nous fussions renAws, ou dues. You would have surrendered, Vous vous seriez ou Vous vous fussiez rewdus, ou dues. They woidd have surrendered, lis se seraient ou lis se fussent rendus, ou Elles se seraient ou Elles se fussent rendues. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. 1. Surrender (thou), Let him surrender. Let her surrender. Let us surrender, Surrender (ye or you), Let them surrender. Affirmatively. Ren(\^-toi. QuHl se renAe. Qu'elle se rende. Rendons-?ious. RendQZ-vous. Qu'ils ou Qu'elles se rendent. 2. Negatively. Do not surrender or surrender not (thou). Let him not surrender, Let her not surrender. Let us not surrender, Do not siirrender or surrender not (ye or you). Let them not surrender. Ne te rends pas. Qu'il ne se rende pas. Qif'elle ne se rende pas. Ne nous rendons pas. Ne vous rendez pas. Quails ou Qi/ elles ne se rewdent pas. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. That I may surrender, Queje me rende. That thou mayst surrender. Que tu te re«des. That he may surrender, Qu^il se rertde. That she may surrender, Qu'elle se rende. Tliat we may surrender. Que nous nous rendiows. That you may surrender, Que vous vous rendiez. Tliat they may surrender. Quails ou Qu^elles se rendent. IMPERFECT. That I might surrender, Queje me rf?jdisse. That thou mightst surrender, Que tu te rendisses. PRETERIT, That I may have surrendered, Queje me sois rendu, ou due. That thou mayst have surrendered. Que tu te sois rendu, ou due. That he may have surrendered, Qu'il se soit rendu. That she may have surrendered, Qu''elle se soit rendue. That we may have surrendered. Que nous nous soyons rewdus, ou dues. That you may have surrendered, Que vous vous soyez rewdus, ou dues. That they may have surrendered, Qum^s se soient re«dus ou Qu'el/es se soient vendues. PLUPERFECT. That I might have surrendered, Queje me fusse rendu, ou due. That thou mightst have surrendered. Que til te fusses rendu, ou due. OF REFLECTIVE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 147 That he might surrender^ Qu''il se rendit. That she might surrender, QiCdle se rendii. That we might surrender, Que nous nous rendissions. That you might surrender. Que vous voiis rertdissiez. That they might surrender, Qu'i/s ou Qu^elles se rewdissent. That he might have surrendered, Qu^ilse fiU rewdu. That she might have surrendered^ Qu''elle se fid residue. That we might have surrendered. Que nous nous fussions rendus, mc dues. That you might have siirrendered, Que vous vous fussiez rendus, ou dues. That they might have surrendered, QuHls se fussent ren^\\% ou Qiielles * fussent rewdues. ADDITIONAL TENSES. PAST JUST ELAPSED. I have just surrendered, Je viens de me rtndre. Thou hast just surrendered, Tu viens de te rendre. He has just surrendered, // vient de se rendre. She has just surrendered, Elle vient de se rendre. We have just surrendered, Nous venons de nous rendre. You have just surrendered, Vous venez de vous rendre. They have just surrendered, Jls ou Elles vietment de se rendre. PAST ELAPSED BEFORE ANOTHER THING OR ACTION TOOK PLACE. I had just surrendered, Je venais de me rendre. Thou hadst just surrendered, Tu venais de te rendre. He had just surrendered, // venait de se rendre. She had just surrendered, Elle venait de se rendrh. We had just surrendered. Nous venions de nous rendre. You had just surrendered, Vous veniez de vous rendre. They had just surrendered, lis ou EUes venaient de se rendre. Observe. — If any irregular verb be employed reflectively, the pro- nouns follow the same order with it as with the regular verbs ; but the irregularities belonging to its conjugation, in the variations of its tenses and persons, must be attended to. See S'en aller, to go away, page 1 56 ; and S^asseoir, to sit down, page 177. Almost every active verb can be used in a reflective manner. Of Reflective Unipersonal Verbs. Reflective unipersonal verbs are generally active verbs which are used only in the third person singular of their diff^erent tenses. They have for antecedent one of these pronouns — il ou elle, it ; ceci, this ; cela, that; celm-ci, celle-ci, this; celui-ld, celle-la, that; followed by se , or, also, a substantive likewise followed by se : as, — il ou elle se vend bien, it sells well ; ce drap ne se vend pas. that cloth does not sell ; je crains que celui-ci ne se vende pas mieux, I am afraid this will not sell better. Should these verbs have for antecedent a pronoun plural : as, — ceux- ciy celles-cif these ; ceux la, celles-la, those ; followed by se ; or h2 148 CON JUG. OF REFLECTIVE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. also, a substantive plural likewise followed by se : as, — ces marchan- diseS'Ci se, &c. these goods, &c. ; — they should then be put in the third persons plural of their different tenses : as, — ces marchandises-ci se vendent bien, mais celles-ld ne se vendront pas si hien, these goods sell well, but those will not sell so well. The following example of reflective unipersonal verbs is of the fourth conjugation. With its assistance, the pupil will easily understand the manner of using any other reflective unipersonal verb, whatever may be its conjugation, as the pronouns and negatives always come in the same order, the verb only following the variations of its own conjugation. Conjugation of the Reflective Unipersonal Verb — Se vendre, to sell. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. Compoitnd Tenses. PRESENT. To sell, Se fendie. PRETERIT. To have sold, S'Sire vendu, on due. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Selling, Se venda.nt PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. Having sold, S^etant vendu, ou due. PAST PARTICIPLE. Sold, Fendu, due ; duSj dues. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Being to be sold, Devant se vendxe. PRESENT. It sells, does sell, or is selling, // ou etle se vend. It does not sell, // ou el/e ne se vend ras. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. It has sold. Does it sell ? Se vend-il f ou se vend-elle ? Does it not sell P II s'est vendn, ou e//e s'cst vendwQ. It has not sold, // ne s'cst pas vendu, ou el/e ne s^esi pas vendue. Has it sold ? S'esi-il r;e«du ? ou sfest-eUe vendue ? Has it not sold ? Ne se vend-il pas ? ou ne se vend-elle pas ? Ne s'est-il pas vendu? ou ne s'est-elle pas vendue ? IMPERFECT. It was selling, // ou elle se venddai. It was not selling, // ou elle ne se vendait pes. Was it selling ? Se vendaii-il? ou se vendsdi-elle? PLUPERFECT. It had sold, // s'eiait vendu, oxi elle s^etait ve?idue. It had not sold, 11 ne s'ttait pas vendu^ ou elle ne s'ciait pas vendue. Had it sold ? S'etait-il vendu ? ou s'elaif-elle vendue ? CONJUG. OF REFLECTIVE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 149 Was it not selling ? Ne S€ f e«dait-i7 pas ? elle pas ? PRETERIT DEFINITE. It sold, 11 ou elle se vendit. It did not sell, // ou elle ne se vendit pas. Did it sell ? Se vendit-il ? ou se vendM-elle 9 Did it not sell ? JVe se vendit-il pas ? ou ne se vend\i-elle pas? FUTURE SIMPLE. Had it not sold ? ou ne se vendaiit- Ne s'tlaii-il pas vendu ? ou tie s^etait-elle pas venduG ? PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. It had sold, Jl se fut vendVi, ou elle se fut vendue. It had not sold, // ne se fut pas rendu, ou elle ne se fut pas rendue. Had it sold? Sefut-il vendu ? ou se fut-elle rendue ? Had it not sold ? JSe se fut-il pas uendu? ou tie seful-elle pas vendue ? It will sell, *// ou e//e se vendra. It will not sell, II ou elle ne se vendra pas. Will it sell ? Se vendrd-t-il ? ou se vendva.-t-elle ? Will it not sell ? Ne se vendra-t-il pas ? ou ne se vendra /-e//e pas ? FUTURE ANTERIOR. It will have sold, Jl se sera vendu, ou elle se sera vendue. It will not have sold, // ne se sera pas vendu, ou elle ne se sera pas vendue. Will it have sold ? Se sera-t-il vendu P ou se sera-t-elle ven- due ? Will it not have sold ? Ne se sera't-il pas vendu ? ou ne se sera- /-e//e pas vendue ? PRESENT. It would sell, // ou elle se vend rait. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PAST. It would not sell, // ou e//e ne se vendrait pas. Would it sell ? Se vendrait-//? ou se rendrait-e//e ? It would have sold, Jl se serait ou // se fut vendu, ou elle se serait ou elle sefut vendue. It would not have sold, Jl ne se serait pas ou // ne se fit pas vendu, ou e//e ne se serait pas ou e//e ne se fut pas vendue. Would it have sold P jSe serait-H ou >ne. Nous itions allts ou allies. You had or were gone, Vous itiez alles ou allies. They had or were gone, lis itaierd allis ou £'/^s itaient allies. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. I had or was gone, Je fits alii ou allie. Thou hadst or wast gone, Tu fus alii ou allee. He had or was gone. She had or was gone, EUe fut allie. We had or were gone. Nous fumes alles ou allies. You had or were gone, Voits ftites allis ou allies. They had or were gone, Us furent allis ou eUes furent allies. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have gone, Je serai alii ou allie. *1.I am to go, Je dois atler. Thou art to go, Tu dois aller. He is fo go, 11 doit aller. 2. I was to go, Je devais aller. Thou wast to go, Tti devais aller. He was to go, 11 devait aller. H 5 154 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. Thou wilt go, Tu iras. Thou wilt have gone, Tu seras alii ou allte. He will go, // ira. He will have gone, // sera allL She will go, Elle ira. She will have gone. Elk sera allee. We shall go, Notis iro7is. We shall have gone, Nous serons alles ou allies. You will go, Vous irez. You will have gone, Vous serez allis ou allies. They will go. Us ou Elles iront. They will have gone. Us seront allis ou Elles seront allies. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. I should go, Sirais. PAST. I should have gone, Je serais ou Je fusse alii ou allie. Thou wouldst go, Tu irais. Thou wouldst have gone, Tu serais ou Tu fusses alii ou allee. He would go, // irait. He would have gone, Userait ou U fut alii. She would go, Elle irait. She would have gone, Elle serait ou elle fut allee. We should go. Nous irions. We should have gone. Nous serious ou Nous fissions alles onallees. You would go, Vous iriez. You would have gone, Vous seriez ou Vous fussiez allis om. allies. They would go, Us ou Elles iraient. They would have gone. Us seraient ou Us fussent alles, ou Elles seraient ou Elles fussent allies. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. Go (thou). Let him go. Let her go. Let us go. Go (ye or you). Let them go, Va. QuHl aille. Qu'elle aille. Allons. Allez. Quils ou Qiielles aillent. She is to go, Elle doit aller. She was to go, Elle devait aller. We are to go, Nous devons aller. We were to go, Nous devious aller. You are to go, Vous devez aller. You were to go, Vous deviez aller. They are to go, Us ou Elles doivent aller. They were to ^o, lis ou Elles devaient aller. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 155 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT. Tliat I may go, Que j^aille. That thou mayst go, Que tu allies. That he may go, Qu''il aille. That she may go, Qiielle aille. That we may go, Que nous allions. That you may go. Que vous alliez. That they may go, Qu'ils ou Qii'elles aillent. IMPERFECT. That I might go. Que fallasse. That thou mightst go. Que tu allasses. That he might go, Qu^il all at. That she might go, Qiielle allat. That we might go, Que nous allassions. That you might go. Que vous allassiez. That they might go, Qu'ils ou Qu^elles allassent. PRETERIT. That I may have gone, Que je sois allt ou allie. That thou mayst have gone, Que tu sois alle ou allee. That he may have gone, Qu'il soil alle. That she may have gone, Qu'elle soil allee. That we may have gone, Que nous soyons allts ou alltes. That you may have gone. Que vous soyez alles ou allees. That they may have gone, Qu''ils soient allts ou QiHelles soient alUes. PLUPERFECT. That I might have gone, Que je fusse allt ou allte. That thou mightst have gone, Que tu fusses allt ou allee. That he might have gone, Qii'il fut allt. That she might have gone, Qu^elle fut allte. That we might have gone, Que nous fussions allts ou allies. That you might have gone, Que vousfussiez allts ou allies. That they might have gone, Qu'ils fussent allts ou Qii'elles fttssent allies. Observe. — There is a very common error prevalent in France in the application of the compound tenses of the above verb : — etre allt, je suis alle, tu es alle, U est alle, elle est allte, &c. being used instead of — avoir iti, j^ai eti, tu as e'ti, il ou elle a iti, &c., when it is intended to express that a person has been somewhere. The general rule to follow on this subject is that, whenever the return from the place mentioned has taken place — avoir iti,j''ai iti, tu as ite, il ou elle a Hi, &c. must be used; and when the retvu-n has not been effected — etre alii, je suis alii, tu es alle, il est alii ou elle est allie, is required : for instance — Josephine est allee a Vo'pira, Josephine is gone to the opera; implies that she is gone there and is not yet returned ; whereas — Josephine a iti a Popira, Josephine has been to the opera, expresses that she has been there and is returned, or at least has left the opera. The following mode of expression — I will come and see you, is frequently erro- neously used in English instead of — I will go and see you; whenever such is the case, the different tenses oi alter must be employed, in French, in the sense of going from the place where one is to any other place : as,— ^■'tVaj vous voir, I will go and see you. Venir always denotes coming to the place where the person spealdng is: 156 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. as,— .;V ne crois pas que je puisse veni'r ici demain, I do not think I shall be able to come here to-morrow. 2. S^en aller, to go away [Reflective Verb]. S'en aller, being the verb aller itself, reflectively used with ihe particle en, is con- jugated after the same manner as aller. The particle en comes immediately before the verb in the simple tenses, and before the auxiliary in the compound ones, whether the sentence be affirmative, negative, or interrogative: as, — -je m'en vais, I am going away ; je ne m'en vais pas, I am not going away ; s'en va-t-il ? is he going away ? ne s'en va-t-il pas ? is he not going away ? &c. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. PRESENT. To go away, S'en aller. Compound Tenses. PRETERIT. To have gone away, S'en St re allt ou atl^e. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. Going away, S^en allatit. PRESENT PARTICIPLE COMPOUND. Having gone away, S'en etant allt ou allte. PAST PARTICIPLE. Gone away, Alle, allte ; es, tes. PRESENT. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Being about to go away, Devant s^en aller. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I go, do go, or am going away, Je m'en vais. I have gone away, Je m'en suis alle ou allte. Thou goest, dost go, or art going away. Thou hast gone away. Tu fen vas. He goes, does go, or is going away, II s'en va. She goes, does go, or is going away, Elle s'en va. We go, do go, or are going away, Noi/s nous en al/ons. You go, do go, or are going away, Fbus vous en allez. They go, do go, or are going away, Jls ou Elles s'en vont. Tu fen es allt ou allte. He has gone away, // s'en est allt. She has gone away, Elle s'en est allte. We have gone away. Nous nous en sommes allts ou alltes. You have gone away, Vous vous en etes allts ou alltes. They have gone away, lis s'en sotit allts ou Elles s'en sont allees. IMPERFECT. I was going away, Je m'en allais. Thou wast going away, Tu fen allais. He was going away, II s'en allait. PLUPERFECT. I had gone awaj'-, Je m'en ttois allt ou allee. Thou hadst gone away, Tu fen ttais alle ou all^e. He had gone away, // s'en ttait allt. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 157 She was going away, Etle s'en aflait. We were going away, Notts nous en al/iotis. You were going away, Foi/s vot/s en alliez. Tliey were going away, ]ls ou El'es s^en allaieni. She had gone awaj', Elle s^en ttait allce. We had gone awaj', Nous nous en etions allts ou alltes. You had gone away, Vovs vous tn etiez allts ou allces. They had gone away, Jls s'en etaient allts ou Elles s'en ctaient alltes. PRETERIT DEFINITE. I went awa}'-, Je m'en allai. Thou didst go away, Tn t'en alias. He went away, II s'en a I la. She went away, Elle s'en alia. We went awa}'^, Nous nous en alldmes. You went away, Votis vous en alldtes. Tliey went awaj'', lis ou Elles s'en allerenf. FUTURE SIMPLE. I shall go away, * Je m'en irai. Thou wilt go away^ Tu t'en iras. He will go awaj', II s'en ira. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. I had gone away, Je m'en /us alle ou alle'e. Thou hadht gone away, 7?/ t'en /us allt ou allee. He had gone away, II s'en /ut allt. She had gone awa)--, Elle s'en/ut allee. We had gone away. Nous notfs en/umes allts ou alltes. You had gone away, Vous votis en/utes allts ou alltes. They had gone awaj^, Jls s'en /went alle's ou Elles s'en /urent allies. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have gone away, Je m'en ierai allt ou allte. Thou wilt have gone awaj', Tu t'en seras allt ou al'ie. He will have gone away, // s'en sera allt. * 1. 1 am to go away, Je dots m'en alter. Thou art to go away, Tu clois t'en a Her. He is to go away, // doit s'en aller. She is to go away, Elle doit s'en aller. We are to go away. Nous devons nous en aller. You are to go away, Vous devez vous en aller. They are to go away, Jls ou Elles doiveni s'en aller. 2. 1 was to go away, Je devais m'en aller. Thou wast to go away, Tu devais t'en aller. He was to go away, // devait s'en aller. She was to go away, Elle devait s'en aller. We were to go away. Nous devions nous en aller. You were to go awaj'-, Vous dtviez vous en aller. They were to go away, lis ou Elles devaient s'en aller, 158 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. She will go away, Elle s'en ira. We shall go away, Nous nous en irons. You will go away, Vous vous en irez. They will go away, I/s ou Elles s^efi iront. She will have gone away, Elle s'en sera alUe. We shall have gone away, Nous nous en serons alles ou allees. You will have gone away, Fous vous en serez allis ou alltes. They will have gone away, lis s'en seront allts ou Elles ien seront alltes. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PRESENT. I should go away, Je nCen h-ais. Thou wouldst go away, Tu fen irais. He would go away, II s'en irait. She would go away, Elle s^en irait. We should go away, Nous 710US en h'ions. You would go away, Vous vous en iriez. They would go away, lis ou Elles s'en iraient. PAST. I should have gone away, Je uien serais ouje ?n''en/usse alle ou allee. Thou wouldst have gone away, Tu fen serais ou lu fen fusses all6, ou allee. He would have gone away, // s'en serait ou il s'en fut alii. She Avould have gone aAvay, Elle s'en serait ou Elle s'en fut allee. We should have gone away, Nous nous en serions ou Nous nous en fussions allts, ou allies. You would have gone away, Fbus vous en seriez ou Fous vous enfussiez alles, ou allies. They would have gone away, lis s'en seraient ou J Is s'en fussent alles, ou Elles s'en seraient ou Elles s'en fussent allies. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. 1. Affirmatively. Go away (thou). Let him go away, Let her go away. Let us go away, Go away (ye or you). Let them go away. Fa-fen. Qu'il s'en aille. Qu'elle s'en aille. Allons-nous-en. Allez-vaus-en. Qu'ils ou Qu'elles s'en aillent. 2. Negatively. Do not go away or go not away (thou), Let him not go away. Let her not go away. Let us not go away, Do not go away or go not away (ye or you). Let them not go away. Ne fen va pas, ■ Qu'il ne s'en aille pas. Qu'elle ne s'en aille pas, Ne nous en allons pas, Ne vous en allez pas. Qrfils ou Qif elles ne s'en aillent pas. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 159 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRESENT, That I may go away, Queje m^en aitle. That thou mayst go away. Que iu fen allies. That he may go away, QuHl s'en aille. That she may go away, Qii'etle s^en aille. That we may go away. Que nous nous en allions. That you may go away, Que voics vous en alliez. That they may go away, Qu'ils ou Qu'etles s'en aillent. PRETERIT. That I may have gone away. Que je nCen sois alle ou allee. That thou mayst have gone away, Que tu fen sois alle ou allee. That he may have gone away, Qu^il s'en soil alle. That she may have gone away, Qu'elle s'en soil allee. That we may have gone away. Que nous nous en soyons alles ou allees. That you may have gone away. Que vous vous en soyez alles ou allees. That they may have gone away, QuHls s^en soient alles ou Qu^elles s'en soient allies. IMPERFECT. That I might go away, Queje nfen al/asse. That thou mightst go away, Que tu fen allasses. That he might go away, Qu''il s^en alldt. That she might go away, Qu'elle s'en alldt. That we might go away. Que 710US 710US en allassions. That you might go away, Que vous vous en allassiez. That they might go away, Qu'ils ou Qu'elles s'en allassent. PLUPERFECT. That I might have gone away, Que je rrfen fusse alle ou allee. That thou mightst have gone away. Que tu fen fusses alle ou allee. That he might have gone away, Qu'il s'en fat alle. That she might have gone away, Qu'elle s'en fut allee. That we might have gone away. Que nous nous enfussions alles ou allies. That you might have gone away, Qtie vous vous en fussiez alles ou allies. Tliat they might have gone away, Qu'ils s'en fusserit alles ou Qu'elles s fussent allees. 3. Envoyer, to send {Active Verb] ; Envoyant, sending ; envoye, envoyee, sent. Avoir envoye, ayant envoye. tu envoies, vous envoyez, tu envoyais, vous envoyiez, tu envoyas, vous envoy atesj Ind. Pres. J'envoie, Nous envoyons. Imp. J'envoyais, Nous envoyions, Pret. Def, J 'envoy ai, Nous envoy ames, il ou elle envoie ; ils ou elles envoient. il ou elle envoyait ; ils ou elles envoyaient. il ou elle envoya ; ils ou elles envoyerent. 160 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION, Fut. J'enverrai*, tu enverras, Nous enverrons, vous enverrez, Cond.Pres. J'enverrais *, tu enverrais. Nous enverrions, vous enverriez, Jmperative.[No 1st Person.'] envoie, Envoyons, envoyez, Sub, Pres. Que j'envoie, que tu envoies. Que nous envoyions^ que vous envoyiez, Imp. Que j'envoj'^asse, que tu envoyasses. Que nous envoyas- que vous envoyas- sions, siez, Conjugate after the same manner renvoyeVy to send back. il oti elle enverra ; ils oti elks enverront, il ou el'e envorrait; ils ou elles enverraient. qvi'il ou qu'elle envoie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles envoient qu'il ou qu'elle envoie; qu'ils ou qu'elles envoient. qu'il ou quelle envoyat ; qu'ils ou qu'elles envoyas- sent. Irregular verbs of the Second Conjugation. 1 . Conjugation of the Irregular Neuter Verb — Venh\ to come. INFINITIVE MOOD. Simple Tenses. Compound Te PRESENT. PRETERIT. To come, Fenir. To have or to be come, Etre venu ou venue. PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PRESENT PARTICIPLE C Coming, Penant. Having or being come, Etant venu ou venue. PAST PARTICIPLE. PARTICIPLE FUTURE. Come, Venu, ue ; us, ues. Being about to come, Devant venir. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. I come, do come, or am coming, Je viens. I have or am come, Je suis venu ou venue. Thou comest, dost come, or art coming, Tliou hast or art come, 7u viens. He comes, does come, or is coming, il vient. She comes, does come, or is coming, Elle vie?it. We come, do come, or are coming, Nous venons. es venu ou venue. Tu He has or is come, // est venu. She has or is come, Elle est venue. We have or a,xe come, Nous sommes venus ou venues. * The second r only is pronounced in all the persons of the future and conditional of these verbs, but the syllable ve becomes long: thus, — -fenverrai, tu enverras, &c. and fenverrais, tu enverrais, &c. are pronounced — -yenve-rai^ tu enve-ras, &c. and fenve-rais, tu enve-rais, &c. Je renverrai, tu renverras, Sec, and je renverrais, tu renverrais, &c. are also pronounced — je renve-rai, tu renve-ras, &c. andy^ renve-raisy tu renve-rais, kc. IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 161 You come, do come, or are coming, Vous venez. They come, do come, or are coming, lis ou El/es viennent. IMPERFECT. I was coming, Je venais. Thou wast coming, Tu venais. He was coming, // venait. She was coming, El/e venait. We were coming, Notts venions. You were coming, Vous veniez. They were coming, lis ou Efles venaient. PRETERIT DEFINITE. I came, Je vins. Thou didst come, Tu vins. He came, // vint. She came, Elle vint. We came, Nous vznmes. You came, Fous vhttes. They came, ]ls ou Ef/es vinrent. FUTURE SIMPLE. I shall come, * Je viendrai. You have or are come, Vous efes venus ou venues. They have or are come, I/s sont venus ou Elles sont venues. PLUPERFECT. I had or was come, Jttais venu ou venue. Thou hadst or wast come, Tu ttais venu ou venue. He had or was come, II etait venu. She had or was come, Elle tlait venue. We had or were come. Nous ttions venus ou venues. You had or were come, Voi.s tliez venus ou venues. They had nr were come, lis e/aient venus ou Elles etaient venues. PRETERIT ANTERIOR DEFINITE. I had or was come, Je fus venu ou venue. Tliou hadst or wast come, Tu fus venu ou venue. He had or was come, Ilfut venu. She had or was come, Elle fut venue. We had or were come. Nous f times venus ou venues. You had or were come, Vous fides venus ou venues. They had or were come, lis f //rent venus ou Elles fu rent venues. FUTURE ANTERIOR. I shall have come, Je serai venu ou venue. *1. I am to come, Je dois venir. Thou art to come, Tu dois venir. He is to come, 11 doit venir. She is to come, Elle doit venir. I was to come, Je devais venir. Thou wast to come, Tu devais venir. He was to come, // devait venir. She was to come, Elle devait venir. 162 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Thou shalt or wilt come, Tu viendras. He shall or will come, // viendra. She shall or will come, Elle viendra. We shall come, Nous viendrons. You shall or will come, Vous viendrez. They shall or will come, lis ou Elles viendront. Thou shalt or wilt have come, Tu seras venu ou venue. He shall or will have come, // sera venu. She shall or will have come, Elle sera venue. We shall have come, Nous serons venus ou venues. Yovi shall or will have come, Vous serez venus ou venues. They shall or will have come, //« seront venus ou £'//es seront venues. PRESENT. I should come, Je viendrais. Thou wouldst come, Tu viendrais. He would come, II viendrait. She would come, Elle viendrait. We should come. Nous viendrions. You would come, Fous viendriez. They wovild come, lis ou Elles viendraient. CONDITIONAL MOOD. PAST. I should have come, Je serais ou Je fusse venu, ou venue. Thou wouldst have come, Tu serais ou TuJ\isses venu, ou venue. He would have come, // serait ou II fid venu. She would have come, Elle serait ou Elle fat venue. We should have come. Nous serions ou Nous fussions venus, oil venues. You would have come, Foz/* seriez ou Foms fussiez venus, oil venues. They would have come, i/s seraient on lis fussent venus, ou jB//ie* seraient ou Elles fussent venues. IMPERATIVE MOOD. PRESENT OR FUTURE. Come (thou), Viens. Let him comie, Q«/'i7 vienne. Let her come, Qu^elle vienne. Let us come, Fienofis. Come (ye or you), Fenez. Let them come, Q^/'^7s ou Qu^elles viennent. We are to come. Nous devons venir. You are to come, Vous devez venir. They are to come, lis ou Elles doivent venir. We were to come, Nous devious venir. You were to come, Vous deviez venir. They were to come, lis ou Elles devaient venir. IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 163 PRESENT. That I may come, Que je vienne. That thoa mayst come, Que tu viennes. That he may come, Qu'il vienne. That she may come, Qi^elle vienne. That we may come, Que nous venions. That you may come, Qi/e volts veniez. That they may come, Qw'zVs ou Qu'elles viennent SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PRETERIT. That I may have come, Quej'e sois vefiu ou venue. That thou mayst have come, Que tu sois venu ou venue. That he may have come, Qu'il soil venu. That she may have come, Qi^elle soil venue. That we may have come. Que nous soyons venus ou venues. That you may have come, Que vous soyez venus ou venues. That they may have come, QuHls soient venus ou Qdelles soient venues. IMPERFECT. That I might come, Quej'e vinsse. That thou mightst come. Que tu vinsses. That he might come, Qu'il Vint. That she might come, QiCelle vint. That we might come, Que nous vinssions. That you might come, Que vous vinssiez. That they might come, Qu^i/s ou Qu'elies vinssent. PLUPERFECT. Tliat I might have come, Que je fusse venu ou venue. That thou mightst have come. Que tu fusses venu ou venue. That he might have come, Qu'il fut vemc. That she might have come, Qu'elle fut venue. That we might have come, Que nous fussions venus ou venues. That you might have come, Que vous fussiez venus ou venues. That they might have come, Qu'ils fussent venus ou Qu'elles fussent venues. ADDITIONAL TENSES. The additional tenses of the above verb are formed with arriver, follows : — 1st TENSE. I am or have just come, Je viens crarriver. Thou art or hast just come, Tu viens (Tarriver. He is or has just come, // vient Warriver. She is or has j ust come, Elle vient (Varriver. 2d TENSE. I had or was just come, Je venais (Tarriver. Thou hadst or Avast just come, Tu venais (Tarriver. He had or was just come, II venait (Varriver. She had or was just come Elle venait (Tarriver. 164 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. We are oi- have just come. Nous venons d'arriver. You are or have just come, Pons venez cTarriver. They are or have just come, Us on Elks viennent Warriver. We had or were just come. Nous venions d'arriver. You had or were just come, Fbus veniez d'arriver. They had or were just come, //* ou Elles venaient d'arriver. Conjugate after the same maimer every verb ending, in the present of the infinitive, in enir : as, — j-^ppa7^temr, Avcnir, \Circonvenir, \Contenir, fContrevenir, * Convenir, \Deprcvemr, \Dttenir, Devenir, Disconvenir, jfEntretenir, Intervenir, \Maintenir, J\1tsavenir, to belong, to happen, to circumvent, to contain, to contravene, to agree, to suit, to unprepossess. to detain, to become, to disagree, to entertain, to intervene, to maintain, to succeed ill. irA to obtain. to come to preferment, to attain. to prevent, to inform. to proceed from. to become again. to retain. to come again, to come back, to abstain. to sustain, to support. to remember. to relieve. to come unexpectedly. to hold. \Obtenir, Parvenir, ^Pi'tvenir, P?'overnr, Redevenir, \ Ret enir, Pevenir, S'abstenir, jSoidenir, Se souvenir & *e ressouvenir, \Subvenir, Survenir, j-Tenir, The verbs which are marked with a (t)? ii^ the above hst, take avoir in their compound tenses ; whereas those which have not this mark take etre. * Convenir is conjugated with avoir in its compound tenses, when it is used in the sense of to suit : as — that would have suited me, cela m'aurait convenu ; but it takes etrc, in the sense of to agree : as, — we have agreed on the price, nous sommes convenus du prix. The n, in the above verbs, and in any other ending in enir in the present of the infinitive mood, is, as in the verb venir, doubled in the tenses, in which it comes before e, es, or ent mute : as, — tenir, to hold; que je tienne, que tu tieniies, quails ou qu'' elles tiennent, &c, Avenir^ to happen, can only be used in the third person singular of a few tenses, and in the present of the infinitive : as, — sHl avient, if it happens, &c. Provenir, to proceed from, is seldom used but in its third persons singular and plural: as, — cela provient de, that proceeds from ; tous ces malheurs provenaient de...., all these misfortunes proceeded from, &c. 2. Acquerir, to acquire [Active Verb] ; Acquevani, acquiring ; acij^uis, acquise, acquired. Avoir acquis, ayant acquis. Jnd. Pres. J'acquiers, Nous acquerons. Imp. J'acquerais, Nous acquerions, Pret. Def. J'acqvxis, Nous acquimes, tu acquieis, vous acqiierez, tu acquerais, vous acqueriez, tu acquis, vous acquites, il ou elle acquiert; ils ou elles acquierent. il ou elle acquerait; ils ou elles acqueraient, il ou elle acquit; ils ou elles acquirent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 165 Put. J'acquerrai, Nous acqueirons, Cond.Pres. J'acqvitrrais, Nous acquerrions, Imperative. \^No \st per'non.^ Acqiierons, Sub, Pres, Que j'acquiert?;, Que nous acquerions^ Imp. Que j'acquisse, Que nous acquissions^ tu acquervas, vous acquerrez, tu acquenais, vous acqueniez, acquieis, acquerez, que tu acquieres, que vous acqueriez, que tu acquisses. il ou elle acquerra ; ils ou elles acquerront. il ou elle acquerrait ; ils 02i elles acquerraient. qu'il ou qu'elle acquiere ,• qu'ils ou qu'elles acquierent. qu'il ou qu'elle acquiere ; qu'ils oii qu'elles acquierent. qu'il ou qu'elle acquit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles acquissent. que vous acquissiez. Conjugate after the same manner the verbs conquerii\ to conquer; reconqiierir, to conquer again ; requerivy to require ; s''enquerh\ to in- quire; and querir^ to fetch. Conquerir is only used in the present of the infinitive, in the preterit definite, in the imperfect of the subjunctive, and in the compound tenses. Reconquirir is chiefly used in the past participle. S'enquh'ir is very little used, except in the present of the infinitive and in its compound tenses. Querir^ to fetch, is only used in the present of the infinitive with the verbs aller, venir, and envoyer : as, — Allez me quirir M. un tel, go and fetch me Mr. such a one ; je Pai envoye querir, I have sent for him ; il nicest venu querir, he came to fetch me ; &c. This verb must not be used in an elevated style. 3. Assaillir^ to assault [Active Verb] ; Assaillant, assaulting Jnd. Pres. J'assaille, assailli, assaillie, assaulted. tu assailles. Imp. Nous assaillons, J'assaillais, Nous assaillions, vous assaillez, tu assaillais, vous a>)sailliez, tu assaillis, vous assaillites, tu assailliras, vous assaillirez, tu assaillirais, vous assailliriez, assaille, assaiilez, que lu assailles, Avoir assailli, ayant assailli. il ou elle assaille; ils ou elles assailleut. il ou elle assaillait ; ils uu elles assaillaient. il ou elle assaillit ; ils ou elles assaillirent. Pret. Def. J 'assaillis, Nous assaillimes, Put. J'assailliral,* Nous assaillirons, Cond.Pres. J'assaillirais,* Nous assaillirions, Imperative. [iVo \st person.'\ Assaillons, Sub. Pres. Que j'assaille, Que nous assaillions, que vous assailliez, Imp. Que j'assaillisse, que tu assaillisses. Que nous assaillis- que vous assaillis- sions, siez, Conjugate after the same manner tressaillir^ to start : but je tres- il ou elle assaillira ; ils ou elles assailliront, il ou elle assaillirait ; ils ou elles assailliraient. qu'il ou quelle assaille ; qu'ils ou qu'elles assaillent. qu'il ou qu'elle assaille ; qu'ils ou qu'elles assaillent. qu'il ou qu'elle assaillit ; qu'ils oti qu'elles assaillis- sent. * JVailly is of opinion that j''assaillerai, tu assailleras, &c. may also be used in the future ; and fassaillerais, tu assaillerais, &c. in the conditional. 166 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. saillirai, tu tressailliras, &c. or je tressaillerai, tu tressailleras, &c. may be used in the future, as also je tressaillirais, tu tressaillirais, &c. and je tressaillerais, tu tressaillerais, &c. in the conditionaL 4. Bouillir, to boil [Neuter Verb] ; Bouillant, boiling ; bouiUi, bouillie, boiled. Avoir bouilli, ayant bouilli. tu bous. il ou elle bout ; vous bouillez, ils ou elles bouillent. tu bouillais, il on elle bouillait ; vous bouilliez, ils ou elles bouillaient, tu bouillis, il ou elle bouillit ; vous bouillites, ils ou elles bouillirent. tu bouilliras, il ou elle bouillira ; vous bouillirez, ils ou elles bouilliront. il ou elle bouillirait ; ils ou elles bouilliraient. qu'il ou qu'elle bouille ; qu'ils ou qu'elles bouillent. qu'il ou qu'elle bouille ; qu'ils ou qu'elles bouillent. qu'il ou qu'elle bouillit ; qu'ils ozi qu'elles bouillis- Ind. Pres. Je bous, Nous bouillons, Imp. Je bouillais. Nous bouillions, Pret. Def. Je bouillis, Nous bouillimes. Put. Je bouillirai, Nous bouillirons, Cond. Pres. Je bouillirais. Nous bouillirions. Imperative. [iVb 1st person^ Bouillons, Sub. Pres. Que je bouille, Que nous bouillions, que vous bouilliez, Imp. Que je bouillisse, que tu bouillisses. Que nous bouillis- que vous bouillis- sions, siez, tu bouillirais, vous bouilliriez, bous, bouillez, que tu bouilles, sent. The above verb can only be used properly in French in the third person singular and in the third plural of its different tenses ; as, — TJeau bout, the water boils ; ces choux ne bouillaient pas, these cabbages did not boil, &c. Should it be required to be used in any other of its per- sons in French, in the sense of/ boil, thou boilest, he or she boils ; we boil, you boil, they boil, &c. in English, it must be expressed by the corresponding person of the verb faire, putting bouillir in the present of the infinitive : thus, — Je fais bouillir, tu fais bouillir, il ou elle fait bouillir ; nous fais ons bouillir, vous faites bouillir, ils ou elles font bouillir, &c. : as, — Je fais bouillir de la viande, I boil some meat ; and not je bous. Rebouillir, to boil again, is conjugated after the same manner as bouillir, and follows the same rules. 5. Courir, to run [Neuter and Active Verb] ; Courant, running' ; Ind. Pres. Je cours, Nous couroris. Imp. Je courais. Nous courions, Pret. Def. Je courus, Nous couiumes. Put. Je courrai, Nous courrons. couru, courue, run. tu cours, vous courez, tu courais, vous couriez, tu courus, vous courutes, tu courras, vous courrez, Avoir couru, ayaut couru. il ou elle court ; ils ou elles courent. il ou elle courait ; ils ou elles couraient, il ou elle courut ; ils ou elles coururent. il ou elle courra ; ils ou elles courront. IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 167 Cond. Fres. Je courrais. Nous courrious^ Imperative. [No \sf person.^ Courons, Sub. P7'es. Que je coure, Que nous courions, Imp. Que je courusse. Que nous courus- sions, tu courrais, vous courriez, coiurs, courez, que tu coures, que vous couriez^ que tu courusses, que vous courus- siez. il ou elle courrait ; ils ou elles courraient. qu'il ou qu'elle coure; qu'ils ou qu'elles courent. qu'il ou qu'elle coure ; qu'ils ou qu'elles courent. qu'il ou qu'elle courut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles courussent. Conjugate after the same manner the verbs accourir, to run to ; concourir, to concur; discourir., to discourse; encoiirir, to incur; parcourir, to run over; secourir, to succour; recoiirir^ to have re- course to. Accourir, to run to, takes avoir or etre in its compound tenses, according to the sense in which it is used: as, — /'a^ accouru and ie suis accouru, &c. 6. CueiUir, to gather [Active Verb] ; Cueillant, gathering ; cueilli, cueillie, gathered. Ind. Pres. Je cueille, tu cueilles. Nous cueillons, vous cueillez, Imp. Je cueillais, tu cueillais, Nous cueillions^ vous cueilliez, Pret. Def. Je cueillis, tu cueillis. Nous cueillimes, vous cueillites, Fut. Je cueillerai, Nous cueillerous, Cond. Pres. Je cueillerais, Nous cueillerions. Imperative. {^No \st person.'] Cueillons, Sub. Pres. Que je cueille^ Que nous cueillions, que vous cueilliez, Imp. Que je cueillisse, que tu cueillisses, Que nous cueillis- que vous cueillis- sions, siez, tu cueilleras^ vous cueillerez, tu cueillerais, vous cueiileriez, cueille, cueillez, que tu cueilles, Avoir cueilli, ayant cueilli. il ou elle cueille ; ils ou elles cueilleut. il ou elle cueillait ; ils ou elles cueillaient. il ou elle cueillit ; ils oil elles cueillirent. il ou elle cueillera ; ils ou elles cueilleront. il ou elle cueillerait ; ils ou elles cueilleraient. qu'il ou qu'elle cueille ; qu'ils ou qu'elles cueillent. qu'il ou qu'elle cueille; qu'ils ou qu'elles cueillent. qu'il ou qu'elle cueillit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles cueillis- sent. Conjugate after the same manner accueillir, to make welcome, to receive kindly ; and recueillir, to gather, to reap, to receive. 1. Faillir, to fail [Neuter and Defective Verb]; Faillant, failing ; failli, faillie,/rttVec^. Avoir failli, ayant failli. Pret. Def. Je faillis, Nous faillimes, tu faillis, vous faillites, il ou elle faillit ; ils ou elles faillirent. This verb is only used as above. Its compound tenses are regular, and formed with the diiferent tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir and 168 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. its own past participle /a^7/^ : as, — faifailli, iu as failli, il ou elle a failli, &c. Faire faillite is more generally used than faillir^ in the sense of to fail, to break, to be a bankrupt. Defaillir, to fail, to decay, derived from faillir, is hardly ever used, except in the plural of the present of the indicative : nous defaillons ; in the imperfect, /e defaillais ; in the preterit definite, y^ clefaillis, tu defaillis, &c. in the preterit indefinite, j^ai defallli, &c. and in the present of the infinitive, defaillir. 8. Fleurir, to blossom, to flourish [Neuter Verb]. "VVlien this verb is taken in the sense of shooting forth flowers, it is regular and conjugated like finir. But when it is used in a figurative sense, denoting prosperity, as when speaking of a kingdom or a town, we say, It is in a flourishing state, its present participle is then /lo7'issant,2LTid its imperfect of the indicSitiYe jcjiorissais, tu florissais, il ou elle fiorissait, &c. instead of fleurissant, je fleurissais, tufleu- rissais, il ou elle Jieurissait, &c. This is the only irregularity of fleurir, its other tenses being always regular. Refleurir, to blossom or flourish again, is conjugated after the same manner &s fleurir ; its present participle is also, when used in its natural sense, refleurissant, and its imperfect of the indicative, re- fleurissais ; but when it is employed in a figurative sense, its present participle is reflorissant, and its imperfect of the indicative refloris' sais, &c. 9. Fuir, to fly, to shun [Active and Neuter Verb] ; Yx\ya.r\.i, Jiying ; i\\\,iM\Q,Jle(l. Avoir fui, ay ant fui. tu fuis, vous fuyez, tu fuyais, vous liiyiez, tu fuis, vous fuites, tu fuiras, vous fuirez^ tu fuirais, vous fuiriez, fuis, fuyez, que tu fuies, que vous fuyiez, que tu fuisses, que vous fuissiez. Conjugate after the same manner s'^enfuii imperative, it makes enfuis-toi, &c. Ind. Pies. Imp. Je fuis, Nous fuyoiis, Je fuyais, Nous fuyious, Pret. Def. Je fuis. Nous fuimes, Fut. Je fuirai, Nous fuirons, Cond. Pres. Je fuirais. Nous fuirions, Imperative. \No \>>t person.'] Fuyons, Sub. Pres. Que je fuie, Que nous fuyions. Imp. Que je fuisse, Que nous fuissions, il ou elle fuit ; ils ou elles fuient. il ou elle fuyait ; ils ou elles fuyaient. il ou elle fuit; ils ou elles fuirent. il ou elle fuira ; ils ou elles fuiront. il ou elle fuirait ; ils ou elles fuiraient. qu'il ou qu'elle fuie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles fuient. qu'il ou qu'elle fuie; qu'ils ou qu'elles fuient. qu'il ou qu'elle fuit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles fuissent. to run away : in the IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 169 10. Gesir, to lie [Neuter and Defective Verb]; Gisant, l^i'^g. This verb, which formerly signified to be lying down, is no longer in use. We, however, sometimes say : — il gft, nous gisons, Us gisent, il gisait, gisant. Ci-g1t^ here lies, is the common form by which an epitaph begins , this expression is also fine in a figurative sense, and particularly in poetry. Ci-git Ver-vert, ci-gisent tons les coeurs. — Gressef. 11. Hair, to hate [Active Verb] ; Haissaut, haling ; Ltd. Pi'es. Je hais. Nous haissons, Imp. Je haVssais, Nous haissions, Prei. Def. Je haVs, Nous haVmes, Fitt. Je hairai, Nous haVrons, Cond.Pres.Je haVrais, Nous haVrionS;, Imperative. \_No \st person.^ Haissons, Sub. Pies. Que je liaVsse, Que nous haissions, Imp. Que je haVsse, Que nous haissions, haV, haVe, hated tu hais, vous haissez, tu haVssais, vous haissiez, tu haVs, vous haites, tu haVras, vous haVrez, tu haVrais, vous hairiez, hais, haissez, que tu haVsses, que vous haissiez, que tu haVsses, que vous haissiez. Avoir haV, ayant haV. \\ou elle hait ; ils ou elles hai'ssent. il ou elle haVssait; ils ou elles hai'ssaient. il ou elle hait ; ils ou elles hairent. il ou elle haira ; ils ou elles hairont. il ou elle haVrait ; ils ou elles hairaient. qu'il ou qu'elle haVsse j qu'ils ou qu'elles hai'ssent. qu'il ou qu'elle hai'sse; qu'ils ou qu'elles hai'ssent. qu'il ou qu'elle ha'i't ; qu'ils ou qu'elles hai'ssent. The h is aspirated through all its tenses and persons. A diaeresis (") is required over the ?', in all the persons and tenses of hair, to show that the i is to be pronounced separately from the pre- ceding vowel a : as, — ha-'ir., je ha-'issais, &c. The three first letters of this verb form two syllables, except in the three persons singular of the present of the indicative, and in the second singular of the impera- tive, in which they form only one, and are written without the diaeresis, thus — je hais, tu hais, il ou elle hait ; hais ; pronounced— j'e he, tu he, il ou elle he ; he. It is in this particular alone that consists the irregularity of hair ; for all its other tenses and persons are regidar, and conjugated after the same manner asjinir. 12. Issir, to descend [Neuter and Defective Verb], This verb, which was formerly employed for sortir, is now only used in its past participle, issu, issue, with the different tenses of the verb etre ; it signifies venu, descendu, dhine personne, dhme race, &c. as, — il est issu c?e . . . . , he is descended from .... 170 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 13. Mourir, to die [Neuter Verb]; Mowxsxii, dying ; vaoxi, vcioxie, died. Etre mort, etant mort. Ind. Pres. Je meurs. Nous mourons, Imp. Je mourais, Nous mourions^ Pret. Def. Je mourus^ Nous mourumesj Fut. Je mourrai, Nous mourrons, Cond. Pres. Je mourrais, Nous mourrions, Imperative. \^No \st person.^ Mourons, Sub. Pres. Que je meure, Que nous mourions, Imp. Que je mourusse, Que nous mourus- sions, The two r^s of the future and conditional of this verb are both pro- nounced. Its compound tenses are formed with the simple tenses of etre. 14. Oui'r, to hear [Active and Defective Verb]. This verb can only be used now in the present of the infinitive ouh, to hear; in the preterit definite, y'oww, I heard; z7 ou?Y, he heard ; in the imperfect of the subjunctive, que fou'isse, that I might hear ; quHl omt, that he might hear; and in its compound tenses, which are formed with the simple tenses of the auxiliary verb avoir, and its past participle ou'i, ou'ie. Any other verb which may follow in the sentence is put in the present of the infinitive: as, — I heard say, j^ai ou'i dire, &c. 15. Ouvrir, to open [Active Verb] ; Ouvrant, opening ^ ouvert, ouverte, opened. Avoir ouvert, ayant ouvert. tu meurs, il ou elle meurt; vous mourezj ils ou elles meurent. tu mourais, vous mouriez. 1 ou elle mourait ; lis ou elles mouraient. tu mourus, il ou elle mourut ; vous mourutes, ils ou elles moururent. tu mourras, il ou elle mourra ; vous mourrez, ils ou elles mourront. tu mourrais, il ou elle mourrait ; vous mourriez, ils ou elles mourraient. meurs, qu'il ou qu'elle meure ; mourez, qu'ils ou qu'elles meurent. que tu meures, qu'il ou qu'elle meure ; que vous mouriez, qu'ils ou qu'elles meurent. que tu mourusses, qu'il ou qu'elle mourfxt ; que vous mourus- qu'ils ou qu'elles mourus- siez, sent. Ind. Pres. J'ouvre, Nous ouvrons, tu ouvres, vous ouvrez, il ou elle ouvre ; ils ou elles ouvrent. Imp. J'ouvrais, Nous ouvrions, tu ouvrais, vous ouvriez, il ou elle ouvrait; ils ou elles ouvraient. Pret. Def. J'ouvris, Nous ouvrimes, tu ouvris, vous ouvrites, il ou elle ouvrit ; ils ou elles ouvrirent. Fvt. J'ouvrirai, Nous ouvrirons. tu ouvriras, vous ouvrirez, il ou elle ouvrira ; ils ou elles ouvriront. Cmd. Pres. J'ouvrirais, Nous ouvririons, tu oiivrirais, vous ouvririez, il ou elle ouvrirait ; ils ou elles ouvriraient. Imperative. [No \st person.] Ouvrons, ouvre, ouvrez, qu'il ou qu'elle ouvre ; qu'ils ou qu'elles ouvrent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Ill Sub. Pres. Que j'ouvre, Que nous ouvrions qu'il ou qu'elle ouvre ; qu'ils ou qu'elles ouvrent. que tu ouvres, que vous ouvriez, /wjo. Quej'ouviisse, que tu ouvrisses, qu'il 02/ qu'elle ouvrit ; Que nous ouvrissions, que vous ouvrissiez^ qu'ils on qu'elles ouvrissent. Conjugate after the same manner the verbs — couvrir, to cover; decouvrir, to discover, to uncover ; entr^ouvrir, to open a little ; mes- qffrir, to underbid; offrir, to ofter; rouvrir, to re-open; recouvrir, to cover again : souffrir, to suffer ; and any other verb ending in vrir and/rzV in the present of the infinitive. 16. Partir, to set out, to go away [Neuter Verb] ; Partant, setting out ; partly partie, set out. Etre parti, etaut parti. Ind. Pres. Je pars, Nous partons. Imp. Je partais. Nous partions, Pret. Def. Je partis. Nous partfmes, Fut. Je partirai, Nous partirons, Cond.Pres. Je partirais. Nous partirions, Imperative. \No \sl person.'\ Partons, Sub. Pres. Que je parte, Que nous partions, Imp. Que je partisse. tu pars, vous partez, tu partais, vous partiez, tu partis, vous partites, tu partiras, vous partirez, tu partirais, vous partiriez, pars, partez, que tu partes, que vous partiez, il ou elle part ; ils ou elles partent. il ou elle partait ; ils ou elles partaient. il ou elle partit ; ils ou elles partirent. il ou elle pariira ; ils ou elles partiront. il ou elle partirait ; ils ou elles partiraient. qu'il ou qu'elle parte ; qu'ils ou qu'elles partent. qu'il ou qu'elle parte; qu'ils ou qu'elles partent. qu'il ou qu'elle partit ; que tu partisses. Que nouspartissions, que vous partissiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles partissent. Conjugate after the same manner refartir, to set out again ; its compound tenses are also formed with etre. Repartir, in the sense of to reply, takes avoir in its compound tenses : as, — il ne lui a reparti que des impertinences, he only replied to her by impertinent words ; il ni'a reparti avec beaucoup d^esprit, he replied to me with much ingenuity. Rtipartir and departir, meaning to distribute, to divide, are regular verbs, and conjugated, in all their simple and compound tenses, like Jinir. 17. Sentir, to smell [Active and Neuter Verb]; Sentant, smelling ; senti, sentie, smelt. Avoir senti, ayant senti. Ind. Pres. Je sens, Nous sentons. Imp. Je sentais. Nous sentions, Pret. Def. Je sentis. Nous sentimes. tu sens, vous seutez, tu sentais, vous sentiez, tu sentis, vous sentites, il ou elle sent; ils ou elles sentent. il ou elle sentait; ils ou elles sentaient. il ou elle sentit ; ils ou elles sentirent. I 2 172 IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. Fut. Je sentirai, tu sentiras, Nous semirons, vous sentirez, Cond, Pres. Je sentirais, tu sentirais, Nous sentirions, vous sentiriez, Imperative. [No \st pey'soni] sens, Sentons, sentez, Sub, Pres. Que je sente, que tu sentes. Que nous sentions, que voiis sentiez. Imp. Que je sentisse, que tu sentisses. Que nous sentissions, que vous sentissiez, qu'ils on qu'elles seutissent. Conjugate after the same manner the verbs consentii\ to consent ; demeniir, to give one the lie; meniir, to lie; pi'essentir, to foresee; ressenti?', to resent ; se ressentir, to feel still ; se repentir, to repent ; and in general all verbs ending in entir in the present of the infinitive. 18. Servir, to serve [Active Verb] ; Servant, serving ; servi, servie, served. Avoir servi, ayant servi. il oil elle sentira ; ils ou elles sentiront. il 071 elle sentirait ; ils ou elles sentiraient. qu'il cu qu'elle sente ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sentent. qu'il ou qu'elle sente ; qu'ils oil qu'elles sentent. qu'il ou qu'elle sentit. Ind. Pres. Je sers, tu sers, Nous servons, vous servez. Imp. Je servais, tu servais, Nous servions, vous serviez, Pret. Def. Je servis, tu servis^, Nous servimes, vous servites, Fut. Je servirai, tu sendras. Nous servirons, vous servirez, Cond. Pres.Je servirais, tu servirais, Nous servirions, vous serviriez. Imperative. [No \st person. '\ sers, Servons, servez, Svb. Pres. Que je serve, que tu serves, Que nous servions, que vous serviez. Imp. Que je servisse, que tu servisses, Que nous servissions, que vous servissiez, Conjugate after the same manner desservir, to clear the table, to injure, &c. Asservir., to enslave, to subject, is regular, and conjugated like finir. 19. Sortir, to go out [Neuter Verb]; Sortant, going out i sorti, sortie, gone oid. Etre sorti, etant sorti*. Ind. Pres. Je sors, tu sors, il ou elle sort ; Nous sortons, vous sortez, ils oti elles sortent. * This verb takes etre in its compound tenses, when it is used to express that somebody is gone out and not returned : as, — is Mr. Douville at home ? no, he is gone out ; M. Douvil/e y est-il ? non, il est sorti ; hut, when it is employed to denote that some one has been out and is returned, it then takes avoir in its compound tenses : as, Mr. Douville has been out this morning, and is returned, M. Douville a sorti ce matin, et il est de retovr. il ou elle sert -, ils oic elles servent. il ou elle servait ; ils ou elles servaient. il ou elle servit ; ils ou elles servirent. il ou elle servira ; ils ou elles serviront. il ou elle servirait ; ils ou elles serviraient. qu'il ou qu'elle serve ; qu'ils ou qu'elles servent. qu'il ou qu'elle serve ; qu'ils ou qu'elles servent. qu'il ou qu'elle servit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles servissent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 173 Imp. Je sortais, Nous sortions, Pret. Def. Je sortis, Nous sortimes, Fui. Je sortirai. Nous sortirons, Cond. Pies. Je sortirais, Nous sortirions. Imperative. [A'b \st person.'] Sortons, Sub. Pres. Que je soite, Que nous sortions Imp. Que je sortisse, tu sortais, vous sortiez, tu sortis, vous sortites, tu sortiras, vous sortirez, tu sortirais, vous soitiriez. il ou elle sortait ; ils ou elles sortaieut. il ou elle sortit ; ils oti elles sortirent. il oil elle sortira ; ils ou elles sortiront. il ou elle sortirait ; ils ou elles soitiraient. sors, sortez, que tu sortes, que vous sortie z, que tu sortisses, Que nous sortissions, que vous sortissiez. Conjugate after the same manner ressortir, to go out again ; dormir, to sleep ; s'endormiry to fall asleep ; se rendormir, to fall asleep again ; endormir^ to lull asleep; &c. Dormir and endormir take avoir in their compound tenses. qu'il ou qu'elle sorte ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sortent. qu'il ou qu'elle soite ; qu'ils 61?/ qu'elles sovtent. qn'il ou qu'elle sortit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sortissent. 20. Vetir, to clothe [Active Verb] ; Vetant, clothing ; vetu, vetue, clothed. Avoir vetu, ayant vetu *. tu vets, vous vetez, tu vetais, vous vetiez, tu vetis, vous vetites, tu vetiras, vous vetirez, tu vetirais, vous v^tiriez, vets, vetez, que tu vetes, que vous vetiez, que tu vetisses Ind. Pres. Je vets, Nous vetous, Imp. Je vetais, Nous vetious, Pret. Def. Je vetis. Nous vetimes, Fi.t. Je vetirai. Nous vetirons, Cond. Pres. Je vetirais. Nous vetirious, Imperative. [No 1st perso?!.] Vetons, Sub. Pres. Que je vete, Que nous vetious, ]?np. Que je vetisse. il ou elle vet ; ils ou elles vetent. il ou elle vet ait; ils ou eiles vetaient. il ou elle vetit ; ils ou elles vetirent. il ou elle vetira ; ils ou elles vetivont, il ou elle vetirait ; ils ou elles vetiraient. qu'il ou qu'elle vete ; qu'ils ou qu'elles vetent. qu'il ou qu'elle vete ; qu'ils ou qu'elles vetent. qu'il ou qu'elle vetit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles vetissent. Que nous vetissions, que vous vetissiez, Conjugate after the same manner se vetir, to dress or clothe one's self; revetirj to clothe ; devetir, to strip, to undress ; se devetir, to divest one's self. Revetir and devetir take avoir and sometimes etre in their com- pound tenses. * This verb takes also sometimes e.fre in its compound tenses : as — il est bien vetu he is well clothed. 174 IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 1. Dechoir, to decay [Neuter and Defective Verb] ; Decheant, decaying. Dechu, dechue, decayed. Ind. Pres. Je dechois, Nous dechoyons^ tu dechois, vous dechoyez, [The imperfect is not used.'\ il ou elle dechoit ; ils ou elles dechoieut. Pi^et. Def. Je dechvis, Nous dechumes, Put. Je decherrai, Nous decherrons, Co7id.Pres. Je decherrais. Nous decherrions. Imperative. \_No \st person.~\ Dechoyons, Sub. Pres. Queje dechoie, Que nous dechoyions, que vous dechoyiez, Imp. Que je dechusse, que tu decliusses, tu dechu s, vous dechutes, tu dechervas, vous decherrez, tu decherrais, vous decherriez, dechois, dechoyez, que tu dechoies, il ou elle dechut ; ils ou elles dechurent. il ou elle decherra ; ils ou elles decherront. il ou elle decherrait ; ils ou elles decherraient. qu'il ou qu'elle dechoie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles dechoientt qu'il on qu'elle dechoie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles dechoient. qu'il ou qu^'elle dechut Que nous dechussions, que vous dechussiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles dechvissent. The above verb is seldom used, except in the present of the infinitive ; as, — son credit.^ sa rk'putation, commencent a dechoir, his credit and reputation begin to decrease ; and in its compound tenses, in which it takes etre, when it expresses the state of the subject: as, — ils sont dechus de leurs privil"ges, they have lost their privileges ; and avoir ^ when it denotes the action of declining : as, depuis ce moment il a dechu de jour en jour, from that moment he has declined every day. 2. Mouvoir, to move [Active Verb] ; Mouvant, moving ; mu, mue, moved. Avoir rau, ayant nau. Ind. Pres. Imp. Pret. Def. Put. Cond.Pres. Imperative. Sub. Pres. Je mens. Nous mouvons, Je mouvais. Nous mouvions, Je mus, Nousmumes, Je mouvrai, Nous mouvrons, Je mouvrais. Nous mouvrions, [No 1st person.] Mouvons, Que je meuve. tu meus, vous moxivez, tu mouvais, vous mouviez, tu inus, vous miltes, tu mouvras, vous mouvrez, tu mouvrais, vous mouvriez, meus, mouvez, que tu meuves, Que nous mouvions, que vous mouviez, il ou elle meut ; ils ou elles meuvent. il ou elle mouvait ; ils ou elles mouvaient. il ou elle mut ; ils ozi elles murent. il ou elle mouvra ; ils uu elles mouvront. il ou elle mouvrait ; ils ou elles mouvraient. qu'il ou qu'elle meuve ; qu'ils ou qu'elles meuvent, qu'il ou qu'elle meuve ; qu'ils ou qu'elles meuvent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 175 Imp. Que je musse, que tu musses, Que nous mussions, que vous mussiez, qu'il ou qu'elle mut : qu'ils ou qu'elles mussent. The above verb is seldom used lexcept in the present of the infinitive : as, — je ne sals pas comment il a pu mouvoir cette pierre, I do not know how he could move that stone. The object, in exemplifying all its tenses, has been to give a model for the verbs which are conjugated after the same manner: such as, — emouvoir, to move ; s^emouvoir, to be concerned : this latter, being a reflective verb, requires etre in its compound tenses. Promouvoir, to promote, is only used in the present of the infinitive, and in its compound tenses, which are formed with avoir : as, — on veut le promouvoir^ they wish to promote him ; on Va promu, he has been promoted. 3. Pouvoir, to he able [Active and Defective Verb]; Pouvant, being able ; pu [indeclinable], been able. Avoir pu, ayant pu. Lid. Pres. Je puis on Je peux. Nous pouvons, Imp. Je pouvais, Nous pouvions, Pret. Def. Je pus, Nous pumes, Fut. Jepourrai*, Nous pom-rons, Cond.Pres.Je pourrais*, Nous pourrions, Sub. Pres. Quejepuisse, Que nous puissions, Imp. Que je pusse, Que nous pussions, tu peux, vous pouvez, tu pouvais, vous pouviez, tu pus, vous putes, tu pourras, vous pourrez, tu pourrais, vous pourriez, que tu puisses, que vous puissiez, que tu pusses, que vous pussiez, il ou ellc pent ; ils ou elles peuvent. il ou elle pouvait; ils ou elles pouvaient. il ou elle put ; ils ou elles purent. il OM elle pourra; ils ou elles pourront. il ou elle pourrait ; ils ou elles pourraient. qu'il ou qu'elle puisse ; qu'ils ou qu'elles puissent. qu'il ou qu'elle put; qu'ils ou qu'elles pussent. 4. Pourvoir, to provide [Active and Neuter Verb] ; Pourvoyant, providing ; pourvu, pourvue, provided. Avoir pourvu, ayant pourvu. tu pourvois, il ou elle poiirvoit ; vous pourvoyez, ils ou elles pourvoient. tu pourvoyais, il ou elle pourvoyait; vous pourvoyiez, ils ou elles pourvoyaient. Ind. Pres. Je pourvois Nous pourvoyons, Imp, Je pourvoyais, Nous poxu-voyionSj Pret. Def. Je pourvus. Nous pourvumes, tu pourvus, vous po\irvutes. il ou elle pourvut ; ils oti elles pourvurent. * The second r only is pronounced in all the persons of the future and condi- tional of this verb ; but the foregoing syllable becomes long : thus,— j> pourrai, tu pourras, &c. are pronounced— /e potl-ra?,, tu pou-ras, &c. and Je po2/rrais, tu pourrais, Scc.j'e pou-rais, tu poic-rais, &c. 176 IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. Fut. Je pourvoirai. Nous pourvoirons, Cond.Prcs. Je pourvoirais, Nous pourvoirionSj, Imperative. \^No \st person.'\ Pourvoyons, Sub. Pres. Que je pourvoie, Que nous pour- voyions. Imp. Que je pourvusstj, Que nous pourvus- sions. tu pourvoiras, vous pourvoirez, tu pourvoirais, vous pourvoiriez, pourvois, pourvoyez, que tu pourvoieS;, que vous pourvoyiez. il ou elle pourvoira ; ils ou elles pourvoiront. il ou elle pourvoirait ; ils ou elles pourvoiraient. qu'il ou qu'elle pourvoie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles pourvoient. qu'il ou qu'elle pourvoie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles pourvoient. que tu pourvusses, qu'il ou qu'elle pourvut; que vous pourvussiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles pourvussent. 5. Ravoir, to have or get again [Active and Defective Verb] ; This verb is only used in the present of the infinitive : as, — il plaide pour ravoir son hien^ he pleads to get his property again. 6. Savoir, to knoiv [Active Verb] ; Sachant, knowing ; su, sue, hiown. Avoir su, ayant su. Ind. Pres. Je sais, Nous savons. Imp. Je savais, Nous savions, Prei. Dp/. Je sus, Nous sumes, Fut. Je saurai, Nous saurons, Cond.Prcs. Je saurais, Nous saurions. Imperative. \^No \st person.~\ Sachons, Sub. Pres. Que je sache, Que nous sachions, Imp. Que je susse. Que nous sussions, tu sais, vous savez, tu savais, vous saviez, tu sus, vous sutes, tu sauras, vous saurez, tu saurais, vous saiuiez, sache, sachez, que tu s aches, que vous sachiez, que tu susses, que vous sussiez. il ou elle sait ; ils ou elles savent. il ou elle savait ; ils ou elles savaient, il ou elle sut ; ils ou elles surent. il OM elle saura ; ils ou elles saurout. il ou elle saurait; ils ou elles sauraient. qu'il ou qu'elle sache ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sachent. qu'il ou qu'elle sache ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sachent. qu'il ou qu'elle sut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sussent. Observe. — Although savoir and connaitre he Englished by the same word to know, there is a material difference in the use of them in French. Savoir is usually employed in speaking of sciences or things that are studied and learnt : as, — Do you know Latin ? Savez-vous le Latin ? I know my lesson, Je sais ma lepon ; whereas connaitre is employed in mentioning things which are the objects of our senses, and properly signifies to be acquainted ivith : as, — I know that gentleman, that country, &c. Je connais ce monsieur , ce }')ays, &c. IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 177 7. S'asseoir, to sit down [Reflective Verb] ; Ind. Pres. Imp. Pret. Def. Put. Cond. Pres Imperative Sub. Pres. Imp. S'asseyant, sitting; assis, assise, sat. S'etre assis, s'etant assis. Je m'assieds, tu t'assieds, il ou elle s'assied; Nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils ou elles s'asseyent. Je nrasseyais, tu t'asseyais. Nous nous asseyions, vous vous asseyiez, Je m'assis, tu t'assis. Nous nous assimes, vous vous assites, Je m'assierai*, tu t'assieras, Nous nous assierons, vous vous assierez, Je m'assierais, tu t'assierais. Nous nous assieriun"?, vous vous assieriez [iVb \st person.^ Asseyons-noiis, Que je m'asseye., Que nous nous asse- yions, Que je ni'assisse, Que nous nous assis- sions. assieds-toi, asseyez-vous, que tu t'asseyes, que vous vous as- seyiez, que tu t'assisses, que vous vous as- sissiez, il ou elle s'asseyait ; ils ou elles s'asseyaient. il ou elle s'assit ; ils ou elles s'assirent. il ou elle s" assiera ; ils ou elles s'assieront. il ou elle s'assierait ; ils ou elles s'assieraient. qu'il ou qu'elle s'asseye ; qu'ils ou qu'elles s'asseyent. qu'il ou qu'elle s'asseye ; qu'ils ou qu'elles s'asseyent. qu'il ou qu'elle s'assit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles s'assissent. Conjugate after the same manner se rasseoir., to sit down again. Asseoii\ to set, follows also the same conjugation ; but, being an active and not a reflective verb, it only takes the personal pronouns — ye, tu^ il, elle., nous, vous, ils, elles ; its compound tenses are formed \vith avoir : as, — J'^ai assis Venfant sur la chaise, I set the child upon the chair. Rasseoir, to settle, in speaking of liquids which purify by remaining still, is only used in the present of the infinitive, and sometimes in its compound tenses which are formed with etre : as, — laissez rasseoir le cafe, let the coffee settle ; il est bien r as sis, it is quite settled. 8. Surseoir, to reprieve, to supersede [Active Verb] ; Sursoyant, reprieving : sursis, sursise, reprieved. Avoir sursis, ayant sursis. Ind. Pres. Je sursois. Nous sursoyons, Imp. Je sursoyais, Nous sursoyions, Pret. Def. Je sursis. Nous sursimes, Fuf. Je surseoirai. Nous surseoirons, tu sursois, vous sursoyez, tu sursoyais, vous sursoyiez, tu sursis, vous sursites, tu surseoir as, vous surseoirez. il ou elle sursoit ; ils on elles sursoient. il ou elle sursoyait; ils ou elles sursoyaient. il ou elle sursit ; ils ou elles sursirent. il ou elle surseoira ; ils ozi elles surseoiront. * Je m'asseijerai, tu t'asseyeras, &c. andj'e m^asseyerais, tu fasseyerais, &c. may also be used in the future and conditional. 118 IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. Cond.Pres. Je surseoirais, tu surseoirais. Nous surseoirions, vous surseoiriez, Imperative. [No \st person.'\ sursois, Sursoyons, sursoyez, Sub. Pres. Que je sursoie, que tu sursoies, Que nous sursoyions^ que vous sursoyiez, Imp. Que je sursisse, que tu sursisses. Que nous sursissions, que vous sursissiez^ il ou elle surseoirait ; ils ou elles surseoiraient. qu'il ou qu'elle sursoie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sursoient. qu'il otf qu'elle sursoie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sursoient. qu'il ou qu'elle sursit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles sursissent. The above verb, which is principally used in proceedings at law, is seldom employed but in the present of the infinitive, and in its compound tenses : as, — surseoir le jugement dlun proces, to put off the verdict of an action, &c. We also say — surseoir a ^execution dun arrU, in which sense surseoir is neuter. When sursis, past participle of surseoir, is taken adjectively, it is frequently used with the different tenses of ctre : as, — le jugement est sursis, the judgment is put oflf. 9. Valoir, to be vjorth [Active and Neuter Verb] ; Valantj being worth; valu [ind€clinable~\, bee?i worth. Avoir valu, ayant valu. Jnd. Pres. Je vaux. Nous valons. Imp. Je valais, Nous valions, Pret. Def. Je valus. Nous valumes, Fut. Je vaudrai, Nous vaudrons, Cond, Pres, Je vaudrais. Nous vaudrions^ Imperative. [No 1st person.'\ Valons, Sub. Pres. Quejevaille, Que nous valions, Imp. Que je valusse, tu vaux, vous valez, tu valais, vous valiez, tu valus, vous valutes, tu vaudras, vous vaudrez, tu vaudrais, vous vaudriez, vaux, valez, que til vailles, que vous valiez, que tu valusses, Que nous valussions, que vous valussiez. il ou elle vaut ; ils ou elles valent. il ou elle valait ; ils ou elles valaient. il ou elle valut; ils ou elles valurent. il ou elle vaudra ; ils ou elles vaudront. il ou elle vandrait ; ils ou elles vaudraient. qu'il ou qu'elle vaille ; qu'ils ott qu'elles vaillent. qu'il ou qu'elle vaille ; qu'ils ou qu'elles vaillent. qu'il ou qu'elle valut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles valussent. Conjugate after the same manner the verbs prevaloir, to prevail ; equivaloir^ to be equivalent ; and revaloir, to repay. The present of the subjunctive of prevaloir is que je prevale, que tu prevales, qu'il prevale ; que nous prevalions, que vous prevaliez, qu'ils prevalent. Prevaloir generally governs the preposition sur : as, — il ne faut pas que la raison prevale sur I'usage, reason must not prevail over custom. When prevaloir is taken in a reflective sense, it requires de: as, — Lhomme ne doit pas se prevaloir heaucoup de sa IRREG. VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 179 raison qui le trompe si souvent^ men must not boast much of their reason w^hich so often deceives them. Equivaloir, to be equivalent, is seldom used, except sometimes in the third person singular of the present of the indicative : as, — Ceci equivaut a cela ; and even then it is better to use the adjective equiva- lent^ with the different tenses of etre : as, — Ceci est equivalent a cela, this is equivalent to that. It requires the preposition a. Revaloir, to return like for like, is always used with the pronoun le or cela : as, — Je le lui ai revalu, I returned him like for like ; j'e lui revaudrui cela, I shall return him like for like. 10. Voir, to see [Active Verb] ; Voyant, seeing ; vu, vue, seeti. Avoir vn, ayant vu. Ind. Pres. Je vols, Nous voyons, tu vols, vous voyez, il ou elle voit ; ils oti elles voient. Imp. Je voyais. Nous voyions, tu voyais, vous voyiez, il ou elle voyait ; ils oif elles voyaient. Pret. Def, Je vis, Nous viraes, tu vis, vous vites, il ou elle vit ; ils ou elles virent. Fut. Jeverrai*, Nous verrons, tu verras, vous verrez, il ou elle verra ; ils ou elles verront. Cond. Pres. Je verrais *, Nous verrions, tu verrais, vous verriez, il oti elle verrait ; ils ou elles verraient. Imperative. \_No Ist persofi.] Voyons, vois, voyez, qu"il ou qu'elle voie ; qu'ils oil qu'elles voient. Sub. Pres. Que je voie, Que nous voyions, que tu voies, que vous voyiez. qu'il ou qu'elle voie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles voient. Imp. Que je visse. Que nous vissions, que tu visses, que vous vissiez. qu'il ou qu'elle vit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles vissent. Conjugate after the same manner the verbs — revoir, to see again; entrevoir, to have a glimpse of, and jprevoir, to foresee ; but the future of this last is : — Je prevoirai, tu prevoiras, &c. and the conditional : Je frevoirais, tu prevoirais, &c. 11. Vouloir, to he ivilling [Active and Defective Verb] ; Voulant, being willing ; voulu, ue, wished for or to 8fc. Avoir voulu, ayant voulu. Ind. Pres. Je veux. Nous voulons. Imp. Je voulais, Nous voulions, tu veux, vous voulez, tu voulais, vous vouliez, il ou elle veut ; ils ou elles veulent. il ou elle voulait ; ils ou elles voulaient. * The second r only is pronounced in all the persons of the future and conditional of this verb and of its derivatives ; but the foregoing syllable becomes long : thus,—- je verrai, tu verras, &c. are pronounced— ^"e ve-7'ai, tu ve-ras, &c. and/e verrais, tu verrais, &.c.je ve-rais, tu ve-rais, &c. 180 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. Pref. Def. Je voulus, tu voulus, il ot.i elle voulut ; Nous voulumes, vous voulutes, ils ou elles voulurent. Fut. Je voudrai, tu voudras, il ou elle voudra ; Nous voudrons, vous voudrez^ ils ou elles voudront. Cond. Pres. Je voudrais, tu voudrais, il ou elle voudrait ; Nous voudrions, vous voudviez, ils ou elles voudraient. Imperative. Veuillez. [ This person is the only 07ie used^ Sub. Pres. Que je veviille, que tu veuilles, qu'il ou qu'elle veuille ; ^Que nous voulions, que vous vouliez, qu'ils ou qu'elles veuillenf. Imp. Que je voulusse, que tu voulusses, qu'il ou qu'elle voulut; Que nous voulussions, que vous voulussiez, qu'ils ou qi^elles voulussent. Irregular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation. 1. Absoudre, to absolve [Active and Defective Verb] ; Absolvantj absolving ; absous, absoute, absolved. Avoir absous, ayant absous. Ind. Pres. J'absous, tu absous, il o« elle absout ; Nous absolvons, vous absolvez, ils ou elles absolvent. Imp. J'absolvais, tu absolvais, il ou elle absolvait ; Nous absolvions, vous absolviez, ils ou elles absolvaient. [^This verb has no preterit definite7\ Fm/. J'absoudrai, tu absoudras, il om elle absoudra ; Nous absoudrons, vous absoudrez, ils ou elles absoudront. Cowrf. Prw.J'absoudrais, tu absoudrais, il om elle absoudrait; Nous absoudrions, vous absoudriez, ils ou elles absoudraient. Imperative. [Ao \st personP^ absous, qu'il ou qu'elle absolve; Absolvous, absolvez, qu'ils ou qu'elles absolvent. Suh, Pres. Que j'absolve, que tu absolves, qu'il ou qu'elle absolve ; Que nous absolvions, que vous absolviez, qu'ils ou qu'elles absolvent. [^There is no imperfect of the subjunctive.'] Conjugate after the same manner dissoudre, to dissolve. 2. Faire accroire, to make one believe. En faire accroire, to impose upon one. Accroire is only used in the present of the infinitive with the verb faire, which serves as an auxiliary to it: as, — elle lui fait accroire tout ce qu'elle veut, she makes him believe every thing she likes ; on ne peut pas lui en faire accroire, he is not a man to be imposed upon. 3. Battre, to beat [Active Verb] ; Battant, beating ; battu, battue, beaten. Avoir battu, ayant battu. /«f/. Pre*. Jebals tu bats, ilo« elle bat; Nous battons, vous battez, ils ou elles battent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 181 Imp. Je battais. Nous battions, Pret. Def. Je battis, Nous battimes, Fut. Je battrai, Nous battronsj Cond, Pres. Je battrais, Nous battrions. Imperative \_No \st person.^ Battons, Sub. Pres. Que je batte. Que xious battions, Imp, Que je battisse, Que nousbattissions. tu battais, vous battiez, tu battis, vous battites, tu battras, vous battrez, tu battrais, vous battriez, bats, battez, que tu battes, que vous battiez, que tu battisses, que vous battissiez. il ou elle battait ; ils oti elles battaient. il ou elle battit; ils ou elles battireut. il ou elle battra ; ils ou elles battrout. il ou elle battrait ; ils ou elles battraient. qu'il ou qu'elle batte : qu'ils oti qu'elles batte r.t. qu'il ou qu'elle batte : qu'ils ou qu'elles battent. qu'il ou qu'elle lattit; qu'iis ou qu'elles battissent. Conjugate after tlie same mariner ahattre, to pull do\Yn ; combattre, to fight; debattre, to debate; rabattre, to pull down again, to abate; rebattre, to beat again ; s^ebattre^ to make or be merry ; se debattre., to struggle, &c. 4. Boire, to drink [Active Verb] ; Biivant, drinhiiig ; bu, bue, drunk. Avoir bu, ayant bu.. Ind. Pres. Je bois. Nous buvons. tu bois, vous buvez, il ou elle boit; ils ou elles boivent. Imp. Je buvais, Nous buvions. tu buvais, vous buviez. il ou elle buvait ; ils ou elles buvaient. Pret. Def. Je bus, Nous bumes. tu bus, vous butes. il ou elle but ; ils ou elles burent. Fut. Je boirai, Nous boirons. tu boiras, vous boirez, il ou elle boiia ; ils ou elles boiront. Cond. Pres , Je boirais, Nous boirions. tu boirais, vous boiriez. il oti elle boirait ; ils ou elles boiraient. Imperative . [No } St person.] Buvons, bois, buvez, qu'il ou qu'elle boive ; qu'ils ou qu'elles boivent. Sub. Pres. Que je boive. Que nous buvions, que tu boive s, que vous buviez. qu"il ou qu"elle l)oive; qu"ils ou quc'lies boivent. Imp. Que je busse, Que nous bussions. que tu busses, que vous bussiez. qu'il ou qu'elle but ; qu'ils ou qu'elles bussent. Conjugate after the same manner reboire, to drink again. 5. Clorre, to close [Active and Defective Verb]. This verb is only used in the three persons singular of the present of the indicative : as, — je clos, tu clos, il ou elle clot; in the future, /e clorrai ; in the conditional, j/'e clorrais ; in the imperative, clos ; in the three persons singular of the present of the subjunctive : — que je closer que tu closes-, qu^il ou qu^elle close; in the present of the infinitive, 182 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. clorre ; in the past participle, clos, close ; and in its compound tenses, which are formed with avoir. The present of the infinitive is frequently used with the different tenses of the verb faire. Enclorre^ to enclose, is conjugated after the same manner. Note. — Some write clorre and enclorre with one r only in the present of the infinitive, and in the future and conditional : thus, — clore^ en- clore ; je clorai^ fenclorai, &c. and Je clorais, fenclorais, &c. 6. Conclure, to conclude [Active Verb] ; Coucluant, concluding ; conclu, conclue, concluded. Avoir conclii^ ayant conclu. Ind. Pres. Je concius, tu conclus. Nous concluons, vous concluez, Imp. Je concluais, tu concluais, Nous concluions, vous concluiez, Pret. Def. Je conclus, tu conclus, Nous conclumes, vous conclutes, Fut. Je conclurai, tu concluras, Nous conclurons, vous conclurez, Cond.Pres.Zo, conclurais, tu conclurais. Nous conclurions, vous concluriez, Imperative. \_No \st person.'] conclus, Concluons, concluez. Sub. Pres. Que je conclue, que tu conchies, Que nous concluions, que vous concluiez, Imp. Que je conclusse, que tu conclvisses, Que nous conclus- que vovis conclussiez, sions, il ou elle conclut ; ils ou elles concluent. il ou elle concluait; ils ou elles concluaient. il ou elle conclut ; ils ou elles conclurent. il ou elle conclura ; ils ou elles concluront. il ou elle con«lurait ; ils ou elles concluraient, qu'il ou qu'elle conclue ; qu'ils ou qu'elles concluent. qu'il ozi qu'elle conclue ; qu'ils ou qu'elles concluent. qu'il ou qu'elle conclut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles conclussent. Conjugate after the same manner exclure, to exclude. A diaeresis ( " ) is required, in these verbs, over the i of the termina- tions ions, iez, in the two first persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and of the present of the subjunctive, to denote that the i is to be pronounced distinct from the u which precedes it : as, — nous con- clu-'ions, vous conclu-iez ; nous exclu-ions, vous exclu-'iez ; que nous conclu-ions, que vous conclu-iez ; que nous exclu-ions, que vous ex- clu-'iez. 7. Conduire, to conduct [Active Verb] ; Qon^msa.\ii, conducting ; conduit, conduite, coTirfwc/ec/. Avoir conduit, ayant conduit. Ind. Pres. Je conduis, Nous condviisons, Imp. Je conduisais. Nous conduisions, Pret. Def. Je conduisis, Nous conduisimes, tu conduis, vous conduisez, tu conduisais, vous conduisiez, tu conduisis, vous conduisites, il ou elle conduit ; ils ou elles conduisent. il ou elle conduisait ; ils ou elles conduisaient. il ou elle conduisit ; ils ou elles conduisirent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 183 Fut. Je couduirai. Nous conduirons, Cond. Pres. Je conduirais, Nous conduirions, Imperative. \_No \st persoti.'] Conduisons, Sub. Pres, Que je conduise, Que nous condui- sions, tu conduiras, vous conduirez, tu conduirais, vous condviiriez, conduis, conduisez, que tu conduises, que vous conduisiez, il ou elle conduira ; ils ou elles conduiront. il ils elle conduirait ; elles condvdraient. qu'il ou qu'elle conduise ; qu'ils ou qu'elles conduisent. qu'il ou qu'elle conduise ; qu'ils ou qu'elles conduisent. Imp. Q Que je conduisisse, que tu conduisisses, qu'il on qu'elle conduisit; Que nous conduisis- que vous conduisis- qu'ils ou qu'elles conduisis- sions, siez, sent. Conjugate after the same manner all verbs ending in the present of the infinitive mood in uire : as, — deduire, to deduct ; instruire, to in- struct ; reduire^ to reduce; introduire, to introduce, &c. Nuire, to hurt, makes mii * in its past participle ; in its other tenses it is conjugated like conduire. Luire, to shine, and reluire, to glitter, make also lui* and relui* in their past participles ; they have no preterit definite in the indicative, and no imperfect of the subjunctive; but they follow conduire in their other tenses. 8. Confire, to pickle^ to preserve [Active Verb] ; Confisant, pickling ; confit, confite, pickled. Avoir confit. ayant confit. hid. Pres. Imp. Je confis. Nous confisons, Je confisais, Nous confisions, Pret. Def. Je confis, Nous conf imes, Fut. Je confirai, Nous confirons, Cond. Pres. Je confirais, Nous confirions, Imperative. \_No \st person.^ Confisons, Sub. Pres. Quejec«nfise, tu confis, vous confisez, tu confisais, vous confisiez, tu confis, vous conf ites, tu confiras, vous confirez, tu confirais, vous confiriez, confis, confisez, que tu confises, Que nous confisions, que vous confisiez. Imp. Que je confisse, que tu confisses, Que nous confissions, que vous confissiez. il ou elle confit ; ils ou elles confisent. il ou elle confisait ; ils ou elles confisaient. il ou elle confit ; ils ou elles confirent. il ou elle confiia; ils ou elks confiront. il ou elle confirait ; ils ou elles confiraient. qu'il ou qu'elle confise ; qu'ils ou qu'elles confisent, qu'il ou qu'elle confise ; qu'ils ou qu'elles confisent. qu'il ou qu'elle confit; qu'ils ou qu'elles confissent. Conjugate after the same manner circoncire t, to circumcise ; and ence that the past p; and that of suffire ; — suffi, without suffire, to suffice ; with this diiference that the past participle of cir- concire is circoncis feminine. circoncise. * The past participles, 7iui, lui, and relui, have no feminine. •}• The French Academy, Restaut, Wailly, Feruud, and Demandre think that cir- concire has no present participle and no imperfect either in the indicative or sub- junctive; but others are of a contrary opinion. 184 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 9. Comiaitre, to know [Active Verb] ; Connaissant, Imowing ; connu, connue, known. Avoir connu, ay ant connu. Ind, Pres. Je connais, Novxs connaissons, Imp. Je counaissais, Nous connaissions, Fret. Def. Je connus. Nous connumes, Fut, Je connaitrai, Nous connaitrons, Cond. Pres. Je connaitrais. Nous conuaitrions. Imperative. \_No \};t person.'] Sub. Counaissons Pres. Que je counaisse, tu connais, vous connaissez, tu connaissais, vous connaissiez, tu connus, vous connutes, tu connaitras, vous connaitrez, tu connaitrais, vous connaitriez, connais, connaissez. il Oil elle connait ; ils ou elles connaissent. il ou elle connaissait ; ils ou elles connaissaient. il ou elle connut ; ils oil elles connurent. il ou elle coimaitra; ils ou elles connaitront. il ou elle connaitrait ; ils ou elles connaitraient. qu'il ou qu'elle connaisse ; qu'ils ou qu' elles connaissent. qu'il ou qu'elle connaisse ; que tu connaisses, Que nous connais- que vous connaissiez, qu'ils ou quelles connaissent sions. Imp. Que je connusse, que tu connusses, qu'il ou qu'elle connut ; Que nous connus- que vous connussiez, qu'ils ou qu' elles connussent. sions. Conjugate after the same manner reconnoitre., to know again ; me- connaitrey not to know ; se meconnaitre, to forget one's self; apparai- ire, to appear ; comparaUre, to make one's appearance; disparaltre, to disappear ; paraitre, to appear ; reparditre, to appear again ; and, in general, all those ending in a1tre or oUre in the present of the infinitive: except cro'itre, to grow; naltre, to be born; and ^a ?/?• Que nous crussions. tu croiras, vous croirez, tu croirais, vous croiriez, crois, croyez, que tu croies, que vous croyiez, que tu crusses, que vous crussiez, il ou elle croira ; ils ou elles croiront. il ou elle croirait ; ils ou elles croiraient. qu'il ou qu'elle croie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles croient. qu'il ou qu'elle croie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles croient. qu'il ou qu'elle crut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles crussent. 13. Croitre, to grow [Neuter Verb] ; Croissant, growing; cx\\, crue, grown. Avoir cru, ayant cru. il ou elle croit ; ils ou elles croissent. il ou elle croissait ; ils ou elles croissaient. il ou elle crut ; ils ou elles crurent. il ou elle croitra; ils ou elles croitront. il ou elle croitrait ; ils ou elles croitraient. qu'il ou qu'elle croisse ; qu'ils ou qu'elles croissent. qu'il ou qu'elle croisse ; qu'ils ou qu'elles croissent. qu'il ou qu'elle crut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles crussent. Ind. Pres. Je crofs. Nous croissons, tu crois, vous croissez, Imp. Je croissais. Nous croissions, tu croissais, vous croissiez. Pret. Def. Je crus, Nous crume.s. tu crus, vous crutes. Fut. Je croitrai, Nous croitrons, tu croitras, vous croitrez. Cond. Pres. Je croitrais. Nous croitrions, tu croitrais, vous croitriez. Imperative. \^No \st person.'] Croissons, crois, croissez. Sub. Pres. Que je croisse, que tu croisses. Que nous croissions, que vous croissiez, Imp. Que je crusse, que tu crusses, Que nous crussions, que vous crussiez. Conjugate after the same manner accroitre *, to increase ; and de- cro^tre, to decrease. Croitre takes avoir in its compound tenses, when it is used to express the action of growing : as, — il a bien cru cette annee^ he has grown very much this year ; but it takes etrc, when it denotes the state in which one is : as, — il ripest 'point cru du tout, he is not grown at all. Ind. Pres. Je dis. Nous disons; Imp. Je disais. Nous disions. 14. Dire, to say, to tell [Active Verb] ; Disant, saying ; dit, dite, said. Avoir dit, ayant dit. tu dis, vous dites, tu disais, vous disiez. il ou elle dit ; ils ou elles diseut. il ou elle disait ; ils ou elles disaient. * Accru, past participle of accroitre, is written without accent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 187 Pret. Def. Je dis, Nous dimes, Fut. Je dirai, Nous dirons, Cond, Pres. Je dirais. Nous dirions, Imperative. [JVo 1st person.'] Disons, Sub. Pres. Queje dise, Que nous disions, Imp. Que je disse, Que nous dissions, tu dis, vous dites, tu diras, vous direz, tu dirais, vous diriez, dis, dites, que tu discs, que vous disiez, que tu disses, que vous dissiez. il on elle dit ; ils ou elles dirent, il ou elle dira ; ils ou elles diront. il ou elle dirait ; ils ou elles diraient. qu'il ou qu'elle dise; qu'ils ou qu' elles disent. qu'il ou qu'elle dise ; qu'ils ou qu' elles disent. qu'il ou qu'elle dit ; qu'ils ou qu' elles dissent. Conjugate after the same manner redire, to say again. The following verbs contredire^ to contradict ; dedire, to unsay, to disown ; interdire, to interdict; medire, to slander; maudire^ to curse; predire, to foretel; se djdire, to recant, to go from one's word, are also conjugated after the same manner, except in the second person plural of the present of the indicative, in which they take these terminations : — vous contredisez ; vous dcdisez ; vous interdisez ; vous medisez ; vous maudissez ; vous predisez ; vous vous dedisez ; and in the second person plural of the imperative, in which they are also terminated : — contredisez; dedisez; interdisez ; miidisez ; maudissez; predisez; dedisez-vous ; and not — contredites, dedites, medites, &c. Maudire takes two ^'s in the present participle maudissant, cursing; in the three persons plural of the present of the indicative: — nous mau- dissons, we curse; vous maudissez, you curse; ils ou elles maudis- sent, they curse ; in all the imperfect — Je maudissais, tu maudissais, il ou elle maudissait ; nous maudissions, vous ?naudissiez, ils ou elles maudissaient : in the three persons plural of the present of the sub- junctive — que nous maudissions, que vous maudissiez, quHls ou qu* elles maudissent : and in all the persons of the imperative, except in the second singular : as, — maudis, quHl ou qu^elle maudisse ; mau- disso?is, maudissez, qu'ils ou qu elles maudissent. In its other per- sons and tenses it is conjugated like dire. 15. Ecrire, to write [Active Verb] ; Ecrivant, writing ; ecrit, ecrite, written. Avoir ecrit, ayaut ecrit. Ind. Pres. J'ecris, Nous ecrivons. Imp. J'ecrivais, Nous ecrivions, Pret. Def. J'ecrivis, Nous ecrivinies, Fut. J'ecrirai, Nous ecrirons, tu ecris, vous ecrivez, tu ecrivais, vous ecriviez, tu ecrivis, vous ecrivites, tu ecriras, vous ecrirez. il ou elle ecrit ; ils ou elles ecrivent. il ou elle ecrivait ; ils ou elles ecrivaient. il ou elle ecrivit ; ils ou elles ecrivirent. il ou elle ecrira ; ils ou elles ecriront. 188 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. Cond. Pres . J'ecrirais, tu ecrirais, Nous ecririons. vous ecririez, Imperative .{.No 1st person. 1 Ecrivons, ecris, ecrivez, Sub. Pres. Que j'ecrive. que tu ecrives, Que nous ecrivions, que vous ecriviez, Imp. Que j'ecrivisse. que tu ecrivisses, Que nous ecrivis- que vous ecrivis- sions. siez. il ou elle ecrirait; ils ou elles ecriraient. qu'il ou qu'elle ecrive ; qu'ils ou qu'elles ecrivent. qu'il ou qu'elle ecrive ; qu'ils ou qu'elles ecrivent. qu'il ou qu'elle ecrivi't ; qu'ils ou qu'elles ecrivissent. Conjugate after the same manner the verbs circonscrire, to circum- scribe j decrire, to describe ; inscrire, to inscribe ; prescrire, to pre- scribe ; proscrire, to proscribe ; recrire, to write again ; souscrije, to subscribe; transcrire, to transcribe, &c. 16. Faire, to do, to make [Active Verb] ; Faisant. doinff ; fait, faite, do?ie. Avoii : fait, ayant fait. Ind. Pres. Je fais, Nous faisons, tu fais, vous faites, il ou elle fait ; ils otf elles font. Imp. Je faisais, Nous faisions, tu faisais, vous faisiez, il ou elle faisait ; ils ou elles faisaient. Pret. Def. Je fis, Nous fimcs, tu fis, vous f ites. il ou elle fit ; ils ou elles firent. Put. Je ferai, Nous ferons. tu feras, vous ferez, il ou elle fera ; ils ou elles feront. Cond. Pres. Je ferais, Nous ferions;, tu ferais, vous feriez. il ou elle ferait ; ils ou elles feraient. Imperative. [No \st person.] Faisons, fais, faites. qu'il ou qu'elle fasse ; qu'ils ou qu'elles fassent. Sub. Pres. Que je fasse. Que nous fassions, que tu fasses, que vous fassiez. qu'il ou qu'elle fasse ; qu'ils ou qu'elles fassent. Imp. Quejefisse, Que nous fissions. que tu fisses, que vuus fissiez. qu'il ou qu'elle fit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles fissent. Conjugate after the same manner contrefaire, to counterfeit, to mimic; defaire, to undo; redefatre, to undo again; refaire, to do again ; satisfaire, to satisfy ; surfaire, to ask too much. Forfaire, to forfeit, to act contrary to one's duty, is a neuter and defective verb, only used in the present of the infinitive, and in its compound tenses, which are formed with avoir, and the past participle forfait. It is principally employed at the bar, in speaking of the par- tiality of a judge ; as, — si un juge vient a forfaire, if a judge acts contrary to his duty. We also say, in a familiar style, when speaking of a woman who has suffered herself to be seduced : — elle a forfait a son honneur, she has forfeited her honour. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 189 17. Frire, to fry [Active and Defective Verb]. This verb is only used in the three persons singular of the present of the indicative — je fris^ tufris, il ou e lie frit ; in the future : je frirai, tu friras, il ou elle frira ; nous fr irons, vous frirez. Us ou elles friront ; in the conditional: je frirais, tu frirais, il ou elle frirait ; nous fririons, vous fririez, Us ou elles friraient ; in the second person singular of the imperative : fris ; in the present of the infinitive : frire; and in its compound tenses, which are formed with avoir and the past participle — frit, frite. To supply the persons and tenses which are wanting in this verb, the different tenses of the xerh fair e must be used with the infinitive /rzVe : as, — 710US faisons frire, vous faites frire. Us ou elles font frire ; je faisais frire, tu faisais frire, il ou elle faisait frire, &c. 18. Lire, to read [Active Verb] ; Lisaut, reading ; lu, lue, reo(f. Avoir hi, ayant lu. Irid. Pres. Je lis, Nous lisons. tu lis, vous lisez. il ou elle lit ; ils ou elles lisent. Imp. Je lisais, Nous lisions, tu lisais, vous lisiez, il ou elle lisait ; ils ou elles lisaient. Pre/. Def. Je lus. Nous lianes. tu lus, vous lutes. il ou elle lut ; ils ou elles lurent. Fut. Je lirai. Nous lirons. tu liras, vous lirez. il ou elle lira; ils oil elles liront. Cond. Pres. Je lirais, Nous lirions, tu lirais, vous liriez. il ou elle lirait ; ils ou elles liraieut. Imperative. \ No \st person. ~\ Lisons, lis, lisez. qu'il ou qu'elle Use; qu'ils ou qu' elles lisent. Suh. Pres. Que je lisc, Que nous lisions, que tu Uses, que vous lisiez. qu'il ou qu'elle lise ; qu'ils ou qu'elles lisent. Imp. Que je lusse, Que nous lussions, que tu lusses, que vous lussiez. qu'il ou qu'elle lut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles lussent. Conjugate after the same manner r el ire, to read again, Hire, to elect, and reelire, to elect again. 19. Mettre, to put [Active Verb] ; Mettant, putting ; mis, mise, pift. Avoir mis, ayant mis. Ind. Pres. Je mets, tu mets. Nous mettons, vous mettez. Imp. Je mettais, tu mettais, Nous mettions, vous mettiez, Prei. Def. Je mis, tu mis, vous mites, tu mettras, vous mettrez, Je mis. Nous mimes, Fut. Je mettrai. Nous mettrons. il ou elle met ; ils ou elles mettent. il ou elle mettait ; ils ou elles mettaient. il ou elle mit ; ils ou elles mirent. il ou elle mettra ; ils ou elles mettront. 190 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. Cond. Pres. Je mettrais, Nous mettrions. Imperative. \_No \st person.'] Mettons, tu mettrais, vous raettriez, mets, mettez, il ou elle mettrait ; ils oil elles mettraient. qu'il ou qu'elle mette ; qii'ils oic qu' elles mettent. Sub. Pres. Que je mette^ Que nous mettions, Que je misse, Que nous missions, Imp. qu'il on qu'elle mette ; qu'ils ou qu'elles mettent. qu'il ou qu'elle mit ', qu'ils ou qu'elles missent. que tu mettes, que vous mettiez^ que tu misses, que vous missiez. Conjugate after the same manner evefry verb compounded of mettre : such as, — admettre, to admit; commettre., to commit; compromettre, to compromise; demettre, to disjoint, to put out; omettre, to omit; permettre, to permit ; promettre, to promise ; remettre, to put or set again, to replace; soumettre, to submit; /?'an,yme'^/re, to transmit; se demettre, to resign ; s^entremetti'e, to interpose, &c. 20. Moudre, to grind [Active Verb] ; Moulant, grinding ; moulu, moulue, ground. Avoir moulu, ayant moulu. Ind. Pres. Je mouds, Nous moulons, tu mouds, vous moulez, il ou elle moud ; ils on elles moulent. Imp. Je moulais, Nous moulions, Pret. Def. Je moulus. Nous moulumes, Fui. Je moudrai. Nous moudrons, Cond. Pres. Je moudrais, Nous moudrious, Imperative. \_No \st person.] Moulons, Sub. Pres. Que je moule, Que nous moulions Imp. Que je moulusse tu moulais, vous mouliez, tu moulus, vous moulutes, tu moudras, vous moudrez, tu moudrais, vous moudriez, mouds, moulez, que tu monies, que vous mouliez, que tu moulusses, Que nous moulus- que vous moulus- qu'ils ou qu'elles moulus- sions, siez, sent. il ou elle moulait ; ils ou elles moulaient. il ou elle moulut ; ils ou elles moulurent. il ou elle moudra ; ils ou elles moudront. il ou elle moudrait ; ils ou elles moudraient. qu'il oil qu'elle moule ; qu'ils ou qu'elles moulent. qu'il ou qu'elle moule ; qu'ils ou qu'elles moulent. qu'il ou qu'elle moulut ; Conjugate after the same manner remoudre, to grind again. Emoudre, to grind (knives or razors), is also conjugated after the sanie manner, as likewise remoudre, to grind again, in the same sense. Emoudre is frequently used in the present of the infinitive with the different tenses of the verb faire : as, — faire emoudre des couteaux, des ciseaux, &c. to have knives or scissors ground. 21. Naitre, to he horn [Neuter Verb] ; Naissant, being born ; ne, nee, born, Etre ne, etant ne. Ind. Pres. Je nais. Nous naissons. tu nais, vous naissez, il ou elle nait ; lis oil elles naissent. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 191 il ou elle naissait ; ils ou elles naissaient. il ou elle naquit ; ils ou elles naquirent. il ou elle naitra ; ils ou elles naitront. il ou elle naitrait ; ils ou elles naitraient. qu'il ou qu'elle naisse ; qvi'ils ou qu'elles naissent. qxi'il ou qu'elle naisse ; qii'ils ou qu'elles naissent. qu'il ou qu'elle naquit; qu'ils ou qu'elles naquissent. Renaitre, to be born again, to revive, is conjugated after the same manner. Imp. Je naissais, Nous naissions, tu naissais, vous naissiez, Pret. Def. Je naquis, Nous naquimes, tu naquis, vous naquites, Fut. Je naitrai. Nous naitrons, tu naitras, vous naitrez, Cond. Pres. Je naitrais. Nous naitrions^ tu naitrais, vous naitriez, Imperative. \_No 1 st person.] Naissons, nais, naissez, Sub. Pres. Que je naisse, Que nous naissions, que tu naisses, que vous naissiez. Imp. Que je naquisse, Que nous naquis- sions. que tu naquisses, que vous naquis- siez, 22. Paitre, to graze [Active and Neuter Defective Verb] ; Paissant, grazing ; pu, pue^, grazed. Avoir pu, ayant pu. Ind. Pres. Je pais, tu pais, il ou elle pait ; Nous paissons, vous paissez, ils ou elles paissent. Imp. Je paissais, tu paissais, il ou elle paissait ; Nous paissions, vous paissiez, ils ou elles paissaient. [This verb has no preterit definite; the preterit definite of the verb/a?>e is \ised instead Avith the infinitive pai/re : thus, — -je Jis paitre, tu Jis paitre, il ou elle Jit paitre, &c.] Fut. Je paitrai. Nous paitrons, Cond. Pres. Je paitrais. Nous paitrions, Imperative. [iVo \st person.] Paissons, Sub. Pres, Que je paisse, tu paitras, vous paitrez, tu paitrais, vous paitriez, pais, paissez, que tu paisses. il ou elle paitra ; ils ou elles paitront. il oit elle paitrait ; ils ou elles paitraient. qu'il ou qu'elle paisse ; qu'ils ou qu'elles paissent. qu'il ou qu'elle paisse j qu'ils ou qu'elles paissent* Que nous paissions, que vous paissiez, [This verb has no imperfect of the subjunctive ; the imperfect of the subjunctive of /aire is used instead with the infinitive paitre : as, — que jejisse paitre, que tufisses paitre, &c,] Repaltre, to feed, and se repaitre, to feed one's self, are conjugated after the same manner; but they have a preterit definite in the indica- tive, and an imperfect of the subjunctive: as, — je repus, tu repus, &c. je me repus, tu te repus, &c. que je repusse, que tu repusses, &c. que je me repusse, que tu te repusses, quHl ou qu^elle se repid ; que nous nous repussions, que vous vous repussiez, quails ou qu'elles se re- pussent. Repaitre, used in the sense of eating, when speaking of men or horses 192 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. on a journey, is a neuter verb : as, — il a fait dix milles sans I'epaitre, he has travelled ten miles without baiting ; but, when it is employed in a figurative sense, it is an active verb : as, — elle repait son esprit de vaines chimeres, she entertains her mind with vain chimeras. In this sense, it is also used in a reflective manner : as, — Je ne me repais point de pareilles chimeres. — Rac. The x)ast participle pu is very little used, except with repu^ past par- ticiple of repaitre : as, — il a pu et repu. A circumflex accent is placed over the i before the #, in the above verbs, in the present of the infinitive and in the third person singular of the present of the indicative, and in all the future and conditional. 23. Plaire, to please [Neuter Verb] ; Plaisant, pleasing y plu [i.ndeeli7iabie'\, pleased. Jnd. Pres. Je })lais. Nous plaisons^ Imp. Je plaisals, Nous plaisions, Prel. Def. Je plus, Nous plumes, Ful. Je plairai, Nous plairons, Cond. Pres. Je plairais, Nous plairions, Imperative. [A^o \st perso7t.'\ Plaisons, Sub. Pres. Que je plaise, Que nous plaisions, Imp. Que je plusse, Que nous plussions, tu plais, vous plaisez, tu plaisais, vous plaisiez, tu plus, vous plutes, tu plairas, vous plairez, tu plairais, vous plairiez, plais, plaisez, que tu plaises, que vous plaisiez, que tu plusses, que voiis plussiez. Avoir plu, ayant plu. il ou elle plait ; ils ou elles plaisent. il ou elle plaisait ; ils ou elles plaisaient. il ou elle plut ; ils ou elles plurent. il ou elle plaira; ils oil elles plairont. il ou elle plairait ; ils ou elles plairaient. qu'il ou qu'elle plaise ; qu'ils 01/ qu'elles plaisent. qu'il ott qu'elle plaise ; qvi'ils ou qu'elles plaisent. qu'il ou qu'elle plut ; qu'ils ou qu'elles plussent. Conjugate after the same manner all verbs compounded of plaire : such as, — deplaire, to displease ; complaire, to humour, to please, &c. Taire, to conceal ; and se taire, to forbear talking, to be silent, to liold one's tongue, are also conjugated after the same manner : but se iaire, being a reflective verb, takes etre in its compound tenses. Ind. Pres. Imp. 24. Preiidre, to take [Active Verb] ; Prenant, taking ; pris, prise, taken. Avoir pris, ayant pris. Je prends. Nous prenons, Je prenais, Nous prenions. tu prends, vous prenez, tu prenais, vous preniez, il ou elle prend ; ils ou elles prennent. il ou elle prenait ; ils ou elles prenaient. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 393 Fret. Def. Je pris, Nous primes, Flit. Je prendraij Nous prendrons, Cotid. Pres. Je prendrais. Nous prendrions, Imperative [Ao \st person^ Prenons, Sub. P7'es. Que je prenne, Que nous prenions. Imp. Que je prisse. Que nous prissions. tu pris, vous prites, tu prendras, vous prendrez, tu prendrais, vous prendriez, prends, prenez, que tu prennes, que vous preniez, que tu prisses, que vous prissiez, il ou elle prit ; ils ou elles prirent. il ou elle prendra ; ils ou elles prendront. il oil elle prendrait ; ils ou elles prendraient. qu'il ou qu'elle prenne ; qu'ils ou qu' elles prennent. ' qu'il ou qu'elle prenne; qu'ils ou qu' elles prennent. quil ou qu'elle prit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles |)rissent. Conjugate after the same manner all verbs ending in endre, in the present of the infinitive, in enant^ in the present participle, and in is, in the past participle : as, — apprendre, to learn ; comprendre^ to com- prehend; desapprendre, to unlearn, to forget; enireprendre, to un- dertake ; rapprendre, to learn again ; reprendre, to take again : se meprendre, to mistake ; surprcndre, to surprise ; ^6? deprendre, to disengage one's self, &c. The n, in these verbs, is always doubled in the tenses in which it comes before e, es, or ent, mute : as, — que fapprenne, que in ap- prenneSf qu'il ou qu^elle apprenne, quails ou qu'elles apprennenty &c. 25. Rt^soudre, to resolve and dissolve [Active Verb]; Resolvant, resolving; resolu, resolue, resolved; et resous [without fe7iiinine'], dissolved. Avoir resolu, ayant resolu. Ind. Pres. Je resous, tu resous, Nous resolvous, vous resolvez. Imp. Je resolvais, tu resolvais, Nous resolvions, vous resolviez, Pret. Def. Je resolus, tu resolus. Nous resolumes, vous resolutes, Fut. Je resoudrai, tu resoudras. Nous resoudrons, vous resoudrez, Cond. Pres. Je resoudrais, tu resoudrais. Nous resoudrions, vous resoudriez, Imperative. \_No ^st persoyx.'] resous, Resolvous, r6solvez, Suit. Pres. Que je resolve, que tu resolves. Que nous resolvions, qOie vous resolviez, Imp. Que je resolusse, que tu resolusses. Que nous resolus- que vous resolus- qu'ils ou qu'elles r^solus- sions, siez, sent. This verb has two past participles : the first is — resolu, resolue, in the sense of to resolve, to determine, to decide : as,— ce jeune homme a il ou elle resout ; ils ou elles resolvent, il ou elle resolvait ; ils ou elles resolvaient. il ou elle resolut ; ils ou elles resolurent. il ott elle resoudra ; ils ou elles resoudront. il ou elle resoudrait ; ils ou elles resoudraient. qu'il ou qu'elle resolve ; qu'ils ou qu'elles resolvent, qu'il ou qu'elle resolve ; qu'ils ou qu'elles resolvent. qu'il ou qu'elle resolut ; 194 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. resolu de changer de conduite, this youDg man has determined to change his conduct ; and resous, without feminine, meaning dissolved : as, — le soleil a resous le brouillard en pluie, the sun has dissolved the fog into rain. Conjugate after the same manner se resoudre, to be resolved, to form a resolution, and se resoudre, to be dissolved, to melt. 26. Rire to laugh [Neuter Verb] ; Riant, iaz/ghing ; ri {indeclinable'], lavghed. Avoir ri, ayant ri. Ind. Pres. Je ris, Nous rions. tu ris, vous riez, il ou elle rit ; lis ou elles rient. Imp. Je rials, Nous riions. tu rials, vous rliez. 11 ou elle riait ; ils ou elles riaient. Pret. Def. Je x\s, Nous rimes. tu ris, vous rites. il ou elle rit ; ils ou elles rirent. Put. Je rirai. Nous rirons. tu riras, vous rirez. il ou elle rira ; ils ou elles riront. Cond. Pres Je rirais. Nous ririons. tu rirais, vous ririez. il ou elle rirait ; ils ou elles riraieut. Imperative [No 1 St person.] Rions, ris, riez. qu'il ou qu'elle rie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles rient. Sub. Pres. Que je rie. Que nous riions, que tu ries, que vous rilez. qu'il ou qu'elle rie ; qu'ils ou qu'elles rient. Imp Que j e risse. Que nous rissions, que tu risses, que vous rissiez. qii'il ou qu'elle rit ; qu'ils ou qvi' elles rissent Conjugate after the same manner se rire de, to laugh at, except in its compound tenses, which are formed with etre, like other reflective verbs. Sourire, to smile, is also conjugated after the same manner, taking avoir in its compound tenses. 27. Rompre, to break [Active Verb]; Rompant, breaking ; rompu, rompue, broken. Avoir rompu, ayant rompu. Ind. Pres. Je romps, tu romps. Nous rompons, vous rompez, Imp. Je rompais, tu rompais. Nous rompions, vous rompiez, Pret. Def. Je rompis, tu rompis, Nous rompimes, vous rompites. Put. Je romprai, tu rompras. Nous romprons, vous romprez, Cond. Pres. Je roraprais, tu romprais. Nous romprions, vous rompriez. il ou elle rompt ; ils ou elles rompent. il ou elle rompait ; ils ou elles rompaient. il ou elle rompit ; ils ou elles rompirent. il ou elle rompra ; ils ou elles rompront. il ou elle romprait ; ils ou elles rompraient. IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 195 Imperative. \_No \st person.^ Rompons, Sub. P?-es. Qvie je rompe. Que nous rompions, Imp. Que je rompisse. Que nous rompis- sions. romps, rompez, que tu rompes, que vous rompiez, que tu rompisses, que vous rompissiez, qu'il ou qu'elle rompe; qu'ils ou qu'elles rorapent. qu'il ou qu'elle rompe ; qu'ils ou qu'elles rompent. qu'il 021 qu'elle rorapit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles rompissent. Conjugate after the same manner corrompre, to corrupt, and inter' rompre^ to interrupt. 28. Sourdre, to spring [Neuter and Defective Verb]. This verb is only employed in speaking of fountains, springs, and rivers which rise out of the earth. Its only tenses in use are the present of the infinitive, and the third persons singular and plural of the present of the indicative : as, — ce marais sera difficile a dessecher,on y voit sourdre des eaitx de tons cotes, this marsh will be drained with difficulty, from the springs rising in every part. On dit que le Rhin, le Rhone, et le Pu, soiirdent au pied de la meme montagne, it is said that the Rhine, the Rhone, and the P6, take their rise at the foot of the same mountain. 29. Suivre, to follow [Active Verb] ; Suiv sent, following ; suivi, suiwie, followed. Avoir suivi, ayant suivi. Ind. Pres. Je suis. Nous suivons, tu suis, vous suivez, il ou elle suit ; ils ou elles suivent. Imp. Je suivais. Nous suivions, tu suivais, vous suiviez. il ou elle suivait ; ils ou elles suivaient.' Fret. Def. Je suivis, Nous suivimes, tu suivis, vous suivites. il ou elle suivit ; ils ou elles suivirent. Fut. Je suivrai, Nous suivrons. tu suivras, vous suivrez, il ou elle suivra ; ils ou elles suivront. Cond. Pres Je suivrais. Nous suivrions. tu suivrais, vous suivriez, il ou elle suivrait ; ils ou elles suivraient. Imperative \^No \st person.'] Suivons, suis, suivez. qu'il ou qu'elle suive ; qu'ils ou qu'elles suivent. Sub. Pres. Que je suive, Que nous suivions, que tu suives, que vous suiviez, qu'il ou qu'elle suive ; qu'ils ou qu'elles suivent. Imp. Que je suivisse. Que nous suivissions que tu suivisses, , que vous suivissiez. qu'il ou qu'elle suivit ; qu'ils ou qu'elles suivissent. Conjugate after the same manner poursuivre, to pursue, to prosecute. S''ensuivre, to follow, to result, is also conjugated after the same manner ; but it is only used in the third persons singular and plural of its diiferent tenses, either simple or compound, and in the present of the infinitive : as, — un grand Men s^ensuivit, much good resulted from it. Tons les maux qui s^ensuivireiit, all the evils which resulted from it^ This verb is also frequently used in an impersonal manner with the pronoun il, in the third person singular of its different tenses, in the k2 196 IRREG. VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. sense of resulting : as, — il s^ensuit de Id que, . , hence it follows that. . ; de cette proposition, il s^ensuivit que. ., from that proposition, it fol- lowed that ... Its compound tenses are formed with eii'e. 30. Tistre, to weave [Neuter and Defective Verb]. This verb is only used in its compound tenses, which are formed with its past participle tissi^, woven, and the different tenses of either avoir or et?'e, according as we wish to express an action, or the state of the thing mentioned, Tisser is its substitute in the other tenses : thus v/e say, — Tisser du lin, de la laine, du colon, to weave flax, wool, cotton. Tissu is used, both in a natural and figurative sense, either as a substantive or a participle : thus, — vn drop bien tissu, a well woven cloth ; un tissu d'or, d''argent, de soie, a gold, silver, or silk lace ; un long tissu de belles actions, a long series of noble actions. 31. Traire, to milk [Active and Defective Verb]; Trayant, milking ; trait, traite, milked. Avoir trait, ayant trait. Ind. Pres. Je trais, tu trais, il ou elle trait ; Nous trayons, vous trayez, ils 02i elles traient. Imp. Je trayais, tu trayais, il ou elle trayait ; Nous trayions, vous trayiez, ils ou elles trayaient. [ This verb has no pretent dejifiite.'] Ful. Je ti airai, tu trairas, il im elle traira ; Nous trairons, vous trairez, ils oit elles trairont. Cond. Pres. Je trairais, tu trairais, il ou elle trairait ; Nous trairions, vous trairiez, ils ou elles trairaient. Imperative. \ No \st person. 1 trais, qu'il ou qu'elle traie; Trayons, trayez, qu'ils ou qu'elles traient. Sub. Pres. Que je traie, que tu traies, qu'il ou qu'elle traie ; Que nous trayions, que vous trayiez, qu'ils ou qu'elles traient. l^There is 7io imperfect of the subjunctive.'] Conjugate after the same maimer the verbs derived from traire: such as — atiraire, to attract, to entice ; ahstraire, to abstract ; ex~ j not mow, Qu'il neige. qu'il ne neige pas. Imp. That it might snow, that it ytiighf ?iot snow, Qu'il neigeat. qu'il ne neigeat pas. Pret. Def. It snowed, II neigea. Fvt. It win snow, II neigera. Cond.Pres. It would snow, II neigerait. neige-t-il ? was it snowing ? neigeait-il ? did it snow ? neigea-t-il ? will it snow ? neigera-t-il ? would it snow ? neigerait-il ? ne neige-t-il pas ? was it not snowing ? ne neig»ait-il pas ? did it not snow ? ne neigea-t-il pas ? will it not snow ? ne neigera-t-il pas ? would it not snow ? ne neigerait-il pas ?j UNIPERSONAL VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUG. 199 The compound tenses of this verb are formed by the addition of its past participle neige to the third persons singular of the simple tenses of avoir : as, — // a neige, it has snowed ; il n^a pas neige, it has not snowed; a-t-il neige? has it snowed? n'a-t-il pas neige? has it not snowed? &c. Conjugate after the same manner bruiner, to drizzle; greler, to hail; geler, to freeze ; degeler, to thaw ; tonner, to thunder ; eclairer, to lighten ; importer, to concern ; resulter, to result. Arriver, to happen ; sembler, to seem ; or any other verb of the first conjugation, when used in an unipersoiial manner, are also conjugated after the same model. Arriver takes etre in its compound tenses. Second Conjugation. 1. Saillir, to project [Neuter and Defective Verb]; SaxWdiXd, projecting ; sailli, saillie,p/-o/ec/e£/. Avoir sailli, ayant sailli. Ind. Pres. It projects, does it does not project, does it project ? does it not project ? project, or is projecting, II saille. il ne saille pas. saille-t-il ? uc saille-t-il pas ? Imp. It projected, it did not project, did it project ? did it 7iot project ? II saillait. il ne saillait pas. saillait-il ? ne saillait-il pas ? [ This verb has no preterit dejxnite.^ Fut. It will project, it will not project, will it project^ will it not project? II saillera. il ne saillera pas. saillera-t-il ? ne saillera-t-il pas ? Cond.Pres. It would project, it would 7iot project, would it project? ivould it not project? 11 saillerait. il ne saillerait pas. saillerait-il.'' ne saillerait-il pas ? \_No imperative. '\ Sub. Pres. That it may project, that it may not project, Qu'il saille. qu'il ne saille pas. Imp. That it might project, that it might not project, Qu'il saillit. qu'il ne saillit pas. Observe. — As saillir is not an unipersonal verb, it may be preceded by the pro- noun elle for its nominative or subject, when referring to a substantive feminine singular, either expressed or understood; it may also be used in the third persons plural of its different tenses., with the pronoun ik ou elles : as, — il on elle saille, Us ou elles sail lent I il ou elle saillait, ils ou elles saillaient ; il ou elle saillera, ils ou elles sailferont ; Hon elle saillerait, ils on elles sailleraient ; qu il on qu'' elle saille, qu'i/s on qu^ elles saillent. Such is the conjugation of «ai7/jV, when used with reference to a balcony, a cornice, or anj' other ornament of architecture, projecting from the main part of a building: as, — ce baicon saille trop, Was balcony projects too muchj cette corniche ne mille pas assez, this cornice does not project enough, &c. But when saillir is employed to describe the gushing or spouting out of liquid bodies, it is then conjugated like the vevh Ji?tir : as, — saillir, saillissant, sailli; avoir sailli, ayant sailli ; je saillis, tu saillis, Scc.je saillissats, tu saillissais, &c. Ex.; le sang saillis- sait de sa veine avec impituosite. On fait saillir Peau a ime trts-grande hauteur par la compression qu^on en fait dans les pompes. 200 UNIPERSONAL VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUG. Unipersonal Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 1. Falloir, i to he necessary [1 Jnipersonal Verb] ; [No pres. pari.'] fallu [indeclinable'], been necessary. Avoir fallu, ayant fallu. Ind. Pres. It is necessary, 11 faut. it is not necessary, il ne faut pas. is it necessary ? fant-il ? is it not necessary ? ne faut-il pas ? ' Jmp. It was neces- it was not neces- was it neces- was it not neces- sary, 11 fallait. sary, il ne fallait pas. sary 7 fallait-il.^ sary ? ne fallait-il pas ? Pret. Def. It was neces- it was not neces- wan it neces- was it not neces- sary, 11 faliut. sary, il ne faliut pas. sary ? fallut-il ? sary ? ne fallut-il pas ? Put. It will be ne- il will not be neces- will it be neces- will it not be neces- sary, 11 faudra. sary, il ne faudra pas. sary ? faudra-t-il ? sary ? ne faudra-t-il pas ? Cond. Pres. It would be ne- it would 7iot be ne- would it be ne- woidd it not be ne- cessary, 11 faudrait. cessary, il ne faudrait pas. cesary ? faudrait-il ? cessary ? ne faudrait-il pas ? [No imperative.] Sub. Pres. That it may be that it may not be 7i€cessary, Qu'il faille, necessary, qu'il ne faille pas. /♦WJ9. That it might be that it might not be necessary, Qu'il faimt. necessary, qu'il ne faliut pas. The compound tenses of this verb are formed by the addition of its past participle fallu to the third persons singular of the simple tenses of avoir : as, — il a fallu, it has been necessary ; il ri'a pas fallu, it has not been necessary ; a-t-il fallu ? has it been necessary ? n^a-t-il pas fallu ? lias it not been necessary? il avail fallu, it had been ne- cessary, &c. 2. Pleuvoir, to rain [Unipersonal Verb] ; Pleuvant, raining; plu [indeclinable], rained. Avoir plu, ayant plu. Ind, Pres. It rains, does it does not rain, rain, or is raining, II pleut. does it rain ? il ne pleut pas. pleut-il ? Imp. It was raining, il was not raining, was it raining II pleuvait. il ne pleuvait pas. pleuvait-il ? Pret. Def. Il rained, it did not rain, did it rndn ? II plut. il ne plut pas. plut-il ? Put. It will rain, it will not rain, will it rain ? II pleuvra. il ne pleuvra pas. pleuvra-t-il ? does it not rain ? ne pleut-il pas ? was it not raining ? ne pleuvait-il pas i* did it not rain $ ne plut-il pas ? will it not rain ? ne pleuvra-t-il pas ? UNIPERSONAL VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUG. 201 Cond. Pres. It would rain, II pleuvrait. Sub. Pres. TTiaftt mat/ rain, Qu'il pleuve. Imp. That it might rain, Qu'il pliit. it would not rain, would it rain ? would it not rain ? il ne pleuvrait pas. pleuvrait-il ? ne pleuvrait-il pas ? [;Vo imperative.^ that it may not rain, qu'il ne pleuve pas. that it might not rain, qu'il ne plut pas. The compound tenses of pleuvoir are formed by the addition of its past participle -plu to the third persons singular of the simple tenses of avoir : as, — il a pluy it has rained ; il n*a pas phi^ it has not rained ; a-t-il plu ? has it rained ? n^a-t-il pas flu 1 has it not rained ? il avail plu, it had rained, &c. 3. Eclioir, to he or fall due, to expire [Neuter and Defective Verb]; Echeant, being due ; echu, echue, been due. Etre echu, etant echu. Ind. Pres. It becomes due, it does not become does it becon\e does it 7iot become due. due 9 due? 11 echoit on il n'echoit pas. echoit-il ? n'echoit-il pas ? echet. Imp. It was due. it was not due. was it due ? was it 7iot due ? 11 echeait. il n'echeait pas. 6clieait-il ? n'echeait-il pas ? Pret. Def. It was or be- it was fiot due. was it due ? was it not due f came due. 11 echut. il n'echut pas. echut-il ? n'echut-il pas ? Fut. It will be due. it will 7iot be due. will it be due ? unll it 7iot be due ? 11 echerra. il n'echerra pas. echcrra-t-il ? n'echerra-t-il pas ? Cond. Pres. It would be due. it would not be due. would it be due ? would it /lot be due f 11 echerrait. il n'echerrait pas. echerrait- il ? n'echerrait-il pas ? [A'o imperative.} Sub. Pres. That it may be That it may not be due, due. Qu'il echee. qu'il n'echee pas. Imp. That it might be 77m/ if might not be due. due. Qu'il echut. qu'il n'echut pas. The compound tenses of this verb are formed by adding its past participle ecJm to the third persons singular or plural of the different tenses of avoir, to expres the action of a bill or bills falling due : as, — mon billet a echic le premier de ce mois, my bill became due on the first of this month ; but echu is added to the third persons singular or plural of the different tenses of etre, to denote the state of a bill being due : as, — cet effet est echu, this bill is due ; il ripest pas encore echu, it is not yet due ; est-il echu ? is it due ? n^est-il pas echu ? is it not due, &c. The present of the infinitive eclioir is frequently used with the diffe- rent tenses of devoir : as, — cet effet a dCi echoir le vingt de Mars, this bill must have been due on the twentieth of March. K.5 202 UNIPERSONAL VERBS;OF THE FOURTH CONJUG. Echoir may also be used in the third persons plural of its different tenses : as, — ils echoient, Us echurent, Us echerront, Us echerraient, quails echeentj qu'ds echussent. 4. Seoir, to Jit [Neuter and Defective Verb] ; S&Yaxii, fitting ; sis, sise*, situated. Ind. Pres. It fits, II sied. it does not fit, il ne sied pas. does it fit ? sied-il ? does it not fit ? ne sied-il pas ? Imp. It fitted, 11 seyait. it did not fit, il ne seyait pas. did it fit 9 seyait-il ? did it not fit ? ne seyait-il pas ? [ This verb has no ft eterit definite.] Put. It will fit, 11 siera. it will not fit, il ne siera pas. will it fit ? siera-t-il ? will it not fit ? ne siera-t-il pas? Cond. Pres. It would fit, ■ 11 sierait. it would not fit, il ne sierait pas. would it fit ? sierait-il ? would it not fit 9 ne sierait-il pas ? \_No imperative^ Sub. Pres. That it may fit, Qu'il siee. that it may not fit, qu'il ne siee pas. \No imperfect.'] This verb may also be used in the third persons as, — Us sieenty quHls sieent. It has no compound plural of its tenses tenses. Fourth Conjugation. 1, Eclore, to hatch, to blow, to open [Neuter and Defective Verb] j \_No present participle.] Eclos, eclose, hatched. Etre eclos, etant eelos. Ind. Pres. II eclot, il n'eclot pas ; ecl6t-il ? n'6cl6t-il pas ? [ This verb has no imperfect nor preterit definite.] Put. II eclora, Cond.Pres.ll §clorait, Sub. Pres. Qu'il eclose, il n'6clora pas ; eclora-t-il ? il n'eclorait pas ; eclorait-il ? l_No imperative.] qu'il n'eclose pas. [A^o imperfect.] n'6clora-t-il pas ? n'eclorait-il pas ? This verb, not being an unipersonal one, maybe preceded by the pro- noun elle, for its subject, when referring to an antecedent feminine singular ; it may also be used in the third persons plural of its tenses : * The past participle sis, sise, is only used now as an adjective, in the sense of siiite., situee: thus, — une maison sise a, . . ., a house situated at. . . . OF NEGATIONS. 203 as, — il ou elle eclot, Us ou elles eclosent; il ou elle eclora^ Us ou elles ecloront; il ou elle ecloraU, Us ou elles ecloraient ; quHl ou qu^elle eclosey quails ou qu'elles eclosent. Its compound tenses are formed by the addition of its past participle eclos to the third persons singular or plural of the simple tenses of etre : as, — U est eclos, it is hatched ; Us ne sent pas eclos, they are not hatched, &c. Eclore is not only used in speaking of oviparous animals, such as birds, insects ; it is also employed in speaking of flowers blowing, and of different things that begin to appear. 2. Braire, to bray [Neuter and Defective Verb]. This verb, which expresses the cry of the ass, is seldom used but in the present of the infinitive braire : in the third persons singular and plural of the present of the indicative — il ou elle braii, ils ou elles braiefit : in the third persons of the future — il ou elle braira, ils ou elles hrairont : and in the third persons of the condi- tional — il ou elle bruiraif, ils ou elles brairaient. 3. Bruire, to roar [Neuter and Defective Verb]. This verb is only used in the present of the infinitive, in the present participle, and in the third persons singular and plural of the imperfect of the indicative : as, — bruire, bruyant ; il briiyait, ils bruyaient. In the other tenses we use — faire du hruit i rendre un son confus: as, — on entendait bruire les vagues, you coidd hear the roaring of the waves ; les flots bruyaient horriblement, the waves were roaring dread- fully. LESSON XXII. Of Negations and Interrogations, 1. OF NEGATIONS. How to express in French not, no, not that, no more, neither, nor, never, by no means. 1. Not. When not is used with a verb in English, it is expressed in French by ne pas or ne point, placing ne or ?i' before the verb in a simple tense, with pas* or point ^ after it; and ne or ti' before the * DISTINCTION BETWEEN PAS AND POINT. Pas and point are often indifferently used in negative sentences, with this differ- ence, however, that /)om^ denies more absolutely than /7as, meaning not at all: for instance, — Je ne vais point a la comtdie, I do not go to the pla}^, signifies that I never go; whilst je? ne vais pas a la comedie, may imply that I do not go now, or this evening, although I may sometimes go. In interrogative sentences, point is generally used, when doubt is entertained about the thing mentioned, and pas when we are certain of it : as for instance, — ti'avez-vous point vu ma soeur? have you not seen my sister ? implies that I am totally ignorant whether you have or have not seen her ; but n'avez-vous pas vu ma soeur, signifies that I am conscious you have seen her, and I msh to let you know it. 204 OF NEGATIONS. auxiliary in a compoimd one, with also pas or point after it ; that is, be- tween the auxiliary and the participle; and if any pronoun is to precede the verb as its object, placing it between ne and the verb in a simple tense, and between ne and the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — I do not speak, je ne parle pas ; he has not written, il n^a pas ecrit ; has it not rained ? n^a-t-il pas plu ? I have not it, je ne Vai pas ; she has not seen him, elle ne Va pas vu, &c. always leaving out the words does, do, or did, which the English generally use in negative and hiterro- gative sentences, in the present, imperfect, and preterit of the indi- cative. If the verb should be in the present of the infinitive mood in French, both ne pas or ne point come more elegantly before it, placing the- pro- nouns /e, la, les, lui, ou leur, v;hen used as its object, between ne and pas or point : as, — it is disagreeable not to speak French, il est desagreable de ne pas parler Franpais ; it is prudent not to say it, il est prudent de ne le pas dire. When these four verbs — cesser, to cease ; oser, to dare ; pouvoir, to be able ; aud savoir, to know ; are employed with a negative in English, they are more commonly used in French with ne only before the verb, in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, without pas or point after it ; although if we wish to express a complete nep;a- tion, pas or point should be used after the verb or the auxiliary : as, — I cannot do it, je ne le puis ou je ne le puis pas. I dare not- say it, je n'ose le dire, &c. Not, used in a reply to a question before an adverb or any other word, is expressed in French by pas only : as, — how do you do, madam ? not very w^ell, sir; comment x^ous portez-vous, madame? pas trcs-hien, monsieur. 2. No. When 7io is used in English in reply to a question, it is con- strued into French by non : as, — have you seen him ? no, sir ; Pavez- vous vu ? non, monsieur. Not, employed in the second part of a sen- tence after or, whether the phrase be interrogative or negative, is like- wise expressed by 7ion : as, — will you do it or not? voulez-vous le jairc ou non? — whether he come or not, I do not care, qu^il vienne ou non, je ne ni'en soucie pas. No, used in reply to a question, is Ukewise expressed by point., non pas, or nmni, if in a familiar style: as, — will you have any? no; fw voulez-vous? point; will you give me this? no, miss; vou/ez-vovs me donner ceci? non pas, tnndemoise.'/e ; do you come with me, my dear P no, madam ; vcnez-vous avec mot, ma chtre? nenni, madame. 3. Not that is expressed in French by non que, non pas que, ce n^est Pas and point require sometimes de or d' before the next word: as, — there is no answer, il ii't/ a pas ou point de reponse. Pus de ou point de must be repeated in French before every word aflPectod by tio in English: as, — she has no friends, no money, no resources, etle n\i point d'owj?. point Sargent, point de ressources. OF NEGATIONS. 205 pas que, according as it sounds best, Avith the following verb in the subjunctive mood : as, — I will do it, not that I am obliged to it, but for the sake of their children, je le ferai, non que oil non pas que j*y sois oblige, mais pour Vamour de leurs enfans. 4. No more and not any more. When no more comes after a verb, or when not is used after one of the words does, do, did, shall, will, would, and should, with any more after the following verb ; or also, when not is employed after the auxiliary have, with any more after the next participle, as in these sentences — / saw him no more ; I have not seen him any more ; no more and not any more, &c. are ex])ressed in French hy plus after the verb in a simple tense, with ne before it, and by p/w.y. after the auxiliary in a compound one, with also ne before it, fol- lowing the same rules for the place of the pronouns which may be used as the objects of the verb as with 7iot : as, — I saw him no more, je ne le vis phis. I have not seen her any more, /e ne Pai plus rue, &c. Should no more be followed by than, it is then expressed by pas plus after the verb, with ne before it, as above : as, — my sister is no more than twenty, ma soeur n^a pas plus de vingt ans. 5. Neither and nor, used before two nouns, or two verbs in the pre- sent of the infinitive mood ; neither coming before the first, and nor before the second ; or also any before a substantive which follows a verb used negatively, with or or nor before the next substantive : as, — I have neither friends nor money ; she can neither sing nor dance; do not put any sugar or milk in my tea ; are expressed in French by ni before the first noun or verb, with jii before the second, putting ne before the verb which precedes them, but without pas or point after it : as, — I have neither friends nor money, je n''ai ni amis ni argent ; she can neither sing nor dance, elle ne salt ni chanter ni danser ; do not put any sugar or milk in my tea, ne mettez ni sucre ni lait dans mon the. Neither and nor, being used before two verbs in the indicative mood, neither before the first and nor before the second, are expressed in French thus — neither by ne, before the first verb, and nor by ni ne before the second : as, — I neither love nor hate her, je ne Paime ni ne la hais. Neither, at the end of a sentence, is expressed in French by non plus : as, — he will not have it, nor I neither, il ne le veut pas, ni moi non plus. 6. Never and hy no means, employed with a verb, are expressed in French by ne before the verb in a simple tense, with jamais or nulle- ment after it, and ne before the auxiliary in a compound one, with also jamais or nullement after it : that is, between the auxiliary and the participle, without ever using pa? or point in this case ; but placing the pronouns which may be employed as objects of the verb between ne and the verb in a simple tense, and between ne and the auxiliary in a com- pound one : as, — she will never come, elle ne viendra jamais ; she is by no means obliging, elle n'^est nullement obligeante. I never saw him before, /(? ne Pai jamais vu auparavant. 206 OF NEGATIONS. If the verb should be in the present of the infinitive, both ne and jamais elegantly precede it : as, — it is praiseworthy never to speak an untruth, ii est louable de ne jamais meniir. Neve?' and by no means, used by themselves in answer to a question, are also expressed in French hy jamais and nullement, without ne ; but never preceded by no is construed by non jamais : as, — have you seen the king ? no, never; avez-vous vu le roil non, jamais. Jamais may be placed at the head of a sentence in some particular cases, which can only be learnt by use ; ne is then required before the verb : as, — I never saw so amiable a lady, jamais, je n'ai vu ou je n'ai jamais vu de dame si aimahle. Jamais, followed by a substantive taken in a partitive sense, requires de or d^ before such substantive, in the sense of some or any in English : as, — I never drink any water, j'e ne hois jamais d'eaw. ESSAY XXII. When the abbreviations, suh. pr. — sub, imp. — sub. pret. — and sub. plu. occur before a French verb, in the following essays, they denote that it is to be put either in the present, imperfect, preterit, or pluperfect of the subjunctive. The Misses S * * do not excel in music. — Your brothers have not made Demoiselle exceller dans faire any progress in the (Italian language). — Do you not know her ? — She de ItaHen connaitre pret. def. confessed that she would not have spoken to me, (had she not been in want) of avouer si die rC avail pas eu besoin money. — It is very unpleasant not to speak French. — How disappointed I argent II d^sagriable ^Qi/e ^contrarie ^imp. was at not (being able) to* go with them. — How does* your mother do ? de pouvoir se porter Not very well, madam; she had again a relapse yesterday. — Will you pret. def. encore rec.hute call at Lady D.'s to-day P No, sir, I think she is gone into the passer^ chez^ •■ 4^)*** ^aujourd^hui croire qiC a country; besides, I have not the pleasure of (knowing) her. — Whether she de plus connaitre Q'J writes to me or not, I shall not go. — Will you give me one of these suh. pr. ecrire Fouloir apples, my dear ?— No, sir ; they are not mine. — The proverb " no virtue no a moi proverbe point happiness" is not so true as this one, " no money no paternoster." — He is not vrai celui-ci Suisse very particular in his dress, although he always dresses very recherche habits fl. quoiqu"" ^ sub. pr. ^se mettre genteelly. — I cannot go and''' letch them. — Her parents are in a very mise- proprement ne pouvoir chercher rable condition, they have no money, no means of (getting) any, and no friends etat moijens gugner on whom they can depend. Well! I will give them some relief; sur siib.pr. pouvoir compter Eh bien quelques secours OF NEGATIONS. 20*7 not that I think they deserve it, but for the sake of their children.— sub. pr. croi?'e gu' mn'iter amour (It was) a delicious fruit, but we have not any more (of it). — You will see Citait dclicieux 124 5 3^^ ^^^y him no more after this week. — My little boy is no more than six or seven j^ears semaine garcon a de old*. — They are no forwarder than they were when they came to plus avanct imp. quand pret, def. venir town. — She can neither read nor write. — You have not put any sugar or milk savoir lire tcrire mettre in my coffee. — I neither love nor hate her. — She neither pleases nor displeases aimer hair plaire deplaire me.— They do not care for it, nor I neither. — Why do you say so, ^ 2 V ^soucier '^e/i dire cela since you know she cannot* speak English ? — I dare not tell her puisque qil ne parler pas Anglais oser ^dire Vui (of it). (Some people) do not cease complaining of Fortune, Ve I^ y o, des gens m. pi. qui cesser de se pfaindre — although they are loaded with her favours. — Time past never returns, sub. pr. cotnblt de faveur passe revenir and a word once uttered cannot (be recalled). — Never speak ill of (others). une fois prononcer elre rappele mal atdrui —I by no means approve of* his conduct. — Love your children; never blame approuver conduite bldmer them without cause, and never reprove them with passion. — It is noble never raison reprimander coltre ^ to deceive (any body).— Will you consent (to it)? — No, never. — Never did* I ^de ^romper personne y (see any thing) like it*. — Never man had more success with so little «'a« vu rien de semblable de si pen de merit. — I never drink any water. boire LESSON XXIII. Cases in which ne is used in French before a verb, loithout pas or point after it, although there is no negative in English. 1. Ne is used in French before a verb after que, when que comes after the comparatives 'plus, moins, mieux, meilleur, or the words autre and autrement, if the verb preceding these expressions be em- ployed affirmatively, or even sometimes interrogatively : as, — I love you more tenderly than I ever did any other lady, /e vous aime plus tendre- ment que je \\^ at jamais aime aucunc autre dame. She is better to-day than she was yesterday, elte est mieux aujourcVhui qu'elle n^ctait hier. Does he write better than he speaks ? ecrit-il mieux qu'il ne parle ? But if the verb preceding plus, mains, mieux, meilleur, or autre and autrement, be used negatively, ne is not then required before the verb 208 . OF NEGATIONS. following que : as, — she is not more amiable than she was formerly, elle ripest pas plus aimable qu*elle etait autrefois, and not — qu'el'le n^etait. Should the verb preceding que, as well as that which follows it, be in the present of the infinitive; or if, not being in the present of the infinitive, a conjunction should intervene between que and the second verb, ne should not then be used before the second verb, whether the first be employed affirmatively, negatively, or interrogatively : as, — it is more noble to forgive than to revenge one's self, il est plus noble de pardonner que de sevenger, and not que de ne se venger. You do not dance better than when you were at school, vous ne dansez pas mieux que quand vous etiez a Pecole, and not — que quand vous n*etiez^ &c. 2. Ne is also required in French after the conjunctions a moins que, unless; de crainte que, for fear; de peur que,\est; and que used in the same sense, before the next verb which depends on them, and which must be put in the subjunctive mood : as, — I shall not go unless you come and fetch me, je uHrai pas a moins que vous ne veniez me chercher. Go out quickly for fear he should see you, sortez prompte- me7it de crainte quHl ne vous voie. I shall not go to see her unless she invite me, je n'irai pas la voir qu^elle ne m^en prie ; for a moins qu^elle ne m'en prie. Avant que, before, and que used in the same sense or for until, require ne before the next verb, if any thing uncertain be expressed by it, whereas ne is not required, if the thing expressed be positive. In either case the verb must be put in the sutijunctive mood : as, — he will not come before you go and fetch liim, il ne viendra pas que vous n^alliez le chercher. In this sentence, ne is used before alliez, because it is uncertain whether you will go or not. Wait till the rain is over, attendez quHl ne pleuve plus. Ne is also used before pleuve, as it is likewise uncertain when the rain will cease; but we say — elle vint ici deux jours avant qu^elle mourOt, she came here two days before she died, and not avant c^u^elle ne mourf/t, because reference is made to a thing about which there can be no uncertainty. 3. When the verbs craindre, to fear, to be afraid ; apprehender, to apprehend ; avoir peur, to be afraid ; trembler, to tremble ; are fol- lowed by que, they also require ne before the next verb, which must be . put in the subjunctive mood, without pas or point after it, if the thing expressed by it be not wished for, but on the contrary objected to : as, — I fear or am afraid he will come, / vous parle ; for afin que je vous parte, &c. 3. Que is also employed in the second part of a sentence, to avoid the repetition of the conjunction occurring in the first part, and the suc- ceeding verb is put in the indicative or subjunctive, according as the conjunction used in the first part of the sentence requires it. In this case, the second part of the sentence generally begins by and in Eng- lish, and the conjunction is understood: as, — if you love her, and you wish to persuade her of it, si vous Paimez, et que* vous vouliez le lui persuader ; instead of — et si vous voulez le lui persuader. Since he was your friend, and you were so much indebted to him, jjuisqu^il etait voire ami, et que vous lui etiez si redecable ; for — et puisque vous lui etiez si redevable, &c. 4. Que is also used for when, but, or tha?i, in the second part of a sentence, when the words hardly, scarcely, sooner, or no sooner, are employed in the first part : as, — he was scarcely arrived in France when he hastened to go to Paris ; or, — he had no sooner arrived in France, but, or than, he hastened to go to Paris ; il etait a peine arrive en France, qu'il se hata dialler a Paris. 5. Que stands likewise for hoiv or how much, before an adjective or a verb, to express admiration, wonder, or surprise, but the adjective following how or Iww much is usually put after the verb in French : as, — how unfortunate I am ! que je suis malheureux ! \\q\\ he likes apples! qu'il aime les pommes ! When how much or hoio many occurs before a substantive in the beginning of a sentence, to denote admiration, wonder, or surprise, it is also expressed by que, with de before the substantive : as, — how many friends he has ! qu^ il a d^amis ! But when how much or how mariy either depends on a preposition or is used to ask a question : as,— /o how many misfortunes have I not been exposed! how many brothers has he ? it is expressed in French by combien de, and not by que : as, — to how many misfortunes have I not been exposed ! a combien de malheurs n^ai-je jjas He expose/ how many brothers has he? combien de freres a-t-il ? This sentence — may I die if I said so ! or any other of the same kind, beginning by may, or some similar expression, and denoting either a wish, command, imprecation, or indignation, is expressed in French by que, in the beginning of the sentence, with the following verb in the subjunctive mood : as^ — may I die if I said so ! que je meure si je I'ai ditf Observe. — 1. Tlie present of the indicative must be used in French, instead of the future or present of the subjunctive in English, as also the imperfect of the indicative, in place of the preterit or conditional in English, after si, (if,) mean- * The conjunction qite, used in the second part of a sentence to avoid the repetition of si employed in the first, governs the following verb in the subjunctive mood. 224 OF INTERJECTIONS. iiig suppost que: as, — we shall go into the country, if it be fine weather, nous irons a la campagne, s'il fait beau temps, and not s'il fera ou sHl fasse. I should go with you, if you would allow me, firais avec vous, si vous vouliez me le permeitre, and not si vous voudriez. But the future and conditional tenses must he employed in French as in English, after si, signifying whether, if a future action he implied : as, — I do not know if they will come to-morrow, ^e 7ie sais pas s^i^s viendront detnain, and not s'i/s viennent ; whereas the present of the indicative is requisite in hoth languages. if a present action be mentioned : as, — do you know if they are coming now ? savez- vous s^i^s viennent a present ? and not s'ils vieiidront. In either case, si is always pre- ceded by a verb implpng doubt or uncertainty. 2. The future tense must be used in French, although the present of the indi- cative be tisually employed iti English, after the conjunctions: /orsque, quand, when; aussitot que, as soon as, and any other of the same kind, implying futurity: as, — I shall go when I huve finished my letter, firai quand j'auraij^wj two lettre, and not quand j'ai fini. Come as soon as you have done, venez aussitot que vous aurez Ji7ii, and not que vous axezjini; &c. 2. OF INTERJECTIONS. Interjections, as the term implies, are words thrown in between the parts of a sentence, to express the sudden emotions or passions of the speaker. They are only single exclamations, but which frequently sup- ply the place of a whole sentence. They may be divided as follows : — 1. For grief or affliction :- French. Ah! Helas! Aie! Ahi! He! Ouf! and desire : — Ah! Bon! Vive lajoie ! Ah! He! English. Ah! Alas! Ay! Oh! O ! O dear ! Pho! 2. For joy Ah! Well! Huzza! 3. For fear Ah! Oh! 4. For aversion, contempt, and disgust : — Away ! Al/ez ! Fie! Fi! Fie upon ! Fi done ! 5. For derision: — Oh ! Oh ! Pshaw ! He ! zest ! 6. For admiration : — Oh ! Oh ! Hah ! Ha ! Oh! Hah! Eh! Observe. — Although 6on, vive 7. For surprise : — Oh! Oh! Bless me ! Misericorde . Dear me ! O dear ! Bon dieu ! O heavens ! O ciel! Lack-a-day ! Ouais ! 8. For encoiu-aging : — Come on ! AUons ! fa .' Cheer up ! Cottrage ! Holdfast! Tenezferme! 9. To warn, and make people get out of the way : — ho fa, Clear the way Hem! Oh! Look, look ! Lo! Hark ! Gare! Hem! Oh! Voyez ! Tenez ! Ecoutez 10. Hold! Soho! Hush! Hist! Hail! To call :— Hola! He! 11. For silence: — Chut! St! 12. For salutation :- Salut ! St! Paix . Welcome ! joie, allex. Soyez le bien venu ! misericorde^ hon Dieu, OF INTERJECTIONS. 225 allons, courage, tenez ferme, voyez, tenez, ecoutez, salut, soyez le hien venu, O del, paix, tout beau, be not interjections of themselves, they become such when they are used to express sudden affections or emotions of the soul : so, also, ihe following words, and several others of the same kind, used in Moliere : — Morhleu! zounds! parhleu ! in good faith! diantre ! the deuce ! &c. The interjection O has not been specifically mentioned among the above, being seldom used but in conjunction with a substantive, to express certain passions or emotions of the soul : as, — O Steele ! temps I mosurs ! volupte supreme ! O monfils ! &c. ESSAY XXVII. They spared neither children, women, nor old men. She has pret. def. tpargntr ni vinllard neither honour nor decency. — Come here, that I may speak to you. — The dccence Fenir siib.pr. Aii moment we die, our fate is determined for ever. We shall not set out que inovrir sort dtterminer ioujours parti r hefore it is light. Wait till (the rain is over). A miser (might sub. pr. Aftendre il ne pie uve plus avare au- have) all the gold in the world, yet he would not be satisfied. — As you have rait or content had (so many) misfortunes, and you cannot pay your debts, you (ought) to* taut de malheur pouvoir payer dette devriez compound with your creditors. Since she has so many perfections, and you composer crtanciers Puisqu^ love her so tenderly, why don't you marry her ? Unless your tendrement pourquoi 6pouser a inoins que father pays me half of what he owes me, and gives me sub. pr. la moiiic ce qii"* devoir sub. pr. security for the remainder, I shall go to law with* him. Although caution reste poursuivre Quoiqu^ they possess great riches, and enjoy all ihe pleasures of life^ sub. pr. poss^der biens sub. pr. jouir de vie they are not happy. — I know she trembles for fear her master should send savoir trembler maitre sub. pr. renvoyer her away*. — The king had no sooner arrived, but he ordered (the imp. ctre pret. def. faire gardens fo be illuminated). — The ladies had scarcely alighted from their* illuminer lesjardins dame imp. etre descendre (carriages), when it began to rain. How unfortunate that man voiiure pret. def. commencer a pleuvoir malheureux is ! he never succeeds in any thing. — How much she resembles her mother ! rtussir aucuii ressembler d and how many graces she displays already! but of how much slander is chnrm.es dtployer dtjd mauvais propos she not the victim ! — To how many dangers am I not daily exposed ! — May danger journellement 1 die, if I (ever mentioned it to him) ! W^e shall go to-morrow into the lai en ai jamais parlc a L 5 226 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. country, if it be fine weather. 1 should take you with me, if you faire mener would ask her pardon They do not know if he will come. imp. voiiloir demander lui savoir venir Tell them, when you see them, that, as soon as I hear from ^Dire ^ ^ ^ ^voir '* recevoir des nouvelles tlieir brother, I shall let them know it. Write to us as soon as you ^ ^faire "^leur ^savoir Ve get there. %tre y LESSON XXVIII. Of the French Idioms. 1. Cases in which the different tenses of the verb to be are expressed in French by those 0/ avoir» General Rule. — 1 . When the different tenses of the verb to be are used before the adjectives hungry, dry, thirsty, hot, warm, cold, ashamed, and afraid, — they are expressed in French by the corre- sponding ones of the verb avoir, and the adjectives hungry, dry, thirsty, hot, loarm, cold, ashamed, and afraid, are construed by the substan- tives faim, soif, chaud, froid, honte, and feur : as, — I am hungry, faifaim; he is thirsty, z7 a ^oz/; are you cold? avez-vous froid? no, I am very warm, non, fai bien chaud ; she was ashamed, elle avait honte; were you afraid? aviez-vous peur? as if it were in Enghsh — / have hunger; he has thirst, &c. If we express that any particular part of the body is affected with cold or heat : as, — my hands are cold ; the verb avoir is then used in the same person in French as the possessive pronouns my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, and their, preceding the part of the body mentioned, are in, when construed by the corresponding personal pronouns /e, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils or elles, which must serve as nominatives to the verb avoir. The article au, aux, or a la, a V, is then requisite before the part of the body alluded to : as, — my hands are co\di, j^ at froid aux mains, &c. as if it were in English, / have cold to the hands. 2. When they come before the expressions in the right and in the wrong, they are likewise expressed by the tenses of avoir, — and in the right is construed by the substantive raison, and in the wrong by tort : as, — he is in the right, il a raison; she is in the wrong, elle a tort. 3. When a person's age is mentioned, the different tenses of the verb to he are also construed by those of avoir, and the substantive year, which is frequently understood in English, is always expressed by an or ans in French, whereas the adjective old, if used in English, is left out in French: as, — my sister is twenty, or twenty years old, ma soeur a vingt ans., and not — ma soeur est, &c. OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 227 If the age of a person or of an animal be asked, the different tenses of the verb to be are still construed by those of avoir ; but old is expressed by age, and how by quel : as, — how old is your sister ? quel age a voire saeur ? 4. When we speak of the dimensions of any thing, the different tenses of the verb to be are likewise expressed by those of avoir ; but de is put before the word which expresses either the length, height, depth, breadth, or any other dimension of the object alluded to : as, — this church is sixty feet high, cette eglise a soixante pieds de hauteur, and not est soixante pieds, &c. If the dimensions of any thing should be mentioned, without the verb to be, de should likewise be put in French before the noun of number which precedes the expressions of measure, — feet, inches, lines, &c. : as, — a well forty feet deep, un puits de quarante pieds de profondeur, and not un putts quarante pieds, &c. We have a table twenty feet three inches long, nous avons une table de vingt pieds* trois polices de longueur, and not une table vingt pieds, &c. The English adjectives of dimension may also be rendered into French by their corresponding adjectives, b\it the substantives are more elegantly used; and, in any case, deep must be construed by de frofondeur, and not by de profond : as, — a mine two hundred feet deep, une mine de deux cents pieds de profondeur, and not une mine deux cents pieds de profond, Observe. — The expression in vain for, preceded by a tense of the verb to be, having the pronoun it taken indeterminately for its nomina- tive or subject : as, — it is in vain for you to repeat it ; is usually expressed in French by the corresponding tense of the verb avoir, with the adjective beau, thus — avoir beau, which implies the verb to be and the expression in vain for ; the noun or pronoun which follows in vain for is used as the nominative of the verb avoir beau, and if the pro- nouns me, thee, him, her, us, ye or you, and them, should be used after in vain for, they are construed by je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils or elles, to become the nominatives of avoir beau, which is put in the same number and person as the pronoun is in. The succeeding verb is put hi the present of the infinitive mood, without any preposition before it, and the pronoun it, which precedes the verb to be in English, is not expressed in French : as, — it is in vain for you to repeat it, vous avez beau le repeter ; as if it were in English — you have fine it to repeat. Sometimes, also, in vain for is expressed by inutile, and the verb to be is construed by the corresponding tense of etre in French, with the pronoun il taken indeterminately for its nominative, in the sense of it in English. In this case, the noun or pronoun following in vain for becomes the object of etre, and the succeeding verb is put in the pre- sent of the infinitive, with de before it : as, — it will be in vain for him to go there, il lui sera inutile d^y aller. * When a fraction of the principal measure is mentioned, de must not be re- peated in French before the noun of number preceding it : thus we cannot say — vne table de vingt pieds de trois pouces de longueur ; but — ufie table de vingt pieds trois pouces de longueur. 228 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. ESSAY XXVIII. I was hungry and thirsty. 1 should be ashamed to speak to hhn imp. de She was warm, and caught cold. They are afraid oi me. imp. elle pret. def. senrhumer Are your feet cold ? My feet are not very cold, because I have walked fast ; pied iris marcher vite but my hands are so cold that I cannot make my pen. It is in vain for you n ne poiwoir tailler plume (to remonstrate with her,) she will never allow that she is in the wrong, ltd f aire des remontrances convenir sub. pr. although she is fully convinced that she is not in the right. How quoiqu' sub. pr. pleinement cofzvaiticu old are j-our sisters ? The eldest is twenty-five, and the (youngest) will be cadette fifteen at Christmas next This room is a hundred feet ten inches long d Notl prochain longueur by fifty feet wide, and twenty high. — The steeple of that church is not six hun- sur largeur hauteur clocher tijlise dred and thirty-four feet I'igh, and eighty in diameter. There was in de diamttre imp. Peru a mine fifteen or sixteen hundred feet deep. 1 thought this Ptrou profondeur imp. croire que mountain was three thousand feet high and one* thousand in circumference imp. mille de circonference at its base. — It would be in vain to write to them in the country, as they base inutile de ecrire a puisqu' ■. set out to-morrow morning for Paris, where they intend remaining all partir on avoir intention de passer the summer. tie LESSON XXIX. 2. Cases in ivJiich the different tenses of the verb to be are expressed in French by the corresponding ones of the unipersonal verb y avoir. General Rule. — The diiferent tenses of the verb to be are ex- pressed in French by those of y avoir : — 1. When they are accom- panied by the adverb there : as, — there were many people, il y avait hien du monde. In this and any similar case, the verb must be used in the singular in French, whether it be in the singular or plural in English. 2. When they are employed in speaking of the distance from one place to another ; in which case, should how far be used in English, it must be expressed by combien in French : as, — Windsor is twenty miles distant from London, il y a vingt milles de Londres a Windsor. OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 229 How far is it from Calais to Paris ? combien y a-t-il de Calais a Paris? &c. The adjective distant^ which is sometimes employed in such sen- tences in English, is not expressed in French. 3. When being used to express the time since a thing, action, or event took place; and if hoiv long should be employed in English, it is expressed by combien in French : as, — how long has he been dead ? combien y a-t-il qu'il est mort ? she has been talking these two hours, il y a deux heures qu'elle parle, &c. The verb preceding these or those, in sentences of this kind, is, thus, put in the preterit indefinite of the indicative in French, if the thing mentioned has ceased to exist; but it is used in tlie present, if it be still existing. In either case, que is used before the verb, and these or those is not expressed in French. 4. After hoiv much and hoiv many, (combien,) used, to ask the quantity or number of persons or things: as, — how mucli cheese is there? combien de fromage y a-t-il? how many people were there? combien de per Sonne s y avait-il? — de is required before the substantive following combien, in any such case. The expressions — some days since, a week ago, a fortnigld ago, a month since, and all similar ones, are likewise rendered into French by the different tenses of y avoir : as, — some days since, il y a quelques jours; a week ago, il y a une semaine ; a fortnight ago, il y a une quinzaine ; a month since, il y a un mois, &c. as if it were in English, — there is some days, there is a week, &c. ESSAY XXIX. Were there many people (iu the) Park last Sunday ? Yes, (a great imp. ail dernier beau- many). — '\^'el•e there many ladies ? I should think there were coitp imp. Lien dcs croire qii' imp, en. at least three or four thousand. There are (deceitful people). How au mains des gens qui sont trompeurs far is it from London to Plymouth P A very long distance; nearly three Londres grand presque hundred miles. It is not far from Paris to Rheims ; but it is very far from mifle Rome to Moscow. Calais is twenty-seven miles distant from Dover. She Moscou Douvres (has been) married these twenty years. They (have been) gone these four est marier sont partir days. How many inhabitants are there in Paris ? (There may be) seven or habitant a 11 pent y en avoir eight hundred thousand. Do you know how many members there are iu the savoir membre (House of Commons) ? There are six hundred and fifty-eight. Some years Chambre des Commimes ^ *annte ago, I was at the (Epsom-races,) where I witnessed a very ^ imp. ^ courses d'Epso)?i pre(. def. etre ttmoin 230 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. melancholy accident, that happened to one of the spectators. — (A week fdcheiix fret. def. arriver 11 y a hiiit or a fortnight ago,) a friend of mine received from the country a letter, ou quinze jours pret. def. by which (he was informed) that though the rain had been very dans on lui mandait bien que pluies f. pi. sub. plu. heavy (it) had not yet done any injury to the corn. It is not abondant elles encore f aire de tort bles m. pi. a month since I lent you fifty pounds. Mr. P * * que pret. indef. priter livre sterling i^que ^ ^ pret. indef. died, about six weeks ago, (from the) cut of a* sabre, which he "^/riourir ^environ ^ ^semai?ie des suites d'un coup ■• pret. def. received on his head, last winter, on the Dover road. a la dernier hiver ^de ^Douvres ^route LESSON XXX. 3. Cases in which the verbs to be and to do are expressed in French by faire and se porter. General Rule. — I. Whenever we speak of the various kinds of the weather, and we use the verb to be in the third person singular of its different tenses, with the pronoun it taken indeterminately for its nomi- native or subject, the corresponding person and tense of the verb faire must be employed in French, with the pronoun il, likewise employed indeterminately for its subject, in the sense ofit: as, — it is fine weather, il fait beau temps; is it fine weather? fait-il beau temps? &c. as if it were in English — it makes fijie weather ; makes it fine weather? &c. But if the verb to be should have one of the words loeather, day, or night, or any other similar expression for its nominative, instead of being preceded by the indeterminate pronoun it, the different tenses of etre, and not those oi faire, should then be used in French : as, — the weather is very fine, le temps est tres-heau, and not — le temps fait tres-beau. 2. When the different tenses of the verb to be or to do are used in speaking of or inquiring about the health of somebody, they are ren- dered into French by those of the reflective verb se porter : as, — how^ is Miss A* * ? comment se porte Mad"^ A* * ? she is not very well, elle ne se porte pas tres-bien. It is with, it has been with, it loill be with, it would be with, or any other tense of the verb to be, thus used impersonally with the pronoun it and the preposition with, is rendered into French by the corresponding tense and person of the verb etre, with the pronoun il likewise employed in an impersonal manner, but with the particle en before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxihary in a compound one ; that is, be- tween the pronoun il and the verb or the auxiliary, with de, or du, de la, de r, or des^ according as either is required, immediately after it OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 231 in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one : as, — it is with, il en est de ; it has been with, U en a ete de ; it will be with you as with others, ii en sera de vous comme des autres ; it would be with, il en serait de, &c. ESSAY XXX. It is very cold this morning; yet I do not thmk it is quite f7-oid cependant croire qu' sub. pr. tout-a-fait so cold as it was yesterday, and (the day before). — It was terribly si qu! imp. avant-hier imp. excessivement cold last week. — If it be fine weather to-morrow, and the roads dernier fait que chemin sub.pr. are not too dirty, we shall go into the country. — The weather has been very trop crotte a inconstant all the summer ; we have not had a single week of continued fine ett seul semaine continuel weather. — The weather is not so damp (in the) south of England, (as it is) iu si humide au midi quHt Pest the north. — Is it fine weather to-day ? No ; it is very bad weather. — The weather is so changeable in this country, that sometimes it is the most variable quelquefois (delightful weather) in * the morning ; and, two hours after, it is close, beau temps du monde tin temps lourd datk, and rainy, which is very injurious to the health. — The days sombre pluvieux prtjudiciable begin to (shorten very much) ; it is dark at seven o'clock. — It is very unpleasant a dtcroitre rapidement nuit mauvais (walking), when the pavement is so slippery. — If it be (day-light), we shall marcher pave glissaiit jour certainly set out at four o'clock. — (How is the weather) this afternoon ? I do partir Quel temps fait-il not know, I have not been out. — When we were in town, last week, it sortir imp. a la was very bad weather, now we are in the country it is very fine ; imp. maijitenant que a I am almost sure that if we (were to return) to town, it would be bad weather stir retournions ^ ^ again. — How do you do this evening ? Very well, I thank you. — How are your ^encore soir father and mother .'* They are pretty well. — Is Miss A* * better ? No ; she passablement mieux is still very poorly. — Have you seen your cousins lately ? How are they encore indisposee cousi?ie depuis pen all? Not very well, sir; Miss G** has a bad cold, and her sister is still very gros rhume lame. I really think it will be with them as it has been with the Misses boiteux reellement W * *. — Well ! (did I not tell you) it would be with you as it has been with Eh bien ne vous ai-je pas dit your brother ? 232 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. LESSON XXXI. 4. Cases in which the different tenses of the verb to be, being fre- ceded by the pronoun it, are expressed in French by il est, il etait, il sera, &c. and by c'est, c'etait, ce sera, &c. General Rule. — Whenever the verb to be, being used in the third person singular of its different tenses, with the pronoun it taken inde- terminately for its nominative or subject, and an adjective or a participle foUov/ing ; as, — it is difficult to succeed in the world ; — it is, it was, it will be, or any other of its tenses thus employed, is expressed in French by the third person singular of the corresponding tense of etre, with the pronoun il, likewise taken indeterminately for its nominative or subject, provided there be no reference implied to any thing men- tioned before, but on the contrary a marked reference to what follows : as, — it is difficult to succeed in the world, il est difficile de reussir dans le monde, and not c'^est difficile, &c. But it is, it was, it will be, &c. having reference to something spoken of before, as when, alluding to what may have just been said or done, we say — it is very unfortunate, for — that is very unfortunate ; it ivas very consoling, for — that was very consoling ; — it is, it was, it will be, are then construed by the third persons singular of the corresponding tenses oi etre, preceded by ce, or c', thus — c^est, c^etait, ce fut, ce sera, &c. : as, — it is very unfortunate, c^est bien malheureux ; it was very consoling, c'^ etait bien consolant, &c. In any such case, the verb forms a complete sense with the adjective or participle following; whereas, in the preceding observation, there remains something to be expressed after the adjective or participle. Cest, c"^ etait, ce fat, ce sera, &c. are also used in French in the sense of — it is, it was, it will be, &c. in English : 1. before the indefi- nite article un, une, a or an. 2. before the cardinal numbers un, une, one; c/ei subjunctive mood, as above : as, — he is very far from being as tall as j his brother, il s'en faut beaucoup qu'il soit aussi grand que son frere, \ and not — qu'il ne soit; because il s'en faut is used affirmatively. ' Note. — De beaucoup must be used after il s'en faut, il sen fallait^ \ il s'en fallut, &c. when we wish to express that a sum or quantity is- deficient by much ; and beaucoup without de, when we speak of a great \ difference between two persons or things. ESSAY XXXIII. i Your sister must come and* look for her book herself, because I do j sub. pr. ^ ^cheroher 4 5 2 parce que ' not know where she has put it. — You must write to them immediately. — \ savoir ou mettre kerire tout de suite i Y-ou must not do that. Must I go there ? A woman must have \ faire oiler y sub. pr. \ mvich circumspection. — You must go and* see my daughters in the country. circonspection voir jiUe a campagne \ We must buy a horse on the first opportunity. — I fear it will : sub. pr. acheter a occasion craindre sub. pr, \ be necessary to go to Bath, to stop the payment of that bill. Will it be \ pour arret er paiement billet | necessary to give them time? — One must be very patient to suffer so much i du II pour souffrir ainsi \ without (complaining). Young men must be encouraged^ and old people ' sons se plaindre Jeunes gens encourager vieillard j assisted. — I want a new coat. — My brother must have a pair of boots, \ assister nouveau poire botte * and two or three pairs of shoes. — You want a pair of black gloves to attend : smdieii- noir gant pour asmter \ OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 239 the funeral, and a pair of white for the Opera. — It will be necessary for ^ enterrement blanc Opera them to* take a house in town. — Do you think it will be ne- sub. pr. pi'endre a la sub.pr. ne- cessary for my nieces to* be there? — (I have been told) that his cousins cessairc sub. jyr. y On ni^a (lit cot/sine do not behave exactly as they ought. — His wife always speaks of you as f:e conduire tout-a-fa\t she ought : she (never mentions j'our name but with) the greatest respect and ne prononce jamais votre nom qii'avec esteem. — There was not much wanting of the whole sum. la plus grand e imp. s' en falloir que eniier n^yfiXt — How much was it wanting of the whole sum ? — (She is very far) from Combien que II s'enfaut beaztcoup qu^elle sub. pr, being so handsome as her sister. aussi beau que LESSON XXXIV. Of the defective verbs — may, will, ivould, can, shall, should, could, might, and ought. General Rule. — Whenever may, ivill, would, can, shall, should, could, and might, are not the distinguishing signs of the different tenses of other verbs, but are verbs distinct of themselves, they are rendered into French as follows: — I. will and ii7oi//c/, denoting determination, are expressed by the different tenses of vouloir. 2. — may, can, could, or might, expressing possibility, are rendered by the tenses of pouvoir ; and should, denoting necessity or duty, is construed by those of devoir. As will and would can always be changed into the dififerent tenses of the verb to he willing or desirous ; may, can, could, and might, into those of to be able ; and should into those of to be necessary ; these will be the distinctive signs of the tenses in which vouloir, pouvoir, and devoir, ought to be used in French, and they will be placed in the same person and tense in which the verb to be is in English : as, — he will not confess it; that is, — he is not willing to confess it, il ne veut pas Vavouer. I could not speak to him; implyhig — I was not able to speak to him, je ne pus pas lui parler. He should do that; in the sense of — he ought to do that, or, it would be necessary for him to do that, il devrait faire cela. Will, would, could, should, do, and shall, used either in reply to a question, or to express assent to any thing mentioned before, may be expressed in French by the same verb as that by which the question is asked, or simply by — je le veux ouj'e le veux bien ; or by — oui, mon- sieur, madame, or mademoiselle : as, — will you go to the country this summer ? yes, I will ; irez-vous a la campagne cet ete ? oui, j'irai. 240 OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. Will you do that for me? yes, I ^vill; voulez-vous faire cela four moi? oui, je le veux hien ; or simply — om, monsieur, madame, on mademoiselle. When would, could, should, r/iight, and ought, are followed by have before the past participle of another verb, as in these sentences — you should have called me ; if they would have jmr sued him, they might have caught him ; you ought to have paid her a visit, since you knew she was returned ; they are expressed in French by the imperfect or conditional of the verb avoir, according to the sense, nsing one of the past participles fu, du, or voulu, after it, if something past, as in the above sentences, be implied, and placing the succeeding verb, which is in the past participle in English, in the present of the infinitive in French : as, — you should have called me, vous auriez du m^appeler. If they would have pursued him, they might have caught him, s^ils avaient voulu le poursuivre, lis auraient pu Vattraper. You ought to have paid her a visit, since you knew she was returned, vous auriez du lui faire visite, puis que vous saviez qu^elle etait de retour. Would, could, shoidd, and might, are also sometimes construed into French, in sentences of this kind, by the conditional of one of the verbs pouvoir, vouloir, and devoir, expressing have by avoir or etre, according as either is required, and placing the following verb in the past participle in French as it is in English : as, — she could have written her exercise before you if. ... , elle pourrait avoir ecrit son theme avant vous si. ... , &c. Will have or would have, followed by a noun or a pronoun and a verb in the present of the infinitive, as — / will have you pay him im- mediately ; I would not have her write to him ; must be expressed in French by the corresponding tense of the verb vouloir, placing que after it, and using the noun or pronoun following, as the nominative to the next verb, which is put in the subjunctive mood : as, — I will have you pay him immediately, je veux qiie vous le payiez tout de suite. I would not have her write to h\m,je ne voudrais pas qu'elle lui ecrivit. Will have or would have used also as follows, — which of these two books ivill you have 1 I would have them both ; is likewise rendered into French by the difi"erent tenses of vouloir : as, — which of these two books will you have ? lequel de ces deux livres voulez-vous ? I would have them both, je les voudrais ious les deux. Can, used in English in the sense of to know, is generally rendered into French by savoir : as, — I can read and write, je sais lire et ecrire. Ought is always construed into French by either the present, imper- fect, or conditional of devoir, according to the import of the sentence: as, — you ought to remember it, vous devriez vous en souvenir. ESSAY XXXIV. Will you lend me the book which I mentioned to you the other preter dont purler OF THE FRENCH IDIOMS. 241 (lay ? Yes, I will, provided you return it to me (in the course of) ■poia-vu que sub. pr, rendre dans two or three days. — "Will you show me your rin^^? No, I will not. — Do moiifrer bague le you know Italian? Yes, I do, 1 would most willingly oblige you, if savoir tres-volo/itiers I could. Is that young man (thoroughly acquainted ^vith book- imp. /e pouvoir sait-il bien teiiir les Hires keeping?) — I do not know, but he (should be). — Will you have the kindness le devrait bonte to take that letter to the post for nie ? Yes, I (will.) if you can de porter le veux biefi lend me an umbrella. — (You must) tell him that he should take you to the parapluie II faut devoir inener play two or three times a year. — If the French would have pmsued spectacle par ph/perf. voiiloir the Russians, they might have taken all their ammunition. — I could have Riisse preiidre munitions finished mj'- drawing as soon as you, if I had been willing, but Jinir dessin aussitot que pluperf. P vouloir it would not have been so well done as it is He ought to have paid executer qu'il T faire her a* visit, (being informed of her return). — If I were in your stead, jnnsqu'il savait qii elle etait de retour imp. a 2)lace I would have him pay me immediately; although I would not vouloir sub. imp. sur-le-champ quoique sub. imp. vouloir have * him suffer (by it). — Well ! which of these two watches will il sub. imp. -souffrir ^en He bien viontre you have ? — They arc really so pretty, that I would have them both. — She is riellement joli so ignorant that she can neither read nor write. — That storm was so tempete pret. de/. violent, and lasted so long, that you (ought) to* remember it prct. def. durer devricz ^vous ^souvenir ^en — I do not think he ought to* forgive his sister, before she sub. pr. devoir pardonner a avant qu' sub. pr. ne asks his pardon. — Do you think she would come with us, if I (were liti sub. imp. to ask her) ? Yes ; I am sure she would not refuse you. — Is it probable you fen pr-iais re/user que ' (could have obtained) the consent of her father, if I had not spoken eussiez pu obtenir pluperf. to him (in your favour) ? avantagevsement de vovs 242 SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. PART THE THIRD. OF SYNTAX. The third part of French grammar is Syntax, which treats of the regular construction of the different parts of speech, conformably to the genius and established rules of the French language. LESSON XXXV. Of the Article. 1. Cases in which the article is used in French. First General Rule. — 1. The definite article — le, la^ l\ les ; duy de la, de l\ des ; or au, a la, a l\ aux, according to the import of the sentence, is used in French before every substantive taken in a general or particular sense ; that is, before every substantive designating either a whole species of things or beings, a kind of things, a determinate thing, or a private individual, and agrees with it in gender and number, whether any article be employed in English or not : as, — men and women are mortal, les hommes et les femmes sont mortels ; wine is dear in this country, le vin est cher dans ce pays ; gold is more precious than silver, l^or est plus precieux que Pargent. 2. The definite article is also used in French before words expressing the measure, quantity, weight or number of any thing, when we either mention its price or value, or ask how much it is worth or sold for : in this case, the indefinite article a or an is usually employed in English : as, — this cloth is worth twenty shillings a yard, ce drap vaut vingt schellings la verge ; champagne is sold for a guinea a bottle, le cham- pagne se vend une guinee la houteille ; and not — ce drap vaut vingt schellings une verge ; le champagne se vend une guinee une houteille. But Avhen we mention the time by which actions are measured, things and persons are hired or paid for, as likewise, what is given for attendance or admit- tance into public places, the preposition par is more generally used than the definite article le, la, or les, before the word which expresses the time, attendance, or person : as, — I give him twenty guineas a year, je lid donne vingt ginnees par an ; he gets six shillings a week, il gagtie six schellings par semaine ; so much a head, tant par tete ; so much each, /(2w^ par per5on«e; so much a lesson, /aw/ par lecon; and not— je lid donne vingt guinees Van; il gagne six schellings la semaine; tant la tete ; tant la personne ; tant la. legoti ; &c. 3. The definite article is likewise used in French before adjectives, infinitives of verbs, adverbs, prepositions, or conjunctions, used substan- tively, although there is generally no article employed before them in English: as, — I like white better than black, j^aime mieux le blanc SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. 243 qiie le noir. That which is necessary is to be preferred to what is merely useful, le necessaire est preferable a Vutile. He wishes to know the why and the wherefore of every thing, il veut savoir le pourquoi et le comment de tout. 4. When two adjectives, being united by the conjunction and^ qua- lify or specify the same substantive, the article must be used before each of them in French, when they express contrary qualities : as, — the first and second floor, le premier et le second etage ; the good and bad company, la bonne et la mauvaise compagnie. But if the adjec- tives belong to that class of adjectives which must follow their respective substantives in French, the article is placed before the substantive and repeated before the second adjective : as, — the French and English languages, la langue Fran^aise et VAnglaise. If the adjectives should not express contrary qualities, being either synonymous, or denoting compatible qualities, the article should only be used before the first adjective, without being repeated before the second : as, — the virtuous and learned Mr. D* *, le rertueux et savant Mr. D* * ; and not — le vertueux et le savant Mr. D* *. Neither is the article repeated before the second of two substantives which are often mentioned together: as, — le flux et reflux de la mer, the ebbing and flowing of the sea ; and not — le flux et le reflux. Les tours et sinuosites de ce JieiLve, the windings of that river ; and not — les tours et les sinuosites^ &c. Observe. — When the words lady and you7ig lady, or ladies and young ladies, are preceded hy an article, an adjective, or a pronoun in English, they are ex- pressed in French by datne or dames, demoiselle or demoiselles, and not by madame or mesdames, nmdemoiselle or mesdemoisefles ; and, in general, the words dame, demoiselle, or their plural, are used without the possessive pronouns ma, mes, whenever they are preceded by a word specifying or qualifying them : as, — the lady and young lady whom I have seen home, la dame et la demoiselle que j'ai reconduites, and not — la madams el la mademoiselle. A fine lady, une belle dame, and not — wie belle madatne. 5. When addressing somebody we mention his title, quality, dignity, or profession, (if a liberal one,) the article must be used in French before such dignity or quality, &c., besides the word monsieur, madame, or mademoiselle, although no article be used in English : as, — Mr, colonel, shall we have the pleasure of your company to-day? Monsieur le colonel, serez-vous des notres aujourd^hui? Mr. general ? Monsieur le general ? One of the qualifications monsieur, madame, or mademoiselle, or their plural messieurs, mesdames, or mesdemoiselles, is also used in French with the article le, la, or les, before a word of reproach, when we scold or blame somebody : as, — Monsieur le fripon, Mr. thief. Monsieur le coquin, Mr. rascal. Mademoiselle la libertine. Miss libertine. Mesdemoiselles les paresseuses, you lazy ladies. Second General Rule. — The definite article is generally employed in French before the four quarters of the globe, as likewise before the m2 244 SYNTAX.— OF THE ARTICLE. names of kingdoms, countries, provinces, rivers, mountains, and hills, althougli (except before those of rivers and of some mountains) no article be used in English : as, — P Europe ^ Europe ; VAsie, Asia ; PAfriqu'e, Africa ; PAmerique, America ; la France, France ; la Nor- mandie, Normandy ; la Bretagne, Britany ; la Seine, the Seine ; PAngleterre, England; la Tamise, the Thames, &c. If the names of countries, kingdoms, or provinces, should be preceded by a verb expressing either coming from, going out, or passing from, and be considered merely as a point of departure, without any reference to their extent, they should then be preceded by the preposition de or i courage et sa hardiesse me setnb/ent etonnans : because charmant and etonnant make charmante and etonnante in the feminine. If the substantives should be synonymous, as in the following exam- ple : — his whole life has been nothing but continual labour and occu- pation ; the adjective agrees then with the last substantive only, with- out expressing the conjunction which may be used in English : as, — his whole life has been nothing but continual labour and occupation, toute sa vie n^a ete qu'un travail, quhine occupation continuelle. The same takes place, when the substantives are not synonymous, if we dwell more upon the last than on the others, either because it explains the preceding 262 OF THE AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. ones, or is more energetic, or because it is of such moment that the others are nearly forgotten : as, — — — — " . . . ,le fer, le bandeau, la flamrae est toute preteP Racine, Iphigenie, Act iii. Sc. 5. Observe. — If any one of the adjectives which usually precede their respective substantives in French, should be used to qualify two or more substantives in English : as, — great events and revolutions fol- lowed the death of Ccesar ; it should be repeated before each, sub- stantive in French, and agree with it in gender and number : as, — great events and revolutions followed the death of Caesar, de grands evenemens et de grandes revolutions suivirent la mort de Cesar. Third General Rule. — When two or more adjectives qualify the same substantive in English : as, — a sober, regular, and laborious life strengthens health ; they are generally placed after it in French, whe- ther they precede or follow it in English, and agree with it in gender and number, using the conjunction et before the last : as, — a sober, regular, and laborious life strengthens health, une vie moderee, reglee, et la- bor ieuse for tijie la sante. We however say — ma chere et tendre amie, my sweet, lovely friend. Un grand jeune homme, a tall young man. Ma pauvre petite enfant, my sweet little child. Une longue et char- mante lettre, a delightful long letter; and not, mon amie chere et tendre, &c. But when the adjectives, being considered each separately with the substantive, serve to qualify a thing which is an only one of its kind : as, — the French, Italian, and English languages ; if the substantive should be in the plural in English, it must be put in the singular in French, and be preceded by the definite article le, la, or /', which is likewise repeated before each of the adjectives : as, — the French, Italian, and English languages, la langue Fran^aise, PItalienne, et PAnglaise. " La langue Anglaise, /'Espagnole, Cedent a la Frangaise en douceur, en beauts ; Depuis Deucalion, de Tun a I'autxe pole, Toutes lui cedent en clarte." Observe. — All adjectives adverbially taken, that is, which only ex- press an action or circumstance of the verb to which they are joined, without referring to any substantive, are always written in the singular masculine : as, — those ladies speak low, ces dames 'par lent bas. These flowers smell good, ces fieurs sentent bon, &c. ESSAY XXXIX. The victory which Napoleon obtained in that country, was disadvantageous victoire remporter pays disavuntageux to the French and prejudicial to the English. That lady is beloved by her prejudiciable cherir de OF THE AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 263 husband; he caresses and* adores her, It is not improbable that the late mari caresser adorer queen had several good qualities. -I was obliged to wait for half reine rC sub. pret. plusieurs qualite cTatiendre an hour. Give me half a pound of sugar. (It is) scarcely half a league II y a a peine lieue from (this place). 1 cannot go there in an hour and a half. The ici y en beggar (I relieved) this morning, vras bareheaded and barefooted. mendiant a qui fai donni raumone — His legs were naked. — They walked yesterday five leagues and a half, in ^11 ^les * ^(tvoir ^ fcdre six hours and a half. Mr. T* * * plays with exquisite taste and feeling. ^The jouer charmant noblesse French fight with astonishing courage and intrepidity. 1 (never saw) a se buttre etonnant infrepidiie n^ ax jamais vu de lady who united such an admirable sweetness and equanimity of temper. sub, imp. reunir si merveilleux tgalitk esprit Modesty and disinterestedness deserve to be praised and admired, when they desinteressement miriter d' loner originate in good and laudable motives. His brother and sisters are not happy, venir de — Their whole life has been (nothing but) continual labour and occupation. — «' qu' Great events and revolutions happened at his death. Do not give me a long and arnver tedious book, or I shall not read it. What have I to dread from a just, ennmjeux lire a redouter good, and merciful king ? Experience will always teach that a sober, eltment apprendre regular, and laborious life fortifies health ; whereas a dissipated and idle life uu lieu qit' dissipc oisif destroys it. Will you show me the letter of that tall young man to his sweet ditrmre cker and lovely friend? Yes, (here it is;) but mind you* do* not* lose tendre amie la void prendre garde de perdre it.' Another time, I shall write you a delightful long letter : to-day, I fois '^charmant ^et ^ (can only inform you) that Mrs. S.'s interesting little child is dead, n'f« que le temps de vous dire charmant enfantf. Nobody is ignorant that the French, English, and Spanish languages ignorer sub. pr. are inferior to the Italian in sweetness ; but (it is universally acknowledged) le ccder douceur aussi tout le monde convient that the French (is superior for) its* perspicuity and beauty. 1 femporte sur ioutes les autres en clarte en am delighted to hear you say these flowers smell so sweet. charme de sentir ban 264 OF THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. LESSON XL. Of the Place of Adjectives. First General Rule. — The following adjectives, ancien^ aucuriy beau, bon, cher, digne, divers, grand, gros, habile, jeune, jolt, mauvais, mechant, moindre, meilleur, nouveau, 'petit ^ saint, seul, sot^ vieux, vieil, vilain, triste, or their feminine, usually precede their re- spective substantives in French, when used alone with them : as, — a young man, un jeune homme ; an old woman, une vieille femme ; a fine hat, un beau chapeau ; &c.* But if the above adjectives should be modified by one of the following * Observations on some adjectives which have a different meaning, according as they precede or follow their respective substantives. 1. Grand, used with reference to men, and coming before the word homme: as, — tm grand homme, signifies a man of great merit ; but, when it is placed after the word homme, it has reference to size: as, — un homme grand, a tall man. When grand is used with reference to women, it always applies to size : as, — nne grande femme, a tall woman. It likewise always applies to size, when used with reference to men, if any other adjective expressing some circumstance or quality of the body should follow ; as, — tin grand homme sec, a tall thin man. 2. Gros, referring to women, and placed after the vroxxS. femme, signifies pregnant : as, — vne femme grosse, a pregnant woman; but, placed before it, it means stout: as, -—une grosse femme, a stout woman. 3. Un hon homme, une bonne femme, most frequently signify a silly man or woman ; and un homme hon, une femme bonne, a good, charitable man or woman. 4. Un brave homme, une brave femme, a good man or woman ; and tm homme brave, une femme brave, an intrepid man or woman. 5. Un cruel homme, une cruelle femme, a man or woman who cannot be moved by entreaties ; and im homme cruel, une femme cruelle, an inhuman man or woman. 6. Unefat/sse clef, a false key ; and ime cleffausse, a wrong key. 7. Un galant homme, a polite man ; un homme galant, an admirer of the ladies. 8. Uti honneie homme, an honest man; rm homme honnete, a civil man; vne honneie femme, a correct woman. 9. Des honnetes gens, honest people ; des gens honnetes, civil and polite people. 10. Un malhonnele homme, a dishonest man; un homme malhonntte, an uncivil man. The same rule is applicable io femme and_9'e/2.s, 11. Unnouvel habit, a new coat or another coat; that is, a coat different from the one in \ise or just left off ; and un habit nouveau, a coat of a new fashion; un habit nevf, a coat just come from the tailor and which has not been worn, or, at least, very little. 12. Un pauvre homme, ti7ie pauvre femme, B. man or woman of little merit; and un homme pativre, vne femme pauvre, a poor luan or woman. 13. U71 petit homme, une petite femme, a. man ox ■svorxxan oi a small size; and ?,'« homme petit, a mean man. 14. 1/71 plaisant homme, a ridiculous man ; tm homme plaisant, a facetious man. 15; Un plaisant conte, a story without probability or truth; U7i co7ite plaisant, an amusing story. 16. Un simple homme, an only or a single man ; U7i homme simple, a simpleton. 17, Une sage femme, a midwife ; une femme sage, a wise woman. OF THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 265 adverbs — ires, fort, bieji, ext)-eme?nent, plus, nioins, assez ; or if they should be joined by a conjunction to another adjective qualifying also the same substantive, they then sometimes follow it : as, — it is a very dull town, c''est une ville tres-triste. She is a very amiable woman, c'^est une femme extremement aimahle. The days are long and fine, les jours sont longs et beaux ; &c. but we say — a good and happy year, ujie bonne et heureuse annee. When spul means onbf, it usually precedes its respective substantive: as, — it is the only hat I have, c'est le seul chapeau que j^nie ; but when it signifies alone, it commonly follows it: a.s, — les enfcms sont seuls, the children are alone. Cher, (dear,) denoting affection, and not having any object depending on it, always precedes its respective substantive: as, — my dear friend, w?o« cher ami; but, if it shoidd have an object depending on it, or if it should express the price of any thing, it should always follow its respective substantive: as, — that woman is dear to her children, cette femme est chtre a ses enfans. This lace is dear, cette den- ielle est chere. Bon and digne, having an object depending on them, likewise follow their re- spective substantives: as, — a man good to every body, loi homme bon enters tout le monde ; that action is not worthy of him, cette action n^ est pas digne de ltd. Triste, used in the sense of dull, sad, generally follows its respective substantive : as, — visage triste, air triste, a. sorrowhil countenance; i/ne ville triste, a dull town; but, in the sense of i/i/erior, melancholy, miserable, it precedes it : as, — c'est un triste orateur, he is a miserable speaker ; un triste accident, a melancholy accident. Second General Rule. — The following adjectives — attentif, atten- tive; blancj white; phivieux, rainy; personnel, personal; instruit, learned, or their feminine; and, in general, all those not mentioned iu the preceding rule, usually follow their respective substantives in French, although, in some instances, some will equally well precede or follow them, according to taste, and the harmony of the sentence : as, — a white handkerchief, nn mouchoir blanc ; a learned man, un homme instruit; &c. Observe. — Any adjective, having an object depending on it, is generally placed after the substantive to which it refers : as, — a misfortune common to all, un mal- heiir commun a tons ; but, should a substantive have an object depending on it, and be qualified by an adjective, the adjective should precede the substantive, in order that the substantive may immediately be followed by its object: as, — the incom- parable author of Vert-Vert, P incomparable anteiir de Fert-Fert, and not fauteur incomparable de Fert-Fert ; or, if the adjective should be of that class of adjectives which do not precede their respective substantives, it should be placed after the object of the substantive, but not immediately after the substantive : as, — a coarse rush mat, une natte de j'onc grossitre, and not — une natte grossiere dejonc. Third General Rule. — Past participles of verbs, adjectively used, are generally placed in French after the substantives which they qua- lify : as, — a confused thought, une pensee embrouillee ; a well-peopled town, une ville bien peuplee ; &c. Maudit, cursed; and pretendu, pretended; must be excepted, as they precede their respective substantives : ex., — a cursed trade, un maudit metier; a pretended wit, un pretendu savant. N 266 OF THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. ESSAY XL. An amiable woman gives to (everything) she says an inexpressible grace. — I rtpandre sur tout ce qzi' inexprimable grace like a young man who follows the good advice (which is given him). — suivj'e conseils m. pi. qiCon lui donne He was a great man— Look at that tall thin man. — He had on* a blue coat, C grand sec bleu well made, and of superfine cloth. — In a* fortnight or three weeks, the faire superjin drap Dans quinze jours semaine days will be long and fine. — My little nephew comes very regularly, (every neveu regulierement toiis les new) year's day, to* wish me an agreeable and happy new* year. — premiers ^de Van ^jours pi. souhaiier bon ann6e Besides the different apartments, which I have mentioned to you, there is a Outre appartement dont parler very large closet adjoining the kitchen, in which two servants might grand cabinet contigu a ctdsine domestiqiie poiirraient sleep very well. — On entering my sick friend's room, I found a very '^coucher ^ ^ Kn entrer dans malade la chambre trouver young doctor, (explaining) to a very clever man of my acquaintance, the cause docieur qui expliquait habile of the patient's illness. My dear child, is not your brother equally dear to malade indisposition tgalement your father (with yourself) ? — (Is such) an action worthy of a man who boasts que vot/s Est-ce la digne se vanter (of his civility and attention to) every body ? Yesterday, your sister looked d'etre civil et officieux envers avoir fair very sorrowful ; I am afraid she has experienced some grievous triste craxndre sub. pret. eprouver quelque fdcheiix disappointment. — Very distressing intelligence (has been forwarded to us) conire-temps ^Une ^ ^affiigeayit '^noiivelle hious ^avons ^regu from India: it is the death of the governor's daughter, a* young lady ■* ^ mort gouverneur demoiselle of the most fascinating manners, and of whom the most flattering qui 6tait remplie attrayant charmes m.pl, ^ b 6 hopes were entertained. — Your son has made astonishing progress in his studies. * ^on \oncevoir etonnant progres — New York, in America, is a well-peopled town. — A prejudiced mind is the en peuplt prtvenu sovice of innumerable errors. — Every minister who prefers the public good to innombrable Tout his private interest is beloved by his countrymen. — What is geo- particulier aimer de compatriote Qu'est-ce que c'est que graphy? The description of the terrestrial globe, — I am extremely sorry Cest terrestre fdcM that the incomparable author of Vert-Vert is dead. — The only bed sub.pr. seul (there is) in his house is a coarse rush mat. quHl y ait jonc natte. ♦ OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 267 LESSON XLI. Of the Government of Adjectives. General Rule. — Whenever an adjective or a participle acljectively used governs a preposition in English, that preposition, whether it be aty to, of, from, ivith, by, in, on, upon, about, or any other, must be construed into French by the preposition which the French adjective or participle requires ; and if it be de or a, and the article be at the same time required, dii, de la, de P, or des, must be used instead of de, and au, a la, a V, or aux, for a, according to the gender and number of the substantive before which either is to be placed : as, — I am satisfied with him, je suis content de lui ; because content governs de. She is sen- sible of reprimands, elle est sensible aux reprimandes ; because sensible requires a. To facilitate the application of the above rule, some of the adjectives most in use are quoted hereafter, with the prepositions which they govern. 1. A list of adjectives and participles which govern the preposition a, or, if the article be also required, au, a la, a 1', or aux, before the succeeding word which depends on them. Accessible, accessible. Exact, exact. Prejudiciable, hurtful. Adoune, addicted. Facile, easy. Pret, read;/. Adroit, dexterous. YovoxsXAq, favourable. 7xon\\}i, quick. Agreable, agreeable. Habile, skilful. Propice, propitious. A\uiii(;,ftied. Impenetrable, i^rtpenetrahle. VroTpve, proper. Alerte, alert. Inabordable, inaccessible. Rebelle, rebellious. Anterii'ur, anterior, fore- Inaccessible, inaccessible. Redoutable,/brm/f/a6/e. most. Inconcevable, inconceivable. Ref'ractaire, refractory. apre, rough. Inconnu, unknown. Semijlable, alike. Ardent, ardent. Indocile, untractable. Sensible, sensible. Attenant, next, adjoining, Infidele, unfaithful. Sourd, deaf. contiguous. lugenieux, ingenious. Sujet, subject. Attentif, attentive. Insensible, insensible. Siiperieur, superior ; (this Cher, dear. Lent, sloio. adjective governs en, iu Cmwmwn, common. Nuisible, /(«/»'//«/. the sense of ?'/?.) Contbrme, conformable. Occupe, busy. Supportable, supportable, to- Qon\xin\Q, coidrary. OdaQwx., odious. lerable. Convenable,/^ Pareil, like. Terrible, terrible. Desagreable, disagreeable. Porte, inclined, prompted. Utile, useful. Docile, docile, tractable. Vxeci^uTi., precious. TagXc, zealous. Enclin, inclined. Preferable, preferable. and, in general, all those which denote aptness, fitness, inclination, ease, readiness, or any habit, whatever preposition they may govern in English. 2. A list of adjectives and participles which govern the preposition de, or, if the article be also required, du, de la, de 1', or des, before the next word which depends on them. Absent, absent. Adore, adored. AfFranchi, set free. AccMse, accused. A ff aw. e, greedy of, Aise, glad. N 2 268 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. Dependant, de-pendenty de- Altere, thirsting after. Anaovueux, m love with. fenaing. Approchant, something like. Desireux, desirous. Arriere, in arrears, behind Different, different, differ- hand. Aucun, none. A V e VI gl e, hlin ded. Avide, greedy, eager. Capable, capable. Charge, charged, loaded with. Charme, charmed, Cheri, cherished. Comble, loaded tvith. Complice, accomplice. Content, contented. Contiit, repentant. Coupable, guilty. CoLivonne, crowned. Denue, void. xng. Digne, worthy. Done, endowed. Enchante, enchanted. Enivre, drunk, infatuated. Ennuye, tired, tvearied. Envieux, envious. Exempt, exempt, free. Fatigue, fatigued. Fier, proud. Fou, mad, very fond. Honteux, shameful. Incapable, incapable. Independant, independent. In digne, zmvjorthy. InsdiiiahlQ, insatiable. Ivre, drunk, drunken. Jaloux, jealous. ^oyewx, joyful. Las, fatigued, tired. Libre, j'ree. Mecontent, dissatisfied. Orgueilleux, prottd. V\ein, full. Ravi, delighted, pleased. Rayonnant, radiant. Redevable, indebted. Rempli,///^^/. Satisfait, satisfied, contented. Soigneux, careful. Sur, sure. Taxe, taxed. Tributaire, tributary. Vide, void, empty. and, in general, all those which signify plenty, scarcity, or want*. * General observations on several adjectives and participles which^ according to the sense in which they are used, reqtnre different prepositions before the words which they govern. 1. Adroit, skilful in, generally requires a before its object, although in be used in English : as, — elle est adroite a ses exercices, she is skilful in her exercises. De must however be used, and not a, when adroit refers to any part of the body : as, — cet hommc est ad7~oit de la main gauche, that man is clever with his left hand. 2. Affable, civil to, requires a or envers : as, — il est affable a ou en vers tout le monde, he is civil to every body. 3. Anime, animated, requires de, in the sense of with or bt/ ; pour, in the sense of for; and u, in the sense of to: as, — he is animated with a noble zeal for his country, il est a?iime d'?m bean zele pour sa patiie. They were incited to fight by the sound of instruments, ils ttaient animes au combat par le so7i des instrumens. 4. Assidu, assiduous, requires auprts de before the names of persons: as, — il etait fort assidu aupres de M^^'^ S''--'^, he was very attentive to Miss S** ; but it requires a before verbs in the present of the infinitive, and before the names of things : as, — il est assidu a faire sa cour, he is an assiduous courtier. Jls ne sont pas assidus a Vetude, they are not assiduous at study. 5. Aveuqle, blind, requires sometimes sur, and sometimes dans: as, — elle est aveugle sur 5^5 dtfauts, she is blind to her own defects. Les amans sont aveugles dans lenrs dtsirs, lovers are blind in their desires. 6. Ctlcbre, celebrated, requires sometimes /;«?-, and sometimes en : as, — il est c^lebre par ses vertus, par ses crimes, he is celebrated for his virtues, notorious for his crimes. " Cettc mer oij tu cours est celebre en naufrages.'' — Boileau. 7. Or?/, polite to, requires envers, and sometimes a Pe'gard de : as, — il est civil envers tout le monde, he is polite to every body. // ri'est pas civil a I'egard de ^^a- domestiques, he is not civil to his servants. 8. Comparable, comparable, to be compared with, requires a and also avec: — as, — les biens de ce monde ne sont pas comparables a ceux de Pl'ternite, the treasures of this world are not to be compared Avith those of eternity. L'espiit Ji'est pas comparable avec la vxatitre, the mind is not to be compared v/ith matter. OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 269 The following adjectives, beau, hon^ doux, agreahle, desagreable, facile^ aise, utile, inutile, naturel, horrible, dangereux, difficile, dur, 9. Co/w/jtei/e, accountable, governs two objects, and requires i?co/«so/a6/e, inconsolable, governs r/(?, and sometimes sur: as, — elle est incon- jiolahle de la perte de son amant, she is inconsolable for the loss of her lover. II est inconsolable ^\\x cette mort, he is inconsolable for that death. 27. Indulgent, indulgent, kind, requires envers : as, — elle est bien indulgente envers ses enfans, she is very kind to her children. 28. Inftrieur, inferior, requires a before nouns referring to persons, and en before those which refer to things : as,— z'/ est inftrieur a so7i frere en science, en talens et en vertus, he is inferior to his brother in science, talents and virtue. 29. Inquiet, uneasy, requires sometimes de, and sometimes sur, before substan- tives ; but always de before verbs in the present of the infinitive: as,— /e suis fort inquiet sur son sort, I am very uneasy about his fate, Je suis inquiet de ne pas recevoir de ses nouvelles, I am uneasy at not receiving any news from her. 30. Ingenieux, ingenious, requires pour before substantives, and a before verbs in the present of the infinitive : as, — il a P esprit inghneux pour les plaiairs des autres, he has an ingenious mind for the pleasures of others. Le vice est ivginieux a se degniser, vice is ingenious in disguising itself. 31. /;?_9ro/, ungrateful, requires envois before nouns referring to persons, and a before those which refer to things: as, — il est ingrat envers son bienfaiteur, ingrat envers Dieu meme, he is ungratefvd to his benefactor, ungrateful to God himself. " Ingrat a tes bontes, ingrat a ton amour." — Voltaire. " Blalheur au citoyen ingrat a sa patrie." — Delii.i.e. 32. J««o/ew;, insolent, requires sometimes f/a«5, sometimes en, and sometimes avec : as, — les ames basses sont insolentes dans la bonne fortune, low minds are insolent m prosperity. Ce vnlel est insolent en paroles, en injured, this footman is saucy in his • expressions ; combien de jeunes gens sont insolens avec les femmes I how many young men are insolent to women ! 33. Lent, slow, requires dans before substantives, and « before verbs m the present of the infinitive : as,—;/ faut etre lent dans le choix de ses amis, one must not be hasty in choosing a friend. Soyez lent a punir, be slow to punish. 34. Mist rwor dieu X, compassionate, requires envers: £is,—il est misericordieux en- vers les pauvres, envers les malheureux, he is compassionate to the poor and the imfortunate. 35. Necessaire, necessary, requires sometimes a, and sometimes poz^r ; as, /a respiration est ?zecessaire a la vie, breathing is necessary to life.; la foi est ahsolument necessaire pour le salut, faith is absolutely necessary to salvation. _ 36. OJficieux, kind, requires e?ivers: as,— il est ojficieux envers tout le monde, he is kind to every body. OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 271 ceded by a tense of the verb etrCy having the pronoun il taken indeter- minately for its subject : as, — il est, il etait, il sera, il serait, &c. but they require a before the next infinitive, when the tense of the verb etre, b}^ which they may be preceded, has the demonstrative pronoun ce or cela, or a substantive for its nominative : as, — il est doux ^'observer les lois de Vamitie ; il est beau de mourir maitre de runivers ; il est inutile de la contredire ; il est danger eux d'y aller ; il est difficile de comprendre cela; il est dur, fdcheux de se voir prefer er un sot; but we say — cest beau a voir ; la bouillante jeunesse est facile a seduire ; c^est difficile a comfrendre ; il n^y a point de douleur plus dure, plus fdcheuse, a supporter que l absence de ce qu^on aime, &c. When the above adjectives, or any other of the same kind, come before a substantive, they generally govern a before it, or if the article be also required, au, a la, a l\ or aux. In this case, the verb etre, by which they are preceded, is not taken impersonally, but refers to some person or thing which has been mentioned before : as, — c'est doux au toucher ^ that is soft to the touch. // est inutile au monde, he is of no use in the world. Observe. — A substantive may be governed by two or more adjectives in French, provided they require the same preposition: thus — cette femme est utile ct chere a sa famille, is correct; because we say — utile d, cher a ; so, also, une femme belle ct vertueuse est aimec et recherchee de tout le inonde, is correct ; because we say — aime de and recherche de; but we could not say — cette fe mine est utile ct cherie de sa famille, 37. Paresse/ix, slothful, requires sometimes ck, and sometimes a before verbs in the present of the infinitive: as, — il )i' est pas paresseitx d^tcrire, \iQ \^ not sloihivX to write. // est jmresseiix a servii\ he is slothful to serve. 38. Prodigup, profuse, lavi-h, requires cnvers or a Ptgard de before nouns re- ferring to persons, and de before those which refer to things : as, — il est prodigue de S071 hien envers les pauvres, he lavishes his property upon the indigent. 39. Reconnaissant, grateful, requires envers before nouns referring to persons, and de before those which refer to things : as, — il est bien reconnaissant envers ses parens de la bonne education quails lin ont donme, he is very grateful to his parents for the good education which they have given him. 40. Responsable, answerable, requires a or envers before the word Dieu, and before nouns referring to persons ; but it governs de before those which refer to things: as, — votts serez respunsab/es k Dieu ou envers Die// de vos maiwaises actions^ you will be answerable to God for your bad actions. De is, however, sometimes used before nouns referring to persons : as, — un mait7'e est responsable de ses valets, a master is answerable for his sei-vants. 41. Riche, rich, requires sometimes de, and sometimes en: as, — il est riche de cent mille francs, he is worth a himdred thousand francs. 11 est riche en terre, he is rich in landed property. 42. Severe, severe, requires envers or a f'egard de, and sometimes poi/r : as, — ce pere n'est pas assez s^ve/'e envers ou k I'egard de ses enfans, that father is not sufficiently severe to his children. // est severe et impitoyable pour les assassins, he is severe and pitiless towards ruffians. 43. Sterile, barren, requires en : as, — tous les temps ont etc steriles en orateurs, most times have been barren in orators. 272 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. because utile requires the preposition a, and chtrie de ; another turn must therefore be given to the sentence, using en before the second adjective: as, — cette femrne est utile a sa famille^ et en est cherie. ESSAY XLI. That is very soft to the touch. — Nothing is more nauseous to the taste. — It dottx toucher dtsagreable is difficult to explain in a satisfactory manner so abstruse a science. (What (T (V satisfaisant abstrus Qii'y can he) more dangerous for innocence than tender converse ? Let a a-t-il de pour de entredens m. pi. Qu^ child (he) attentive to his studies, sensible of reprimands, and docile to soit r^primande aux his masters. — If I were not sensible of your past kindness, I volontts de bontts f. pi. should not have interested myself for your son. A person whose mind is s^interesser a disturbed is not fit to discharge his duty. Somebody told me that you trouble propre remplir Oti have fallen in love with Miss B**; I (give you joy for it). — That young per- etre devenir amoureux vous enfelicite son is endowed with the greatest abilities, and is extremely desirous of ini- 7'emplir talent dhireitx se proving herself in (every thing) she undertakes. — She is skilful in doing perfectionner tout ce qu' entreprendre habile ^ (tvery thing,) and courteous to every body. — The soldiers, already animated ^tout affable deja with a noble zeal for their country, were again excited (to fight) by the sound beau au combat of warlike instruments. — (You must) be civil to your servants, if you will guerrier 11 f aid domeslique vouloir (be respected by them.) — As mind is not (to be compared) with matter, quHls vous respect€7it De meme que esprit comparable (neither so) (are) the riches of this world comparable with those of ainsi ^ ne sunt pas ^ '^biens m. pi. ^ '^ ^ eternity. — How consoling it will be for me to see my children again * ! — Your Qu'' revoir brother is known by every body for not (being) constant in love. — That king is etre cruel to his country and children. — He began by (neglecting) study, became jxir ntgliger ^ insensibly loose in his manners, hardened in crime, (careless of) ^peu-a-peu iWendurcir envisagea d'un air dHnsouciance the reverses of fortune, and even indifferent to adversity.- -England se montrer is not so fruitful in corn, wine and fruit, as France and Italy.— They are so faithful to their king, that nothing will ever induce them to forfeit their honour. porter a agir contre V — That lady is not faithful to her promises. — 1 am fatigued with running.— The OF THE ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. 273 most fortunate (lover) is not always the most tranquil. Why are you so im- heitreux en amour tranquille patient to see her ? Miss H * * has been a long time inconsolable for the loss of her lover, although he was very inferior to her in science, talents, vir- amant sub. imp. lues and wealth. — She is very uneasy about that aflPair. — We are uneasy at not tichesses receiving any news from her. Vice is most ingenious in disguising itself, and trts-ingaileux se dtguiser often (assumes the most deceitful appearance). He has been ungrateful to sous /es formes les plus irompeuses se monlrer his benefactor, to your Idndness and* love ; but woe iiifjrat bontes/.p/, ing rut a voire malheur to him, if he be ungrateful to his country. Be quick to reward, slow to punish, patrie prompt and compassionate to the poor Faith is as necessary to salvation, as mistricordteux Foi aussi salat breath to life, — A well-educated son is grateful to his parents for the respiration Pest clever recotu/aissant good education which they have given him. We are all accountable to God for respo?isab/e our bad actions. That gentleman is worth two hundred thousand francs. He riche franc is not sufficiently severe to his children. All his estates are barren in corn. assez terre sterile Never was a" woman more useful and dear to her family, and (at the same time) en meme temps more respected and beloved by every bod}', LESSON XLII. Of tlie adjectives of dimension — high, wide, broad, deep, long, &c. General Rule. — The adjectives high, wide, broad, deep, long, &c. are rendered into French by an adjective or a substantive ; thus, — high is expressed by de haut or de hauteur ; long, by de long or de longueur ; wide and broad, by de large or de largeur ; but deep must always be construed by de profondeur, and never by de profond ; and, in general, the substantives are more elegantly used than the adjectives. De is put before the noun of number which precedes the w^ords— /ee^, inches, &c. if no tense of the verb avoir be employed before it ; but should a tense of the verb avoir come before the noun of number, de should not then be used before it, although it should always precede the words hauteur, longueur, largeur, profondeur, &c. : as, — a wall twenty feet high, un mur de vingt pieds de haut ou de hauteur, and not un mur vingt pieds N 5 274 OF THE ADJECTIVES OF DIMENSION. haut. This well is a hundred feet deep, ce putts a cent pieds de pro- fondeur, and not — a de cent pieds profond ou de profond. When two or more dimensions of the same object are mentioned : as, —an apartment three hundreds feet long and fifty wide ; that pond is one hundred feet deep by three hundred in circumference ; the con- junction and or by which is used to connect the sentence in such a case in English, may be expressed in French by sur or et, with this difference, that, should sur be used, de must not be put before the following num- ber preceding the word of dimension ; whereas, if et be employed, de is required before it : as, — an apartment three hundred feet long and fifty wide, un appartement de trois cents pieds de longueur sur cinquante de largeur, and not sur de cinquante. That pond is one hundred feet deep by three hundred in circumference, cet Hang a cent pieds de pro- fondeur sur trois cents de cir conference, and not sur de trois cents ^ &c. ; but we say with de — un appartement de trois cents pieds de longueur et de cinquante de largeur, because et is employed in the sen- tence. Par can never be used in sentences of this kind in French, as by is in English. Whenever the preposition in precedes a word of dimension as in the following sentence — that pond is one hundred feet deep by three hun- dred in circumference, it is usually expressed in French by de, and not by en or dans : as, — that pond is one hundred feet deep by three hundred in circumference, cet etang a cent pieds de profondeur sur trois cents de cir conference, and not — en ou dans cir conference. Thirty feet in height, trente pieds de hauteur, and not en hauteur, &c. ESSAY XLII. The beautiful column in the Place-Vendome, in Paris, is two hundred feet a high. There is in that house a roona two hundred and fifty feet long, sixty saile wide, and twenty-six high. This well will be three hundred feet deep by piiifs eighteen in diameter; it will be covered with a magnificent marble stone dicmittre couvrir iV snperbe de marbre pierre eighteen or nineteen inches thick. Your bed- room is no more thanfortj^- poiice epaisseur a coucher chambre de three feet long and twenty-one wide. The new canal is one hundred feet broad and fifteen or sixteen deep. 1 do not think the steeple of that church croire elocher sub. pr. is more than five hundred and eighty feet high. The two windows of that de fenetre chapel are each seventy-seven feet eleven inches deep, and twenty-four wide. chapelle chacim hauteur 1 have seen, in America, an iron bridge seventy-three feet wide: it en de fer pont OF COMPARATIVES. 275 consists of twenty piers, seventeen large arches, and two small ones* ; the etre compost pile grand four middle piers are each thirty-four feet broad ; all the others decrease in du milieu chacim diminuer en breadth by one foot and a* half on each side. The king's palace is one hun- Idrgeur d' de palais dred and ten feet high, four hundred long, and two hundred broad. This street is about one mile long, and ninety feet wide. We have in our garden, in environ ' ^ ^dans ^ ^ *ot. the country, a pond which is six hundred and twelve feet in length, eighty in • c breadth, and thirty-eight in depth. LESSON XLIII. Of Comparatives. The degrees of comparison in adjectives having already been explained in the beginning of this Grammar, the object of this short article is to point out the manner of construing into French several English modes of expression, which present some difficulty. First General Rule. — When a comparison is expressed in English by as repeated, or by so and as^ or also by as much, so much, or as many and so many. Sic, these words are construed into French, as it is explained in the beginning of this Grammar, page 49, No. 3. The preposition by, which is sometimes used in English after a com- parative, to denote how much a thing exceeds or is less than another, is expressed in French by de : as, — she is taller or less than you by a whole head, elle est plus grande ou plus petite que vous de toute la tete. When the conjunction than, which follows a comparative, comes be- fore a verb in the indicative mood : as, — your sister is taller than I thought ; women do not speak better than they write ; — ne must be used in French before the verb following que, if the first part of the sentence be affirmative, whereas ne is not required, if the first part be negative : as, — your sister is taller than I thought, votre sceur est plus grande que je ne croyais, and not que je croyais ; because the first part of the sen- tence is affirmative : but we say, — women do not speak better than they write, les femmes ne parlent pas mieux qu^elles ecrivent, and not qu'elles nkcrivent, because the first part of the sentence is negative. If a conjunction should intervene between than and the following- verb : as, — / am better than when / was in the country ; in this case, ne should not be used before the verb following que, whether the first part of the sentence be affirmative or negative : as, — I am better than 216 OF COMPARATIVES. when I was in the country, je me porte mieux que quand fetais a la campagne, and not que quand je n^etais, because the conjunction quand comes between que and the following verb etais. Whenever also than or as, which is used after a comparative, comes between two verbs in the present of the infinitive mood : as, — it is more noble to forgive than to revenge ; that is not so easy to do as to say : ne is not used before the verb following que, whether the first part of the sentence be affirmative or negative; but de or a, or any other pre- position which the adjective, substantive, or participle, in the com- parative, may require before the verb preceding, ^i/e, must be repeated before that which follows it : as, — it is more noble to forgive than to revenge, il est plus noble de pardonner que de se venger, and not que de ne se venger. That is not so easy to do as to say, cela n'est pas aussi facile kfaire qu^k dire, and not qu^a ne dire, &c. Second General Rule. — When the more or the less is repeated in a sentence before two different verbs : as, — the more I see her, the more I love her ; the less I speak, the less I feel tired: ^Ae 7nore is expressed in French by plus, and the less by moins, without the article : as, — the more I see her, the more I love her, plus je la vois, plus je Vaime, and not le plus je la vois, le plus je Vaime. The less I speak, the less I feel tired, moins je parle, moins je suis fatigue, and not le moins je parle, le moins je suis fatigue. But if the more or the less should be repeated before two substan- tives, two adjectives, participles, or adverbs, instead of two verbs : as, — the more money he gets, the more expenses he incurs ; the more diffi- cult a thing is, the more honourable, &c. ; or if two adjectives should be repeated with the syllable er at their termination, instead of being preceded by more : as, — the longer the day, the shorter the night, &c. ; the sentence should then be construed into French by using : I. plus ou moins ; 2. the nominative of the verb ; 3. the verb ; 4. the substantive, adjective, participle, or adverb, and the rest as in English : as, — the more money he gets, the more expenses he incurs, p/its il gagne d' argent, plus il jait de depenses. The more difficult a thing is, the more honourable, plus une chose est difficile, plus elle est honorable. The longer the day, the shorter the night, jjIus le jour est long, plus la nuit est courte, &c. The verb etre cannot be suppressed in French, as the verb to be is sometimes in English, in sentences like the following : — the longer the day, the shorter the night. Whenever, therefore, any case of this kind occurs, the sentence must be construed into French with a tense of the verb etre : as, — the longer the day, the shorter the night, plus le jour est long, plus la nuit est courte ; as if it were in English— more the day is long, more the night is short. OF THE PRONOUNS LUI, ELLE, AND EUX. 211 ESSAY XLIII. If it be as easy to do good as to do evil, why don't you behave better ? — bten mal se conduire Les Great talents are of every condition, and if they do not shine so commonly in tout briller commnnkment low people as in (others,) it is (for want) of care and cultivation. — Although has cadres classes faide I have not so many friends as his brother, I have succeeded much sub. pr, reussir better than he. — They say that Miss G** is taller than her sisters by the On grand whole head. — There are persons who write better than they speak, and person7ie others who speak better than they write. — I am infinitely better than ^e porter infiniment mieux when I was on the continent. — Religion teaches that it is greater to overcome sur enseigner de vaincre one's passions than to conquer whole nations. — (As for me,) I think it is ses conqriirir entier Quant a moi croire easier to command than to obey.— The more I speak to those ladies, the more facUe de obiir I hate them. — The less you (study,) the less you will improve. — He will never hair etudierez propter be a* rich man,* because the more money he gets, the more expenses he gagner incurs. — The more elevated in dignity one is, the less pride one ought to* have. /aire elevc en 1523 4 — Is it not evident that the shorter the day is, (so much) longer is the night ? p/us LESSON XLIV. Observations on the pronouns lui, elle, and eux. General Rule. — Whenever the pronouns him, ]lci\ and tlieni, being joined to a substantive by the conjunction and or nor, are governed by a verb, they are expressed in French thus : — him, by lid ; lier, by die ; them, by eux or elles ; with one of the pronouns le, la, I', or les, according to the import of the sentence, before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one ; but, if him, her, or them, should be joined to the pronoun me or yoii, instead of being joined to a substantive, ?i02is should then be used before the verb or the auxiliary, if 7/te be employed in English, and voits, if it should be you; at all events, lui or leur is required before the verb, if lui, elle, eux or elles, depend on the preposition a : as, — I have congratulated him and his friends, je 1' ai felicite In i el ses amis. I neither like her nor her brother, 278 OF THE PRONOUNS LUI, ELLE, AND EUX. je ne Vaime ni elle ni son frere. I esteem them and their friends, je les estime eux et leurs amis. They neither made him nor me welcome, on ne nous accueillit ni lui ni moi. You and she have been seen together, on vous a vus ensemble voiis et elle. I have spoken to her and her brother, je lui ai parle a elle et a son frere. I gave them and their friends something, je leur ai donne qiielque chose a eux et a leurs amis, &c. When the pronouns it and them, referring to inanimate things, depend on the verb to owe or to he indebted, they are expressed in French : — it, by lui, and them, by leur ; and not by ij, as in other cases : as, — / am indebted to it for the recovery of my health, (alluding to a country,) je lui suis redevable du retablissement cle ma sante, and not — fy suis redevable, &c. If it or them should depend on a preposition which could not be con- strued into French by a, it or them should be left out, and the preposition would become an adverb : as, — the people were for peace, but the par- liament was against it, le peuple etait pour la paix, mais le parlement etait contre. If the preposition could not become an adverb, another turn should be given to the sentence. The adverb there, referring to some place which has been mentioned before, is, when the verb governs a in French, usually expressed by y, and put before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as, — I have been there, j'y ai ete, &c. ESSAY XLIV. I blamed him and his mother very much for having taken such a* liberty.— cetfe He will neither see her nor her brother, (on account of) then- (unpolite vouloir voir a cause de malhon- behaviour) (to him.) — I hate, and always shall hate them, and all their friends. — nitett a son egard You and Miss S*'"* have been seen together. — I should have written to On you and his sister, when I was in France, had I not been obliged to return si je ri' avals pas de revenir to England so suddenly. — She was (so cross) that she would neither de si mauvaise humeur vovloir speak to him nor to me. — We shall send some to you and to them. — The climate en of that country is so mild that I am indebted to it (for the) recovery of doux redcvab/e du ritablissement my health. — Miss A***, come near the fire. You are very polite, raadame; I s'approcher du honnete am quite close to it. — The falling of the water of that river makes so much tout aiiprts chute noise that it deafens those who live near it. — Do you know where the rendre sourd demeurer aupres savoir ^ OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY PRONOUNS. 279 Treasury is in London? Yes, I do. Well, you will easily find your way; ^trdsorerie ^ *a ^ chemin near it is the Adntiiralty, just l)y is the Horse-guards, and over against it is aupres tout ai/pres garde a cheval vis-a^is the Whitehall chapel, where you want to* go. — They unanimously declared against vouloir iinanimement se declarer it. — Switzerland is a delightful country ; have you ever been there ? No ; but I Suisse charm ant y intend to go this summer if my affairs allow me. d'y le LESSON XLV. Of the supplementary pronouns /e, /a, /', les. General Rule. — Whenever any tense of the verb to be, being used in answer to a question, refers either to a substantive, or an adjective substantively taken, in the question : as, — is she not the sister of Mrs. L*** ? no, she is not; one of the supplementary pronouns le, la, V, les, according to the gender and number of the substantive in the question, must be used in French before tiie corresponding tense of the verb etre, in the answer : as, — is she not the sister of Mrs. L* * * ? no, she is not; rtest-elle pas la soeur de Af"" L***? non, elle ne Vest pas. Is this your hat? yes, it is; est-ce Id votre chapeau? oiii, ce Vest. Are these your books ? no, they are not, sont-ce Id vos livres ? non, ce ne les sont pas, &c. But if the verb to he, used in answer to a question, should refer to an adjective, a participle, or a substantive adjectively taken, in the question, instead of referring to a substantive : as, — is your sister married ? yes, she is ; are these young ladies relations to Mr. D*** ? no, they are not ; in this case, the pronoun le (indeclinable) should be used for both genders and numbers loefore the verb etre, in the answer in French : as, — is your sister married ? yes, she is ; mademoiselle votre soeur est-elle mariee ? oui, elle Vest. Are these young ladies relations to Mr. D*** ? no, they are not, mesdemoiselles sont-elles parentes de M. D***? non, elles ne le sont pas ; and not elles ne les sont pas. In any sentence like the following : — this lady is jealous, and I am not ; he is rich, and she is not ; in which the adjective or participle used in the first part of the sentence is understood in the second^ the pronoun le (indeclinable) should also be employed in its stead in French, for both genders and numbers, and be placed before the verb in the second part of the sentence : as, — this young lady is jealous, and I am xiQi, cette demoiselle est jalouse, et moi je ne le suis pas. He is rich, and she is not, il est riche, et elle ne \est pas. 280 OF THE SUPPLEMENTARY PRONOUNS. Whenever, also, the word so is or can be expressed with a verb in English, either in an answer to a question or in the second part of a sentence : as, — are you ill ? no, I am not ; they have been rich, but they are not so at present ; le (indeclinable) is used in the same sense in French, with reference to adjectives, participles, verbs, or substantives adjectively taken, and is placed before the verb : as, — are you ill ? no, I am not ; etes'vous malade ? non, je ne le sms pas. They have been rich, but they are not so now, Us ont ete riches, mais Us ne le sont pas a present, &c. in a reply made to a question, either with the verb to have or with one of the auxiliaries do, did, shall, will, would, could, should, can, may, and might, &c. : as, — do you believe it ? yes, I do ; have you seen them ? yes, I have ; do you think they will come ? yes, I do ; one of the pronouns le, la, l\ les, or lui, leur, according to the import of the sentence, and the gender and number of the substantive, or pro- noun, mentioned in the question, is used in French before the verb in the answer, which verb is generally the same as that by which the ques- tion is asked : as, — do you believe it ? yes, I do ; le croyez-vous ? out, je le crois. Have you seen them ? yes, I have ; les avez-vous vus ? oui, je les ai vus. Do you think they are coming ? yes, I do ; croyez-vous qiiils viennent 1 oui, je le crois. Sec. There are a few questions, implying either being at home or going to any place, in which the answer, although sometimes made by the same verb as that by which the question is asked, cannot admit of le, la, V, les, lui ox leur : as, — will you be at home? yes, I will; serez-vous chez vous ? oui, fy serai, and not je le serai. Will you go ? yes, I will; irez-vous? oui, j'irai, and not je I' irai. If, however, the sense of this last question were, are you willing to go 1 voulez-vous y aller ? the answer ought then to be — oui, je le veux Men, and not oui,jHrai; but practice alone can teach these differences. Any question may also be answered by — oui ou non, monsieur ou mes- sieurs, madam^e ou mesdames, mademoiselle ou mesdemoiselles, ac- cording as we speak to one or several persons ; or simply by — oui on non^ if speaking to our inferiors, friends, or equals. ESSAY XLV. Is this j^our hat ? Yes, it is. — Is Mademoiselle Mr. S.'s cousin ? No, sir, she is cousine not. Are these your daughters ? Yes, they are. Are not these your horses ? No, they are not. Is not this Mr. K.'s house ? Yes, it is. 1 thought this was Mrs. L.'s carriage ? No, madain, it is not. Are your croire voiture sisters married? The eldest is, and the youngest will be (in a very short time). mca-i^ cadetie bientot OF THE PRONOUNS— 3/y5£LF, THYSELF, &c. 281 (Have you got a cold ?) Yes, I have. Was there ever a woman Etes-votis enrhume eire jamais more unfortunate, and treated with more contempt than I am ? (You malhtureux trailer mtpris On have heen told) that Mrs. W. is dead, but she is not. Is Miss R. rich ? vot* ^^ Hi ^est ^arrive * shocking accident ; our carriage imfortunately ran over his body, ^terrible ' voiiure malhevretisement passer broke his left thigh, and bruised his right shoulder very much. — Do not casser gcniche citisse ^ ^a ^froisser * ' ^ ^beaucoup make so much noise, you split my head. — I trod upon his foot. — A cannon- faire tant de fendre marcher ball shot off (both) their (left arms) (at the) same time. — Do not boulet emporter a tons les deux bras gauche en press my hand so much, you hurt my fingers terribly. Tell them that presser fort ^ ^faire "'mal '^ ^ ^furieiisement break their (necks.) Mii casser cou Prendre garde de (will hurt) her eyes. — Mr. A * * * is afraid they will be obliged to faire mal craindre on sub. pr. de cut off his thumb. — I caught cold and completely lost my voice. — My couper >, pouce ^enrhitmer cntiirement perdre ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 293 father (has had a fall,) on the ice, this morning, and injured his back and est tombe * * ^glace ^ * il ^s^est %lesse * ^dos " head (very much.) — In the battle of Waterloo, our General received a shot ^ '^dungereitsement a coup de feu in his right leg, another in his left shoulder : (by a great deal) of care and atten- a epau/e a force soin tion, his leg was saved, but it was necessary to * make an incision in his on Sttuver falloir shoulder. — Would it not be better for a man of probity to * lose his life vnloir mieux perdre than to sacrifice his honour by a criminal action ? — I think she has lost her de sacrijier mind. — When this virtuous officer had lost his leg, at the battle of Wagram, he lifted up his eyes and hands (to) heaven, and thanked God for having preserved lever au de conserver his life. — Did not the Prince of * * have his head cut off for (having) assassi- trancher avoir nated his brother ? No : it was for having attempted to (murder the) King. — 7ier att enter la vie du His niece (tells a falsehood) as often as she opens her mouth. — The inha- mentir toutes /esfois qu' bitants of that country are so superstitious, that I recollect having seen, one se rappeler d'avoir vu Sunday, in a magnificent temple, several thousand people, with ♦ their eyes temple permmie cast down, for more than half an hour, all intimately persuaded that baisser pendant intimement God was present, and addressed them in the person of their priest. — I see qu'il parler leiir that my foot begins to swell: I despair (of its) ever being cured. — s'enfler dvsesperer quil sub. pr. se guhir If you touch that knife, you will certainly cut your fingers. — Go first toucher se couper doigt d'abord and * wash your hands, (and then) come and * warm your feet. — I broke vous /aver puis se chauffer se casser my arm in trying to save a child who threw itself (out of) the window of a chercher a sejefer par fenetre house on fire. — Give me those stockings of mine which you have qui etait en bus mended. — —Where have you put that pocket-book of mine which I brought raccommodk Oil mettre tablettes apportees from France P You put it in your pocket, when you went out this afrer- mises les poche sortir noon. — Is not that little girl aware that it is mine to command and hers to obey ? savoir a d'obeir — That poor man, in performing a beautiful concerto of his own, was (struck by executer beau frappe a fit) of apoplexy, and died suddenly — I have often heard Miss A" * mention apoplexie subitemeid dire 294 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS that she has a large estate of her own on the contineiit ; I should like very much beau hien to know where it is. — You ought not to * trouble yourself about that, because it savoir c' devoit^ se meler de parce que is no concern of yours. LESSON L. Cases in which its is expressed in French by son^ sa, ses, and en. General Rule. — Whenever its is used with reference to inanimate things not personified, it is expressed in French by son, sa, ses : — 1. When it comes before a substantive which is governed by the preceding verb : as, — Paris has its pleasures, Paris a ses plaisirs. I have seen London, its theatres, and buildings, fai vu Londres, ses theatres, et ses edifices. 2. When it is employed before the latter of two substantives which are joined together by a conjunction, if the latter belongs to the former: as, — London and its neighbourhood, Londres et ses environs. 3. When it precedes a substantive which depends on a preposition and refers to something which has either been mentioned before or is spoken of after, as when speaking of England, we say : — it is by its situation, joined to the wisdom of its government, that it unites such vast advantages within itself, c'est far sa position, jointe a la sagesse de son gouvernement, qu'elle reunit dans son seiii de si grands avan- tages. 4. When it comes before a substantive which, being qualified by an adjective or specified by some other word, serves as nominative to the following verb ; or when, without being modified by an adjective, the substantive is the nominative of a verb which either is or can be fol- lowed by the preposition de : as, — its regular buildings please at the first sight, ses bdtimens reguliers plaiseni au premier coup d^oeil. Its trade produces immense resources, son commerce prodnit d'immenses ressources. :■,: Its, being used before a substantive which serves as nominative to a verb in any other circumstance, is generally expressed in French by en before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, with le, la, or les, before the substantive, as in the following sen- tences, in which reference is made either to a parliament, an army, a nation, a town, or a tree : as, — its magistrates are upright, les magis- trats en so7it integres. Its soldiers are well disciplined, les soldats en sont bien disciplines. Its situation is agreeable, la situation en est agreahle. Its squares are beautiful and its streets very large, les places en sont superhes et les rues spacicuses. Its fruit is delicious, le fruit en est delicieux ; and so on, using l.the article; 2. the thing spoken of; 3. en ; 4. the verb ; 5, the adjective or participle. ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 295 Its, referring to a substantive which is the object of a verb, but which relates to another substantive, governed by another verb in the first part of the sentence, is likewise expressed in French by en before the verb or the auxiliary ; and by y, if reference be made to a place ; with le, la^ or les, before the substantive, in either case : as, — all those who read Milton's Paradise Lost are not always capable of feeling its beauties, tous ceux qui lisent le Paradis Perdu de Milton ne sont pas toujour s capables d^eu sentir les heautes. I should like Vauxhall, if indecency did not debase its pleasures, j^aimerais Vauxhall, si Vindecence n'y avilissait les plaisirs. But practice, in general, will be the best guide for knowing when its^ referring to inanimate things not personified, is to be expressed in French by son, sa, ses, before the substantive, or by en before the verb, with le, la, or les, before the substantive; the latter construction always being proper, whenever the sense will admit of it ; whereas son, sa, ses, must be used when it will not. ESSAY L. Every country has its customs, laws, and prejudices. — I should regret pays usage p^'^'jug^ regretter very much to leave France without (having) seen Paris, its theatres, buildings, beuucoup de quiticj' sans avoir edi/cce and amusements. — Richmond and its. neighbourhood present to the eye the finest prospect I ever beheld. — (It is) on account of its climate, soil, perspective que sub. pret. voir Cest a cause clivmt sol and productions, that France is so much admired by foreigners. — We were in taut des ttraiiger England, when the Thames (broke out of its banks), and overflowed all this Tamise se d^borda inoiider part of the country: the water was so high and rapid that, irf its course, it partie haut si que cours swept away several houses and trees. — Has not war its theory and entrahier plusieurs guerre theorie principles like other sciences ? — As soon as Solomon had abandoned himself comme les Salomon s''abandouner to the love of women, his understanding declined^ his heart weakened, and his amour esprit baisser s'affaiblir piety degenerated into idolatry. — This town would be a delightful spot, if its deginerer en charmant lieu streets were not so narrow and its houses so high: its regular buildings please etroit bdiitneni me much, and its peaceful inhabitants are very amiable. — London is the largest paisible grand city in Europe : its situation is agreeable and very convenient for trade ; vil/e de P commode commerce its houses are brick-built and extremely clean ; its squares and streets are large brique propre place grand 296 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS and beautiful, aud its parks immense. — ^This peach-tree is not very fine ; but beau pare pecker its fruit is delicious. — I will not take that physic; I know its strength and delicieux m^deciiie ^ force. * effects too well.— As all those who read Milton's Paradise Lost are ^effet ^trop %ien De meme que not capable of feeling its beauties, so the greatest part of foreigners who ainsi kranger attend Racine's tragedies in Paris cannot relish their sublimity. cdler aux a lie sauraient en apprecier la —I am very fond of Vauxhall, and I should often take my children there, if ^ * ^mcner * ^ "^y indecency and vulgarity did not debase its amusements and pleasures. vulgarite avihr LESSON LI. Particular Observations on the Demonstrative Pronouns. First General Rule. — Whenever this, that, these, those, and also such, are used before a tense of the verb to be, followed either by a substantive, an adjective, a participle, a pronoun, or a verb in the present of the infinitive, to which they refer, or which they serve to demonstrate : as, — this is a very good thought; I have now two things in con- templation, these are to get married and retire into the country ; these or such are my sentiments, &c. they are expressed in French by ce or c\ (indeclinable,) before the tense of the verb etre which cor- responds to that of the verb to be employed in English, which tense is put in the third person singular, if it be followed by a substantive, an adjective, a participle, or a pronoun in the singular, or also by a verb in the present of the infinitive mood ; but it is put in the third person plural, if it be followed by a substantive, an adjective, or a pronoun, in the plural: as, — this is a very good thought, c''est une tres-bonne pensee. I have now two things in contemplation, these are to get mar- ried and retire into the country, y'a« maintenant deux choses en vue, c^est de me marier et de me retirer a la campagne. These or such are my sentiments, ce sont mes sentimens, &c. La must be added to the different tenses of the verb etre, in sentences of this kind, if we wish to express the thing spoken of with great energy : as, — that is a very imprudent step, c^est Id une demarche bien impru- dente. Is that behaving as one ought ? est-ce Id se conduire comme il faut ? These or such are my sentiments, ce sont Id mes sentimens, &c. which sentences are much more energetic than if we said simply : — c^est une demarche bien imprudente ; est-ce se conduire comme il faut 1 ce sont mes sentimens. Sometimes, also, the demonstrative pronouns and the verb to be are expressed by the adverbs voici, voild (here or there is, here or there ON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 297 are) : as, — this or that is a very imprudent step, void ou voila une de- marche hien imprudente. That is a very good thought, voila une hien bonne feiis^e. Such or those are my sentiments, voila mes sentimens. When this^ that, these, those, come before the present participle of the verb to be : as, — this being your opinion ; the sentence must be construed by another tense of the verb etre in French, placing one of the conjunctions puisque, comme, or any other which the sense may require, before ce or c' : as, — this or that being your ophiion, puisque ou comme c^est votre opinion, and not — c^etant votre opinion. Second General Rule. — When this or that is employed in the sense of such before a substantive, to point out a person or a thing in an indeterminate manner, it is sometimes expressed in French by tel ou telle : as, — that friend who professes the most sincere love is often the most likely to forsake us in the time of trouble, tel ami qui profere les temoignages les plus sinceres d'amiiie est souvent le premier a nous abandonner dans le besoin. Third General Rule. — ^Whenever the demonstrative pronoun those, and also the pronouns he, she, they, him, her, and them, are the antecedents of ivho, whom, that or which, they are expressed, in French, as follows : — 1. He who or that is construed into French by celui qui ; — she ivho or that, by celle qui ; — they or those who or that, by ceux qui m. and celles qui f. for the nominative of the following verb : as, — he who fears nothing is very happy, celui qui ne craint rien est tres-heureux. 2. He or him whom or that is expressed by celui que ; — she or her whom or that, by celle que; — they or those whom, and them or those whom or which, by ceux que m. and celles que f. for the direct object of the following verb : as, — I have seen her whom you love, j'ai vu celle que vous aimez. I shall take those which you have shown me, je prendrai ceux que vous m'avez monires. 3. He or him of or about whom is expressed by celui dont ou du- quel ; — she or her of or about whom, by celle dont ou de laquelle ; — those or them of or about whom or which, by ceux dont ou desquels m. and by celles dont ou desquelles f. for the indirect object of the succeeding verb, when such verb requires de after it in French, whatever, in general, may be the preposition on which the relative depends in Eng- lish : as, — those of whom you complain are innocent, ceux dont vous vous plaignez sont innocens ; because we say se plaindre de. 4. He or him to or ivith whom is expressed by celui a qui ou auquel ; — she or her to whom, by celle a qui ou a laquelle ; — they or those to whom or to which, by ceux a qui ou auxquels m. and by celles a qui ou auxquelles f. for the indirect object of the following verb, when such verb requires a after it in French, whatever may also be the preposition on which the relative depends in English : as, — those to whom you were speaking are charming young ladies, celles a qui vous parhez sont de charmantes demoiselles ; because we say, parler a. o5 298 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS Observe. — The pronouns he, she, they, him, her, them and those, are sometimes separated from the relatives who, whom, that or which, in Enghsh : as, — they are not ahvays happy who seem to be so ; but, in French, celui, celle, ceux, celles, must always be joined to qui, que, or dont, &c. ; and, for this purpose, the second part of the sentence following the relative in English must, with the relative, be used the first in French, and be placed immediately after the demonstrative pro- nouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, &c. : as, — they are not always happy who seem to be so, ceux qui par ais sent etre heureux ne le sont pas toujours, as if it were in English — those who seem to be happy are not always so. The same order may however be retained in the French sentence as in the English, by adding the adverb Id to the demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles : as, — ceux-\k ne sont pas toujours heureux qui paraissent Petre, they are not always happy who seem to be so. Such as, at the beginning of a sentence of which it is the nominative : as, — such as seem to be happy are not always so, is expressed in French like he who, she who, they who, &c. by celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui or celles qui, according to the gender and number of the substantive which such expression is intended to represent; and, also, by tel ou telle, in the beginning of the sentence, with qui before the verb occurring in the second part : as, — such as seem to be happy are not always so, ceux qui paraissent etre heureux ne le sont pas toujours ; ou — tel para'it etre heureux qui ne Vest pas toujours. Fourth General Rule. — That and those, followed by which, with reference lo some thing that has been mentioned before, as when having spoken of watches or rings, we say, — / shall take that which is upon the table ; give me those which you do not like ; so, also, which, used in reply to a question, with reference to something mentioned in the question : as, — which of these two hats will you have ? which you please ; are expressed in French by one of the demonstrative pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, with qui, que, or dont, according as which is the subject or object, either direct or indirect, of the following verb in English : as, — I shall take that which is upon the table, je prendrai celle qui est sur la table (speaking of a watch). Give me those which you do not like, donnez-moi celles que vous ne voulez pas (alluding to rings). Which of these two hats will you have? which you please; lequel de ces deux chapeaux voulez-vous ? celui qu'^7 vous plaira. The two following familiar sentences must be excepted, and all simi- lar ones, wherein which, though referring to something mentioned before in the question, is not construed into French by celui que or lequel, but by ce qu'il or comme il, with the next verb in the third person singular of the future : as, — do you choose meat or fish ? which you please; voulez-vous de la viande ou du poisson? ce qu'il vous plaira ou ce qu'il vous fera plaisir ; and not — celui quHl vous plaira ou lequel il vous plaira. Shall I help you to some of this or that ? to ON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 299 which you please ; vous servirai-je de ceci ou de cela ? comme il vous plaira, and not — a celui quHl vous plaira ou auquel il vous plaira, as it is frequently said. But which, used in the sense of lohich thing, in the beginning of the second part of a sentence which is not interrogative, referring to the whole first part and implying some observation on it : as, — she gets up very late, which is very had for her health ; that is, which thing is very had; — they go out very often, which I do not approve of; that is, which thing I do not approve of; is expressed in French by ce qui, for the nominative of the following verb ; by ce que, for its direct object ; by ce dont, for its indirect object, when it governs de, and by ce a quoi, when it requires a ; which expressions are always masculine and of the singular number : as, — she gets up very late, which is very bad for her health, elle se leve tres-tard, ce qui est tres-mauvais pour sa sante. They go out very often, which I do not approve of, ils sortent tres-souvent, ce que/e n"* approuve point, &c. following the same method for the sen- tences in which ce dont and ce a quoi are required. What or that which, signifying that thing which, without referring to any thing expressed before, but taken in an indefinite sense : as, — what is good is desirahle ; what you say is true ; that is what I wanted to speak to you ah out ; I know what you complain of ; you do not know what you expose yourself to ; is also expressed in French by ce qui, for the nominative of the succeeding verb; by ce que, for its direct object; by de quoi and sometimes ce dont, for its indirect object, when it governs de ; and by ce a quoi when it requires a : as, — what is good is desirable, CE QUI est hon est desirahle. What you say is true, ce que vous dites est vrai. That is what I wanted to speak to you about, voUd de quoi je voulais vous parler. I know what you complain of, je sais ce dont vous vous plaignez. You are not aware what you expose yourself to, vous ne savez pas a quoi ou ce a quoi vous vous exposez. Ohserve. — Whenever the word ivhat, or any other expression which is to be rendered into French by ce qui or ce cjue, begins a sentence, and forms, with the next verb, the subject of a tense of the verb to he, coming in the second part of the sentence : as, — ivhat I fear is to dis- please you ; ivhat costs little is too dear ivhen it is of no use ; ivhat I say is true ; the demonstrative pronoun ce or c', must be used in French before the tense of the verb etre, which corresponds to that of the verb to he, employed in the second part of the sentence in English, if a sub- stantive, a pronoun, or a verb follows; but if it should be an adjective, either alone or preceded by an adverb, ce or c' is not required : as, — what I fear is a relapse, ce que Je crains, c'est une rechute. What I know is they have lost, ce que je sais, c'est quHls ont perdu. What attaches me to life is you, ce qui ni^ attache a la vie, c'est vous ; in which sentences c' is used, on account of est being followed by a substantive, a verb, or a pronoun; but in the next — what costs little is too dear when it is of no use, ce qui coute peu est trop cher quand il n'est d'aucun 300 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS usage. What I say is true, ce que je dis est vraL C is not employed, because est is followed by an adjective. If the verb following c'est, c^ttait, ce fut, &c. should be in the present of the infinitive, de ntiust be used before it ; whereas ywe is required, if it should be in any other mood : as, — what I fear is to displease you, ce que Je crains, c^est de vous dt'plaire. What I know is they will win, ce que je sais, c^est qu'iTs gagneront. Ce qui and ce que, always being of the singular number, cannot be used before a substantive plural ; whenever, therefore, which, or any other expression, which is to be construed into French by ce qui or ce que, comes before a substantive plural in English, another turn must be given to the sentence in French, instead of using ce qui or ce que : thus, — she plays on the piano and draws uncommonly well, which are two very fine accomplishments in a lady, must be rendered into French by: — elle joue du piano et de s sine par faitement: talens qui sont con- sideres comme tres-beaux dans une demoiselle, and not — ce qui ou qui sont consider es, &c. ESSAY LI. A small cottage and a few pieces of furniture, these are all his fortune. chaumiere que/que meuhles c'est la — I have now two things in contemplation, these are to get married and viie de se marier retire into the country. — That is very well thought of*. — That will be de se retirer a fort penser very badly managed. — I have been told you intend to send a challenge administrer avoir intention d'' cartel to Mr. D* * *; if such are your sentiments, it is not. . . — Is that (behaving) as a se conduire man of honour ? — This being your opinion, I am very sorry I have done it. — de That is a very imprudent step. It frequently happens that those who demarche souvent arriver profess the (most sincere love) are the most likely to forsake us nousfaire plus grandes protestations d^amitit premier a (in the time of) trouble and need. Alas! that is unfortunately quand nous sommes dans la peine besoin H6las «' malheureusement but too often the case When your sister is in company, she frequently que en '^souvent turns the conversation to subjects of literature, (in order) to mention ^faire tomber sur des ajin de citer the most striking passages of this or that author. — He Avho wants nothing frappant avoir besoin is very happy. These stockings are very fine, but I shall take in preference bas-ci de preference those which you showed me first. As all the children are not here, I avez montres d\ibord ON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 301 cannot punish those of whom you complain. Put yourself in the place of him se plauidre a to whom you will do an injury. Those to whom I was speaking, when you voidoir called me, are charming ladies. He is much to be pitied who gives himself up bien plaimlre s'ahandonner to his passions and the pleasures of this world. They are mistaken who think se tro7nper that happiness consists in riches : for such as seem to be happy are not always so. 1 am sure they do not know the human heart who trust to the vain sejie)' promises of men. All these rings are verj' pretty; however I give the pre- promesse bugue j'o/i ference to that which your cousin has (on her) finger. Madam, which of these cousine au gowns shall I have the pleasure of sending you P Which you please. Is not de her happiness infinitely superior to that which one usually enjoys in this au-dessus de on ordinaii'ement jouir world ? Do you choose meat or fish ? Which you please. Shall I have the vouloir pleasure of helping you to some of this or that .^ To which you please. He offrir drinks rum from morning to night, which is very injurious to his health. mir mauvais pour What you say is very true. What costs little is too dear when it is bad or of no use. Ladies, I know what you are laughing at, but I do not qinl 7i'est usage se moquer de care. If your sister knew what she exposes herself to in going there, ^se soucier ^en s'exposer y she would certainly stay at home. (You may not like) my pro- rester chez elle Peut-etre rC aimer ez-vo us point pro- ceeding ; but this is my way of acting : I always say what I think. cede maniere penser She goes out in* the evening, which displeases me very much. What she sortir deplaire fears is a relapse. What attaches me to life is you. What 1 know is they rechule have won. Miss A** plays on the harp and piano, speaks French and gagner de Italian, draws uncommonly well, which are considered very fine dessiner parfaitement ^ ^ * ^comme ^ ' accomplishments in a lady. ^talent 302 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS LESSON LII. Particular observations on the relative pronouns who, whom, whose, that, what, and which. General Rule. — 1. Whenever loho, being used interrogatively be- fore a tense of the verb to he, refers to a substantive following, as — who is that lady ? it is expressed in French by qui, for both genders and numbers, or by quel, quelle, quels or quelles, according to the gender and number of the substantive following : as, — who is that lady ? qui est ou quelle est cette dame ? If an adjective should follow the verb to be, instead of a substantive, as — who As courageous enough to follow me? who should then be expressed by quel est celui qui ou quelle est celle qui, or simply by qui or qui est-ce qui ; but not by quel, quelle, quels or quelles, with- out celui qui or celle qui, as when before a substantive : as, — who is courageous enough to follow me? quel est celui qui est assez hardi pour me suivre ? ox— qui ou qui est-ce qui est assez hardi pour me suivre ? 2. Qui is also frequently used absolutely in French ; that is, without any antecedent expressed, though the sentence be not interrogative. Qui is then of the masculine gender, and conveys to the mind only a vague and indeterminate idea, in the sense of he who : as, — Qui se lasse d'un roi, peut se lasser d'un pere. — Nicom. 11. Qui veut parler sur tout souvent parle au hasard j On se croit orateur, on n'est que babillard. 3. Whom, used without any antecedent expressed, in a sentence like this, — ask her whom she means ; is construed into French by de qui, when the verb on which it depends governs de in French : as, — ask her whom she means, demandez-lui de qui elle veut parler. 4. Whose, employed when a comparison is meant between two or more persons or things, as — you have had two dancing-masters : ivhose lessons have been most beneficial to you ? is expressed in French by quel est celui dont? ou quelle est celle dontl as, — you have had two dancing-masters : whose lessons have been most beneficial to you? vous avez eu deux maitres de danse : quel est celui dont les lemons vous ont fait le plus de bien ? 5. What, used by way of admiration or astonishment before an adjec- tive preceded by a or an, as — what an amiable family is Mr. D.^s ! what a fine woman she ivould have been! what a fine lecture he gave us ! is sometimes expressed in French by quel, quelle, quels or quelles, before the adjective, leaving out a or an, and sometimes a different turn is given to the sentence: as — what an amiable family is Mr. D.'s! quelle aimable famille que la famille de M, D***'/ What a fine ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 303 woman she would have been ! quelle belle femme elle aurait ete ! What a fine sermon he gave us ! le beau sermon qu^il nous Jit ! 6. What, coming between two verbs in the sense of what thing, in sentences of doubt, incertitude, or interrogation, as — / do not know what to say or to do ; is expressed in French by que, with the next verb in the present of the infinitive mood : as, — I do not know what to say or to do, je ne sais que dire ni que faire. 7. But «;/ia/, used interrogatively in the sense of i(?/iaf thing, before a tense of the verb to be followed by an adjective preceded by more or less, as — ichat is more laudable? or also what, not followed by any verb, but used immediately before more or less and an adjective, as — what more laudable ? is expressed in French by quoi de before the adjective, which is put in the masculine singular ; and the tense of the verb to be which may be used, is not expressed : as, — what is more laudable or what more laudable ? quoi de plus louable ? 8. If ivhat, signifying of ivhat moment or of what consequence, should be used before a tense of the verb to be, as — ivhat are men be- fore God? it should then be expressed by que? or qu^est-ce que? as, — what are men before God ? que sont les hommcs devant Dieu ? ou qu^est-ce que sont les hommes devant Dieu ? Note. — The French frequently use de quoi in an indefinite manner, when they wish to denote the means or sub^ance required to do any thing. This expres- sion must be rendered into English according to the import of the sentence: as, — do)mez-moi de quoi tcrire, give me something to write with. Nous avons de quoi nous amuser, we have something to amuse ourselves with ; but this can only be learnt by practice. 9. Which, coming before a tense of the verb to be, or before a tense of any other verb which is to be rendered into French by the corre- sponding tense of etre, and this being followed by an adjective or any other qualifying expression referring to the substantive going before, is sometimes expressed in French by quel, quelle, quels or quelles ? and sometimes by quel estcelui qui? or quelle est celle qui? as, — you have read these two books : which is the most interesting ? vous avez lu ces deux livres : quel est le plus interessant ? ou quel est celui qui est le plus interessant ? 1 0. Whichj taken in the sense of which or what thing, and coming after a preposition of which it is the object, in a sentence which is not interrogative, as — the tables were cleared away, after which dancing began ; is generally expressed in French by quoi, imless the preposi- tion preceding which should not admit of quoi, in which case the pre- position and the relative lohich should be supplied by an adverb, such as, — ensuite, alors, Id-dessus, aussitot, autrement, or any other, ac- cording to the import of the sentence : as,— the tables were cleared away, after which dancing began, on Sta les tables, apres quoi la danse coinmenpa ; in which sentence, if quoi were not proper, ensuite should be used : as, — on ota les tables, ensuite la danse commeiipa. 304 PARTICULAR OBSERVATIONS 11 . When the pronoun that, being taken in the sense of which, refers to one of the words sometliing or any thing, (quelque chose,) nothing, (rien), which it has for its antecedent, as — / do not know any thing that he is Jit for ; it is also expressed by quoi, placing the preposition of which that is the object in English, before quoi in French, although it frequently follows the succeeding verb in English : as, — I do not know any thing that he is fit for, je ne sache rien a quoi il soit propre. 12. ^/l^c^, referring to an expression of place, time, condition, end or design, and being the object of one of the prepositions at, to, in or ijito, or of any other which is to be rendered into French by a or dans, as — the place in ivhich he lives ; the end at which he aims, &c. is gene- rally construed into French with the preposition which governs it, by ou, instead of auquel or dans lequel, &c. as, — the place in which he lives, Vendroit ou il demeure, instead of — dans lequel il demeure. The end at which he aims, le hut ou il vise, for — auquel il vise, &c. li which should be the object of one of the prepositions /rom, out of, through, by, or of any other which is to be construed into French by de or par, it is likewise expressed by oil, when it refers to a word denoting a book, a subject, or a place ; but, in this case, the preposition de or par is expressed : as, — I know the book from which you have extracted that passage, je connais le livre d'o^i vous avez tire ce passage. The town through which we shall pass, la ville par ou nous passerons. Oil is also used interrogatively instead of a quoi, when it means con- dition : as, — oil or a quoi me reduisez-vous ? what condition do you reduce me to ? — and d'^oii instead of de quoi, in the sense oi from which cause or reason ? as, — c/'ow tirez-vous cette consequence ? from which cause do you draw that consequence ? Par oil is likewise employed interrogatively for the English expressions with what 1 — hoxu ? — by what means ? as : — with what shall we begin ? par oil commencerons-nous ? How shall you extricate yourself from such a difficulty ? par oii sortirez-vous dhm pareil embarras ? Oil and d'^oii are also adverbs of place, and are used interrogatively in the sense of ivhere ? whither ? and whence ? as, — whither are you going ? oil allez-vous ? Whence do you come ? d^oii venez-vous ? Observe. — The conjunction that, which is understood before the verb coming in the second part of the following or of any similar sentence, beginning by a tense of the verb to be, with the pronoun it taken inde- terminately for its subject, and a substantive or a personal pronoun preceded by a preposition for its object, as — it is to you I speak ; is always elegantly expressed in French by que, placing the preposition which the following verb may require in French, immediately before the substantive or pronoun which follows the impersonal it is, it was, &c. in English, and expressing it is, it was, by the corresponding tense of the verb etre, before which ce or c' is used in the sense of it in English : as, — it is to you I speak, c'^est a vous que je parle ; as if it were in English — it is to you that / speak. ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 305 ESSAY LIL Who was that lady to whom Mr. C* * introduced you the other day ? Who presenter will he courageous enough to attack that furious animal ? He who pour aitaquer furieux (covets all, loses all.) Did you ask her whom she (meant) ? No ; I trop embrasse mal etreint demander voidait parler (did not) You have had two or three different masters : whose lessons ne le lui demandai pas. have been most beneficial to you ? What an amiable family is Mr. L.'s ! But what a* disgusting one is Mr. C.'s ! What a fine girl she would have que 6 ice//€ ^ Ue^ * been, if she had not had that misfortune ! What a beautiful picture !- What do you say he has lost ? 1 (am at a loss) what to tell him. She did ne sais not know what to answer. What more laudable in a young man than louable spending his time in the study of sciences and arts ? What are men before d'employer ci God ? Tell them that if they will stay at home they will have something vouloir Tester to* play with*. You are acquainted with these two families: wliich is the s'amuser connaitre richest ? The ladies were admitted at ten o'clock, after which the ball began. admetire Do you know any thing that he is fit for? The end at sub.pr. ^'^ voila '^ ^*but^^ which he aims is* to* revive liberty in a country from which it seems to* '« J 7 ymVe Vmtre =* * ^^ 7 ^ ^paraitre (have been) banished. How comes it* that nobody is satisfied with his ^^etre '^ /->'ow content de condition ? The country through which we passed in going to Douleau, a* vil- S07't lage from which they extract a great quantity of coals, is the most fruitful in /'o« tirer chai'bon which I have ever travelled. Well! what will you begin with.'* S2tb, pret. jamais voyager He bien Where are you going this afternoon ? Whence does your sister come .'' Was it to this office you applied last year ? — No, it was not. It is not to you I ee bureau s'adresser ce ici speak. — It is on them I depend for that favour. ff attendre 306 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. LESSON LIII. Of Indefinite Pronouns. 1. Quiconque, qui que, qui que ce soit qui, whoever, whosoever, any one who 07' that, any body who or that; qui que ce soit que, whom- soever. Whoever, whosoever, and any body who or that, are expressed in French by quiconque, which being masculine singular, requires any adjective or participle referring to it to be in the masculine singular, unless quiconque should have a direct relation to women, in which case any adjective or participle referring to it ought to be feminine. Quicon- que always governs the verb of which it is the nominative in the third person singular, and if any verb should occur in the second part of the sentence, of which it would also be the nominative, il must not be used before it : as, — whoever said so has not spoken the truth, quiconque a dit cela n^a pas dit la verite ; and not — il n'a pas dit, &c. WJioever, whosoever, any body who or that, may also be expressed in French by qui que ce soit qui, putting the next verb in the subjunc- tive mood, and following for the rest of the sentence the same rules as for quiconque : as, — whoever said so has not spoken the truth, qui que ce soit qui ait dit cela n''a pas dit la verite. WJioever, nsed w^ith any of the personal pronouns he, she, we, you, they, as nominative to any tense of the verb to be, as — whoever he or you may be ; whoever he, she, or they may be ; is expressed in French by qui que, for the first and second persons singular and plural; quel que or quelle que, for the third smgular; and quels que or quelles que, for the third plural, before the personal pronouns, je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils or elles, putting the following verb in the subjunctive mood : as, whoever you may be, qui que vous soyez ; whoever he, she, or they may be, quel qu^il ou quelle qit'elle soit ; or quels qu'ils ou quelles qu^ elles soient. Wliomsoever, coming after a preposition, as — of whomsoever you may have heard it, I do not believe it, is expressed in French by qui que ce soit que, after the preposition, with the next verb in the sub- junctive mood : as, — of whomsoever you may have heard it, I do not believe it, de qui que ce soit que vous Payez entendu, je ne le crois pas. 2. Quelqu^un, quelqu^une, somebody, some one,^Jauy body, any one. Whenever the pronouns somebody, some one, any body, any one, are taken in an indefinite sense, they are expressed in French by quelqu^un, which being masculine singular, requires any pronoun, adjective, or par- ticiple, referring to it, in the masculine singular, and the verb of which it may be the nominative in the third person singular : as, — somebody told OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 307 me so, quelqu^un me Pa dit. Has any body been here for me to-day ? est-il venu quelqu'un me dernander aujourd^hui? ou est-on venu me demander aujourd'hui? Some of or any of, coming before a substantive plural, and so?7ie or any, referring to a substantive plural, mentioned before, are expressed in French by quelques-uns, for the masculine, and by quelques-unes for the feminine, according to the gender of the substantive which they may represent, Quelques-nns and quelques-unes are applicable to both per- sons and things. En is put before the verb which precedes them, if they refer to a substantive going before, but en is omitted if they precede their respective substantive : as, — I have read some of your books, ya2 In quelques-uns de vos livres. Do you know any of these ladies ? yes, I know some of them, connaissez-vous quelques-unes de ces dames ? Old, fen connais quelques-unes. Some of or any of occurring before a substantive singular preceded by a possessive or a demonstrative pronoun, as — give me some of your bread ; is expressed in French by un pen de, or simply by de : as, — give me some of your bread, donnez-moi un peu de voire pain; or simply, donnez-moi de voire pain. But some of or any of, coming before one of the pronouns ii or ihem, is construed by un peu, without de, using en with the verb : as, — give me some of it or them, donnez- m'en un peu ; or simply, donnez-m'en. 3. Chacun, everyone; ioui le monde, everybody; chacun, chacune, each, every one. When every one and every body are used with reference to persons in an indeterminate manner, every one is usually expressed in French by chacun, to denote an idea of individuality, and every body by ioui le monde, to express an idea of generality : as, — every one must pay for himself, il fiut que cliacun paie pour soi ; every body says so, tout le monde le dit, &c., in such a case, cliacun and tout le monde, being mas- culine singular, require any adjective or participle referring to them to be in the masculine singular, and the verbs of which they may be the nominatives, in the third persons singular, as above. But each and every one, followed by the preposition of and a sub- stantive plural, or also by a personal pronoun in the plural which refers to persons or animated beings ; as, likewise, each used immediately before or after the verb of which it is the nominative, with the preposition o/and the personal pronoun to which it refers, understood, are expressed in French by chacun for the masculine, and chacune for the feminine, which have no plural : as, — each of these books costs me six shillings, chacun de ces livres me coute six schellings. Have you seen the ladies? each had on a different dress, (that is, — each of them had on a different dress,) avez-vous vu les dames ? chacune avait une parure differente. Every one of you will dance in her turn, chacune de vous dansera a son tour. 308 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. . If each and every one should be followed by o/and the pronoun tliem | used with reference to inanimate things, both them and the preposition should be left out in French, as them cannot be expressed by eux or elles^ j with reference to inanimate objects ; but each and every one must be \ construed, as above, by chacun for the masculine, and chacune for the , feminine : as, — have you seen the pictures in the drawing-room ? each of them has cost me a hundred guineas, avez-vous vu les tableaux qui ! sont dans le salon ? Us m^ont coute chacun cent guinees, and not Us j m^ont coute chacun d'eux, &c. because tableaux are inanimate. i 4. Chaque ; tous les, toutes les ; tout, toute ; every. ! Every ^ coming immediately before a substantive, without the inter- ; vention of the preposition of\ is expressed in French by chaque, if it be I taken in a distributive sense, and by tous les or toutes les, if implying \ an idea of plurality or being used to express a repetition of something \ that is often done : as,- — every age has its duties to fulfd, chaque age a \ ses devoirs a remplir. Every lady who was there, toutes les dames qui | y etaient. I see her every day, je la vols tous les jours. We go there ; every week, nous y allons toutes les semaines. ! Every, taken in a general and collective sense before a substantive, j is likewise expressed in French by tout or toute singular : as, — every '; man is mortal, tout homme est mortel. Every woman who does that is i ruined, toute femme qui fait cela est perdue, \ Chaque is used with reference to both persons and things, of either the mas- | culine or feminine gender. It ahvays precedes its respective substantive, unless j this should be preceded by another adjective, in which case chaque would come j the first. i 5. Personne, nobody, no one, any body, any one. 1 Whenever nobody, no one, are taken in an indeterminate sense, and .■ any body, any one, occur after a negative expression, as in the following '' sentences: — nobody came; liave you not seen any body? no, I have \ seen nobody ; they are expressed in French hy personne, which, being masculine singular, requires any adjective or participle referring to it in ; the masculine singular, with ne before the verb of which it is either the \ nominative or object; and if the nominative, the verb is put in the third > person singular : as, — nobody came, personne n'est venu. Have you not seen any body ? n"* avez-vous vu personne ? no, I have seen nobody, ^ non, je n^ai vu personne. ^ ^ i Any body and any one, used in an interrogative sentence which is \ not negative, or coming after a verb affirmatively used, but expressing . astonishment or doubt, are also expressed in French by personne, ^yhich I being masculine singular, requires, as above, any adjective or participle , referring to it in the masculine singular, and the verb of which it may 1 be the nominative in the third person singular, but without ne before ^ OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 309 it : as, — have you ever seen any body more amiable than Miss H*** ? avez-vous jamais fu personne de plus aimahle que M"'H***? I doubt whether any body ever knew the origin of the winds, je doute que per Sonne ait jamais connu Vorigine des vents. But personne, taken in the sense of the substantive person or people, is always feminine, and used in the singular and plural. In this case, any adjective or participle referring to it, agrees with it in gender and number, and ne is not required before the verb of which it is either the nominative or object; and if the nominative, the verb agrees with it in number : as, — there were two or three hundred people or persons, il y avait deux ou trois cents personnes. Some learned people say so, des personnes instruites le disent. 6. Nul, nulle ; aucun, aucuney no ; pas un, pas une, not one. No, coming immediately before a substantive, is generally expressed in French by nw/, nulle, or aucun, aucune. None, either referring to a substantive expressed before, or followed by the preposition of and a substantive plural, or also by a personal pronoun in the plural, is con- strued by aucun, aucune ; and not one, referring to a substantive going before, by pas un, pas une. Nul, nulle, and aucun, aucune, are of the singular number, and require ne before the verb of which they are either the nominative or object, and govern any adjective or participle referring to them in the singular, as also the verb of which they may be the nominative in the third person singular : as, — no man is perfect, nul homme n''est parfait. None of them has ever been there, aucun d*eux n*y a jamais et'e. All my friends were invited, but none would go, ious mes amis furent invites, mais pas un ne voulut y aller. Not aruj, used with a verb, is expressed in French by pomt after the verb, with ne and en before it, thus — n''en : as, — have you any money ? no, I have not any, uvez-voiis de V argent f 7ion, je n'en ai point. But, if of them shoidd be ex- pressed or understood after not any, anctm should then be used instead of point after the verb, with ti'en likewise before it: as, — I do not know any of them, /e n'en cnnnais aucun. 7. Rien, nothing, not anything; ne que, but, only, nothing but, no- thing else but, nobody but, nobody else than ; ne qui, any body but. 1. Rien, nothing, not any thing. Nothing, taken in an indefinite sense, as also any thing, coming after never, not, or any other negative expression, are expressed in French by rieii, which is masculine singular, and governs ne before the verb of which it is either the nominative or object. Any adjective or participle referring to rien is put in the masculine singular, preceded by de, if immediately following nothing or any thing in English, but without de if a verb intervene : as, — she says nothing, elle ne dit rien. I have never seen any thing so beautiful, je n'ai jamais vu rien de si heau. Nothing is more rare than a true friend, rien n^est plus rare 310 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. qu^un veritable ami, &c. always observing to put the verb in the third person singular when rien is its nominative. If any thing should be used without a negative expression, in a sen- tence of doubt, incertitude, or interrogation, it should likewise be ex- pressed by rien, but without ne before the verb, following, in every other respect, the preceding rule : as, — I question whether any thing will be more congenial to her feelings, ye doute que rien lui soit plus agreable. Is there any thing more agreeable than the society of an amiable woman? y a-t-il rien de plus agreable que la societe d^une femme aimable ? But rien, taken in the sense of a mere nothing, a trifle, a thing of very little importance, is a substantive which can be used in the plural and take the mark of it, although always remaining masculine. In this case, de is never used before the adjective or participle foUov/ing : as, — she does nothing but mere trifles, elle ne fait que des riens. She bid an adieu to the splendid trifles of the court, elle dit adieu aux riens hrillans de la cour. Observe. — When personne, aucun, nul, pas un, quelquhtn, quoi, quelque chose, quoi que ce soit, are immediately followed by an adjec- tive, a participle, or an adverb of quantity, they require de before it ; whereas de is not required if a verb intervene : as, — there is nobody come, il n^y a personne de venu. Something pretty, quelque chose de joli. Something more, quelque chose de plus. Nobody is more amiable, personne n' est plus aimable. 2. Ne que, but, only, nothing but, nothing else but, nobody but, nobody else than ; ne qui, nobody but, any body but. The words but and only, used in the sense of no more, and also nobody but, nothing but, nothing else but, nobody else than, coming after a verb before its object, as likewise any body but or any body else but, if the verb should be in the negative form, are expressed in French by ne before the verb or the auxiliary, with que after it in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one, but never by mais, seule- ment, rien, autre, &c. : as, — I have but few friends, je n^ai que pen d^amis. She will have only sixty guineas, elle n^aura que soixante guinees. I have nothing but that, je n''ai que cela. He had nothing else but two or three oranges, il n'eut que deux ou trois oranges. I saw nobody but Mr. and Mrs. L* * *, or, I have not seen any body but Mr. and Mrs. L***,ye ne vis on je n\ii vu que M. et M""' /,*** But, coming either after any body in an interrogative sentence, or after nobody in a negative one, is usually expressed in French by qui, if any body or nobody should be the nominative of the following verb. Any body and nobody are then construed by personne, with ne before the verb, which is put in the subjunctive mood : as, — is there any body but knows it ? ?/ a-t-il personne qui ne le sache ? There is nobody but fears death, il n*y a personne qui ne craigne la moi't. OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 311 The word hid, in any other circumstance, whether. at the beginning or in the second part of a sentence, is expressed in French by mais ; and only^ when employed in its natural sense, and not in that of no more, by seulement : as, — I wish very much to go, but I have no monev, je desire beaucoup cVy allei\ mais je n^ai pas d^ argent. You might succeed, if you had only twenty francs, vous pourriez reussir, si vous aviez seulement vingt francs. 8. Le meme, la meme, les memes, the same. The same is expressed in French by le meme, la meme, or les memes, according to the gender and number of the substantive to which it refers : as, — the same man, le meme homme ; the same thing, la meme chose ; the same persons, les memes personnes. The following expressions — it is all the same, it is all one, are ex- pressed in French by : — c''est la meme chose ; c'est egal ; c^est tout un. The French frequently use the word meme, without any article, after a substantive or a pronoun, making it agree in gender and number with that substantive or pronoun, to give more energy to the expression, in the sense of all, very, himself, herself, itself, themselves, &c. : as, — he or she is all goodness, c^est la honte meme. That very thing which I told you, cela meme que je vous ai dit. The rocks themselves were affected by the melodious sounds of Orpheus, les rochers memes etaient sensihles aux accords d''Orphee. It is yourself, c''est vous-meme. Meme, indeclinable, is used in the sense of also, even : as, — women and even children were killed, les femmes et meme les enfans furent tues. 9. Plusieurs, many, several. The words many and several are expressed in French by plusieurs, which, being plural of both genders, is only applicable to persons, when used absolutely as follows: — many say so, plusieurs le disent ; but, when plusieurs is employed adjectively, it equally well applies to both persons and things, and precedes the substantive to which it refers, if this should be expressed : as, — several persons, plusieurs personnes ; many things, plusieurs choses ; many of your friends, plusieurs de vos amis. 10. Tel, telle, tels, telles, such; tel que, telle que, tels que, telles que, such as. Such is expressed in French by tel, telle, tels or telles, according to the gender and number of the substantive to which it refers, leaving out a which follows such in English : as, — such a man, tel homme ; such a thing, telle chose ; and not — tel un homme, telle une chose. Such as, used to express a comparison between persons or things, is expressed by — tel que, telle que, tels que or telles que, according to the gender and number of the first of the persons or things compared : as, — she is a woman such as you, c^est une femme telle que vous. 312 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. But such asy taken in an indefinite sense at the beginning of the first part of a sentence which consists of two parts, as — such as laugh to day ivill cry to-morroiv ; is expressed by tel or telle, tels or telles, before the first part of the sentence, with qui before the second : as, — such as laugh to-day will cry to-morrow, tel rit aujourd^hui qui pleu- rera demain. 11. Quelque, quelques, adj. some or any; quelque and quelques, with que before the following verb , and also — quel que, quelle que, quels que, and quelles que, in two words, whatever. Quelque and tout, indeclinable, with que before the next verb, however, howsoever, THOUGH EVER SO MUCH OT SO LITTLE, LET EVER SO. Quelque choSB que, quoi que ce soit que, quoi que ce soit, quoi que, whatever, whatsoever, &c. 1. Quelque, quelques, adj. some or any. Some or any, coming before a substantive which refers to things, and of which it does not express a portion, is sometimes construed into French by quelque or quelques, and sometimes by du, de la, cle l\ or des, according to the gender and number of the substantive : as, — I had something to tell you, favais quelque chose a vous dire. Have you any thing to tell me ? avez-vous quelque chose a rue dire ? If you have any thing to tell her, si vous avez quelque chose a lui dire. Do you know any news? savez-vous des nouvelles? But some or any, employed before a substantive and denoting an in- determinate number or portion of it, is always expressed in French by du, de la, de l\ or des, according to the gender and number of the sub- stantive : as, — give me some bread, donnez-moi du pain. Have you any ink ? avez-vous de l^encre ? &c. 2. Quelque and quelques, with que before the succeeding verb ; and also — quel que, quelle que, quels que, and quelles que, in two words, WHATEVER. Whatever or whatsoever, being used before a substantive which is followed by any other verb than to he, or simply wka,t or which before a substantive, with soever after it, or though or let before a verb, with ever so much or so many, so little or so few, before the following sub- stantive, is expressed in French by quelque or quelques before the substantive, with que after it, putting the succeeding verb in the sub- junctive mood : as, — whatever reasons he may have, or what reasons soever he may have ; let him have ever so many reasons, or though he have ever so many reasons, quelques raisons quHl ait; &c. using, 1. quelque or quelques; 2. the substantive; '6. que ; 4. the verb in the subjunctive mood ; 5. the rest as in English. But if the substantive before which whatever or whatsoever, or any of the above expressions is used, should be the nominative of a tense of the verb to he, as — whatever his opinions may he ; whatsoever road it OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 313 may he; whatever or lohatsoever, or any of the above expressions, should then be construed into French by — quel que, quelle que, quels que or quelles que, in two words, before the corresponding tense of the verb etre, in French ; quel taking the gender and number of the substantive to which it refers, and que remaining indeclinable : as, — whatever his opinions may be, quelles que soient ses opinions. What- soever road it maybe, quel que soit le chemin, &c. using, 1. quel, quelle, quels or quelles ; 2. que ; 3. the verb in the subjunctive mood; 4. the substantive; as if it were in English — whatever may be his opinions ; whatsoever may be the road. 3. Quelque and tout (indeclinable), with que before the following verb, HOWEVER, HOWSOEVER, THOUGH EVER SO MUCH Or SO LITTLE, LET EVER SO. However, being used before an adjective or a participle, or how before with soever after, or as before and as after, or simply as after it ; or, also, though or let before a verb, whether to be or any other, with ever so after it, before an adjective or a participle, is expressed in French by quelque, indeclinable, before the adjective or participle, with que after it, putting the succeeding verb in the subjunctive mood ; or, also, by — tout, before the adjective or participle, with que after it, and the following verb in the indicative mood : as, — however powerful you may be; or, as powerful as you are; or, powerful as you are; or, though or let you be ever so powerful, quelque puissant que vous soyez, or tout puissant que vous etes ; using, 1. quelque or tout; 2. the ad- jective or participle; 3. que ; 4. the verb in the subjunctive mood, if quelque be used; but in the indicative, if it be tout; 5. the substantive, if any, and the rest as in English. Though, used before a tense of the verb to be, followed by a substan- tive, as — though she he a woman; is expressed in French by tout, toute, tous or toutes, according to the gender and number of the sub- stantive following, with que before the verb, which must be put in the indicative mood: as, — though she be a woman, toute femme qu^elle est; using, 1. tout, toute, tous or toutes ; 2. the substantive; 3. que ; 4. the verb in the indicative mood ; as if it were in English — all woman that she is. 4. Quelque chose que, quoi que ce soit que, quoi que ce soit, quoi que, whatever, whatsoever, nothing whatever. When whatever or whatsoever, or also — notliing whatever, or any thing whatever or whatsoever in a negative sentence, are used in an indeterminate sense, as in the following sentences : — whatever you may say ; she does not apply herself to any thing whatever ; whatever or whatsoever is expressed in French by quelque chose que, quoi que ce soit que or quoi que, with the following verb in the subjunctive mood : p ai4 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. as, — whatever you may say, quelque chose que, quoi que ce soit que or quol que vous disiez ; and nothing whatever, or any thing ivhatever or whatsoever in a negative sentence, by quoi que ce soit, quelque chose que ce soit or rien du tout, with ne before the verb, which must be put in the indicative mood : as, — she does not apply herself to any thing whatever, elle ne s'applique a quoi que ce soit or a rien du tout. Quoi que, pronoun, must be written in two words, to be distinguished from quoique, conjunction. Any or no, coming before a substantive with whatever or whatsoever either expressed or understood after it, in an affirmative or negative sentence, as—Jind any pretext whatever; there is no reason ivhat- soever ; whatever or whatsoever is expressed in French by quelconque, singular, for both genders, and is placed after the substantive to which it refers : as, — find any pretext whatever, trouvez un pretexte quel- conque. There is no reason whatsoever, il n'y a raison quelconque. Quelconque is also sometimes used in the plural : as, — deux points quelconques, two points whatsoever. 12. Tout, toute, tons, toutes, all, the whole of; tout le, toute la, tous les, toutes les, all the, the whole; le tow^, the whole ; tout, every thing, all things ; tout ce qui, tout ce que, all that, every thing that ; tout (indeclinable), wholly, entirely, quite; nous tous, vous tous, eux tous, all of us, all of you, all of them. 1. Tout, toute, tous, toutes ; all, the whole of. Whenever all or the ivhole of, comes before a possessive or a demon- strative pronoun followed by a substantive, as — all my friends ; with all that kindness ; the lohole of their property ; it is expressed in French by tout, toute, tous or toutes, according to the gender and number of the following substantive, and is placed before the possessive or demonstrative pronoun in French as in English, without ever being accompanied by any article in French : as, — all my friends, tous mes amis ; with all that kindness, avec toute cette honte ; the whole of their property, tout leur Hen. 2. Tout le, toute la, tous les, toutes les ; all the, the whole. All the or the whole, coming before a substantive which is not pre- ceded by a possessive or a demonstrative pronoun, is expressed in French by tout le, toute la, tous les or toutes les, according to the gender and number of the substantive: as, — I have danced with all the ladies, y'oi danse avec toutes les dames. The whole fleet and army, toute lajiotte et toute Parmee. 3. Le tout ; the whole. The whole, not referring to any substantive, but taken in an indefinite OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 315 sense, is expressed in French by le tout, which being masculine singular, requires any adjective or participle referring to it, in the masculine singular, and the verb of v»'hich it may be the nominative in the third person singular; but if le tout should be the object of a verb, it must be placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one : as, — the whole amounts to so much, le tout se monte a tant. Will you have the whole? voulez-vous le tout? The whole would not be too much, le tout ne serait pas trap. 4. Tout, every thing, all, all things. Whenever the words everij thing, all, all tilings, are taken in an in- definite sense, they are expressed in French by tout, which being mascu- line singular, requires the verb of vvhich it may be the nominative in the third person singular; but if tout should be the direct object of a verb, it must be placed after the verb in a simple tense, and between the auxiliary and the participle in a compound one : as, — every thing goes badly, tout va mal. Piety refers all things to God, la piete rapporte tout a Dieu. She has lost every thing, elle a tout perdu. 5. Tout ce qui, tout ce que ; all that, every thing that. The words all that, every thing that or ivJiich, and also whatever in the sense of all that, are expressed in French by tout ce qui, for the nominative of the following verb, and by tout ce que for its direct object. Tout ce qui and tout ce que, being masculine singular, require any adjective or participle referring to them in the masculine singular; and the verb of which tout ce qui may be the nominative in the tliird person singular : as, — all that or whatever is fashionable is much sought after, tout ce qui est a la mode est tres-recherche. All that or whatever she says is false, tout ce qu^elle dit est faux. 6. Tout (indeclinable), wholly, entirely, quite. Whenever the adverbs ivholly, entirely, quite, are used before an adjective or a participle, they are expressed in French by tout (inde- clinable), whether the adjective or participle before which tout comes be masculine or feminine, singular or plural ; except, however, wlien being feminine, it begins with a consonant or h aspirated, in which case tout agrees with it in gender and number: as, — he is entirely devoted to their service, il est tout devoue a leur service. She was quite astonished, elle etait tout etonnee. Was she not quite sad ? n^etait-elle pas toute triste ? &c. Should wholly, entirely, quite, come before the possessive pronoun yours, SiS — I am ivholly yours ; they should likewise be expressed in French by tout (indeclinable), which is placed before the personal pro- noun a vous, in the sense of yours in English : as, — I am wholly yours, je suis tout a vousj and not— -^e suis tout le votre. p2 316 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 7. Nous tous, vous tons, eux tons, §^c. ; all of us, all of you, all of them. Whenever the expressions all of us, all of you, all of them, depend on a preposition, as in these sentences: — he complains of all of us ; I shall have recourse to all of you ; all of us is expressed in French by 710US tous, for the masculine plural, and nous toutes, for the feminine plural; all of you, by vous tous for the m. pi. and vous toutes for the f. pi. ; all of them, by eux tous for the m. pi. and elles toutes for the f. pi. ; provided a preposition, corresponding to that of which all of us, all of you, all of them, are the objects in English, be used before nous tous, vous tous, eux tous or elles toutes, in French ; for should all of us, all of you, all oftJiem, come after a verb requiring no preposition before nous tous, vous tous, eux tous or elles toutes, in French, or should all of us, all of you or all of them, be the nominative of a verb, tous or toutes should then be used without the pronouns nous, vous, eux or elles : as, — he complains of all of ns, il se plaint de nous tous or DE nous toutes. I shall have recourse to all of you, faurai recours k vous tous ov h. vous toutes, &c. ; but we should say without eux or elles — they were all of them gone, ils etaient tous partis or elles etaient toutes parties; and not — lis etaient eux tous partis or elles etaient elles toutes parties. Observe. — Tout, toute, tous or toutes, is used in French before every substantive or adjective which it modifies, and agrees with it in gender and number (except in the cases where tout is indeclinable), although all, the whole or tlie whole of may not be repeated in English : as, — 1 am, with all the respect and esteem possible, your very humble servant, je suis, avec tout le respect et toute la consideration possible, voire tres-humble serviteur. 13. Un autre, une autre, another; les autres, autrui, others. Another is expressed in French by un autre, for the masculine sin- gular, and une autre for the feminine singular. Others is construed by les autres, which is a plural of both genders. These pronouns are equally applicable to both persons and things: as, — another man, -im autre homme ; another thing, une autre chose ; the others, les autres. If others should be used in an indefinite sense after a preposition, and refer to persons, but without comparison with any other word in the sentence, as — to speak ill of others ; it should be rendered into French by autrui, which is indeclinable and never admits of any article : as, — to speak ill of others, mal parler cV autrui ; but if a comparison should be established in the sentence, others and another should then be ex- pressed by les autres, des autres, or aux autres, according to the sense : as, — we must not take a man's goods to give to another, il ne faut pas prendre le bien des uns pour le donner aux autres, and not — a autrui ; because another used in the second part of the sentence stands in opposition to a man's employed in the first part. OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 317 Aulrui can only be 'used after a preposition in French : as, — ne premz pas le bien (i'aiitriti, do not take others' goods. Les autres is employed for the nomina- tive or direct ohject of a verb: as, — les autres n\nt pas tie punis ou punies, the others have not been punished. J'aime mieux les autres, I like the others best j and not autrui. 14. Uun PaiUre, Pune I'autre, les uns les autres, les unes les autres ; one another, each other. The pronouns one another and each other are expressed in French by I'un Pautre, Vune Vautre, when speaking only of two, and by les uns les autres, les unes les a?(ire.y, when speaking of several, according to the gender of the substantive or substantives to which they refer ; and if they depend on a pre])osition, it is placed between Ihin and Vautrey Pune and P autre, les uns and les autres, and les unes and les autres ^ and never before them, as it is in English before one another and each other : as, — they praise one another too much. Us se louent trop Pun P autre; they are always speaking ill of one another, ?7.j par/e/z^ tou- jour s mal Pun de P autre, and not — de Pun P autre. 15. Vun et P autre, Pune et P autre, les uns et les autres, les unes et les autres, both, one and another ; Pun ou P autre, Pune ou Pauire, either; ni Pun ni P autre, ni Pune ni P autre, neither. 1. Dun et Pauire, Pune et P autre, les uns et les autres, les unes et les autres, both, one and another. Whenever both and one and another are used with reference to two persons or things, they are expressed in French by Pun et Pautre, Pune et Pautre, which require any adjective or participle referring to them in the plural, and the verb of which they may be the nominative in the third person plural : as, — both are good. Pun et Pautre sont bons. Both disobeyed the king, ^7^ desobeirent an roi Pun ct Pautre. If both and one and another should refer to more than two persons or things, they should be expressed by les uns et les autres, les unes ct les autres, requiring, as above, the verb of which they may be the nominative in the third person plural, and the adjectives or participles which may refer to them in the plural : as, — I hate to be in company with those who are too full of flattery, as well as with those whose sin- cerity borders upon rudeness, both are equally disagreeable, je ne hats pas moins la compagnie de ceux qui font trop de coniplimens, que celle cles personnes clont la franchise approche de la grossierete ; les uns et les autres sont egalement desagreables. When both, referring to two persons or things, comes after the pro- nouns ive,yo2i, and they, for the nominative of a verb, and after us, you, and them, for its object, as — they both died miserably; I admire you both ; he spoke to them both, &c. ; it is expressed in French by Pun et Pauire, Pune et Pautre, singular, which must be placed after the verb 318 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one, construing the pronouns we, you, they, by 7ious, vous^ Us or elles, for the nomina- tive of the verb, and us, you, them, by nous, vous, les, leur, for its object : as, — they both died miserably. Us moururent miser ablement Pun et r autre. I admire you both,ye vous admire Pun et r autre. He spoke to them both, il leur parla a Pun et a P autre. Tons les deux and tons deux might also be used instead of Pun et V autre, in the above sentences: as, — Us moururent miser ablement tous les deux ; je vous admire tons deux : il leur parla a tons deux ou a toits les deux. When Pun et P autre depends on a preposition, the preposition must be repeated before Pun and before P autre: as, — we wrote to them both, nous leur ecrivimes a Pun et a Pautre. Both, coming immediately before a substantive, as in this sentence : — / have been both roads, is usually expressed in French by les deux : as, — I have been both roads, fai ete par les deux chemins. When both is used before the first of two substantives which are joined by the conjunction and, as — he has travelled both by sea and land; it is then a conjunction which is sometimes expressed by et, and sometimes left out in French : as, — he has travelled both by sea and land, il a voyage par terre et par mer. Both, used before two adjectives which are set in a kind of opposition, is generally expressed in French by tant : as,~the authors both ancient and modern, les auteurs tant anciens que modernes. 16. Uun ou Pautre, Pune ou Pautre, either, one or the other. When either is used in English with reference to two persons or things, it is expressed in French by Pun ou Pautre, Pune ou Pautre, singular, which requires any adjective or participle referring to it in the singular, and the verb of which it may be the nominative in the third person singular: as, — either of you will do it. Pun ou Pautre le fera. 17. Ni Pun ni Pautre, ni Pune ni Pautre, neither. When neither is used with reference to two persons or thingSj it is expressed in French by ni Pun ni Pautre, for the masculine, and by ni Pune ni Pautre, for the feminine, which expressions require any adjective or participle referring to them to be in the masculine or feminine singular, according as either is used, and the verb of v^'hich either may be the nominative in the third person singular, unless both ni Pun ni Pautre should concur together to the same action, in which case any adjective or participle referring to them must be put in the plural, and the verb of which they may be the nominative in the third person plural : as, — neither of them has done his duty, ni Pun ni Pautre n' a fait son devoir, and not — nont fait. Neither of them is my mother, ni Pune ni Pautre n^est ma mere, and not ne sont ; because they can- not be both my mother. But we should say : ni Pun ni Pautre n^ont OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 319 fait leur devoir (neither of them have done their diity), to express that both have failed in doing that which they were to accompUsh together. Ne is required before the verb of which ni Pun ni P autre or ni Pune nl r autre is the nominative or object, as in the above sentences. ESSAY LIII. Whoever attacks the sacred person of a king is guilty of high treason. Of attaquer coupahle haut tiahii>o7i whomsoever you may have heard it, I do not believe it. To whom- sub.pref. entendre soever you may apply, they will tell you the same thing. Has any body sub. pr. s'adresser on been here for me to-day ? No, sir. 1 expect somebody to supper this evening. deniander Will you give me some of your new honey ? His sisters will have each donner miel ten thousand pounds. Every one must pay for himself We must give soi It fuut a every body his own.* It is a saying which is in every body's mouth. There chacun le sien dicfon is in every plant a peculiar quality. 1 give her a* lesson every Monday and particulier Thursday; and I dine with her every Sunday. — Every man who preaches (such a) chez cette doctrine is in error. Every body seeks happiness, but nobody can iind it in dans chercker this world. Have you not told any body of'"' it? — Did you ever see any body a more amiable than Miss H ''-' '" * ? No ; and I doubt whether Nature ever que sub. prct. formed any thing more perfect. There were several thousand persons by the sur side of the river. Of the great number of friends who surround us in pros- bord entourer perity, there is* often not one (remaining) in adversity. Nothing is more il ne nous en ^ 3 4 ^7'este common than the word — "friendship;" but nothing is more rare than a true veritable friend. That young lady says nothing. 1 do not think any thing will siib.pr. be more agreeable to her than a little walk after dinner, There is nothing j)rome/>ade more pleasing than the company of an amiable woman. Tired (with the) (igreable societe Degonte du world and its pleasures, she bade adieu to the splendid trifles of the Court.- 1 de dire know nothing new. — I have something very pretty to give you. — Having but few years to live, we ought to* try to enjoy them. Friendship is only bought annee a tdcher d' en Jmitie ne s'acheter 320 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. "by friendship. — I saw nobody else but two children. — There was nothing in que tlie house hut two or three chairs. He only took a basin* of* broth and a bouillon mutton-chop. There is nobody but fears death. It is very difficult to cotelette qui sub. pr. tie find two persons of the same temper and of the same opinion. — Do not be afraid caractere craindre of asking her pardon, she is all goodness. -The animals themselves are affected de lui sensible (hy the) harmonious sounds of instruments. -Wom.en and even children were aux des put io deaih. 1 have heard that many of your' pupils do not like j^our new mettre a aimer house. — Many say so, and several deny it. She was a woman such as you. le Such as laugh to-day will cry to-morrow. 1 had something to tell you, but I have quite forgotten v.'hat it was. If your sister has any thing to send to iotalement oublier ce que c' a France, tell her I shall set out after to-morrow for Paris. Whatever talents you may possess, whatever advantages you (may have received) from snb. pr. avoir teniez Nature and education, with* what perfections soever you may be en« de sub. pr. poss^- dowed, expect (the) suffrages but cf a very small number of men - der ne voiis attendez aux que Whatever the obstacles may be, he must try to surmount them. 1 sub. pr. tdcher de shall never forget what she has said to me, whatever her motives may ce qu^ sub.pr.pouvoir have been. We shall overtake hira, v/hicbsoever road he may have aiieindre quel que soit le sub. pret. taken. However skilful and learned we may be, let us not make habile quelque sub. pr. a vain show of our knowledge. Let him be ever so powerful, he will ttalage science sub.pr. puissant never conqt\er them. Though she be a woman, she is stronger than you. vaincre Whatever you undertake, you will never succeed in*, if you do not sub. pr. entreprendre reussir take your measures better. She is so lazy that she does not apply herself to any mesure s'appliquer thing whatever. — Find any pretext whatever to excuse you. — All these oranges pour are rotten. — The whole of his property would not suffice to pay half his pourrir bien pour la de debts. All the grandeur, wealth, and power of the earth, cannot satisfy richessesf. pi. pouvoir OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 321 an ambitious mind. The whole array fought for six hours and a half. comhattre jiendant How much do you ask for the whole ? I will not sell the whole. Every vouloir thing displeases her. They have taken every thing away* with them. All is lid emporter ^ ^ not gold that glitters. Every thing which is lofty, vast and profound, ° ^ce ^qid *brif/er e'/eve expands the imagination and dilates the heart. Whatever ttnds to enlighten etendre di/cdtr tendre tchiirer the understanding and to impress the heart with right feelings, is desi- entendement imprimer dans de bon sentiment rable. Do you believe all that she says ? No ; I do not believe the half (of it). croire en Your sister was quite cast down at that news: however, afflicted as she abaitre cependant tout qii' was, she received me kindly. 1 am wholly yours. Children, amiable as avec bontd tout they are, (have nevertheless) many faults, Avhich it is necessary to correct. ?ie laissent pas d'' avoir bien des d^faut esfenfiel de Your mother is quite altered since her illness. 1 shall have recourse to all changer of you. He complains of all of us. It was another person. 1 am very happy that others enjoy themselves. Do not speak ill of others. aise si/b. pr. s'ani/fser Behave well towards others, if you wish that others should be- Se comporter vo/doir sab. pr. have well to you. "We should be guilty of great injustice towards one envers conpable another, if we were prejudiced by the features of those whom we do not se luisser prtvettir trait knoAv. (We ought to assist) each other. Your cousin and mine have great II f aid se secourir abilities, but they both make a very bad use (of them). — I know that one or the other talent en of you must have broken that dish, although neither of yon will confess sub. pr. vouloir avouer it. — (The people) often suffer (by the) wars which kings make with one another. Lcs peup/es des se faire aux — They both relate the same story, although neither believes it. — I should rapporter fait sub. pr. love them both, if they Avere more attentive to their studies. These two bien ladies are very rich, and you much please them both. -As you have been both leur a roads, tell me which is the shortest. 1 have travelled both by sea and land court for twenty years. Travellers both ancient and modern agree on that pendant s'accordcr sur point, -, » p5 322 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. LESSON LIV. Of Verbs. OF THE SUBJECT OR NOMINATIVE OF THE VERB. The principal function of verbs being, as before explained, to signify affirmation, the word which denotes the person or thing of which any thing is affirmed or denied, is called the subject or nominative of the verb, and is generally expressed by a noun or a pronoun. In order to know the subject or nominative of a verb, it is necessary to ask the questions — qui est-ce qui ? (who is it who ?) with reference to persons or animated beings ; Sind qu^ est-ce qui? (what is it that?) with reference to things. The answer to these questions will always denote the nominative of the verb : for instance — cet homme va tomher, that man is going to fall : if it be asked — qui est-ce qui va tomber ? who is it who is going to fall ? the ansv/er is — cet homme, that man ; cet homme is then the subject of va tomber. Mentir est honteux, lying is shameful : qu^ est-ce qui est honteux ? what is it that is shameful ? the answer is — mentir, lying ; mentir is therefore the subject of est. Of the verb's agreeinent ivith its nominative or subject. First General Rule. — The verb agrees in French in number and person with its nominative : as, — la haine veille et Pamitie s'endort, hatred is ever awake and friendship is always sleeping. Les femmes sont aimables, women are amiable. Observe. — When the relative pronoun qid is used before a verb and refers to a noun or pronoun expressed before, the verb must be put in the same number and person in French, as the noun or pronoun to which q?d relates is in ; but, should nut gzd refer to any thing- expressed before, eitber because it is taken absolutely or in an interrogative manner, the verb should then be put in the third person singular : as, — est-ce mot qid Pai dii ? is it I who said so ? est-ce vans qui Vavez-vu 9 is it you who have seen him P ceiix qid aivient la vertu^ those who like virtue. Qui ne vit qt/e pour soi est indigne de vivre, he who lives only for himself does not deserve to live. Qui a fait cela ? who has done that .^ &c. Second General Rule. — I. When a verb has for its nominative two or more nouns or pronouns of the third person singular, united by the conjunction et, it is put in the third person plural : as, — le vice et la vertu ant des effets contraires, vice and virtue have contrary effects. Lui et elle viendront, he and she will come. A verb is likewise usually put in the third person plural in French, when it has for its nominative two or more substantives not joined by the conjunction et : as, — le Rhone, la Loire, la Seine, sont les rivieres les plus remarquables de la France, the Rhone, the Loire, and the Seine, are the finest rivers in France, AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 323 '' Le marchaud, I'ouvrier, le pretre, le soldat, Sont tous egalement les membres de I'etat."— Voltaike. Should the substantives which serve as nominatives to the verb be synonymous or nearly so, the verb should agree with the last only, because in this case there exists a unity in the thoughts, which must also be found in the words : as, — son amenitt, sa douceur est connue de tout le monde, his amenity, his sweet temper, is known by every body. Le noir venin, le fiel de leurs ecrits, N^excite en moi que le plus froid mepris. The verb must likewise agree with the last substantive only, although the substantives be not synonymous, if we dwell more on the last than on the others, either because it explains the preceding ones, or because it is so energetic or of such moment that the others are nearly forgotten : as, — t'>ut rwirj, tout sexe, tout age doit aspirer au bonheur, there is no rank, sex or age, but ought to aspire to happiness. " Le Perou, le Potose, Alzire est sa conquete. Un seul mot, un soupir, un regard vous trahitr' — VoLXAiiiK. A/zh-c. If one of the substantives, which serve as nominatives to the verb, should be plural, the verb should then alwaj^s be put in the plural : as, — son repeniir, ses pleurs te fiichirent, her repentance, her tears moved him. Synonymous sul)stantives should not be united by the conjunction ct ; as there is only one and the same idea between them, any sign of addition would be useless. We must not therefore say — la douceur et la bonte du grand Henri ; but — la douceur, la bonte du grand Henri; the sweet temper and goodness of the great Henry. 2. When a verb has two or more nominatives of different persons united by the conjunction et, it is put in the plural and agrees with the person which has the priorit}^ ; that is, it agrees with the first person in preference to the other two, and with the second rather than with the third. Whenever, therefore, the first person is used with the second or the third, the verb must be put in the first person plural, and be imme- diately preceded by the resuming pronoun nous, which, in such a case, is invariably employed in French, although not expressed in English ; but, if the second person should be used with the third, the verb should be put in the second person plural, and be preceded by vo2is, as may be seen in the following examples : — vous et moi nous sommes conlcns de notre sort, you and I are satisfied with our fate. — Nous irons a la cam- j^agne lui et moi, he and I shall go into the country. Vous et lui vous savez la chose, you and he know the affair. The following is the order which the pronouns must always observe in such cases in French : — 1. If the first person be used with the second or the third, the second or third comes first: as, — vous et moi or lui et moi nous irons, you and 1 or he and I shall go. 2. If the second person should be used with the third, the second comes first: as, vous et elle vous avez fait cela, you and she have done that. 3. But if the three persons should be used together, the second should come the first, then the third, and the first should be placed the last : as, — vous, lui, et moi ■nous y etions, you, he, and J were there. 324 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 3. When a verb has two or more nominatives of different persons united by the conjunction ou, use requires that the person which has the priority, that is, the first in preference to the other two, and the second in preference to the third, should be immediately placed before the verb, which agrees with it in person and is put in the plural : in this case, the resuming pronouns nous and vous are not used before the verb, if it be preceded by qui, whereas they are required if it be not : as, — c'est toi ou moi qui avons fait cela, it is you or I who have done that. C^est lui ou moi qui V avons dit, it is he or I who have said it. Lui, elle, ou moi nous irons, he, she, or I shall go. ^^ Le roi, I'ane, ou moi nous mourrons." — La Fontaine. When a verb has either the pronoun Pun ou l^auire, or two substan- tives, or also two pronouns of the third person singular, united by the conjunction ou, for its nominative, it agrees with the last only, and is put in the third person singular : as, — Pun ou Vautre nous ecrira, either will write to us. Pierre ou Paul le fera, Peter or Paul will doit. 4. The verb is likewise put in the third person singular, though having for its nominative several nouns in the singular and plural, when a collective expression, such as — chacun, each ; personne, nobody ; nul, none; rien, nothing; tout, all; comes immediately before it, and resumes all the nominatives into one ; or, also, when the conjunction adversative mais is placed before the last substantive, and this is in the singular : as, — remords, crainte, perils, rien 7ie m'a retenue, neither remorse, fear, or danger restrained me. Non seulement toutes ses richesscs et tons ses honneurs, mais toute sa vertu s'evanouit, not only all her riches and honours, but her virtue disappeared. 5. When ainsi que, de meme que, aussi hien que, comrrie, non j^lus que, are used as in a parenthesis in a sentence, to establish a resem- blance or denote a comparison between two parts of it, the incidental sentence introduced by these expressions has not any influence on the verb, which agrees with the first substantive, without any consideration for the number or gender of the other substantives brought in by any of the above conjunctions: as, — la vertu de meme que le savoir a son •prix ; virtue as well as learning has its price. " Le notirrisson du Pinde, ainsi que le guerrier, A tout Tor dvi Perou prefere un beau laurier." Piron, la Metrom. Act IIL sc. 7, Le juste, aussi Men que le sage, Du crime et du malhevu-, sail tirer avantage." Voj/rAiuE, Zaire, II. I. 6. When Pun et Vautre is used as nominative to a verb, it is better to put the verb in the third person plural, although many celebrated authors have sometimes employed it in the singular, and sometimes in AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 325 the plural : as, — run et P autre sont bons, both are good ; and not run ct rautre est hon. If, besides run et Pautre, the verb should also have the pronoun Us or elles for its nominative, Pwi et P autre being placed after the verb, the verb should then always be used in the plural: as, — Us voudront Vnn et Pautre y aUer^ mats Us n^iront ni Pun ni Pautre^ both Avill be desirous of going, but neither ^vill go. 7. When ni Pun ni Pauire, neither the one nor the other, or two nouns joined together by ni repeated, are used as nominatives to a verb, the verb must be put in the third person plural, if both 7ii Pun ni Pautre, or the two nouns, concur together to the action mentioned or receive it ; but the verb is put in the third person singular, if only one of the subjects does the action or receives it; in either case, ne or n' must be employed before the verb : as, — ni Pun ni Pautre n'ont fait leur devoir, neither have done their duty. Ni la douceur ni la force ne peuvent rien, neither mildness nor force can effect any thing. Ce ne sera ni M. le due ni M. le comte qui sera nomme president, neither the duke nor the count will be chosen president. Ni Pun ni Pauire n'est men psre, neither the one nor the other is my father. Observe. — When a verb has for its nominative two or more pronouns of different persons joined together by the conjunction ni, it is likewise put in the plural, and agrees with that which has the priority; but in this case the resuming pronouns nous and vous are not used: as, — 7ii vous ni moi ne sommes coupables, neither you nor I are guilty. Ni vous ni lui n'avez fait cela, neither you nor he have done that ; and not — ni vous ni moi nous ne sommes coupables ; ni vous ni lui vous rPavcz fait cela. 8. When un or line is followed by de or dcs and a substantive plural, with the relative pronoun qui, for the nominative of the succeeding verb, the verb must be put in the plural, if it refers to the substantive following un or une, and not to un or une. Any adjective or participle, which may also refer to the substantive, is likewise put in the plural: as, — votre ami est un des hommes qui perirent dans la sedition, your friend is one of the men who perished in the sedition. In this example, pcrirent is in the plural, because it refers to the men who perished, and not to un. But if the verb should refer to 2ni or une, and not to the substantive following, it should then be put in the singular, as well as any adjective or participle which may also refer to un or une : as, c\'st un de mes meillcurs amis qui nPa. fait ce present, it is one of my best friends who made me that present. In this example, a fait is in the singular, because it refers to un, and not to amis ; a friend who has made me a present being the subject spoken of. Should, on the contrary, the verb have neither ini or une, nor the substantive following, for its nominative or subject, but some other substantive or pronoun (un or une with des and the substantive fol- 326 PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. lowing being used with que for its direct object), in this case any adjec- tive or participle coming after the verb should always be put in the plural, and agree with the substantive following un or une: as, — c^est un cles plus grands services que vous m'ayez jamais rendus, it is one of the greatest services that you ever did me. 9. When a substantive collective partitive, such as— une infinite, an infinity; un nombre, a. number ; une foule, a crowd; une multitude, n multitude ; une nuee, a cloud, a swarm ; une sorte, a sort ; la plu- part, the greater part; or an adverb of quantity, as — beaucoup, much, many; pez*, little, few ; awe^, enough; mozVt-5', less; plus, more; trop, too much, too many; tant, so much, so many; combien, how much, how many, or also que used for combien ; is followed by the preposition de and a substantive, as the nominative to a verb, the verb, as well as any adjective or participle which may follow, agrees with the substan- tive following either the collective or adverb of quantity, because it expresses the principal idea : as, — une infinite de jeunes gens s^y sont noyes, a great number of young men have been drowned there. Une multitude d'habitans abandonnerent leur pays, a multitude of inha- bitants abandoned their country. La plupart du monde le croit, the majority of people believe it. Peu de gens 7iegligent leurs interets, few people neglect their interests. Une vingtaine de soldats se sont revoltes, about twenty soldiers have mutinied. If however a noun collective partitive should be preceded by the de- finite article le or la, it would require the verb of which it would be the nominative, as likewise any adjective or participle referring to it, in the singular number : as, — le nombre cles habitans se monte a vingt millc, the number of inhabitants amounts to twenty thousand. La plupart, not being folloAred by any noun, but being used by itself before a verb as its nominative, requires that verb to be in the third person plural: as, — la pfupart fia-ent d'avis que , the majority were of opinion that A substantive collective general, that is, a noun representing the w^hole of the persons or things mentioned, as — armee, army; foret, forest; peuple, people; nation, nation; whether it be followed by the preposition de and a substantive plural, or whether it be used by itself, always governs the verb of which it is the subject, as also any adjective or participle, which may refer to it in the singular number, because express- ing a whole, independent of the terms which may follow, our mind must be fixed on it, as being the principal idea : as, — I'armee des confederes est tres-nombreuse, the army of the confederates is very numerous. La foret des Ardennes est au couchant du Luxembourg, the forest of Ardennes is to the west of the Luxemburg. Le peuple desire la paix, •the people wish for peace, &c. Place of the subject or nominative of the verb. The place of the subject or nominative of the verb, in interrogative -sentences, having been explained under the article of interrogations, it PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. 327 only remains here to observe that the subject or nominative of the verb, whether a noun or a pronoun, is placed before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one, when the sentence is affirmative or negative : as, — les armees Franpaises ont ete victo- rieuses, the French armies have been victorious. Nous n^ irons pas vous voir, we shall not go and see you. When the words of somebody are quoted, the subject of the verb, if a personal pronoun, is however placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the auxiliary in a compound one ; whereas it is placed after the participle, if it should be a noun, although the sentence be not interro- gative : as, — je le veux bien, disait-il, I consent to it, said he. Tous les hommes sont fous, a dit Boileau, et ne different que du plus ou du moins, all men are fools, said Boileau, and the only difference is in the degree. The subject of the verb is also placed after the verb, in a sentence beginning either with one of the words — ainsi, tel, peut-etre, or with an impersonal verb : as, — ainsi s^est terminee la guerre, thus the war ended. Tel etait alors Petal de ses affaires, such was then the state of his affairs. Peut-etre vous pardonnera-t-il, he may forgive you. // est arrive d'heureux changemens, happy changes have taken place. The subject of the verb is likewise placed after the verb, when the subjunctive is either used to express a wish or when it is employed for ■quand meme and a verb in the conditional : as, — puissent tous les peuples aimer, cherir la paix ! may all people love and cherish peace ! Dusse-je y p'erir, firai, were I to perish there, I will go. Whenever the subject of the verb is followed by several words d£r pendnig on it, it is likewise placed after the verb, for the sake of perspi- cuity : as, — nous ecoutons avec docilite les conseils que nous donnent ceux qui savent flatter nos passions, we attentively listen to the advices of those who know how to flatter our passions. • Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject of the verb is only the effect of taste to avoid an inharmonious cadence : it is also frequently used by orators when desirous of arousing the attention of their auditors by a bold and an unexpected tuni : as, — ignorez-vous que Peternite approche ! ! are you ignorant that eternity is near ! ! ^' Crois-tu que, toujours ferme aux Lords du precipice, Elle pourra marcher sans que le pied lui glisse !"' — Boii.eau, Sat. X. ESSAY lAV. Is it j'-ou who have (been) here this morning ? No ; it is my brother Victor, who is el?-e venu returned from America. It is not I who knocked you down. Who has done jeicr par lerre that? Who is coming away with me ? Champagne, and Burgundy are very s'en venir 328 PLACE OF THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB, agreeable to the taste ; but I prefer Madeira. The workman, the merchant, gout the priest, the soldier, are all equally the members of the state. A single word, a sigh, a look betrays her. The amiability, the sweet temper of trahir bonte pleine de douceur that young lady delights and enchants me. You and I have succeeded very demoiselle ravir well He and I Avill be partners. You and she know the affair. You, he associt and I, will dine together. Is it he or I who will go ?' He, she or I, will come. Monsieur or Mademoiselle will do it with pleasure. 1 hope that either . of you will write to us. Wealth, dignities, honours, every thing disappears tout at the hour* of* death. — Sports, pleasures, conversations, entertainments. Divertissement spectacle nothing was able to* divert her from her profound melancholy. pouvoir distraire Not only all her jewels and gold, but all her linen was stolen.^ Does pierreries voler not (Apollo's son,) as well as the warrior, prefer a fine laurel to all the gold le nourrisson du Pinde ainsi que guerrier in Peru? Both of* them* are desirous of going; but neither will go.— — du desirer y Neither of* them* has learnt his lesson. Neither love nor hatred can move touch er him. Neither Mr. A* * nor Mr. D** will be elected Lord Mayor for the city de of London. Must I repeat to you again that neither of* them* is my mother .'* 1 swear that neither he nor I have ever been there. Was not your brother y one of the unfortunate victims who were sacrificed to the vengeance of the tyrant ? It was one of my greatest enemies who saved my life in that imminent me imminent danger. — If you could grant him that favour, it would be one of the greatest accorder services that you ever rendered him and Jiis family. A gang of thieves sub. pret. bande attacked me, tM^o or three years ago, and robbed me of* (every thing) I had. tout ce que A great many young men have enlisted themselves voluntarily, although iwmbre de jcunes gens s^enroler volontairement the greatest part of them have (every inducement) to remain at plupart entre suh.pr. les plus puissans motifs de rester chez home. Few people neglect their interests. About twenty soldiers have euw gens Une vingtaiiie se OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 329 mutinied. What a crowd of meu, women, and children followed you, when rcvolter foule you brought the news of the peace. The number of victories which he has gained is inconceivable. When will the grand fleet set sail ? A plurality of La des wives is forbidden in this country. The French armies have been a* long femmes dcfendre dans time victorious. They took leave of us yesterday. 1 shall never consent victorieux prendre conge consentir (to it), said he, unless I accompany them. Happy changes have taken y sub. pr. place, which have revived trade in our unfortunate city. Thus ended a war rttablv- which had been the cause of so many misfortunes. Such was the state of his affairs when he was imprisoned. May all these children follow the emprisotmer Puissent siiivre principles of our holy religion ! W^ere I to perish there, 1 will go. saint Dusse-je y We listen with pleasure to the advice of those who know how'^ to flatter our passions. LESSON LY. Of the Object or Regimen of Verbs. A verb may have for its object a substantive, a pronoun, or a verb. 1. A substantive : as, — instruisez la jeunesse, instruct youth. 2. A pronoun: as, — je mejlatte, I flatter myself. 3. A verb: as, — il a fait batir cette maison, he has had this house built. There are two sorts of objects of verbs : — the direct and the indirect one. 1. The direct object is that on which the action of the verb imme- diately falls, without the help of any preposition expressed or under- stood; it answers to the questions qui? (whom?) with reference to persons; and quoi? (^what?) with reference to things : as, — je cheris ma sceur^ I cherish my sister; je cheris qui? ma soeur. — // aime P etude., he likes stvidy ; il aime quoi ? Petude. — 3Ia soeur and Petude are therefore the direct objects of the two verbs cherir and aimer ^ be- cause they are affected by them without the help of any preposition. The indirect object is that which is affected by the verb with the help of a preposition expressed or understood ; it answers to the questions — a qui, de qui, pour qui, par qui, &c. with reference to persons, and a quoi, de quoi, pour quoi, &c. with reference to things : as, — il a parle a son jrere, he has spoken to his brother; il a parle h qvi? ,;330 OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. a son frere, — a son frere is consequently the indirect object of the verb parler ; because it is affected by it with the help of the preposi- tion d. There are some active verbs which govern two objects, a direct and an indirect one ; whereas others have only a direct one. Donner, for in- stance, in the following sentence, has two objects, and governs a, before its indirect one: il donnera vingt mille francs a safille en mariage, he will give twenty thousand francs to his daughter in marriage. But adorer, to adore, only admits of a direct object : as, — il adore son Elo'ise, he adores his Eloisa. Passive verbs have only an indirect object, which is preceded by the preposition de or par: as, — un enfant sage est aime de tout le monde, a prudent youth is loved by every body. U operation fut faite . par M. L**, the operation was performed by Mr. L* *. Some few neuter verbs have not any object; such are — languir, to languish, and dormir, to sleep ; but a great many others have an indi- rect one, which is preceded by the preposition de or a : as, — nuire a -quelqu^un, to injure some one. Medire de tout le monde, to slander every body, &c. Some reflective verbs have only a direct object, as — s^enrhumer, (to catch cold,) which governs no preposition, and has only the pro- nouns 7)ie, te, se, nous, vous, for its object : as, — je me suis enrhvme, I have caught cold ; but others have two objects, a direct and an in- direct one, as — se repentir (to repent), which, besides the pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous, which it has for its direct object, governs the preposition de before the succeeding noun : as, — je me repens de ma faute, I repent my fault. The pronouns me, te, se, noiis, vous, which are used before reflective verbs, are sometimes their direct and sometimes their indirect objects. In the fol- lowing sentence, for instance, je me leve de bonne heure, I rise early, me is the direct object of the verb leve, because the sentence is equivalent to this:— j"e /eve moi de bonne heure; but in this — je me reproche vi07i imprudence, me is the indirect 'object of the verb reproche, because the sentence answers to— je reproche a moi mon imprudence. Unipersonal verbs may be followed by two indirect objects, to ex- , press different references. The preposition which must be used before each of them depends on the reference which it is intended to express : as, — il importe a voire frere de veiiler a l^ education de sonfils, your brother must take care of the education of his son. When de or par is to be used after passive verbs. General Rule. — Whenever a passive verb expresses a sentiment, a passion, and in general an affection of the soul, it governs the preposi- tion de, in French, whatever preposition may be used in English : as, — riionnete homme est estime, meme de ceux qui n^ontpas de probite, an honest man is esteemed, even by those who have no probity. OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 331 AVhen, on tlie contrary, a passive verb expresses an action to which the body or mind solely contributes, the preposition jjar must be used after it in French, whatever may be the preposition in English : as, — la jjoudre a canon fut inventee par le cordelier Berthold Schwartz^ vers la fin du XIIP Steele y et les homhes par Gallen, eveque de Mun- ster, vers le milieu du XVI^ siecle, gunpowder was invented by Berthold Schwartz, a friar, towards the end of the 13th century, and bombs by Gallen, a bishop of Munster, about the middle of the 16th century. Les Gaules furent conquises par Cesar, the Gauls were conquered by Csesar. Observe. — The preposition par should not be used before the word Diet/, in order to avoid the equivocation of the vulgar oath pardieu : we should therefore say— vous serez piini de Dieu, si , . . (and not par Dieu,^ you will be punished by God, if . . . It will however be better to say — /e del, In terre,Phomme, lafemme^ ont ke crees par Diei/. than de Dieu, heaven, earth, man and woman, have been created by God. Passive verbs are frequently used without any object : as, — le temple de Jerusalem fid detruit, malgre les defenses de Titus , the temple of Jerusalem was destroyed, notwithstanding Titus's prohibition. Place of the object or regimen of verbs, when it is a noun or a verb. This article will have no interference with the place of the pronouns, when a verb governs at the same time a noun and a pronoun : the prmioun will always keep the precedence, and retain the place whicli has been assigned for it. General Rule. — Whenever a verb has only one object, and this is a noun or a verb, it is placed after the verb in a simple tense, and after the participle in a compound one: as, — I love Isabella, y'am^? Isabclle. I have received a letter, fai repu une lettre. He had that coat made in London, il a fait faire cet habit a Londres. When a verb has two objects, a direct and an indirect one, and these are nouns or parts of a sentence, the shortest is generally placed the first after the verb, unless they be both of an equal length, in which case the direct should precede the indirect one : as, — take to Miss T* * the letter which I have given you, portez a mademoiselle T* * la lettre que je vous ai donnee. A wise man prefers science to riches, I'homme sage prefer e la science aux richesses. If there should be any equivocation to be feared, the indirect object should precede the direct one, although it may be as long and sometimes longer than the direct. If the sentence should be interrogative, and the verb should have only a direct object, which being a noun preceded by an interrogative pronoun, as — loliat book do you read? ivhat lesson have you learnt? both the noun and the interrogative pronoun should be placed before the verb in a simple tense, and before the auxiliary in a compound one : as. 332 OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. — what book do you read? quel livre lisez-vous? What lesson have you learnt ? quelle lepon avez-vous ap-prise ? But if the verb should have two objects, a direct and an indirect one, and the indirect should be a noun accompanied by an interrogative pro- noun, whereas the direct one should be a personal pronoun, they should likewise go both before the verb, and the indirect one should come first : as, — what study do you apply yourself to? a quelle etude vous appli- que z-vous ? Should both the objects be nouns, that which is accompanied by the interrogative pronoun should then be placed before the verb, and the other after it : as, — what book have you given to your sister ? quel livre avez-vous donne a voire soeur? When neither of the objects is accompanied by an interrogative pro- noun, the one being a conjunctive personal pronoun, and the other a noun, as — have they given her the letter ? the pronoun is placed before the verb, and the noun after it: as, — have they given her the letter? lui a-t-on donne la lettre ? In French, as in English, a noun may be governed by two verbs at once, the same as by two adjectives or two prepositions, provided these require the same object : as, — on doit aimer, cherir ses parens, one ought to love and cherish his parents. Le bonhevir le plus grand, le plus digne d'envie, Est celui d'etre tdile et cher a sa patrie. But the following sentence is incorrect in French — si le roi de France avait su connaUre et se servir de ses avantages, if the king of France had known and used his advantages ; because the verb con- 7iaUre requires a direct object and se servir an indirect one. A different turn must therefore be given to the sentence, placing the substantive avantages after the first verb, and using the pronoun en before the second as its object: as, — si le roi de France avait su connaitre ses avantages et s''en servir. It is necessary to observe that a verb cannot have two direct objects. Whenever therefore a verb has two objects, one must be a direct one and the other an indirect one, because an action can only have an immediate object. Neither can a verb have two indirect objects to ex- press the same reference, although it can have two indirect ones to express different references : as, — ditcs-lui de venir, tell him to come. ESSAY LV. What are you looking for ? I am looking for my umbrella, which I have lost. chercher — He loves and cherishes his Eloisa, although she is * always scolding si/b. pr. grander him. — Let us forgive our enemies, if we wish that God should forgive pardonner a sub. pr. OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. 333 us. We do not easily withstand the alhirements of pleasure. Fill that register aux attraits ronplir decanter with wine and that bottle with water. — Why do you interest yourself carafe de s'lnteresser for a man who \vould injure you if he could? — Frequent good company and a niiire pouvoir avoid libertines. — By what steam-packet (did) you come ? I came by paqi/ebot a vapeur etes sins veiiu the Star or the Venus. — We flatter ourselves that you (will meet with a very Etoile serez accueiUi de la ma- kind reception.) (Nothing but religion) can make us bear great misfor- nitre la plus honmte La religion seule supporter infor- tunes with patience and resignation. Although he is very fond of* his tune aimer beaucoup daughter, he will only give her fifteen thousand pounds in marriage. — A qui est modest and (well-informed) young lady is esteemed by every body. dont r esprit est bicn cultivt — (She has been languishing,) these ten mouths, in the most deplorable ^qu'elle '^languit ^il ^y '^a -^ ^ situation. — I never sleep in the day time.* — Let us slander nobody, and etut pendant medire de above all let us wrong nobody They inquired after you surtout /aire tort a slnj'ornier de fi'tat de voire santc and all your family. — Do not rejoice (at the) misfortunes of others. — de celui de des malheur If you continue laughing at me, I shall make you rejjent it. — She will a vous inoqtier de ^ 4 a 5 3^^^ reproach herself with * her imprudence, when it (is too late.) Does it not se reprocher n\n sera plus temps concern parents to take care of the education of their children ? importer il un pere et u une mere de vei/ler d, — The French were dreaded by their neighbours, under Napoleon. — His plan redouter is approved by every body. — These rockets were invented by Sir William fusee volante Congreve. — Was not England subdued by William the Conqueror, in the conquis Guillaume year lOGG ? — You will be punished by God, if you commit crime and que sub. pr. despise virtue. — Heaven, earth, animals, reptiles, and fishes, were created by me p riser ont ete God. The temple of Jerusalem was destroyed, notwithstairding Titus's malt/7'e prohibition, and (not a stone was left.) — I accept with much pleasure your defenses il n^en resia pierre st/r pier re kind invitation, and I shall be with you, to-morrow evening, at six o'clock. — aimable chez I hope you have not ordered any thing ou purpose for me. No; we receive se fatter ordomw expres 334 OF THE OBJECT OR REGIMEN OF VERBS. I j you (as a) friend without ceremony. — Do not refuse me that favour. — Have you i en j not found again the spoons which you (missed) the other day ? No ; and I ! retrouve)' cuiller qui manquaient \ suspect the servant of having taken them? — Why did James blush when j soupgonner de Jacques rougir j you told him that you had been robbed? I do not know. — As soon as I have j voler finished my letter, I will show you the pretty things I have. — ^They have j montrer I overwhelmed me with reproaches, although I do not deserve (them.) — I accabler de sub. pr, le I You ought to exclude that woman from your society. — Have you informed her i exclure fair e part lui j of your design? Yes. — Do not give any thing to her brother. — They have j rien On \ deprived my father of* all his property. — He punished the Catholic religion i oter h bien ] (for the attempts) of its ministers, and in less than two years he rendered | des attentats en \ Sweden Lutheran. — We expect a letter from France every day. — She has sent Luthtrien me a thousand pounds to invest in the Three per Cent. — Explain that pour placer les pour Exp/iquer difficulty to me, and I shall be satisfied. — ;-Save us the trouble of going content Epargner peine retourner there again *.-^Let him find me a situation. — Let us remit this affair to Provi- y place dence. — Do not reproach me so often with* (such a) trifle. Do not give them cette bagatelle Iheir allowance to-morrow. — What paper do you want ? Post paper, if ration desirer Du papier a lettres you please. — What excuse has he brought ? — What were you speaking to me apporter about ? — Whom shall I trust, if you deceive me ? — What promise have your de sejter sisters made to Mrs. L* * * ? — To whom did he apply first ? — Has Mr. s^adresser crabord D'=* taught you French ?— Take this letter back* to Miss E- *, and tell her €nseig?ier Reporter that I attribute her present state* of* misery to her extravagance. — Was it to actz/el me, my dear, you wished to speak ? — A wise man * sacrifices his pleasures que Le to his duty; but a fool neglects his duty for his pleasures. — Hypocrites endea- le s'etu- vour to adorn (with the) appearance of virtue the most shameful and disgraceful dier a parer des dehors pf, honteux d'eerik vices. — "When he had got frcm his wife all her jewels and money, he aban- tirer pierreries PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. 335 doned her and her children. — "VVe are going to root out and pull down that elle dkraciner abattre tree. — He is so attached and devoted to her. — She obeys and disobeys her si devoue masters by turns. — He who is useful and dear to his country is worthy of envy. tou7'-a-tour — If the Emperor had known that position, and had taken advantage qu'il sub. plu. ^emparer (of it), h^ would not have lost the battle. en LESSON LVI. Of the different Prepositions yihich the Verbs govern. General Rule. — Whenever two verbs follow each other in a sentence in French, the second is generally put in the present of the infinitive mood, preceded by the preposition which the verb going before may require, as will be found explained in the following lists : — 1. A list of verbs ivhich, being folloived by another verb in the pre- sent of the infinitive mood in French, require no preposition before it, whether any be used in English or not : as, — / am going to see Mr. D- *, j 3 vais voir M. D* * ; and not je vais a voir ou pour vc M. D* * to Acknowledge, recommitre. to Hear, entendre, oiar. to Appear, pwaitre. to Hope, esperer. to Be able, pouvoir. to Intend, to propose. compter. to Be better. valoir mieux. to Know, savoir. to Be in vain. avoir beau. to Let, to Leave, laisser. to Be necessary. fa/loir. to Like better, aimer mieux. to Be Avilling, vouhir. to Maintain, soidenir. to Come, venir. to Make, to cause, faire. to Confess, co7ifesser. to Owe, devoir'. to Dare, oser. to Own, avoiier. to Declare, declarer. to Pretend, prkendre. to Deign, daigner. to See, voir. to Deny, nier. to Seem, sembler, par ail re to Depose, deposer. to Send, envoy er. to Fancy, s^imaginer. to Think, to believe. croire. to Go, aller. Observe. — 1. Whenever a verb is used as nominative to another verb in French, it must be put in the present of the infinitive, without any preposition before it : as, — always speaking is exhausting, toujours parler epuise. 2. Thougli aimer mieux and valoir mieux, when followed by a verb in the present of the infinitive mood, require no preposition before it, if that verb should itself be followed by que, and another verb likewise in 336 PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN. the present of the infinitive mood, de should be used after que, before the succeeding verb, if a comparison or contrast exist between the two parts of the sentence : as, — I would rather die than enter his house, j^aimerais mieux mourir que d'enti'er chez lid. 3. Whenever esperer, to hope, is used in the present of the infinitive, and is immediately followed by another verb, likewise in the present of the infinitive, it requires de before it : as, — how can you hope to succeed without his assistance? comment pouvez-xous esperer de reussir sans son secours ? 4. When venir is used in the sense of coming from, (in which case it is generally Englished by just before the past participle of another verb,) it requires de before that verb, which must be put in the present of the infinitive in French ; but, when it implies to come to or in order to, it seldom governs any preposition before the next infinitive, unless it should be sometimes po2ir : as, — I have just paid a visit to Mrs. L* *, je viens de faire ou de rendre visite a M'"' L**. They came to see me, Us vinrent me voir. He came yesterday to balance his account, but you were out, il vint hier pour solder son compte, mats voiis etiez sorti. Venir, on the contrary, used for or in the sense of — to happeii, espe- cially if it be employed impersonally, requires d before the next infini- tive : as, — sHl vient kpleuvoir, if it happen to rain. En venir, to come to, always governs a, or, if the article should also be required, av, a la, a /', or aux, before the next noun : as, — they came to blows, Us en vinrent aux mains. 5. When pretendre signifies aspirer d, it requires a before its object, which is generally a noun : as, — il pretend^ il aspire, il vise a cet emploi, he aims at that employment. 6. The verb faire is expressed in several different manners in Eng- lish; but, whatever may be its construction, it always requires the next verb to be in the present of the infinitive in French, without any pre- position before it : as, — he has had a new house built, il a fait batir line nouvelle malson. I had that coat made in London, /'a/ /di^ faire cet habit a Lo7idres. 7. Although laisser, to leave, to let, does not generally require any preposition before the next infinitive in French, as, — laissez jouer les enfans, let the children play ; there are cases in which, being used aflirmatively, it sometimes governs a before it : as, — je vous lalsse a penser s'il projita de ^occasion, I leave you to think whether he availed himself of the opportunity ; and others in which, being employed negatively, it sometimes requires de : as, — il ne laissa pas d'aller son chemin, he did not cease going on; but these different forms of expres- sion can only be learnt by practice. PREPOSITIONS WHICH THE VERBS GOVERN, 331 ESSAY LVI. (No. 1.) Those who pretend to be learned are often very ignorant. — (Should you be Quelque riche ever so rich), if you do not know how * to * put bounds to your desires, you que vous soyez borne dtsir will never be satisfied. — I should have been to see her last week, if I had not been so unwell They ought to go out every day. — We must let others indispose devraient It think and act as they please.— I leave you to think whether she was afraid of answering. — You may suppose that they did not omit profiting by such a laisser d'' ^si ^ favourable opportunity. — She is so cruel and revengeful, that I dare not speak to ■* ^ vindicatif her. — If ever I hear you calling him names again, I shall certainly dire des injures une autrefois dismiss you. — (It is necessary) to practise virtue. — Go and* ask leave to go renvoyer II faut pratiquer de out. They did not deign to answer me. — It is better to get little than to do gagner dene'^faire nothing. — Do you pretend always to insult me (in that manner ?) — Eating ^ de 1(1 sorte and drinking loo much are injurious to the health. Talking too much niiisihle (is exhausting). — Would it not be better to die than to linger as I do ?— I have epuise languir just been paying a ♦ visit to Lord D * *. — When will you come and * see me, that /aire I may * show you my fine harp ? — If it happen to rain, what will you sub. pr. ventr do? — They were on the point of coming to blows. — Does he still aim at that employment ? No ; lie has bought a commission in the army. 2. A list of verbs ivhich, being followed by another verb in the -present of the infinitive mood in French, govern the preposition a before it, ivhether any preposition be used in English or not: as, — / learn dancing, j'apprends a danser. to Accustom one's self, s''accoutumer. to Be repugnant, repugner. to Addict one's self, s'adonner. to Be resigned, etre resignt. to Amuse one's self, s'cmufser. to Condemn, condamner. to Apply one's self; s\tppliquer. to Confine one's self, se borner. to Authorise, auturiser. to Consent, consentir. to Be, etre. to Cost, couter. to Be accustomed, etre accoutume. to Delight in, se plaire. to Be disposed, Tessa.nt sous nos po7'tes, fondent mr nos remparts, thousands of foes, forcing themselves under our gates, pour upon our ramparts. Observe. — 1. The preposition A list of the French Homonymes ivhich are most generally used in- familiar discourse. Acre, Alene, Avant, Bailler, Bat, Bete, Beaute, Boite, Bond, Chair, Clair, e. Corps, Cote, Cours, Craintj (il ou elle,) dure, Degoute, (il ou eWe, Dont, Faite, Fete, Faix, FaTs, (je.) Fais, (tu,) Foret, sour, sharp, awl. hefore, to gape, to yawn, pack-saddle, beast, beauty, box. rebound, gambol. Jlesh. clear, body. rib, coast, hillock, course, airing-place, he or she fears, to bake, to cook. ,) he or she disgusts, of whom or of which, top, pinnacle, festival, burden, weight, I make, thou makest. forest. Fumes, (nous,) we were. Goute, (je,) / taste. GoiiteSj (tu,) thou fastest. Goute, (il ou elle,) he or she tastes. Grave, Hale, Hote, Jals, Jefine, grave. sun-burning^ drying wind, host, guest. jet, black, fast, fasting. Acre, Haleine, Avent, Bailler, Bat, (il ou elle,) Bette, Botte, Boite, (il ou elle,) Bon, Cher, Clerc, Cor, Cote, Cour, Crin, CuTr, Degoutte,(il ou elle Don, \ Faite, ^Fait, (il ou elle,) Foret, TFume, (je,) < Fumes, (tu,) f Fume, (il ou elle,) \ Goiitte, r Grave, (je,) < Graves, (tu,) (^ Grave, (il ou elle,) \ Halle, Hotte, < Jet, ( Jet d'eau, Jeiine, acre, breath, advent, to give. he or she beats, beet. having boots on. he ox she limps, good, dear, clerk. corn, French horn, number, quota, court, court-yard, horse-hair, leather. ,) he or she or it drops gift, present. made, done. he or she makes. gimlet. 1 smoke, thou smokest. he or she smokes, drop, I engrave, thou engravest. he or she engraves. market-hall. hamper, spng. waterspout, young. OF PROSODY. Legs, legacy. /Laid, iLatt, ugly, milk. Laisse, (je,) Heave. 1 Laisses, (tu,) thou leavest. > Laisse, leash. Laisse, (il ou elle,) he or she leaves. J Maitre, master. Mettre, to put. Male, viale. Malle, trunk, mail. Matin, mastiff. Matin, m.orning. Mois, month. Moi, I, me. Mont, mount, hill. Mon, my. Mor, inure, ripe. Mur, wall. Nait,(ilo?«elle,) he ox she is born. }Net, neat. N'est, (il ou elle,) he or she or it is not. Pate, paste, doifgh. Patto, paw. Paume, tennis, palm of the hand. S Pomme, ' apple. ^ Pecher, peach-tree, ox tojish. Pecher, to sin. Pene, bolt of a lock. Peine, pain, trouble. Plalue, j)lain. Heine, {fern. of^\Qh\)full, Rot, roasted meat. Rot, eructation. Sas, sieve. JSa, his or her. here, that, come on. Saut, leap, jump. Sot, foolish, silly. C Sein, breast, bosom. Saint, holy. < Seing, signature. C Ceint, girded. Saine, (/e;n. o/sain ^sound, wholesome. 7 Scene, scene. SSeine, (la,) the Seine, (i-iver). Cene, Lord's supper. i (Tette, (je,) J suck. Tete, head. -{ Tettes, (tu,) thou suckest. (Tette, (il ou elle,) he or she sucks. Tache. task. Tache, stain, spot. Ties, very. Trait, stroke, dart. Valne, (^fem. o/*vain) vain. Veine, vein. Ver, worm. >Vert, Vers, Vers, towards, verse. green. Verre, glass. VivTes, victuals. Vivre, to live. VoTx, voice. Volt, (il ou elle,) he or she iees. Voler, to rob, to steal. Voler, tofy. 3. Of Emphasis, By emphasis is meant a stronger and fuller sound of the voice, by which we distinguish some word or words, on which we wish to lay a particular stress, and to show how they affect the rest of the sentence. Sometimes the emphatic words must be distinguished by a particular tone of the voice, as well as by a greater stress. 4. Of Pauses. Pauses or 7'esis, in speaking and reading, are a total cessation of the voice, during a perceptible, and, in many cases, a measurable space of time. 382 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 5. Of Tones. Tones are different both from emphasis and pauses. They consist in the modulation of the voice, the notes, or variations of sound which we employ in the expression of our sentiments. OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. As French literature has been particularly illustrated by poetical composition, the most beautiful works having been written in poetry by the most gifted of men, it seems necessary to give the student some idea of that part of grammar, which explains the principles of versifica- tion, that, in reading poetry, he may be the better able to judge of the correctness and beauties of this lively exhibition of nature and sentiment. " Versification is the art of making verses. Verses are a certain number of words measured and cadenced, according to fixed and determined rules. The rules of French versification imply : 1st. The number of syllables entering into verses. 2. The caesura or hemistic which marks a pause in them. 3. The rhyme at the end of verses. 4. The words which cannot be admitted into poetical composition. 5. The licenses allowed in poetry. 6. The verses belonging to the different sorts of poetry, and their combinations. This treatise will be concluded by a few rules . necessary to be ob- served in the composition of French verses, and a few remarks on the manner of reading French poetry. 1. Of the number of syllables in verses. It is by the number of syllables that the different sorts of French verses are distinguished. There are verses of twelve^ ten, eight, seveUy six, five, four, three, two, syllables, and even of one syllable. As the English scholar may frequently find some difficulty in making out a sufficient number of syllables in the lines of French poetry, it may be necessary to inform him that, in scanning verses, several syllables that are mute or are but faintly sounded in prose, are restored to their full pronunciation : for instance, the following line — '< La rage de tes flots expire sur tes bords." must be scanned — La xa.-ge de tes fiots ex-pi-re sur tes bords. But when a word ends with e mute, in the body of a verse, and is followed by" another word beginning with a vowel or h mute, there is an e/isiofi, and the two syllables form but one : as, — " Mer terrible en ton lit quelle main te resserre ?" is scanned— Mer ter-vi-6/en ton lit quel-le main te res-serre ? " OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 383 The last syllable of /€?nmine verses, that is, of verses terminated with e mute, either by itself, as in — TERRe; or followed by*, as in globe* y or by w^, as in — t/s cHANieni ; is never reckoned in the measure of the verse, as it will be hereafter explained. 1. Verses of twelve syllables. " On voit a I'ho-ri-zon, de deux points op-po-ses, Des nu-a-ges mon-ter dans les airs em-bra-ses." Potme des Saisons, chant 2. The above verses are called Alexandrine^ in French — Alexandrins ; because they were first invented or used by a poet named Alexander. They are also termed heroic, as they are chiefly employed in what is st3-led heroic poetry, such as tragedies, epic poems, &c. In French they may simply be called grands vers. 2. Verses often syllables. '• Tout est fu-mee, et tout nous fait sen-tir Ce grand ne-ant qui va nous en-glou-tir." — Foltcdre. 3. Verses of eight syllables. "■ Sou-vent j'ai vu dans les ci-tes, Par-mi nos su-per-bes beau-tes, &c." — Constant Dubos. 4. Verses of seven syllables. " Pas un seul pe-tit mor-ceau De mou-che ou de ver-mis-seau."' — La Fontaine. 5. Verses of six syllables. •' Me-me en mou-rant la rose Gar-de sa dou-ce o-deur, &c." — De la Chabeaussiere. 6. Verses of five syllables. •■• Dans ces pres fleu-ris Qu'ar-ro-se la Seine, Cher-chez qui vous mene, Mes che-res bre-bis." — Madame Deshoulieres. 7. Verses of four syllables. "' Rien n'est si beau Que mou ha-meau." — Bernard. 8. Verses of three syllables. " BeWe rose Que j'ar-rose, &c." — Hommage a la Rose. 9. Verses of two syllables. '* Le teint frais, et I'incarnat De Rose." — Champmorin — Rosati d^ Arras. 384 OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 10. Verses of one syllable. " Et Ton voit des commis. Mis Comme des princes, Qui jadis sont venus Nus ^ De leurs provinces." — Panard. 2, OF C^SURA AND HEMISTIC. Casura is a Latin word which is used to denote the place where a pause must be made in reading verses. Hemistic is derived from the Greek, and signifies half a verse. Each line of Alexandrine poetry is divided into two hemistics, and the caesura or pause takes place at the conclusion of the first, as recom- mended by Boileau in the following lines :— - ^' Que toujours dans vos vers, — le sens coupant les mots, Suspende Themistiche, — en marque le repos." In verses often syllables, the csesura, which is always after the fourth syllable, divides the verse into two unequal hemistics, the one of four, and the other of six syllables : as — " Charmante paix — delices de la terre." In the construction of the verse, those words, between which there is a necessary connexion, must not be divided for the cj3esura. The first hemistic of a verse may be terminated with an e mute, pro- vided the second hemistic begins with a vowel, because then the two vowels are united by an elision. The csesura should seldom be made immediately after a pronoun. 3. OF RHYME. Rhyme is the correspondence of sound in the termination of two words at the end of two verses. Rhyme is either masculine or feminine. Masculine rhyme is that of words which end with any other termina- tion than e mute, either by itself or followed by s or nt : as, — '^ Quels temoins eclatans devaiit moi rassembles ! Repondez, cieux et mers ; et vous, terre, parlez ! O Cieux ! que de grandeur et que de majeste ! J'y reconnais un maitre a qui rien n'a coCite. Toi qu'annonce I'aurore, admirable flambeau, Astre toujours le meme, astre toujours nouveau, Tous les jours je t'attends; tu reviens tous les jours. Est-ce moi qui t'appelle et qui regie ton cours ?" Racine. Potme de la Relighu. OF FRENCH VERSIFICATION. 385 Feminine rhyme is that of words ending with e mute, either by itself, as in — lumierc ; or followed by s in the plural of nouns, as in — ETOiLe^ ; or by nt, in the third persons plural of verbs, as- in — Us FOTjRMiLLen^; " Globe resplendissant, ocean de lumiere, De vie et dc chaleur source immense et premiere, &c." — Le Mierre^ " Quel bras peut vous suspendre, innombrables etoile* ? Nuit brillante, dis-nous qui t'a donne tes voile* ?" Racine. Potme de la Religion. C'est peu qu'en un ouvrapje, ou les fautes fourmille/?^, Des traits d'esprit semes de temps en temps petillew/. In verses the rhyme of which is feminine, and which, for that reason, are called /emmme verses, the e mute, at the end of the last word iii the verse, is so little sounded that it is scarcely heard ; the syllable, therefore, in which it comes, is not reckoned in the measure of the verse. The termination aient or oient, in the imperfect and conditional of verbs, having the sound of an open e, forms a masculine rhyme : as, — <* Du temps que les betes parlo/ew^, Les lions entre autres \ou\aient £tre admis dans notre alliance." — La Fontaine. Particular attention must be paid not to use more than two rhymes of the same termination, following each other; and taste and harmony require that the same should not be employed again within a less interval than six or more lines. Difference between rich and sufficient rhymes. Rhyme, whether masculine or feminine, is termed — ricli or simply sufficient. Rich rhyme is that which is formed by two words, the last sounds of which are perfectly similar, and, as much as possible, represented by the same letters, as in the following verses : — " Helas 1 Je n'ai point vu ce sejour enc/ gouter. The dinner. Le diner ou d'lnL The afternoon's La collation. luncheon. The supper, Le souper.. 5. Of the different Eatables, Aliment, Anchovy, Artichoke, Asparagus, Bacon, Beef, a-la-mode, ■ Bit, piece, Boiled meat, . Bread, Broth, Jelly-broth, Cabbage, greens, Calf's-head, Caper, Capen, Carrot, ^ lode. aliment. anchois._ artichaiH. osperge. lard. hoeuf. boeuf a la tnorceau. bdidl/i. pain. bouillon. consomme. chou, sing. ehoux,pl. tete de veau. capres,/. pi. chapon. carotie. Cauliflo'wer, Chicken,. Cod-fish, Fresh cod, Salt cod, Craw-fish, , Cresses, Crumb, Crust, Cucumber, Duck, Eel, Egg, Fat, I Feast, : Fricassee, j Fish, I Food, I French beans. Game, Gerkin, Goose. Gravy, Ham, I Lamb, Quarter of lamb, I Lean, j Leek, Lettuce, ] Leveret, I Lobster, i Mackerel, I Meat, j Minced meat, i Roast meat, Melon, Mushroom, Mustard, Mutton, Mutton-chop,- Breast of mutton. Leg of mutton, Neck of mutton^ Mouthful, Nutmeg, Oil, Omelet, • Onion, Oyster, Pea; Pepi^er, Pheasant, Plaice, Pork, Pottage, Potatoe, Poultry, fowlsy chou-Jleur, m. poulef. mo rue. monie /raiche, morue salee. ecrevisse. cresson. rnie. croute. conco7nbre. canard, anguille. ceuf. gras. festin. fricassee, poisson. nourriture. haricots verts, gibier. cornicho7i. oie. jus. jambon. agneau. quartier d'agtiean. maigre. poireau. laitue. levraut. komard. viaquereau, viande. hachis. roti. 7nelon. champig7t07i. rnouiarde. mouto7i. cotelette de tnouio7i. j)oit7-ine de mouion. gigot. collet de 77iouton, hoiichee. muscade. liuile. 07nelette. ogno7i . huitre. pais, poivre. faisan. plie. pore, potage. pom7ne de terre. volaille. 404: VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. Provisions, victuals, nvres, /M.p/. ] Medlar, nefle. Radish, radis, rave. Milk, /ait. Ragout, ragout. Mulberry, mure. Repast, repas. Nut, mix. Salad, salade» Orange, orange. Salmon, saumon. Peach, piche. Salt, sel. Pear, poire. Sauce, sauce. Plum, prune. Sausage, saucisson, saucisse. Pie, pate, tourte. Sirloin, aloyau. Patties, petits pates. Slice, tranche. Quince, coing. Soup, sovpe. Raspberry, framboise. Treat, rkgal. Red and white heart bigarreau. Trout, truite. cherry, Turbot, turbot. Strawberry, /raise. Turkey, dindon. Sugar, Sucre, Young turkey. dindonneau. Sugar-plums, bonbons, m. dragtes, Young partridge. perdreau. /. Young pigeon. pigeomieau. Sweetmeat,preserves, confitures,/, pi. Turnip, navet. Tart, tarte. Turtle tovtue. Veal, ' Veal cutlet, veau, cotelette de veau. 7. Of Liquors, &c. Loin of veal. longe de veau. Beer, biere. Vegetable, legume^ m. sing. Strong beer. biere /orte. legumes^ m. pi. Small beer, petite biere. Venison, venaison. Brandy, eau-de-vie. Vinegar, vinaigre. Cider, cidre. ' Chocolate, Cocoa, Coffee, chocolat. 6. Of Fruits, Pastry, &Q, cacao, ca/k. Almond, amande. Ice, glace. Apple, pomme. Cream-ice, glace a la crime. Apple-pie, tourte de pommes ou Lemon-ice, glace au citron. tourteauxpommes. Raspberry-ice, glace aux /ramboises. Apricot, abricot. Strawberry-ice, glace aux /raises. Biscuit, biscuit. Lemonade, limonade. Butter, beurre. Mead, hydromel. Cake, gateau. Nectar, nectar. Cherry, cerise. Orgeat, orgeat. Chestnut, chataigne* Perry, poir6. Cheese, fromage. Punch, punch. Cream, creme. Punch a la Romaine, jooMcAed/a/?o»tame,w. Currant, (red) groseilles rouges en Rum, rhum. grappes. Syrup, sirop. Currant, (white) groseilles blanches en Tea, the. grappes. Water, eau. Fig, Filbert, Jlgue. aveline. Wine, vin. Gooseberry, (white) groseille {blanche.^ 8. Of the Table and the different things used at Table, Gooseberry, (xed) Grapes, groseille (rouge.) raisin. Hazel-nut, noisette. Basin, basstn. Jelly, gelee. Bottle, bouteille. Lemon, citron. China, porcelaine. Macaroon, macaron. China service. service de porcelaine. Macaroni, macaroni. Chocolate-pot, chocolatiire. VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 405 CofFee-pot, Cork-screw, Cup, Decanter, Dish, Earthen-ware, Earthen-ware vice. %g-cup, Finger-glass, Fork, Glass, Goblet, Knife, Knife and fork, &c. Milk-pot, Mustard-pot, Napkin, Oil-cruet, Pepper-caster, Plate, Pewter plate Salad-dish, Salt-cellar, Saucer, Silver-plate, Soup-dish, Spoon, Soup-ladle, Sugar-caster, Table, Table-cloth, Tea-board, Tea-pot, Tongs, Vinegar-cruet, cofetiere. tire-bouchon. iasse. carafe, plat. faience. service de faience. coquetier. bail {pour se rincer la bouche et se laver ies doigts apres le diner), fourchette. verre. gobelel. couieau. convert, pot au lait. moutardier. serviette, huilier. poivritre. assiette. vaisselle d'etain. saladier. saliere. soucoupe. argenterie. vaisselle d'argent. sou pier e. cuiller ou cuillere. cuiller a soupe. sucrier. table, nappe. plateau, cabaret, thtihe. pincettes, f. pi. vinaigrier. Afternoon, 9. Of Time. After to-morrow, Aurora, Beginning, Break of day, dawn, Centurv, Date, nay. The day before yesterday. The next day, Work-day, apres-midi, apres- dinee. apres-demain. aurore. commencement, point ou points da jour, aube dujour. Steele, date. jour, journte. avani-hier. le jour suivant. jour ouvrable. , End, Epoch, Evening, Festival, Hour, Half-hour, Holiday, Leap-year, Middle, Midnight, Minute, Moment, Month, Morning, Noon, mid-day. Night, Quarter of an hour, Quarter of a year, Rising of the sun, Season, Second, Sunset, To-day, To-morrow, Twilight, Week, Year, Yesterday, tpoque. soir, soiree, jour de fete. heure. demi-heure. conge. annee bissextile, milieu, minuit. minute, moment, mois, matin, matinee, inidi. 7iuit. quart d'heure. trimestre, qnnrtier. lever du soleil. saison. seconde. coucher du soleil. aujourd^htd. demain. crepuscule, semaine. an, annte. hier. 10. Princij)al Days in the Tear. &c. New year's day, Christmas-day, Twelfth-day, Candlemas, Carnival, Shrove-Tuesday, Ash- Wednesday, Lent, Kmber-week, Lady-day, Palm-Sunday, Good-Friday, Easter, ■ Easter-Monda}', Whit-Sunday, Midsummer, Michaelmas, The vacation or holy-days, premier jour de fan, Noel. jiiur des rots, chandeleur, f. carnaval. 3Iardi gras. Mercredi des cendres. Carhne. Quat re-temps, 7n.pl. Notre-dame. Dimanclie des Ba- meaux. Vendredi Saint. Fd'p/es. Lundi de Paqucs, la Pent ecu' e. la Saint- Jean. la Scunt-JMichel. Ies vacances. 11. Of Mankind. Adolescence, radu/escenct Boy, gar con. Child, enfaiit. 406* VOCABULARY. --SUBSTANTIVES. Childhood, Venfance. Wet-nurse, ^oiirrice. Decrepitude, la dtcrepitude. Wife, femme, epotise. Girl, pie. Widower, veuf. Human land. genre kumain. Widow, veuve. Tne Maid of Orleai IS, la Pucelle cT Orleans, homme. Man, Manhood, Maturity, la virilitt. la matur'itk. 13. Of the Human Body, 8^'c. Old age, la vieillesse^ • Action, action. Old man, vieillard. Action, gesture. geste, m. Old woman. vieille, vieille femme. Air, air. Virgin, maid. vierge, pucelle. Arm, bras. Virginity, virginiit. Artery, artere. Woman, femme. Attraction,- allure- attraits, appas. Young man. jeune homme. ment, Young woman. jeune femme. Back, dos. Youth, lajeimesse. Backbone, epine du dos. Beard, Beauty, barbe. beaute. 12. Degrees of Kindred, ^^c. Belly, Bile, ventre, bile. Aunt, tante. Body, corps. Brother, frere. Bone, OS. !Brother-in-la^v, beau-frere. Bosom, sein. Child, enfant. Brain, cerveau. Companion, compagnon, com- Brains, cervelle. pagne. Breast, poitrine. Cousin, cousin, cousine. Blood, sang. Daughter, file. Bowels, entrailles, f. pi. boy- Daughter-in-law, belle-fdk. aux,intestins, m. pi. Eldest daughter. ainee. Breath, haleine, f. souffle, m. Eldest son, aine. Breathing, respiration. Father, pere. Calf of the le£^. viollet, gras de la Father-in-la^r, bcnu-pere. jambe. God-daughter, fillnile. Charms, charmes^ appas. God-father, parrain. Cheek, joue. God-mother, marraine* Chin, menton. God-son, Jilleul. Complexion, teint. Grand-daughter, petite.-fille. Cough, toux. Grand-father, grnnd-ptre. Dream, rive, songe. Grand-mother, grajid'-mere. Drov/siness, assGupissemefit . Graud-son, petit-fls. Ear, oreille. Heir, hiritier. Elbow, coude. Heiress, heritiere. Eye, ceil. Hushand, mari, epoux. Eyebrow, sourcil. Mother, mere. Eyelid, paupiere. Mother-in-law, belle-mire. Eye, (pupil of) 2irunelle. Neighbour, voisin, voLine. Eyes, yeux, m. pi. Nephew, neveu. Face, visage, face. Niece, niece. Feature, trait. Orphan, orphelin, orpkeilne. Finger, doigt. Sister, scear. Finger, (fore) index. Sister-in-law, belle-&cei;e. 24. Of ihe Town, its different Buildings, &c. Mad-house, Mansion-house, Market-hall, hopital des fous. mairie. halle. Academy, acadimie. Meat-market, boucherie. Admiralty, arniraide. The mint. hotel de la monnaie. Alley, or lane with - cul-de-sac. Obelisk, obelisque. out a thorough - Parish, paroisse. fare, Park, pare. Arch, arche. Parliament, parlemeni. Arcade, arcade. Passage, passage. Arsenal, arsenal. Pavillion,, pavilion. Bank, banque. Pavement, pave. Borough, bourg. Pedestal, piedestal. Bridewell, maison de correction. Pillar, pilier. Bridge, pont. Place, square, place. Building, edifice. Play-house, comedie. Bulwark, boulevard. Portico, portique. Castle, seat. chateau. Post-office, posie aux lettres. Church, eg Use. Letter-box, boite aux lettres. Coffee-house, cafe. General post. grande paste. College, college. Two -penny post, petite poste. Column, colonne. Provisions, provisions, denrtes. Colonnade, colonnade. Prison, prison. Cross-way, carrefour. Public-house, cabaret. Crown, couron7i€. Public tea-garden. guinguette. Custom-house, douane. Pyramid, pyramide. Dome, dome. Quay, quai. Dungeon, cachot. Rampart, rempart. Exchange, bourse. Sceptre, sceptre, m. Fish-market, poissonnerie. School, ecole. Foot-path, trottoir. Sign, enseigne. Foundery, fonderie. Slaughter-house, abatoir. VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. 413 Spunging-house, maison de sergent. Coach-box, sitge. Statue, statue. Coach-door, portiere. Street, rue. Coachman, cocher. Stronghold, fortified place forte. Curb, gourmette. place. Curtain, store, m. Suburb, faubourg. Diligence, dxligence. Tavern, taverne. Conductor, guard, conducteur. Throne, trone. Equipage, equipage. Town, ville. Front of a coach, devant d^ane voiture. Treasury, trtsorerie. Back of a coach, derrierc d'une voi- Turnpike-gate, barritre. ture. University, vniversite. Girth, sangle. Village, village. Glass, glace. Guide, guide. Halter, licou. 25. Of the Magistrates of a Harness, harnais. Tow n, &C. Headstall, telle re. Host, hate. Alderman, alderman. Hostess, hotesse. Attorney, procureur. Landau, landau. Bailiff, Barrister, Chamber counsel. Gaoler, bailli. avocat plaidanf. avocat coiisultarit. geolier. Litter, Passage-boat, Post-chaise, Post-horse, litiere. coche, coche d'eau, m. chaise de poste. cheval de poste. postilion. vine. cheval frais ou de re- luis. exterieur d'une voi' iure, Vimpkriale. sclle. cheval de sclle ou de King's counsel, Jurisconsult, Lawyer, Mayor, avocat gtnirai. jurisconsulte. horn me de loi. maire. Postilion, Rein, Relay, fresh horse, Notary, Overseer, Police officer. Sheriff, Sheriff's officer, notaire. tnspecteur. officier de police, sherif. sergent. Roof of a coach. Saddle, Saddle-horse, Town marshal. marechal de ville. Sedan-chair, Spur, main, chaise a porteur. eperon. 26. Of the Things used in Tra- velling y &c. Stage-coach, Stirrrup, Wheel, voiture publiquc. 6trier. roue. Axle-tree, essieu. Whip, fouet. Berlin, berline. mors, f rein. Bit, Bridle, Cabriolet, bnde. cabriolet. 27. Of Coin, Money, &c. Calash, caltche. Bank-note, billet de banque. Car, char. Centime, cenfitne, m. Caravan, caravane. Crown, ecu. Carriage, voiture, carrosse. Half-crown, petit ecu. Carriage and four , voiture a quatre, a six, Faithing, Hard. six, &c. Sfc. c/tevat/x. Two farthings. deux Hards. Gentleman's car- voiture de mailre. Franc, franc. riage. Guinea, guinee. Hired-carriage, voiture de louage. Half-guinea, demi-guime. Glass-coach, voiture de remise. Livre, livre. Hackney-coach, facre. Louis d'or. Louis d'or, piece d'or. Boot of a coach. cave, {sous le siege.") Money, argent. Chariot, chariot. A Napoleon, un Xapoll'on ou une Coach-be^m, ftche. piece de vingt francs. 414 VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. Penny, deitx sous. Half-penny, sou. Piastre, piastre. A piece of gold of une piece d\jr de twenty or forty vingt ou de qua- francs, ra7ite francs. Pound sterling, livre sterhng. Shilling, schelling ou chelin. 28. Of^ 'eight s and Measures. Acre, acre, arpent. Barrel, cask. baril. Bushel, boisseau. Butt or pipe, piece, pipe, tonneau. Eighth part. huitieme. Ell, aune. Fathom, toise. Foot, pied. Grain, grain. Hogshead, viuid. Inch, pouce. League, lieue. Litre, litre., m. Mile, mille. Ounce, once. Half-ounce, demi-once. Peck, picotin. Pint, pinte. Half-pint, demi-pinte, chopine. Pound, iivre. Half-pound, demi-livre. Quarter of a pound, quarteron. Quart, quarte. Quarter, fourth part, quart. Quintal, a hundred I quintal. weight. Tun, tonneau. Weight, poids. Yard, vfrge. 29. Of the Theatre, 8fc. Actor, Actress, Amphitheatre, Artist, Box, First tier of boxes, Second tier of boxes. Comedy, Company of players Concert, Curtain, Dancing, acteur. actrice. amphitheatre. artiste. loge. ^ premieres loges,f. pi. secondes loges,f. pi. comtdie, compagnie ou troupe de comediens. concert, rideau, toile. dame. Director or mana- directeur. . ger. Drama, drame. Farce, farce. Fencing, escrime. Flute, flute. The gods. paradis. Harp, harpe. Music, musique. Opera, opera. Orchestra, orchestre. Pantomime, pantomime. Part, rdle. Little piece. petite piece. Piano, piano. Pit, parterre. Play, spectacle. Player, comedien,eomedien7ie. Prompter, souffieur. Scene, coulisse. Scenery, decorations, f. pi. Singing, chant. Stage, theatre, theatre. Stroller, comedien de cam- pagne. Ticket, billet. Tiring or dressing ■ foyer. room. Tragedy, tragtdie. VioUn, violon. 30. Of School, 8^C. Academy, academic. Address, adresse. Arithmetic, arithmetique. Astronomy, astronomic. Book, livre. Botany, botanique. Cover, enveloppe. Dictionary, dictionnaire. Divinity, theologie. Drawing, dessin. Eloquence, eloquence. Geography, geographic. Geometry, geometric. Governess, gouvernante. Grammar, grammaire. Histovy, histoire. Ink, encre. Letter, lettre. Logic, logique. Master, maitre. Mathematics, viatMmatiques, f. pi. Mistress, maiiresse. Navigation, navigation* VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. MS Orthography, orthographe. Page, page. Painting, peinture. Paper, papier. Paper, (post,) papier a lettres. Pencil crayon. Penknife, canif. Pen, plume. Philosophy, philosophie. Physic, medecine. Poetry, poesie. Point, dot. point. Pupil, tleve. Quire of paper. main tie papier. Rule, regie. Sand, sable. Seal, cachet. School, icole. Scholar, , ecolier, tcoliere. Sculpture, sculpture. Sheet of paper, feuille de papier. Signature, signature. Slate, ardoise. Surgery, chirurgie. Swing, lalan^oire, brandil- loire. Teacher, maitre, maUresse. Translation, traduction. Wafer, pain a cacheler. 31. Of the World in general, Sfc. Africa, Afrique. America, Amerique. Angel, ange. Archangel, archange. Asia, Asie. Climate, climat. Comet, comtte. Creature, creature. Demon, demon. Devil, diahle. East, est, orient. Eclipse, 6clipse. Element, 6l6ment. Europe, Europe. Firmament, firmament. God, Dieu. Holy Ghost, Saini-Esprit. Heaven, del. Hell, enfer. Jesus-Christ, Jesus-Christ. Liglit, lurniere,jour. Moon, lune. Moon-light, clair de la lune. Moonshine, clair de lune. New moon. nouvelle lane. Half-moon. Full-moon, Nature, North, Paradise, Planet, Region, South, Star, Sun, Rainbow, Ray of the sun, Trinity, Universe, West, World, demi-lune. pleine lune. nature. nord, septentrion, Paradis, plantte. region. sud, and midi in speaking of the south of a coun- try. astre, etoiie. soleil. arc-en-ciel. rayon du soleil. Triniie. vnive7's. Quest, Occident. monde. 32. Of the Atmosphere, 8fc. Calm, Clearness, Cloud, Cold, Cool, Dampness, Darkness, Dew, Dryness, Earthquake, Exhalation, Frost, Hoar-frost, Glazed-frost, Hail, Heat, Ice, Lightning, Mist, fog, Phenomenon, Rain, Serene, Shadow, Shower, Snow, Storm, Tempest, Time and weather, Thaw, Thunder, Thunderbolt, Clap of thunder. Vapour, calme. clartL mite, nuage, mie. froid. frais. humidite. obscuritc, f. tcnebres, f.pl. rosee. secheresse. tremblement de terre. exhalaison. gelce. gelee blanche, verglas. grele. cha/eur, chaud. glace, eclair, brotdllard. phenomtne. pluie. serein, ombre, ondee. neige. orage. tempete. temps, d'egel. tonnerre. foudre. cotipde tonnerre, eclat de tonnerre. vapezir, f. 416 VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. Wind, vent. Charcoal, charbon de bois. Whirlwind, tourhillon. Chips, shavings, copeaux. Zephyr, zephyr. Conflagration, /great fire,) Live coal, Pit-coal, incendie. 33. Of Water, S^c, braise. charbon de lerre. Bath, bain* Fagot, fagot. Bay, bate. Fire, feu. Brook, ruisseau. Flame, flamme. Canal, canal. Glimmer, faint light , lueur. Cascade, cascade. Smoke, fumee. Cistern, citerne. Soot, sine. Current, courant. Spark, etineelle. Deluge, deluge. Wood, bois. Fountain, fontaine. Gulf, yolfe. Harbour, Inundation, port, havre. inondation. 35. Of the Earth, &c. Lake, lac. Antipodes, antipodes. Marsh, marais. Bridge, pont. Marshy place. martcage. Brick, briqtte. Ocean, ocean. Cape, cap. Overflowing, debordement. Cavern, caverne. Pond, etang. Causeway, chaussee. Reservoir, reservoir. Cement, ciment. River, riviere, Jleuve. Chalk, craie. Source source ^ Coast, sea-side, cote. Bank 03 rive '^1 Colony, colonic. Bed ,-S l^i S Country, pays. Brink, border d lord S; County, comt6. Stream ^/^ 5S Continent, continent. Mouth embouchure ^ Degree, degre. Road, rade. Desert, desert. Sea, mer. Dirt, boue. Arm of the sea, bras de mer. Ditch, fossL Sea-port, port de mer. Dust, poussiere. Shore ^ rivage j^ Earth, ierre. Flux and reflux ^ flux et reflux Empire, empire. The waves . 5J iles ondes, f. pi. Equator, tquateur. g Xlesflots,m.pl. 4j Estate, etat. o ' fes V agues,/, pi. ^ Field, champ. Sluice, ecluse. Flint, pierre a feu. Strait, d^troit. Globe, globe. Tide, maree. Granite, granit. Torrent, torrent. Gravel, gravier. Water, eau. Height, hauteur. Rain-water, eau de pluie. Hemisphere, hemisphere, m. Spring-water, eau de fontaine, e au Hill, col line. de source. Hillock, petite colline., cole, River-water, eau de riviere. cbteau. Pump-water, eau de pompe. Horizon, Island, Isthmus, horizon, tie. isthme. 34. C )f Fire, Sfc, Kingdom, royaume. Ashes, cendre. Latitude, latitude. Billet, piece or 1 3g bicche. Lime, chatx, variole, petite vtrole Cold, rhume. Sore throat, mal de gorge. Cold in the head, rhume de cerveau. Sore eyes, mal (Pyeux. Colic, coliqtte. Stone, pierre. Consultation, consultation. Swelling, enflure. Convulsion, convulsion. Swoon, evanouissement. Convalescence, convalescence. S}Tnptom, symptome. Corn, cor. Tooth-ache, mal de dents. Cough, toux. Tumour, swelling. iumeur. Cure, gutrison. Ulcer, sore, idcere. Cut, coupure. Wound, blessure. Death, mort. Wryneck, stiff neck , torticolis. Uplirinm. delire. Disease, illness. Dropsy, Drug, maladie. hydropisie. drogue. 41. Of the Soul y its Faculties, Virtues, Vices, &c. Epilepsy, epilepsie. Accuracy, exactness , exactitude. Fainting, dtfaillance, pamoison. Activity, activite. -balling-sickness. haui-mal, ma/ caduc. Address, adresse. Fever, fievre. Admiration, admiration. Fit, acccs. Adversity, adve7'site. Flux, flux. Affability, affabilite. Fluxion, fluxion. AlFection, affection* Frenzy, frenesie. Affront, affront. Gout, goutle. Agreeableness, agrement. Gravel, stone. gravelle, pierre. Ambition, ambition. Griping pains. tranchies,f.pl. Amazement, etonnement. Head-ache, mal de tete. Anger, coltre. Hoarseness, enrouement. Animosity, animosity. Hooping-cough, coqueluche. Appearance, apparence. Itch, gale. Apprehension, apprehension. Itching, demangeaison. Assassination, assassinat. Jaundice, jawiisse. Assurance, insu- assiirance. Leprosy, lepre. rance, Looseness, devoiement, flux de Audacity, audace. venire. Avarice, avarice. Madness, folic, rage. Aversion, aversion. Mania, rage, manie, rage. Avidity, avidite. Measles, rougeole. Babbling, prattle, bavardage. Megrim, migraine. Boldness, hardiesse. Miscarriage, fausse-couche. Bravery, bravoure. Pain, peine, douleur. Brutality, brutalite. Pain in the bowels mal de ventre. Calumny, calomnie. Pill, pilule. Candour, candeur. Pimple, ' bouton. Capacity, capacite. Physic, m6decine. Care, soin. Plague, peste. Charity, charite. Powder, poudre. Chastity, ch as tete. Prescripfion, ordonnance. Chastisement, chatiment. Pustule, pustule. Chat, babil. Relapse, rechuie. Cheat, cheating, fraude, fourberie, Remedy, remede. trick. t7'omperie. Scar, cicatrice. Civility, civilite. Scratch, egratignure. Coarseness, grossierete, nidease. Scurvy, scorbut. Common sense, sens comrnun. Sea-sickness, mal de mer. Compassion, compassion. Sirup, strop. Complacency, condescendajice. 420 VOCABULARY— SUBSTANTIVES. Complaisance, complaisance. Ferocity, ferocity. Conception, conception. Fineness, finesse. Concord, Concorde. Firmness, fermeie. Confidence, confdence, confance. Foresight, prevoyance. Constanc}^, Constance. Forgetfulness, oubli. Contempt, mepris. Fragility, fragilite. Contentment, contentemeni. Frankness, franchise. Contract, contrat. Friendship, amitii. Coquetry, coquetterie. Fright, terror. frayeur, effroi, epou' Courage, courage. vante. Cowardice, piisillanimitt , Frugality, frugalile. Crime, crime. Fury, furie,fureur. Cruelty, cruatitt. Generosity, generositi. Cunning, ruse. Genius, g^nie. Daintiness, friandise. Gift, don. Debauchery, debauche. Gluttony, glouto7xnerie^ goitV' Defect, defaut. mandise. Deposit, trust. depot. Goodness, bonte. Despair, desespoir. Good sense. bon sens. Desire, dtsir. Good-will, benevo- bienveillance. Diligence, diligence. lence. Disagreeableness, desagrement. Grace, grace. Discouragement, dtcouragemeni. Gratitude, gratitude, reconnais- Discretion, discretion. sance. Disgust, dp gout. Grief, chagrin. Dishonesty, malhonnetete. Habit, habitude. Dishonour, deshonneur. Happiness, bonheur. Disinterestedness, dtsintei'essemeni. Haste, 'hate. Disorder, desordre. Hatred, haine. Displeasure, deplaisir. Haughtiness, hauteur, morgite. Disposition, dispositio7i. Hope, esperance, espoir. Dispute, dispute. Honesty, hoimetete. Dissension, dissension. Honour, honne.ur. Dissolution, dissolutio7i. Humility, ht/milite. Doubt, doute. Idea, idee. Drunkenness, ivresse. Imagination, imagination. Duplicity, duplicite. Imbecility, imb ceil lite. Eagerness, empressement. Immodesty, immodestie. Economy, economic. Impatience, impatience. Effrontery, effronterie. Impoliteness, iinpolitesse. Emulation, emulation. Imprudence, imprudence. Enchantment, enchantemeni. Impudence, impudence. Encouragement, encouragement. Impurity, impurete. Envy, envie. Incivility, incivilite. Equity, equite. Inclination, inclination. Error, erreur. Inconstancy, inconsiance. Esteem, estime. Indifference, indifference. Excess, exces. Indignation, indignation. Exile, exit, bannissement. Indignity, iridignite. Extravagance, extravagance. Indiscretion, indiscretion. Faith, foi. Industry, industrie. Faithfulness, fidelite.^ Ingratitude, ingratitude* Falsehood, faussete. Iniquity, iniquite. Fancy, fa7itaisie. Injustice, injustice. Fault, fauie. Innocence, innocence. Favour, faveur. Insult, insulte. Fear, veur^ crainte. Intrepidity, intrepidite. VOCABULARY.—SUBSTANTIVES. 421 Intrigue, intrigue. Prosperity, prosperite. Irregularity, dereglement. Prudence, prudence. Jealousy, jalousie. Punishment, punition. Joy, joie. Pusillanimity, pusillanimite. Judgment, jugement. Quarrel, guerelle. Justice, justice. Quickness, vitesse. Knowledge, connaissance. Raillery, raillerie. Laziness, paresse. Rancour, grudge. rancune. Liberality, liberalite. Rashness, ttmtrit^. Liberty, liberie. Reason, raison. Libertinism, libertimge. Recollection, souvenir. License, licence. Regret, regret. Lie, mensonge. Remembrance, souvenir. Lightness, Itgerete. Repentance, re pent ir. Likelihood, vraisemblanee. Reputation, reputation. Love, amour. Resentment, ressentiment. Loyalty, loijautk* Reward, recompense. Luxury, luxe. Roguery, vagabondage, fripon Magnanimity, magnanimity. nerie. Malice, malice. Rudeness, rudesse, grossieret^. Manners, mameres, mocurs. Sadness, tristesse. Manslaughter, homicide. Sagacity, sagacite. Melancholy, mtlancolie. Sale, rente. Mercy, misericorde. Satisfaction, satisfaction. Misfortune, malAeur. Science, science. Mistake, mtprise, erreur. Sense, sens. Mockery, , moquerie. Sentiment, sentiment. Modesty, modestie, pudeur. Shame, honte. Morals, moeurs, f. pi. Simplicity, simplicite. Murder, meurtre. Sincerity, sincerite. Negligence, negligence. Skill, habilete. Oath, serment. Slander, medisance. Obstinacy, opiniutrete, eniete- Slovenliness, malproprete. ment. Sobriety, sobriete. Opinion, opinion. Softness, mollesse. Outrage, outrage. Soul, ame. Pain, peine. Spirit, mind. esprit. Passion, passion. Spite, pet. depit. Patience, patience. Sport, play. badinage. Peace, paix. Story, tale. conte. Penetration, penetration. Strength, force. Perfidy, perjxdie. Stupidity, stupidite. Perjury, parjure. Subtilty, subtilite. Pity, pitit. Suspicion, soup^on. Pleasure, plaiiir. Sweetness, douceur. Politeness, politesse. Tediousness, ennm. Poltronry, poltronnerie. Temperance, temperance. Practice,. pratique. Terror, terreur. Present, present. Theft, robbery. vol. Presumption, prtsomption. Thought, pensee. Price, prix. Timidity, timidite. Pride, Jiertty orgueih Tranquillity, tranquillite. Probability, probability. Treason, trahison. Probity, probite. Trick, tour. Prodigality, p7'odigalit6. Truth, veritt. Promptitude, promptitude. Understanding, enfendement Propensity, penchant. Uneasiness, inquietude. 422 VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. Union, union. File, lime. Use, usage. Fishing, pSche. Usury, usure. Flax, lin. Valour, valeur. Flower-garden, parterre. Vengeance, vengeance. Forage, fourrage. Venom, venin. Furrow, sillon. Vice, vice. Garden, jardin. Virtue, vertu. Gardener, jardinier. Vivacity, vivacite. Gardening, jardinage. Wager, bet, gageure, pari. Grain, grain. Weakness, faiblesse. Grass, herbe. Whim, caprice, caprice. Green-house, serre. Wickedness, mechancete. Grotto, grotte. Will, volontk. Grove, bosquet. Wisdom^ sagesse. Hamper, hotte. Wish, desir, souhait, Hammer, marteau. Wit, esprit, bel-esprit. Harvest, moisson. W^rath, courroux. Hay, foin. Wrong, tort. Heart's ease. pensee. Hedge, Hemp, haie. chanvre, m. 42. Of the Country, and Things Highway, grand-chemin. belonging to the Country, ^c. House, Hunting, maison. chasse. Agriculture, agriculture. Hyacinth, jacinthe. Amaranthus, amaranthe. Ivy, lierre, m. Avenue, avenue. Kitchen-garden, jardin potaaer. Axis, axe, essieu. Lily, lis. Barley, orge. Liquorice, reglisse. Barn, grange. Manor-house, manoir, maison sei' Bower, berceau. gneuriale. Cart, charrette. Marigold, souci. Covered cart, fourgon. Marsh, 7narais. Castle, mansion. chateau. Meadow, pre, prairie. Cattle, hktail. Mill, moulin. Clown, manant. Mint, menthe. Corn, hit. Misletoe, gui. Corporation; the commune. Moss, mousse. inhabitants of a Mower, faucheur. village; the place Nail, clou. where they as- Neat villa. maison de plaisance. semble; common Nightshade, belle-de-mdt. pasture. Nursery-ground, pepiniere. Country, campagne, pays. Oats, avoine. Country-house, maisoji de campagne. Orchard, verger. Country- man. ■paysan. Pasturage, pdturage. Country-woman, paysanne. Path, sentier. Crop, recolte. Perspective, perspective. Daffodil, narcisse, m. Pigeon-house, colomhier. Dairy, laiterie. Pink, ceillet. Ditch, fosse, fosse. Pitchfork, fourche. Dunghillj fumier. Plough, charrue. Ear of corn. epi de blL Poacher, braconnier. Earth, terre. Poppy, jpavot. Farm, ferme, m6tairie. Prospect, vue. Farmer, fermier. Quickset hedge. haie vive. Field, champ. Race, course. VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 423 Rake, rdteau. Filbert-tree, avelinier. Reaper, moissonneur. Fir-tree, sapin. Rhubarb, rkubarbe. Flower, fieur. Rice, riz. Graft, greffe. Road, route, chemin. Hazel-nut-tree, coudner. Roller, rouleau. Hazel-tree, noisetier. Rose, rose. Hawthorn, aiibepine. Saw, scie. Laurel, laurter. Scythe, faux. Leaf, feuille. Senna, sene. Lemon-tree, ciironnier. .Sheaf, gerbe. Lilac, lilas. Shepherd, berger. Linden-tree, tilleuL Small wood, petit bois. Medlar-tree, ntflier. Spade, beche. Mulberry-tree, viurier. Stable, ttable, ecurie. M^Ttle-tree, myrte. Straw, faille. Oak, chene. Sunflower, soleil, tournesol. Olive-tree, Olivier. Swimming, nage. ^ Orangery, orangerie. Thatched cottage. chaumiere. Orange-tree, oranger. Tillage, husbandry, labourage. Palm-tree, palmier. Tulip, tulipe. Peach-tree, pecher. Village, village. Pear-tree, poii'ier. Vine, vigne. Plum-tree, prunier. Vineyard, . vignoble, m. Pomegranate-tree, grenadier. Vintage, vendange. Poplar, peuplier. Violet, violette. Raspberry-bush, framboisier. Waggon, voiture, chariot, char- Rose-bush, rosier. rette. Sap, seve. Walk, promenade. Seed, graine. Wateriug-pot, arrosoir. Shrub, arbrisseau. Water-spout, jet d'eau* Sprig, spray, jet. Wheat, froment. Strawberry-plant, fraisier. Wheel-barrow, brouelte. Thicket of thorns. buisson d'epines. Wheel-rut, rainure, orniere. Tlrorn, epine. Tree, arbre. 43. Of Trees, Shrubs, &c. Vein, grain. Vine, veine. vigne. Almoud-tree, amandier. Walnut-tree, noyer. Apple-tree, pommier^ Willow-tree, saule. Apricot-tree, abricoiier. Yew-tree, if- Ash-tree, frSne. icorce. Bark, Beech-tree, Box-tree, hitre. buis. 44:.Ofihediffei ent Professions y &c Branch, bough. branche, rameau. Accoucheur, accoucheur. Brier, ronce. Apothecary, apothicaire, pharma Cedar, cedre. cien. Cherry-tree, (red bigarreautier. Architect, archiiccte. and white heart,' Baker, boulangcr, boukai' Chestnut-tree, chdtaignier. gere. Currant or goose- groseillier. Barber, barbier. berry-bush. Blacksmith, forgeron. C)-press-tree, cypres. Bleacher, blanchisseur. Ebony-tree, ebtnier. Bookbinder, relieur. Elm, orme. Bookseller, hbraire. Young elm, ormeau. Bootmaker, bottler. Fig-tree, fgnier. Brewer, brasseiir, brasseuse. 424 VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. Butcher, boucher, boitchere. Labourer, manoeuvre, m. Cabinet-maker, 6htmste. Locksmith, serrurier. Carman, ckarretier. Mason, bricklayer. magon. Carpenter, chnrpentier. Master, ma'itre. Cartwright, churron. Master oflangu ages , maitre de langues. Carver, sculptor. sculptetcr. Merchant, marchand, mar- Chemist, chimiste, pharmacien. chande. Chimney-sweeper, ramoneur. Midwife, accoucheuse, sage- China-man or fa'imcier, faienciere. femme. woman. Miller^ meunier, meuniere. Clock or watch horloger, horlogere. Musician, musicien, vmsicienne. maker, Music-master, maitre de musique. Coach-maker, carrossier. Music-mistress, maitresse de musique. Cobbler, saveiier. Painter, peintre. Confectioner, confiaeur, cortfisetise ,• Paper-maker, sta- papetier. confiturier, C07ijt- tioner. turitre. Pastry-cook, putissier, patissiere. Contractor, fuurnisseur. Perfumer, parfameur, parfu- Cooper, tonnelier. meuse. Cutler, coutelier, coidelitre. Periwig-maker, perruquier, perru' Dancing-master, matt re de danse. quiere. Dancing-mistress, maitresse de danse. Philosopher,. pkilosophe. Distiller, distlUateur. Physician, mkdecin. Divine, thtologien. Plumber, plomhier. Druggist, droguiste. Potter, potier. Dyer, teinturier, teiniuritre Poulterer, poulailler. Editor, tditeur. Preceptor, prkcepteur. Engraver, graveur. Printer, imprimeur. Farrier, marechal^ferrant. Professor, pnfesseur. Fencing-master, maiire d'armes. Saddler, seltier. Fishmonger, poissonnier, poisson- Salesman, broker. fripier,fripiere. niere. School-master, maitre d^kcole ou de Founder, fondeur. pension,instituteur. Friseur, friseur, friseuse. School-mistress, maitresse d'ccole ou Fruiterer, fruitier, fruitiere. de pension, institw Furrier, fourreur ou pelle- trice. tier-fourreur. Shoe-boy, decrotteur. Gardener, jardinier, jardiniere. Shoe-maker, cordonnier. Gilder, doreur, doreuse. Sempstress, couturiere. Glass-maker, verrier. Street-porter, porte-faix. Glazier, vitrier. Steward, maitre d'hote/. Glover, gantier, gantiere. Sugar-baker, raffineur. Goldsmith, orfevre. Surgeon, chirurgien. Grammarian, grammaii'ien. Sword-cutler, fourbisseur. Grocer, epicier, epidtre. Tailor, tailleur. Gunsmith, annurier. Tallow-chandler, chandelier. Haberdasher, inercier, merciere. Tinman, ferblantier. Hair-dresser, coiffeur, coiffeuse. Turner, tourneur. Hatter, chapelier, chapeliere. Toyman, bijoutier ; tabletier, Hawker, colporteur. tabletiere. Historian, historien. Upholsterer, tapissier, iapissiere. Husbandman, tiller, laboureur. Washerwoman, blanchisseuse. ploughman, Waterman, batelier. Inn-keeper, aubergisie. Weaver, tisserand. Interpreter, inlerprete. Workman, ouvrier. Jeweller, joaiUie.r, joai/iitre. Workwoman, ouvriere. Joiner. menuisier. VOCABULARY.— SUBSTANTIVES. 425 45. A Game at Cards, 8fc. the Court-cards, les figures. the King. le roi. the Queen, la reine,la dame. the Knave, le valet. the Ace, las. the Ten, le dix. the Nine, le neuf. the Eight, le huit. the Hearts, le cceur. the Diamonds, le carrean. the Clubs, le trtjle. the Spades, le pique. Piquet, le piquet. a Counter, mijeton. Chess, echecs. a Game at chess. une par tie dechecs. a Chess-board, vn 6chiquier. a Pawn, wi pion. a Bishop, un fou. a Knight, un chevalier. a Castle or rook, une tour. a Draft-board, vn damier. Drafts, les dames. a Game at drafts, une partie de dames. a Pack of cards, vn jeu de carles. a Game at cards, une partie de cartes. Chance-play, unjeu de hn&ard. a Billiard-table, tin billard. a Game at billiards , une partie de billard a Bowling-green, un jeu de q uilles. a Game at bowls, une partie de qttdles ou de boule. 46. Of the Army, 8fc. Adjutant- general, martchal-de provisions, mimt de bouche. Quarter-master, marechal-des-lo Regiment, regiment. Sabre, sabre. Sentinel, sentinelle. Sentry-box, guerite. Serjeant, sergent. Shield, bouclier. Siege, siege. Soldier, soldat. Spy, espion. Squadron, escadron. Sword, epee. Touch-hole, lumitre. Tower, tour. Trigger, detente. 47. Of Navigation, 8^c. Admiral, amiral. Anchor, ancre. Barge, bark, barque. Boat, bateau. Cable, cable. Captain of a line-of- capitai?2e de vaisseau, battle ship, Colours, couleurs nationales. 4^6 VOCABULARY.— NAMES OF COUNTRIES. Deck, pont. Oar, aviron, rame. Flag, pavilion. Packet-hoat, paquebof. Fleet, flotle. Pilot, pilute. Frigate, fregate. Rudder, gouvernail. Harbour-master, capitaine de port. Sail, voile. Lieutenant in the lieutenant de marine. Sailor, matelot. navy, Seaman, marin. Lighter, gabare. Ship, navire^ m. Long boat, sloop, chaloupe. Steam-packet, paquehot a vapeur. Main-sail, grande voile. Surgeon, chirurgien. Mast, mdt. A transport, batiment de trans- Merchantman, tra- batiment marchand. . port. ding-vessel, 48. A List of some of the ancient and modern Names of the most re- markable Nations, Empires, Kingdoms, Provinces, Towns, Moun*- tains. Capes, Islands, Straits, Rivers, 8^c. that are not spelt alike in French and English. ABBREVIATIONS. a. adjectif. pi. pluriel. s.8c a. substantif et ad- anc. r ancien royaume. riv. riviere. jectif. e. empire. r. royaume. s/.pl. substantif feminin L ile. s. substantif. pluriel. det. detroit. •^Z- substantif femi- sm. pi. substantif masculin m. montagne. nin. pluriel. V- pays. sm. substantif mascu- V. viUe. pro. province. lin. vol. volcan. It is necessary to observe that, in the following list, according to the present method of French orthography, the words the terminations of which were formerly spelt ois, but which are pronounced (es), are now written ais : as, — Franpais (French) ; Marseillais (an inhabitant of Marseilles) : whereas those which are pronounced (oe), retain the former letters — ois: as, — Chinois (Chinese); Danois (Dane, Danish); Hongrois (Hungarian), &c. The same rule must also be observed for Christian and proper names : as, — Francois (Francis) ; Franpoise (Frances) ; Dubois (Dubois), &c. The names of kingdoms, countries, provinces, towns, &c. which end with a or burg in English, generally become French by changing a into e mute, and burg into bourg : as, — Carolina, Caroline ; Augsburg, Augsbourg, &c. Africa, Afyique, sf. Andalusia, Andaloiisie, sf. pro African, Africaiii, e, s. 8^ a. Antioch, Antioche, v. Alexandria, Aleccandrie, v. Antwerp, Anvers, sm. v. Algiers, Alger, sm. v. Apulia, La Poznlle, sf. pro. Algerine, Alg^rien, ne, s. 8f a. Arabia, Arabie, sf. pro. Alps, Alpes, sf.pl. Arabia deserta. r Arabic dtserte. America, Amerique, sf. Arabia felix. P Arabie heureuse. American, American, e, s. 8f a. Arabian, Arahe, s. 8^^ a. VOCABULARY— NAMES GF COUNTRIES. 427 Arcadia, Arcadian, Archipelago, Armenia. Armenian, Asia, Asiatic, Asspia, Assyrian, Astnrias, Athens, Athenian, Attica, Austria, Austrian, Babylon, Basil, Baltic Sea, Bavaria, Bavarian, Belgium, Bengal, Bern, Bernese, Bohemia, Bohemian, Bologna, Bordeaux, Brazil, Brazilian, Britain, Brit any, British, Briton, Brussels, Burgundy, Burgundian, Cadiz, Cairo, Calabria, Caledonia, Caledonian, Canadian, Canary Islands, Canterbury, Cape of Good Hope, Cape Horn, Cappadocia, Cappadocian, Carlisle, Carthagenian, Caspian Sea, Castile, Castilian, Chalcedonia, Champaign, China, Arcadie, sf. pro. Arcadien, ne^ s. 8f a. Ai'chipel, sm. Armtnie, sf. pro. Armtnien, ne, s. 8f a. Asie, sf. Asiutiqt/e, s. 8f a. Assyria, sf. e. Assyrien, ne, s. 8f a. Asturies,sf.pro. Athtnes, v. Athenien, ne, s. 8f a. Attiqiie, sf. pro. 8f a. Autriche, sf. e. Aidrichien, ne, s, 8f a. Baby lone, sf. v. Bas/e, V. la Baltique {mer), sf. Baviere, sf. r. Bavarois, e, s. 8^ a. Belgique, sf. pro. Bengale, sm. pro. Berne, v. Btarnais, e, s. 8f a. Bohtme, sf. r. Bohemien, ne, s. 8f a. Bologne, sf. v. Bordeaux, sm. v. Brtsi/, sm. r. Br^si/ien, ne, s. 8f a. Bretagne, sf. r. Bretagne, sf. pro, Breton, ne, s. 8f a. Bmxelles, v. Bourgogne, sf, pro. Boiirguignon, ne,s. 8f a. Cadix, sm. v. Le Caire, sm. v. Calabre, sf, pro. Caltdonie, sf. anc. r. Caltdonien, ne, s. 8f a. Canadien, ne, s. ^ a. les lies Canaries, sf. pi. Cantorbcrg, sm. v. Cap de Bo?ine Espe- ranee. Cap Horn. Cappadoce, sf. pr. Cappadocien, ne, s. 8^ a. Carlisle, v. Cart hag inois, e, s. 8f a. la mer Caspienne, sf. Castille, sf. pro. Castilian, ne, s. 8f a. Calcedoine, sf. v. Champagne, sf.pro. Chine, sf, e. Chinese, Circassia, Circassian, Coblentz, Cologn, Copenhagen, Corfu, Corinth, Corinthian, Cornwall, Corunna, Corsica, Corsican, Cossack, Courland, Cracow, Cretan, Cyprus, Cyprian, Dalecarlia, Dalecarlian, Dalmatia, Damascus, Dane, Danish, Dauphiny, Denmark, Domingo, (Saint) Dover, Dresden, Dunkirk, Dutch, Edinburgh, Egypt, Egyptian, England, English, Ephesus, Ephesian, Epidaurus, Epidaurian, Epirus, Ethiopia, Ethiopian, Euphrates, Europe, European, Finland, Finlauder, Flanders, Flemish, Florida, Frankfort, French, Friburg, Ganges, Gas cony, Gascon, Chinois, e, s. 8f a. Circassie, sf.pro. Circassien, ne, s. 4' a. Coblence, v. Cologne, v. Copenhague, v. Corfoii, sm. i. 8f v. Corinthe, sf. v. Corinthien, ne, s. 8f a, Cornouaille, sf. pro. La Corogne, sf. v. Corse, sf, i. Corse, s. Sf a. Cosaque, n. de p. Courlande, sf. pro. Cracovie, sf. v. ' Cretois, e, s. 8f a. Chypre, sf. i, Chypiien, ne, s. 8f a. Dalecarlie, sf. pro. Da/ecarlien, ne, s. 8f a. Dulmatie, sf. pro. Damas, v. Danois, e, s. 8^ a. Dauphine, sm. pro. Danemarck, sm. r. Saint-Domitigue,smA.v. Douv7-es, V. Dresde, v. Dunkerqi/e, sm. v. Hollandais, e, s. 8f a. Edimbou7'g, sm. v. Egypt e, sf pro. Egypiien, ne, s. 8f a. Angleterre, sf. r. Anglais, e, s, 8f a. Ephese, V. Ephesien, ne, s. 8f a. Epidaure, v. Epidaurien, ne, s,8f a. Epire, sm. pro. Ethiopie, sf. pro. Ethiopic?t, ne, s. 8f a. Euphrate, sm. riv. Europe, sf. Etiropeen, ne, s. 8f a. Finlande, sf. pro. Finlandais, e, s. 8f a. Flandre, sf. pro. Flamand, e, s, 8f a. Floride, sf. pro. Francfort, sm.v. ' F7'angais, e, s. 8f a. Fribourg., sm. v, Gange, sm. riv. Gascogne, sf. pro. Gascon, ne, s. 8^ a. 428 VOCABULARY— NAMES OF COUNTRIES Gaul, Gaul, Geneva, Genevese, Genoa, Genoese, German, Germany, Ghent, Glasgow, Gloucester, Granada, Greece, Greek, Grecian, Greenland, Greenlander, Guadaloupe, Guelderland, Guernsey, Guinea, Gulf of Arabia, Gulf of Bengal, Gulf of Finland, Gulf of Mexico, Gulf of Persia, Gulf of Venice, Hague, Hainault, Hamburgh, Hamburgher, Hanover, Hanoverian, Havannah, Hebrew, Hebrus, Helena, (Saint) Holland, Hollander, Holy Land, Hungary, Himgarian, India, Indian, Indies, East-Indies, West-Indies, Ingria, Ireland, Irish, Israelites, Isle of France, Italian, Italy, Jamaica. Japan, Japanese, Jew, La Gmde, sf. r. Gaulois, e, s. 8^ a. Geneve, v. Genevois, e, a. Genes, sf. v. Genois, e, s. 8f a, Allemand, e, s, 8f a. Allemagne, sf. e. Gand, sm. v. G /as cow, sm. v. Glocester, sm. v. Grenade, sf. pro. v. Grece, sf. pro. Grec, que, s. Sf a. Grotn/and, sm. Grotnlandais, e, n. de p. Guadeloupe, sf. i, Gueldre, sf. pro. Guernesey, sm. i. Guinte, sf. p. Golfe d Arabic, sm. Golfe du Bengale, sm. Golfe de Fiiilande, sm. Golfe du Mexique, sm. Golfe de Perse, sm. Golfe de Fenise, sm. La Haye, sf. v. Hainaut, sm. pro. Hambourg, sm. v, Hambourgeois, e, n, dep. Hanovre, stn. r. Hanovrien, ne, s. 8f a. La Havanne, sf. v. Hebrett, e, s. 8f a. Htbi'e, sm. riv. Sainte-Helene, sf. i. Hollande, sf. pro. Hollandais, e, s. Sf a. La Terre-Sainte,p. Hong vie, sf. r. Hongrois, e, s. Sf a. Inde, sf. Jndien, ne, s. Sf a. Indes, sf pi. Indes Orientaies, sf. pi. Indes Occidentales,sf. pi. Ingrie, sf. pro. Jrlande, sf. i. Irlanduis, e, s. Sf a. Israelite, s. Sf a. L^lle de France, sf. Italien, ne, s. Sf a. Italic, sf. r. Jama'iqtte, sf. i. Japon, sm,, e. Japonnnis, e, s. Sf a, Juif, ve, n. de p. Judea, Judee, sf. pro. Lacedemon, Lactdtmone, v. Lacedemonian, Lacedemonien,ne,s. Sfa. Lancaster, Lancaslre, sm. pro. Sf v. Lapland, Laponie^ sf. pro. Laplander, Lapon, ne,n. de p. Latin, Latin, e, s. Sf a. Leghorn, Livourne, v. Leyden, Leyde, v. Lisbon, Lisbonne, v. Lisle, Lille, V. Lithuania, Lithuanie, sf. pro. Lithuanian, Lithuanien, ne, s. Sf a. Livonia, Livonie, sf. pro. Livonian, Livonien, 7ie, s. Sf a. Lombardy, Lombardie, sf. r. London, Londres, sm. v. Lorrain, Lorraine, sf. pro. Lucca, Lucques, v. Luccese, Lucquois, e, n. de p. Luxemburg, Luxembourg, sm. v. Lyons, Lyon, sm. v. Of Lyons, Lyonnais, e, s. Macedonia, Macedoine, sf. pro. Macedonian, Macedonien, ne, s. Sf a. Madeira, Madere, sf. L Malta, Malte, sf. i. Sf V. Maltese, Maltais, e, s. Mantua, Mantoue, v. Marseilles, Marseille, v. Marseillese, Marseiflais, e, s. Sf a. Martinico, La Martinique, sf. i. Mecca, La Mecque, sf. v. Mechlin, Malines, v. Mediterranean, La Mediterranee, sf. (mer.) Mentz, Mayence, v. Mesopotamia, Mesopotamie, sf. pro. Messina, Messine, v. Mexican, Mexicain, e, a. Mexico, Mexique, sm. p. Milanese, Milanais, e, s. Sf a. Miletus, Milet, stn. v. Minorca, Minorque, i. Mogul, Mogol, sm. e. Moldavia, La Moldavie, sf. pro. Morea, Moree, sf. pro. Moor or Maur, More ; Maure, sse, s.; Moresque, a. Morocco, Maroe, sm. e. Moscovite, Moscovite, s. Moscovy, Moscovie, sf. e. Mycene, Myotnes, v. Nantz, Nantes, sm, v. Naples, Naples, sm. V. Sf r. Navarre, Navarre, r. Navarese, Navarrois, e, s. Sf a» VOCABULARY— NAMES OF COUNTRIES. 429 Neapolitan, Napolifain, e. s. 8f a. Prussian, Negro, Negre, sse, s. Ratisbon, Netherlands, Pays-bas, sm. pi. r. Rhine, Neufchatel, Neitchiife/, sm. v. Rome, New-England, Nouvelle-Angltterre^ Roman, sf. pro. Russia, Newfoundland, Terre-Neuve, sf. L Russian, Nile, Nil, sm. riv. Saguntum, Nimegnen, Nimegue, v. Salamanca, Nineveh, Ninive, sf. v. Salentum, Norman, Normaml, e, s. 8f a. Samaria, Normandy, Norma fidie, sf. pro. Samaritan, Norway, Norvtge, sf r. Santillana, Norwegian, Norvegien, ne, s. S^' a. Saracen, Nova-Scotia, Nouve//e-Ecoss€, sf. pro. Saragossa, Atlantic Ocean, Ocean Al /antique, m. Sardinia, Frozen Ocean, Mer G/acia/e. Sardis, Pacific Ocean, Oc^an Pacifque. Sardinian, Oldenburg, Oldembourg, sm. v. Ostend, Ostende,sf v. Sarmatia, Otranto, Otrante, sf. v. Savoy, Padua, Padoueysf. v. Savoyard, Palermo, Palerme, sf. v. Saxony, Palmyra, PaJmtjre, sf. v. Saxon, Pampeluna, Pampelime, sf. v. Scotch, Paris, Paris ^ sm. v. Scotland, Parisian, Parisien, ne, s. Sf a. Scythia, Parma, Panne, sf. v. Scvthian, Parnassus, Parnasse, sm. m. Black Sea, (the) Peloponnesus, Pchponnese, sm. pro. Red Sea, (the) Peloponnesian, Peiuponnesien, nc, s. S)' a. St. Sebastian, Persia, Perse, sf r. Siberia, Persian, Perse, Person, e. s.S>i'a. Siberian, Peru, Peroii, sm. p. Sicily, Peruvian, Peruvien, ne, s. Sicilian, Peters burgh, Petersbourg, sm. v. Silesia, Pharsalia, Pharsale, sf v. Silesian, Pht-nicia, P/ienicie, sf. pro. Sluys, Phenician, Phniivien, ne, s. 8f a. Smyrna, Philadelphia, Philade/phie, sf.pro.8fV. Sodom, Philippine Is- Les Philippines, sf pi. The Sound, lands, Spain, Picardy, Picardie, sf pro. Spaniard, Piedmont, Piemont, sm. pro. Spanish, Piedmontese, Piemonfais, e, s. 8f a. Sparta, Placentia, Plaisance, sf. v. Spartan, Poland, Pologne, sf. r. Straits of Dover, Polander or Pole , Polonais, e, ft. de p. the CRannel, Pomerania, Pomeranie, sf. pj'o. Straits of Gibral- Pondicherry, Pontichery, m. tar, Pontus, Pont, sm. anc. r. Strasburgh, Pontus-Euxinus, Le Pont-Euxin, sm. Suabia, {mer.) Sweden, Portuguese, Purtugais, e, s. Sf a. Swedish, Presburgh, Presboi/rg, s)n. v. Swiss, United-Provinces , Provinces- Unies, sf. pi. Switzerland, Prussia, Pi'usse, sf. i\ Syria, Pmssien, ne, s. Sf a. Rafisbonne, v. Rhin, S7n, riv. Rome, V. Romain, e, s. Sf a. Russie, sf. e. Russe, s. Sf a. Sagonte,v. Salamanqne, v. Sa/ente, v. Samarie, v. Samaritain, e, s, Santillane, sf. v. Sarrasin, e, s. Saragosse, sf. v. Sardaigne,sf. i. r, Sardes, sfv. Sarde, s. Sf a. Sardi- nien, ne, s. Sf a. Sarmatie, sf. pro. Savoie, sf pi'o. Savoyard, e, n. de p. Saxe, sf. r. Saxon, tie, s. ^ a. Ecossais, e, s. Sf a. Ecosse, sf. r. Scylhie, sf.p. Scythe, s. Sf a. la Mer Noire. la Mer Rouge. Saint-Stbastien, sm. Sibtrie, sf pro. Sib^rien., ne, s. Sf a. Sicile, sf. i. Sicilien, ne, s. Sf a. Silesie, sf. pro. Silesien, ne, s. Sf a, IJEcluse, sf. V. Smyrne, v. Sodome,sf. v. Le Si/nd, del. Espagne, sf. r. Espagnol, e, n. dep. Espagnol, e, a. Sparte, sf v. Spartiaie, s. Sf a. La Manche, sf. Le Pas de Calais, sm. Le Detroit de Gibra/^ tar. Strasbourg, sm. v„ Souabe, sf. pro. Sutde, sf r. Suedois, e, s. Sf a. Suisse, s. Sf a, Suisse, sf. rep. Syrie, sf. pro. 430 VOCABULARY— NAMES OF COUNTRIES. Syrian, Tarentine, Tarentum, Tarsus, Tartary, Tartar, TenerifFe, Terra del fuego, Terra firma, Thames, Thelaaid, Thetan, Thebes, Thermopylae, (de- file,) Thracia, Thracian, Tigris, Tyber, Toledo, Trent, Triers, Trinidad, Syrien, ne, s. ^ a. Tarentin, e, s. 8^ a. Tarente, v. Tarse, v. Tartaric) sf. p. Tart are, s. Sf a. Ttntriffe, sf. i. Terre-de-feu, sf. Terre-ferme, sf. pro. Tamise, sf. riv. Thebdide, sf pro. Th6bain, e, s. ^- a. Thebes, v. Thermopyles, sf. pi. Thrace, sf. pi. Thrace, s. 8f a. Tigre, sm. riv. Tibre, sm. riv. Tolede, v. Trente, v. Treves, v. La Trinite, sf. i. Trojan, Troy, Tuscan, Tuscany, Turk, Turkish, Turkey, Tyre, Tyrian, United-States, Valencia, Venetian, Venice, Vesuvius, Vienna, Virginia, Wales, Warsaw, Welsh, Westphalia, Wiburg, Wolfenbuttel, Xanthus, Zealand, Troyen, e, s. Sf a. Troie, v. Toscan, e, s. 8f a. Toscane, (Etru7^ie,)sf.r. Turc, que, s. ^ a. Turquie, sf. e, Tyr, V. Tyrien, ne, s. 8^ a. Etats- Unis, sm. pi. Valence, v. Feniiien, ne, s. Sf a. Venise, sf. v. Pesuve, sm. vol. Fienne, sfv. Virginie, sf. pro. Le Pays de Galles, pro. VarsQvie, v. Gallois, e, s. 8f a. Westphalie, sf. pro. Wibourg, sm. v. Wolfenbuttel, sm. Xanthe, sm. riv. Ztlande, sf. pro. 49. Adjectives and Participles. The letter e and the syllables che.> le, ne, se, te, ve, &c. which come after the following adjectives and participles, denote their feminine; whereas the adjectives which end with e mute are of both genders. A few substantives which convey peculiar significations in their meaning, so as to be nearly considered as adjectives, have been inserted in the following list : — Abominable, Abortive, Abundant, Absent, Abstinent, Abstracted, Absurd, Acceptable, Accessible, Accidental, Accommodating, Accomplice, Accountable, Accustomed, Acid, Active, Actual, Adjoining, Admirable, Adoptive, Adorable, abominable, abortif, ve. abondant, e. absent, e. abstinejit, e. abstrait, e. absurde. acceptable, abordable, accessible, accidentel, le. accommodant, e. complice, comptable. accoutiim6, e. acide. actif, ve. actuel, le. joignant, e. admirable, adoptif, ve. adorable. Adulterated, Adulterous, Advantageous, Adverbial, Adverse, ethereal, Affable, courteous, good. Affected, Affectionate, Affirmative, Afflicting, Aforesaid, Aged, old, Agile, nimble. Agreeable, Alarming, Alert, Almighty, Alivcj adulter^, e;falsife, €. adultere. at*nntageux, se. adverbial, e. adverse, aerien, ne. affable, d6bonnaire. affecte,e; recherchf,f affectionne, e. affirmatif, ve. affligeant, e. sttsdit, e. ag6, e. agile. agreable. alarmant, e. alerte. tout-puissant, tottte- puissante. vif, ve. VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 431 Aloue_, sole. seul, e. Bald, chauve. Allegorical, alltgorique. Banishable, bannissable. Allowable, admissible. Baptismal, baptismal, e. Alphabetical, alphabetique. Barbarous, barbare. Ambiguous, ambigu, e. Base, vile, low^ has, basse. Ambitious, ambitieux, se. Bastard, hdtard, e. Amicable, amical, e. Beastly, bestial^ e. Amusing, amusant, e. Beggarly, indigent, e ; gueux. Analogical, analog iqne. se. Analogous, analogue. Beloved, bien-aime, e. Anarchic, anarchique. Benevolent, bienfaisant, e. Ancient, ancien, ne. Benign, benin, btnigne. Angelical, angtlique. Big, large. gros, grosse. Anglican, anglican, e. Bigot, h^-pocrite, bigot, e. Angry, sorry. fdche, e. Bilious, bilieux, se. Animal, animal, e. Billowy, . houleux, se. Animated, anime, e. Bissextile, bissextil, e. Anniversary, amiiversaii'C. Bitter, amer, amtre.. Annual, annuel, le. Bituminous, bitumineux, se. Anonymous, anonyme. Black, noir, e. Antique, . antique. Blameable, blumable. Apostolic, apostolique. Blameless, irr'eprochable. Apparent, apparent, e. Blasphemous, blasphematoire. Applicable, applicable. Blessed, be nit, e; beni, e; Apt, fit, apte, propre. ■ bienheureuX) se. Aquatic, aquatique. Blind, aveugle. Arbitrary, arbitraire. Bloody, sanglant^ e. Archiepiscopal, archiepiscopal, e. Blooming, fleuri, e. Arctic, arctique. Blue, bleu, e. Ardent, ardent, e. Blunt, over hasty. brusque. Arid, aride. Bold, resolute. hardi, e ; delibere, e. Aristocratical, aristocralique. Boorish, coarse, gi'ossier, grossitr-e. Arrears, (in) arriere, e. Brave, spruce, brave. Arrogant, arrogant, e. Brawling, braillard, e. Artificial, artijiciel, le. Brief, href, ve. Ash- coloured. cendre, e. Brisk, fringant, e. Assiduous, assidu, e. Broad, large. Assuming, arrogant, e; entre- Broken, casse, e ; fracture, e. prenant, e. Brotherly, fraternel, le. Atrocious, atroce. Brown, bis, e ; brun, e. Attentive, attentif, ve. Brownish, brufiet, ie. Attracting, attrayant, e. Brutish, brutal., e. Audacious, audacieux, se. Buffoon, ■ houffon, ne. August, auguste. Burlesque, burlesque. Auricular, aimculaire. Burning, brxdant, e. Austere, austere. Busy, occupe, e ; affaire, e. Authentic, authentiqiie. Candid, candide. Aivkward, unhandy, maladroit, e. Capable, capable; comp6tent,e. Auxiliary, auxiliaire. Capital, capital, e. Avaricious, covet- avaricieux, se; avare. Capricious, capricieux, se. ous. Captive, captif, ve. Avoidable, tvitable. Careful, soigneux, se. Awful, i?)iposant, e. Carnal, charnel, le. Azure-coloured, azure, e. Carnivorous, carnassier, carnaS' Babbler, bavard, e. siere. Bad, mauvaiSj e. Catholic, catholique. Baked, cuit, e. Celestia], celeste. 432 VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. Central, Ceremonious, Certain, Changeable, variable. Charming, Chaste, Chatterer, Cheat, Cheerful, Chemical, Childish, Chilled, Chilly, ^ Chimerical, China-like, Christian, Circumspect, Civil, Clandestine, Clear, \ Clear-sighted, Clement, Clever, Close, tight, Coarse, Cold, Coloured, Combustible, Comical, Commendable, Commodious, Common, Communicative, Compact, Comparable, Compassionate, Competitor, Complaisant, Complete, Complicate, Comprehensible, Conceivable, Condemnable, Conditional, Confident, Confidential, Confiscable, Conformable, Confounded, Confuse, Conjugal, Considerable, central, e. ceremonieux, se ; fa- gonnier,fagotmitre. certain, e. changeant, e, charmant, e. chaste, habillard, e. fourhe. enjoue, e ; riant, e. chimique. enfantin, e ; pueril, e. transi, e. frileux, se. chimeriqve, fa'ience, e. Chretien, ne. circonspect, e. civil, e, clandestin, e; fi^rtif, ve, clair, e. clairvoyant, e. clement, e. habile. serr3, e. gros, se; grassier, grossiere. froid, e. colore, e, combustible, comique. lovable, commode, commun, e. communicatif^ e. compacte. comparable, compatissant, e. concurrent, e. complaisant, e. complet, complite. compliqut, e. compr6hemible, concevable. condamnable. conditionnel, le, confident, e. conjidentiel, le, confiscable, conforme. confondu, e; inter- dit, €. confius, e. CO ijugal, e, considerable. Consoling, consolant, e. Constant, constant, e. Consumptive, consomptif, ve ; pid- vioniqne. Contagious, contagieux, se. Contemporary, contemporain, e. Contemptible, contemptible; mipri- sable. Contented, content, e ; satisfait, e. Contiguous, contigu, e; attenant,e. Continual, continuel, le. Contradictory, contradictoire. Contrary, contraire. Contrite, contrit, e. Convalescent, convalescent, e. Convenient, suit- convenable. able. Cool, fresh. frais, fraiche. Cooling, rafraichissant, e. Coquet, coquet, te. Corporeal, corporel, le. Correct, co7'rect, e. Correspondent, correspondant, e. Corrigible, corrigible. Corruptible, corruptible. Costly, couteux, se. Courageous, courageux, se. Cottonous, cotonneiix, se. Covered, convert, e. Covetous, avide. (toward, Idche. Cowardly, poltron, ne; pusil- lanime. Credible, croyable. Credulous, cridule. Criminal, criminel, le. Crimson, cramoisi, e. Critical, critique. Crooked, cmrbe, e ; tortu, e. Cruel, cruel, le. Cultivable, cultivable. Cunning, sly. iMse, e; artificiei/x. Curable, guerissable. Curious, curieux, se. Cursed, maiidit, e. Customary, ordifiaire. Daily, journalier, journa- liere ; quotidien, ne. Damaged, avarie, e. Damnable, damnable. Damp, humide. Dangerous, dangereux, se. Dazzling, eblouissant, e. Dead, deceased. mort, e ; defunt, e. Deaf, sourd, e. Debauched, dtbaucht, e. VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 433 Decayed, Deceitful, Deceiving, Decent, Decisive, Decrepit, Dedicatory-; Deep, Defamatory, defa- ming, Delicious,delightful Deplorable, Descended, issued, Desert, Desirable. Desirous,. Despaired, Despotic, Destitute, Detained, Determined, Detestable, Devilish mad, Devout, Dextrous, Diabolical, Different, Difficult, Diffident, distrust- ful. Diffuse, Dilatory, Diligent, Direct, Disadvantageous, Disagreeable, Disciplinable, Discordant, disso- nant, Discovered, Discreet, Disdainful, Disgraceful, Disguised, Disgusted, out of conceit with, Disgustful, Dishevelled, Dishonest, Dishonourable, Disinterestedj Dismal, Dismayed, Disobedient, Disobliging, Disorderly, Dissatisfied, caduc, caduque. tro7npeur, se. decevant, e, decent, e. dccisif, ve. decrepit, e. dedicatoire. fonce, e. dijfamalo'ire, diffa- mant, e. , de/icieux, se. deplorable, issit, e. desert, e. desirable, desireux, se. desespere, e. despotique. destiiue, e. detenu, e. determine^ e, detestable, endiable, e. devot, e. adroit, e. diabolique. different^ e. difficile, defiant, e. diffiis, e, dilatoire. dili(je)d, e. direct, e. dl'savuntageux, se. desagreable. disciplinable. discoi\lant, e. decouvert, e. discret, discrete, dedaigneux. se. disgracieux, se. degidse, e; travesti, e. degoide, e. degoidant, e. t'chevele, e. deshonnete. deshonorable. desinttresse, e. affreiix, se ; luguhre, eperdif, e. desobeissant, e. desobligeant, e, dtregle, e. mecontent. e. Dissolute, Distinct, Diverting, Divine, Docile, Doleful, Domestic, Double, Doubtful, Dramatic, Dreadful, Droll, funny. Drunk, drunken, Dry, Due, owing, owed. Dull, gloomy, Dumb, Dusk, dark, Dying, Eager, Early riser, Eas}', Easy to be known again, Eatable, Eater, Echoing, Economical, Edifying, Educated, Effem.inate, Efficacious, Elastic, Eldest, Electric, Elegant, Elementary. Eligible, Eloquent, Embroidered, Emigrated, Eminent, Enclosed, Energetical, Engaging, Enormous, Entire, whole,. Envious, Epic, heroic. Epidemical, Episcopal, Epistolary, Equal, Equitable, dissolu, e, distinct, e. divertissofit, e. divin, e. docile, higubre ; douloureux ^ se. domestique. double, douteux, se. dramatique. epouvantable. drule, ivre, enivrt, e, seCfSeche. du, e. sombre, morne. ymiet, te. obscur, e. agonisant, e; mou.. rant, e. empressi, e, matineux, se ; mati- nal, e. aise, e ; faci'e. reconnaissable. mangeable. mangeur, se» resonnant, e. economique, ediftant, e. ttevt, e. effemine, e. efficace. elastique. mne, e. electrique, elegant, e. eltmentaire. eligible, eloquent, e. brode, e. tinigre, e. tminent, e. inc. I us, e. energique. engageant, e. t nor me. entier, en fie re. envieux, se. e pique, herdique. tpidemique. episcopal, e. (•pisto/aire. eg at, e. equitable. U 434 VOCABULARY.- ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. Equivalent;, tquiv Client, e. Ferruginous, ferrugineux, se. Eqiiivocal, equivoque. Fertile, fertile. Erroneous^ err one, e. Fervent, fervent, e. Essential, essentiel, le. Fetid, fetide. Estimable, estimable. Feverish, fevreux, se. Eternal, kernel, le. Fierce, feroce. Evangelical, evangtlique. Fiery, fouguenx, se. Even, smooth, uni, e. Figured, figure, e. Evident, evident, e. Filial, filial, e. Exact, exact, €. Filthy, crasseux, se. Exacting, exigeant, e. Final, final, e. Excellent, excellent., e. Fine, fin, e; beau, bel, belle. Excessive, excessif, ve. Firm, ferme. Excommunicated, excommunie, e. First, premier, premiere. Excusable, excusable. Fit, propre, convenable, Execrable, execrable. expedient, e. Exemplary, exemplaire. Fixed, fixe. Exempt, exempt, e. Flattering, fiatteur, se ; cares- Exorbitant, exorbitant, e. sant, e. Expeditious, expeditif, ve. Fleshy, charnu, e. Expensive, dispendieiix, se. Flexible, flexible. Expired, echu, e. Flourishing, florissant, e. Explicable, explicable. Fluid, _ fluide. Explicit, txplicite. Fluttering, fretillant, e. Express, expres, expresse. Foamy, ecumeux, se. Expressive, expressif, ve. Following, suivant, e. Exquisite, exquis, e. Foolish, silly, sot, te. Exterior, exterieur, e. Fordable, gutable. External, day- externe. Foregoing, antecedent, e. scholar. Foreign, stranger, etrangere. Extinct, extinguish - tteint, e. Formal, formel, le. ed, put out, Former, preceding precedent, e. Extraordinary, extraordinaire. Formidable, formidable, redout' Extravagant, extravagant, e. able. Extreme, extreme. Fortuitous, fortuit, e. Fabulous, fabuleux, se. Fortunate, fortune, e; heureux, Fair, blond, e. se. Faithful, . fidtle. Forward, precoce. Fallible, faillible. Fovil, dirty. sale. Fallow, foiive. Fragrant, odoriferant, e. False, faux, fausse. Frail, brittle. frele, fragile. Familiar, familier, familiere. Frank, franc, franche. Famished, • affame, e. Frantic, frenetique. Famous, fameux, se; ce'lebre. Fraudulent, fraziduleux, se. Fanatic, fanatique. Free, libre. Fantastical, whimsi- fantasque, bizarre. Frequent, frequent, e. cal. Friendly, bon, bonne ; ami, e. Fat, gras, grasse. Frightful, affreux, se ; epou- Fatal, fatal, e ; funeste. vantable. Fatiguing, fatigant, e. Frivolous, frivole. Favourable, favorable. Frothy, mousseux, se. Fearful, peureux, se ; craintif, Frozen, glacial, e. ve. Frugal, frugal, e. Feasible, faisable. Fruitful, fecond, e. Feeble, weak. faible, debile. Fugitive, fugitif, ve. Feigned, feint, e. Full, plein, e. Feminine, feminin, c Fundamental, fondamental, e. VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 435 Funereal, funebre. Heretical, heretique. Furious, furieux, se. Heroic, hero'ique. Furnished, meuble, e ; garni, e. Hideous, hideux, se. Furred, foimr, €. Hilly, montagneux, se. Futile, trifling, futile. Historical, historique. Future, futur, e. High, kazit^ e. Gaitered, guelre, e. Hoarse, enroue, e. Gallant, galant, e. Holy, saiftt., e. General, general, e. Hollow, creux, se. Generous, genereux, se. Honest, homiete, inttgre. Geograpliical, geogi-aphique. Honourable, honorable. Geometrical, geometrique . Horrible, horrible. Gigantic, colossal, e; gigantes- Hostile, hostile. que. Hot, warm, chaud, e. Giddy-brained, evapore,e; etourdi, e. Humble, humble. Glad, aise, ravi, e. Human, humain, e. Glittering, reluisant, e ; resplen- Hunchbacked, voiite, e ; bossu, e. dissant, e. bvmchbacked, Gloomy, tenebreux, se. Hurtful, nuisible,prtjudicxable. Glorious, glorieux, se. Hypocritical, hypocrite. Glutton, gluttonou z,gloiiton, 7ie ; gour- Ideal, idtal, e. mand, e. Idiot, idiot, e. Good, bon, bonne. Idle, oisif, ve. Gothic, Gothique. Idolatrous, idoldtre. Gouty, goutteux, se. Ignominious, ignominieux, se. Graceful, gracieux, se. Ignorant, ignorant, e. Grammatical, grammatical, e. Ill-afFected, malintentionnt, e. Grateful, reconnaissa/it, e. Illegitimate, illegitime. Grave, grave. Illustrious, iUustre. Greasy, graisseux, se. Imaginable, imaginable. Great, main, grand, e. Imbecile, imbecile. Greedy, avide. Imitable, imitable. Green, vert, e. Imitated, imite, e; contrefait,€ Grey, gris,e. Immense, immense. Greyish, grisdtre. Imminent, imminent, e. Grievous, mortijiant, e; acca- Immoderate, immodtre, e. blant,e; desolant,e. Immodest, immodeste, impu- Grumbling, grandeur, se. dique. Guilty, coupable. Immoral, immoral, e. Guttural, guttural, e. Immortal, immorfel, le. Habitable, habitable. Immoveable, immobile. Habitual, habituel, le. Impartial, impartial, e. Haggard, wild, hagard, e. Impatient, impatient, e. Half, demi, e. Impenetrable, impenetrable. Hanging-matter, pendable. Impenitent, impenitent, e. Happy, heureux, se ; aise. Imperative, imptratif, ve. Hard, dur, e. Imperceptible, imperceptible. Harmonious, harmonieux, se. Imperfect, imparfait, e. Harsh, rough. dur, e ; rude. Imperious, imperieux, se. Hateful, hdissable. Impertinent, impertinent, e. Haughty, altier, altiere ; kau- Imperturbable, imperturbable. iain, e. Impetuous, impetueux, se. Hazardous, hasardeux, se; ris- Impious, impie. quable. Implacable, implacable. Heaped, comble, € ; comble. Impolite, impoii, e. Heavy, lourd, e ; pesant, e. Important, import 0711, e. Hereditary, hereditaire. Impossible, impossible, u2 435 VOCABULARY.—ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. Impracticable, Impregnable, Improbable, Improper, Imprudent, Impudent, Impure, Inaccessible, In a hurry, Inanimate, Inattentive, Incalculable, Incapable, Incombustible, Incomparable, Incompatible, Incomplete, Incomprehensible, Inconceivable, Inconsiderate, Inconsistent, Inconsolable, Inconstant, Incontestable, Inconvenient, Incorrect, Incorrigible, Incorruptible, Incredible, Incredulous, Incurable, Indebted, Indecent, Indefinite, Indelible, Independent, Indefatigable, Indifferent, Indirect, Indiscreet, Indispensable, Indisposed, Indissoluble, Indivisible, Indolent, Indubitable, Indulgent, Industrious, Ineffable, Inept, Inestimable, Inexcusable, Inexhaustible, Inexorable, Inexplicable, impraticahle. imprenable. improbable, impropre. imprudent, e. impudent, e. impur, e. inaccessible, inabord- able, presse, e. inanimt, e. inattentif, ve. incalculable, incapable, incombustible, incomparable, incompatible, incomplete incomplete, incomprehensible, inconcevable. inconsidere, e. inconsequent, e. inconsolable, inconstant, e. incontestable, incommode, incorrect, e. incorrigible, incorruptible, incroyable. incrtdule. incurable, redevable. indecent^ e. indefini, e. ineffagable. independant, e. infatigable. indifferent, e. indirect, e. indiscret, indiscrete, indispensable, indispose^ e. indissoluble, indivisible. i?idolent, e. indubitable, indulgent, e. industrieux, se. ineffable, inepte. inestimable, inexcusable, inl'puisable, intaris- sable. inexorable, inexplicable. Inexpressible, Infallible, Infamous, Infected, Inferior, Infernal, Infinite, Infirm, Inflammable, Inflammatory, Inflexible, Ingenious, Inhuman, In imaginable. Inimitable, Iniquitovis, Injurious, Innocent, Innumerable, Inodorous, Insatiable, Insensible, Inseparable, Insignificant, Insipid, Insolent, Insolvent, Instructive, Insupportable, Insurmountable, Intellectual, Intelligent, Intelligible, Intemperate, Intentional, Interesting, Interior, Internal, Interrogative, Intimate, Intolerable, Intrepid, Intrinsic, Invalid, Invariable, Inveterate, Invincible, Inviolable, Invisible, Involuntary, Invulnerable, Irascible, Ironical, Irrational, Irr-econcileable, Irregular, inexprimahie. infaillible. infame. infecle, e ; infect, e. inferieur, e. infernal, e. infini, e. infirm e, inflammable.' inflammatoire. inflexible, ingenieux, se. inhumain, e. inimaginable. inimitable, inique. injurieux., se innocent, e. innombrable. iiiodore. insatiable, insensible, inseparable, insignifiant, e. insipide. insolent, e. insolvable. instructif, ve. insupportable, insurmontable. intellectuel, le. intelligent, e. intelligible, intemphant, e. intentionnel, le. intl'ressant, e. intl'i'ieur, e. interne. interrogatif ve. intime. intolerable, intrcpide. intrinseque. invalide. invariable, invetere, e. invincible, inviolable. i?zvisible. involontaire i?ivulncrable. irascible, ironique. irrnisonnable. irrvconciliable, irrl'gulier, irregw Here. VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 437 Irreligious, irrtligieuxj se ; inde- Low, has, basse. vot, e. Loyal, loycd, e. Irremediable, irremediab/e. Lucrative, lucratif, ve. Irreparable, irreparable. Lunatic, lunatique. Irreproachable, irreprochable. Mad, fou,folle ; forccni, e ; Irresistible, irresistible. enrage, e. Irresolute, irresolu, e. Magic, magique. Irrevocable, irrevocable. Magnanimous, magnanime. Irritable, irritable. Magnificent, magnijique. Jealous, jaloiix, se. Maimed, estropie, e. Jeerer, jester, moqueiir, se; railleur, Majestic, majestueux, se. se. ]\Iaritime, maritime. Jocose, jovial. jovial, e ; badin, e ; Marshy, matrcageux, se. folatre. Material, matey iel, le. Joyful, joyous, joyeux. se. Maternal, maternel, le. Judicious, judideux, se. Mechanical, ■machinal, e. Juridical, jnridique. Melancholic, mtlancolique. Just, juste. Melodious, melodieux, se. Justifiable, justijiable. Melting, fondant, e. Killing, tuant, €. Memorable, memorable. Kind, bon, ne. Merciful, misericordieux, se. Knowable, con?missuble. Merciless, impitoyahle. Laborious, laboriet/x, se. Mercenary, mercenaire. Lame, estropie, e; boiievx, se. IMeritorious, meritiire. Lamentable, /omeiifable. Merry, gai, e. Lascivious, Inscif, ve. A merry person, tin gaillard ou une Last. dernier, demicre. gaillarde. Lasting, durable; permanent, e. Minor, under age. mineur, e. Late, tardif,ve; feu.ftue. Minute, minutieux, se. Laudable, loiiable. Miraculous, miraculeux, se. Lawful, permis, e; legal, e. Mired, embourbe, e. Lazy, slothful. paresseux, se; faint- Mirj, fangeux, se. ant, e. IMischievous, malin, maligne. Lean, thin, 7naigre. Miserable, miserable. Learned, savant, e ; docte. Misshapen, difforrne. Least, moindre. Moderate, mo'Jere, c ; modique. Left, awkward, gcatcke. Modern, moderne. Legitimate, legitime. Modpst, mr.rlfsle. Liar, menteur, se. Momentary, momentane, e. Liberal, Id/eral, e. Monotonous, vionotone. Licentious, licencieux, se. Moral, moral, e. Like, alike, equal, pareil, le ; ressem- Monstrous, monstrueux, se. blant, e; set?iblable. Morose, cross, hourru,e ; chagrin, e. Likely, probable. probable, vraisemblable Mortal, morfel, le. Light, leger,legere. Mortifying, morlijiant, e. Lighted, eclaire, e ; illumint, e. Mountaineer, montagnard, e. Limpid, limpide. Moveable, mobile. Liquid, liquide. Moving, attendrissant, e. Literal, littei'al, e. Muddy, botn-beux, se. Little, petit, e. Mulatto, muldtre. Livid, livide. Musician, musicien, ne. Lively red. vermeil, le. Mutinous, mutin, e. Loathsome, dtgoutant, € ; rebu- Mutual, viutuel, le. tant, €. Mysterious, mysttrieux, se. Lonely, isolc, e. Naked, nu, nue. Long, long, longue. Narrow-minded, borne, e. Lost, perdu, e» Natal, natal, e. 438 VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PAKTICIPLES. Native, Natural, Navigable, Neat, clean, Njeeessaxy, Negligent^ Neighbouring, Nervous, Neuter, New, Next, Nice, delicate, Niggardly, Noble, None, not one, Northern, Notable, eminent, Not knowable. Notorious, Not used. Numerous, Obedient, Obliging, Obstinate, infatua- ted, headstrong. Ocular, Odious, Odd, not even. Offensive, Of three colours. Official, Officious, Old, One-eyed, Onerous, One who has a title, litre, e. Only, sole. unique. Open, ouveri, e. Oppressive, oppressif, ve. Ordinary, usual, ordiyiaire. Oriental, oriental, e. ■ Out of breath, pant- essovfle, e. natif, ve. naturel, le. navigable. net, nette. necessaire. 77tgligent, e. voisin, e. nerveux.^ se. neutre. nouveaif, nouvel, le ; neuf, ve. prochai)i, e; suivatit, e. delicat, e. 7nesqm?i,e; chiche. noble. aucim, e ; mil, nulle. septentrional, e, notable, eminent, e. meconnaismhle. notoire, manifeste. inusite, e. nombreiix, se. obeissant, e. obligeant, e. obsline, e ; entete, e; opiniatre. ociila ire. odievx, se. impair, e. offensant, e. tricolore. officiel, le. officievx, se. vieux, vieil, vieille. horgne. oncreux, se. Out of favour. Out of work, Outrageous, Pacific, Pagan, Painful,' Pale, Palpable, Paralytic, Pardonable, Particular, nice, disgracie, e. desoeuvre, e. outrageant, e. pucijique. pdien, ne. pmible, douloureux, se. ptde. palpable, paralytique. pardonnable. particulier, parti- cu!itre.~ Passable, tolerable, Passenger, Passionate, Past, Paternal, Pathetic, Patient, enduring, Patriotic, Payable, Peaceable, Pecuniary, Pedantic, Penetrable, Penitent, Pensive, Peopled, Perceptible, Perfect, Perfidious, Perilous, Periodical, Pernicious, Perpetual, Perplexing, Personal, Persuasive, Pestilential, Philosophic, Piercing, Pious, Pitiable, Plausible, Plaintive, Poetical, Pointed, Poor, Polite, Political, Pompous, Portable, Popular, Populous, Positive, Possible, Powerful, Practicable, Precarious. Precious, Precipitated, Precise, Preferable, Preliminary, Premature, Present, Pressing,. Presumptive, passager, passagere. passionne, e; colere } emporte, e. passe, e. paternel, le. pathetique. patient, e; endurant,e. patriotique. payable, paisible. pecuniaire. pedan tesque; pedant^, penetrable, penitent, e. pensif, ve. pevple, e. perceptible. parfait, e ; acheve, e. perjide. peril leux, se. periodique. pernieieux, se. perpetuel, le. emburrassant, e* personnel, le*. persuasif, ve. pestilentiel, le. philosophique. pergant, e. pieux, se. pitoyable. plausible. plaintif, ve. poetique. pointu, e. pauvre. poll, €. politique. pvtnpeux, se. portatif, ve. populaire. populeux, se. positif, ve. puissa?it, e. praticahle. precaire. precieux, se. prtcipite, e. prtcis, e. preferable, preliminaire. premature, e. present, e. pressant, e. pr'esomptif, ve. VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 439 Presumptuous, presomptueiix^ se. Representative, representatif, ve. Pretty, joli, e. Reproachful, reprochable. Principal, principal, e. Repugnant, repugnant, e. Privileged, privilegie, e. Requisite, requis, e. Prodigal, profuse, prodigue. Reserved, reserve, e ; retenu, e. Prodii,^ious, pi^odigieux, se. Resolved, resoht, e. Profane, profane. Resounding, resonnatit., e ; reten- Profitable, profitable. tissant, e. Profound, profond^ e. Respectable, respectable. Progressive, progressif, ve. Respectful, respectueux, se. Proper, propre. Respective, respectif, ve. Prophetical, prophetique. Responsible-, responsable. Propitious, propice. Restive, retif, ve. Proportionate, proportionne, e. Retired, retire, e. Proverbial-, proverbial, e. Revengeful, vindicatif, ve. Provisional, provisvire. Revolutionary, revolutionnaire. Provident, prevoyant., e. Rich, opulent, riche, opulent, e. Provoking, confrariant, e ; fa- Ridiculous, ridicule. cheux, se. Rigid, rigide. Proud, haughty, 07-gueilleux, se ; Jter, Rigorous, rigoureux, se. fiere. Riotous, turbulent, e ; iumul- Pmdent, prt/dent, e. tueux, se. Public, public, publique. Risible, risible. Punctual, ponctuel, le. Rival, competitor, rival, e ; competitettr. Putrid, puiride. Robust, robusle. Quarrelsome, qrterelleiir, se. Roguish, coquin, e. Quick, prompt, e. Romantic, romaniique ; roman- Quiet, tranqinllp. esque. Radiant, rayonnant, e. Round, rond, e. Radical, radical, e. Rough, raboteux.se i brui,e; Rainj-, pluvieux, se. rude. Rapid, rapide. Royal, royal, e. Rare, 1-are. Runaway, fnyard, e. Rash, temeraii'e. Rustic, rural. rustique, champetre. Raw, cru, e. Rusty, rouille, e. Ready, pret, e. Sacred, sacre, e. Reasonable, raisonnable. Sacrilegious, sacrilege. Real, reel, le. Sad, dull, trisfe. Rebel, rebellious, rehelle. Safe, sai/f, ve. Recent. recent, e. Salted, sale, e. Reciprocal, reciproqiie. Salubrious, salubre. Red, rouge. Salutary, salutaire. Reddish, 7-0 iu\ 7-omse, rouge- Sandy, - sablonneux, se. litre. Sanguinary, sanguinaire. Refined, raffine^ e. Satin-like, satine, e. Regent. regent, e. Satiric, satirique. Regular, regulier, reguliere. Satisfactory, satisfaisant, e. Relative, i-e/atif, ve. Savage, sauvage. Relaxed, re f ache, e. Saving, ecoyiome,epargnant, e. Religious, ?'eligieux, se. Scandalous, scandaleux, se. Remarkable, remarqnable. Scattered, epars, e. Remote, eloigne, e. Scientific, scientifique. Renowned, renommL e. Scorbutic, scorbutique. Reparable, reparable. Scrupulous, scrupuleux, se. Repentant, repentant, e. Secondary, secondaire. Replete, replet, replete. Secret, secret, secrete. Reprehensible, rtpreherisible. Sedentary, sede7itaire. 440 VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. Seditious, seditieux, se. Solemn, solennelf le. Seducing', seduisant, e. Sohd, solide. Seigneurial, seigneurialy e. Solitary, solitaire. Selfish, interesse, e. Solvent, solvable. Senseless, insensc, e. Somniferous, assoiipissant , e. Sensible, sensible, sense, e. Sonorous, sonore. Sensitive, sensii'if, ve. Soporific, soporijique. Sensual, sensuel, le. Sordid, mean, vile, sordide, vil, e ; chetif, Sentimental, sentimental, e. ve. Sejiarated, divided. sepai'e, e. Sorry, angry. fache, e. Serene, serein, e. Sound, sain, e. Serious, serieifx, se. Sour, aigre. Serviceable, serviable. Sovereign, souverain, e. Servile, servile. Spacious, spacieux, se. Sewed, COUSU, €. Sparkling, etincelant, e. Severe, sevh-e. Special, special, e. Shameful, honteux, se. Specific, specijique. Shameless, effronte, e ; eliont'e, e. Specious, specieux, se. Sharp, acute, aigu, t J degourdi, e ; Spiritual, spirihiel, le. tranchant, e. Splendid, splendide. Shining, gliitering, brillajtt, e ; kclatant. Spongy, spongieux, se. € ; lidsant, e. Spotted, moucheie, e. Shocking, ■ choquant, e. Spread, etendii, e. Short, court, e. Sprightly, eveille, e ; espiegle. Sick, ill. malade. Spruce, brave, brave. Sickly, grahataire. Stagnated,standing, croifpissant, e. Signalized, signale, e. Stale, rassis, e. Significative, significatif, ve. Starry, etoile, e. Silent, silencieux, se ; taci- Stationary, stationnaire. turne. Steep, escarpe, e. Silly, simple. niais, e ; sot, sotie. Stereotype, stereotype. Silvered, argentl', e. Sterile, barren. sttrile. Simple, simple. Stiff, raide ou roide. Sincere, s 1710 ere. Stingy, chiche. Singing, chaniant, e. Stony, pierreux, se. Singular, singulier, singuliere. Stormy, orageux, se. Sinister, dnisfre. Strange, Strange. Skilled, versed, habile ; versQ, e. Strengthening, fortijiant, e. i Skittish, shy. ombrageiix, se. Strict, strict, e. Slavish, assiijetlissant, e. Striking, fruppant, e. Slender, thin, onince. Strong, fort, e. Slippery, glissant, e. Strolling, ambulant, e. Slow, lent, e. Sullen, pouting, boudeur, se. Sluttish, malpropre. Square, carre, e. Sly, cunning. ruse, e. Studious, studieux, se. Smarting, ciiisant, e. Stunning, ttourdxssant. e. Smitten, epris, e. Stupid, stiipide, h^bete, e. '■ Smoking, fumanf, e. Stupified, stupefait, e. Snotty, morveux, se. Subject, sujet, te. Sober, sobre, frugal, e. Sublime, sublime. ^ Social, social, e. Substantial, substantiel, le. Sociable, sociable. Subterranean, souterrain, e. Soft, nice. douillet, te ; man, Subtle, szibtil, e. molle. Such, like, tel, telle. Softening, adoucissant, e. Succulent, succulent, e. Solar, solaire. Sudden, soudain, e ; suUt, e. Sole, alone. seul, e. Suflerable, souffrable. VOCABULARY.— ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 441 Sufficient, Suffocating, Suitable, Sultry, Sunk, immersed. Sumptuous, Superb, Superficial, Superfluous, Superior, Supernatural, Superstitious, Supportable, Supposed, Supreme, Sure, Surprising, Susceptible, Suspected, Suspicious, Sweet, Sweetish, Sworn, Talkative, Tanned, Tardy, late. Tawny, Technical, Tedious, tiresome. Temperate, sober. Tempestuous, Temporal, Tempting, Tender, Terrestrial, Terrible, Testamentary, Theological, Thickset, bristly, Thick, Thin, slender, Thirsty, Thorny, difficult. Threatening, Tight, close. Ticklish, Timid, Tired, Tolerable, Total, Trading, siiffisant, e. suffoquant, e. convenable. etoi/ffant, e. enfonce, e. somptueuxj se. superbe. svperficiel, le. superjliiy e. supkr'ieur, e. surnaturel, le. siiperstitien.r , se. supportable, suppose, e; pre- tendu, e. supreme, sur, sure, surprenant, e. susceptible. soupconn6, e; s7/s- pect, e. soup^onneux, se. doux, douce ; sucr6, e. douceatre ; douce- reux, se. jure, e. causeur, se ; par- leur, se. hull', e. tardif, ve. basane, e. technique, ennui/eux, se. iemperant , e. iempeslucux, sc. temporel, le. tenta?it, e. iendre. tcrrestre. terrible, iestamentaire. theologique. herisse, e. tpais, se ; trouble, e. wiuce. altn-v, e. tpineux, se. mena(^ant, e. tonjiant, e; foudro- ycint, e. serrt, e. chatouilleux, se. timid e. fatigue, e ; las, lasse. tolerable, passable, total, e. comm€r(^ant) e. Tragic, Transferable, Transparent, Treacherous, Trembling, Triumphant, Trivial, Troublesome, True, Trusty, Tufted, Tumultuous, Turbulent, Turkish, Turned away, out of the way, Twisted, Typographical, Tja-annical, Ugly, Unanimous, Unavoidable, Uncertain, Uncivil, Uncultivated, Undecipherable, Undetermined, Uneasy, Unequal, Unexpected, Unfaithful, Unfavorable, Unforeseen, Unfortunate, Ungovernable, Ungrateful, Unheard of, Unhappy, Uniform, Uninhabitable, Uninhabited, Unintelligible, Universal, Unjust, Unknown, Unlawful, Unmatched, Unmoveable, Unnatural, Unpardonable, Unprovided, Unreasonable, Unruly, untractable, Unsalted, freshened, Un sewed, trajique. transmissible, transparent, e. trattre, traitresse. tremblant, e. iriomphant, e. trivial, e ; commun, e. importun, e; genant, e. vrai, e ; veritable, qffide, e. touffu, e ; htippt', e. tumultueux, se. turbulent, e. Turc, Turque. dctourne, e. tors, e ; tort, e. fypographique. tyj'anniqite. laid, e. vnanime. inevitable. incertain, e. incivi.', e. inculte. vuU'chiffrable. indeterminc, e. inquiet, inqinete. inigal, e. inattendu, e. injidele. dt'favorable. imprlvu, e. infortunc, e. ingouvernable. in g red, e. inon'i, e. malheureux, se. uniforme. inhabitable. inhabite, e. inintelligible. i(mversel, le, iyijuste. inconnu, e. illicile. depareille, e. immobile. denature, e. impardomiable. depourvu, e. deraiso7inable. indocile, indiscip'ina-. ble. dessalc, e. decousif, e. 442 VOCABULARY.— VERBS. Unskilful, mulhabile. Waggish, frolick- goguenard, e ; es- Unwise, irreflechi, e. some, . piegle. Unwholesome, malsain, e. Walker, vnarcheur, se. Umvorthy, indigne. Wandering, eg are, e ; errant, e. Urgent, urgent, e. Warlike, guerrier, guerriere. Used, haUlu'e, e ; accou- Warrantable, soutenable. tum'c, e. Wearable, meltable, portable. Useful, ntile. Weary, tired. ennuyc\ e. Useless, inutile. Weekly, hebdomadaire. Usual, nsiiel, le ; ordinaire. Welcome, bie?ivem/, e. Vacant, vacant, e. Western, occidental, e. Valiant, vaillant, e. Wicked, mechant, e. Variable, variable. Wild, sativage, farouche^ Vast, vaste. hagard, e. Venerable, venerable. Wise, sage. Veridical, vendiqtie. Whipt, fouett'e, e. Versed, skilled. verse, e. Whole, pure, intact, e. Vicious, viciei/x, se. Wonderful, etomiant, e. Victorious, victorieux, se. Worldly, mondain, e. Vigilant, vigilant, e. Worthy, dig?ie. Vigorous, vigourenXy se. Woven, tisstf, e. Violent, violent, e. Winding, tortueiix, se. Virtuous, vertneia, se. Yearly, annuel, le. Visible, visible. Yellow, janne. Visionary, visionnaire. Yellowish, jamiatre. Voluminous, vohimineuXi se. Young, youthful. jeiine. Voluptuous, voluptueux, se. Zealous, z'el'e, e. Of Verbs. The prepositions which some of the following verbs govern before their indirect objects in French have been affixed to each of those verbs; whereas the verbs which are commonly used without any preposition after them will be found without any in the following list. to Abandon, abandonner, a. to Accommodate s' accommoder, de. to Abate, rabuttre. one's self. to Abdicate, abdiquer. to Accompany, accompagner. to Abhor, abhorrer. to Accomplish, accomplir. to Abjure, abjurer. to Accost, accoster, aborder. to Abolish, abolir. to Accustom OTie's s'accoutumer, a. to Abound, abonder, en ; affluer. self, to Abridge, abrtger. to Accumulate, accmnuler. to Absent one's self s'absenter, de. to Acquire, acqutrir. to Absolve, absoudre, de. to Acquit, aequitter. to Abstain, to re- s'abstenir, de. to Acquit one's self, s'acquitter, de. frain from. to Accuse, accuser, de. to Abuse, abuser. to Act, agir. to Accelerate, accel(:rer. to Add, ajouter, a. to Accentuate, accent uer. to Addict one's self. s^adonner, a, vaquer,a. to Accept, accepter. to Address, adresser, a. to Accept of, agrcer. to Adjourn, to put ajowner, a. to Accommodate, accommoder. off. VOCABULARY.—VERBS. 443- to Adjudge, to Adjust, to Administer, to iVdmire, to Admit, to Adopt, to Adore, to Adorn, to deck, to Adorn one's self, to Adulterate, to Advance, to go on, to Advise, to Affect, to soften, to be Affected, to Affirm, to Afflict, to Afford, to Affiont, to face, to Aggravate, to Agitate, to Agree, to suit, to Aim, to aim at, to Air, to divulge, to Alarm, to Alienate, to Allege, quote, to Allure, to entice, to bait, to Alter, to change, to Alter the nature, to Amalgamate, to Amuse one's self, to Amount, to Analyse, to Anatomise, to Anchor, to be Angry, to Animate, to Annihilate, to Announce, to Annul, to Answer, to Anticipate, to Apostatise, to Apostrophise, to Ajipear, to Appear again, to Appease, to Applaud, to Apply, to Apply one's self. adjitger, a. ajuster. administrer, admirer. admettre. adopter. adorer. orner, de ; parer, de. se parer, de. adulterer. avancer. conseiller, a, de. affect er, attendrir, s'attendri): afffirmer. affliger, attrister. avoir hs moyens, de. affronter, braver. ag graver. agiter. convenir, de. viser, a ; coucher en joue. tventer. alarmer. alihier. alltguer. allkcher, amorcer, attraire, a. alttrer, changer, dtnaturer. amalgamer. s^amuser, a, monter, se motiter, a. analyser, anatumiser. ancrer. se fdcher, de, con- tre, pour ; s^offen- ser, de. animer, a. aneantir. annoncer, a. a??m//er. repondre, a, de. anticiper. apostasier. apostropher. paraitre, apparai- tre, a. reparaitre. apaiser, appiaiidir, §.. s^adresser, a; qi/er, a, sur. s^app/iquer, a. appli- approuver. vouter. argaer, argumenter. armer. s'armer, de. s'arrier'er. to Appraise, ^valuer, a; to Appreciate, apprecier. to Apprehend, apprehender. to Approach, to draw approcher, s' appro* near^ cher, de. to Appropriate to s'approprier. one's self, to Approve, to Arch, to vault, to Argue, to Arm, to Arm one's self, to be in Arrears, to Arrange, to ma- arranger. nage, to Arrest, arreter. to Arrive, to happen, arriver. to Arrive at, to at- parvenir, a. tain, to Arrogate to one's s'arroger. self, to Articulate, articuler. to Ask too much, surfaire. to Ask questions, questionner. to Asperse, to slan- dinigrer. der, to Aspire, to Assault, to Assemble, to Assemble again, to Assign, to Assist, to relieve to Assure, to insure, assurer. to Astonish, etoujier. to Attack, uttaquer. to Attempt, to tempt, alt enter, a aspirer, a. assai//ir. assembler, se r assembler. assigner, a. assister ; snhven ir, a , tentei\ to Attest, to Attract, to draw, to Attribute, to Augment, to in- crease, to Augur ate, to Authorise, to Avoid, to Avow, to own, to Awake, to rouse, to Bail, to Bait, to allure, to Bake, to cook, to Ballast, to Ballot, to Banish, to Baptize, to Baptize again, to be in Barracks, to Bar, to Bark, attester. attirer, a. attribuer, a. aifgmenier. augurer. auioriser, a. tviter, esqiiiver. avouer, a. kveiller., reveiller, de. cauliomier. amorcer. citire. tester. ballolter. exiler. bannir, de. haptiser. rebaptiser. caserner. , barrer, a. aboyer, japper. 444 VOCABULARY.— VERBS. to Barricade, harricader. to Bathe, baigner, se baigner, to Beat, baitre. to Be, to belong, etre, a. to be Better, se porter mieux. to be Brought to accoucher. bed, to Become, devenir. to Become cool, se refroidir. to Become green reverdir. again, to Become man, ^incamer. to Become liquid, se liquejier. to Become milder s''adoucir, se rado2(cir. and sweeter, to Become young rajeunxr, again, to Beg, demander faumbne, ■mendier. to Begin, commencer^ a, de ; dtbuter. to Begin again, recommencer^ a. to Beget, frocreer. to Behave, se cornporter, se don- diiire. to Behead, decapiter. to Be in vain, avoir beau. to Believe, croire. to Bellow, beugler. to Belong, appartenir, a, de. to Bend, to tend, to bander, tendre, plier, fold, to bov/, courber. to Bequeath, /eguer, a. to Besiege, assicger. to Bespeak, to \\bxq fair ef aire. made, to Besprinkle, asperger. to Bet, to lay, g^ger, parier. to Betray, trahir. to Betray one's self, se trahir. to Bethink oaae's self, s'aiiser, de. to Betroth, fiancer. ■ to Beware, prendre garde, a; se do7i7ierde garde, de. to Bewitch, ensorceler, to Bind, Her, relier. to Bind one's self, se Her, de, avec. to Bind, astreindre, s'ast^'ein- dre, a. to Blacken, noircir. to Blame, blamer, de. to Blaspheme, blasphtmer. to Blaze, Jlamber. to Bleat, beler. to Bless,^ feeniV. to Bleed, saigner. to Blind, to dazzle, avettgler. to Blossom, to flou- j^e2mr. rish, to Blossom again, refleurir, to Blow, soujfler, venter. to Blow, to Bloom, s''6panouir. to Blow the horn, corner. to Blow one's nose, se movcher. to Blunt, tmousser. to Boast of, se vanter, de. to Boil, bouilHr. to Boil again, rebouiUir. to Bolt, verroniller, fermer au verroi/. to Bombard, bombarder. to be Born, jiaitre, de. to Borrow, emprunter, a.. to Bound, to limit, borner. to Bound, to re- bondir, rebondir. bound, to Bow down, to sUncHner. stoop, to Brand, noter dHnfamie. to Brave, braver. to Bray, braire. to Break, to dash, casser, briser, se bri- to shatter, ser, rompre, fra- casser. to Breakfast, dvjeuner. to Break loose, se dechatner, contre. to Break open, enfoncer. to Breathe, respirer. to Brew, brasser. to Brick, briqueter. to Bridle, brider. to Bring, amener, apporter, a, de. to Bring back, 7'amener, rapporter, a, de. to Bring forth, mettre bas. to Bring ill-luck, porter malheiir, a. to Bring upon one's ^attirer. self, to Brood, to set on, couver. to Bronze, bronzer. to Browse, braider. to Bruise, froisser, meurtrir. to Brush, brosser,vergeter. to Bubble up, houillonner. to Buckle, boucler. to Budge, to stir, bouger, de. to Bud, to shoot, bourgeonner. to Build, batir, construire. to Build again, rebdtir, reconstruire. to Burn, brider, de. to Burnish again, rebriniir. to Burst, tclater, crever, to Bury, enierrer. VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 445 to Butter, heurrer. \ to Circumcise, clrconcire. to Button, boutonner. to Cite, to quote. citer. to Buy, acheter, a. to Claim, rtclamer. to Cabal, cabaler. to Clap, battre des mains, ap- to Cadence. cadencer, plaudir. to Cajole, cajoler. to Clarify, clarijler. to Calculate, calculer. to Class, classer. to Call, appeler. to Clean, to Cleanse;, nettoyer. to Call back, rappeler. to Clean one's self. se dkcrasser, se net- to Calm, calmer. toyer. to Calumniate, calomnier. to Clear, to get clear j dtbarrasser, de. to Cancel, canceller. to Clear the table. desservir. to Cannonade, canonner. to Clear up, s'tclaircir. to Capitulate, capituler. to Cleave, to split. fendre. to Captivate, captiver. to Climb, grimper, a. to Care for. se soucier, de. to Cling, se cramponner, a. to Caress, caresser. to Clothe, habiller, vetir, revetir. to Carry, porter, a. to Coalesce, se coafker. to Carrj-, to take emmener, emporter. to Coast along, coloyo.r. away, to Coin, battre monnaie, mon- to Carrj-, to take remmener, r empor- iiayer. back. ter, reporter, a. to Cohabit, cohabiter. to Carry, to convey , voiturer. to Collar, colleter. to Carry off, enlever, a. to Collate, c.ollationner. to Carve, to cut up, decotiper. to Collect, recueillir, ra^semhler. to Case, to pack up. encaisser. to Colour, colurer, colorier, en- to Cast again, refondre. luminer. to Cast up. additionner, chiffrer. to Comb, feigner. to Catch, attraper. to Comb one's head , se peigner. to Catechise, cattchiser. to Combine, combiner. to Cease, cesser, de. to C(mie, venir, a, de. to Ceil, plafonner. to Come back, revenir. to Celebrate, ctltbrer. to Come down, descendre. to Cement, cim enter. toCome down again , 7-edescendre. to Censure, censurer. to Come near, approcher, s'aupro- to Certify, certifier. c/ier, de. to Chain, enchahier. to Come to one's se reciteillir. to Change, changer. self again. to Change again. rechanger. to Come to prefer- parver.ir, a. to Characterise, caracitriser. ment, to Charm, charmer. to Command, to or- CG7nmander, a, de. to Chase, to carve. ciseler. der, to Chastise, chatter. to Comment, com7}ienttr. to Chatter, to prat- babi/ler, j'aser. to Commit, cominettre. tie. to Commit one's se co77wiettre. to Cheapen, marcha7ider. self, to Cheat, tricher, fourber, to Commit to rediger. tromper, friponner. writing, to Check, to repri- iancer, rtprimander. to Commiserate, compatir, a. mand, to Commute, commuer, en. to Cherish, chtrir. to Compensate, cojnpenser, de. to Chew, mdcher. to Compile, conpi/er. to Chill, transir. to Complain, se plaindve, de. to Chime, carillonner. to Complete, completer. to Chip, dtgrossir. to CompHment, complimoder, sur. to Choose, choisir. to Comply with, se prefer, a ; conde- to Circulate, circider. to condescend to , scendre, a. 446 VOCABULARY.— VERBS. to Compose, to Compose one's self, to Compose again, to Comprehend, to Compress, to Compromise, to Compromise one's self, . to Conceal, to Conceive, to Concentrate, to Concern, to Conciliate, to Conclude, to Concur, to Condemn, to Conduct, to Confer, to Confess, to own, to Confide in, to Confine, to Confine one's self, to Confirm, to Confiscate, to Conform one's self, to Confound, to Confront, to Confuse, to per- plex, to Congeal, to Congratulate, to Conjecture, to Conjugate, to Conjure, to Conjure up, to Conquer, to Conquer one's ■ self, to Consecrate, to Consent, to Consider, to Consider where one is, to Consign, to Consist, to Console, to com- fort, to Console one's self, to Consolidate, to Conspire, to plot, to Constitute, composer, se composer.- recomposer. comprendre. compnmer. Gompromettre. se compromettre. cacher, taire. concevoir. concenirer. Goncerner. concilier. conclnre. concourir, a, avec, pour. condamner, a. condidre, a. confh'er. confesser, a. se conjier, a. conJiner,\, avec, dans. se confiner, dans. confirmer. confisquer. se conformer, a. confondre. confronter. emhroinller, brouiller. conge ler, se congeler, sefger. ft licit 67', de. conjecturer. conjuguer . conjurer^ de. ^voquer. conquerir. se vainer e soi-meme. C07isacrer. conseniir, a, consider cr. s' orient er. consigner, a. consister, en, dans. consoler, de. se consoler, de. consolider. conspirer, comploier, contre. constitiier. to Constrain, to Construct, to Consult, to Consume, to Consummate, to Contain, to Contemplate, to Content, contruindre,^,^ de. eonstruire. Gonsulter. consumer. oonsomm,er, (ionienir. contemplen contenter. to Content one's self, se contenter, de. to Contest, to con- ooniester. tend, to Continue, ooniinuer, a, de. to Contract, contracter. to Contradict, coniredir€,contrarier. to Contrast, contraster. to Contravene, to contrevenir, a. infringe, to Contribute, contribuery a. to Control, controler. to Converse, converser, avec. to Convert, convertir, a. to be Converted, se convertir, a. to Convince, convcdncre, de. to be Convinced, se convaincre, de. to Convoke, convoquer. to Coo, roucouler. to Cook, cuire. to Cool, refroidir, ti6dir, to Co-operate, cooperer. to Copj'^, copier. to Cord, corder. to Correct, corriger, de. to Correct one's self, se corriger, de. to Correspond, correspondre, avec. to Corrupt, corrompre. to Cost, couter, a, de. to Cough, tousser. to Count, to depend compter, compter, s\xx. on, to Count again, to Counterfeit, to Countermand, to Countermine, to Countersign, to Cover, to Cover again, to Cover one's self, to Covet, to Crack, to Crackle, to Crawl, to Create, to Credit, to Creep into, to Criticise, to Croak, to Cross, recompter. contrefaire. contremander. contreminer. contresigner. couvrir, de. 7'ecouvrir, de. se couvrir, de. convoiter. craquer. pitiller. ramper. creer. crediter. s'insinuer, dans. critiqt/er. croasser. traverser, croiser. vocabulary::— VERBS. 441 to Crown, coiironner. to Define, definir. to Crucify, crucifier. to Defraud, frauder. to Cruise, croiser, sur, dans. to Defray, defrayer. to Cru>.h, tcraser, sous, de. to Defy, to chal- defer, de. to Cry down, dt crier. lenge. to Cry out. to ex- crier, s^ecrier. to Degenerate, deg'emrer, en. claim, to Degrade, degrader. to Cry up, jtroner, prtconiser. to Deify, deifier. to Cudgel, bdtonner. to Deign, daigner. to Cuff; to box. soiiffleter. to Delay, to go toe retarder, turder, a. to Cultivate, cultiver. slow. to Curdle, cailler. to Delegate, to ap- deleguer. to Cure, gi/l'vir, de. point, to Cure a cold, d6senrhinner. to Deliberate, deliherer. to Curl, /riser. to Delight in, se plaire, §-. to Curry, Qtriller. to Deliver, to free. delivrer, de. to Curse, mcaidire. to Deliver up. livrer, abandonner, a. to Cut down a ship, raser tin vaissem. to Deliver one's self se livrer, a. to Cut, to hew. coi/per, taifler. up, to Cut off". amjMter, traneher, a. to Demand, to ask. demander, a. to Cut the throat, i'goraer. to Demolish, demolir. to Dally, to toy. foldtrer. to Demonstrate, dl'inontrer, a. to Damn, damner. to Denote, denoter. to Dance, danser. to Deny, to abjure. nier, denier, renier. to Dare, oser. to Deny one's self. se refuser, a. to Darken, obscurcir. to Depend on. dependre, de. to Dart, darder. to Depict, depeindre. to Date, dater. to Depose, deposer, contre. to Daub, to scribble , harhouiller. to Deplore, deplorer. to Daub one's face, se harhouiller. to Deprave, depraver. to Dazzle, eblouir. to Depreciate, deprtcier. to Debate, debattre. to Deprive, priver, de. to Debauch, dcbaucher. to Deprive one's self , se priver, de. to Decamp, dccamper. to Depute, deputer, ii. to Decant, decanter, ii'ansvaser. to Derange, deranger. to Decay, dcp6rir, dechoir. to Derogate, deroger, a. to Decease, to die. deceda; mourir. to Describe, deer ire, depeindre. to Deceive, di'cevoir. to Deserve, me}-ifer, de. to Decide, decider, a, de. to Design, to denote , designer, destiner, ^. to be Decided, se decider, S.. to destinate. to Decipher, dci hiffrer. to Desire, desire r, de. to Deck, to adorn. parer, de. to Desist, to give se dcsister, de ; se de- to Deck or adorn se parer, de. over, to recede partir, de. one's self. from. to Declaim, declamer. to Desolate, desoler. to Declare, declarer, a. to Despair, dksesp'erer, de. to Decline, decliner. to be I3riveu to de ■ se desespirer. to Decorate, decorer. spair, to Decrease, decroi(re. to Despise, mepriser. to Decree, to ordair I, decreter, d'ecerner. to Destroy, detruire. to Dedicate, dedier, a. to Detail, detainer, a. to Deduct, to de- deduire, de. to Detain, detenir. duce, to Detect, deceler. to Defame, diffamer. to Deter, to turn detourner, de. to Defend, d^fendre, a, de. aside. to Defend one's self, se dtfendre, de. to Determine, determiner, se deter- to Defer, to peld. deftrer, a. ininer, a. de. 448 VOCABULARY.--VERBS. to Determine pre- preciser. to Disengage, to degager. cisely, clear. to Detest, dkester. to Disfigure, dejtgurer. to Dethrone, detroner. to Disgrace, disgracier. to Detract, to detracter. to Disgrace or to s'avi/ir, se disgracier. slander. vilify one's self. to Deviate, devier, smearier, de. to Disguise, deguiser^ travestir. to Devote, dhouer, a. to Disguise one's se deguiser, se tra- to Devote one's self se devouer, a, pour : self, vestir. se voiier, se con- to Disgust, degoxitet', de. sacrer, a. to Disgust one's self , se degoider, de. to Devour, devorer. to Dishonour, dishonorer. to Dictate, dieter, a. to Disinherit, desheriier. to Die, mourir, de. to Dislocate, disloquer. to be Dying, se monrir. to Dismast, dlmdter. to Dig, bicker, creuser. to Dismember, dlmemhrer. to Digest, dicjcrer. to Dismiss, congldier. to Dig out of the deterrer. to Dismount, dlmonter. grave. to Disobey, dlsoblir^ a. to Dilapidate, dilapider. to Disoblige, dlsobliger. de. to DifFer, to delay, differer, a, de. to Disorder, derlgler. to Dilute, to soften delayer^ dktremper. to Disorganise, dl'sorganiser. steel. dans. to Disown, to dis- dlsavouer. to Diminish, to dlminuer. avow. lessen, to Dispatch, dlpecher, expldier, &. to Dine, diner. to Dispeople, dlpeitpler. to Dip, to soak, to tremper, dans. to Dispense with, dispenser, se dispen- steep. ser, de. to Direct, diriger. to Disperse, disperser. to Dirt, sa/ir, crotter. to Displace, deplacer. to Disaccustom se dcsaccouttmer, de. to Displant, dl planter, deployer. one's self, to Displaj', to Disagree, disconvenir, de. to Displease, deplaire, a. to Disa.ppcar, disparaitre. to Dispose, disposer, de. to Disapprove, dhapproKver. to Dispossess, dlposseder, de. to Disarm, dharmer. to Dispossess one's se dessaisir. de. to Disburse, debourser. self, to give up. to Discern, dlscerner, de. to Dispute, dispidcr. to Discipline, discipliner. to Dissatisfj', mtcontenter. to Discolour, dccolorer, dtteindre. to Dissect, disseqner. to Discompose, decomposer. to Dissemble, dissimuler. to Disconcert, deconcerler. to Dissipate, dissiper. to Discontinue, disconiifiner, de. to Dissolve, dissoudre. to Discount, escompter. to Distil, distiller. to Discourage, discourager. to Distinguish, distingner, de. to be Discouraged, se discourager, se to Distinguish one's se disthigtier, par. rebutcr. self, _ to Discourse, discoiair. to Distribute, distribi/er, a. to Discover, dlcoKvrir. to Dissuade, dissuade r, deconseil- to Discover one's se decmvrir, a. ler, de. self, • to Disunite, desunir. to Discredit, dccrlditer. to Disuse one's self, se dlshahituer, de. to Discuss, discuter. to Divert, di sir aire, de; divert ir, to Disdain, dldaigner, de. de. to Disembark, dlbarquer, a, sur. to Divert one's self. se divertir, de. de. to Divert one's me- se dt'semuiyer. to Disenchant, dlsenchanter. lancholy. VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 449 to Divide, to Divorce, to Divulge, to Do again, to Do ill, to Doat, to Dogmatise, to Domineer, to rule, to master, to Double, to Doubt, to Do without, to Drain, to dry up, to Draw, to sketch, to DraAV, to drag away, to Draw near again, to Draw, to shoot, to fire, to Draw up, to Dress a wound, to Dress one's head, to Dress one's self, to Dread, to Dream, to Drink, to Drink one's health, to Drink tea, to Drizzle, to Drive out, to Drop, to Drown, to Drown one's self, to Dry, to wither, to Dupe, to Dust, to brush, to Eat, to Eclipse, to Economise, to Edge, to border, to Edify, to Efface, to strike out, to Elbow, to Electrify, to Elect, to Elude, to Emanate, to Emancipate, to Embalm, to Embark, to Embarrass, to Embarrass one's self, to Embellish, diviser, en. divorcer. divulguer. refaire. malfaire. radoter. dogmatiser. domiiier, mintriser. douhler, en. douter, de. se passer, de. desshher. dessmer, crayonner. trainer, entrahier. rapproeher, de. tlrer. piiiser, a, dans. panser. se coiffer. s'liabil/er. redouter. rever, songer, a. hoire, a. porter tine safitc, a, prendre le the. bt-uiner. dcbusquer, de. dcgoutter, de. noyer. se noyer. sccher. duper. i'pousseter, brosser. manger. (■clipser, s'cclipser. economiser. border. edijier, effacer, de. coudoyer. electriser. elire. eluder. Imaner, de. emanciper. embaumer. embarquer, s^embar- quer. embarasser, s^embai-rasser, de, dans. embellir. to Embolden, to Embrace, to Embroider, to Embroil, to Emigrate, to Employ, to use, to Employ one's self, to Empty, to Encamp, to Enchant, to Enclose, to Encoiu-age, to Encumber, to Encroach, to End, to Endeavour, to Engage, to Engage one's self, to Engrave, to Enjoin, to Enjoy, to Enrol one's self, to Enlist one's self, to Enliven, to Ennoble, to Enrich ones self, to Entangle one's self, to Enter, to go or come in, to Entertain, to maintain, to keep, to Entice, to aUure, to Entitle, to Entreat, to Enumerate, to Envelope, to wrap up, to Envenom, to Environ, to sur- round, to Envy, to Equal, to Equip, to Erase, to scratch, to Erect, to Err, to wander,' to Escape, to Escort, to Establish, to Esteem, to Eternise, enhardir. embrasser. broder. hrouiller. l^migrer, de. employer. s' employer, a, pour. vider, se vider. cai?iper. enchanter, fasciner. enclorre, de. encourager, a. encomhrer, de. empiker, sur. aboidir, a. t acker, a, de ; s'effor- cer, de ; s'ktidier, S. engager, a. s"" engager, a, dans. buriner, graver, enjoindre, a. jouir, de. s'enrdler, dans. s'enrufer, dans, (gayer, ennablir, anoblir, s'enrichir, s^ntortiUer, s^empe- trer, s'embarrasser, dans. entrer, dans. entretenir. atfirer, amorcer, iniitider. supplier, de. i'ntimh'er. envelopper, de, dans, envenimer. environner, de. envier ; porter envie, a. t'ga/er. eqtdper. effacer, de; raiurer, rayer. (triger, a. errer. echapper,^,; s'cchap- per, de ; se sauver, de. escorter. vtahlir. estimer. eterniser. 450 VOCABULARY.^VERBS. to Evacuate, . dvacuer. to Evaporate, evaporer, s'evapore?'. to Exact, exiger, de. to Exaggerate, exagerer. to Exalt, to extol, exalter. to Examine, examiner. to Exhaust, epuiser. to be Exhausted, s' epuiser, en. to Exceed, exceder. to Excel, exceller, en, dans, par. to Except, excepter. to Except against, reciiser. to recuse, to Exchange, echanger, contre. to Excite, exciter, a. to Exclaim, s' eerier; se r eerier, contre. to Exclude, exdure, de. to Excommunicate, excommunier. to Exculpate, disculper,se disculper. to Exculpate one's se justijier, de. self, to Excvise, excuser. to Excuse one's self, s^ excuser, de. to Execute, executer. to Exempt, exempter, de. to Exercise, exercer. to Exercise one's s* exercer, a. self, to Exert one's self, s'evertuer. to Exhale, to hreathe exhaler,s^exha/er,en. out, to Exhort, exhorter, a. to Exist, exister. to Expatriate, expatrier. to Expect, attefidre, de. to Expel, expu/ser, chasser, de. to Experience, eprouver. to Experiment, experimenter. to Expiate, expier. to Expire, expirer. to Expire, to fall echoir. due, to Explain, expliquer, a. to Explore, explorer. to Export, exporter. to Expose, exposer, a, en. to Expose one's self, s'exposer, a. to Express, exprimer, to Express one's s^exprimer, s^'enoncer. self, to Extend, to spread, etendre, s'etendre. to Extenuate, extenuer. to Exterminate, exterminer. to Extinguish,. to put eteindre. out. to Extirpate, • extirper. to Extort, extorquer, ai. to Extract, ■ ex tr aire, de. to Extravagate, extravaguer. to Extol, vanter. to Eye, to view, to envisager. , consider, to Facilitate^ faeiliter, a. to Fade, to wither, fletrir, se Jikrir, se to decay-, ternir. to Fail, faillir,defaillir; man' quer, a, de. to Faint, to vanish sevanouir. away. to Fall, tomber, de, par, sut^ en, dans. to Fallback, reculer. to Fall down, to give s''ecrouler. ■way, to Fall upon, sejeter, sur. to Fall asleep, s^e7xdormir. to Fall asleep again, se rendormir. to Falsify, to Falter, to stam- mer, to Familiarize one's self, to Famish, to starve, to Fancy, falsifier, se troubler. se familiar iser, avec. affamer. sefgurer, sHmaginer, se reprhenter. affermer. to Farm, to Fashion, to polish, /«fo?^?^er, to Fast, jeiiner. to Fatigue, to tire, fatiguer, de. to Fathom, to Fatten, to Favour, to Fear, to Feast, to Feather, to Fecundify, to make fruitful, to Feed, to Feed upon, to Feel, to resent, toiser. engraisser. favoriser, craindre, de. festiner. -emplumer, s^emplu- mer. feconder. pattre. se repattre, de. ressentir; se ressen- tir, de. sentir. toucher, tater. to Feel, to smell, to Feel, to touch, to Feel one's way in tatonner. the dark, to Feign, feindre, faire sent blant, de. to Ferment, fermenter. to Ferret, to search, /wre^er. to Fertilize, fertiliser. to Fetch, qukrir. VOCABULARY .—VERBS. 451 to Fight, to File, to Fill, to fill up, to Fill, to satiate, a, en, to Filtrate, to Find, to Find again, to Find one's self, to be found, to Finish, to Fish, to Fix, to Flatter, to Flatter one's self, se flatter, de. to Flank, flunqner, de, to Fling, to dart, to lancer. launch, to Float, to flue- flatter, ba/ancer. tuate, to Flock in crowds, s'attrotiper. to Flourish, to bios- fleurir. som, eombattre, se battre, avec. livier. emp/ir, renvplir^ de. rassasier, se rassasier, de. flJtrer. trouver, a. retrouver. se trouver dans. finir, achever. pecker, flxer. flatter, de. to Flow, to Flutter about, to Fly, to shun, to Fly away, to Foam, to^skim, to Follow, to Follow, to ensue, to Foment, to Forage, to Forbear, to Forearm, to Force, tq Foresee, to Forfeit, to tres- pass, to Forge, to invent, to Forget, to Forget one's self, to Form, to frame, to Forsake, to Found, to ground to Foretell, to Fortify, to Foul, to defile, to Freeze, to Freeze again, to Freight, to Frenchify, to Frequent, to Freshen, colder', voltiger. fuir, eviter, voler. s'eiwoler. tcumer. sidvre. s''ensinvre, de. fomenter. fourrager. s''empecher, se retenir, se dispenser, de. se prtmunir, contre. forcer, a, de. prevoir, pressentir. forfaire, a. forger, invent er. oub/ier, a, de ; dts- apprendre. s^oiib/ier, se mecon- nattre. former. de/a isser,aban donn e r. , fonder, predire, a. fortifler, de. souiler,se souii/er,de. ge/er, glaeer. regeler. frtter. franciser. frequenter, hanter. fraichir. to Fret, to Fret and fume, to Frighten, to Fringe, to Froth, to foam, to Frown, to Fructify, to Frustrate, to Fry, to Fulminate, thunder, to Fumigate, to se chagriner, de ; &e depite'r, contre. fulminer. effrayer, epoztvanter. franger. moKsser, moutonner. se rider, se refrogner. fructifier. frustrer, de. frire, fricasser. fulmiyier, foudroyev* fiimiger. to Fur, to stuff with, fourrer, de. to Furbish, to Furnish, to Furnish again, to Gallop, to Gambol, to Gangrene, to Gather, to Garden, to Gauge, to Gesticulate, to Get again, to Get, to gain, to win, to Get off clear, to Get one's self ready, to Get rid of, to Get the start, to Gf t tipsj^, to Get weary or tired, to Gild, to Gird, fviirbir, polir. foi/rnir, garnir, meu' bier, refuiirnir, r eg amir, remeubler. galoper. gambader. se gangrmer. cneillir, ipercevoir. jardiner. jauger. gesticuler. ravoir. gagner. se tirer, de ; se dt' meler, de. se disposer, a ; se pre- parer, a. se difcnre, de. prendre les devanfs. s'enivrer. s''ennu!/er, de. do}'er. ceindre, sangler. to Give one's self up, s^abatidontier, a. to Give, donner, a. to Give again, redonner, a. to Give a gloss, lustrer. to Give cold, enrhumer. to Give one the lie, dementir. to Glaze over again, revernir. to Glean, to Glitter, to shine, to Glory, to Glory in, to Glut one's self, to Gnaw, to Go, to Go back, to Go or come up, to Go in again. glaner. lu'ire, relidre. glorifler. se. gloiifler, de. se gorger, de. grincer, ranger. aller, a, en, dans. s'e;j retourner. vionter. rentrer, dans. 452 VOCABULARY.—VERBS. to Go out, sortir, s^Heindre. to Go out again, ressortir, de. to Go out of one's se dttourner, de. way, to Go or walk on, to Govern, to Graft, to Grant, to Grasp, to gripe, to Grate, to rasp, to Grieve, to Grind, to Grind again, to Groan, to Grow, to Grow bigger, to Grow loold, to Grow fair, to Grow hoarse, to Grow impatient, to Grow inveterate, to Grow lean, to Grow milder, to Grow old, to Grow pale, to Grow prou.d, to Grow rich, to Grov/ rotten, to Grow tall, to Grow ugly, to Grow used, to Grow worm-eaten, to Grow yellow, to Grow young, to Grub up, to Guess, to Guide, to Gush, to run out, to Hail, to Hail a ship, to Haggle, to Handle, to Hang, to Hang out for sale, to Hang up, to Happen, to Harangue, to Hash, to Hate, to Have, to Have a glimpse of, to Have patience, to Have a strong desire for, avancer, cheminer. gouverner. greffer. accorder, a. empoigner, 7'dper. s'affliger, de. moudre, emoudre. remoudi'e, rimondre. gkmir. croitre. grossir, s'aihardir, hlon dir. s'enrouer. sHmpatieyiter, de. s'invl'ther. maigrir. se radoucir, vieillir. pdlir, hlemir. eenorgueillir, de. s''enrichir. poiirrir, se putrejier, grandir. enlaidir. s^habihter^ S'accou- tumer, sefaire, a. se vermoider. jaunir. rajeimir. def richer. deviner. guider. ridsseler, de. grtler. h'der tin itavire. harguigner. manicr. pendre. etcder, exposer en vente. suspendre. arriver, sitrvenir, a. haravguer. hacker. hair. avoir, a. entrevoir. avoir patience, pati- ent er. se passionner, pour. to Have recourse to, to Have secret in- telligence with, to Hawk about, to Heap up, to Hear, to listen. avoir recours, recou- rir, §,. s^entendre, avec. colporter. entasser, amonceler. entendre^ ecouter. to Hear favourably, exaucer. to Heat, to Heat one's self, to Help, to Help one's self, to Help one another or each other, to Plem, to Hesitate, to Hide in the ground, to Hinder, toHit, to run against, to Hoe, to Hoist, to Honour, to Hope, to Howl, to Hum, to Humble, chaufftr, echauffer. s'^echavffer, S. aider, a, de. s' aider, de. s'entr'' aider, s'entre- secourlr. curler. hesiter, balancer, enfouir. empecher, de. kezirter. holier. arborer. honorer, de. esperer, en ; se p? o- metlre, de. hinder. fredonner. hum ilier, to Humble one's self, s' humilier* to Hunt, chasser. to Hurt, hlesser ; nitire, a. to Hurt one's self, se blesser, a. to Hurt one another, s''entrc-nuire. to Identify, identijier. to Idolise, idoldlrer. to Illuminate, illuminer. to Illustrate, illnstrer, to Imagine, to fancy, sHmaginer^seJigwer to Imitate, innter. to Immortalise, immortaliser. to Implant, implanter. to Implicate, impliqiier. to Implore, implorer. to Import, to concern importer, a. to Importune, importiiner, de. to Impose, imposer, a. to Impose on or en imposer, en f aire upon, accroire, a. to Imprison, emprisonner, incar- cerer. to Improve, amcliorer, honifier, to Impute, imputer, a. to Inaugurate, inaugurer. to Incense, to praise, encenser. to Incite, inciter, a. to Incommode, incommoder. to Incorporate, incorporer, dans. VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 453 to Inculcate, to Indemnify, to Indemnify one's self, to Indicate, to Induce, to Inebriate, to Infatuate, to Infect, to Infer, to Infest, to Inflame, to Inflict, to Influence, to Inform, to Inform against, to Infringe, to Infuse, to Inhabit, to live, to Inherit, to Initiate, to Injure, to Inlay, to Inoculate, to Innovate, to Inquire, to Inscribe, to Inscribe one's self, to Insert, to Insinuate, to Insist, to Inspect, to Inspire, to Instal, to Institute, to Instruct, to Insult, to Inter, to bury, to Intercede, to Intercept, to Interdict, to Interest, to Interest one's self, to Interpose, to Interpret, to Interrogate, to Interrupt, to trouble, to Intimate, to Intimidate, to Intrigue, inculquer, a. diidommager, de ; in- demniser, de. se dcdommager, de. indiquer, a. induire, a, en. enivrer, de. infatuer, de. infecter. infer er, de. infester. enjiammer, s'enfiam- mer, de. infiger, a. injliier, sur. informer, de. denoncer, enfreindre. infuser. habiier. hrriter, de. initier, dans. injurier. viarqiieter.farqueter. inoculer. innover. s^e?iqifcriryS' informer, de. inscrire, sur. s'inscrire, sur. inserer, dans. insiniier. ii ; s'insi- nuer, dans. insisier, sur. surveiller. inspirer, a. installer, ^installer, dans. instiliter. inatrnire. insiilter, a. enterrer, inhiimer. interccder, pour. intercepter. inter dire, u. interesser. s'interesser, a. s'enlremettre. interpreter, interroger. interrompre. in timer. intimider. intriguer. to Introduce, inlroduire, presen- ter, a. to Introduce one's s^introdinre, chez, self, aupres. to Intrude one's self, se fourrer, se fau- filer, chez. to Intrust, to Invade, to Invalidate, to Inveigh, to Invent, to Invest, to Invite, to Invite one's self, to Invoke, to Irritate, to Itch, fer, confer, envahir. invalider. invectiver, coutre. inventer. inveslir, de. inviter, a, de. s'inviter, a. invoqiter. irriter, contre. demanger. to Jeer, to jeer at, miller ; serailler,(le; to play upon one, turlupiner quel- qii'un, to Jest, badiner. to Jog, to shake, branler, remuer. to Join, to overtake, joindre, rejoindre, to Joke, plaisanter, sur. to Jolt, cahoter. to Judge, ji'g^)', de. to Justify, justifer, de. to Justify one's self, se justifer, de. to Justle, jouter. to Keep, garder, a, pour, to Keep from, to garantir, de. preserve, to Keep from, to se garder, de. forbear, to Keep a holiday, /e/e?-. to make welcome, to Keep in pay, soudoyer. to Keep, to stay, &e tenir, a, dans ; rester, a. toKeep one's temper, se r e tenir, se posskder. to Keep, to retain, retenir. to Kill, tuer. to Kill one another, s' entre-tuer. to Kill one's self, se tuer, se dttruire. to Kindle, to break se rallumer. out again. to Knead, to Kneel down, to Knit, to stitch, to Know, to Know again, to Lace, to Lacerate, to Lament, to Land, pttnr. s'agenouiller. brocher. savoir, conn mire. reconnaUi'e. lacer. lace'rer. lamenter. ahorder, sur, dans, de ; prendre terre* 454 VOCABULARY.— VERBS. to Languish, languir. to Lard, larder. to Last, durer. to Lauu;h, rire, de. to Laugh at, se moqtier, de ; se rire, de. to Launch, lancer. to Lavish, gaspiller, prodiguer. to Lay out by line, aligner. to Lay eggs, pondre. to Lay waste, dev aster. to Lay, to set, poser. to Lay, to bet, parier, gager. to Lay up a ship, desarmer un vaisseau. to Lead, to take, mener, a. to Lead, plomher. to Lean, to rely, s'appuyer, de, sur, contre. to Lean on one's s^accouder, sur. elbow, to Leap, to jump, sauter. to Leap over, franchir. to Learn, apprendre, a. to Learn again, rapprendre, a. to Leave, laisser, quitter. to Leave behind, devancer. to Leer, to ogle, lorgner. to Lend, preter, a. to Lengthen, allonger, rallonger. to Lessen, rapetisser. to Let go, laisser aller, lacker, largicer. to Let loose, dechainer, contre. to Let one know, faire savoir, a. to Level, aplanir, niveler. to Liberate, liberer, de. to Lick, lecher. to Lift up, lever, soulever, de. to Light, allumer, eclair er. to Light again, rallumer. to Limit, limiter. to Limp, to hobble, boiter, clocher. to Liquidate, liqmder. to Liquify, ' liqul'Jler. to Lisp, grasseytr. to List, enroler, dans, to Live or feed upon, iiiyrc, de ; se nourrir de. to Live, to abide, demeurcr, a, en, dans, to Load, to charge, charger, de. to Load again, recharger, de. to Lock, fermer a clef. to Lock or shut in, enferiiier,(\sins, sous to Lodge, loger. to Look for, chercher. to Look at, regarder. to Look at or stare s'entre-regarder. at one another, to Look gruff, rechigner. to Loosen, detacher, de. to Loosen one's self, se detacher, de. to Lop, to prune, elaguer. to Lose, perdre. to Lose its coloxir, se deteindre. to Lose one's self, se perdre. to Lose one's way, s'egarer. to Love, to like, to aimer, a. be fond of, to Love one another, s'entr aimer. to Low, mugir. to Lower, baisser. to Lull asleep, endormir. to Magnify, magnijier. to Maintain, to keep, maintenir, entretenir, scndenir. to Make, to do, faire. to Make one's ap- comparaitrc, parai- pearance, tie. to Make one bleed, faire saigner. to Make darker, rembrunir. to Make drowsy, assoi/pir. to Make one's es- s'echapper, s' evader, cape, de, to Make faggots, fagoter. to Make fast, to amarrer, a, dans, mooi-, to Make the first cut, entamer. to Make glad, rejouir. to Make haste, se depecher, se hater, de. to Make a hole, faire un trou, trouer. to Make lonely, isolcr. to Make round, arrondir. to Make sour, aigrir. to Make uneasy, inquieter. to Make welcome, accueillir. to Manage, menager. to Manifest, manifester. to Manoeuvre, manoeuvrer. to Manufacture, fabriquer. to Marble, marbrer, to Mark, marquer, a. to Marry, epouser, marier, se marirr. to Mairy again, se remarier. to Marvel, s'' emerveiller, de. to Mask, masquer. to Massacre, massocrer. to Mast, mater. to Master, maitriser. to Match, assorlir. to Measure, mesurer. to Meddle, se /y/e/e>-, de. VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 455 to Meet, to meet rencontrer, &e ren- to New gild, redorer. agaiii;, contrer. to New pave. repaver. to Meet close, se joindre. to New shoe referrer. to Melt, fondre, parfondre. (horses). to Mend, raccommoder. to Note, noter, de. to Metamorphose, metamorphose }•, en ; to Notify, notijier, a. se mkamorphoser, to Nourish, nourrir. en. to Number, nomhrer, numtroier. to Mew, miauler. to Nurse a sick per garder un malade. to Milk, traire. son. to Mince, kacher. to Obey, oheir, a. to Misinterpret, mesifiterpreter, inter- to Object, objecter, a. preter mal. to Oblige, obliger, a, de. to Mislead, egarer, ecarter, de. to Oblige one ano s'entrobliger. to Mistrust, se mefier, de ; se de- ther, Jter,de. to Observe, observer. to Misuse, mcdtrai/er, sevir. to Obstruct, obstrmr. to Mitigate, mitiger. to Obtain, obtenir, de. to Mix, mcler, avfic. to Obviate, obvier, a. to Model, modeler. to Occasion, occasionner. to Moderate, moderer. to Occupy, occuper, a. to Modify, modifier. to Occupy one's self, s'occuper, a, de. to Modulate, modu/er. to Offend, offenser. to Moisten, humect er. to be Offended, s'offenser, de. to Molest, molester. to Offer, offrir, a. to Monopolise, monopoler, monopo- to Officiate, ojficier. liser. to Offuscate, offusquer. to Moralise, moraliser. to Oil, huiler. to Mortify, morlifier. to Omit, omettre, a, de. to Mould, mouler; moisir. to Open, ouv?^ir, dessiller, a. to Mount, of liter. to Open again. rouvrir. to Move, mouvoir ; tmouvoir, to Open half way. rentr'ouvrir. attendrir. to Operate, optrer. to Move, to stir. s'ebrmler, remuer. to Oppose, oppose r, s^opposer, a. to Mow, faucher. to Oppress, oppresser, opprimer, to Muffle up, affuhler, de. grever, de. to Muffle one's self s envelopjter, dans, to Order, ordonner, a. up, to wrap one's de, avec. to Organise, organiser. self up, to Outlaw, to banish , proscrire. to Multiply, midtiplier. to Outrage, out rage r. to Murder, assassi/ier. to Overflow, regorger, de ; d4- to Murmur, murmi/rer, eutre. border, se deborder. contre. to Overheat one's s'echaujfer. to Mutilate, muiiler. self, to Mutiny, se mutiner. to Overtake, rattraper, rejoindre. to Mutter, marmotler. to Overthrow, to renverser, de ; cul- to Nail, cloutr. overturn, buter. to Nail again, reclouer. to Own, avouery a. to Nail up, enclouer. to Pacify, pacifier. to Name, nommer, a. to Pack up, - ejnballer,empaqueter. to Naturalise, naturaliser. to Pack up again. remballer. to Navigate, navigicer, en, sur. to Pain, to trouble. peiner. to Necessitate, neeessiter. to P.dnt, peindre, se farder. to Neglect, ntgliger. to Paint again. repeindre. to Neglect one's self, se ntgliger. to Palpitate, palpiter. to Negotiate, negocier. to Paraphrase, paraphraser. to Neigh, hennir. to Pardon, pa7-donner, h. 456 VOCABULARY.— VERBS. to Part> to Parody, to Participate, to Particularise, to Pass, to spend, to Pass, to go for, _ to Pass the night in the open air, to Paste, to glue, to Patch, to Pause, to keep on, to Pave, to Pawn, to Pay, to Pay again, to Pay one's self, to Peck, to Penetrate, to People, to Pepper, to Perch, to Perfect, to Perfect one's self, to Perfume, to Perish, to Perjure one's self, to Permit, to Perpetuate, to Persecute, to Persevere, to Persist, to Personify, to Perspire, to Persuade, to Persuade one's self, to Pervert, to Pei-vert one's self to Petrify, to Philosophise, to Pick, to Piece, to patch, to Pierce, to tap, to Pile up, to Pilfer, to Pillage, to plun- der, to Pinch, to Pirate, to Pity, to Place, to Place one's self, to Plane, to Plant, to Plaster, se sepa7'er, de. parodier. participer, a. particulariser. passer, passer pour. bivouaquer. colier. rapitceter. pauser, appuyer, sur. paver. mettre en gage, payer, a, de. repayer, a, de. se payer, de. picoter, becqueter. ptnetrer, dans. peupler, de. poivrer. se percher, sur. per/eciionner. , se perfectionner, dans. parfumer. ■ pc?-ir, de. se parjurer. pennettre, a, de. perptluer. perstcuter. perstvtrtr, dans. persister, dans. personnijier. transpirer. persuader, a, de. se persuader. pervertir. , se pervertir. petrifier. philosopher, tplitcher, trier, rapitcer, rapieceter, raboutir. percer. evipiler. escamoter, a. rapiner, butiner. pincer. piruter, sur. plaindre, de. placer, a, sur, chez. se placer, sur, chez. raboter, dtgauchir. planter, plairer. to Plate, to Play, to Plead, to Please, to Plot, to conspire, to Plume, to Plunder, to Plunge, to Plunge one's self, to Pocket up, to Point, to Poison, to infect, to Poke, to stir the fire, to Polish, to Pollute, to Pome,tocabhage, to Put up, to Possess, to Possess one's self, to Post, to Post one's self, to Pound, to Pour out, to scat- ter, to Pout, to Practise, to Prance, to Prate, to prattle, to Pray, to Preach, to Precipitate, to Predestinate, to Predominate, to Pre-exist, to Prefer, to Prejudice, to Prejudge, to Prelude, to Premeditate, to Prepare, to Prepare one's self, to Presage, to Prescribe, to Present, to Present one's self, to offer one's self, to Preserve, to keep, to pickle, to Preside, to Press, to squeeze, to Presume, plaqner. jouer, a, de. plaider. plaire, a. complofer, conspirery contre. phimcr. piller. plonger, dans. se plonger, dans. empocher. ponetuer, pointer, empoisonner. fourgonner, remuer lefeu. polir. pollucr. pommer, ajfficher. posseder. se posseder. poster, sur, dans. se poster, sur, dans. broyer, dans. verser, epandre, bonder, pratiquer, ejcercer, professer. se cabrer. bavarder. prier, a, de. precher. prtcipiter. prtdestincr. predominer. preexister. preferer, a. prl'judicier, faire tort, a. prejuger. preluder. premediter. preparer, se prl'paretf a. presager.pronostiquer. prescrire^ li. presenter, 3.. se presenter, a, de- vant. preserver, conserver, confire. pr'isider, presser, de. presumer, de. YOCABUI.ARY.— VERBS. 457 to Pretend, prtiendre. to Pursue, to pro- poursuivre. to Pretend, to al- pretexter. secute. lege, to Push, pousser, a. to Prevaricate, prevariquer. to Put a title or etiqueter. to Prevent, prcveni?; label to. to Prick, piquer. to Put in or fill with I empailler. to Prim, tninauder. straw, to Print, imprimer. to Put into a frame , encadrer. to Privilege, priviliyier. to Put on one's shoes se chaitsser. to Proceed, proecder, a. and stockings, to Proceed from, provenir, de. to Put one's boots se hotter. to Proclaim, proclamer. on, to Procure, procurer^ a. to Put one's self out se dhanger. to Produce, to be- produire, engendrer. of the wav. get, to Put out, ' d'csorienter. to Profane, profane r. to Put to, atteler, a. to Profess, professe?: to Putrify, putrefier. to Profit, profiler, de. to Quadruplicate, qitadrupler. to Prohibit, prohiber; dl/endre, a. to Quake, to shiver , trembler, de; trem- de. bloter. to Project, projeter, saii/ir. to Qualify, qualijxer. to Prolong, p7-olonger. to Quarrel with, qitt reller, se quereVer. to Promise, prometlre, a, de. to Rack, torturer. to Promote, promouvoir, a. to Rage, se courroucer. to Promulgate, promulguer. to Rain, pleuvoir. to Pronounce, prononcer. i> Raise, exliausser, sur. to Prop, appuyer, ttangomier. to Raise, e level'. to Prophesy, prophetiser, a. to Raise again. relever. to Propagate, propager, se prO' to Rally, rallier. pager. to Ramble from. s'l'loigner. to Proportion, proportio7iner, a. fo Range, to set in ranger, arranger. to Propose, proposer, a. ordei". to Prorogue, proroger. to Ransom, ranQonner. to Prosper, prosperer. to Rarify, rarl'fier. to Prostitute, prostitKer. to Ratify, ratijier. to Prostitute one's se prostiluer. to Ravage, ravager. self, to Ravish, to charm ravir. to Prostrate one's se prosferner, devant. to Reach, atteindre. self. to Read, lire. to Protect, proteger. to Read over again, retire. to Protest, protester, a. to Realize, rcaliser. to Prove, proiiver, vprouver. to Reap, 7noissonner, reaieillir. to Provide, pour voir, a. to Reason, raisotiner. to Provide one's self, se poto'voir, de ; se to Re-assure, rassurer. prlmunir, contre. to Rebel, se revolte?; contre. to Provoke, to set provoqiier, a; agacer. to Rebound, rebondir. on edge, to Rebuild, rebdtir. to Prune, emonder. to Recant, to go se dedire^ se rctracter. to Publish, puhlier. from one's word. to Pulverise, pulv ['riser. to Recapitulate, rl'capituler. to Pull down. abattre. to Recede from, dhnordre, de. to Pull, to draw, to aracher, a, de. to Receive, recevoir, de. snatch, to Recite, reciter. to Pump, pomper. to Reclaim, rec/amer. to Punish, pitnir, de. to Recline, recliner. to Purge, purger. to Recollect, se rappeler, se remel- to Purify, 2mi'ijier, ire. 458 VOCABULARY.—VERBS. to Recollect one's self, to Recommend, to Recompense, to Reconcile, to Reconduct, to Reconquer, to Recover, to mend, to Recover one's self, to Recreate, to Recriminate, to Recruit, to Rectify, to Redden, to blush, to Redouble, to Redound, to Redress, to Reduce, to Refer, to relate, to Refine, to Reflect, to Reform, to Refrain, to Refresh, to cool, to Refresh one's self, to Re-establish, to Refuse, to Refute, to Regain favour, to Regenerate, to Register, to re- cord, to Register, to Regret, to Reign, to Re-embark, to Reimburse, to Reinforce, to Reiterate, to Reject, to Rejoice, to Rejoin, to meet again, to Relapse, to Relate, to tell, to Relate the mo- tives, to Relax one's self, to Relegate, to Relieve, to Relent, se reeueilHr. recommander, a, de. recompenser, de. recoHcilier. recondidre. reconqukrir. recouvrer ; se rcta- blir, de. revenir a soi ; se re- mettre, de. recreer. recriminer. recruter. rectifier, rougir, de. redoubler. redonder. redresser. reduire, a. se rapporter, a ; s^en rapporter, §,. epiirer, raffiner. reflechir, k. reformer, se contenir, se mO' derer. rafraichir. se rafraichir. retablir. refuser^ a. refuter. rentrer en faveur. regenerer. enregistrer. registrer. regretter, de. 7'egner. rembarqiier, se rem- barquer. rembourser, de. renforcer. reiterer. rejeter. se rejouirf de. rejoindre, recidiver. conter, raconter, a; narrer. motiver. se reldcher, de. releguer, el, dans. soulager, de. se ralentir» to Remain, to sta}', to Remark, to Remedy, to Remit, to put again, to Remonstrate, to Remove> to Remove one's fears, to Remove, to with- hold, to Render, to return, to restore, to Renew, to Renounce, to Repair, to make amends, to Repair, to go to, to Repeal, to Repeat, to Repel, to repulse, to Repent, to Repeople, to Replace, to Reply, to Reply sharply, to Represent, to Repress, to Reprimand, to chide, to Reprint, to Reproach, to Reprobate, to Reproach one's self. to Reproduce, to Repudiate, to Require, to Resemble, to Reserve, to Reside, to abide, to Resign, 7'ester, a, dans. i remarquer. i rem''die?; a. \ remettre, a. ; remo/ftrer, ii. \ de/oger, de; dhne- { nager. \ se rassiirer. \ eloigner, de. \ rendre, a.. j renouveler, se renou- \ veler. renoncer, a. reparer. se rendre, a ; se transporter, dans. revoquer. repker, a. repousser. se repentiry de. repeupler. remplacer. 7'epliquer, a. riposter, k. representer, a. reprimer. reptimander, sur ; reprendre, de. reimprimer. rep7'ocher, a. reprouver. se repror.her, de. reproduire. repudier. requerir. ressemh/er, a. reserver, pour. resider, k. resigner, se resigner. to Resist, resister, a. to Resign, to yield se demettre ; se de- up, mettre, de. to Resolve, resoudre, k, de ; se determiner, a. to Resort, to abound, affluer. to Resound, r'esonner, de ; reten- tir, de. to Respect, respecter. to Rest to slumber, reposer. to Rest one's self, se reposer, de, sur. VOCABULARY.— VERBS. 459 to Restore, to re- rendre,^.', restituer. fund, to Restrain, restreindre, se re- streindre^ a. to Result, resulter, de. to Resume, reprendre, resumer. to Retire, se retire?', a. to Retract, retracter, se retrac- ter. to Retrench, to sup- retnmcher ; se re- press, tranche}'. to Retrograde, rktrograder. to Return to one's rentrer dans le de- duty, voir. to Return, to go retourner, a, en. back, to Return like for revaloir, a. like, to l)e even with, to Reunite, reunir. to Reveal, reveler, a. to Revenge, venger. to Revenge one's se venger, de. self, to Revere, rherer. to Rivet, river. to Revise, reviser. to Revive, revivre ; ravigoter, raviver, ranimer, to Revive one's ragouter. stomach, to Revolt, 7'evolter. to Revolve in one's repasser dans son mind, esprit. to Ride, aller a cheval, a. to Ride Postj courir la paste. to Ridicule, ridicuiiser. to Ripen, murir. to Rise again, relever, ressusciter. to Rise, to revolt, se soulever, se r'n- volter. to Rise, to get up, se lever. to Risk, risquer. to Rinse, rincer. to Roam, to ramble, roder, autour. to Roar, rugir. to Rob, to steal, derober, voler, a. to Rock, bercer. to Roll, fouler. to Root out, dkraciner. to Row, ramer. to Ruin, ruiner. to Rub again, refrotter. to Rub off the rust, derouiller. to Rub off one's rust, se derouiller. to Rule, to govern, i-egir, gouverner. to Rule to regulate, regler. to Ruminate, to Rumple, to tiunble, to Run, to Run aground. rummer, chiffonner. courir, a. schouer, a, sur, contre. to Run away, s'enfuir, de. to Run down, se precipiter, de. to Run to, accourir, a. to Run into debt, ti'endetter. to Rush on or upon, s'elancer, sur. to Rust, rouiller. to Sack, saccager. to Sacrifice, immoler, sacrijier, ^ to Sacrifice one's se sacrijier, pour. self, to Saddle, seller. to Sail, faire voile, poxir, to Salivate, saliver. to Salt, saler. to Salute, saluer. to Salute one se saluer. another, to Sanctify, sanctijier. to Sanction, sanctionner. to Sap, saper. to Satisfy, satisfaire, assoitvir. to Satisfy one's self, se satisfaire, to Save, sauver, de. to Savour, to relish, savourer. to Saw, scier. to Say, to tell, dire, a, de. to Say over again, redire. to Scaffold, echafauder. to Scald, echauder. to Scale, escalade r. to Scandalise, scandaliser. to Scold, to snub, gronder, gourman- der. to Scour, d^graisser. to Scourge, to lash, fustiger. to Scrawl, griffonner, to Scranch, croquer. to Scratch, kgratigner. to Screw, visser. to Scrutinise, scruier. to Scum, ecutner. to Seal, cacheter, sceller. to Search, fouiller. to Season, assaisonner, de. to Second, seconder, dans, to Seduce, seduire. to See, to behold, voir, to See again, revoir. to Seek, to look for, chercher. to Seek again, rechercher. to Seem, sembler, paraitre, X 2 460 VOCABULARY.— VERBS. to Seize,to take pos- saisir; se snisir, s'em- to Simplify, simplifier. pecker, centre. session of, paver, de. to Sin, to Sell, vendre, a. to Sing, chanter. to Sell by retail, dchiter. to Sing psalms, psalniodier. to Send, envoyer, a. to Sink, couler a fond. to Send back. renvoyer, a. to Sink into the s' onbourber. to Separate, scparer, se svparer, mud, de. to Sink under, siiccomber, sous, a. to Sermon,to lecture sermonner. to Sip, buvotter. to Serve, servir. to Sit down. s''asseoir, a, aupres. to Set fire to, incendier. to Sit down at table se mettre a table. to Set free, affranchir, de. to Situate, situer. to Set in order. mettre en ordre, ar- to Skate, patiner. ranger. to Sketch, ebaucher, esquisser. to Set, to lay, poser. to Skin, to flay. C'corcher. to Set on fire. embraser. to Skirmish, escarmoucher. to Set out, partir, de, pour. to Slacken, to relent , ralentir, se ralentir. to Set out again, reparttr, de, pour. to Slacken, to dis • se debander. to Set over, . prcposer, a. perse. to Settle, s'etablir, se fixer, a , to Slander, medire, sur. dans; se rasseoir. to Slaver, baver. to Set up. s^eriger, en. to Sleep, dormir. to Shade, ombrager, ombre?'. to Slide away, s^c couler. to Shake, cadencer, trembler, to Shp, to creep into , se glisser, dans. ebran/er. to Slope, echancrer. to Shake off, secouer. to Slumber, sommeiller. to Share, to divide. partager, avec, en, to Smell, fairer, sentir. entre ; diviser, en. to Smile, soiirire, ai. to Sharpen, to whet , uffder, ai guise r. to Smoke, fiimer. to mount. a ff liter. to Sneeze, eteryiuer. to Shave, raser. to Snore, ronfler. to Shear, tondre. to Snow, 7ieiger. to Shell, I'cosser. to Snuff, moucher. to Shine, to glitter, briller, de ; rehdre. to Sob, sangloter. to Ship back again. rembarqiter. to Soften, to move adoucir. to Shiver, grehtter, frissonner, to pity. de. to Soften, to grow se radoucir. to Shock, to offend. choquer. gentle. to Shoe a horse. ferrer vn chevaL to Sojourn, si'jovrner. to Shoot, fimller. to Solder, souder. to Shoot up, to bud, germer. to Solemnise, solenniser. to Shorten, accourcir, raccourcir. to SoHcit, briguer. to Shovi^, montrer, a. to Solve, •soudre, rhoudre. to Shrink up, to con - se resserrer, se con- to Sound, to ring, sonner. tract. tracter. to Sound, to search , sonder. to Shroud, ensevelir. to Sow, ensemencer. to Shudder, frcmir, de. to Spare, epargner, a. to Shuffle, hiaiser. to Sparkle, etinceler, de. to Shuffle cards, batire les cartes. to Speak, parler, a, de. to Shut, to close. fermer. to Speak at random , diraisonner, baltre la to Shut again, refermer. campagne. to Shut up, renfermer. to Speak gibberish, baragoviner. to Sift, tamiser, cribler. to Spell, I'peler. to Sigh, soupirer, apres. to Spell and write orthographier. tc Sign, signer. correctly. to Signify, signijier, a. to Spend, passer; depenser, a, to Silver over argsntsr. en. VOCABULARY.—VERBS. 461 to Spill, to shed, to Spin, to Spit, to Splash, to Split, to Spoil, to Sport with, to Spread, to Spur, to Spurt up, to Spy, to Squat down, to Squeak, to Squeeze, to press, to Stab, to Stammer, to Stamp, to Stamp money, to Stamp paper, to Stanch, to quench, to Stand, to Stand a tiptoe, to Stand by, to Stand up, to rise, to Starch, to Start, to Startle, to Stay, to Steal away, to Stiffen, to Stifle, to smother, to Sting, to incite, to Stink, to Stipulate, to Stir the fire, to Stone, to lapidate, to Stoop, to Stoop with age, to Stop, to Stay, to Stop up, to Store, to Straiten, to Strangle, to Strengthen, to Stretch one's self, to enlarge, to Strew, to Strike, to knock, to Strip off leaves, to Strip, to rob, repandre, filer. embrocher. eclabousner. poxirfendre. gdter. se jouer, de. se rtpandi'e, se pro- pager. eperonner. rejaUlir, de, sur. espionner. s' accroupir. c/apir. presser, serrer, poigriarder. balbiHier, bl'gayer, bredouiUer. estamper. f rapper de la mon- naie. timbrer. ctancher. el re oic se tenir de- bout. se hausser, se ranger. se dresser, empeser. tressaillir, de. s'effaroiicher, i' On account of. a cause de ; On that side of, par dela ; On the other au-dela de ; side of, On this side. en-degd de ; On the outside a fexfcrieuy de ; of, Opposite, vis-a-vis ; vis-a-vis de ; over < against. en face de, a P op- posite de ; Out of, hors de ; Save, saving, sauf; Secvire from, a convert de ; Seeing, consi- vu; dering, Sheltered from. a I'ahri de ; Since, from. depuis ; Through, a lrave?'S ; OK trovers de; There is, voild ; There are, voila ; To the regret oi ', au regret de ; To, towards. vers; envers; sous; Under, a moins de ; au-dessous de ; far from here, for you, for the sake of you, for want of money, from London, from the beginning, from above the bed, from under the bed. here is your hat, here are your gloves, in winter, in prison, in spite of sense and reason, in spite of myself, instead of bread, in the inside of the church, in the middle of the street, {near the royal palace, near here, near town, near her, near the mill, next to the chapel of... notwithstanding all these reasons, on account of you, on that side the seas, on the other side of the river, on this side the Rhine, on the outside of the coach, opposite the hotel of... opposite the Bank, over against the Ex- change, out of danger, saving your presence, secure from the storm, seeing her age, sheltered from the rain, since yesterday, through the fields, through the body, there is your mother, there are your daughters, to the regret of every body, towards the park, towards his friends, under the table, under ten guineas, under them, loin dHci. pour vous. pour r amour de vous. faute d'argenf. de Londres. des le commencement. de dessus le lit. de dessous le lit. void voire chapeau. void vos ga?tfs. dans rhiver, en hiver. en prison. en depit du ban sens. 're mot. au lieu de paiti. au dedans de Peglise. au milieu de la rue. pres du palais royal, prts d'ici. pres de la vilte. aupres d'elle. proche du moulin. joignant la chapelle de... nonobstant toutesces rai- sons. a cause de vous. par dela les mers. au-dela de la riviere. en-de^a du Rhin. a Cextkrieur de la voi- ture. vis-a-vis I' hotel de... vis-a-vis de la Banque. en face de ou a P opposite de la Bourse, hors de danger, sauf voire respect, a convert de Porage. VIC S071 age. a Pabri de la pluie. depuis hier. a iravers les champs. au iravers du corps. voila voire mere. voila vos files. au regret de tout le monde. vers le pare, envers ses amis. sozfs la table, a moins de dix guinees au-dessous d^eux. 412 VOCABULARY.— CONJUNCTIONS. Upon, sur; With, avec ; Without, sans ; Without the a I'insu cle; knowledge of. upon the table, sur la table. with him, avec lui. without that, sans ce.'a. without the knowledge of a Pinm de ses parens. his parents, 53. Of Conjunctions, %■€. According as, According to. Although, < And, As, As for instance. As if. As long as, < As much as. As soon as, -J As well as, At all events. Because, Before, < Besides that. But, But yet, Except that. Far from, < For, For all that, For fear, God grant that ! How comes it that ? However, If; If ever so little or so few, If not, but that, S except that, i^ Inasmuch as, as. In case that, < In order that. suivant que, selon que. a. ce que. bien que, quandbien vieme qtee, quoique. et. comme,aitisi que. comme par exemple. comme si. aussi long-temps que, tant que. tant que, autant que. aiissitot que. des que, sitot que. aussi bien que. en tout cas. parce que, c^est que. avant que, avunt qiie de, avant de. outre que, mais. mais encore. excepte que. loin de, loin que, biefi loin de, bien loin que, tant s^en faut que, car. cependant^ toutefois. de crainte que, de crainte de, de peur que, de peur de. Dieu veuille que ! d'oil vient que ? cependant, pourtant . si. pour peu que. si ce n'est que, sinon que. en tant que. en cas que, ail cas que. ajin que. In order fo. In proportion as. Instead of, It follows that, hence follows that, It is for that rea- son that. It is not but that. It is true that, Let us suppose that Neither, nor, Nevertheless, No more than. Not that. Notwithstanding f that, I Nov/, On or upon condition that. Or, or else. Perhaps, Provided that, Rather than, Seeing that. Since, So that, Suppose that. That, than, That is to sav that. That, to the end that. The same as, Then, Therefore, Though, tho', al- f tho'jif^ although. I Till, until. aJln de. a mesure que. au lieu de. il s^ensuit que, il s'ensuil de la que. c'est pour cela que. ce n^est pas que. il est vrai que. supposons que. ni. neanmoins, toutefois. non plus que. non pas que, non que, ce r^est pas que. nonobstant que, malgre que, quoique. or. a condition que, bien entendu que. ou, ou bien. peut-etre que. pvurvu que, moyen- nant que. phitbt que de. vu que, ottendu que. puisque, depuis que. de surte que, de fagon que, si bien que, de inanitre que, tellement que. suppose quey post que, que. c'est-a-dire que. pour que. de mime que. done. c^ est pour quoi. quoique, encore que, quand, qvand m6me, quand bien meme. jusqu^a ce que, en at' tenJant que. FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 473 To, for, Unless, Very far from, When, after, pour. a moiiis que, a moifis que de, a moins de. bien /oin de, bien loiyi que. qiiand, iorsque, apres que. Whereas, Whether, While, whilst. Without, pmsque, comme, au lieu que, d'autant que. soil, soit que. pendant que, tand'is que. sans que. Would to God that ! p/iit a Dieu que ! 54. FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 1. To Accost, to Salute, Good morning, or good evening, sir' madam, or miss, I wish you a good morning, or good evt-ning, sir, I have the honour to wish you a good morning, sir, madam, or miss. How do j^ou do ? You do me honour, I am very well, I am very glad or happy to see you. How are your father and mother ? They are very well, sir, I thank you. And how are your sisters ? They are tolerably well, They are quite well, sir. How are they all at home ? How does all the family do ? They are all very well. 2. On the French Lanyiiage, 8fc, Do you speak French ? Do you speak French, miss ? A little, sir. Have you been to France ? Yes, sir. Do you know Miss T* * *, in Paris ? I know her a little, I know her by sight, I know her by name. Do you know whether she...? No, I do not know ; or, I know nothing of it; 1. Pour Aborder, pour Saluer, Bonjour, on bonsoir, monsieur, madame, ou mademoiselle ; ou — je vous salue, mon- sieur, madame, ou mademoiselle. Monsieur, je vous souhaite le bonjour, ou le bonsoir. Monsieur, madame, ou mademoiselle, j'' at rhonnenr de vous sahter. Comment vous portez-vous ? Vous me fait es honneur, je me porte fort bien. Je suis bien aise de vous voir ; ou,je suis charmt de vous voir. Comment se portent M. voire pere et 31"*' voire mtre ? lis se portent trts-bien, monsieur, je vous remercie. Et mesdemoiselles vos socurs ? E/les se portent passablement bien. Elles se portent parfaitement bien, ou a merveille. Comment se porte-t-on chez vous ? Comment se porte toufe la famille ? Tout le monde est en bonne sante. 2. Sur la Langue Franpaise, ^c. Parlez-vous Fran^ais ? Mademoiselle parle-t-elle Fran^ais ? Un peu, monsieur. Jvez-vous t/c' en France ? Oui, monsieur. Connaissez-vous Mademoiselle 7"* * *, a Paris ? Je la connais un pert. Je la connais de vue. Je la connais de nom. Savez-vous si elle...? Non,je ne sais pas ; on,je iCen sais rien. '4^^ FAMILIAR SENTENCES. She is very amiable, ■She sings beautifully, She is a charming young lady,. Elle est hten aimable. Elle chante divinement. Cest une charmante demoiselle. 3. Eating and Drinking, Are you hungry ? Are you thirsty ? I am neither hungry nor thirsty, I am hungry, I am thirsty, I am very hungry, I am very thirsty, I am dying with hunger, I am dying with thirst, I have a good appetite. Give me something to eat, Give me something to drink, What will you drink ? .Give me a glass of water, Will you take a glass of wine ? Which will you have ? Red or white ? White, if you please, Come, drink. Your health, sir, .Madam, I have the honour to drink your health, .Young ladies, I have the honour to drink your health, , You eat nothing. I beg your pardon, I am eating very well, I have eaten very well, What shall I have the pleasure of helping you to P Whatever you please. 4. At Breakfast. — An Invitation to Dinner., 8^c. Is your tea, or coffee, sweet enough ? It is excellent, it is delicious. Have you breakfasted — dined — supped ? Yes, sir, At what o'clock do you breakfast ? At ten o'clock. Will you stop and dine with us ? No, 1 thank you, Dinner is ready, it is just going to be put on the table. Dinner is on the table. You are very kind, Tjut I must set out for the country, Pray, put your hat on, 3. Manger et Boire* Avez-vous /aim ? Avez-vous soif? Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. J^aifaim, J'ai soif. J'ai grand'' faim. Tai grand' soif. Je meurs de faim. Je meurs de soif. J'ai bon nppeiit. Donnez-moi a manger. Donnez-moi a boire. Que voulez-vous boire ? Donnez-moi tin verre d'eau. Voulez-vous prendre vn verre de vin ? Duquel voulez-vous ? Du ronge ou da blanc ? Du blanc, s'il vous plait. Buvez done. A votre santS, monsieur. Madame, fai Vhonneur de boire a votre sante. Mesdetnoiselles, fai Vhonneur saluer. Fous ne mangez rien. Je tons demande pardon, je mange hien. J'ai tres-bien mange. Qu^aurai-je le plaisir de vous offrir ? Ce cjiHil vousfera plaisir. de vous tres- 4. A Dejeuner. — Invitation dc Dmer, 8fc. voire cafe, est-il assez Foire th6, ou Sucre ? II est excellent ; il est delicieux. Avez-vous dejeimt — dink. — soup6 ? Qui, monsieur. A quelle heure dejeunez-vous ? A dice heures. Foulez-vous rester a diner avec nous 9 Non,je vous remercie. Le diner est pret, on va servir. Le diner est servi. Fous etes bien honnete, mais il faut que je parte pour la campagne. Couvrez-vous^je vous prie. FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 475 Yoti are very polite, sir, Do not mention it, Well then, good-by, Take care of yourself, I wish you good health. Fous eies bien honnete, monsieur. Ne faites pas attention. Adieu done. Portez-vous bien. Je vous souhaite tine bonne sante. 5. Of the Hour. What o'clock is it ? What o'clock do you suppose it is ? What o'clock is it by you P Do you know what o'clock it is ? What hour is that striking P Six o'clock ; Tell me, if you please, what o'clock it is, Will you have the goodness to tell me what o'clock it is, sir ? It is twelve o'clock (in the day), or it is noon. It is twelve o'clock (at night), or it is midnight, It is two o'clock, It is half-past two, It wants a quarter to three, It is very nearly four. It has struck four. It has just struck four, i did not think it was so late, - Does your watch go well ? My watch does not go well. It goes right. It goes extremely well. It goes too fast, It goes too slow, It gains a quarter of an hour every day. It loses half an hour every day. It stops now and then, It is right. It is not right. It is too fast. It is too slow, It is not late. It is early, It is late. It is very late. 6. Meeting. Where are you going ? I am going home, I am going to the park, I was going to your house, Where are you coming from ? 5. De VHeure. Quelle heure est-il 9 Quelle heure est-il bien ? Quelle heure dites-vous ? Savez-vous P heure qu''il est ? Quelle heure est-ce qit'il sonne 9 Six heures. Dites-mol, sHl vous plait, f heure qu^il est: Monsieur, voulez-vous avoir la bonle de me dire t heure qit'il est 9 (ou simplement — P heure qu^il est, s'il vous plait, monsieur ?) // est midi. II est minuit. II est deux heures. II est deux heures et demie. II est deux heures trois quarts, ou il est .trois heures mains un quart. II est bien pres de quatre heures. II est qualre heures sonntes. Quatre heures viennent de sonner. Je ne croyais pas qiHl fut si tard, Votre montre va-t-elle lien 9 Ma montre ne va pas bien. Elle va bien. Elle va suptrieurement. Elle avance. Elle retarde. Elle avance dhm quart d* heure par jour. Elle retarde d'une demi-heure par jour. Elle s^arrete qtielquefois. Elle est juste. Elle ii'est pas juste. Elle est en avance. Elle est en retard. II Ii'est pas tard. II est de bonne heure. II est tard. II est bien tard. 6. Rencontre. Ou allez-vous 9 Je vais chez moi. Je vais au pare. J'allais chez vous. D'oii venez-vous 9 476 FAMILIAR SENTENCES. From Mrs. L***'§, How does she do ? She is indisposed, She is not well, What is the matter with her P She has a head-ache, She has a megrim, or a violent pain in her head. She has got a cold. She has a bad cold. 7. Of Walking. Let us go and take a walk, Will you come and take a little walk with me. Yes, with pleasure ; where shall we go ? Wherever j^ou please ; we will go where you like ; Well ! let us go to the park, W^illingly, What a beautiful prospect ! What a beautiful landscape ! Can you skate ? Yes, a little. Have you been to the play lately ? Yes, I was at the Opera yesterday evening, I never saw the house so full. The scenery is magnificent, and the orchestra excellent. Now, it begins to grow late, I must leave you, I must go, Good evening, Adieu, I will see you again, Good-by, Till I see you again. He is at last gone ! 8. A Visit. There is a knock, Somebody knocks. Who knocks ? It is Mr. D***, Tell him to walk in. Who is there r* It is I, Come in, I am very happy to see you; how do you do ? Very well, I thank you, Take a seat, take a chair, Sit down, Je vicns de chez M"^* Z, * * *. Comment se porle-t-elle ? Elfe est indisposf^e. Elle ne se porte pas bien. Qu'a-t-elle ? ou, QWest-ce qu^elle a 9 Kile a mat a la iete. Elle a la migraine, Elle est enrhumte. Elle a un gros rkume. 7. De la Promenade, Allons faire un tour de promenade. Voidez-vous venir faire tm petit tour de promenade avec moi f Otii, avec plaisir ; ou irons-nous ? Ou vous voudrez ; nous irons du cote que vous voudrez. Eh bien / allons au pare, Foloniiers. Quelle belle vue ! quelle vue charmante / Quel magnijique coup d^oeil ,' Savez-vous patiner ? Out, un peu. u4vrz-vous tte depuis peu au spectacle ? Ouiffttais hier au soir a Poptra, Je 71^ ai jamais vu la salle si pleine. Les decorations (ou decors) sont mag' nijiques, et V orc^iestre est excellent. Maintenunt, il commence a se faire iard) il faut que je vous quitie. llfaut que je m^en aille. Bonsoir. Adieu. Sans adieu; ou^ Je ne vous dis pas adieu. Jusqu'au revoir. Jusqu^au plaisir de vou^ revoir. Enfin le voila parti! 8. Visite. Onfrappe. QuelqiCun frappe. Qui frappe ? Cest M. D * * *. J)ites-lui d^entrer. Qui est la ? ou. Qui esl-ce qui est Id ? Cest 7noi. Entrez. Je suis charmt d'avoir le plaisir de voir ; comment vous portez-vous ? Tres-bien, je vous remercie. Prenez un siege ; prenez vne chaise. Asseijez-vous. FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 477 Do me the pleasure to sit down, Please to be seated, You are very kind, I have not time ; I am in a great hurry, Give the gentleman a chair, Ask the lady to take a seat, Come near the fire, It is a long time since I had the plea- sure of seeing yo'.i. Who told you so ? I have been told so, Somebody told me so. 9. To inquire if the person whom we loish to see is at home. Is Mrs. S * - * at home ? No, sir, she has just gone out, Is not Miss A * * * within P No, she is at church, She is gone to see a friend. She is gone to the opera, At what o'clock will she be at home ? She said nothing when she went out, Does Mr. D * * * live here ? Faites-moi le plaisir de vous asseoir. Donnez^ous la peine de vous asseoir. Fbus etesbien honnete, je n'ai pas le temps; je suis tris-presse. Donnez tm siege a. monsieur. Priez madame, ou mademoiselle, de s'aS' seoir. Approchez-votis du feu. 11 y a long-temps que je ii'ai eu Pavantage de vous voir. Qui vous a dit cela ? ou, qui esi-ce qui vous a dit cela ? On me Pa dit. Quelqiiun me l''a dit. 9. Pour demand er si la personne qu'^on desire de voir est chez elle. Madame S * * * rj est-elle ? ou, Madame S- * * est-elle chez elle ? Non, jnonsieur, elle vifjil de sortir. Mademoiselle A** * n^y est-elle point ? Nvn, elle est a Peg Use. Elle est allie voir une amie, Elle est a Popera. A quelle heure y sera-t-elle ? Elle 7i'a ricn dit en sortant. M. D'^ * * demeure-t-il ici ? 10. To ask whether anybody has called during one^s absence. Has any body asked for me to-day ? or, has any body called for me to-day ? Yes, sir, Miss C * * * has been here. Has she left any message with you ? No, she said that she would call again to-moirow, about ten o'clock. Has any body else called ? Nobody, sir, II. Of Compliments. I have many compliments for you, Trom whom, pray? From one of your intimate friends, I am very happy, or delighted to hear from him, I am very much obliged to him for re- membering me. Have the goodness to thank him for me. 10. Pour demander s^iln'esf venu personne pendant son Absence. Est-il veuu quelqu'wi me demander au- jourd'hui? ou, n^ est-il ve?iu personne me demander aujourd'^hui ? Qui, monsieur^ Mademoiselle C * * * est venue. Foils a-t-elle charge de quelque message ? Non, elle a dit qu'elle reviendrait demain, sur les dix heiires. N* est-il venu aucune autre personne i Personne, monsieur. 11. Des Complimens. J^ai bien des complimens a voitsfaire. De quelle part, s'il vo?/s plait ? D'un de vos amis in times. Je suis bien aise d' avoir de ses nouvelles f ou, Je suis charme d^entendre de ses nouvelles. Je lui suis bien reconnaissant de son bon souvetiir. Veuillez vous charger de mes remerci- 41B FAMILIAR SENTENCES. When you see him, present my respects to him, Present my duty to your sister, Give my kind regards to her, Give my best wishes to her, or tell hev many kind things from me, I will not fail, Remember me to your lady, My love to all your children. My compliments to all the family. Remember me most kindly to all our friends, You are very kind in coming to see us, vous le verrez, presentez-lui mes respects. Prtsentez mes devoirs a M"^ voire soeur. Offrez-lui vies hommages. Diles-lui bien ties chases de ma part. Je n'y manquerai pas. Rappelez-moi au souvenir de madam,e. Bien.des amities a tons vos enfans. Mes complimens, ou mes civilites a ioute la famille. Mille choses honnetes de ma part a tous nos . amis. Vbus etes bien aimahle d^ etre venu nous voir. 12. Of News. Do you know any news ? Do you know any thing new ? Is there any news to-day ? Is there any thing new ? What is the best news ? What news is there ? Have you read the papers ? I have read the Literary Gazette, Have you received any letters from the continent ?. I know no news, I do not know any thing new. There is no news. There is some good news, There is great news, I have heard that They say that 13. To return Thanks, 8^c, I thank yon, I am much obliged to you, I thank you, I thank you most kindly, I thank you most respectfully, I am exceedingly obliged to you, Many thanks to 3 ou. Will you do me a pleasure ? Will you render me a service ? Yes, certainly, assuredly, I give you much trouble, Do not mention it. No trouble at all. It is a pleasure to me. You are too polite. You are extremely kind, you are too kind, 12. Des Nouvelles. Savez-vous des nouvelles ? Savez-vous quelque chose de 7iouveau ? Y a-t-il des nouvelles aujourd''huL ? Y a-t-il quelque chose de nouveau ? Que dit-on de ton ? Que dit-on de nouveau ? Avez-vous lu les journaux'^ J'ai lu la Gazette Litteraire. Avez-vous regu des lettres du continent ? Je ne sais point de nouvelles. Je ne sais rien de nouveau. 11 n^y a point de nouvelles. II y a de bonnes nouvelles. II y a de grandes nouvelles. J^ai entendu dire que On dit que 13. Pour Remercier, 8^c. Merci. Bien oblig6 ; ou, Je vous suis biea oblige, Je vous remercie. Je vous remercie injiniment. Je vous remercie tres-humblement. Je vous suis extremement oblige. En vous remerciant . Voulez-vous me f aire un plaisir f Voulez-vous me rendre un service? Ouif cerlainementy assurtment, Je vous donne bien de la peine. Ne parlez pas de cela. La peine n'est rien. C'est un plaisir pour moi. Vous etes trop honnete. Vous nvez bien de la bonii ; vous avez trop de bonte. FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 479 14. To affirm* It is likely, It is likely enough. It is not unlikely, That may be. That is true, That is certain, It is but too true. It is but too certain. It is the truth, Nothing is more true. Nothing is more certain. The fact is certain, The fact is authentic, I give you my word for it, Upon my honour. Upon my word of honour. 15. To Deny, ^c. No, not at all. That is not so, That is false, There is no such thing, It is a falsehood, It is a newspaper dream, That cannot be. That is impossible. It is a fabrication. It is a story. It is an invention. It is a flying report. You jest, 1 doubt it, Is it true ? Is it certain P Is it possible ? Is it true that...? Is it certain that...? Is it possible that ..? Can it be true ? Can it be possible ? Can it be true that...? Can it be possible that...? Is it really possible ? Do you speak seriously ? You are mistaken, It is incredible, 16. To express Contentment and Pleasure. 14. Pour Assurer, Affirmer Cest ou cela est probable. Cela est bien probable. Cela rl est pas improbable. Cela se peut. Cela est vrai. Cela est certain. Ce 7test que trap vrai. Ce ji'est que trap certain. Cest la verite. Rien de plus vrai. Rieji de plus certain. Le fait est certain. Le fait est authentique. Je vous en donne ma parole, Sur vion hoimeur. Sur ma parole d'fwnneur. 15. Pour nier, Sfc. Nan, point du tout, Cela n^est pas. Cela est faux ; c'est fanx, 11 tien est rien. Cest line faussete ; c^est un mensonge. Cest u?ie reverie de gazetier. Cela ne se pent pas. Cela est i?npossible. Cest un conte. Cest ime histoire. C'est une histoire faite a plaisir. Cest une 7iouvelle en fa'r. Fbus plaisantez ; vous voulez rirc. J^en doute. Est-ce vrai ? Est-ce certain ? Est-ce possible ? Est-il vrai que...? Est-il certain que.. . ? Est-il possible que. . . ? Serait-ce vrai ? Serait-ce possible ? Serait-il vra i que...? Se7'ait-il possible que...? Serait-il bien possible ? Parlez-vous serieusement ? Fbus vous trompez. Cest incroyable. Good ! Bravo ! Very well. It is superb. 16. Pour marquer le Contente- ment, le Plaisir. Bon! Bravo! Fort bien. Cest superbe. 480 FAMILIAR SENTENCES. It is magnificent, It is very beautiful, Wliat pleasure I What satisfaction ! What a pleasing satisfaction ! I am very glad of it, I am delighted with it, I am charmed with it, I am enchanted with it, That gives me much pleasure. It is impossible to be more satisfied with it than I am. That delights me, charms me, transports Cest magnijique, C^est de toute beaute. Quel plaisir ! Quelle satisfaction ! Qiielle douce satisfaction ! J'e« suis bien aise ; on, fen si/isfori aise. J' en suis ravi, Ten suis charmc. J^en suis enchante. Cela me fait bien du plaisir. Ten suis on ne pent plus content, Cela me ravit, me ckarme, m^enckante. 17. To express Horror tonishment. and As- fy ! for shame ! What a shame ! Oh God I What horror ! What abomination I It is shameful, It is odiovis. It is abominable. It is dreadful. That makes one tremble. Oh heavens ! What surprise ! What a misfortune ! What a grievous disappointment ! 1 am sorry for it, I am very sorry for it. It is impossible to be more sorry for it than I am, How that grieves me ! How unhappy I am ! That affects me exceedingly, I am ruined beyond resovirce. It is a pity. It is a great pity. What a pity ! 17. Pour marquer VHorreur et V Etonnement. Fi! Fidonc! Quelle honte ! Dieu! ODieu! Quelle horreur ! Quelle abomination ! Cest honteux. Cest odieux ; aes' affreiix. CPest abominable. Cest epouvantable, Cela fait trembler. del! Quelle surprise ! Quelle malheur ! Quel facheux contretemps I Teti suis f ache. Ten suis bien f ache. Ten suis on ne pent plus f ache. Que cela me fait de peine ! Que je suis malheureux ! Cela ti-Caffiige sensiblement. Je suis ruine sans ressource. Cest dommage. Cest bien dommage; c"" est grand dommage. Quel dommage ! 18. Questions and Observations in accosting somebody. I beg pardon, if I interrupt you. Do yoix want any thing ? Yes, I wish to speak to Mr. N * * *, I wish to see Mr. D * * *, He is my friend, He is my intimate friend, I love him sincerely, What do you want him for ? 18. Questions et Observations en abordant quelqu'un. Pardon, sije vous interromps. Dtsirez-vous quelque chose f Oui,je voudrais bien parler a M. A^* * *. Je desire de voir M. D * * *. Cest mon ami. Cest mon intime ami. Je taime sincerement. Que lui voulez-vous ? FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 4BI What do you want to tell him ? What do you v/ant ? What is the meaning of that ? I do not know, Do you understand me ? Do you understand me well ? Yes, I understand you very well, That astonishes me, I wish or give you joy of it, I congratulate you Avith all my heart, 19. Rising^ Sleep, 8fc. At what o'clock do you get up ? I usuall}'- get up at seven o'clock. It is a good hour, I am tired, I am very tired, I am sleepy, I am very sleepy, I am quite sleep}'^, I sleep as I stand, I have slept well, I have slept pretty well, I have not s'ept well last night, I have slept badlj', I have slept very indifferently, I have not been able to sleep, I have not closed my eyes all night, I have had nothing but troublesome dreams all night. 20. Of Fire, S^c. Light the fire, Light the candles. Have j'ou lighted the fire ? Have you lighted the candles ? You have not lighted the fire. You have not lighted the candles, Why have you not lighted the fire? Why have you not lighted the candles ? SnufFthe candles. Give me the snuffers. Where are the snuffers ? You have not brought in the snuffers, Bring the snuffers. Here they are,— there they are, That is a poor fire, Fire begins to be comfortable. You have a bad fire. The fire is very low. The fire is going out. The fire is out. Put out the fire, Que lid voulez-voiis dire ? Que souhaitez-vous ? Qu'est-ee que cela veut dire ? Je ne sais pas. M^eniendez-vous ? M'entendez-vous bien ? Ouifj'e vous eniends fort biefu Cela irCttonne. Je vous enfelicite. Je vous enfelicite bien sineeremetif. 19. Du Lever, du Sommeil, 8^c. A quelle heure vous levez-vous ? Je ')ne Itve ordinairement a sept heures. C'est tine bo?/ne heure. Je suis fatigud ; je suis las. Je suis b.en fatigue. J'ai sommeil. J^aibien somm'il. Je suis tout endormi. Je dors debout. J'ai bien dormi. J'ai assez bien dormi. Je fi'ai pas bien dormi la nuit derniere. J'ai mal dormi. J'ai assez mal dormi. Je 7i'ai pas pu dormir. Je 71 ai pas fermt Pceil de toute la nuit. Je n'aifa't que rSvasser toute la nuit. 20. Du Feu, 8^c. Allumez le feu. Allumez les chandelles ou les bougies. Avez-vous allum^ lefeu 9 Avez-vous allume les chandelles ou les bougies ? Vous n'avezpas allume lefeu. Vous n'avez pas allume les chandelles ou les bougies. Pourquoi 71' avez-vous pas allume le feu ? Pourquoi 71' avez-vo7ts pas allmnk les chan' delles ou les bougies 9 Mouchez les chandelles ou les bougies. Donnez-moi les mouchettes. Oil S07it les mouchettes ? Vous 7i'avez pus appo)'te les mouchettes. Apportez les 77iouchettcs. Les void ; — les voila. Voila u7i pauvre feu. I^efeu coi7i7ne7ice ci etre de saison. Vous avez ?m mauvais feu. Le feu est bie/i bas. Lefeu s'eteint. Lefeu est l:iei7it. Eieignez le feu. 48^ FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 21. In a Shop. Do you sell gloves ? Yes, madam, Show me some, if you please. Here are some, What do you sell them at ? Four shilUngs a pair, It is very dear, Have you any fine cloth ? Yes, sir, I have some very beautiful. How inuch do you sell it an ell ? A hundred and forty francs, It is too dear, I never ask too much, How much do I owe you ? How much is it ? Two hundred francs. Have you change for a guinea ? 21. Dans une Boutique. VendeZ'Vous des gants ? Oiii, madame, Montr ez-tn'en^ s'il vous plait. En void ; — en voila. Combien les vendez-vous f Quatre schellings la paire. Cest bien cher ; — c' est fort cher. Avez-vous de beau drop ? Oui, monsieur, fen ai de touie beaute. Combien le vendez-vous faune ? Cent quarante francs. Cest trop cher. Je ne surfais jamais. Combien vous dois-je ? Combien est-ce ? Deux cents francs. Avez-vous la monnaie d\ne guinte ? 22. Of Age. How old are you ? I am fifteen years old. How old is your sister ? She is twenty. She does not appear so much, Your cousin has grown very much. 23. Of Epochs. These last days, One of these days, It is not two days since, Last week, A week ago. It was this day week, It was yesterday week, A fortnight ago. It is three weeks since, It is at least a month. It is about a month since. It wants a day or two. Last month. Last year. Next year, New year's day. On new year's day, At Christmas, At Easter, At Midsummer, At Michaelmas, This day Aveek, To-morrow week, To-morrow fortnight, In a month, within a month, A month hence, 22. De PAge. Quel age avez-vous ? J^ai quinze ans. Quel age a mademoiselle voire scetir ? Elle a vingt ans. Elle ne les paraif pas. Voire cousine a bien grandi. 23. Des Epoques. Ces jours derniers. Un de ces jours. II n''ij a pas deux jours. La semaine passce ; — la semaine dernitre. II y a une semaine. II y a aitjourd'' hui une seinaine. II y eut ou il y a eu hier huit jours. II y a qui7ize joiirs. 11 y a de cela trois semaines. II y a bien un mois, Il y a a pen pres un mois. II ien faut d'un jour ou deux, Le mois dernier. Vannee passee; — Pannke dernitre, Uannte prochaine. Le premier jour de Pan. Au premier jour de fan. A Noel. A Pdques. A la Saint- Jean. A la Saint-Michel. D''anjourd''hui en huit. De demain en huit. De demain en quinze. Dans nn mois. D'ici a tin mois. FAMILIAR SENTENCES. 483 The first of June, The third, the fourth of uext month, Within six weeks, Six weeks hence. At the end of the month. Towards the middle of June, In the middle of Januar}'', In a fortnight, Next week, In a Aveek, Towards the end of the week. From day to day, Some day or other. Every day. Daily, What is the day of the month to day ? To day is the sixth, seventh, &c. 24. Of the Weather. How is the weather ? What sort of weather is it ? Is it fine ? Is it fine weather ? Yes, it is fine, it is fine weather, The weather is settled, It is beautiful weather. It is charming weather. It is most delightful weather. The weather is very close, The weather is changeable. It gets cloudy, It is cloudy weather, It is bad weather. It is very bad weather, It is dreadful weather. It is windy. It is very windy. The wind subsides, The wind falls, The wind begins to fall or to subside. It is foggy, It is very foggy. The weather begins to clear up, It is mild, It is hot, It is cold, It is very hot, It is very cold. It is sultry, It is dry weather, It is damp. It threatens to rain. It is going to rain, I feel some drops of rain, It rains, — it is raiuing. Le premier de Juui. Le trois,le qttatre du mois prochain, Dans six semaines. IXici a six semaines. A la Jin du mois. Vers la mi-Juiti. A la mi-Janvier. Dans qiiinze jours ; — daiu une quinzaine. La semaine prochai?ie. Dans une semaine ; — dans huit jours. Vers la Jin de la semaine. De jour en jour. TJnjour on l^ autre. Tous les jours. Journellement. Quel est aujourd'hui le jour du mois? (Test aujourdliui le six, le sept, 8fc. 24. Du Temps. Quel temps fait-il f Quelle sjrte de temps fait-il? Fait-il beau? Fait-il beau temps ? Oui, il fait beau ; il fait beau temps. Le temps est au beau. Jl fait un temps superbe. 11 fait tin temps charmatit. II fait le plus beau temps du jnonde. II fait un temps lourd. Le temps est variable ; le temps est incon- stant. Le temps se couvj-e. Le temps est couvert ; le temps est charge. II fait mauvais temps, II fait bien mauvais temps. II fait un temps affreux. II fait du vent. Ilfait bien du vent. Le vent s^opaise. Le vent tombe. Le vent commence a tomber, ou a s^apaiser^ II fail du brouillard. II fait bien du brouillard. Le temps commence a s^eclaircir, Ilfait im temps doux. II fait chaud. Ilfait froid. II fait bien chaud. Ilfait bien froid, II fait une chaleur etouffante. II fait im tanps sec. Ilfait tin temps humide. Le temps est a la pluie. II va pleuvoir. Je sens des gouttes de pluie. II pleui, — ilfait de la pluie. y2 484 FAMILIAR SENTENCES. It rains very fast, It pours, 07' it is pouring, It is only a shower. It does not rain. The weather is stormy. We shall have a storm. There is a storm. Do you hear the thunder ? It thunders. It lightens, It has thundered and lightened all night, The weather clears up, The weather settles. It freezes. It freezes very hard, It freezes extremely hard. The river is frozen, There is ice. Is there ice ? The ice hears. We shall have some snow, It snows, — it is snowing. It hails, — it is hailing, It thaws, — it is thawing, It is dusty, — the roads are dusty, It is very dusty, The rain has laid the dust. It is very dirty. The streets are very dirty, The pavement is greasy (slippery,) The pavement is slippery, It is very bad walking, It is daylight. It is night. It is dark, It is very dark. It is a dark night. It is moon-light, Is it moon-light? The days decrease. The days begin to decrease. The daj-s are so short, I am hot, I am cold. Are you hot ? Are you cold ? I am veiy hot, I am very cold, I am quite wet, I am wet through, I am Avet to the very skin. Dry yourself. Jl pleut bienfort. Ilpleut a verse; ou, /a plide tombe a verse. Ce n'est qiiune ondte. 11 ne pleut pas. Le temps est a Parage. Nous aurons de Parage. II fait de forage. Eniendez-vous le tonnerre ? II tonne, — il fait du tonnerre. II tclaire. II a tonne et eclaire toute la nuit. Le temps s'eclaircit. Le temps se 7-emet au beau. II gele. II g tie t res-fort. II gele a pierre fendre. La riviere est prise. II y a de la glace. Ya-t-ilde la glace? La glace porte. Nous aurons de la neige. II neige, — il tombe de la ncige. II grele,—il tombe de la grele. II degcle. 11 fait de la poussiere. II fait bien de la poussiere. La pluie a abattu la poussiere. II fait bien crotte. ' Les rues sont bien crottees. Le pave est gras. Le pave est glissant. II fait bien mauvais marcher. Ilfaitjot/r. II fait nuit. 11 fait somhi'e. II fait bien nuit; il fait bien sombre. Il fait une nuit obscure, II fait clair de lune. Fait-il clair de lune ? Les jours diminuent. Les jours commencent a decroiire, a di" minuer. Les jours sont si courts. J'ai chaud. J^ai froid. ^vez-vous chaud ? Avez-vous froid ? J^ai bien chaud. J^ai bien froid. Je SDis tout trempL Je suis traverse. Je suis mouill'e jiisqu'' aux os. Sechez-vous. A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. 485 2b. To ask the Way, S^c. Pray, sir, which is the street of...? Is this the way to.... ^ Is this the v/ay to ^o to...? Is this the way that leads to...? Pray, which is the way to go to...? You are in the right way, How far is it from here ? Is it fur from here ? Is it very far from here ? No, it is not far, it is quite near here^ it is hard by. It is only two steps from here. It is only a short league, It is ahout a league. It is full a league from here, Which way am I to go ? Which way must I go ? Go straight on, — go quite straight on, Go to the right. Go to the left, You will turn to the ri^ht, at the first corner, then to the left, and then keep straight on, Where does Mr. L* '•' " live ? Do you know where Mr. L* " * lives ? Can you tell me where Mr. L'-''* * lives ? I do not know exactly ; he formerly lived at No. 10, Rtie de la Pair, but I think he now lives at St. Cloud, 25. Pout demander le Chemin^^c. La rue de..., s'ilvous plait, monsiew- ? Est-ce ici le chemin de...l Est-ce ici le chemin four oiler a...? Est-ce ici le chemin qui conduit a...? Quel est, je vous prie, le chemin pour a Her a...? Fous etes dans le vrai chemin ; ou, vous etes dans le droit chemin. Comhien y a-t-il ctici ? Ya-t-il loin d'ici? Y a-t-il bien loin d'ici ? Non, il ri'y a pas loin, c'cst tout prts d^ici. II n''y a que deux pas. ll n''y a quhine petite lieue. 11 y a a peu pres unc lietie. II y a line bonne lieue, ou il y a une grande lieue d^ici. Par oil faut-il aller ? Par oufaut-il que faille ? De quel cote faut-il que faille ? Allez tout droit. Allez a droiie. Allez a gauche. Fous tournerez a droite, au premier coin, puis a gauche, et ensiiite vous irez tout droit. Oil demeure M. L* * * 9 Savez-vous oii demeure 31. L* * * ? Pourriez-vous me dire ou demeure M. U^ * « 9 Je ne sais pas au juste ; autrefois il de- 7neurait, Rue de la Paix, No. 10 ; tnais je crois quil demeure a present a St. Cloud. 26. A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS; Or, A Collection of the Phrases, commonly occur in a Journey Return. I wish to take a place for Paris, I want an inside seat, I want a front seat, (or an inside seat with my face to the horses), I want a back seat, {or an inside seat with my back to the horses), I want an inside seat in the corner, I want a seat in the coupe, I want a seat in the rotonde, I w^ant an outside place, Directions, Observations, ^^c. that from Calais to Paris, and on the Je viens prendre ou je viens retenir tine place pour Paris. Je desirerais une place dans rint6rieur. Je desirerais une place du fond. Je desirerais une place de devant. Je desirerais une place de cote. Je desirerais une place de coupe. Je desirerais une place dans la rotonde. Je desirerais une place a Pexterieur ou sur la banquette ou Pimperiale. 486 A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. Quel numiro ai-je ? Quand part-on ? Demam au soir, a six heures. Comhien compte-t-on ch Calais a Paris f Trente-qiiatre posies^ et demie, par Amiens, et trente-deux et un quart, par Beati' vais. Oil couche-t-on ? Je ne sais pas j dema)idez aic conducteiir. Condncteur, couche-t-on en route ? Non, monsieur. S^arreie-t-o?i a Boulogne ? Oui, pour souper et changer de ckevaux. Oil dejeune-t-on demain ? A Abbeville. Tai un porte-manteau. J'ai line malle. Combien dois-je payer pour ma place 9 Cin quanie fran cs. Combien pour mes effets ? Douze, treize, 8fc. francs. Conducteur, ayez sain de mes effets. Conducteur, payez les postilions pour moi. Nous voila en fin emballts. He bien ! partons-nous 9 Nous voila enji7i partis. Nous voila enjxn en route. Cette voiture est bien douce. Voulez-vousme permettre debaisserki glace9 Cette voiture n^a pas de stores. Conducteur, faites arreler ; j'ai besoin de descendre ; — madame desii^e descendre. Ouvrez la portiere. Fermez la porlitre. Oil dhie-t-on 9 \ A Amiens. Oh descend la diligence 9 A la Posle Royale. Y dine-t-on bien 9 Tres-bien. Combien prend-on par iete 9 Combien par tete9 Quatre francs. Y est-on bien servi 9 Siiperieurement. Le vin y est-il bon 9 Excellent. Nous voila arrives. Je sors le premier. Madame, permettez que je vous offre la main. * The distances in France are calculated by French posts, which, with a trifling fraction, may be reckoned at 4^ English miles each. The distance from Calais to Paris is therefore nearly 155 English miles by Beauvais, and about 165i by Amiens. What is my number ? When shall we start ? To-morrow evening, at six o'clock, How far do they reckon it from Calais to Paris ? Thirty-four posts and a half, by Amiens, and thirty- two and a quarter, by Beau- vais, Where shall we sleep ? I do not know, ask the conductor. Conductor, do we stop to sleep on the road ? No, sir, Shall we stop at Boulogne ? Yes, to take supper and change horses, Where shall we breakfast to-morrow ? At Abbeville, I have a portmanteau, I have a box, How much have I to pay for my place ? Fifty francs. How much for ray luggage ? Twelve, thirteen, &c. francs, Conductor, take care of my luggage, Conductor, pay the postilions for me, We are at last packed up. Well ! are we going ? We are off at last, We are launched at last, This coach is ver)'- easy, Will you allow me to put down the glass, This coach has no blinds, Conductor, stop ; I want to get out ; — this lady wishes to get out. Open the door, Shut the door, Where shall we dine ? At Amiens, Where does the diligence put up ? At the Royal Post, Do they give one a good dinner there ? Yes, very. How much do they charge a head? How mAich a head r* Four francs, Is one well attended there ? Very well. Is the wine good there ? Excellent, Now we are arrived, I get out the first, Madam, allow me to offer you my hand, A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. 487 Mademoiselle, let me have the honour to present you my arm, The postilion. — Please to remeraher the postilion, sir, A. — the conductor paj's for me. Ask the conductor, Dinner is ready, take your seats, gentle- men, We are only allowed one hour for dinner, Some bread — beer — wine — water, if you please. Waiter, give a knife, — a spoon, — a fork, to madam, — to mademoiselle. The conductor. — Ladies and gentlemen, the horses are put to, we are going to set off. The maid. — Ladies and gentlemen, please to remember the maid. Come, let us start. The dinner was tolerable, — bad, — de- testable, It was a true stage-coach dinner. In general the inns where diligences put up at are bad, Besides one is always fleeced in them, We are off' once more, This coach is very uncomfortable, one is terribly jolted in it, Ah ! my back! One is very much confined in it, One is as if packed up. As close as herrings, Where are we ? At Chantill)', How far is it from here to Paris ? About five posts. Does the diligence stop here ? Yes, sir, to change horses. Have we time to take any thing ? Have we time to take some refreshment P No, sir. Shall we soon be at Paris ? We are arrived, sir, there it is before us, Where does the diligence put up ? At the Royal Messageries, rue Nutre- Dame-des- Victoires. To what hotel do you go ? To the Grand Hotel de Londres, Place P'endome ; or, to the Hotel de Rivoli, Rue de Rivol'i ; or else, to the Hotel Ti'agram, Rue de la Paix, Is one comfortable there, Yes, very. We are at last arrived, Mademoiselle, que j'aie I'honneur de vous offrir le bras. Le postilion. — Monsieur, n'oubliez pas le postilion. R. — Le conducteur paie pour moi. Demandez au conducteur. Le diner est pret, prenons place. On ne nous donne quune heure pow diner. Du pain — de la biere — du vin — de Veau, s'll vous plait. Gargon, dorinez un couteau, — ime cuiller, — une fourchetle, a madame, — a made- moiselle. Le conducteur, — iMesdames et T)Iess:eurs, les chevaux sont attetes, on va partir. La fiUe. — Mesdames et tnessieurs, n^oN- hliez pas lajxlle. Allons, partons. Le diner ttail passable, — mauvais, — de- testable. Cetait un vrai diner de diligence. En gkmral les auberges ok descendent les diligences sont mauvaises. Jit puii on y est vcorche, — ttnlle. Nous voilci encore unefois en route. Cette voilure est bie7i dure; on >j est hor- riblement cahote. Ah ! les reins ! On y est fort a I't'troif. On y est comme empnquetc. On y est serre comme des harengs. Oh somnies nous ? A Chantillij. Combien compte-t-on d^ici a Paris ? A pen pres cinq posies. La diligence arrete-t-elle ici ? Qui, monsieur, pour changer de chevaux, Avons-nous le temps de prendre quelque chose ? Avons-nous le temps de nous rafruichir 9 Non, monsieur. Sommes-nous enjin bientol a Pan's ? Nous y sommes monsieur ; le voi/li devant nous. Oh descend la diligence ? Aux Messageries Royales, Rue Notre- ^ Dame-des-Victoires. A quel hotel descendez-vous ? Au Grand Hotel de Londres, Place Ven- dome ; ou, a /'Hotel de Rivoli, Rue de Rivoli; ou bien, a /'Hotel Wagram, Rue de la Paix. Y est -on bien? Par/aitemenl bien. Nous voilci enJin rendus. 488 A JOURNEY FROM CALAIS TO PARIS. Sir, have you any luggage to carry? Yes, take this portmanteau, Take me to the Hotel Wagram, Rue de la Puix, Here it is, sir, I want a room with a single bed, I shall keep another for a gentleman whom I expect here, Is that gentleman arrived ? Yes, sir, he is in the cofFee-room, At what o'clock do we sup ? At half-past ten. Have the goodness to procure me a ticket-porter, — a valet de place. Is "there any J)! ay to-night ? Yes, sir. Is it well frequented P Pretty well. Have you seen the bill ? Yes, sir, What is the performance ? The FouRBEiiiEs dk Scapin. — The Mk- BECIN MalGRE LUI, &C. Where are the passports examined? At the Prcfechive de Police, Qimi des Orfevres, pres le Pont-neuf. Sir, I come to have my passport exa- mined and signed, I intend to remain liere only a few days. From here I return direct to Calais, I lodge at the hotel of... Is supper ready "^ Shall we soon sup ? Yes, sir, the supper is going to be put on the table, I shall retire early, I shall go to bed early. Chambermaid, take particular care of the sheets, and I shall remember you, When the person I mentioned to j^ou is arrived, inform me. If Monsieur Le Comte come and ask for me, shov/ him to my room. Should Madame Suint-Ange come again, ask her to wait, I shall be back about seven o'clock. Get my room ready, Let me be called to-moiTow, at seven, eight, &c. o'clock, I am going to bed ; a light, if you please, Take my boots and my coat, I set out to-morrow for Calais, Madam, my bill, if you please. Adieu, till my next journey, I am at last returned to Calais, Where is the steam-packet-office for Dover ? Monsiet/y, avezrvous des effels ci poHer ? Oui, prenez ce port^-manteau. Conduisez-moi a /'Hotel Wagram, Rue de la Paix. Nons y vnild, monsieur. Je voudrais une chambre a tin lit. Ten retiendrai une aidre potir tin mon- sieur que f attends ici. Ce mo7isieur est-il arrive. ?■ (\ui, monsieur, il est dans le cafe. A quelle heure soupe-t-on ? A dix hetires et dernie. Procurez-moi, je vovs prie. un commission- naire, — un valet de place. Y a-t-il spectacle ce soir ? Oui, monsieur. Est-il suivi ? Assez bien. Avez-vous vu Vaffiche ? Oui, monsieur. Que donne-t-on ? Les FoURBEIilKS DK ScAPIN. Le M6- DECIN MaLGRE LUI ; &c. OU fait-on viser les passe-ports ? A la Prefecture de Police, Quai des Or- fevres, pres le Pont-neuf. Monsieur, je viens /aire viser mon passe- port. Je ne compte rester ici que que Iques jours. Tfici je relourne direct ement a Calais. Je suis descendzi (on lege) a Pliotel de... Le souper est-il pre t ? Soupe-t-on bientot ? Oui, monsieur, on va servir. Je me retirerai de bonne heure. J'^irai me coucher de bonne heure. La Jille, je vous recommande surtout les draps,j'aurai soin de vous. Quand la personne dont je vous ai parle sera arrivee, avertissez-moi. Si Monsieur le Comte vient me demander, conduisez-le dans ma chambre. Si Madame Saint-Ange revient, priez-la d''attendre. Je rentrerai sur les sept heures. Tenez ma chambre prete. Faites-moi reveiller demain ci sept, huit, 8^c. heures. Je vais me coucher; de la lumiere^ s^il vous plait. Pre/: ez mes boties et mon habit. Je pars demain foiir Calais. Madame, mon compte, s^il vous plait. < Adieu, jusqu'' d mon pi'Ochain voyage. Me void enjin de retour d Calais. Oil est le bureau du paquebot d vapeur pour Dour res ? NOTES AND CARDS OF INVITATION. 489 Ver)' near here, sir, . Is Mr. D* * arrived by the packet to- day ? No, sir. Will you have the goodness, o/v^iH yon have the kindness to give him this note upon his arrival ? Yes, sir, with pleasure, Adieu, I am oif. Tout pres d'ici, 7nonsieur. M. />** est-il arrive par le paquebot de cejour ? No7t, mo7isieur. Voidez-vous avoir la bonte, ou — vouiez- vous hien avoir la complaisance de lui rcmettre ce billet a son arrivee ? Oui, monsieur, avec plaisir. Adieu, je pars. Models of Notes and Cards of Invitation, Ceremony, and Thanks. " 1^/ Note. Mrs. C** * requests the honour of the Misses G***'s company to a little dance, which she intends giving this evening. 8, Rue des Bons-Enfans. Tuesday, June 3(1. Answer. Misses G* * *'s respectful compliments to Mrs. C* * *, and will do themselves the pleasure to attend her polite invita- tion. 5, Rue de la Paix. Sunday morning. Id Note. Mr. and Mrs. D* * ''■' present their com- pliments to Miss L-'- * *, and request the favour of her company to dinner, on Saturday next, at seven o'clock, to meet a few friends. 10, Boulevard des Italiens. September 20th, 1827. !'■ Billet. Mme. C'-' * '•' donne ce soir un petit bal ; elle s'estimerait heureuse,si Mesdemoisclles Q* * # voulaient bien venir embellir sa petite fete, ainsi qu^elle a rhonneur de les en prier. Rue des Bons-En/ans, ]S'o. 8. Mardi, 3 Juin. Reponse. Miles. G* * * font leurs respectueux complimens a Madame C* * *, et elles au- ront Vhonneur de se rendre avec autant d^empressement que de plaisir a son aimable invitation. Rue de la Paix, No. 5. Dimunche matin. T'' Billet. M. et Mme. D'' ''•' * ont Phonneur de presenter leurs coynplimem a Mademoiselle £j* ■» *^ gi (Iq la pritr de vouloir bien aug- menter le petit novibre d^amis quails rc- uniront chez eux a diner Samedi pochain. On se mettra d table a sept heures. Boulevard des Italiens. No. 10. Ze20 Septembre,lS27. Ansioer, Miss L* * * returns a thousand com- pliments to Mr. and Mrs, D***, and will not fail to attend their kind invita- tion. 1, Boulevard des Italiens. Friday morning. Reponse. Mile. Lr * * dit mille choses honnetes a Monsieur et a Madame D''''^'^, et elle ne manquera pas de se rendre a leur aimable invitation. Boulevard des Italiens, No. 1. Fendredi matin. y 5 490 NOTES AND CARDS OF INVITATION. 3d Note. Mr. S* * presents his compliments to Mrs. C***, and be<^s the favour of her compan}-^ to-morrov/ evening, to tea and cards. 8, Place Vendome. Monday morning. Ist Answer. Mrs. C* * * begs to thank Mr. S* * for his kind invitation, which she is very sorry it will not be in her power to accept, on account of a concert which she has at home to-morrow evening. 2, Place des Victoires. Monday evening. 2d Ansioer. Mrs. C* * * feels very much obliged to Mr. S** for his kind invitation which she is very sorry she cannot accept, on ac- count of a similar engagement which she has for to-morrow evening. 6, Rue de Richelieu. Tuesday, May 21st, 1828. Ath Note. Mr. and Mrs. T* '■' * present their com- pliments to Mrs. L* * *, and request the favour of her compaily at a little concert •which they intend giving on Tuesday next. An answer is requested. Wednesday morning. \st Answer. Mrs. L* * * presents her best compli- ments to Mr. and Mrs. T" * *, and ac- cepts with pleasure their kind invitation. 4, Rue de Grammont. Thursday morning. 2d Answer. Mrs. L* * presents her compliments to Mr. and Mi-s. T* *, and is very sorry that a previous engagement for Tuesday will prevent her having the honour of waiting on them on that day. hth Note. Mr. L***. Mrs. de P* * * at home on Thursday next, the 7th of June, a dejeuner. She will depend upon seeing him, if she receives no answer. S"'^ Billet. Mi iS.* * fait bien ses amities a. Ma- dame C* * *, et il r invite a Vhonorer de sa compagnie, demain uu soir, pour h thk ei la partie. Place Fendome, iS^o. 8. Lundi matin. V" Reponse. Mme. C* * * fait mille remerc'imens a Monsieur S* * de so?i aimable invitation qu'elle est tres-fdchee de ne pouvoir ac- cepter, ayant elle-meme un concert, demain au soir. Place des Victoires, No. 2. Lundi soir. 2-^' Reponse. Mille remerczmens de la part de Mme. C * * * a Monsieur S * * pour son obli- geante invitation qu'elle est dholte de ne pouvoir accepter, a cause d'un engagement de meme nature qii'elle a pour demain au soir. Rue de Richelieu, No. 6. Mardi, 21 Mai, 1828. 4'"" Billet. M. et Mme. T*** presenletit leurs complimens a Madame IJ* * *, et its la prient de leur faire Chonneur d''assi^ter a un petit concert qiHls se proposent de don- ner Mardi pi^ochain. On desire une reponse. Mercredi m,aiin. 1" Reponse. Mme. L* * * presente ses complimens a Mo7isieur et a Madame T'''' * '■', et elle se fait un plaisir d' accepter leur aimable invitation . Rue de Grammont, No. 4. Jeudi matin. 2'^^ Reponse. Mme. Z* *, etant engagee pour Mardi, prie Monsieur et Madame 7'** d'agr'eer ses excuses et rassurance de tous ses re- grets. b-^' Billet. Mme. de P-'=** sera chez elle, Jeudi prochain ; elle aura beaucoup de plaisir a recevoir Monsieur L* * *, s^il veut hn faire ramitie de venir lid demander a dejeu>,er. Mme. de P"' * ''■' comptera sur Monsieur IJ'' '•' *, si elle ne re^oit point de reponse. NOTES AND CARDS OF INVITATION. 491 Ansiuer. Mr. L* * * sends his most respectful compliments to Mrs, de P* * *, and as- sures her that he could not receive a more gratifying invitation ; but, being unfor- tunately obliged immediately to leave town for the countr)'', he will be deprived of the pleasure of enjoying Mrs. de P* * *'s agreeable company. 1, Rue Neuve-de-Luxembourg. Tuesday morning. 6th Note, I invite you, my dear, to come and drink tea with me this evening ; I shall be alone, and hope you will favour me with your agreeable company : — do not refuse me this kindness. Adieu. Yoiir's truly, Adelaide. Ansiver. I return you a thousand thanks, my dear, for your kind invitation ; but having companj', this evening, I shall not be able to have the pleasure of seeing you. I am your's for ever, Emilia. Repo7ise. M. Z* * * -prhente ses civil it es ies plus respectueuses a Madame de P'-' * */ il ne pouvait recevoir tine invitation qui liti fut p/iis aqreable ; mais, malhew'eusement, il est oblige de partir incessamment pour ia campagne, ce qui le privera du plaisir inestimable de jouir de Paimable socicte de Madame de P* * *. Eue Neuve-de-Luxembourg y No. 1. Mardi matin. 6*"* Billet. Je vous invite, ma chere, d venir pren' dre le the, ce soir, avec moi ; je serai seufe, et fespere que vous voudrez bien me pro- curer le plaisir de voire charmanie com,' pagnie: ne me refusez pas cette grace. Adieu. Tout a voi/s, Adelaide. Repo nse. Je vous remei'cie mille et mxlle fois, ma chere, de votre cdniable invitation; mais ayant de la compagnie ce soir chez moi, je ne jjourrai pas avoir le plaiiir de vous voir. Je svis a vous pour toujours, Emilie. nth Note. Miss B* * *, finding herself obliged to go into the country to-morrow, desires Mr. D* " * not to give himself the trouble of calling. Miss B''' * * will be very glad to see Mr. D* * *, after to-morrow, at any hour which will be most convenient to him. 20, Rue Montmartre. Wednesday evening. 8th Note. Miss W^" * * presents her compliments to Mr. E***; as she is going to a ball this evening, she cannot have the plea- sure of seeing him ; and. begs he will have the kindness not to come before eleven to-morrow. 4, Rue de la Mounaie. Friday morning. 1'"' Billet. Mile. B* * * se trouvant ob/igee d'al/er demain a la campagne, prie M. £>*** de nc pas se donner la peine de pasier chez elle. Mile. 5* * * sera bien aise de voir Monsieur Z)* '■' '•', apres-demain, a I'heitre qui lui sera le plus convenable. Rue Montmartre, No. 20. Mercredi soir. 8"'" Billet. Mile. JV'-' ••• '•'■ souhaile le bonjuur a Monsieur E'-' '•"' "'7 commeelle va ce soir au bal, elle ne poitrra pas avoir le plaisir de le voir aujouyvf/if/i. Elle le prie de voutcir bien ne venir qu'a onze heures demam. Rue de la Monnaie, No. 4. Vendredi matin. 492 FORMS OF BILLS OF EXCHANGE. mhNote. Mr. T* * * feels much obliged to Mr. and Mrs. P* * * for the kind concern they have expressed during his indis- position, and begs to return his most sincere thanks. 12, Palais-Royal. Thursday morning. \QthNote. My dear friend, You will receive v/ith tbiis letter a necklace of fine pearls, which I intreat you to accept as a small testimony of the friendship between us. I enclose, at tbe same time, a few trifles for your two charming little girls ; they are the gifts of my Kloisa, who joins with me in hoping they will please you. Adieu. Believe me your's very tenderly, Adelaide. 9""^ Billet. M. r* * * est bien sensible a Pinttret que Monsieur et Madame P* * * ont bien voulu lui temoigner, en envoyant savoir de ses noKvelles, pendant son indisposition. 11 leur adresse ses plus unctres remercimens. Palais-Royal, No. 12. Jeiidi matin. W' Billet. Madame et chere amie, Fous recevrez avec cette lettre une parure de perles fines, que je vozis prie d'accepter comme un faible iemoignage de Pamitie qui nous lie. Je joins a cet envoi quelques bagatelles pour vos deux char- mantes petites filles : c'esl mon Elolse qui leur en fait hommage ; elle desire, ainst que moi, que le tout vous soil agreable. Adieu. Je vous embrasse tres-tendrement, Adelaide. Forms of Bills of Exchange. 1. Paris, le 6 Septembre 1834. Pour £1000 sterle. Monsieur, — a vue, {ou a huit, dix. quinze, &c. jours de vue,) il vous plaira payer, par cette premiere de change, (la seconde ne Fetant,) a M. R** *, ou a son ordre, la somme de mille livres sterl. valeur regue, q\ie passerez en compte, suivant I'avis de Votre tres-humble serviteur, ■ A Monsieur Harrison, negociant, J. A. Homerton. Cornhilh Londres. [1-] Londres, le 14 Novembre 1834. Bon pour 10,000 francs. Messieurs, — a trois mois de date, payez par cette seule de change, a I'ordre de Mesbieurs Bellex et C^^^ \^ somme de dix mille francs, valeur recue comptant, [ou en marchandises,) que passerez en compte, suivant I'avis de Vos tres-humbles serviteurs, A Messieurs Arden et Flint, Jones, Hankev, et Cie. Rue St.-Honore, a Paris. FORMS OF PROMISSORY NOTES, es Adjectifs de Nomhre Cardinaux, L'infanterie se monte a cent vingt-six hommes. — II nous doit mille quatre cent cinquante-six livres sterling. — Combien de jours y avez-vous ete detenu? Cent. — Combien de fusils ont~ils cora- roandes ? A peu pres mille. — Napoleon alia en Hussie, i'an mil huit cent treize ; et Louis dix-huit revint en France en mil huit cent quinze. — George quatre fut couronne en mil huit cent vingt, ou en mil huit cent vingt et un. — L'armee consiste de deux cent cinquante mille quatre cent vingt-cinq hommes, avec trois cent vingt-huit 8 DES ADJECTIFS DE NOMBRE ORDINAUX. pieces d'artillerie. — Combien de milles compte-t-on d'ici a la tour? — Soixante et un ou soixante-deux. — Je re^us hier cinq mille six cent quarante-six livres huit seheUings onze sous. — Nous ^tions vingt-huit personnes k table au dernier diner ; mais nous ne serons pas plus de quinze au prochain.— Voulez-vous me preter cent vingt et une livres seize schellings ? Je le ferais de tout mon coeur, si je le pouvais ; mais j'ai paye ce matin deux cent quatre-vingt-une livres, que je devais, etje n'ai pas un schelling de reste. — Quatre- vingt-onze livres et neuf livres font cent livres. — Soixante et uu schellings et neuf schellings font trois livres dix schellings. — Nous avons a present trois cents superbes fregates et deux cents vaisseaux de ligne pr^ts a faire voile — II y aura cent vingt dames ; mais je ne crois pas qu'il y ait plus de quatre vingts messieurs. — Nous etions six cent quatre-vingts au dernier bal; mais nous ne serons pas plus de trois cents au prochain. — Combien de dames y aura-t-il ? Cent. — Seulement cent! D'ou vient cela? Vous en avez invite quatre cents. — Je vais vous donner un repu pour quatre- vingt-une livres, si vous voulez. — Ne lui donnates-vous point huit cents livres, douze schellings ? Non ; il n'en avait besoin que de six cents. — Ce fameux acteur raourut I'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt. — Cet homme est riche de deux millions sterling. — II y eut qtiatre-vingt-quinze hommes de tues et trente-deux de blesses dans les deux premieres batailles ; mais il y en eut neuf cents de tues et sept cents de blesses dans la derniere. Theme XIV. Graw. page 50. Des Adjectifs de Nomhre Ordinaux. George trois etait bon, pacifique et bieuveillant; tandis que Napoleon premier etait guerrier et ambitieux. — Avez-vous vu Charles dix k la revue, ce matin? — J'ecrivis a votre frere, en Irlande, a ce sujet, le 9 Juin ; mais il me repondit, le 20 Juillet, qu'il avait intention de partir pour Paris, le premier d'Aoiit, si ses affaires le lui permettaient. — Votre lettre du dix d'Avril nous est parvenue le 15 de Mai. — Elle vint deux fois, hier; mais la pre- miere fois qu'elle passa, j'etais absent; et la seconde fois j'6tais si occupe que je ne pus pas lui parler.— lis y vont onze ou douze fois par an. — 11 nous envoie les papiers cinq ou six fois par semaine. — Combien de fois y avez-vous ete ? — Cent fois. — Voici la vingt et unieme ou la vingt-deuxieme lettre que j'ai recue aujourd'hui. — La personue qui vient de frapper k la porte a I'air extremement malade. — ^Elle est venue, au moins, cinquante fois, sans pouvoir vous parler. — lie biea, dites-lui que, si elle veut revenir, Vendredi prochain, h sept heures du soir, je la verrai sans faute. — J'ai fait cela mille fois. — N'est-il venu personne me demander aujourd'hui ? DES PRONOMS PERSONNELS. 9 — Oui; il y a deux messieurs qui vous attenclent dans la salle. — Ou demeure sa mere ? Dans Oxford-street, No. Tl ou 73. — Je vous demande pardon, c'est dans Parliament -street, No. 90. — Votre cousine ne demeure-t-elle pas, Cheapside, No. 31 ? Non ; c'est dans King-street, No. 12. — Si vous voulez aller dansle Strand, No. 41, vous verrez quelqu'un qui desire vous parler. — Nous avons demeure quinze ans dans la cite, et vingt et un a i'autre bout de la ville. — Mon pere vient tous les matins a la ville, et il retourne, le soir, h. la campagne, apres avoir fait sept ou huit visites qu'il ne manque jamais de rendre. — Londres, le 12 Septembre, 1826. — Mardi, vingt-quatre. — Venez Vendredi ou Samedi. Theme XV. Gram, page 53. Des Pronoms personnels je, ta, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, employes comme sujet du Verbe. Vous parlez trop vite. — II lit tres-bien. — Elle ne danse pas bien. — Ils viendront si le terns le permet. — Est-elle belle? — ^Pieut-il? — Oui ; il a plu toute la matinee. — Je crois qu'il fera beau temps aujourd'hui. — Irez-vous a la comedie ce soir? — Non ; je vais a la campagne. — Si vous ne venez pas passer la journee avec moi, je ne vous invitcrai plus. — Avez-vous tini votre lettre? Non; pas encore. — Ne vous a-t-il point envoye votre habit? — Oui; je viens de le repevoir. — Combien vous a-t-il cotite? — Six guinees et demie. — Vend-elle des gants? — A-t-elle dejeune? — Parlez-vous Francais? — A quelle heure dinent-ils? — A cinq heures. — Quelle heure est-il k present?- Trois heures et demie.— Quel est, je vous prie, le chemin pour aller au pare? — Lui et votre soeur y etaieut. — Vous et moi, nous irons ensemble, — Eux et votre fille ailerent, hier au soir, k I'opera Anglais. — Est-ce lui qui etait si fache ? — Etaient-ce eux qui frappaient a la porte? — Non; c'etait moi. — Leur frere est plus grand que moi ; mais il n'est pas si tort que moi. — Lui seul pent faire cela. — Ce ne sera ni lui ni moi. — Cette dame soutient que cette proposition est vraie ; et moi, je pretends le contraire.- — Vous me elites qu'elle est raorte, et lui, il dit que cela n'est pas. — Nous irons faire un tour de promenade, ce soir, vous, votre mere et moi. — Moi, j'ai dit cela! — Lui, il fera cela! — Je ne le crois pas. — Moi, reveler le secret de mon ami! — Non, jamais. — Qui vous parlait? — Lui ou M'"^ ^y * * * — Vous aimez la viile, et moi, j'aime la campagne. — Regardez ce magnifique edifice ; il reunit la grace a la beaute, et lelegance k la simpiicite. — Voila un beau poirier ; il fleurit tous les printems, cependant il produit rarement aucun fruit. 10 DES PRONOMS PERSONNELS. Theme XVI. Gram, page 56. Des Pronoms petsonnels me, te, le, la, lui, leur, y, en, em- ployes comme objet du Verbs. Avez-vous vu Charles dix?— Oui; je I'ai vu plusieurs fois ; mais je ne lui ai jamais parl6.-- Je les connais tres-bien de vue. — La croyez-vous ? — Negligez les plaisirs de la vie ; les peines qui les suivent prouvent leur vanit6. — Jupiter irrite que Saturne lui teadit des pieges, prit les armes centre lui, le chassa de son royaume, et le forca a quitter le ciel.— L'admirez-vous? Oui; et je I'aime de tout mon coeur. — Pour lui plaire, il ne faut jamais la flatter. — Je vous ecrirai dans deux ou trois jours. — Ne le voyez- vous point quelquefois? — Oui; je le rencontre frequemment h. la bourse. — La prosperite nous fait des amis, et I'adversite les ^prouve. — Y avez-vous pense?— Non; je I'ai tout-a-fait oublie. — Pensez-y pour Diraanche prochain. — N'y pensez pas davantage. — Quand la verite paralt dans tout son eclat, personne ne peut y resister. — Dites-moi la verite. — Ne lui dites pas que vous m'avez vu. — Ne me parlez pas. — Vos chiens ont faim et soif, donnez-leur k manger et a boire. — Je m'adresserai a vous. — Ne vous fiez pas k lui. — Elle vint a moi, et me pria d'aller avec elle. — Vous ne pensez jamais a moi. — 11 a affaire a vous.— Nous aurons recours k elle, si nous avons besoin de quelque chose. — C'est a vous et k moi. — lis en appelerent k moi. — 11 n'y fait jamais attention. — Cet argent est a moi.— Je vous pardonne, et k vous et a elle, parce que j'espere que vous vous comporterez mieux a I'avenir. — Voulez-vous faire cela pour moi? — 11 depend de vous de meriter son estime. — Je n'ai i pas pitie d'eux. — J'ai recours k eux. — Venez me parler. — Allez vous I habiller. — Hepondez-moi. — Allez a lui. — Ecrivez4ui. — Pardonnez- ; leur.— Ecoutez-moi. — Pr^tez-nous ce livre.— Je ne saurais, il faut i que je le rende aujourd'hui.— Cela vous appartient, a vous ou k i votre soeur. — Ce n'etait pas a vous, mais k monsieur que je parlais. ] — S'est-il plaint de moi? — Nous nous moquions de lui. — Je m'ea ^tonne. — En ^tes-vous bien aise? — Non ; j'en suis bien f^che. — La ; vie est un don de Dieu : en disposer est un crime. — Gardez ceci j pour moi, et prenez cela pour vous.— Pisistrate dit d'un homme ; ivre qui avait parle centre lui : je ne suis pas plus fAche centre lull que je ne le serais centre un aveugle qui se serait jete centre moi. | — Que servent les richesses a un avare] II n'en fait aucun usage.) Theme XVll. Gram, page 59. j Des Pronoms possessifs. /I Men pere, ma mere et mes soeurs I'aimaient tendrement. — Sai femme est tres-laide. — J'ai parle a son mari. — Son esperance estj DES PRONOMS D^MONSTRATIFS. 11 mal fondee. — Son fils n'est pas fort savant. — Quel age a sa belle- mere ? — Son esprit, ses talens, son honnetete et son bon nature!, le font admirer de tout le monde. — Mes principes, mon gout pour I'etude et mon amour de la retraite, m'ont fait choisir une vie re- tiree. — Si vous desirez d'obtenir ma faveur et ma protection, ne parlez pas mal de moi. — II a re^u ces presens de mon oncle et de ma tante. — Enverrai-je ce faisan k votre ami? — A-t-elle perdu tout sonbien? — Nous attendons une lettre de notre correspondant de- main. — N'avez-vous point encore re9U de nouvelles de votre aimable cousine ? — Tous leurs projets ont echoue. — Votre grand-pere vit-il encore ? Oui ; mais ma grand'-raere est morte.- — Ailons, amis, vo- lons a la gloire. — Comment vous portez-vous, mes enfans? — Faites mes amities a vos soeurs. — Votre mere y est-elle? jSon ; mais mon pere y est, et il sera bien aise de vous voir. — Vos nieces apprennent- elles le Fran9ais? — On ne peut pas tou jours satisfaire ses desirs. — Ma maison et la votre sont tres-mauvaises ; mais je crois que la mienne est un peu meilleure que la votre. — Est-ce son humeur ou la votre qui vous emp^che de bien vivre ensemble ]— Si c'est la votre, il vous est aise d'y apporter remede, en prenant sur vous- meme; si c'est la sienne, redoublez d attention, de complaisance, et de bons procedes ; il est tres-rare que ce moyen ne reussisse pas, — Tous les tableaux sont arrives d'ltalie, excepte les votres, les siens et les miens, qui viendront demain. — Nous savons quels sont vos amusemens a la ville, tandis que vous n'avez nuUe idee des notres a la campagne ; mais je vous assure que les notres sont infiniment preferables aux votres. — I!s nous ont rendu notre musique, ob. est la leur? — Notre champ est cultive, le leur ne Test pas. — Ses moeurs sont bonnes, les leurs sont corrompues. — Mes livres sont neufs, les siens sont vieux. — Portez ceci a mon fils, et ceia au v6tre. — Vous pouvez euvoyer ces pistolets a leur maison de cam- pagne, si vous voulez ; mais non pas a la mienne. — Eile a appris sa lefon ; et lui, il n'a pas appris la sienne. — II a trouve une de vos cravates parmi les siennes. — Une de mes cravates, dites-vous ? montrez-la-moi. Non, ce n'est pas k moi, c'est a mon frere.— J'ai vu hier un de vos compatriotes. — Voila un de ses tours. — Voulez- vous porter cette montre a votre soeur ? Je crois que c'est a elle. — Est-ce-la votre surtout] — Non; ce n'est pas a moi: je n'en ai pas apporte. — Je croyais que c'etait a vous.— Avez-vous reellement entendu cela ? Oui; je I'ai entendn de mes propres oreilles. — Que ne me croyez-vous, quand je vous dis que je I'ai vu de mes propres yeux? Theme XVIII. Gram, pageG\, Des Pr ononis cUmonstratifs. Ce portrait est de toute beaute. — Le terns de la vie est court, 12 DES PHOI^OMS E^El^ATIFS. celui de la beaut6 Test encore davaiitage. — Ces p^ches ne sont pas aussi mures que celles que j'achetai hier. — Nous donnarues I'argent a cet liomrae. — Kegardez le bee de cet oiseau. — Y a-t-il loin d'ici k cette maison 1 — Le bonheur Sterne! est infiniment au-dessus de celui qu'un horame peut posseder dans ce monde. — Le climat de i'Angleterre n'est pas comparable k celui de la Suisse. — Cette haine, long-tems contenue, eclata, et fut la malheureuse source de ces terribles evenemens. — Quelle robe lui preterai-je? — Celle que vous montr^tes k M^"^ g***^ I'annee derniere. — Je viens d'acbeter ces deux parapluies de soie; celui-ci me co^te vingt-quatre schellings, et celui-la trente. — Ne parlez de cela k personne. — Si elle fait cela, elle s'en repentira. — Ceci est-il bon a manger?— Cela est tres-mau- Tais a boire. — Portez ceci a Madame, et gardez cela pour vous- meme. — Que veut dire oeci? — Voyez comme ces hommes et ces femmes jouent ensemble ! — ^Cyrus commen^a la monarchie de Perse, et Ninus celle d'Assyrie. — Vous ne devriez pas vous fier k ceux qui sont interesses a vous tromper, — II peut conter ces histoires k ceux qui voudront bien I'ecouter. Theme XIX. Gram, page ^Q. Des Pronoms relatifs. Le monsieur qui est a la fenetre. — La dame qui vient de sortir. — ' L'oiseau qui chante sur cet arbre est tr^s-beau. — C'est le jeune homme que vous m'avez recommande. — Les pommes que vous avez apportees sont toutes g^tees. — Renvoyez-moi le dictionnaire que je vous ai pret6. — Les enfans qui sont obeissans sont aimes de tout ie monde. — Qui vous a donne cela? — Qui avez-vous rencontr6 dans la rue? — -A qui ailez-vous ^crire? — De qui avez-vous reyu ces lettres? — A qui desirez-vous parler? — A qui est cette maison? — A qui sont ces gants] — Lequel de vos freres apprend le Francais? — A laquelle de ces maisons voulez-vous aller? — De laquelle de ses soeurs a-t-il re^u des nouvelles? — Voilk du vin rouge et du via blanc, duquel vou!ez-vous? — Quelle faute a-t-elie commise pour la punir si severement? — Quelles sont les nouvelles aujourd'hui? — Quels sont ses motifs? — Quelle satisfaction! — A quel hotel allez- vous? — De quelle grammaire vous servez-vous? — Qu'ai-je fait? — Que veut-il? — Que vous disait-elle? — Quefaisaient-ils l^?- Qu'avez vous fait de votre argent? — En quoi ai-je n6glige de remplir mon devoir? — De quoi I'accuse-t-on?^ — A quoi s'applique son frere? — A quoi visent-ils? — L'bomrae dont le g6nie est grand et sublime comme la nature. — La dame dont vous admiriez tant I'esprit et les talens. — Napoleon dont on vantait tant la grandeur d'^me, et k la valeur de qui les Fran9ais doivent tant de victoires, est mort a I'^ge de quarante-cinq ans. — L'homme dont la couduite estreguliere DES PRONOMS INDEFINIS. 13 et dont les actions sont irreprochables, est cent fois plus heureux que celui qui passe sa vie dans la dissipation et I'iniquite. — C'est une ferame aux caprices de qui je ne me soumettrai jamais. — Nous avons des fleurs etrangeres dont I'odeur est tres-agreable. — N'est- ce pas la la demoiselle dont votre mere se plaint? La providence, sans le secours de laquelle nous ne pouvons reussir. — La fille de Minos donna un fil a Thesee, au moyen duquel il sortit du la- byrinthe. — Les Alpes sur le sommet desquelles regnent des neiges et des glaces perpetuelles presentent, au soleil couchant, le spec- tacle le plus imposant et le plus magnifique que Toeil ait jamais contemple. — La personne dont vous aviez si grand' pitie est morte. — La bonne reputation dont iljouit. — Avez-vous vu la maison dont je vous ai parle ? — L'argent dont j'avais besoin etait pour le soulagement de cette malheureuse famille.-^Voilace dont je voulais vous parler. — La personne a laquelle je me fiais le plus m'a trompe. — C'est un malheur auquel je ne m'attendais pas. — Les dames de qui j'ai refu cette nouvelle sont allees en Amerique. — La paresse est un vice auquel les jeunes gens sont tres-enclins. — Si j'avais su I'etat deplorable auquel elle est reduite, je lui aurais prete de l'argent. — Les etudes ausquelies il s'applique, ne sont pas fort difficiles. — C'est le monsieur apres qui je courais. — Londres et Paris sont deux grands theatres sur lesquels les horames sont toujours masques.- Qui va la? — A qui m'adresserai-je ? — Quel terrible accident! — Quel est votre avis sur cette affaire? — Que faites-vous la? — Le theme, que je vous ai donne k ecrire, est-il trop difficile? — Le vin, que nous bumes hier, n'etait pas fort bon. — C'est une demoiselle, qui chante bien, qui joue de plusieurs in- strumens, et qui est admiree de tout le monde. — N'est-il pas nialheureux cet homrae qui aime la ville et habite la campagne? Theme XX. Gram, page 71. Des Pronoms Indejinis. Y est-on bien servi? — Qui; tres-bien. — On est toujours mieux chez sol qu'ailleurs. — Vous refevrez deux lettres ; dans Tune vous trouverez un billet de change, et, dans I'autre, deux billets de banque. — M""* L * * * m'a dit que votre mere se porte beau- coup mieux. — Mon pere fut attaque par quatre voleurs, en re- tournant chez lui, hier au soir. — Sa soeur fut malheureusement mordue par un chien enrage.— Parle-t-on de paix? — On attribue Tinvention de la poudre a canon a Berthold Scherward de Fribourg. — On dit que les Fran^ais ne reussiront pas en Espagne. — On dit que les Espagnols ont gagne la derniere bataille. — On me le dit hier. — Que dit-on de nouveau? — Kien. — Croit-on que le Marechal N * * * soit acquitte? Non ; on croit qu'il sera condamne k mort. — • c 14 Si I'on faisait la paix, j'irais en France. — On apprend mieux ce que Ton comprend, que ce que Ton ne comprend pas.— Faites cela, ou Ton vous punira. — On le lui a mande. — Apportez vos papiers et on les examinera. — On fait souvent courir de faux bruits. — Que dit-on, en Angleterre, de la guerre d'Espagne? — On m'enverra du fruit de la campagne. — On aime une femme aimable, on la cherit, on I'adore. — Quelqu'un me I'a dit. — Eh bien, quiconque vous I'a dit avait tort. — Quelqu'un lui a-t-il ecrit? — 'rout le monde le croit. II n'est venu personne aujourd'hui. — Nous n'avons vu aucun de ses amis. — EUe ne sait rien. — Cnacun a sa maniere de penser et d'agir. — Chaque pays a ses lois et ses usages. — Nul homaie n'est exempt d'erreur. — 11 n'y avait pas une seule dame. — La m^me chose ne plait pas en tout tems. — Plusieurs Je disent. — II ne fait rien. — Quand on s*applique k plusieu»'s sciences k la fois, on reussit rarement dans aucune. — Telle ou telle chose. — Quelque merite qu'il ait, il ne reussira jamais.— Quelques services que vous m'ayez rendus, j'en ai 6te reconnaissant. — Quelles que soient votre naissance et votre Elevation, vous ne devez mepriser personne.— Quelque folles que soient les modes, on les suit. — Quoi qu'il arrive, donnez- m'en avis. — Tous les horames et toutes les femmes sont mortels. — Tons leurs amis y etaient-ils? — Tout ce qu'e'le dit n'est pas vrai. — Ne parlez pas mal d'autrui. — Un autre ne se serait pas comporte de cette maniere. — lis viendront tous les deux. — Vous pouvez I'un ou I'autre me rendre ce service. — lis ne savent quoi faire, ni I'un ni I'autre. Theme XXTI. Gram, page 167. De Viisage des Negatives, ne, pas, point, &c. Les demoiselles S*** n'excellent pas dans la musique. — Vos freres n'ont pas fait de progres dans I'ltalien. — Ne la connaissez-vous point? — Elle avoua qu'elle ne m'aurait pas parle, si elle n'avait pas eu besoin d'argent. — 11 est tres-desagreable de ne pas parler Fran- cais. — Que j'etais contrarie de ne pouvoir aller avec eux! — Com- ment se porte Madame votre mere? — Pas tres-bien, Madame ; elle eut encore une rechute hier. — Passerez-vous chez Lady D*** au- jourd'hui? Non, monsieur; je crois qu'elie est allee a la campagne; de plus, je n'ai pas le plaisir de la connaitre. — Qu'elle m'ecrive ou uon, je n'irai pas. — Voulez-vous me donner une pomme, ma chere? Nenni, monsieur, elles ne sont pas k moi, — Le proverbe, ** point de vertu, point de bonheur," n'est pas si vrai que celui-ci, ** point d'argent, point de Suisse." — II n'est pas tres-recherche dans ses habits, quoiqu'il se mette toujours tres-proprement. — Je ne puis aller les chercher. — Ses parens sont dans un etat tres-miserable, ils n'ont point d'argent, point de moyens d'en gagner, et point d'amis DE LA NEGATIVE NE. 15 sur qui ils puissent compter. — He bien ! je leur donnerai quelques secours, non que je croie qu'ils le meritent, mais pour I'amour de leurs enfans. — C'etait un fruit delicieux; mais nous n'en avonsplus. -^^Vous ne le verrez plus apres cette semaine. — Mon petit garpon n'a pas plus de six ou sept ans. — lis ne sont pas plus avances qu'ils etaient quand ils vinrent a la ville. — Elle ne sait ni lire ni ecrire. — Vous n'avez mis ni sucre ni lait dans mon cafe. — Je ne I'aime ni ne la hais. — Elle ne me plait, ni ne me deplait. — Ils ne s'en soucient pas, ni moi non plus. — Pourquoi dites-vous cela, puisque vous savez qu'elle ne parle pas Anglais ? — Je n'ose le lui dire. — II y a des gens qui ne cessent de se plaindre de la fortune, quoiqu'ils soient combles de ses faveurs. — Le terns passe ne revient jamais, et un mot, une fois prononce, ne pent se rappeler. — Ne parlez jamais raal d'autrui. — Je n'approuve nuUement sa conduite. — Aimez vos enfans, ne les bl^niez jamais sans raison, et ne les reprimandez jamais avec colere. — II est noble de ne jamais tromper personne. Y consen- tirez-vous? Non ; jamais. — Jamais je n'ai vu rien de semblable.— Jamais homme n'eut plus de succes avec si peu de merite. — Je ne bois jamais d'eau. Theme XXIII. Gram, page 170. De la Negative ne. II se flatte plus qu'il ne devrait, et il loue les autres moins qu'ils ne meritent. — Ma soeur 6crit beaucoup mieux qu'elle ne parle. — ]y|eiie ])*** ggj. j-Qy^ autre qu'elle n'^tait, quand elle nous quitta. — lis parlent autrement qu'ils ne pensent. — M'^^L*** n'est pas mieux qu'elle etait hier; et je crois que sa sante ne se r^- tablira jamais, a moins qu'elle n'aille k la campagne. — II vaut mieux differer un peu que de les poursuivre k present. — Nous sommes plus nombreux que quand nous etions en France.— A moins que vous ne le punissiez severement, il n'etudiera pas. — Attendez un moment, de crainte que mon pere ne vienne et qu'il ne vous voie. — Je ne vous pardonnerai jamais, a moins que vous ne lui demandiez pardon. — lis ne partiront pas que vous ne soyez de retour. — Attendez qu'il ne pleuve plus. — II m'ecrivit deux mois avant qu'il partit pour les Indes. — Elle avait si grand' peur que je ne vous le disse, qu'elle me fit promettre de ne jamais prononcer son nom en votre presence. — M*^* S*** tarde bien ce soir ; je crains qu'il ne lui soit arrive quelque malheur. — M^^'^ X*** est allee voir sa cou- sine ; mais le terns est si mauvais que nous craignons qu'elle ne re- vienne pas ce soir. — lis ne craignent pas du tout qu'il les gronde. — Ils trerablent qu'il ne les rencontre.— Je n'ai pas peur de lui parler ; mais je tremble d'adresser la paroled sa femme. — Je vais sortir ua moment, prenez garde que I'enfant ne tombe. — Je doute qu'il lui en 16 DES INTERROGATIONS ET DES ADVERBES. ait parle. — Prenez garde de tomber.— II ne le fera pas, de crainte de vous deplaire. — Theme XXIV. Gram,, page 173. Des Interi'ogations, Sortirons-naus aujourd'hui? — Voulez-vous venir prendre le the chez nous ? M'appelle-t-on ? — L'aime-je plus tendrement que je ne devrais ? — Puisse-je vivre pour voir ces jours heureux !— Dusse-je y perdre la vie, je jure que je la delivrerai de Tesclavage auquelelle est reduite. — Est-ce que je dors k I'eglise? — Est-ce que je vends des livres inapies? — M^* T*** joua-t-il hier au soir ? — Oui ; il rem- plit le role d'Henri Quatre. — Quelqu'un vous a-t-il dit cela? — La compagnie est-elle arrivee ? — A quelle heure le. diner sera-t-il pret ? — La servante ne vous a-t-elle pas dit qu'il n'est pas eveille? — Pourquoi M'"' T*** n'a-t-il pas accepte les deux efFets que j'ai ap- portes ce matin ? — M"^' P*** est-il au bureau 1 -La fille allait-elle au marche quand je la rencontrai hier? — M'"^ q*** est-elle chez elle ? — Oui, monsieur, elle est a s'habiller. — Le maitre de musique n*est-il pas ici? — Non; il vient de sortir. — Que vous disaient ces dames? -Combien vous a coute cet habit? — Combien de soeurs a M'- N***?— Comment se porte M^- Z***?— M^"^ g*** ne viendra-t- elle point ce soir? — Oil est allee Mademoiselle ?— Par o\x est allee la dame? — Dans quelle annee Louis Seize fut-il couronne? — Com- bien de tems regna-t-il ? — Comment votre soeur trouva-t-elle son chemin hier au soir? — Pourquoi ne m'attendit-elle pas ? — Est-ce I^ votre chapeau? — Oui; ce Test; donnez-le-moi. — N'est-ce pas 1^ votre voiture? — Non ; ce ne Test pas. — 6tait-ce R votre maison ? — Oui; ce I'etait. — Sont-ce Ik vos chevaux ? — Non; ce ne les sont pas. — Vous parlez Fran^ais, n'est-ce pas? — lis demeurent k la campagne, n'est-ce pas? — II 6tait marchand de charbon, n'est-ce pas? — lis viendront, n'est-ce pas? — Est-ce qu'il pleut? — Est-ce qu'elle est morte ? — Est-ce que vous n'allez pas quelquefois h. I'opera! Non, jamais. Theme XXV. Gram, page 175. Des Adverhes, On se repent rarement de parler peu, mais souvent de parler trop. — Ne faites jamais a autrui ce que vous ne voudriez pas qu'on vous fit. — J'ai toujours conseille a mes enfans de se bien conduire, et de ne jamais faire tort a personne. — Les courti- sans passent souvent toute leur vie dans I'espoir de parvenir a des honneurs qu'ils n'obtiennent jamais. — Votre lettre est tres-mal ecrite ; je crains que vous ne I'ayez ecrite k la h^te. — II DES PREPOSITIONS. 17 fait tres-mal de permettre k ses filles de frequenter si souvent les spectacles. — Si vous n'evitez pas le jeu, vous en acquerrez insen- sibiement le gotit. — Remplissez bien votre devoir, et vous meriterez son estime. — Je ne crois pas qu'elle ait bien fait d'envoyer son fils k Paris pour apprendre les mathematiques. — On enseigne beaucoup mieux le Fran^ais en Angleterre qu'en France. — Interpretez favo- rableraent les actions d'autrui, et ne pensez pas mal de votre pro- chain. — Si elle avait agi conforraement aux regies de I'honneur et de la justice, personne n'aurait parle mal d'elle. — Nous dejeu- n^mes, hier, k la Franfaise, et, aujourd'hui, nous dinerons k I'An- glaise. — Ce qui se fait avec plaisir se fait ordinairement bien. — II vient assez souvent. — lis ont beaucoup trop de confiance en lui ; ils sen repentiront certainement. — En voila bien assez, je vous reraercie. — Elle est aussi bien chez vous qu'ici.— Ces fleurs-ci ne sen- tent pas si raauvais que celles-la.— Qu'elle chanta faux toute la soiree ! — Vous prenez beaucoup trop de medecine, cela detruira votre constitution. — Si elle desire de se retablir, il faut qu'elle boive beaucoup moins de vin. Theme XXVI. Gram, page 179. Des Prtpositions, On va a present en deux jours de Londres a Paris, et, en deux heures, de Paris k St. Cloud. — Nous allames de Suisse en Italic, et d' Italic en Turquie — Vous passez reellement tout votre teras k aller de boutique en boutique, de rue en rue, et de place en place. — Y a-t-il loin d'ici au Pare du Regent? — II me fit attendre depuis huit heures du matin jusqu'a quatre heures de I'apres-midi, et, apres tout, je ne pus pas lui parler. — Nous revinraes, hier, de chez M'"^ L*** en quatre heures. — Quand allez-vous chez Lady D***? — En allant, ce matin, au palais du roi, j'ai rencontre Lord S *** qui revenait de la tour avec sa dame et ses enfans. — Nous sortons tous les jours, depuis sept heures du matin jusqu'a neuf, et nous etudions depuis dix heures jusqu'a une heure, et quelquefois jusqu'k deux heures.— Ce malheureux accident m'arriva vers le soir. — Je passerai chez vous sur les une heure pour arranger cette petite affaire. — Nous attendons nos batimens des ludes Occidentales, vers le milieu d'Aout. — Elle vous ecrira vers le douze. — A quelle heure pass^tes-vous hier chez moi ? — J'etais chez vous sur les dix ou les onze heures. — II y avait environ trois cents personnes k Tassemblee, cette apres-midi, dans une salle d'environ cinquante pieds de longueur et de trente-cinq de largeur.— II y aura k peu pres vingt boisseauxdefroment. — Je n'ai point d'argentsur moi. — Je verrai M'* L * * * dans trois ou quatre jours touchant cette affaire. — Le prince partira dans deux heures pour Hichniond. — Combien de terns sera- C 2 18 DES CONJONCTIONS ET DES INTERJECTIONS. t-il a y aller? — A peu pr^s une heure et demie. — J'y allai, Tautre jour, en une heure vingt minutes. — Dans Tautoinne et dans Thiver je couche en ville ; mais dans le printems et dans I'ete je reside k la campagne. — Nous ne sortons jamais en Pabsence de notre pere. — Nous avons tire sur vous k trois mois de vue, et nous nous flattons que vous ferez honneur a notre demande. — Vous serez ravi de Fentendre jouer de la harpe. — Dites-leur qu'ils re9evront de mes nouvelles a la premiere occasion. — Quel est le chemin pour aller a I'opera? — Prenez la premiere rue adroite, puis la se,conde a gauche, et vous verrez I'opera devant vous. — A la nouvelle de son arrivee, nous partimes ^ cheval pour Londres. — Nous les rencontr^nies qui allaient a pied a la foire. — Mettez vos bottes ou vos souliers. — Avancez. — Elle a voyage par toute I'Afrique et I'Amerique. — Ayez patience, I'operation sera bient6t finie. — Quoique les m^decins i'aient abandonnee, j'espere qu'elie se retablira. — Je me ferai un plaisir de vous rendre ce service, a mon retour du continent. — Chacun agit a sa raaniere et suivant ses desirs. — Ma fille aime a s'habiiler a la Franyaise, et moi, j'aime k m'habiller a I'Angiaise. — Avez-vous des has a trois tils ] — Ne vendez-vous pas ce raisin k la livre ? — Les murs de cet ancien chateau sont b^tis k chaux et k ciment. — Je vous prends a teraoin que nous nous battrons a Tepee. — Cela n'est pas tout-a-fait a mon gout. — Leur maison est situee dans un lieu charmant qui presente a la fois une belle vue de la mer, de la ville et de la campagne. — Cette demoiselle est extraor- dinairement habile; elle enseigne k dessiner, k chanter et a danser. — Vous verrez la meme chose dans tons les pays; en France, en Angleterre et en Italic. —Je laissai mes gants, hier matin, sur mon lit ou sur le votre. — A la campagne, ils passent tout leur terns dans la mollesse et I'oisivete, tandis qu'en ville, ils sont occupes a leur Fran^ais, a leur Italien et a leur musique. — J'allai I'ann^e derniere en Pologne, en Allemagne, en Suede et en Russie. — Je crois que j'irai cette annee en Angleterre, en Ecosse et en Irlande. — Dans notre voyage en Italic, nous allames a Florence, k Venise et k Rome. — Nous revinmes a Londres par Geneve et par Douvres. — N'etes-vous pas redevable de la vie aux soins de toute espece qu'elie vous a rendus pendant votre maladie en Amerique ? — Com- ment pouviez-vous, sans craiute et sans pudeur, tenir de tels propos ? Theme XXVII. Gram, page 184. Des Conjonctions et des Interjections. Ils n'epargn^rent ni enfans, ni femmes, ni vieillards.— Elle n'a i ni honneur ni decence — Venez ici que je vous parle. — Au moment j que nous mourons notre sort est determine pour toujours.— Nous I DES IDIOTISMES. 19 ne partirons pas qu'il ne soit jour. — Attendez qu'il ne pleuve plus. — Un avaie aurait tout I'or du monde, qu'il ne seraitpas content. — Puisque vous avez eu tant de malheurs, et que vous ne pouvez pas payer vos dettes, vous devriez composer avec vos creanciers. — Puisqu'elle a tant de perfections, et que vous I'aimez si tendrement, pourquoi ne I'epousez-vous pas ? — A moins que votre pere ne me paie la moitie de ce qu'il me doit, et qu'il ne me donne caution pour le reste, je le poursuivrai. — Quoiqu'ils possedent de grands biens, et qu'ils jouissent de tons les plaisirs de la vie, ils ne sout pas heureux. — Je sais qu'elle tremble que son maitre nela renvoie. — Le roi etait a peine arrive, qu'il tit illurainer les jardins. — Les dames etaient a peine descendues de voiture, qu'il commenca a pleuvoir. — Que cet homme est malheureux ! il ne reussit jamais dans aucune chose. — Qu'elle ressemble a sa mere ! et que de charmes elle deploiedeja! mais de combien d'adulations n'est-elle pas I'objet! — A, combien de dangers ne suis-je pas journellementexpose '. — Que je meure si je lui en ai jamais parle ! — Nous irons, demain, a la campagne, s'il fait beau tems. — Je vous menerais avec moi, si vous vouliez lui demander pardon. — Us ne savent pas s'il viendra. — Dites-leur, quand vous les verrez, qu'aussitot que je recevrai des nouvelles de leur frere, jele leur feral savoir. — Ecrivez-nous aussitot que vous y serez. Theme XXVIII. Gram, page 186. Des Idiot ismes. Cas oil Ton doit exprimer le Verbe to be par le Verhe avoir. J'avais grand' faim et grand' soif. — J'aurais honte de lui parler. — — Elle avait chaud, et elle s'enrhuma. — Us ont peur de moi. — Avez-vous froid aux pieds? — Je n'ai pas tres-froid aux pieds, parce que j'ai marche vite ; mais j'ai si froid aux mains que je ne puis taiiler ma plume. — Vous avez beau lui faire des re- montrances, elle ne con viendra jamais qu'elle ait tort, quoiqu'ellp soit pleiuement convaincue qu'elle n'a pas raison. — Quel ^ge ont vos soBurs ?— L'ainee a vingt-cinq ans, et la cadette aura quinze ans i\ Noel prochain. — Cette chambre a cent pieds de longueur, sur cinquanle de largeur et vingt de hauteur. — Le clocher de cette eglise n'apasquatre cent vingt-cinq pieds, septpouces, de hauteur, et cent treize de diametre. — il y avait dans le Perou une mine de quinze ou seize cents pieds de profondeur. — Je croyais que cette montagne avait trois mille pieds de hauteur, et mille de circonference. — II se- rait inutile de leur ecrire a la campagne, puisqu'ils parteut, demain matin, pour le continent, oil ils ont intention de passer tout i'ele. 20 DES IDIOTISMES. Theme XXIX. Gram, page 188. Cas oil les Terns du Verhe to be doivent s'expr inter par ceux du Verbe unipersonnel y avoir. Tl y avait beaucoup de monde au pare, dimanche dernier. — Y avait-il bien des dames? — Je croirais qu'il y en avait au moins trois ou quatre mille. — II y a des gens qui sent trompeurs. — Combien y a-t-il de Londres a Plymouth?— Une tres-grande distance; presque trois cents milles. — 11 n'y a pas loin de Paris k Rheims ; mais il y a tres-loin de Rome k Moscou. — 11 y a vingt-sept milles de Douvres a Calais. — 11 y a vingt ans qu'elle est marine.-- 11 y a quatre jours qu'ils sont partis. — Combien d'habitans y a-t-il a Paris ? — II pent y en avoir septou huit cent mille. — Savez-vous combien de membres il y a dans la Chambre des Communes? — 11 y en a six centcinquante- huit. — J'^tais aux courses d' Epsom, il y a quelques annees, oil je fus temoin d'un accident tres-f^cheuxquiarrivaaun des spectateurs. — Un de mes amis recut une letire de la campagne, il y a huit ou quinze jours, dans laquelle on lui mandait que bien que les pluies eussent ete tres-abondantes, elle n'avaient pas encore fait de tort aux bles. — 11 n'y a pas uu mois que vous me pri-ites de Vous preter cinquante livres sterling. — M*"* P*** mourut, il y a environ six semaines, d'un coup de sabre, qu'il rep ut a la t^te, I'hiver dernier, sur la route de Douvres. Theme XXX. Gram, page 189. Cas ou les differens Terns des Verbes to be et to do s^expriment en Fran^ais par ceux des Verbes faire et se porter. II fait bien froid ce matin ; cependant, je ne crois pas qu'il fasse tout a fait si froid qu'il faisait hier et avant-hier. — 11 faisait exces- sivement froid, la semaine derniere. — 8'il fait beau tems demain, et que les chemins ne soient pas trop crottes, nous irons a la campagne. Le tems a ete tres-inconstant tout I'^t^, nous n'avons pas eu une seule semaine de beau tems continuel. — Le tems n'est pas sihumide au midi de I'Angleterre qu'il I'est au nord. — Fait-il beau tems au- jourd'hui? — Non ; il fait tres-mauvais tems. — Le tems est si va- riable dans ce pays, qu'il fait quelquefois le plus beau tems du monde le matin, et deux heures apres, il fait un tems lourd, som- bre et pluvieux, qui est tres-prejudiciable k la sante.— Les jours commencent a decroitre rapideraent; il fait nuit k sept heures. — II fait tres-mauvais marcherquand le pave est si glissant. — S'il fait jour, nous partirons certainement k quatre heures.— Quel tems fait-il cette apres-midi? — Je ne sais pas, je ne suis pas sorti. -Quand nous etions en ville, la semaine derniere, il faisait tres-mauvais tems ; mainte- nant que nous sommes k la campagne, il fait ues-beau ; je suis DES IDIOTISMES. 21 presque sAr que si nous retournions k la ville, il ferait encore maii- vais terns. — Comment vous portez-vous ce soirl Tres-bien, je vous remercie. — Comment se portent votre pere et votre mere? — lis se portent passablement bien. — M^'^^ A*** se porte-t-elle mieux? — Non; elle est encore tres-indisposee. — Avez-vousvu vos cousines depuis peu? — Comment seportent-elles? — Pas tres-bien, Monsieur; jyjeiie Q. * * * g^ yjj g^Qg rhume, et sa soeur est encore tres-boiteuse; je crois reellement qu'il en sera d'elles, comme il en a ete des demoiselles W * * *. H6 bien, ne vous ai-je pas dit qu'il en serait de vous, comme il en a ete de votre frere? Theme XXXI. Gram, page 191. Cos oil Von doit se servir de il est, il etait, il sera, &c. et de c'est, c'etait, ce sera, &c. 11 est bien malheureux qu'il n'ait pas r^ussi.^ — Ne serait-il pas expedient de lui ecrire? — C'est, certainement, une tres-bonne pensee. — 11 est si incertain quand ils reviendront. — Avez-vous €ntendu parler de I'horrible meurtre de M^"^ p * * ?— Qui ; cela fait frissonner d'horreur. — C'etait une fort jeune demoiselle qui m'en apporta la nouvelle, et I'aimable enfant s'evanouit en prononcant le nom de la victirae infortun^e. — N'etait-ce pas M"^^ ^ * * * qui vous grondatant, k la revue, I'autre jour? — Non ; c'etait sa soear. — Est-ce la premiere fois que vous I'ayez vue] — C'est la troisieme ou la quatrieme fois qu'il est venu pour vous payer. — Est-ce vous qui en parities le premier? Non ; c'etait elle. — S'il n'etait pas si tard, je serais charme d'etre de la partie. — Ceci est-il pour moi ou pour vous? — Ce n'est ni pour I'un ni pour I'autre de nous; c'est pour la soeur de M'* D * *. — Si Ton nereprimandaitpas cet homme sur sa conduite inf^me, ce serait autoriser le vice. — Je crois que c'est la jalousie qui vous fait tenir ce langage. — Quelle heure est-il? — 11 est onze heures. — Est-il reellement si tard? Oui. En ce cas il faut que je vous quitte sur-le-champ. — Aliens, Messieurs, eveillez- vous, il est terns de se lever; il est presque huit heures. — Huit heures! c'est impossible; il n'y a que trois heures que nous sommes au lit.— J'ai vu M^^'« F * * *, ce matin, et je lui ai deraande a quelle heure le concert commencerait ; elle m'a dit que ce serait a neuf ou k dix heures du soir. — N'etait-ce pas k midi que vousviiites Samedi? — Non; c'etait sur les deux heures de I'apres-midi. — Ce ne sont pas ceux qui parlent beaucoup qui sont le plus estimes.— C'etaient les f ranjais et les Russes qui commencerent cette guerre honteuse et deshonorable. — Ce ne seront pas elles qui auront I'honneur d'ouvrir le bal. — Sont-ce les honneurs auxquels il a ete si injuste- ment eleve qui le rendent si fier et le font nous raepriser?— Etaient- 22 DES IDIOTISMES. ce eux qui vous sauverent la vie, quand votre maison 4tait en feu? —-Non; c'etaient leurs voisins.— C'est k eux a commander, eta vous d'obeir. — N'etait-ce pas a eux que vous prlt^tes cet argent? — C'est k vous que je parle. — Seraient-ce eux qui....? — Non ; ce sont MM. Stewart et C"'^ Theme XXXII. Gram, page 193. Avoir mal a, au, k la, a 1', aux. J'ai grand-mal aux yeux, au cou et au c6te. — Qu'a M^^^^ H***? — EUe a mal k la gorge, et elle ^prouve une grande oppression dans la poitrine. — J'ai si mal aux yeux, que je ne puis les ouvrir. — Quand j'etais jeune, j'avais souvent mal k la t^te; maintenant que je suis vieux, j'ai si mal aux jambes, que je ne puis me tenir debout. — Vous ne sauriez croire combien mon pied me fait mal. — M™^ 'j' *** a eu un violent mal de dents toute la nuit. — Mon bras me fait tres- mal.— Ce pauvre enfant a mal partout; son mal de tete lui est revenu, et ses yeux lui font plus mal que jamais.- — Elle a grand mal k I'estomac. — Mon epaule ne se gu6rit pas, et la tete me fait encore mal. Theme XXXIIl. Gram, page 195. Cas oil must s'exprime en Francais par il faut, il fallait, &c. II faut que votre scEur vienne, elle-m^me, chercher son livre, parce que je ne sais pas oil elle I'a mis. — II faut leur ecrire tout de suite. — II ne faut pas faire cela. — Faut-il y aller? — II faut qu'une femme ait beaucoup de circonspection. — II faut aller voir mes filles k la carapagne.— II faut que nous ache- tions un cheval, a la premiere occasion. — Je crains qu'il ne faille aller k Bath, pour arreter le paiement de ce billet. — Faudra-t-il leur donner du tems? — II faut ^tre tres-patient pour soufFrir ainsi sans se plaindre. — II faut encourager les jeunes gens et assister les vieillards.— II me faut un nouvel habit. — II faut k mon frere une paire de bottes, etdeux ou trois paires de souliers. — II vous faut une paire de gants noirs pour assister k I'enterrement, et une paire de blancs pour I'opera. — II faudra qu'ils prennent une maison en ville. — Croyez-vous qu'il soit necessaire que mes nieces y soient? — On m'a dit que ses cousines ne se conduisent pas tout- ^-fait comme il faut. — Sa femme parle toujours de vous comme il faut; je puis merae ajouter, avec le plus grand respect et la plus grande estime. — II ne s'en fallait pas de beaucoup que la somme entiere n'y fut. — Combien s'en fallait-il que la somme entiere n'y fut? — II s'en faut beaucoup qu'elle soit aussi belle que sa soeur. SYNTAXE DE l'ARTICLE. 23 Theme XXXIV. Gram, page 197. Des Verbes defectifs, may, will, would, can, shall, sJiould, could, might, and ought, r Voulezvous me preter le livre doiit je vous parlai, il y a quelque tems? — Oui, je le veux bien, pourvu que vous me le rendiez dans deux ou trois jours. — Voulez-vous me donner votre bague ? — Non, certainement, je ne le veux pas. — Savez-vous I'ltalien ? — Oui; je le sais. — Je vous obligerais tres-volontiers, si je le pouvais. — Ce jeune homme sait-il bien tenir les livres? — Je ne sais pas; mais il le devrait. — Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de mettre cette lettre k la poste, pour moi? — Oui; je le ferai, avec plaisir, si vous voulez me preter un parapluie. — II faut lui dire qu'il devrait vous mener au spectacle, trois ou quatre fois par an. — Si les Fran^ais avaient voulu poursuivre les Russes, ils auraient pu prendre toutes leurs munitions. — J'aurais pu finir mon dessin aussitot que vous, si j'avais voulu, mais il n'aurait pas ete si bien execute qu'il Test. — II aurait dii lui faire visite, puisqu'il savait qu'elle etait de retour. — Je sais que je pourrais avoir fini mon ouvrage avant vous, sije voulais ; mais de quelle utilite serait-ce? — Sij'etais ^ votre place, je voudrais qu'il me pay^t sur-le-champ, quoique je ne voulusse pas qu'il en souffrit. — He bien ! laquelle de ces deux montres voulez-vous? — Elles sont reellement si jolies, que je les voudrais toutes les deux. — Elle est si ignorante, qu'elle ne sait ni lire ni ecrire. — Cette temp^te dura si long-tems, et fut si violente, que vous devriez vous en souvenir. — Je ne crois pas qu'il doive pardon- ner ^ sa soeur, avant qu'elle ne lui demande pardon. — Croyez-vous qu'elle vint avec nous, sije i'en priais. — Oui ; je suis sur qu'elle ne vous refuserait pas. — Est-il probable que vous eussiez pu obtenir le consentement de son pere, si je ne lui avais pas parle en votre faveur? Theme XXXV. Gram, page 202. Syntaxe de V Article. Cas ou Von emploie V Article defini en Francais. Le^' dames croient que le Latin et le Gr^c ne sont pas aussi necessaires que I'histoire, la geographic et Jes math^raatiques. — La fortune est une divinite capricieuse. — La gloire, les richesses, la noblesse et la puissance, ne sont que des noms imaginaires. — La charite est la plus grande de toutes les vertus chretiennes. — L'orgueil et la vanite ont souvent ete la source de bien des erreurs. — La platine est beaucoup plus dure que Tor, mais elle n'est pas aussi precieuse que le diamant. — Le bon champagne se vend, en France, huit ou neuf francs la bouteilie. — Corabien la soie vaut- elle I'aune dans ce pays.'' — Le pain coute deux sous la livre en 24 France. — Nous avons du tabac h. trois sous I'once. — Je lui donne soixante guinees par an, la table et le logement. — On lui donne dix ou onze schellings, par semaine, pour ses menus plaisirs. — Combien prenez-vous par le9on ? — Suivant les circonstances ; quelquefois une demi-guinee, et, quelquefois, seulement cinq ou six schellings. — On dine a cet hotel k quatre schellings par tete. — J'aime mieux le vert que le rouge, parce qu'il ne blesse pas tant la vue. — Le manger et le boire sont necessaires k I'homme. — La bonne et la mauvaise compagnie ont chacune leurs partisans. — Le vertueux et savant M^. C*** mourut k I'kge de trente-trois ans, k son chateau pres de Windsor, et laissa la plus aimable des femmes et quatre charmans petits enfans. — Nous primes le premier et le second etage du No.9, Piccadilly ; et le troisieme et le quatrieme, Cheapside, No. 54. — Quoique vous disiez que le Franpais et I'ltalien sont les plus belles langues de I'Europe, et les plus faciles a apprendre; cependant, je donne la preference a FAnglais et k TAllemand, — J'ai souvent admire le flux et reflux de la mer ; mais pas autant que j'adraire la belle harmonic des cieux, et la revolution reguliere des etoiles et des planetes. — Qui aurait cru qu'il se {At debarrasse si facilement des tours et sinuosites de ce fleuve? — Monsieur le Colonel, serez-vous des n6tres k diner, aujourd'hui? — Monsieur le fripon, s'il vous arrive jamais de remettre les pieds ici, je jure que je vous casserai le cou. — Mesdemoiselles les pa- resseuses, qu'avez-vous fait toute la matinee ?— Nous avons appris nos lemons de Franyais. — Les demoiselles de cette pension se con- duisent si bien, que tout le monde les admire. — On attend, tous les jours, la visite de la Princesse de Galles, chez M""^ la Comtesse de T * * *. — L'Europe, I'Asie, I'Afrique et I'Amerique, sont les quatre parties du monde. — La France, I'Angleterre, I'Espagne, la Russie, I'Allemagne, la Suede, la Prusse et I'ltalie, sont les plus beaux royaumes de I'Europe.— Le Rhone, le Rhin et le Danube sont de tres-grands fleuves ; et le Mont-blanc, les Alpes et les Pyrenees de tres-hautes montagnes. — Je viens de recevoir une lettre de mon frere qui est arrive de Prusse la semaine passee ; il me mande qu'on attend, tous les jours ,en Angleterre, le roi d'Espagne et I'lmperatrice Marie. — Quand votre frere partira- t-il de France pour le Portugal ] Dans dix ou douze jours. — J'ai vu a Vienne, les Empereurs de France et de Russie, et les Rois d'Angleterre et de Prusse, diner ensemble dans un superbe pavilion eleve expres pour Toccasion. — Croyez-vous que les peuples de I'Europe soient plus civilises que ceux des autres parties du monde? Sans doute.— Jusqu'ou s'etendent les limites de la France?— Je ne saurais vous le dire; mais celles de la Suisse et de I'ltalie s'eten- dent jusqu'ici.— Si vous croyez que les cotes de I'Angleterre soient ornees d'aussi belles maisons de plaisance, et qu'elles ofl^'rent k la vue d'aussi riantes perspectives que celles-ci, vous vous trompez bien. SYNTAXE DE L^ARTICLE. 25 — Combien de terns avez-vous demeure en Angleterre ? Sept ans. — Et en Hollands? Cinq ans et demi. — Rest^tes-vous long-lems en Italie, quand vous fites le tour de I'Europe ? Seulement deux mois. — Et en France ? Trois ans. — Tons mes amis sont a present en Amerique. — Nous avons intention d'aller en Prusse eten Suede, I'annee prochaine. — Quand partez-vous pour I'Ecosse et I'Irlande ? — Dans trois ou quatre mois. — Mon neveu part, la Semaine prochaine, pour les Indes occidentales, oiX il a intention de passer cinq ou six ans.— Avez-vous ete au Japon et a la Chine? — Le gouverneur du Canada n'est pas tres-populaire. — lis vont, cette annee, aux Tndes Orientales. — 11 est alle a Terre-Neuve. — Mr. E * * * est arriv^, hier, des Indes Occidentales, et il a intention de partir, le mois prochain, pour le continent. — Ira-t-il au Mont-Blanc? II en parle ; mais je ne crois pas qu'il en ait le terns avant I'hiver. — Le royaume de Naples et les Etats de Venise ne sont pas fort puissans. Theme XXXVI. Gram, page 206. Cas oil Von ne doit pas faire usage de V Article en Fran^ais. Dieu est Tetre supreme qui gouverne tout par sa puissance et sa sagesse. — Oxford, Bath et Brighton sont trois belles villes. — Quand partez-vous pour Paris? L'ete prochain. — Venus etait une des deesses k qui les Paiens offraient leur eneens et leurs sacri- fices.— Alexandre-le-Grand et Napoleon sont les deux plus puis- sans monarques qui aient jamais regne. — Quelle difference entre la morale du Dieu des Chretiens et celle des dieux des Paiens ! — On eleva une superbe statue au dieu de la guerre en raemoire de cette brillante et k jamais memorable victoire sur les Thraces. — Les Paiens avaient un grand nombre de dieux et de demi-dieux. — Venez ine voir Lundi ou Jeudi. — Septembre et Octobre sont deux beaux mois en Angleterre. — Les ouvrages du Dante ne sont pas mieux Merits que ceux du Tasse.— Elle a intention de quitter ^ la Saint- Jean ou a la Saint-Michel. — Livre premier.— Chapitre second. — Section douzieme. — Regie septieme. — Tome six. — Article trois. — Proclamation de sa majeste George Quatre. — Nouvelle grammaire de la langue Franfaise. — Reflexions generales sur les progres de la religion Chretienne parmi les Paiens. — Vie du tres-regrette Mon- sieur D * * *. — Le due de * * * * demeurait autrefois, Pail-Mall, No. 21, quartier St. James ; mais je ne crois pas qu'il y demeure ^ present. — Histoire de France depuis mil huit cent, jusqu'a I'abdica- tion de Napoleon-le-Grand. — Je ne trouve partout que basse flat- terie, injustice, interet, trahison, fourberie. — Avez-vous jamais en- tendu ces proverbes? ** Pauvrete n'est pas vice;" " Contentement passe richesse." — Aliens, amis, volons k la gloire ! — Fleurs char- luantes ! par vous, la nature est embellie ! — Garden, donnez-nous D 26 SYNTAXE DE L'ARTICLE. une bouteille de Madere.— Ecoutez, la fille, ayez soin de mettre des draps blancs a mon lit. — La femme aux huitres, je voudrais vous parler. — Quel bruit terrible font ces enfans! — Je ne savais pas que le due de * * * fut prince du sang. — 11 a ete accuse de felonie, crime puuissable de mort. — Ayez pitie des pauvres. — Prenez garde de lui faire peur. — Vous tremblez de froid, venez vous chauffer.— George Trois agit toujours en bon roi et en bon pere.— II ne sait ni histoire, ni geographie, ni niath^matiques.— Je n'avais ni encre, ni papier. — Soit negligence ou oubli de sa part, le billet ne fut pas presente en terns. — Jamais horame ne fut plus cruel. — Vous ferez mieux de ne pas y alier en Tabsence de M™* N * * *.— Pensez tou- jours que vous etes en la presence de Dieu. — Quoique vous ayez ete condamne a mort, ayez confiance en la raisericorde du roi, peut- etre vous pardonnera-t-il. Theme XXXYI. Gram, page 210. Continuation des Cas ou ran ne doit pas faire usage de Varticle en Franfais. Mon pere etait lieutenant des gardes du corps sous Napoleon. — Son frere etait Colonel du dix-huitieme regiment.— Etes-vous Frau- fais ou Anglais? — Non ; je suis Ecossais. — Elle est Italienne. — Je ne suis ni Portugais ni Espagnoi; je suis Irlandais. — Une de lues soeurs est marchande de modes, au coin de Regent-street ; et mon frere aine est chirurgien a la campagne.— Ce miserable raourut athee. — II fut elu membre du Parlement pour le corate de Mid- dlesex. — Ce jeune ecclesiastique sera bient6t eveque. — Le meilleur cafe vient de Moka, viile de TArabie-Heureuse.— Son pere n'etait- il pas general? Non ; il n'etait que major. — Nous avons ete dans la Norrnandie, province de France.— Apelie etait peintre; Phidias, sculpteur; Tite-Live, historien. — Socrate etait un philosophe dis- tingue; Harvey un medecin de grande reputation.— Ciceron etait un grand orateur, et Virgile un excellent poete.~Mon cousin est ojKicier aux gardes. — Qui est ce monsieur qui parle a cette belle dame? — Cest un capitaine de ma connaissance. — Et celui qui est pr^s de lui?— C'est M^ L** * I'avocat. — Ne faites pas attention k ce qu'il dit; ce n'est qu'un enfant.— Connaissez- vous ces dames? — Qui, ce sont des danseuses de I'op^ra. — Qu'avez-vous intention de faire de vos deux tils ? — Je crois que je ferai un negociant de I'aine, et un agent de change du cadet. — A vez-vous ete chez M""- S * * depuis peu ? Qui ; n'est-ce pas un palais que sa raaison ? —Nous sommes exposes, dans ce monde, k toutes sortes d'infir- raites et de dangers. — 11 ra'ordonna une mixtion de rhubarbe, de nitre, et d'autres drogues. — Les hieroglyphes des Egyptiens etaient des figures d'hommes, d'oiseaux, d'animaux et de reptiles. — Voila deux sortes de pommes, desquelles aurai-je le plaisir de SYNTAXE DU SUBSTANTIF, ETC. 27 vous servir? — J'ai une tabatiere d'or, qui m'a cotite vingt-cinq livies sterling. — EUe porte toujours des bas de sole. — Dites au maitre de musique, quand il viendra, que je ne puis pas le voir aujourd'hui. — Gar^on, donnez-nous une bouteille de vin du Rhin. — La fille de chambre est-e!le en haut? — Peu de gens savent se contenter du pur necessaire. — Je doute qu'ils aient deux quintaux de Sucre dans leur magasin.— La plupart des jeunes gens se vantent trop, — Les femmes ont souvent trop de sensibilite.— Je n'ai point des sentiraens si bas. — Ecoutez, ma chere, ne donnez jamais des conseils qui puissent vous attirer des reproches. — Les cfiemins sont bordes de lauriers, de grenadiers, de jasmins, et d'autres arbres toujours verts et toujours jfieuris. — 11 n'est pas digne des honneurs qu'on lui rend. — IVf. C * * * precha, hier, pendant deux heures, avec force et eloquence. — Le quarante-deuxi^nie regiment combattit, avec le plus grand courage et la plus grande intrepidite, contre les Franfais et les Espagnols. — Elle passe tout son tems k aller de boutique en boutique, et de place en place. Th^me XXXVII. Gram, page 214. Syntaxe du Sitbstantif^ ^c. II faut observer les regies de I'honnetete, de la bienseance et des bonnes mceurs. — II n'y a point de pays qui ait autant de riches mines d'or et d'argent que le Perou. — La loi divine prescrit Tobeissance aux rois, aux raagistrats, et ^ tons les superieurs. — Je ne crois pas que le chapeau de votre soeur soit ici, ^ raoins que jVfme ^* « * ,^g pgjj. jj^jg dans la chambre ^ coucher. — Avez-vous, dans votre bibliotheque, I'histoire d'Angleterre par Hume? — Non ; raais je i'ai fait demander chez mon libraire, et il doit me I'envoyer deraain. — L'aimable disposition de M"^^ L * * * et sa grande activity excitent mon admiration. — Je suis revenu hier, ^ pied, de chez M. T* * •*", en deux heures, sans ^tre fatigue. — 0\X est la pelisse de ma mere? — Celle-ci est ^ ma so^ur. — Voulez-vous me donner le parapluie de M. W * * ?_M^'i^ A * 'a une belle paire de boucles d'oreilles qu'on lui a envoyee d'Amerique, avec un superbe schall des Indes.-J'ai besoin d'un etui de chapeau de carton.— Je doute qu'il y ait un meilleur cheval de main dans toute I'Angleterre. — Vous devriez garder des amies a feu dans votre chambre ^ coucher, pour votre surete pendant la nuit. — Cest ce que je fais, mais elles sont inutiles, parce que je n'ai point de poudre k canon. — Cette maison consiste en deux grandes offices et une salle a manger au rez de chaussee, deux sallons au premier, six chambres k coucher au second, quatre au troisieme, deux cabiiiets d'aisance, un grand jardin, et plusieurs autres commodites. — La ferame au lait est a la porte; oil avez-vous mis le pot au lait? — Ya-t-il autant de vers ^ 28 SYNTAX E DE l'ADJECTIF. sole en Suisse qu'en Italie? — Venez-vous du marche aux herbes?— 'Non; je viens du marche au foin. — Allez k la poissonnerie, et t^chez de trouver un bon saunion ; passez ensuite chez le boucher, et lui dites d'envoyer une poitrine de veau. — Dites k la femme aux huitres d'appeler fhomrae aux lapins, qui est de Tautre cote du chemin. — Combien de marchands de vin ya-t-il dans cette ville? — Trois. — Ce canape et ce fauteuil sont rembourr^s de crin.— Envoyez- moi deux langues de mouton, et de la marmelade de coing. — Con- naissez-vous une bonne pension de dames oh je puisse envoyer ma petite fille? Non; je n'en connais point. — Quel beau bouquet de roses! — Je puis sauter par dessus ce ruisseau k pieds joints; et vous, le pouvez-vous?— Non ; je ne crois pas que je le puisse. — Irons-nous k cheval ou k pied? Je prefererais beaucoup d'y aller en bateau. Theme XXXVIII. Gram, page 217. Syntaxe de VAdjectif, La victoire, que Napoleon remporta dans ce pays, fut desavanta- geuse aux Fran9ais et prejudiciable aux Anglais. — Cette dame est cherie de son mari; il la caresse, il I'adore. — lln'est pas improbable que la feue reine n*ait eu plusieurs bonnes qualites. — Je fus oblige d'attendre une demi-heure. — Donnez-moi une demi-livre de sucrcc — II y a k peine une demi-lieue d'ici. — Je ne puis pas y aller en une heure et demie. — Le mendiant k qui j'ai donne I'aumone, ce matin, 6tait nu-t^te et nu-pieds. — II avait les jambes nues. — lis firent, hier, cinq lieues et demie, en six heures et demie. — M"^. T*** joue avec une noblesse et un goAt charmans. — Les Fran^ais se battent avec une intr^pidite et un courage etonnans. — Je n'ai jamais vu de dame qui reunit une douceur et une egalite d'esprit simerveilleuses. — La modestie et le desinteressement meritent d'etre loues et admires, quand ils viennent de motifs bons et louables. — Son fr^re et ses sceurs ne sont pas heureux. — Toute leur vie n'a 6te qu'un travail, qu'une occupation continuelle. — De grands evenemens et de grandes revolutions arriverent k sa mort. — Ne me donnez pas un livre long et ennuyeux, ou je ne le lirai pas. — Qu'ai-je k re- douter d'un roi juste, bon et clement? — L'experience apprendra toujours qu'une vie mod^ree, reglee et laborieuse, fortifie la sante, tandis qu'une vie dissipee et oisive la detruit. — Voulez-vous me montrer la lettre de ce grand jeune homrae k sa chere et tendre amie? — Oui, la voici, mais prenez garde de la perdre. — Une autre fois, je vous ecrirai une longue et charmante lettre; aujourd'hui, je n'ai que le tems de vous dire que la charmante petite enfant de j^me g*** est morte. — Personne n'ignore que la langue Fran- caise, TAnglaise et I'Espagnole le cedent k i'ltalienne en dou- DE LA PLACE DE L'ADJECTIF, ETC. 29 ceur; niais, aussi, tout le raonde convient que la Fran^aise I'em- porte sur toutes les autres en clarte et en beaute. — Je suis charnie de vous entendre dire que ces fleurs sentent si bon. Theme XXXIX. Gram, page 219. De la Place de VAdjectif. XJne femnie airaable repand sur tout ce qu'elle dit una grace inex- primable. — J'aime un jeune homme qui suit les bons conseils qu'on lui donne. — Cetait un grand horaime. — Regardez ce grand hornnie sec. — II avait un habit bleu, bien fait, et de drap superfin. — Dans quinze jours ou trois semaines, les jours seront longs et beaux. — Mon petit neveu vient tres-regulierement, tous les premiers jours de I'an, me souhaiter une bonne et heureuse annee. — Outre les difFerens appartemens dont je vous ai parle, il y a un tres-grancl cabinet contigu k la cuisine, dans lequel deux domestiques pour- raient tres-bien coucher. — En entrant dans la chambre de mon ami malade, je trouvai un tres-jeune docteur qui querellait, avec un fort habile homrae de ma connaissance, sur la cause de I'indisposition du malade. — Mon cher enfant, votre fiere n'est-il pas egalement cher ^ votre pere que vous ? — Est-ce la une action digne d'un homme qui se vante d'etre civil et olEcieux envers tout le monde ? — Hier, votre soeur avait I'air tres-triste ; je crains qu'elle n'ait eprouve quelque f^cheux contre-tems. — La semaine derniere, nous resumes des Indes une nouvelle fort affligeante ; c'etait la mort de la fille du gouverneur, demoiselle remplie des charmes les plus attrayans, et sur qui reposaient les esperances les plus flatteuses. — Votre fils a fait des progres etonnans dans ses etudes. — Ntiv-York^ en Amerique, est une vills bien peuplee. — Un esprit prevenu est la source d'erreurs innombrables. — Tout ministre, qui prefere le bien public a son interet particulier, est aime de ses compatriotes. — Qu'est-ce que c'est que la geographie? — C'est la description du globe terrestre. — Je suis extremement fache que I'incomparable auteurde Vert-Vert soit movt. — Le seul litqu'il y eiiitdans sa maison etait une natte d^ jonc grossiere. Theme XL. Gram, page 225. Du Regime ou Compltmeni des Adjectifs, Cela est tres-doux au toucher. — Hien n'est plus desagreable au goAt. — II est difficile d'expliquer d'une maniere satisfaisante une science si abstruse. — Qu'y a-t-il de plus dangereux pour I'innocence que de tendres entretiens? — Qu'un enfant soit attentif a ses etudes, sensible aux reprimandes, et docile aux volontes de ses maitres. — Si je n'etais pas sensible a vos bont^s passees, je ne me serais pas D 2 30 DES ADJECTIFS DE DIMENSION. interess^ pour vous.- — Celui qui a I'esprit trouble n'est ni propre ni enclin k remplir son devoir. — On m'a dit que vous ^tes de- venu amoureux de M^''^ g*** . jg vous en felicite. — Cette jeune personne est remplie des plus grands talens, et elle est extr^me- ment desireuse deseperfectionner dans tout ce qu'elleentreprend. — Elle est habile ^ tout faire, et affable envers tout le monde. — Les soldats, dej^ animus d'un beau zele pour leur patrie, etaient encore excites au combat par le son des instrumens guerriers. — II faut etre civil envers vos domestiques, si vous voulez qu'ils vous respectent.— De m^me que I'esprit n'est pas coraparable avec la matiere, ainsi les biens de ce monde ne sont pas comparables k ceux de I'eternite. — Qu'il sera consolant pour moi de revoirraes enfans ! — Votre fr^re est connu de tout le monde pour ne pas etre constant en amour. — Ce roi est cruel a son pays; cruel envers ses enfans. — II commen^a par negligerl'etude; peu k peu, il devint dissolu dans ses moeurs ; il s'endurcit dans le crime ; envisagea, d'un air d'in- souciance, les revers de la fortune ; et se montra m^me indifierent contre Tadversite. — L'Angleterre n'est pas si fertile en ble, en vin et en fruit, que la France et I'ltalie. — lis sont si fideles k leur roi que rien ne les portera jamais k agir contre rhonneur.— Cette dame n'est pas fiddle en ses promesses.- — Je suis fatigue de courir.— Le plus heureux en amour n'est pas toujours le plus tranquille. — Pour- quoi ^tes-vous si impatient de la voir.'' — JVP^^^ j^*** o^ ^^^ long-tems inconsolable de la perte de son amant, quoiqu'il lui fAt tres-inferieur en science, en talens, en vertus et en richesses. — Elle est tres- inqui^te sur cette affaire. — Nous sommes inquiets de ne pas rece- voir de ses nouvelles.— Le vice est tres-ingenieux k se deguiser, et souvent sous les formes les plus trompeuses. — II s'est montre iugrat envers son bienfaiteur, ingrat a vos bontes, ingrat k votre^ amour ; mais, malheur k lui, s'il est ingrat k sa patrie. — Soyez prompt a recompenser, lent k punir, et misericordieux envers les pauvres. — La foi est aussi necessaire pour le salut, que la respiration Test k la vie. — Un fils bien eleve est reconnaissant envers ses parens de la bonne education qu'ils lui ont donnee.— Nous sommes tons respon- sables k Dieu de nos mauvaises actions. — Ce monsieur est riclie de deux cent mille francs. — II n'est pas assez severe k I'egard de ses enfans. — Toutes ses terres sont steriles en ble. — Jamais femme ne fut plus utile et plus chere k sa famille, et en meme tems plus respectee et cherie de tout le monde. Theme XLI. Gram, 227. Des Adjectifs de Dimension. La belle colonne dans la Place-Vendome, k Paris, a deux cents pieds de hauteur. — II y a dans cette maison une salle de deux cent DES DEGR^S DE SIGNIFICATION. 31 cinquante pieds de longueur, de soixante de largeur, et de trente- six de hauteur. — Ce puits aura cinq cents pieds de profondeur, sur soixante de diametre ; il sera couvert d'une maguitique pierre de marbre de dix-huit ou de dix-neuf pouces d epaisseur. — Votre cham- bre a coucher n'a pas plus de quarante-trois pieds de longueur sur vingt-et-un de largeur. — Le nouveau canal a cent pieds de largeur, et quinze ou seize de profondeur. — Je ne crois pas que le clocher de cette eglise ait plus de trois cent quatre-vingts pieds de hauteur. — Les deux fenetres sur le derriere de cette chapelle out chacune soixante-dix-sept pieds onze pouces de hauteur, sur vingt-quatre de largeur. — J'ai vu, en Amerique, un pont de ferde soixante-treize pieds de largeur; il est compose de vingt piles, de dix-sept grandes arches, et de deux petites : les quatre piles du milieu ont chacune vingt-quatre pieds de largeur; toutes les autres diminuent en largeur d'un pied et demi de chaque cote. — Le palais du roi a cent dix pieds de hauteur, quatre cents de longueur, sur deux cents de largeur, — Cette rue a environ un mille de longueur, et quatre-vingt-dix pieds de largeur. — Nous avons dans notre jardin, a la carapagne, un ^tang qui a six cent douze pieds de longueur, quatre-vingts de lar- geur, et trente-huit de profondeur. Theme XLII. Gram, page 229. Des Degrts de Signification. S'il est aussi facile de faire le bien que de faire le mal, pourquoi ne vous conduisez-vous pas raieux? — Les grands talens sont de toute condition, et s'ils ne brillent pas si communement dans le bas peuple que dans les autres classes, c'est faute de soin et d'etre cultives. — Quoique je n'aie pas autant d'amis que son frere, j'ai reussi beau- coup mieux que lui. — On dit que M^^'^ Q*** ^g^ plus grande que toutes ses soeurs de toute la tete. — 11 y a des personnes qui ecrivent mieux qu'elles ne parlent, et d'autres qui parlent mieux qu'elles n'ecrivent. — Je me porte inliniment mieux que quand j'etais sur le continent — La religion enseigne qu'il est plus grand de vaincre ses passions que de conquerir des nations enti^res. — Quant k moi, je crois qu'il est plus facile de commander que d'obeir. — Plus je suis dans la societe de ces dames, plus je les hais. — Moins vous etudierez, moins vous profiterez. — 11 ne sera jamais riche, parce que plus il gagne d'argent, plus il fait de depenses. — Plus on est eleve en dignite, moins on doit avoir d'orgueil. — N'est-il pas Evident que plus le jour est court, plus la nuit est longue ? 32 DES PRONOMS — LUI, ELLE, EUX, ET LE, LA, LES. Theme XLIII. Gram, page 230. Ohservations sur Us Pronoms lui, elle, eux. Je I'ai beaucoup bl^m6, lui et sa m^re, d'avoir pris cette liberty. ' — 11 ne veut la voir, ni eile ni son frere, k cause de leur raalhonn^- tete k son ^gard.— Je les hais, et je les hairai toujours, eux, et tous leurs amis.— On vous a vus, ensemble, vous et M^^^^ S***. — Je vous aurais ecrit, k vous et k sa sceur, quand j'etais en France, si je n'avais pas ete ob!ig6 de revenir si soudainement en Angleterre, -—Elle etait de si mauvaise humeur qu'elle ne voulut nous parler, ni ^lui, ni^ moi.— Nous vous en enverrons, a vous et k eux. — Le climat de ce pays est si doux, que je lui suis redevable du reta- blissement de ma sante.— M*^^^^ ^***^ approchez-vous du feu, Vous etes bien honnete, Madame; je suis tout aupres. — La chute de i'eau de cette riviere fait tant de bruit, qu'eile rend sourds ceux qui demeurent aupres. — Savez-vous ou est la tresorerie de Londresl Oui, je le sais. — Eh bien, vous trouverez aisement votre cherain ; aupres, est le palais d'York ; tout aupres, est la garde a cheval, et vis-^-vis, est la chapelle royale oii vous voulez aller. — lis se declarerent unanimement contre. — La Suisse est un pays charmant; y avez-vous jamais ete ] — Non ; mais j'ai intention d'y aller cet ^t6, si mes affaires me le permettent. Theme XLIV. Gram, page 232. Difficulte touchant les Pronoms le, la, T, les, eclaircie. Est-ce la votre chapeau? — Oui, ce Test.— Cette demoiselle n'est- elle pas la cousine de Monsieur S***? — Non, Monsieur, elle ne Test pas. — Sont-ce la vos filies? Oui ; ce les sont.— Ne sont-ce pas 1^ vos chevaux?— Non ; ce ne les sont pas. — Est-ce la la maison de M. K***? — Non; ce ne Test pas. — Je croyais que c'etait 1^ votre voiture? — Non, Madame, c'est celle de notre amie M"™^ L**. — Vos sceurs sont-elles mariees?— L'ainee Test, et la cadette le sera bientot. — Etes-vous enrhume? Oui, je le suis. — Y eut-il jamais une femme plus raalheureuse, et traitee avec plus de mepris que je le suis? — On m'avait dit que M™^ VY*** etait morte, cepen- dant elle ne Test pas.-~M^"^ R*** est-elle riche? — Non, elle ne Test pas. — Cette pauvre enfant a et6 long-terns malade, et je crains bien qu'elle ne le soit toute sa vie. — Pourquoi etes-vous si jaloux d'elle? — Si j'etais a votre place, je ne le serais pas du tout. — Votre m^re est-elle encore indisposee? — Oui, Monsieur, elle lest — Mesdames, ^tes-vous parentes de M*"- le Colonel D***? — Oui, Monsieur, nous le sommes.-- Cette famille etait fort estimee, il y a deux ou trois ans ; mais elle ne Test pas autant k present.— Croyez- vous que M*^- et M™^ JS*** envoient leur fils en France? — Oui; je DES PRONOMS — MOI-MEME, TOT-MEME, ETC. 33 le crois. — Avez-vous vu les Demoiselles F * * * depuis leur retour de la campagne? — Non; je ne les ai pas vues. — Voulez-vous avoir la bont6 de leur parler pour moi?— Oui; je le ferai avec plaisir. — N'oubliez pas de leur parler du retour de mon oncle. — ISon ; je ne I'oublierai pas. — Vos soeurs iront-elles k la carapagne, cette annee ? — Oui; je crois qu'elles iront. — Serez-vous, demain, chez vous? — Non, je ne crois pas que j'y sois. Theme XLV. Gram, page 234. Des Pronoms moi-meme, toi-meme, ^c. Quelque courageux qu'un homrae soit, il ne doit pas s'exposer au danger sans necessite. — Je me flatte que vous suivrez le conseil que je vous donne, et que vous ne vous attirerez jamais le reproche de vous en etre ecarte, — II arrive souvent qu'en se louant, on medit d'autrui. — Cette malheureuse femoje se tua. — Si vous vous louez tant, personne ne vous croira. — Chacun agit pour soi.— On ne doit jamais parler de soi qu'avec modestie. — Quiconque n'aime que soi, ne merite pas d'etre aime. — Chacun n'a-t-il pas pour soi un ceil de complaisance ? — Personne n'est raecontent de soi, pour avoir fait une bonne action. — Heureux I'homme qui n'est comptable qu'k soi de ses actions et de ses plaisirs. — II depend toujours de soi d'agir honorablement. — Excuser en soi les fautes qu'on ne saurait souffrir dans les autres est une marque de petitesse d'esprit.— Cette demoi- selle a bonne opinion d'elle-meme. — Ces dames parlent trop avan- tageusement d'elles-memes. — L'amour propre dirige tout k soi. — Tout ce qui est bon en soi, n'est pas toujours approuve. — 11 se pent faire que ce remede soit innocent en soi, cependant je ne le prendrai pas. — Avez-vous vu cela vous-m^me ? Oui; je I'ai vu, de mes propres yeux. — He bien, je voudrais le voir moi-m^me, avant de le croire. — £lle I'a fait elle-m^me. Theme XLVI. Gram, page 238. Places respectives des Pronoms Personnels, Sont-ce la des peches ou des pavies ? Ce sont des p^ches. — Voulez-vous ra'en donner ? Oui ; avec plaisir. — 11 n'est pas certain queM^- H*** ait refuse sa fille k M^* le Colonel U***; mais, quand il la lui aurait refusee, ii ne s*ensuit pas qu'il voulut vous la donner. — Tranquillisez-vous, j'y serai en tems. — Etes-vous bien siftr que M'"^ S*** y soit aussi? II n'y a pas le moindre doute. — Si vos soeurs veulent me preter leur guitare, ce soir, je la leur rendrai demain.— Oii est la grammaire Francaise de vos cousines ? La yoici. — Quand la leur renverrez-vous ? La semaine prochaine. — 34 REP]ETITION DES PRONOMS PERSONNELS. Cette rnaison est si respectable, que, si j'avais de I'argent k ma disposition, je I'y placerais. — M^^^^ j)*** trouve ces bracelets superbes, vous devriez lui en faire present. Non, certainement, je ne lui en ferai pas present ; et pourquoi lui en ferais-je present ? — Quand vous verrez les Demoiselles T** *, dites-leur que j'ai acbet6 deux beaux tableaux. — Montrez-les-moi. — Ne les lui mon- trez pas. — Si ma sceur teraoigne le d^sir de lire ce livre, ne le lui pr^tez pas, de crainte qu'elle ne le g^te ; raais vendez-le-lui, et elle en aura bien soin. — Aussit6t que vous aurez des m^mes prunes, que vous me vendites I'autre jour, envoyez-m'en. — Vos voisins ont besoin de cafe ; achetez-leur-en. — S'ils ne saventpas o^ jedemeure, De le ieur dites pas.— Les demoiselles G *** vont-elles aux courses d'Epsom ? — Pas que je sache. — Ne les y accompagnez pas. — Que votre frere les y m^ne, s'il veut. — Menez-y-moi avec vous. — Dites- le-lui. — Ne m'en parlez plus. — Qui vous a donne ces oranges? — Votre frere nous les a envoyees.— Qui les lui avait donnees ? 11 ne nous I'a pas dit.— Quelle belle pomme ! — Donnez-la-moi. — Ne la Ieur donnez pas. — Prenez-la, et la mangez. — Aimez vos ennemis, et Ieur faites du bien quand vous le pouvez. — Vous avez une belle montre d'or, qui vous est inutile ; vendez-la moi, ou me la donnez. — Ne Ieur pardonnez pas, mais punissez les sur-le-champ. Theme XLVlf. Gram, page 240. Repetition des Pronoms Personnels. Tout le monde dit queje suis amoureuxde M^^^^O*** ; cependant cela n'est pas; car je ne I'aime ni ne la hais. — Comnient trouvez- vous ces dames? Elles ne me plaisent ni ne me deplaisent. — Nous ne les louons ni oe les blaraons. — Cette femme est d'une bizarrerie inconcevable; d'un moment k I'autre, elle veut et elle ne veut pas. — Vous dites cela, mais vous ne le croyez pas. — Je vous assure queje le crois et le croirai toujours. — Elle a des adorateurs, et elle n'a pas un ami. — 11 est arriv6 ce matin, etil repartira ce soir. — Je I'aime, je Thonore, et je la respecterai toujours. — 11 prit les villes les plus fortes, ccnquit les provinces les plus considerables, et renversa les empires les plus puissarss.— Je soutiens et je soutien- drai toujours qu'eile avait tort. — Evitez I'ivrognerie ; elle abrutit Tentendement, ternit la reputation, et consume le corps. — lis m'ecri- virent, il y a environ deux mois, qu'ils avaient vu ma mere, mais qu'ils ne lui avaient pas parie. — ^Nous irons, vous et moi. — Vous et ^eiie g***^ vous ctes Ics seulcs personnes queje eonnaisse ici. — II faut que ce soit vous ou votre frere qui avez pris ma raontre. — Je sais que vous et votre cousin vous vous moquiez de moi. — Ni lui ni moi n etions presens. — Le monsieur avec lequel vous et votre fiUe ^tiez, est une de mes connaissances.— Je m'etonne que vous et lui. DES PRONOMS POSSESSIFS. 35 vous fr^uentiez cette personne. — Elle ne finira jamais cette broderie; car elle la fait et la defait vingt fois par jour. — Je veux les voir, les prier, les presser, les importuner, les flechir. TheQie XLVIII. Gram, page 242. Regies particulitres des Pronoms possessifs. ^ Le bottier qui demeure au coin de la rue eut un accident f^cheux, il y a deux ans ; notre voiture lui passa malheureusement sur te corps, lui cassa la cuisse gauche, et lui meurtrit beaucoup I'epaule droite. — Ne faites pas tant de bruit, vous me fendez la tete. — Votre frere etait tres en coJere centre moi, parce que je lui avais marche sur le pied. — Un boulet de canon leur emporta, a tous les deux, le bras gauche en meme terns. — Ne me pressez pas la main si fort, vous me faites furieusement mal aux doigts. — Dites-leur que, s'ils reviennent jamais ici, je leur casserai le cou. — Prenez garde de lui faire mal aux yeux.— Mr. A* * craint qu'on ne soit oblige de lui couper le pouce. — Je m'enrhumai, et je perdis en- tierement la voix. — Mon pere tomba hier sur la glace, et se fit tr^s-grand mal au dos et a la tete. — A la bataille de Waterloo, notre General rejut un coup de feu k la jambe droite, un autre k I'epaule gauche: ^ force de soin et d'attention, on lui sauva la jambe, mais il fallut lui faire une incision a I'epaule. ~Ne vaudrait- il pas mieux, pour un homme de probite, perdre la vie, que I'honneur par une action crirninelle? — Je crois qu'elie a perdu I'esprit. — Quand ce vertueux officier eut perdu la jambe, a la bataille de Wagram, il leva les yeux et les mains au ciel, et remereia Dieu de lui avoir conserve la vie. — Le Prince de *** u'eut-il pas la tete tranchee pour avoir assassine son frere? Non ; c'etait pour avoir attente k la vie du roi.— Sa ni^ce ment toutes les fois qu'elie cuvre la bouche. — Les habitans de ce pays sont si superstitieux, que je me rappelle d'avoir vu, un Dimanche, dans un temple magnifique, plusieurs mille personnes, les yeux baisses, pendant plus d'une heure et demie, toutes intimement persuadees que Dieu eiait present, et qu'il leur parlait dans la personne de leur pretre. — Je vois que mon pied commence k s'enfler; je desespere qu'il se guerisse jamais. — Si vous touchez ce couteau, vous vous couperez certainement les doigts. — AUez d'abord vous laver les mains, puis venez vous chauffer les pieds. — Je me cassai le bras en cherchant k sauver un enfant qui se jeta par la fenetre d'une maison qui etait en feu. — Donnez-moi mes bas que vous avez raccoramodes. — Ou avez-vons mis mes tablettes que j'ai apport^es de France? — Vous les avez mises dans votre poche quand vous ^tes sorti, cette apres-midi. — Cette petite fille ne sait-elle pas que c'est k moi il commander et k elle d'obeir? — Ce pauvre homme, en 1 36 DES PRONOMS DEMONSTRATIFS. executant un beau concerto de sa composition, fut frappe d'apo- plexie, etoiourut subiteraent. — J'ai souvent entendu dire k Meiie^*** qu'elle a une belle terre sur le continent; j'aimerais bien k savoir o\X c'est. — Vous ne devriez pas vous m^ler de cela, parce que cela ne vous regarde pas. Theme XLXIX. Gram, page 245. Cas oil Von doit se servir de son^ sa, ses, et de en. Chaque pays a ses usages, ses lois et ses prejuges. — Je re- gretterais beaucoup de quitter la France, sans avoir vu Paris, ses th6itres, ses edifices et ses amusemens. — Richmond et ses environs pr^sentent k Tosil la plus belle perspective que j'aie jamais vue.- C'est ^ cause de son climat, de son sol et de ses productions, que la France est tant admir^e des Strangers. — Nous etions en Angle- terre, quand la Tamise se deborda et inonda toute cette partie de la campagne : I'eau etait si haute et si rapide, que, dans son cours, elle entraina plusieurs maisons et plusieurs arbres. — La guerre n*a-t- elle pas sa theorie et ses principes, comme les autres sciences?— Aussit6t que Salomon se fut abandonne a I'amour des femmes, son esprit baissa, son coeur s'afFaiblit, et sa piete degenera en idol^trie. — Cette ville serait un lieu charmant, si les rues n'en etaient pas si etroites, et les maisons si hautes ; ses batimens reguliers me plaisent beaucoup, et ses paisibles habitans sont fort aimables.- Londres est la plus grande ville de TEurope; la situation en est agreable, et tres-commode pour le commerce ; les maisons en sont de brique et extremement propres; les places et les rues en sont grandes et belles, et les pares iramenses. — Ce pecher n'est pas tr^s-beau ; mais le fruit en est delicieux. — Je ne prendai point cette m^decine ; j'en connais trop bien la force et les effets. — De m^me que tous ceux qui lisent le Paradis Perdu de Milton ne sont pas toujours capables d'en sentir les beautes, ainsi la plupart des Strangers qui vont aux tragedies de Hacine, a Paris, ne sauraient en appr^cier la sublimite. — J'aime beaucoup Vauxhall, et j'y me- nerais souvent mes enfans, si I'indecence et la vulgarite n'y avilis- saient les amusemens et les plaisirs. Theme L. Gram, page 249. Ragles particulieres des Pronoms demonstratifs. Une petite chaumiere et quelques meubles, c'est 1^ toute sa fortune. — J'ai maintenant deux choses en vue, c'est de me marier et de me retirer k la campagne. — C'est fort bien pense. — Ce sera tres-mal administre. — On m'a dit que vous avez intention d'envoyer REGLES PARTICULIERES DES PRONOMS RELATIFS. 37 un cartel a M""* B * * * ; si ce sont ]k vos sentimens, ce n*est pas se coiiduire en homme d'honneur. — Puisque c'est votre opinion, je suis bien f^che de i'avoir fait. — Voila une demarche bien imprudente. — II arrive souvent que ceux qui font les plus grandes protestations d'amitie sont les premiers a nous abandonner, quand nous sommes dans la peine et le besoin. — Helas! ce n'est malheureusement que trop souvent le cas. — Quand votre scEur est en societe, elle fait souvent tomber la conversation snr des sujets de litterature, afin de citer les passages les plus frappans de tel ou tel auteur. — Celui qui n'a besoin de rien est tres-heureux. — Ces bas sont tres-fins ; cependantje prendrai, de preference, ceux que vous m'avez montres d'abord. — Comme tous les enfans ne sont pas ici, je ne puis punir ceux dont vous vous plaignez. — Mettez-vous a la place de celui a qui vous voulez faire une injure. — Celles a qui je parlais, quand vous m'avez appele, sont de charmantes demoiselles. — Celui qui s^abandonne k ses passions et aux plaisirs de ce monde est bien k plaindre. — Ceux-la se trompent qui croient que le bonheur consiste dans les richesses; car ceux qui paraissent ^tre heureux ne le sont pas toujours. — Je suis siir que ceux qui se fient aux vaines promesses des hommes ne connaissent pas le coeur humain. — Toutes ces bagues sont tr^s-jolies; cependantje donne la preference a celle que votre cousine a au doigt. — Madame, laquelle de ces robes aurai-je le plaisir de vous envoyer? — Celle qu'il vous plaira. — Le bonheur eternel n'est-il pas infiniment au-dessus de celui qu'un homme pent posseder dans ce monde? — Voulez-vous de la viande ou du poisson? — Ce qu'il vous plaira. — Vous servirai-je de ceci ou de cela? — Comme il vous plaira. — II boit du rum depuis le matin jusqu'au soir, ce qui est tres-mauvais pour sa sant6. — Ce que vous dites est tr^s-vrai. — Ce qui coute peu est trop cher quand il est mauvais ou qu'il n'est d'aucun usage. — Mesdames, je sais ce dont vous vous moquez; mais je ne m'en soucie pas. — Si votre soeur savait ce k quoi elle s'expose en y allant, elle resterait ^gr- tainement chez elle. — Peut etre n'aimerez-vous point mon procede ; mais c'est 1*^ ma maniere d'agir : je dis toujours ce que je pense. — Elle sort le soir, ce qui me deplait beaucoup. — Ce qu'elle craint, c'est une rechute. — Ce qui m'attache a la vie, c'est vous. — Ce quo je sais, c'est qu'ils out gagne. — M^"^ ^ * * * j^^g ^^ \^ harpe et du piano, parle Franjais et Italien, dessine parfaitement bieu, talens qui sont xjonsideres comme tres-beaux dans une demoiselle. Theme LI. Gram, page 253. Regies pai'iiculieres des Pronoms i^elati/s. Qui etait cette dame k qui M'^* C *** vous presenta, I'autre jour? — Qui sera assez courageux pour attaquer cet animal furieux? — E ^S DES PRrONOMS INDj^FINIS. Qui trop embrasse mal areint.—Lui demanddtes-vous de qui elk voulaitparler?— Non; je ne le lui demandai pas.—Vous avez ei deux ou trois differens maitres, quel est celui dont les lecons vou<= ont fait le plus de bien?~Quelle aimable famille que la famiUe d€ K ;, 1,**%,"'^'^'^"^''^"^ ^^ M. L*** est degotontel-Quelk belle hlle elle aurait H^, si elle n'avait pas eu ce malheur!— Quel beau tableau!— Que dites-vous qu'il a perdu?— Je ne sais quoi lui dire.— Elle ne savait quoi repondre.— Quoi de plus louable dans un jeune homme que d'employer son terns k I'^tude des sciences et des arts?— Que sont les hommes devant Dieu?— Dites-leur que. s'lls veulent rester chez eux, ils auront de quoi s'amuser.— Votis connaissez ces deux families, quelle est la plus riche?— Les dames lurent admises k dix heures, apres quoi le bal commenfa— Savez- vous quelque chose k quoi il soit propre?— Faire revivre la liberte dans un pays d'o^ elle parait ^tre bannie, c'est le but oil il vise. —-D'oil vient que personne n'est content de son sort?— Le pays par oii nous pass^mes, en allant a Douleau, village d'oii I'on tire une grande quantity de charbon, est le plus fertile oil j'aie jamais voyage.— He bien ! par oh voulez-vous commencer?— Oii allez-vous <3ette apres-midi?—D'o;i vient votre soeur ?— foait-ce k ce bureau que vous vous adressdtes I'annee derniere?— Non, ce n'etait pas ici. —Ce n'est pas k vous que je parle.— C'est d'eux que j'attends cette faveur. Theme LII. Gram, page 265. Des Pronoms indefinis. Quiconque attaque la personne sacree d'un roi est coupable de haute trahison.— De qui que ce soit que vous I'ayez entendu, je ne le crois pas. — A qui que ce soit que vous vous adressiez, on vous dira la m^me chose.— Est-il venu quelqu'un me demander, au^ourd'hui? Non, Monsieur.— J'attends quelqu'un k souper, ce soir.— Voulez-vous me donner de votre nouveau miel?— Ses sceurs auront chacune dix mille livres sterling.^W faut que chacun paie pour soi.— II faut donner k chacun le sien.— C'est un dicton qui est dans la bouche de tout le monde.— II y a dans chaque plante une qualite particuli^re.— Je lui donne le^on tous les Lundis et tons les Jeudis, et je dine chez elle tous les Dimanches.— Tout homme qui preche cette doctrine est dans I'erreur.— Tout le monde cherche le bonheur, mais personne ne peut le trouver ici-bas. — Ne I'avez-vous point dit k personne ?—Avez-vous jamais vu personne de plus aimable et de plus charmant que M^"^ H * * *? Non ; et je doute que la nature ait jamais form^ rien de plus parfait. — Nous avons vu plusieurs mille personnes qui se promenaient sur le bord de la riviere.— Du grand nombre d'amis qui nous environ- nent dans la prosperity, il n'ea reste souvent pas un dans I'adversit^. DES PRONOMS INDiPINIS. 39 — RieB n'est plus eommuQ que le naotamitie; mais riea n'est plus rare qu'un veritable ami.— Cette demoiselle ne dit rien. — Je ne crois pas que rien lui soit plus agreable qu'une petite promenade apres diner. — ^11 n'y a rien de plus agreable que la societe d'une ferame aimable. — Degoiitee du monde et de ses plaisirs, elle dit adieu aux riens brillans de la cour. — Je ne sais rien de nouveau. — J'ai quelque chose de tres-joli a vous donner. — N'ayant que peu d'annees k vivre, nous devons t&eher d'en jouir, — L'amitie ne s'achete que par l'amitie. — Je n'ai vu que deux enfans. — II n'y avait dans la maison que deux ou trois chaises. — 11 ne prit qu'ua bouillon et une cotelette de mouton.-— II n'y a personne qui ne craigne la mort— II est tres-difGcile de trouver deux personnes du m^me caractere et de la m^me opinion. — Ne craignez pas de lui demander pardon, c'est la bonte meme. — Les aniraaux memes sont sensibles aux sons harmonieux des instrumens. — Les femmes et m^me les enfans furent mis a mort. — J'ai entendu dire que plusieurs de vos 61^7es n'aiment pas votre nouvelle maison. — Plusieurs le disent, et plusieurs le nient.- — C'etait une femme telle que vous.-— Tel rit aujourd'hui qui pleurera demain. — J'avais quelque chose a vous dire, mais j'ai tout-^-fait oublie ce que c'etait. — Si votre soeur a quelque chose k envoyer en France, dites-lui que je partirai apres-demain pour Paris. — Quelques talens que vous ayez, quel* ques avantages que vous teniez de la nature et de I'education, quelques perfections que vous possediez, ne vous attendez aux suflfrages que d'un tres-petit nombre d'hommes. — Quels que soient les obstacles, il faut qu'il t^che de les surmonter. — Je n'oublierai jamais ce qu'elle me dit, quels que fussent ses motifs. — Nous I'at- teindrons, quel que soit le chemiu qu'il ait pris. — Quelque habtles et quelque savans que nous soyons, ne faisons pas un vain ^talage de notre science. — Quelque puissant qu'il soit, il ne les vaincra jamais. — Toute femme qu'elle est, elle est plus forte que vous. — Quelque chose que vous entrepreniez, vous ne reussirez jamais, si vous ne prenez pas mieux vos mesures. — Elle est si paresseuse qu'elle ne s'applique k rien du tout.— Trouvez un pretexte quelcon- que pour vous excuser. — Toutes ces oranges sont pourries. — Tout son bien ne suffirait pas pour payer la moitie de ses dettes. — Toute la grandeur, toutes les richesses et tout le pouvoir de la terre ne peuvent satisfaire un esprit ambitieux. — Toute I'armee combattit pendant six heures et demie. — Combien demandez-vous pour le tout? Je ne veux pas vendre le tout. — Tout lui deplait.— lis ont tout emporte avec eux. — Tout ce qui brille n'est pas or. — Tout ce qui est eleve, vaste et profond, etend Timagination et dilate le coeur. — Tout ce qui tend a eclairer Tentendement, et a imprimer dans le coeur de bons sentimens, est desirable. — Croyez-vous tout ce qu'elle dit? Non; je n'en crois pas la moitie.. — Votre soeur fut tout abattue k cette nouvelle; cependant, tout afflige^ q^u'elle^tait. 40 ACCORD DU VERBE AVEC SON SUJET. elle me re9ut avec bont6.— Je suis tout k vous.— Les enfans, tout aimables qu lis sont, ne laissent pas d^avoir bien des defauts qu'il est essentiel de corriger.— Votre mere est toute chang^e depuis sa maladie.— J'aurai recours k vous tous.— 11 se plaint de nous tous— C etait une autre persoune.— Je suis bien aise que les autres s'amu- sent.— -Ne parlez pas mal d'autrui.— Coraportez-vous bien envers les autres, si vous voulez que les autres se coraportent bien envers vous.— Nous serions coupables de grande injustice les uns envers les autres, si nous nous laissions prevenir par les traits de ceux que nous ne connaissons pas.— II faut se secourir les uns les autres. —Votre cousin et le mien ont de grands talens; mais ils en fontl'un et I'autre un tr^s-mauvais usage.— II faut que Tun ou I'autre de vous ait casse ce plat, quoique vous ne vouliez I'avouer ni I'un ni I'autre. — Le peuples soufFrent souvent des guerres que les rois se font les uns aux autres.— Ils rapportent I'un et I'autre le m^rae fait, quoique ni I'un ni I'autre ne le croient.— Je les aimerais bien tous les deux, s'ils etaient plus attentifs k leurs etudes. — Ces deux dames sont tres-riches, et vous leur plaisez beaucoup k Tune et k I'autre. Comme vous ayez ete par les deux chemins, dites-moi quel est le plus court? — J'ai voyage par terre et par mer pendant vingt ans.— Les voyageurs, tant anciens que modernes, s'accordent a dire que c'est le pays le plus riche du monde. Theme LIII. Gram, page 273. Accord du Verhe avec son Sujet. Etait-ce vous qui vintes ici liier? — ^Non ; c'etait mon frere qui estarrive d'Amerique.— Ce n'etait pas moi qui vous jetai par terre. — Qui a fait cela? — Qui s'en vient avec moi? — Le champagne et le bourgogne sont fort agreables au goiit, maisje prefere le Madere. — L'ouvrier, le marchand, le pretre, le soldat, sont tous 6gale- raent les membres de T^tat. — Un seul mot, un soupir, un regard la trahit.— -L'amabilite, la bonte pleine de douceur de cette demoiselle, me ravit et m'enchante. — Vous et moi, nous avons tres-bien reussi. Lui et moi, nous serons associes. — Vous et elle, vous savez I'af- faire. — Vous, lui et moi, nous dinerons ensemble. — Est-ce lui ou moi qui irons? — Lui, elle, ou moi, nous viendrons. — Monsieur ou Mademoiselle le fera avec plaisir.— J'espere que I'un ou I'autre nous ^crira. — Richesses, dignites, honneurs, tout s'evanouit a la mort. — Divertissemens, plaisirs, conversations, spectacles, rien ne pou- vait tei distraire de sa profonde melancolie. — Non seulement toutes ses pierreries et tout son or, mais tout son linge fut vole.— Le nour- risson du Pinde, ainsi que le guerrier, ne prefere-t-il pas un beau laurier a tout Tor du Perou ? — Ils desirent tous les deux d'y aller; mais ils n'iront ni I'un ni I'autre. — Ni I'un ni I'autre n'ont appris leur DE L'OBJET OU DU REGIME DES VERBES. 41 le^on. — Ni I'amour ni la haine ne le touchent— Ni M'- A* * * ni M'* D*** ne sera elu Lord Maire de la ville de Londres. — Faut-U vous repeter encore que ni I'une ni I'autre n'est ma mere. — Je jure que ni lui ni moi n'y avons jamais ete. — Votre frere ne fut-il pas une des malheureuses victimes qui furent sacrifices a la vengeance du tyran 1 — C'etait un de mes plus grands ennemis qui me sauva la vie dans ce danger imminent. — Si vous pouviez lui accorder cette faveur, ce serait un des plus grands services que vous lui ayez ja- mais rendus, k lui et a sa famille. — Une bande de voleurs m'at- taquerent, il y a deux ou trois ans, et me volerent tout ce que j'avais. — Un grand nombre dejeunes gens se sont enroles volon- tairement, quoique la plupart d'entre eux aient les plus puissans motifs de rester chez eux. — Peu de gens negligent leurs inter^ts. — Une vingtaine de soldats se sont revoites. — Qu'elle foule d*horames, de femmes et d'enfans vous suivaient quand vous apportates la nouvelle de la paix. — Le nombre des victoires qu'il a gagnees est inconcevable. — Quand la grande flotte mettra-t-elle a la voile 1 — La pluralite des femmes est defendue dans ce pays. — Les arraees Franfaises ont ete long-tems victorieuses. — lis prirent conge de nous, hier. — Je n'y consentirai jamais, dit-il, k moins que je ne les accompagne. — II est arrive d'heureux changemens qui ont retabli le commerce dans uotre malheureuse ville. — Ainsi s*est terminee une guerre qui fut la cause de tant de malheurs. — Tel etait I'etat de ses affaires, quand il fut emprisonne. — Puissent tous ces enfans suivre les principes de notre sainte religion ! — Dusse-je y perir, j'irai. — Nous ecoutons avec plaisir les conseils que nous donnent ceux qui savent flatter nos passions. Theme LIV. Gram, page 277. De rObjet ou du Regime des Verhes. Que cherchez-vous 1 Je cherche mon parapluie que j'ai perdu. — 11 aime et cherit son Eloise, quoiqu'elle le gronde toujours,— Pardonnons a nos ennemis, si nous voulons que Dieu nous par- donne. — Nous ne resistons pas aisement aux attraits du plaisir.^ — Remplissez cette carafe de vin et cette bouteille d'eau. — Pourquoi vous interessez-vous pour un horarae qui vous nuirait s'il pouvait? — Frequentez la bonne compagnie, et evitez les libertins. — Par quel paquebot a vapeur etes-vous venu ?— Je suis venu par I'^fetoile ou la Venus. — Nous nous flattens que vous serez accueilli de la maniere la plus honn^te. — La religion seule pent nous faire supporter de grandes iufortunes avec patience et resignation. — Vous dites qu'il aime beaucoup sa fille ; corabien lui donnera-t-il en mariage ? — Dix ou quinze mille livres sterling. — Une demoiselle, qui est mo- deste et dont I'esprit est bien cultive, est estimee de tout le monde. E 2 42 DE L*OBJET OU DU RIIGIME DES VERBES. — II y a dix mois qu'elle languit dans I'etat le plus deplorable. — • Je ne dors jamais pendant le jour. — Ne medisons de personne; et, surtout, ne faisons tort k personne. — lis s'informerent de Tetat de votre sante, et de celle de toute votre famille. — Ne vous rejouissez pas des malheurs d'autrui. — Si vous continuez de vous raoquer de moi, je vous en ferai repentir. — EUe se reprochera son imprudence, quand il n'en sera plus tems. — N'importe-t-il pas k un pere et k une mere de veiller al'education de leurs enfaus ? — Sous Napoleon, les Fran^ais etaient redoutes de leurs voisins. — Son plan est approuve de tout le raonde.—^Ces fusees volantes ont ^te inventees par M'* le chevalier Congreve.- — L'Angleterre ne fut-elle pas conquise par Guillaume le conquerant, en mil soixante-six? — Vous serez puni de Dieu, si vous commettez le crime et que vous meprisiez la Tertu. — Le ciel, la terre, l6s animaux, les reptiles et les pois- sons, ont ^te cr^es par Dieu. — Le temple de Jerusalem fut detruit, malgr6 les defenses de Titus, et il n'en resta pierre sur pierre. — J'accepte, avec beaucoup de plaisir, votre aimable invita- tion, et je serai chez vous, demain soir, k six heures. — Je me flatte que vous n'avez rien ordonne expres pour moi. — Non ; nous vous repevous en ami, sans ceremonie.— Ne me refusez pas cette faveur. — N'avez-vous point retrouve les cuillers qui vous manquaient, I'autre jour ? Non ; et je soupfonne la servante de les avoir prises. — Pourquoi Jacques rougit-il, quand vous lui dites que vous aviez ete vole 1 Je ne sais pas, — Aussit6t que j'aurai fini ma lettre, je vous montrerai les jolies choses que j'ai. — lis m'ont accable de reproches, quoique je ne le merite pas. — Vous devriez exclure cette femme de votre societe. — Lui avez-vous fait part de votre dessein t Oui. — Ne montrez pas de deplaisir k son frere. — On a ote k mon pere tout son bien. — II punit la religion catholique des attentats de ses ministres, et, en moins de deux ans, il rendit la Suede Luth^- rienne. — Nous attendons une lettre de France, cette semaine.— Elle m'a envoyemille livres sterling pour placer dans les trois pour cent. — Expliquez-moi cette difficulte, etje serai content. — 'Epargnez-nous la peine d'y retourner. — Qu'il me trouve une place.— Reraettons cette affaire a la Providence. — Ne me reprochez pas si souventcette bagatelle. — Ne leur donnez pas leur ration, demain. - Quel papier desirez-vous ? — Du papier k lettres, s'il vous plait. — ^Quelle excuse a-t-il apportee ? — De quel cheval me parliez-vous] — A qui me fierai- ie, si vous me trompez ? — Quelle promesse vos soeurs ont-elles faite ^k JVP- L***? — a qui s'adressa-t-il d'abord ?— M"-* D*** vous a-t-il enseigne le Franjais ? — Reportez cette lettre a M'^"^ E***, et jui dites que j'attribue sa misere actuelle k son extravagance. — Etait-ce a moi, ma chere, que vous vouliez parler?— Le sage sacrifie ses plaisirs a son devoir; mais le fou neglige son devoir pour ses plaisirs. ^ — Les hypocrites s'etudient k parer des dehors de la vertu les vices les plus honteux et les plus decries. — Quand il DU REGIME DES VERBES. 4S eut tir6 de sa femme toutes ses pierreries et tout son argent, il I'abandonna, elle et ses enfans. — Nous allons deraciner et abattre cet arbre.— II lui est si attach^ et si devoue. — Elle obeitetdesobeit, tour-^-tour, a ses maitres. — Celui qui est utile et cher a sa patrie est digne d'envie. — Si I'Empereur avait su connaitre cette position, et qu'il s'en ftit empare, il n'aurait pas perdu la bataille. Theme LV. (No. 1.) Gram, page 2S0. Du rtgime des Verbes. Ceux qui pretendent ^tre savans sont souvent tres-ignorans. — Quelque riche que vous soyez, si vous ne savez mettre des bornes k vos desirs, vous ne serez jamais content. — J'aurais ete la voir, la semaine derni^re, si je n'avais pas ete si indispose. — lis devraient sortir tons les jours. — II faut laisser les autres penser et agir comme il leur plait. — £lle est si cruelle et si vindicative que je n'ose lui parler. — Si je vous entends jamais lui dire des injures, une autre fois, je vous renverrai certaineraent. — II faut pratiquer la vertu. — Allcz demander permission de sortir. — lis ne daignerent pas me r^pondre. — II vaut mieux gagner peu que rien. — Pretendez-vous toujours m'insulter de la sorte ? — Trop manger et trop boire sont nuisibles a la sante. — Trop parler epuise. — Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux mourir que de languir comme je fais. — Je viens de faire visit© k LordD***. — Quand viendrez-vous me voir, que je vous montre ma b^lle harpe ? — S'il vient k pleuvoir, que ferez-vous 1 — lis etaient sur le point d'en venir aux mains. — Pretend-il encore a cet emploi? — Non ; il a achete une commission dans I'armee. Theme LV. (No. 2.) Gram, page 282. Du regime des Verhes. Cette maison est-elle a loner on k vendre ? — Votre fils passe tout son tems a jouer. — Les raathematiques sont-elles faciles k ap- prendre ? — Elle aime k soulager les pauvres, et k consoler les affliges. — Ces noix ne sont pas bonnes k manger. — On lui donna k entendre qu'il voulait Tepouser, et on I'exhorta k encourager ses visites. — Elle se plait k dire du mal de tout le monde. — Aiclez-moi k porter ce fardeau. — Tout le monde est sujet a se tromper. — Aussitot qu'elle me vit, elle se mit k pleurer. — Enseigne-t-il k lire et k ecrire ? — lis ont ete condamnes k payer tons les frais. — Je I'in- vitai une fois k diner chez moi, mais il ne vint pas. — Elle est ac- coutumee a souper de bonne heure, et k se coucher, tous les soirs, k dix heures. — Je le soupconne d'aimer k boire et a jouer.— Ce livre est tr^s-facile k entendre, mais difScile k traduire en Franfais. — Apprenez-vous a monter a cheval ? Non; mais j'ai intention de 44 DU REGIME DES VERBES. commencer bient6t.— Si vous continuez de la voir, vous lui plairez bientot. — Je ne voudrais pas m'abaisser a lui demander pardon.— Nous ne nous attendions pas k partir avant deraain. — Elle s'amuse ^jouer de la harpe du matin jusqu'au soir. — line consentira jamais a ce mariage, avant qu'elle ne soit majeure. — Etes-vous pret k sortir? — Je n'ai point de temsaperdre. — Nous serons toujours bieo aises de vous voir. Theme LV. (No. 3.) Gram, page 287. Du regime des Verhes. II ne disconvient pas de I'avoir dit. — Elle m'a menace de le dire k mon pere. — J'ai Thonneur de boire k votre sante. — Elle a honte d'avoir avance une faussete. — On m'a accus6 de les avoir voles.— II s'aper9ut du piege qu'on lui avait tendu. — Puisqu'il vous a defendu de la revoir, vous ferez mieux de cesser d'aller chez elle. — Elle me pria de Taccompagner k Top^ra. — N'etiez-vous pas tres- surpris d'entendre une personne si bien 61evee tenir un tel langage? — Ne n^gligez pas de lui ^crire. — Vous m'avez promis de me con- duire k Yauxhall ; quand remplirez-vous votre promesse '? — Ne rougissez-vous pas de I'avoir si grossierement insultee ? — Je fus somme de comparaitre devant le tribunal le 10 d'Aotit. — Dep^chez- vous d'apprendre votre le^on. — Je suis ennuye de repeter si sou- vent la m^me chose. — Qui ne s'impatienterait pas d'attendre si long-temsl — Elle se m^le toujours des affaires d'autrui. — Avez- vous intention d'aller en France cet 6te? — Avez-vous peur du ton- nerre? — Ne diff^rez pas davantage de leur ecrire. — Dites-lui de revenir dans une demi-heure. — T^chez de plaire k tout le monde. — Ne promettez jamais de faire une chose, quand il n'est pas en votre pouvoir de la faire. — Nous lui conseill-^mes de se raettre a I'abri de la pluie, mais elle ne voulut pas. — Son mari la bl4ma beaucoup de s'^tre ainsi exposee k un danger si imminent. — Elle ne cessait de lui repr^senter qu'il avait tort. — Fourquoi I'emp^cheriez- vous de rester ici? — Nous sommes epuises de fatigue. — Nous vous avons bien des obligations de vous ^tre interesse pour nous. — Je suis tres-flatte de I'honneur que vous me faites. — 11 est indigne de cette recompense. — II ne vous appartient pas de me dieter ce que je dois dire. — A qui appartient cette montre ? A mon frere. — Vous ne sauriez croire combien elle craintde le rencontrer. — Nous serons toujours charmes de vous servir, quand I'occasion s'en presentera. — Je regretterai toute ma vie de n'avoir pas entendu ce pr^dicateur celebre. — Ce jeune homme souhaite beaucoup d'obtenir un emploi sous vous. — Je desire que vous partiez k present, de crainte qu'il ne pleuve. — Elle m'a charge de vous dire qu'elle est bien aise que vous ayez reussi. — Nous desirons bien sincerement qu'il se reta- DU REGIME DES VERBES. 45 blisse bient6t. — Votre m^decin a ordonne que vous ne buviez pas de via. — Je parie tout ce que vous voudrez, qu'il gagnera la partie. — II avait intention de ra'inviter a diner; mais, m'ayant vu passer comme il allait se mettre k dejetiner, il m'appela et me pria de dejeiiner avec lui. — Vous n'auriez pas du lui protester que vous ne I'abandonneriez jamais. — Ne vous rappelez-vous pas d'avoir trouve une fois, avec moi, un nid de bouvreuils? — Oui; je me rappelle fort bien cette circonstance; et, quoique nous fussions alors tres- jeunes, je me souviens que je vous trouvai charmante. Theme LV. (No. 4.) Gram, page 290. Du regime des Verbes, Men petit gar^on commence k parler et k marcher. — Si vous continuez de lui faire visite, elle continuera de vous ecrire. — Je fus contraint de me retirer. — Contraignez-le a vous payer. — C'est k vous k commander et k nous d'obeir. — N'est-ce pas a vous a nous proteger et a montrer qui nous sommes. — Je vous laisse a penser si elle avait peur de repondre, — Vous pouvez supposer qu'il ne laissa pas de profiter d'une occasion si favorable. — Je ne crois pas que, sur le tout, j'aie manque plus d'une fois a venir, quoique j'aie souvent manqu6 k apprendre mes le9ons. — Ne manquez pas de vous y trouver. — Elle manque de tout. — J'ai manque de tomber, en entrant chez vous. — Mon amitie pour vous m'oblige a vous donner un avis salutaire. — De meme que par la loi naturelle et la loi divine nous sommes obliges d'honorer nos parens ; ainsi, par la loi civile, nous sommes obliges de respecter les princes. — Vous nous obligerez infiniment de vous charger de ces marchandises, en cas que nous soyons obliges d'aller a la campagne. — J'avais oublie de vous dire que M^"^ ^ * * * gg^ mariee. — Ce pauvre jeune homme k ete si long- teras malade, qu'il a oublie non seulement k danser, mais meme k lire et a ecrire. — Ne vaut-il pas mieux s'occuper a apprendre la musiquc que de ne rien faire. — Tandis qu'il s'occupait k me tour- menter, depuis le matin jusqu'au soir, je m'occupais au succes de son entreprise. — Le plaisir de I'^me ne consiste-t-il pas k agir, et k s'occuper de quelque objet qui plaise? — Je suis tout occupe des obstacles qu'ils auront k surmonter. — Cela suffira a M'- H***; mais cela ne me suffit pas. — II suffit de lui parler quelques minutes, pour ^tre convaincu que la vie la plus longue de Thomme suflSt a peine pour aucun art. — Peu de choses suffisent pour vous rendre heureux. — J'ai, enfin, resolu de les poursuivre. — T^chez de d6- couvrir s'il t^che encore h me nuire. — Tachons de les rejoindre. — II me tarde de voir votre soeur ; elle tarde bien a venir. 46 DU REGIME DES VERBES. Theme LV. (No. 5.) Gram, page 294. d Du regime des Verhes, Si vous transgressez les lois de voire pays, vous serez cite devant les tiibunaux. — Approuvez-vous son procede? — EUe critique tout le monde. — J'aime beaucoup la musique le soir. — On vous a d6- nonce. — Ne regardez pas tant ces dames. — L'ont-ils chasse de leut maison? — On m'a dissuade d'entrer en society avec lui. — J'implorai son assistance, sans pouvoir I'obtenir. — lis nous ont declar6 la guerre, sans aucune raison legitime. -Vous me devezde I'argent. — ]y|r. J) * * * jjj'g^ dedie un beau poeme, sur les funestes efFets de ratheisme.— Agreez que je vous pr^sente ce diamant comme un tribut de reconnaissance pour vos bont^s passees euvers moi. — Marie a-t-elle 6t6 les chaises de la chambre k coucher? — J'espere que vous ne revelerez ce secret k personne. — Rapportez-moi le livre que je vous ai pr^te. — II applaudit a tout ce qu'elle dit, et il condescend k tons ses d^sirs. — Je ne sais comment obvier k cette difficulte. — Elle a une si bonne constitution qu'elle survivra k tous ses enfans. — N'insultons pas a la misere d'autrui. — Obeissez k vos superienrs. — Cette rue aboutit k St. Paul. — II ressemble k un aveugle qui soutient que le blanc est noir. — Remediez k ces maux. — Gu'^taTC Vasa ne fut-ilpas reduitk la necessite de travailler dans les mines de cuivre pour vivre et pour se cacher? — Les dames Anglaises aiment beaucoup k jouer aux cartes. — II jouait du violon. — Personne n'etait fort ^difie de son sermon. — lis sont, enjSn, rassasies de sang et de carnage. — Je n'en suis pas du toutsurpris.— Qui heritera de ses biens immenses? — Dieu merci! elle jouit d'une bonne sante. — lis profitent des malheurs d'autrui,— Vous vous aper^evrez de votre erreur, quand il n'en sera plus tems, — 11 faut que nous nous accommodions de ces deux chambres pour quelque tems. — Ne vous approchez pas si pres du feu, de crainte de vous briiler. — lis se consolerent bientot de la perte de leur mere. — ^Des armies etrangeres se sont emparees de notre territoire. — Nous sommes tres-inquiets de ne pas recevoir de ses nouvelles. — Elle se saisit de mon ^pee, et la lui aurait passee au travers du corps, si je ne I'avais pas retenue. Theme LV. (No. 6.) Gram, page 296. Du regime des Verbe s. Nous n'avons pas un coeur pour nous hair les uns les autres. — Palamede inventa le jeu des tehees pour servir d'amusement k ses soldats, et pour leur apprendre les stratagemes de la guerre. — M'* S*** a joue ce tour k votre soeur pour lui faire peur. — Nous sommes n6s pour travailler, et pour glorifier Dieu. — Combien de- mandez-vous pour y aller? -11 fut pendu pour avoir assassin^ son DU SUBJONCTIF ET DE SON EMPLOI. 47 pere. — Je I'ai dit pour badiner. — Nous irons a Londres, afin de pou- voir dire que nous I'avons vu. — S'ils viennent, je leur donnerai une bonne place, afin qu'ils puissent bien entendre. — Vous de- vriez donner des prix a vos eleves pour les encourager. — II etudie ces sciences, plus pour discourir et briller dans le monde, que pour eclairer et cultiver son esprit. — II y a un terns pour travailler et un terns pour se reposer. — II fera tout son possible pour vous obliger. — EUe est trop faible pour supporter une si grande fatigue. — II n'a pas assez de credit pour obtenir cette place. — Je suis bien f^che qu'il n'y eut personne chez moi pour vous recevoir. — lis n'avaient pas assez de troupes pour bloquer la ville par mer et par terre, — On trouve des remedes pour guerir la folic, mais on n'en trouve point pour guerir de I'amour. Theme LVf. Gram, page 303. Du Suhjonctif et de son Emploi. Je m'6tonne que vous lui ayez ecrit. — II est ravi que cela soit ainsi. — Nous sonimes bien f^ches que ce malheur vous soit arrive. — Je ne savais pas que vous fussiez amis. — N'etes-vous pas tres-fache qu'elle soit morte ? — Pourquoi croyez-vous que M'* I'ambassadeur «e viendra pas? — Croyez-vous que les Franpais donnent I'assaut k la ville, si elle ne capitule pas ? — Je tremble que le gouverneur ne voie tout ^ feu et a sang, avant qu'il ne se rende. — Si vous vous apercevez que les enfans volent ie fruit, donnez-m'en avis. — Pre- tendez-vous qu'elle lui renvoie ces boucles d'oreilles? — Nous n'en- tendons pas que vous fassiez de depenses pour nous, par la ra^me raison que vous ne voulez pas que nous en fassions pour vous. — Au son de la voix et de I'instrument, j'entends que c'est ma soeur qui chante et qui joue. — Savez-vous que M^^'^ £»** est mariee? — Oui ; je le sais. — Vous ai-je dit que les fonds d'Espagne sont beaucoup plus haut aujourd'hui? — Oui; vous me I'avez dit. — Est-ce qu'elle est morte? — Si votre frere desire d'etre estime, il faut qu'il soit obligeant, poli et affable envers tout le monde.^ — II est juste que les lois soient observees. — II serait injuste qu'un vil assassin ne iht pas puni. — II est evident qu'elle a tort. — II n'est pas probable qu'ils revienuent avant Tannic prochaine. — II me sem- ble qu'il ne peut y avoir de plus grande jouissance que celle de rendre les autres heureux. — Vous semblait-il qu'il fut tres-assidu aupres d'elle? — II me semblait qu'elle marchait. — II ne me semble pas qu'on puisse penser differemment.— II semblerait que les Franfais voulussent faire la paix.— Je ne vous pardonnerai pas A raoins que vous ne me promettiez de vous mieux conduire k i'avenir. — Emportez ce livre, de crainte que ma soeur ne le lise.— L'eclair ne parait-il pas ordinairement, avant qu'on n'entende le 48 DU SUBJONCTIF ET DE SON EMPLOI. tonnerre? — Je ne vous demaude rien sinon que vous ayez soin de vos enfans, et que vous leur inculquiez de bonne heure des senti- mens d'honneur et de delicatesse. — Votre fille se conduit de maniere qu'elie gagne I'estime de tout le monde.— Aussit6t que je serai a la campagne et que j'aurai une occasion, je vous enverrai du fruit. — Si mince qu'il puisse ^tre, un cheveu fait de Tombre. — Eiie n'est pas si sotte qu'elie ne s'aper^oive bien que vous voulez i'insulter. — Si votre soeur prend regulierement ses lepons, et qu'elie etudie, en outre, deux ou trois beures par jour, elle fera de grands progres. — Je crois que la coraparaison la plus juste qu'on puisse faire de Tamour, est celle d'une fievre.— Qui sont les deux plus grands hommes que I'Angleterre ait produits?--Sa cousine est la plus belle demoiselle qu'on puisse voir. — Est-ce Ih le seul que vous ayez? — Oui, ce Test. — C'est la premiere fois que je me sois trompe. — Quelque ingenieux qu'ils fussent, ils ne purent pas decouvrir le plan que j'avais suivi. — II n'y a personne qui ne fi^t tres-f^che, s'il savait tout ce qu'on pense de lui. — J'ai besoin d'une carafe qui contienne trois pintes de vin. — Si je me remarie, je prendrai une demoiselle qui ait beaucoup d'argent. — Que je meure sur le lieu, si je vous ai dit une fausset^. — JFasse le ciel que cela arrive! — Puissiez-vous vivre heureux ensemble, plusieurs annees. — Lui derive qui voudra! — Dieu m'en preserve ! — Je ne sacbe rien de plus avantageux pour vous et votre fr^re. — Le tailleur m'a-t-il envoys mon habit? — Pas que je sacbe. — Je ne crois pas que les Fran9ais reussissent en Espagne, si les Espagnols sont fideles k leur roi et k leur constitution. — Nous ne soup^onnions pas qu'ils eussent com- mence les fortifications sit6t. — Talma estle meilleur acteur tragique que la France ait eu depuis long-tems. — II est douteux qu'aucun philosophe ait jamais explique d'une maniere satisfaisante la presci- ence de Dieu. — Je craignais fort qu'il ne le dit k sa mere. — Qui aurait pu croire que I'Empereur se ftit soumis k des conditions si deshonorantes? — Quoiqu'elle soit tres-jeune et tres-belle, je ne I'aime point du tout. — Le Bellerophon est le plus grand vaisseau qu'on ait jamais construit en France. — Quelques richesses que nous ayons, nous ne sommes jamais contens. — A moins qu'un livre ne soit amusant, je ne me soucie pas de le lire. — II n'y a point de chagrin que le tems, k la fin, n'adoucisse.— N'y etiez-vous pas long-tems avant que la voiture ne ftit arrivee ? — Croyez-vous qu'elie chant^t, si je Ten priais? — Nou ; je ne crois pas qu'elie le voulut en votre presence. — Si vous croyez que les demoiselles S * * * voulussent venir en cas qu'il fit beau tems, je les inviterais. — II faut qu'il ait beaucoup gagne, pour avoir mis de c6te vingt mille francs en deux ans. — Elleasurtout recommande qu'on brfil^t toutes ses lettres et tous ses papiers, en cas qu'elie mourtit de cette maladie. DU PARTICIPE PRESENT ET DE l'ADJECTIF VERBAL. 49 Theme LVII. Gram, page 308. Du Participe present et de VAdjectif verhal. Votre scEur est uiie charmante fille ; qu'elle est obligeante ! — ^'est-ce pas 1^ une preuve convaincante des efFets surprenans de raimanf? — D'uq moment a I'autre, elle est gaie et serieuse, riant, pleurant, jasant, se taisant tour k tour, enfin chaugeant d'humeur mille fois en un jour. — Les genies rampans ne parviennent jamais au sublime. — Tout le monde ne respecte-t-il pas ces magistrats qui, oubliant leur propre inter^t, observant les lois, protegeant la vertu, et reprimant le vice, n'ont en vue que le bonheur de leur pays ? — On pent comparer la beaute a une fleur qui, s'epanouissant le matin, a I'air frais et vermeil toute la journee ; mais qui, se fanant vers le soir, perd ses belles couleurs, languit et penche sa belle tete. — Quoique cette demoiselle ne soit pas eclatante de beaute, si vous la voyiez brillant dans une compagnie par les graces de son esprit, vous trouveriez en elle raille attraits. — Cette petite fille est vraiment brillante de sante et de fraicheur. — N'en- tendiraes-nous pas, de loin, les bombes 6clatant avec un horrible fracas? — Des milliers d'ennemis, se pressant sous nos portes et fondant sur nos remparts, nous firent crier misericorde. — Ce n'est pas en nous abandonnant a nos passions que nous vivons heureux, c'est en les gouvernant. — On apprend, en enseignant les autres. — Elle a tout perdu, en perdant son pere. — Vous reussirez a la rame- ner h la raison, en prenant sur vous-m^rae, et en la traitant avec bonte. — L'etude des langues est tres-difficile. — Les nuages et les brouillards se forment des vapeurs qui s'elevent de la terre et des eaux. — J'ai vu une colorabe qui portait une lettre dans son bee. — Elle etait sur le point de ceder, quand, se rappelant soudainement sa vertu, elle se reprocba sa faiblesse. — Vous ne pouvez y aller sans desobeir k votre pere. — Ne furent-ils pas pendus pour avoir tire sur le roi? — J'ai vu ma soeur qui jouait aux cartes avec lui, ce qui m'a fait conclure qu'on agit souvent par des motifs qui viennent des circonstances presentes. — Ne vous ai-je pas vu courir etjouer tous ensemble? — Comme je me trouve beaucoup mieux, a present, et que j'ai intention d'aller bientot vous voir, je vous conseille de ne pas traverser la mer au milieu de I'hiver, pour veuir dans une ville oil regnent la misere et la desolation. Theme LVIII. Gram, page 314. Du Participe passe. Que de villes detruites auraient ete sauvees, si le vainqueur avait ete plus humain ! — On ne se rappelle ces batailles gagnees, ces lauriers cueillis au prix de tant de sang, qu'avec un certain F 50 DU PARTIGTFE PASSi. sentiment d'horreur qui faitfremir. — Vu les circonstances presentes, on ne pouvait attendre rien de plus avantageux. — Excepte vous et elle, ils ^taient tous malades. — Nous avons vendu tous nos chevaux, mon petit bidet excepte. — Vous trouverez ci-iuclus deux lettres, que je vous serai oblig^ de remettre k M^^^^ \y * * *, —lis allerent tous en Italie, elle et moi exceptes. — Les trois lettres de change, ci-incluses, sont-elles payables chez M. C** * dans le Strand? — Nous avons ^te dernierement si occup6s, qu'il m'a 6te impossible d'etudier mes lemons de Fran^ais.— Les mechans sont toujours tourmentes par les remords de leur conscience. — M^^^^ p*** est-elle revenue de la campagne? — Non, Monsieur, elle revient demain. — Les demoiselles sont allies a leurs lemons de danse et d'equitation. — Nous avons dine plus t6t aujourd'hui qu'a I'ordinaire. — Nous voil^ enfin arriv^s^ — lis ont choisi une occasion tres-defavorable. — Je n'ai pas vu les tableaux dont vous m'avez parle.— M^'^^A*** et M.eii* G*** m'ont paru si changees, que je ne les reconnaissais pas d'abord. — Les dan- gers qu'il a courus, lui font beaucoup d'honneur. — Je parlais six langues dans ma jeunesse, savoir, le Franfais, I'ltalien, I'Anglais, I'Allemand, TEspagnol et le Hollandais. — Loin d'etre recon- naissant des soins et des peines, detouteespece, que m'a coi&t4s son Education, il me traite avec mepris et m'evite. — Les cinq heures qu'il a dormi, ce matin, sont le seul repos qu'il ait eu depuis quinze jours..— La belle journee qu'il a fait bier! — Les pluies abondantes qu'il a fait cet ete ont entierement g^t6 la moisson. — Vous rappelez- vous les grands vents qu'il a fait, et le grand d^bordementdes eaux qu'il y a eu, au commencement de I'annee? — Les lettres que nous avons re9ues, aujourd'hui, par la malle, confirment la capitulation de la Corogne. — Cette malheureuse banqueroute nous a un peu reduits.— J'ai lu attentivement les papiers que vous m'avez envoy6s, touchant I'affaire que je vous avais proposee, et j'ai trouve que, si je I'avais entreprise, j'aurais rencontre des obstacles que je n'avais pas prevus. — Sa soeur s'est moquee de moi pendant tout le passage. Pourquoi les dames se sont-elles enfuies aussit6t qu'elles m'ont aper^u ? — Les comptes se sont-ils irouves justes? — Vos soeurs se sont-elles beaucoup amusees dans sacompagnie? — Non; pas beau- coup. — Apres un combat long et opini^tre, ils se sont rendus mai- tres de la citadelle. — Les habitans se sont-ils rendus? — Elle s'est faite religieuse. — Pourquoi vous ^teg-vous ecarte du chemin que vous aviez commence a suivre? — Les Fran^ais se sont rendus fa- meux par leur courage dans la guerre. — lis se sont dit mille injures. — Elle s'est donne la mort. — Je ne savais pas qu'ils sefussent donn6 la peine de venir expr^s pour moi. — Si elle s'est imagine cela, je ne puis qu'y faire. — Apres qu'ils se furent long-tems parl6, ils se separ^rent sans se dire un seul mot. — lis se sont souri. — lis se sont beaucoup nui. — II n'est pas certain qu'ils se fussent succede.— Je- DU PARTICIPE PASSE. ^ suis charme qu'elle se soit chargee de lui 6crire. — Nous les avons iaiss^s quereller.— Oii sont les demoiselles que j'ai vues danser? — Voulez-vous le remercier des demarches qu'il a eu la bonte de fairs pour moi? — Les airs que j'ai entendu votre soeur chanter sont tres- beaux. — Voici les presens que vous avez refuse d'accepter. — La maison que je vous ai conseille d'acheter, est grande et bien situee, — 11 arrive souvent qu'on commetles memes fautes qu'on avait re- solu d'eviter. — Donnez-moi la lettre que je vous ai prie de traduire en Fran9ais. — Les dames que je m'etais flatte que vous verriez sont malheureusement parties pour I'Amerique. — tJne efFrayante voix s'est alors fait entendre, qui nous ajetesdans la plus grande con- sternation. — II a montre tant de hardiesse et d'intrepidite, qu'il les a fait tons s'enfuir. — Ne vous a-t-elle pas rendu tons les services qu^elle a pu? — Nous leur avons montre toute I'attention que nous avons pu. — Dites-lui qu'il aurait du m'ecrire, comme il me I'avait promis. — Combien de jours et de nuits n'ai-je pas passes a votre c6te, quand vous etiez malade! — Quelle reponse vous a-t-on faite? — La perte n'est pas si grande que je I'aurais cru, — Elle n'est pas. aussi belle que je me I'etais imagine. FIN, M.UICHANT, PRINTER^ INGRAM-COURT, FENCHURCH-STREET. LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 003 116 738 3